HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecs_Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation (2)
Addendum No 1_Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renov_1-20-2021.pdf
CORNELL UNIVERSITY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION FACILITIES CONTRACTS 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701 ADDENDUM NO. 1 January 20, 2021 This Addendum
contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with
the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any
Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply. Item 1. Section 080671 Door Hardware Schedule DELETE
in its entirety. REPLACE with Section 080671 Door Hardware Schedule, attached. Item 2. ADD Section 108211 Architectural Coiled Wire Grilles and Screens, attached Item 3. Section 237513
Air Handling Units (Custom) DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Section 237513 Air Handling Units, attached. Item 4. Drawing T-002 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing T-002,
attached. Item 5. Drawing A-101 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-101, attached. Item 6. Drawing A-111 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-111, attached. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation Addendum No. 1 January 20, 2021 Page 2 Item 7. Drawing A-141 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-141, attached. Item 8. Drawing A-301 DELETE
in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-301, attached. Item 9. Drawing A-302 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-302, attached. Item 10. Drawing A-503 DELETE in its entirety.
REPLACE with Drawing A-503, attached. Item 11. Drawing A-601 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing A-601, attached. Item 12. Drawing A-603 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with
Drawing A-603, attached. Item 13. Drawing E-200 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing E-200, attached. Item 14. Drawing E-202 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing E-202,
attached. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation Addendum No. 1 January 20, 2021 Page 3 Item 15. Drawing H-501 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing H-501, attached. Item 16.
Drawing H-700 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing H-700, attached. Item 17. Drawing H-800 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing H-800, attached. Item 18. Drawing P-100
DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with Drawing P-100, attached. Item 19. RFI Questions and Clarifications See attached RFI Log (Items 1-13) Attachments: Section 080671 Section 108211
Section 237513 Drawing T-002 Drawing A-101 Drawing A-111 Drawing A-141 Drawing A-301 Drawing A-302 Drawing A-503 Drawing A-601 Drawing A-603 Drawing E-200 Drawing E-202
Drawing H-501 Drawing H-700 Drawing H-800 Drawing P-100 RFI Log (Items 1-13) ****END OF ADDENDUM**** Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE
SCHEDULE 080671 - 1 SECTION 080671 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section references specification sections relating to commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding Doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Commercial door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door
hardware. 2. Electromechanical and access control door hardware. 3. Electromechanical and access control door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. 4. Automatic operators.
5. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. 2. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware Devices”. D. Codes and
References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building
Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building
Codes, Local Amendments. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 2 E. Standards: Reference Related Sections for requirements
regarding compliance with applicable industry standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and
assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize
the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in
the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content:
Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent
information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes
contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible
date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples,
Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the
supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols,
hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20,
2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 3 D. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for
each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information
of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications
made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in the Related Sections. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,
AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware,
software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories
directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty:
Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance
Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement
of door hardware. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Refer to
“PART 3 – EXECUTION” for required specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The door hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner
and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention
of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required
for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products.
3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with
new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and
proposals as needed. B. Products listed in the hardware sets shall be supplied by and in accordance with the requirements described in the specification section as noted for each item.
1. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware. 2. Section 28 15 00 – Access Control Hardware Devices. C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. MR - Markar
3. SA - SARGENT 4. OT - Other 5. RO - Rockwood 6. PE - Pemko Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE
SCHEDULE 080671 - 5 Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 551/1, 551/1-Alt 1 4 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 087100 1 Access Control Rim Exit 12 43 55 56 70 M1-8844-24V-BIPSB-OE
LNJ US32D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Cylinder To Suit Existing Key System OT 1 Surface Closer 351 O EN SA 087100 1 Wall Stop 403 (or) 441CU (As Required) US26D RO 087100 1 Threshold to architect
detail PE 087100 1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100 ⚡ 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 1 Electric
Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Power Distribution Board AQL4-R8E1 SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram Elevation and Point to Point as Specified OT Notes: Operation: *Door normally
closed and secured. *Upon use of mechanical key or presentation of authorized credentials door to unlock allowing authorized entry. *Built in request to exit switch to allow authorized
egress, integrated door position switch to be tied into security system to monitor status of door. *Upon loss of power door to remain locked. *Always free egress. Set: 2.0 Doors:
551/2, 551/2-Alt 1, 551/3 8 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 630 MR 087100 1 Removable Mullion L980S / L980A (As Required) x Length Required PC SA 087100 1 Access Control Rim Exit
43 55 56 70 M1-8844-24V-BIPS-BOE LNJ US32D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Rim Exit Device, Exit Only 43 55 56 8810 EO US32D SA 087100 ⚡ 2 Cylinder To Suit Existing Key System OT Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 6 2 Surface Closer 351 P9 EN SA 087100 1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100 1 Gasketing
S773BL PE 087100 2 Door Contacts 1078 X color SO 2 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100 ⚡ 2 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 2 Electric
Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Power Distribution Board AQL4-R8E1 SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram Elevation and Point to Point as Specified OT Notes: Operation: *Door normally
closed and secured. *Upon use of mechanical key or presentation of authorized credentials door to unlock allowing authorized entry. *Built in request to exit switch to allow authorized
egress, integrated door position switch to be tied into security system to monitor status of door. *Upon loss of power door to remain locked. *Always free egress. Set: 3.0 Doors:
500/1 1 Cylinder To Suit Existing Key System OT Notes: Existing hardware to remain. New cylinder as required. Remove existing door, hardware, & frame (including hold open devices
tied into the fire alarm system) and reinstall in new location. Set: 4.0 Doors: 551A/1, 551B/1 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 087100 1 Storeroom/Closet Lock 70 8204
LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder To Suit Existing Key System OT 1 Surface Closer 351 O EN SA 087100 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high BEV CSK US32D RO 087100 1 Wall Stop 403 (or) 441CU
(As Required) US26D RO 087100 3 Silencer 608-RKW RO 087100 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 7 Set: 5.0 Doors:
50021/1, 50022/1 To follow 1 Automatic Opener 6341 689 NO 087100 1 Electric Strike 1500/1600 US26D HS 087100 1 Actuator 671 NO 1 Gasketing S77SBL PE 087100 1 Power Supply
AQD2-4F1 Series SU 087100 Theory of Operation: Depressing either button will retract the latch and activate the power operator. Door can be mechanically opened from either side.
Balance of hardware to remain. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS 108211 - 1
SECTION 108211 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural coiled wire grilles and screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03
DEFINITIONS A. Coiled Wire Fabric: Building material created by interlocking strands of coiled wire to form a larger flexible sheet; coiled wire fabric is made from various metals
and gauges of wire, and in a wide variety of sizes, weaves, finishes, and levels of fullness. B. Attachment Systems: Components and materials required to provide coiled wire fabric
in designated shape and form (i.e., flat under tension in two directions, under tension in two directions with a percentage of fullness, flat under tension in four directions, hanging
in one direction, or wrapping a form, etc.). Attachment systems are used to connect coiled wire fabric to built environment and maintaining designated performance capability. Engineered
attachments may allow coiled wire fabric systems to remain in fixed position or to move, either manually or mechanically. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification
for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength 2014, with Editorial Revision (2017). B. ASTM A380/A380M - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and
Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 2017. C. ASTM D3451 - Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings 2006 (Reapproved 2017). D. ASTM F593
- Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 2017. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate field measurements and fabrication
schedule with progress of construction to avoid construction delays. B. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct meetings including Contractor, Architect, fabricator, installer and other
subcontractors whose work involves coiled wire fabric to confirm project requirements, framing and support conditions, mounting surfaces and manufacturer's installation requirements.
C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal
procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product used, including preparation instructions, storage and handling requirements, and installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation, including plans and elevations, detailed sections, materials, finishes, fittings, hardware, anchorages,
fastening details, and manufacturer's technical and descriptive data. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS
108211 - 2 D. Samples: Submit samples for color verification of each specified finish, at least 6 inch (254 mm) wide by 10 inch (254 mm) long. Submit samples fullness % confirmation.
E. Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturers of coiled wire products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. F. Delegated Design Submittals:
Submit comprehensive structural analysis of overall design for specified loads prepared by qualified professional engineer. G. Designer's Qualification Statement. H. Manufacturer's
Qualification Statement. I. Installer's Qualification Statement. J. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer. 1. Submit "Final Installation Contractor Checklist" to ensure warranty requirements have been met; see CCD website for copy of checklist. 1.07 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Perform structural design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State
in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented
experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least five years of documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,
AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and material. B. Exercise care not to
scratch, mark, dent, or bend metal components during delivery, storage, and installation. C. Store materials indoors, protected from moisture, humidity, and extreme temperature fluctuations
until ready for installation. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Verify dimensions of actual openings by field measurements before fabrication; provide recorded measurements on shop drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Coiled Wire Grilles and Screens Manufacturers: 1. Cascade Coil Drapery, Inc, dba Cascade Architectural; www.cascadearchitectural.com
a. Address: PO Box 3707, 19505 SW 90th Court, Tualatin, OR 97062. b. Phone - Toll Free: (800) 999-2645. c. Phone: (971) 224-2188. d. Email: info@cascadecoil.com. e. Web: www.cascade-architectur
al.com. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS 108211 - 3 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS
SYSTEMS A. Provide architectural coiled wire grilles and screens system with attachment method, materials, weaves, and finish as indicated; manufacturer and contractor to engineer and
fabricate components and assemblies as required for installation in accordance with manufacturer's Custom Architectural System. B. Attachment Method: Aluminum Secura Track with Threaded
Rod Brackets. C. Fabricoil Architectural Coiled Wire Fabric Weaves: 1. Interior Application: a. Aluminum: 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick, 14 gage wire. D. Factory Finishes: Powder Coated.
Color selected by Architect. E. Fullness: 50%. F. Provide batons for assistance with operating the screens. 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Requirements: Architectural
coiled wire fabric systems capable of withstanding applied loads and stresses within designated limits and under conditions as indicated on drawings. 1. Provide coiled wire fabric and
attachment system components in accordance with applicable building code to withstand dead and live loads resulting from environmental conditions including, but not limited to, wind,
seismic events, vegetation, rain, snow, and ice. 2. Provide coiled wire fabric systems capable of accommodating expansion and contraction of metal components without causing undue stress,
buckling, opening of joints, and distortion. 3. Provide structural framing and hardware of coiled wire fabric systems capable of withstanding loads and maintain deflection limitations
in accordance with applicable building codes when systems are fully installed. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Verify field dimensions prior to start of shop fabrication. B. Fabricate
steel and stainless steel components in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and the following: 1. Comply with requirements indicated for metal materials, thickness, design,
and details of construction; fabricate metal accurately and without any burrs. 2. Provide welded connections in compliance with American Welding Society (AWS) standards for recommended
practice in shop welding. 3. Provide welds located behind finished surfaces that are without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. 4. Provide components that are accurately cut,
drilled and/or tapped to receive coiled wire fabric, hardware, fasteners, and accessories. C. Shop fabricate components in accordance with requirements indicated on drawings and specified
performance requirements. D. Shop fabricate hardware, interconnected parts, and assemblies to eliminate necessity for any field cutting adjustments. E. Coordinate system requirements,
dimensions and spacing of attachment components to ensure required factory drilled holes in supporting framework are properly located. F. Provide exposed joints that are butt, flush,
and hairline. G. Fabricate exterior connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner that prevents water from entering interior portions of structure, in accordance with Architect.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES AND SCREENS 108211 - 4 H. Upon completion of fabrication, clean and prepare
applicable coiled wire fabric system in accordance with ASTM A380/A380M. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Comply with ASTM F593 for stainless steel or ASTM A307 for carbon steel, sizes
to suit installation conditions. B. Anchors and Inserts: Corrosion resistant; type, size, and material required for loading and installation as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION A. Prior to start of installation, verify that existing conditions are acceptable for installation of coiled wire fabric and attachment systems in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. B. Coordinate with setting diagrams, plans, templates, and drawings to ensure that proper installation of necessary anchors and supporting devices has been
completed. C. Ensure that supporting system for coiled wire fabric has been properly prepared for attachment of framework, hardware, anchors, wire rope, and transfer of calculated loading.
D. Where existing conditions are responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions prior to proceeding. E. Coordinate with appropriate entity to correct
any unsatisfactory conditions. F. Start of this work indicates acceptance of areas and conditions as satisfactory by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify inventory of system components
to ensure required components are available for installation; inspect components for damage, and replace damaged components as necessary. B. Verify that alignment, support dimensions,
and tolerances are correct. C. Verify that necessary structural framing is installed prior to mounting coiled wire fabric attachment system components. D. Verify that support framing
and other surfaces to receive coiled wire fabric and attachment systems are clean and free of obstructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation
instructions. B. Attach coiled wire fabric to structural framing using applicable hardware provided by manufacturer as indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Provide necessary anchorage
devices and fittings to securely fasten to on-site construction; including additional knife plates, embeds, framework, blocking, threaded rods, and anchors. D. Provide for separation
of dissimilar materials using bushings, grommets, or washers to prevent electrolytic corrosion. E. Upon completion of final adjustments, provide tamper-resistant lock-tight material
at mechanical fittings. F. Provide for tension in coiled wire fabric as indicated on drawings, or as necessary to remove slack. G. Coiled Wire Fabric Attachment System: 1. Install coiled
wire fabric attachment system components in accordance with approved shop drawings. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 ARCHITECTURAL COILED WIRE GRILLES
AND SCREENS 108211 - 5 2. Install attachment system assemblies based on manufacturer's dimensions. 3. Install joints that accommodate for expansion and contraction of metal components
without causing undue stress, buckling, joint fatigue and/or distortion. 4. Install structural blocking at wall locations used for mounting of attachment system. 5. Install coiled fabric
mounting hardware onto attachment systems as indicated on approved shop drawings for specified attachment system; attach with approved fasteners and techniques to ensure that framing
members are horizontal and parallel to grade or slab, and straight to within 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m). 6. Install attachment system plumb, level, square, and rigid without
having any kinks or sags in coiled wire fabric. H. Coiled Wire Fabric: 1. Install coiled wire fabric in accordance with approved shop drawings. 2. Install coiled wire fabric based on
manufacturer's dimensions. 3. Install joints that accommodate for expansion and contraction of metal components without causing undue stress, buckling, joint fatigue and/or distortion.
4. Install coiled wire fabric mounting hardware onto coiled wire fabric as indicated on approved shop drawings for specified attachment system; attach with approved fasteners and techniques
to ensure that sections are horizontal and parallel to grade or slab, and straight to within 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m). 5. Install coiled wire fabric infill with attachment
system plumb, level, square, and rigid without having any kinks or sags. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings of adjacent work areas, and clean installed materials
prior to Date of Substantial Completion. B. In heavy traffic areas, establish cleaning program to pressure wash or hand-wash coiled wire fabric and attachment system on a monthly basis
prior to Date of Substantial Completion. C. Clean coiled wire fabric system components with mild detergent and water applied with wet wrap and wiped with clean dry rag; abrasive cleaners
are not permitted. D. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this work. E. See Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal,
for additional requirements. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed coiled wire grilles and screens and finished surfaces to ensure they are without damage until Date of
Substantial Completion. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. C. Replace defective or damaged components as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 1 SECTION 237513 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) PART
1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, miscellaneous materials, and services to perform all operations required for the complete unit assembly as shown on the Contract
Documents. B. Installation by Mechanical Contractor: Provide all labor, miscellaneous materials, and services to perform all operations required for the complete installation as shown
on the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 234100 - Air Filters and Accessories 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Mechanical Contractor will be actively involved in
the submittal approval process in order to coordinate units with project requirements. Submittal shall be provided by Unit Manufacturer. B. Equipment performance data sheets and schedules.
C. Submit shop drawings on air handling units showing dimensions, weights, configurations, major component locations, access door locations, duct connection sizes and locations, and
shipping split locations. D. Materials of construction for housing and major components. E. Fan manufacturer and performance curves with operating points clearly indicated. Motor sizes
and types. F. Coil sections with sizes, rows, fin spacing, face velocity, air & fluid temperatures, flow rates, air& fluid pressure drops, and connection sizes. G. Filters indicating
size, efficiency, and pressure drop. H. Electrical data, wiring diagrams, and accessories. I. Octave band sound power levels for intake, supply and return connections, and octave band
sound power levels for radiated noise from the unit enclosure. J. Factory testing procedures. K. Operation and maintenance manuals. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January
20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 2 1.4 MANUFACTURER’S (EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S) AND GENERAL BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. It is the intent of these specifications
and referenced specification sections to provide the minimum design and performance parameters without being proprietary toward a specific equipment supplier. It is the responsibility
of the listed acceptable equipment suppliers to meet the basic intent of the specifications and drawings. The overall “box” size of Air Handling Units and Return Air Units shall not
be deviated from. It is not the option of the equipment supplier to increase or decrease the physical size of the equipment. In addition, the configuration or layout of the individual
components within the equipment cannot be modified or changed. B. Pressure drop across each filter bank shall be minimum 1.5 in. w.g. and shall be included into the internal static
pressure losses of the equipment. C. Design Equipment: Buffalo Air Handling. D. Acceptable Makes: Air Enterprises, Buffalo Air Handling Units, Environmental Air Systems. 1.5 PERFORMANCE
TESTING A. The Contractor shall retain Air Systems Balancing and Testing Service, Inc. to test and document selected performance parameters, including leakage of each air handling unit.
The unit design cfm and static pressure shall be delivered as a brake horsepower within 5% of design conditions. Multiple point temperature readings shall be taken down stream of the
mixing section to certify that temperatures do not vary by more than 10°F across the face of the preheat coil. B. Air handling unit on site Leakage Test: 1. The casing leakage test
shall verify the unit casing leakage is less than .5%of design airflow when tested at 1-1/2 times the design static pressure. The unit shall be sealed, and subject to both positive
and negative pressure. The leakage shall be measured using a calibrated orifice plate. Leakage shall not exceed 0.5% of design airflow when tested at 150% of design static pressure.
2. In the event that the actual performance of the air handling unit does not fall within the acceptable window, the unit manufacturer shall make all necessary corrections without additional
cost to the Owner, and also reimburse the Owner for the cost of any additional testing needed to document performance. 3. In the event the manufacturer cannot achieve the submitted
performance parameters and leakage, the Owner reserves the right to seek an adjustment from the manufacturer commensurate with the Owner's anticipated increased operating costs. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 3 4. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit the documented test
results directly to the Engineer. The report format and the parameters to be tested shall be as per the requirements of Specification Section 230593 – Adjusting and Balancing. This
requirement for performance testing is in addition to the adjusting and balancing requirements associated with the HVAC Contract. 1.6 FACTORY AUTHORIZED START-UP AND FACTORY JOINING
SERVICE A. The AHU Manufacturer shall provide 16 hours of factory start-up and joining service. 1.7 TRAINING A. The AHU Manufacturer shall provide 2 hours of training. 1.8 WARRANTY
A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the
date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS A. Provide air handling units to fit intended use and in locations called for. Capacity, size arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories
as called for and as necessary to obtain required results and allow for proper maintenance. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions
listed. Guaranteed sound power level ratings not exceeding those of design equipment, or as scheduled. B. All equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced to acceptable tolerances
with weights permanently fastened to fan blades, and components including the motor, installed on unit. C. Classification as designated by Unit Manufacturer or minimum requirement list
below: Total S.P. Class Up to 3 3/4 in. WG-STD I Up to 6-3/4 in. WG-STD II Up to 12-3/4 in. WG-STD III D. Vibration levels shall be factory tested and field verified. Special balancing
and structural components shall be provided to minimize harmonic vibrations. E. More than one manufacturer is listed as Make. Contractor must be certain that equipment submitted fits
properly into indicated space conditions the same as the Design Equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM)
237513 - 4 F. Motors: Furnished by equipment manufacturer. See Specification Section 230513 Motors. Horsepower and type as called for from acceptable manufacturers listed. When
VAV drives are used, the motors provided shall be matched to the variable speed drive selected for use. Motor to be suitable for use as direct drive application and be matched to fan
to meet performance requirements. G. Vibration Isolation: 1. Provide vibration isolation equipment for each fan supplied inside the air handling unit enclosure. 2. Fan and Motor mounted
on a vibration isolated steel frame which is itself then fastened to the unit base. H. Fans: 1. Fans shall be AMCA 210 certified for performance and rated in accordance with AMCA 300
for sound. I. Unit to be completely pre-wired and pre-piped per drawing and specifications. J. Each AHU shipping section to incorporate an exterior 4x4 junction box with sealed conduit
into airstream section to allow control subcontractor into air handling unit without any field drilling through panel system in the field to compromise panel leakage integrity. K. All
equipment materials and workmanship shall be warranted for (12) months from date of acceptance. During the warranty period, the manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no additional
cost to the owner, any equipment, material, or workmanship in which defects mat develop. Unit casing and structural base shall be warranted against corrosion or failure under normal
operating conditions. 2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. General: 1. Provide fan sections, filter sections, mixing box, plenums, coil sections and other sections as called for and shown on the
Contract Drawings. 2. Gauges of metal and construction to be heavy enough to prevent vibration, undue noise or breathing. 3. Each coil shall be independently supported so that any one
coil can be removed without removing another coil. Coil racks to be stainless steel or aluminum. 4. Weight limitation of unit is 50 lbs./sq. ft. including all equipment shown to be
supplied by Division 15 and 16. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 5 B. Fan Sections: 1. The equipment
supplier shall provide a means to fully remove all fans for maintenance. Provide hoist and trolley assembly to allow full removal of the fans from the unit enclosure. The mounting
of the fan within the air handling unit shall be designed to allow ease of decoupling of the fan for removal. 2. All fans shall be constructed to AMCA Standards and capacity shall be
AMCA Standards 210-74 rated. 3. Arrangement 4, direct drive, aluminum wheel, airfoil centrifugal unhoused type, plenum fan, SWSI fans as called for, complete with motors, and fan guards.
Fan shaft shall be solid 1040 or 1045 hot rolled steel that is turned, ground and polished. 4. Provide flexible discharge connection between fan inlet and intake wall. 5. Provide full
screen cage on unhoused fans. 6. Provide mean to facilitate (lift points, etc.) fan motor removal/replacement which do not interfere with airflow. 7. Fan Inlet Airflow System: Provide
airflow measuring devices factory mounted in fan inlets complete with flow transducer. The fan supplier shall provide an airflow measuring system on the face to the inlet cone of the
fan. a. Design Equipment: Accutrol Vortek. 8. Fan Inlet Airflow Transducer: a. The transducer shall be a combination differential pressure transmitter, square root extractor, scaling
multiplier, and output filter with process indication, complete in a single package. b. The measured air volume shall be locally indicated on a external mounted magnehelic display meter
scaled in CFM. c. The transducer package shall be a factory calibrated for the flow measuring element being served. d. A transducer with magnehelic display meter shall be provided for
each individual airflow station. e. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5%. f. An output signal of 01-10 VDC or 4-20 mA shall be generated for monitoring the DDC system. g. Design Equipment:
Accutrol. h. Make: Accutrol Vortek. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 6 9. Fans shall be selected
to meet the overall acoustical performance (octave band sound power levels at unit connections) as scheduled in the construction documents. 10. Manufacturers: Twin City, Greenheck or
Cook. C. Hot Water / Glycol Heating Coil Sections: 1. Hot water heating coils, serpentine type, number rows and arrangement as scheduled or as required to meet performance specifications,
non-ferrous headers, same end connections with vent chamber on return end and completely drainable. Coils shall be designed for 125 psi working pressure, and shall be designed to relieve
expansion and contractions strains. 2. Coils shall be selected with a maximum face velocity of 550 FPM. 3. Vent and drain connections shall be provided at the top of bottom of each
header and shall be no less than 1/2 inch NPT. 4. 5/8 in. O.D. copper tubes not less than .035 in. wall thickness with .035 in. thick "U" bends and .0075 in. thick aluminum fins. Fin
spacing shall not exceed 10 FPI. All tubes shall be seamless construction with 304 stainless steel casings; grooved connections NOT acceptable. 5. Head pressure loss through coil shall
not exceed that scheduled in the documents. 6. Coils to be individually supported by an aluminum or stainless rack system. The rack shall allow any one (1) coil to be removed through
the unit casing without disturbing any other coil. 7. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil removal side. 8. Manufacturers:
Heatcraft or Aerofin D. Chilled Water Cooling Coil Section: 1. Chilled water coils, serpentine type, number rows and arrangement as scheduled or as required to meet performance specifications,
same end connections with vent chamber on return end and completely drainable. 2. Coils shall be selected with a maximum face velocity of 450 fpm. Unit manufacturer shall assure no
moisture carryover from coils at design conditions. 3. Head pressure loss through coil shall not exceed that schedule in the documents. 4. 5/8 in. O.D. copper tubes not less than .035
in. wall thickness with .035 in. thick "U" bends and .0075 in. thick aluminum fins. Fin Spacing shall not exceed 10 FPI. All tubes shall be seamless construction with 304 stainless
steel coil casing; grooved connections NOT acceptable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 7 5. Coils
to be individually supported by an aluminum or stainless steel rack system. The rack shall allow any one (1) coil to be removed through the unit casing without disturbing any other
coil. 6. Units to be provided with removable panel to allow for coil removal. These panels shall be gasketed, effectively sealed without other sealants or caulks, and shall be secured
with stainless steel machine screws or other reusable fasters. Self-tapping screws are not acceptable. 7. Positively pitched type 304 stainless steel drip pan(s), minimum of 18 gauge,
shall extend continuously under each coil with a minimum 3 in. overhang upstream and 12 in. of overhang downstream. Each pan shall have its condensate piped to common exterior connection.
Each coil shall be caulked and flashed in place to prevent carryover of condensate. 8. Cooling coils to be "desaturation" type with integral row of reheat to provide separation of
DB & WB temperature at all temperatures. Reheat shall not use any additional energy and be circuited integral to the coil casing. 9. Active cooling coil condensate drain connections
to be a minimum 12 inches above the bottom of the air handling unit base for trapping. 10. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil
removal side. 11. Manufacturers: Heatcraft or Aerofin. E. Air Handling Unit Casing: 1. Double walled, insulated, air pressure tight, casing assemblies fabricated from insulated aluminum
panels with aluminum framing members. Wall panels shall be continuously sealed (gasketed) between interior and exterior skin with 1/2" epoxy bride. No through metal shall be allowed.
Where dissimilar metals are used, they shall be dielectrically isolated from one another to prevent galvanic action. Adhesive tapes or gaskets are not acceptable as an acceptable thermal
brake or for dielectric isolation. 2. Panels shall be constructed with unpainted aluminum skins and injected foam. Panel thickness shall be no less than 2 inches, but shall also be
sufficient to: a. Limit maximum deflection to 1/200th of the panel span at the full rated unit static pressure. b. Fully withstand positive and negative pressure of 150% of rated pressure
for testing, without any failure or deterioration of performance. c. Prevent any condensation on the outside of the unit at 75°F wet bulb temperature. 3. Aluminum panel skin thickness
shall be a minimum of 0.050 in. thick for exterior sheet and 0.040 in thick for the interior sheet. Interior sheet shall be solid. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January
20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 8 4. Interior space packed with blown foam. Panel U-value shall not exceed .0588 BTU/HR-SQ.FT. deg. F for 2 inch panels.
Insulation shall meet or exceed 3.0 pounds per cubic foot (PCF) density rating and meet erosion requirements of UL 181 facing the airstream. The panel system shall meet the requirements
of NFPA 90A and 90B and a certificate stating such shall be submitted to the Engineer. 5. All sections shall have a solid liner. 6. All casing walls shall be of panel construction,
including but not limited to discharge walls, mixing section walls. 7. Access doors for serviced access between each section and as shown on Contract Drawings. 8. Unit floor in air
handling sections shall be 3/16” aluminum or type 304 stainless steel safety tread plate fully welded watertight, and designed for a min. of 100 lb. per square foot throughout the unit.
Provide a floor drain in each section. Provide a 1-1/2 in. condensate drain from outside air plenum, mixing section upstream of filters and from cooling coil. Provide a 1-1/4 in.
capped drain from all other sections for cleaning. . Base of unit shall be lined with .040" aluminum skin which shall be recessed to allow for rigging the sections in place without
damage to the insulation projection. The insulation shall be a minimum 4 in. base insulation. 9. The unit shall be constructed on an all-aluminum minimum 8 in. channel base structure
member sized to support all major components and the housing during rigging, handling and operation of the unit. The base shall be designed to distribute loads properly to a suitable
mounting surface and be braced to support internal components without sagging, pulsing or oil canning. 10. The unit base shall be provided with sumps in outside air sections or as indicated
in the documents. Sumps shall be welded and guaranteed watertight to serve as a drain pan to prevent water damage from the unit. 11. All equipment within the air handling unit shall
be provided with a minimum 2” high base rail to raise the equipment off the unit floor for housekeeping. Equipment mounted directly to the floor with fastener or drilled holes penetrating
the water seal of the base is unacceptable. 12. Door panels constructed of same material and gauges as panels; door sized as called for, 3 in. thick of the overlapping seal type. Doors
shall be supplied with continuous non-pitching gaskets. Doors to be supplied with piano hinges full height of door. Minimum of two latches with an inside release handle. Doors shall
be assembled with hinge hardware attached and adjusted in the field. The door gaskets shall incorporate two continuous separate gasket seals around the periphery of the door. Gasket
materials shall be UV resistant, closed cell neoprene: gaskets shall be attached by adhesive and not mechanically held in place. Door latches wedge lever type with handles inside and
outside. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 9 Hinges designed for door size and weight. Doors installed
to open against the air pressure. Interior doors shall have 10 in. (min.) square thermal pane windows at 5 ft.-0 in. center line height. Doors to be minimum of 24”wide to all internal
components. Provide 1” diameter test ports with screwed caps on casing upstream and downstream of filters and coils for pressure and temperature measurement. 13. Air and watertight
sleeves, caulked and insulated where pipes and conduits penetrate unit casings. 14. Provide framed openings with curved bell mouthed fittings for duct connections with exit velocities
exceeding 2000fpm. Bellmouth fittings shall have a minimum smooth radius equal to 20% of the diameter (round or oval) or shortest side (rectangular) to provide optimum performance.
Bellmouths to be mounted flush with the interior edge to minimize exit loss. Where openings are in floor, provide a removable safety grating fastened to opening framing. Supply opening
safety grating to be aluminum. All floor openings shall have a 3 in. high frame welded to the pan to prevent water from entering the building. 15. The structure shall be fully self-supporting.
Where roof spans and wall loadings require additional structural strength, it shall be furnished either by heavier roof and wall joiners, or, additional structural members capable
of withstanding a differential pressure of 10 in. w.g. Unit built on unpainted aluminum base channel. The unit base shall be insulated with 2 in. of 3 lb./cu. in. density insulation
with an aluminum liner for additional sound attenuation. 16. Provide plug panels for removal of coils. 17. Interior aluminum surfaces are not required to be painted. 18. Any equipment
flashing, internal partitions or other attachments to the casing shall be made in such a way as to ensure a permanent leak tight connection. Attachments that are bolted, screwed, or
welded to or through the casing creating air bypass, air leakage or rust propagation areas are not acceptable. 19. Multiple section units shall be bolted together in the field using
stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. 20. The wall and roof panels to be built to meet the requirements of NFPA 90A & 90B fire and smoke spread of National Fire Protection Standards.
Manufacturer shall include with submittals copy of test results for ASTM E8417 test standard "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". No substitutions on type of test
results will be acceptable for approval. Failure to provide certified ASTM test results assumes noncompliance with NFPA 90A & 90B. F. Filter Sections: 1. Refer to Specification Section
234100 for further requirements. 2. Provide one extra full set of all final filters and pre filters. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR
HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 10 3. Provide access doors for replacing filters and access to dampers. 4. Provide a filter magnehelic gauge for each filterbank. Gauge to be 3-7/8
in. diameter white dial diaphragm actuated. Guaranteed accurate to + 2% of full scale. Pointer zero adjustment. Provide all accessories including adapters, mounting panel, pressure
tips, fittings, tubing, vent valves. 5. Filter racks to include internal vertical stiffeners. G. Dampers: 1. Return, Exhaust and Outside Air Dampers: a. Dampers shall be opposed blade,
unless otherwise noted on drawings, aluminum, airfoil, and low leakage type design. b. Blade and frame seals shall be of extruded silicone. Seals are to be secured in an integral slot
with the aluminum extrusions. c. Bearings shall be composed of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to an aluminum hexagon blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted
in the frame, resulting in no metal-to-metal or metal-toplastic contact. d. Linkage hardware shall be installed in the frame side and constructed of aluminum and corrosion-resistant,
zinc-plated steel, complete with cuppoint trunnion screws for a slip-proof grip. e. Dampers are to be designed for operation in temperatures ranging between -40°F and 212°F. f. All
dampers shall be arranged within the air-handling unit to allow the actuators to be installed within the enclosure of the units and not mounted at the unit exterior unless otherwise
noted on drawings. g. Design Equipment: Tamco 1500 series, except dampers exposed to unmixed outside air shall be Tamco Series 9000. h. Make: Tamco. 2. Outside Air Flow Station: a.
Material: Element 6063-T5 anodized aluminum and casing 16 gauge G90 galvanized steel. b. Accuracy: Within ± 0.5% of actual flow through the velocity range of 200 to 1,000 fpm when
installed in accordance with published recommendation and within ±5% at a velocity of 100 fpm. Operating velocity range 200 to 1,000 fpm. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157
January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 11 c. Temperature: Provide temperature compensation sensor to adjust for air density. d. Temperature: -40 deg F
to 120 deg F. e. Humidity: 0 to 100%. f. Design Equipment: Accutrol Vortex IAQ. g. Make: Paragon, Ruskin, Accutrol Vortex. 3. Air Volume/Velocity Transducers for Minimum Outside Air
and Fan Inlet Airflow Stations with NEMA 4 enclosure: a. The transducer shall be a combination differential pressure transmitter, square rood extractor, scaling multiplier, and output
filter with process indication, complete in a single package. b. The measured air volume shall be locally indicated on a door mounted LED display meter scaled in CFM. c. The transducer
package shall be a factory calibrated for the flowmeasuring element being served. d. A transducer shall be provided for each individual airflow station. e. Accuracy shall be plus or
minus 0.25%. f. An output signal of 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA shall be generated for monitoring by the DDC system. g. Design Equipment: Accutrol Vortex. h. Make: Paragon, Cambridge, Accutrol
Vortex. H. Accessories: As called for. 1. Provide outside air plenum and discharge plenum section with outlets as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide floor drains in outside
air plenum, access ahead of filter section and coil sections. 3. Unit shall be prewired for lighting. Pre-wiring shall include but not limited to: a. Single point connections - lighting.
Each connection point shall have conduit through the side of the unit for extension by others. Lighting connection shall be suitable for 120V single phase, 20A. Unit power requirements
shall not exceed the scheduled and as indicated herein. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 12 b. Lighting
connection shall be for the interior lighting. This lighting shall be vapor tight receptacle for compact fluorescent or LED type lights and provide a minimum of 40 foot candles throughout.
All the lighting within the unit shall be controlled by a single centrally located electronic timer switch equal to Woods Model #59013. 1) Receptacles: Provide a minimum of two 120
volt duplex receptacles on the exterior. All receptacles shall be ground fault interrupting type and have a weatherproof cast aluminum cover. c. All electrical work and entire installation
shall be in accordance with the NEC and Division 26 of these specifications. Provide thermal and moisture barrier in all conduits penetrating to air handling areas. 4. All fans shall
be wired to a junction box mounted to enclosure exterior. Installation of wiring and conduit shall be in conformance with NEC. Variable frequency drives will be provided and installed
by others. 5. All access doors at unhoused (plug) fan sections shall be provided with OSHA approved "kill" switches. The switches shall be capable of interrupting the fan motor control
circuit whenever a door is open. 6. Motor removal rails for all fan sections. 7. Service corridor to have integral structural members to hang piping from ceiling of corridor with no
sagging or deflection of ceiling. 8. Provide LED exterior light with switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All tubing for filter gauges, airflow station, etc. shall be hard
copper type with soldered joints. Provide maximum of 1’-0” of polyethylene tubing at connections to fans which are supported by vibration isolators. B. Provide proper weatherization
for protection of multi-section units during any periods of outdoor storage/staging, and during unit transport. C. Pipe coil drip pans, humidifier and outside air sections independently
to nearest floor drain, minimum pipe size shall be 1-1/2 in. Provide deep seal "P" trap and unions on both side of trap. The trap depth shall be greater than the static pressure of
the section being drained. All other drain connection shall be piped with 1 in. piping manifolded together to the nearest floor drain. Provide each drain connection with ball valve
and union. D. The Contractor is responsible for cleaning of unit and repainting of any floor pans, interior walls, exterior walls, etc. that are damaged during rigging, assembly and
final piping connections. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation M/E REF 200157 January 20, 2021 Addendum No 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 13 E. Air handlers shall be properly protected
during shipment. Units shipped on unprotected flat-bed trailers shall be made all-weather-tight. F. If air handlers need to be stored on site before installation within an enclosed
building, all-weather-tight protection shall be maintained until the units are within an enclosed space. END OF SECTION C B C B CB CB SYMBOLS: KEYNOTE DETAIL SECTION ELEVATIONS VERTICAL
ELEVATION PARTITION TYPE (SEE A-602 FOR DETAILS) ACCESSORY TYPE DOOR NUMBER REVISION NUMBER ROOM NUMBER ALIGNING SURFACES ? ? ? 01 A-000 00 0.00' FINISH FL. A1012 4 3 1 A1 ? 101 100
1 T-1 ALIGN LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN NEW INTERIOR PARTITION NEW 1-HR RATED PARTITION NEW 2-HR RATED PARTITION NEW FIXED FURNITURE/ CASEWORK EXISTING WALL PARTITION TO BE DEMOLISHED
ABBREVIATIONS: &A N D @A T AA S S O C I A T E ACALTERNATING CURRENT/ACOUSTICAL A/CAIR CONDITIONING ACMASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL ACTACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADAREA DRAIN ADJADJUSTABLE/ADJACENT
AFACCESS FLOOR AFFABOVE FINISH FLOOR ALTALTERNATE ALUMALUMINUM AMPAMPERE ANODANODIZED APACCESS PANEL APPDAPPROVED ARCHARCHITECT/ARCHITECTURAL ASPHASPHALT ASYMASYMMETRICAL AVBAIR & VAPOR
BARRIER AVGAVERAGE BBBUILDING BOARD BDBOARD BLDGBUILDING BLKGBLOCKING BMBEAM/BENCH MARK B.O.BY OTHERS BRKBRICK BSMTBASEMENT BTMBOTTOM BTWBETWEEN BURBUILT UP ROOFING BVLBEVEL CABCABINET
C.C.CENTER TO CENTER CERCERAMIC CFMCUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CJCONTROL JOINT CLCLOSER CLGCEILING CLRCLEAR CMUCONCRETE MASONRY UNIT C.O.CASED OPENING COL(S)COLUMN(S) COMMCOMMUNICATION CONCCONCRETE
CONDCONDUIT CONFCONFERENCE CONNCONNECTION(S) CONSTRCONSTRUCTION CONTCONTINUOUS COORDCOORDINATE CORRCORRIDOR CPCIRCUIT PANEL CPTCARPET CRCOLD ROLLED CRSCOURSE(S) CSOCASED OPENING CTCERAMIC
TILE CTAICOOLING TOWER AIR INTAKE CTRCENTER CUCUBIC CWCOLD WATER CYCOPY DDEEP/DEPTH DBLDOUBLE DCDIRECT CURRENT DEMODEMOLITION DETDETAIL DFDRINKING FOUNTAIN DIADIAMETER/DIAGONAL DIMDIMENSION
DISPDISPENSER DLDEAD LOAD DNDOWN DODOOR OPENING DRDOOR DWGDRAWING EE A S T (E)EXISTING TO REMAIN EAEACH ECEMPTY CONDUIT EECEXISTING EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION EFEXHAUST FAN EIFSEXTERIOR INSULATION
FINISH SYSTEM ELELEVATION(S) ELECELECTRICAL ELEVELEVATOR EMEMERGENCY EMTELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING ENCLENCLOSURE EQEQUAL (ER)EXIST. TO BE REMOVED (ERR)EXIST. TO BE REMOVED & RELOCATED
EWCELECTRICAL WATER COOLER EXHEXHAUST EXIST,EXEXISTING EXP BTEXPANSION BOLT EXP JTEXPANSION JOINT EXTEXTERIOR FF I L E FAFIRE ALARM FDFLOOR DRAIN FEFIRE EXTINGUISHER FECFIRE EXTINGUISHER
CABINET FHCFIRE HOSE CABINET FINFINISH FIXTFIXTURE FLRFLOOR FLUORFLUORESCENT F.O.FACE OF FPFIRE PROOF FPSCFIRE PROOF SELF CLOSING FPBFIRE PULL BOX FRFRAME FSPFIRE STANDPIPE FTFOOT FTGFOOTING
FWCFABRIC WALL COVERING GAGAUGE GALVGALVANIZED GBLKGYPSUM BLOCK GCGENERAL CONTRACTOR GFIGROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER GLGLASS GR,GDGRADE GWBGYPSUM WALLBOARD GYPGYPSUM HBHOSE BIBB HCHANDICAPPED
HMHOLLOW METAL HDWHARDWARE HDWDHARDWOOD HORIZHORIZONTAL HPHIGH POINT HPLHIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE HRHOUR HTHEIGHT HTGHEATING HVACHEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING HVPHIGH VOLTAGE
PANEL HWHOT WATER IBCINSTALL BY CONTRACTOR IBOINSTALL BY OWNER IDINSIDE DIAMETER INCLINCLUDE/INCLUDING INSULINSULATION INTINTERIOR JBOXJUNCTION BOX JSJAMB SWITCH JTJOINT KWKILOWATT
LACLACQUER LAMLAMINATE LAVLAVATORY LBSPOUNDS LFLINEAR FEET LHLEFT HAND LHRBLEFT HAND RETURN BEVEL LLLIVE LOAD LSCLOCKSET CYLINDRICAL LSMLOCKSET MORTISED LDLINEAR DIFFUSER LTLIGHT LVLOUVER
LVPLOW VOLTAGE PANEL MAGMAGNETIC MARBMARBLE MASMASONRY MAXMAXIMUM MCMAIL CHUTE MEZZMEZZANINE MFRMANUFACTURER MINMINIMUM MISCMISCELLANEOUS MLDGMOLDING M.O.MASONRY OPENING MOD-BITMODIFIED
BITUMINOUS ROOFING MPMEASURE POINT / MASONRY PAINT MTDMOUNTED MTLMETAL MULMULLION NN O R T H / N E W NATNATURAL NECNEW EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION NICNOT IN CONTRACT NONUMBER NOMNOMINAL NRNOISE
REDUCTION NRCNOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT NTSNOT TO SCALE OCON CENTER ODOUTSIDE DIAMETER OHOPPOSITE HAND OPPOPPOSITE PARTPARTITION PCPLPORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PGLPLATE GLASS PBOPROVIDED
BY OWNER PLFPOUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT PLAMPLASTIC LAMINATE PLASPLASTER PSIPOUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PTPAINT PTDPAINTED PTGPAINTING PTDRPAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PTRPAPER TOWEL RECEPTACLE PVCPOLYVINYL
CHLORIDE PWDPLYWOOD R/ARETURN AIR RADRADIUS RBRUBBER BASE RDROOF DRAIN (RE)RELOCATED EXISTING RCPREFLECTED CEILING PLAN REFREFRIGERATOR REINREINFORCING/REINFORCED REQDREQUIRED RHRIGHT
HAND RHRBRIGHT HAND REVERSE BEVEL RMROOM ROROUGH OPENING RUBRUBBER SSOUTH/SUPPLY SAFBSOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BATT SBSTRAIGHT BASE SCSEPARATE CIRCUIT/SELF CLOSING SCHSCHEDULE SEALSEALANT
SIMSIMILAR SLCSOLID CORE SNDSANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL SNVSANITARY NAPKIN VENDOR SPECSPECIFICATION SQSQUARE SSSTAINLESS STEEL STDSTANDARD STLSTEEL STNSTAIN STRUCTSTRUCTURE SUBSUBSTITUTE
SUSPSUSPENDED SVCSERVICE SYMSYMMETRICAL SYSSYSTEM TBTOWEL BAR TBDTO BE DETERMINED TDTRENCH DRAIN TELTELEPHONE TGLTEMPERED GLASS T>ONGUE & GROOVE THTHRESHOLD THRUTHROUGH THKTHICK/THICKNESS
TLTILE T.O.TOP OF T.O.S.TOP OF SLAB TPDTOILET PAPER DISPENSER TSTILE START TYPTYPICAL U.O.N.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VV O L T VBVINYL BASE VCTVINYL COMPOSITE TILE VERTVERTICAL VIFVERIFY
IN FIELD VNRVENEER V.PLASVENEER PLASTER VTVINYL TILE WWEST/WATT W/WITH WCWATER CLOSET WDWOOD WFWIDE FLANGE WPWATER PROOF WRWASTE RECEPTACLE WSWET STACK WWFWELDED WIRE FABRIC WWMWELDED
WIRE MESH YDYARD DUMPSTER LOCATIONS GRUMMAN HALL 2043 UPSON AUTO SHOP 2045A RHODES DRIVE WARD CENTER 2061 UPSON HALL 2045 AVOID EXISTING INGROUND TANK WITH FENCE. PATH THROUGH LOADING
DOCK OR DOOR TO BUILDING FRIEGHT ELEVATOR EXISTING FREIGHT ELEVATOR, PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR CAB WALLS AND FLOOR. WEIGHT LIMIT 4,500LBS. DIMENSIONS 8'-0"X5'-6". CEILING HEIGHT 7'-6".
DOOR OPENING WIDTH 4'-7". Revisions: Issue for Bid Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South
Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall
Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1 December 15, 2020 January 20, 2021 As indicated SYMBOLS, NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS T-002
N.T.S 1SITE PLAN 1/32" = 1'-0" 3 STAGING PLAN 1 UP UP UP G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"14' - 4 5/16"4' - 1
7/8" 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"18' - 6 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" EQ EQ TERRACE GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR
588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 578 576 574 572 50044 LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 WOMEN 50021 50073 50076 512 514 508 504A 504
502 500 503 501 517 519 521 521A 523 520 518 516 514B 571 503 SF505 SF 1 A-410 2 A-410 42 460 SF505 SF 31 503 SF 5 1 1 1 11 11 11 11 3 4 4 11 11 11 11 44 SF STORAGE 551B 551B 1 500
1 LABORATORY 551 A1 E1 4 6 7 7 A-301 1 9 TYP. A-301 3 5 4 6 A-541 1 A-541 3 A-541 4 A1 551 1 12 A-501 1 C1 13 13 13 B1 A1 D2 9 9 9 13 13 STORAGE 551A 551A 1 E1 551 3 B1 6 A-502 TYP.
12 TYP. 12 TYP. D1 A-302 1 A-501 3 E1 A-3017 A-301 8 A-301 2 2 A-502 2 A-502 2 A-502 10 10 A-501 2 A-501 2 SIM. TYP. 2 50046 STAIR# 3 50003 50040 50042 STAIR# 2 50002 50063 50062 50061
571A A-501 4 551 2 1' - 4" 11' - 0"3' - 1" 6' - 9" 3' - 0" 50021 1 50022 1 14 14 14 14 14 A1 1' - 4" A1 EQEQ TYP. TYP. TYP. 1' - 1" ALIGN OF WALL AND COLUMN 0' - 4" 4' - 5"8' - 1" ALIGN
A-302 2 1 15 16 1 KEY NOTES: FIXED WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK, WOOD WITH EPOXY COUNTERTOP. PREPARE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH, SEE ALSO A-131. WALL MOUNTED OPEN SHELVING
BY LABORATORY CASEWORK MFR. SINK WITH COUNTERTOP MOUNTED EYEWASH. NOT USED. RELOCATED CORRIDOR DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE. NOT USED. INCLUDE PAINTED FLOOR MARKINGS, APPROXIMATELY 4" WIDE
AND LOCATED ALONG THE COLUMN LINES IN THE PROJECT AREA. WIRE MESH DIVIDER CURTAIN. SUSPENDED FROM C CHANNEL TRACK WITH TROLLEY ACCESSORY. RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET. 2-HOUR
RATED INTUMESCENT COATING ON COLUMNS. PREPARE EXISTING STEEL TO RECEIVE COATING REPLACE EXISTING RADIATOR COVERS. ADD END CAPS. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE . SURFACE MOUNTED
STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD, 8' TALL CUT VINYL LETTERING, COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. ½” DEEP AND 3”HIGH MINIMUM. PROJECT WALL BOX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 / 1A-603 13 14
15 16 1 LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN NEW INTERIOR PARTITION NEW 1-HR RATED PARTITION NEW 2-HR RATED PARTITION NEW FIXED FURNITURE/ CASEWORK EXISTING WALL PARTITION TO BE DEMOLISHED
Revisions: Issue for Bid Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown
NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Scale: January 20, 2021 Rhodes Hall Fifth
Floor Renovation Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 1 Addendum #1 December 15, 2020 January 20, 2021 As indicated FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-101 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 LEVEL 5 GENERAL NOTE: 1.GRIND
EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB, FILL ALL CRACKS WITH EPOXY SEALANT, AND PREPARE TO RECEIVE SPECIFIED FINISH. 2.PAINT ALL WALLS AND EXPOSED CEILING ELEMENTS IN THE PROJECT AREA. PAINT ALL WALLS
IN EXISTING CORRIDOR 50044. 3.REFER TO SHEET A-141 FOR LOOSE FURNITURE PLAN G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 A-410 2 A-410 B.O. BEAM 10' - 1 1/2" TYP. A2
A-111 2 1 TYP. A3 3 3 1 A-502 9 A-503 4 10' - 8" 4 2 A4 A1 A1 A5 6 6 A2 A2 1 TYP. 1 TYP. 8' - 8" 8' - 8" 8' - 8" 11' - 7" B.O. BEAM 10' - 1 1/2" 11' - 7" 10' - 1 1/2" B.O. BEAM B.O.
BEAM B.O. BEAM 11' - 10 1/2" B.O. BEAM 9' - 1" 8' - 0"9 A-503SIM. 11' - 4 1/2" B.O. BEAM A-111 3 A-111 4 A7 A7 11 A-503 TYP. 8' - 2" 4 LINE OF NEW TO EX. CEILING L INE OF EX. TO N EW
C E ILING 4 A8 A8 7 TYP. ALIGN EQEQ T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q EQEQ TYP. EQ TYP. EQ OF GRID OF GRID 2 1 / 4 " 3 ' 7 " 3' - 3" EQEQ E Q E Q 2 ' 1 0 " 2 ' 1 0 " EQEQ E Q E Q ALIGN ALIGN
ALIGN 7 A-503 A-302 2 1 KEY NOTES: 1DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE FLUSH MOUNTED CEILING ACCESS PANEL,
2'X2' SUSPENDED STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD ENCLOSURE AROUND EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT (ABOVE CEILING) FOR ACOUSTICAL PURPOSES. NEW GYPSUM BOARD CEILING FLUSH WITH ADJACENT EXISTING CEILING
TO REMAIN. PATCH AND PAINT CEILING. TRANSFER DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL. GYPSUM ENCLOSURE AROUND EXISTING BEAM. FIREPROOFING TO REMAIN. SEE DETAILS ON A-502. 2 3 4 5 6 7 LIGHT LEGEND: A1LINEAR
PENDANT, 8'-0" LONG A2LINEAR PENDANT, 4'-0" LONG A3LINEAR PENDANT, 6'-0" LONG A42X2 RECESSED DIRECT/INDIRECT A5RECESSED CAN LIGHT A6 FLAT RECESSED LET LIGHT, 8'-0" LONG A7 FLAT RECESSED
LET LIGHT, 3'-0" LONG A8LINEAR PENDANT, 7'-0" LONG CEILING FINISH LEGEND: FOAM ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT ADHERED TO CEILING. PROVIDE SONEX, TECH WEDGE ACOUSTICAL FOAM BY ACOUSTICAL
SOLUTIONS INC. 2" THICK, 2'X4' PANEL SIZE. PROVIDE FULL RANGE OF MFR. COLOR SAMPLES FOR SELECTION EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM NEW ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE
AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM NEW SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILING ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL LIGHT SUSPENDED ABOVE C CHANNEL SYSTEM. CEILING MOUNTED
RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. E Q E Q E Q NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 10% ADDITIONAL ATTIC
STOCK OF ALL CCHANNEL SUSPENDED SYSTEM 2. ALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED. 3. DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8 ' 6 " 8' - 6" EQEQ T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q LEGEND:
SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN GRILLE WIRELESS WALL MOUNTED ACCESS POINT RETRACTABLE POWER CHORD WAP F 2 UNISTRUT OR KINDORF CCHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG
AT 8'-8" AFF. 8' - 6" ALIGN ALIGN 9' - 0" B.O SOFFIT 9' - 6" B.O CURTAIN ROD 38° 10 A-503 INDICATES BLACKOUT CURTAIN AND TRACK (BY OWNER) ALIGN ALIGN D E Q E Q E Q 8 ' 6 " 4' - 3"
UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. ALIGN T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard
McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E
Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1January 20, 2021 As indicated FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-111 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 LEVEL 5 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 TYPICAL
SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING LAYOUT 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING LAYOUT 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING LAYOUT GENERAL NOTES: 1. ONLY DOWNTURNED SPRINKLER
HEADS ARE SHOWN. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR UPTURNED AND DOWNTURNED SPRINKLER HEADS. 2. LIGHTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO MEP FOR CEILING MOUNTED FIXTURES. KEY NOTES: MOVABLE
STORAGE CABINET WITH WOOD TOP (N.I.C.) INDUSTRIAL WORKBENCH WITH BUTCHER BLOCK TOP, ON CASTERS. SIZE 60"X30". (N.I.C.) STORAGE RACK ON CASTERS, APPROX. 7' HIGH. (N.I.C.) BLACK OUT CURTAIN
BOOTH, SUSPENDED FROM CEILING GRID (N.I.C.) FULL HEIGHT WIRE MESH CURTAIN. TRACK SUSPENDED FROM SLAB ABOVE. FLOOR MOUNTED SCREEN WITH METAL GRID PANEL. SEE . EXPERIMENT
AREA, WOOD BOX, ROBOTIC ARM, ETC. (N.I.C.) STOOL ON WHEELS, ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT. (N.I.C.) 8'-8" HIGH OPEN SHELVING. (N.I.C.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 2A-141 9 1 4 ' 0 " 6' - 0" 1' - 0" 1 1/2"
X 1 1/2" STEEL TUBE FRAME, PAINTED. FULLY WELD ALL JOINTS WIRE MESH INFILL BASIS OF DESIGN: CHAOS BY CAMBRIDGE ARCHITECTURAL MESH 1/4" DEEP STABILIZING LEG (STEEL) 1" = 1'-0" PROVIDE
WEIGHT IN BASE FOR STABILITY G F8 F E D C B 1234 G59 H 50044 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 33 8 8 8 8 5 5 5 5 8 8 8 21 2 3 2 1 3 3 1 2 1 22 3 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 6 8 8 8 5 8 1 2 38 8 21 8 66 8
6 6 6 8 6 8 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 LABORATORY 551 STORAGE 551A STORAGE 551B 9 9 9 9 99 6 6 6 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite
1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester,
NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park
Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1January
20, 2021 As indicated FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT PLAN -FIFTH FLOOR A-141 2DEMOUNTABLE TYPE PANEL 3/16" = 1'-0" 1 FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT -LEVEL 5 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" G F8 F
E D 1 1 1 A-502 7A 7A PT-3PT-3PT-3 551 1 NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTING WALL 8 8 14 NEW WALL EXISTING WALL RB, TYP. EXISTING WALL EQEQ 6' - 0" EQEQ 24 1 KEY NOTES: NEW FRAME AND GLAZING.
SEE A-601. WIRELESS WALL MOUNTED ACCESS POINT (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE (SEE RCP) UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB
ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S) DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE.
PROVIDE AT EACH EXTERIOR WINDOW. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE . NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. PROVIDE 8.5" X 11" INSERT. WIRE MESH CURTAINS ON UNISTRUT TRACK ASSEMBLY. GLASS MARKERBOARD
PANEL ON STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING TRACK HARDWARE SYSTEM. FOAM ACOUSTICAL PANELS ADHERED TO CEILING. WIREMOLD WITH POWER RECEPTACLES. TRANSFER DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL. COORDINATE FINAL
LOCATION IN FIELD WITH ARCHITECT. RECESSED FIRE CABINET. DOOR HOLDER CONNECTION. CABLE TRAY. SEE ELECTRICAL. SMOKE DETECTOR. FIN TUBE RADIATOR COVER. INDICATES NEW SHAFT WALL PARTITION,
EXTEND 6" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING, DO NOT DISTURB EXISTING WALL FIRE DAMPERS. RELOCATED CONTROLS WALL STOP PIPING TO SERVICE SINK BELOW, INSTALL TIGHT TO COLUMN, PAINT. ACOUSTICAL WALL
TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL EMERGENCY PHONE. RECESSED PROJECT WALL BOX (FUTURE DISPLAY BY OWNER) CUT VINYL LETTERING, COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT.
½”DEEP AND 3”HIGH MINIMUM. 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 1A-603 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7A 22 23 24 25 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 234 CORRIDOR 50044 A-541 2 6 TYP. 6" 2 10
PT-1 PT-2 13 16 RB, TYP. 20 WAP 11 PT-4 A-502 6 SIM. PT-6 1 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" GF8FEDC CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. A-502 5 5 TYP. 8 TYP. PT-1 PT-2 15 NEW WALL EXISTING
WALL EXISTING WALL NEW WALL 5" 3' - 10" TYP. EQEQ 10 9 A-503 551 1 551 2 10 TYP. 23 S 1 1 1 1 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 3 4 CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. 7 6 2 10 13 551
3 16 1/2" RB, TYP. EQEQ 2 WAPWAP A-503 11 11 16 A-503 7 SS PT-6 1 551 3 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" F E D C CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. 5 TYP. 6 TYP. A-541 6 A-541 5 A-502
2 A-502 2 A-502 2 8 TYP. 22 TYP. 6 A-502 PT-4 15 17 TYP.22 15 21 22 TYP.22 TYP.22 TYP. 22 TYP. 6 TYP. 6 TYP.6 TYP.6 TYP. 10 TYP. 1 111 GENERAL NOTES: 1. FOR POWER / DATA OUTLET LOCATIONS,
SEE 2. WHERE EXISTING WALL HATCH IS NOTED ON ELEVATIONS IT IS TO DELINEATE NEW VS EXISTING WALL LOCATIONS/ EXISTING WALLS ON OTHER ELEVATIONS ARE NOT ALL INDICATED BY THIS HATCH. 3.
ALL ABOVE CEILING ITEMS, INCLUDING PIPING, DUCTS, CONDUITS, ETC. TO BE PAINTED. / 1A-121 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" FE PT-3PT-3 3 A-501 16 16 18 18 14 RB, TYP. EXISTING WALL
19 3' - 10" NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTING WALL LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 3 PT-3 PT-3 NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTING WALL 551 3 RB, TYP. 1 7A LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8"
G F8 7 PT-1 PT-2 A-541 9 16 LEGEND WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
(SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) DATA RECEPTACLE (O.F.C.I.) STROBE LIGHT (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) LIGHT SWITCH CARD READER WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SPACE SENSOR CR WAP S Revisions: Issue for BidDecember
15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1January 20, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-301 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 WEST ELEVATION @ CORRIDOR 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN
ROOM 551 LOOKING NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING EAST 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM
551 LOOKING WEST 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN CORRIDOR 50044 LOOKING EAST 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN CORRIDOR 50044 LOOKING NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 INTERIOR ELEVATION
IN ROOM 551 LOOKING WEST LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 5 EQEQEQEQ 12 12 KEY NOTES: NEW FRAME AND GLAZING. SEE A-601. WIRELESS WALL MOUNTED ACCESS POINT (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS)
SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE (SEE RCP) UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S)
DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE. PROVIDE AT EACH EXTERIOR WINDOW. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE
. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. PROVIDE 8.5" X 11" INSERT. WIRE MESH CURTAINS ON UNISTRUT TRACK ASSEMBLY. GLASS MARKERBOARD PANEL ON STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING TRACK HARDWARE SYSTEM. FOAM ACOUSTICAL
PANELS ADHERED TO CEILING. WIREMOLD WITH POWER RECEPTACLES. TRANSFER DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION IN FIELD WITH ARCHITECT. RECESSED FIRE CABINET. DOOR HOLDER CONNECTION.
CABLE TRAY. SEE ELECTRICAL. SMOKE DETECTOR. FIN TUBE RADIATOR COVER. INDICATES NEW SHAFT WALL PARTITION, EXTEND 6" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING, DO NOT DISTURB EXISTING WALL FIRE DAMPERS.
RELOCATED CONTROLS WALL STOP PIPING TO SERVICE SINK BELOW, INSTALL TIGHT TO COLUMN, PAINT. ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL EMERGENCY PHONE.
RECESSED PROJECT WALL BOX (FUTURE DISPLAY BY OWNER) CUT VINYL LETTERING, COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. ½”DEEP AND 3”HIGH MINIMUM. 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 1A-603 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 7A 22 23 24 25 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 3 8' - 0" 9 PT-1 PT-2 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" G F8 F E D 1 1 1 1 7A 7A PT-3PT-3PT-3 551 1 14 RB, TYP. 551
2 EQEQ 6' - 0" 24 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 0' - 2" 7' - 0" 25 1 NOTE:OWNER TO VERIFY FINAL LETTERING 0' - 5" TYP. Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney
Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering,
P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
1 Addendum #1January 20, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-302 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 571 LOOKING SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 INTERIOR ELEVATION AT WHITE BOARD
PARTITION -ALTERNATE 2 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 WEST ELEVATION @ CORRIDOR -ALTERNATE 1 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 SOUTH ELEVATION @ CORRIDOR PAINTED UNISTRUT C CHANNEL SYSTEM SUSPENDED LED LIGHTS ACOUSTIC
CEILING PANELS FLOOR CONSTRUCTION ABOVE CORNER FITTING SEE / 2A-503 T-INTERSECTION FITTING SEE / 3A-503 INTERSECTION FITTING SEE
/ 4A-503 NOTE:PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED ACCESSORIES FOR THE METAL GRID SYSTEM, INCLUDING HANGARS, RODS, ATTACHMENT TO DECK ABOVE, NUTS, BOLTS, SLOTTED C CHANNEL,
CONNECTION PIECES, BRACING, ETC. PROVIDE MOCKUP GRID AT FULL SIZE IN SINGLE LOCATION TO SERVE AS MODEL FOR THE BALANCE OF THE INSTALLATION ALL COMMENTS OF HANGING METAL GRID SYSTEM
SHALL BE PAINTED. E TRACK ATTACHED TO C PANEL, BASIS OF DESIGN CASCADE ALUMINUM MESH CURTAIN 1/4" DIA. THREADED HANGER ROD. , PROVING BRACING BETWEEN HANGERS WASHER AND BOLT 8' - 8"
EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN BEYOND CENTER MOUNT BEAM CLAMPS REMOVE EXISTING SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING TO INSTALL BEAM CLIP. INSTALL NEW SPRAY ON FIREPROOFING WHERE
DISTURBED. INSTALL GYPSUM BOARD TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING. CARRIER 6" O.C. TYP. 1 TRACK BRACING 4' O.C. A-503 8 HANGING WIRE (TYP.) MAIN BEAM (TYP.) ACOUSTIC LAY-IN
CEILING PANELS (REFER TO R.C.P. FOR TYPE) EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION ABOVE REFER TO R.C.P. CEILING HEIGHT CROSS TEE (TYP.) CONTINUOUS 1/2" SHADOW MOULDING PERIMETER (TYP) PARTITION
-SEE PLAN CEILING HEIGHT REFER TO R.C.P. ANGLE MOLDING REVEAL WIDTH TO MATCH WIDTH OF TEE GRID. ACOUSTIC LAY-IN CEILING PANEL (REFER TO R.C.P. FOR TYPE) FACE OF PARTITION OR FASCIA
LEVEL 6 880' -8" 571 SEALANT TAPE & SPACKLE, TYP. 1 LAYER 5/8" GWB 1 LAYER 1" GWB LINER PANEL STEEL J-RUNNER 2 LAYER 5/8" GWB CORNER BEAD SEALANT EXISTING WALL EXISTING STRUCTURAL
BEAM EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 3 1/8" 2 1/2" EXISTING HVAC UNIT 9' - 1" A-502 8 ATTACH SUSPENSION ROD TO THE SOFFIT LEVEL 6 880' -8" F C-CHANNEL 9' - 0" 9' - 6" DUCT EXISTING STRUCTURAL
BEAMS WITH FIREPROOFING METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD BEAM ENCLOSURE. FIREPROOFING TO REMAIN. INSTALL GYPSUM BOARD TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF FIREPROOFING BLACKOUT CURTAIN TRACK (N.I.C.) METAL
STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT HUNG FROM CEILING FOR FUTURE BLACKOUT CURTAIN (BLACKOUT CURTAINS AND TRACK BY OWNER) PAINTED C CHANNEL THREADED HANGER ROD BRACING PAINTED C CHANNEL PAINTED
C CHANNEL LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 EXISTING WINDOW NEW ROLLER SHADES FUR OUT WALL USING 1 5/8" STUD AND 5/8" GWB ACOUSTICAL PANELS A-503 12 A-503 13 ± 11' - 0 1/2" EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM
WITH FIRE PROOFING 1 5/8" STUD 2 1/2" STUD ALIGN CONTINUOUS WALL TRACK SHIM AS REQUIRED ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP ALIGN DRIVE CHAIN ROLLER TUBE AND SHADE ASSEMBLY WITH DOUBLE SHADE 1" EDGE
BAND ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP SHIM AS REQUIRED CONTINUOUS WALL TRACK EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION MATCHING VENEER SPLINE RAW SAW-CUT EDGE SHIM AS REQUIRED ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP CONTINUOUS TRACK
1/16" 1/8" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM WITH FIREPROOFING NEW OR EXISTING CORRIDOR WALL ± 10' - 9 1/2" METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD BEAM ENCLOSURE. FIREPROOFING TO REMAIN.
Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway,
Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065
518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1January 20, 2021 As indicated DETAILS III A-503 13D VIEW LOOKING AT THE GRID SYSTEM3" = 1'-0"
5SECTION DETAIL AT CURTAIN ROD 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 A.C.T. CEILING DETAIL (TYP.) 12" = 1'-0" 8 CEILING EDGE DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 9 SOFFIT DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 10 SECTION DETAIL AT BLACKOUT
BOOTH 3" = 1'-0" 2 CORNER FITTING 3" = 1'-0" 3 T-INTERSECTION FITTING 3" = 1'-0" 4 INTERSECTION FITTING 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 11 SECTION DETAIL AT ACCOUSTICAL PANELS 6" = 1'-0" 12 ACCOUSTIC
PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT BASE 6" = 1'-0" 13 ACCOUSTIC PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT TOP 6" = 1'-0" 14 ACCOUSTIC PANEL BUTT ATTACHMENT AND CORNER DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 7 BEAM ENCLOSURE
AT CORRIDOR WALL -D1INSULATED -HOLLOW METAL DOOR SEE SCHEDULE SEE SCHEDULE DOOR TYPES SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" -D2FIRE RATED METAL DOOR WITH VISION LITE NOTE: GL-11 HOUR RATED GLAZING INCLUDES
GLASS PRIVACY FILM, BASIS OF DESIGN: SOLYX SXJ-0561 MATTE FINE DOT GRADIENT 72". GL-2NON RATED DOUBLE GLAZED UNIT INCLUDES GLASS PRIVACY FILM, BASIS OF DESIGN: SOLYX SXJ-0561 MATTE
FINE DOT GRADIENT 72". -D3METAL DOOR WITH VISION LITE SEE DOOR SCHEDULE J4 H3 S4 GL-1 H2 S1 J5 GRADIENT FILM 6' - 2" 3' - 7" 2 3/4" 2 3/4" 2" 2" 2 3/4" 2 3/4" SEE DOOR SCHEDULE SEE
DOOR SCHEDULE J4 H3 S4 GL-2 J2 H2 S1 PANIC BAR J4 H3 S3 SEE DOOR SCHEDULE GL-1 J5 H2 S1 2' - 4" GRADIENT FILM 6' - 2" 3' - 6" 2 3/4"2 3/4" 2 3/4" 2" 2" 2 3/4" J4 H3 S3 M1 EQEQEQEQEQEQEQ
SEE DOOR SCHEDULE SEE DOOR SCHEDULE GL-2GL-2 J2 H2 S1 2' - 4" GRADIENT FILM 6' - 2" 2 3/4"2 3/4" PANIC BAR SIM. 2 3/4" 2 3/4" 2 3/4" 22' - 3"9' - 10 1/2" 2"2 3/4" 15' - 8" -F1FIRE RATED
STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM -F2STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM FRAME TYPES SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" -F6ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY FIRE RATED STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND
STOREFRONT SYSTEM -F5ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 0' - 2" DOOR SIZE SEE SCHEDULE -F4FIRE RATED METAL FRAME SYSTEM 0' - 2" DOOR SIZE SEE SCHEDULE
-F3FULLY WELDED INSULATED HOLLOW METAL J3 H1 J2 H2 S1 0' -2"0' -2" SIM. GL-2GL-2 REMOVABLE MULLION WHERE SPECIFIED PANIC BAR SEE SCHEDULE SEE SCHEDULE 10" GL-1 Revisions: Issue for
Bid Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Scale: January 20, 2021 Rhodes Hall Fifth Floor Renovation Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 1 Addendum #1 December 15, 2020 January 20, 2021 1/2" = 1'-0" DOOR AND GLAZING SCHEDULE A-601 500/1CORRIDOR1 HREXISTINGEXISTING26' - 0"8' - 8"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET
3H1J1-EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME - SALAVAGE AND REINSTALL 551/1LABORATORY1 HRD2HM / GLASS13' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F1STLPNTSET 1H2J5S1PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. RATED DOORS INSTALLATION AND GAP
MEASUREMENT MUST COMPLY WITH NFPA 80 STANDARD. 551/2LABORATORYNONED3HM / GLASS26' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F2STLPNTSET 2H2J2S1PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT 551/3LABORATORYNONED3HM
/ GLASS26' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F4STLPNTSET 2H2J2 SIM.S1PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT 551A/1STORAGENONED1HM12' - 6"7' - 0"0' - 2"F1HMPNTSET 4H1J3-3/4" UNDERCUT 551B/1STORAGENONED1HM13'
- 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"F1HMPNTSET 4H1J3-3/4" UNDERCUT 551/1LABORATORY1 HRD2HM / GLASS13' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F6STLPNTSET 1H2J5S1ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY. PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. RATED DOORS INSTALLATION
AND GAP MEASUREMENT MUST COMPLY WITH NFPA 80 STANDARD. 551/2LABORATORYNONED3HM / GLASS26' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F5STLPNTSET 2H2J2S1ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY. PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT
GENERAL NOTES: 1.ALL INTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE LOCK SETS ARE SARGENT "STANDARD LEVER, STYLE J" MORTISE LOCKS/EXIT DEVICES OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2.REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR DOOR SWING. 3.A SOLID
WALL FROM TOP OF FRAME TO UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE ABOVE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED ABOVE ALL FRAMES, INCLUDE BRACING AT DOOR OPENINGS. PROVIDE HEADER AND/OR LINTEL AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT WALL
CONSTRUCTION AT HEAD OF ALL FRAMES. SEE WALL PARTITIONS A-603. 4.ALL CYLINDERS/KEYING TO BE ‘BEST’. 5.SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GLAZING TYPES. 6.PROVIDE ALL ACCESS CONTROL COMPONENTS AND
ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. 7.OPENING FORCE ON ALL DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED
5 POUNDS. 8.HARDWARE SHALL COME FROM A SINGLE SOURCE. SUBSTITUTIONS TO THE SETS BELOW IS SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT AND UNIVERSITY. 9.SEE THE POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLAN AND
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ACCESS CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND DIAGRAMS. 10.DOOR CLOSERS, WHERE SCHEDULED, SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INTERIOR (NON-CORRIDOR) SIDE. 11.POWER SUPPLY
BPS-24-1 SHALL BE INCLUDED FOR EACH ELECTRIFIED MORTISE LOCKSET. READER INTERFACE MODULES TO BE FIELD LOCATED ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE DOOR. 12.INSTALL ALL FIRE RATED GLAZING PER
MFR. INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTAIN REQ'D RATING. 13.POWER TRANSFER (WHERE SCHEDULED) SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN MIDDLE AND TOP HINGE. 14.SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOOR HARDWARE SETS. -ALT 1 -ALT
1 DOOR AND FRAME SYSTEM SCHEDULE DOOR NO.ROOM NAME FIRE RATINGDOOR TYPE DOOR MATERIAL # OF LEAFS DOOR FRAME TYPE FRAME MATERIALFINISH HARDWARE SET HEAD DETAIL JAMB DETAILSILL DETAILCOMMENTS
WIDTHHEIGHTTHICKNESS 50021/1WOMEN1 HREXISTINGEXISTING13' - 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET 5H1J350022/1MEN1 HREXISTINGEXISTING13' - 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET 5H1J31 GWBGYPSUM
WALL BOARD*SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM WALL BOARD *SEE PARTITION TYPES FOR GWB TYPES GWB-IRIMPACT RESISTANT GWBSECTION 092900 -GYPSUM WALL BOARD CEILING GWBPAINTED GYPSUM BOARDSECTION 092900
-GYPSUM DRYWALL ACT-1CEILING PANEL SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS ULTIMA TILE WITH REGULAR EDGE AND PRELUDE XL SUSPENSION
SYSTEM BY ARMSTRONG CODEDEFINITIONSPECIFICATION FLOOR EXPOSED CONC.EXISTING CONCRETESECTION 096726 -RESINOUS FLOORING CPT-1CARPET TILESECTION 096813 -TILE CARPETING BASE RB-1THERMOSET
RUBBER BASE -COLOR 1SECTION 096512 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WALLS PRODUCT SIKAFLOOR 160 (PRIMER), SIKAFLOOR 217 (CLEAR EPOXY COAT), SIKAFLOOR 315N (CHEMICAL RESISTANT CLEAR URETHANE),
AND SIKAFLOOR 2870 (LINE STRIPING) HONOR ROLL COLLECTION, STYLE "CUBIC," BY INTERFACE JOHNSONITE 6" RUBBER BASE APT -1ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENTSECTION 098414 -ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT
DECOUSTICS SOLO GROOVED WOOD PANEL PAINT PT -1PAINT -WALL GENERALSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS AFP -1ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENTSECTION 098400 -ACOUSTICAL
CEILING TREATMENT SONEX TEC WEDGE FOAM BY ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS PT -2PAINT -UPPER WALLSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -3PAINT -WALL GENERAL, CORRIDORSECTION
099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -4PAINT -BLACKOUT BOOTHSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -5PAINT -CEILINGSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES
SEE SPECIFICATIONS WINDOW TREATMENTS WT-1MANUAL OPERATED WINDOW SHADE WITH SINGLE ROLLER SECTION 122413 -WINDOW SHADES DUAL ROLLER URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE PLASTIC LAMINATE PL-1PLASTIC
LAMINATE WINDOW SILL SECTION 062000 WILSONART HPL (HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE) PT -6PAINT -ACCENT PAINTSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR
CONSTRUCTION STEEL STUD (1) LAYER 5/8" WALLBOARD EACH SIDE. SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE CONTINUOUS FIRERATED SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND AT VERTICAL INTERFACE AT FIRE RATED PARTITIONS.
CONTINUOUS ACOUSTIC SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS. CONTINUOUS STEEL RUNNER A: NON RATED ALL NOTES REFER TO BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION, U.O.N.
GAUGE AND SPACING AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPAN AND DEFLECTION REQUIREMENTS CONTINUOUS FIRERATED SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE AT FIRE RATED PARTITIONS. CONTINUOUS ACOUSTIC
SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS. CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE MOVEMENT GAP PARTITION: NON RATED A1 4 7/8" (3 5/8" STUD)
A STUD DEPTHS BASED ON THE FOLLOWING: 2 1/2" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 11'-3" 3 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 16'-5" 4" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 18'-4" TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE
FOR WALL FINISH. PLAN NOTES HEAD BASE BPARTITION-1 HOUR RATED ASSEMBLY TO COMPLY WITH UL U419 B1 B: 1 HOUR-RATED WIDTH TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTINGPLAN NOTES HEAD C: 2 HOUR RATED SHAFT
WALL -2 HOUR RATED ASSEMBLY TO COMPLY WITH UL U415 C1 5"2 1/2" STUD C (2) LAYER 1/2" FIRECODE C GWB UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS FIRE RATED SEALANT BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL
INTERFACE TYPICAL CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE MOVEMENT GAP STEEL STUD SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE CONTINUOUS FIRE RATED SEALANT BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL
INTERFACE TYPICAL CONTINUOUS STEEL RUNNER TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 1 1/2" THERMAFIBER SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BLANKET 1" SHAFT WALL LINER BASE PLAN NOTES HEAD SCHEDULED
FLOOR FINISH AND BASE ACOUSTICAL CAULKING UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT WALL FURRING -NON RATED NO ACOUSTIC BATT E TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION,
U.O.N. RESILIENT CHANNEL BASE E: INSULATED E1 4 1/8" 1/2" RESILIENT CHANNEL SCHEDULED WALL FINISH 5/8" WALLBOARD 3/4" PLYWOOD MINERAL WOOL AS PER FIRE RATED MASTIC MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION
1/2" AIR SPACE PLAN NOTES HEAD FULL HEIGHT SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET AT PARTITION TYPE P U.O.N. D: NON-INSULATED TYPICAL: 1. WIDTH VARIES, SEE PLAN 2. ANCHOR STUD TO EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION,
SPACE CLIPS EQUALLY AS REQUIRED PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION FOR HEIGHT OF FURRED WALL UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION NOTE: STUD DEPTHS BASED ON BRACING BACK TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED
CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE MOVEMENT GAP AS REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT WALL FURRING -NON RATED WITH INSULATION D1 5 1/4" 3 5/8" STUD
WITH 1/2" SPACE STUD DEPTHS BASED ON THE FOLLOWING: 1 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 11'-0" 2 1/2" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 12'-6" 3 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 18'-7" D2 3 5/8" 2 1/2" STUD WITH 1/2" SPACE
BASE SCHEDULED WALL FINISH. SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE ACOUSTICAL CAULKING STEEL RUNNER TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. D 000 RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE PLASTIC SIGN
FIELD 1/8" SLIDING ACRYLIC LENS INSERTED INTO C-CHANNEL SHAPE FOR PAPER INSERT INSTALLATION SPACE FOR PAPER INSERT 0.06" CLEAR ACRYLIC UNDERSIZED BACKER PROVIDE BACK PLATE (SAME SIZE
AND COLOR AS SIGN) WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE PLASTIC SIGN FIELD 1/8" SLIDING ACRYLIC LENS INSERTED INTO C-CHANNEL SHAPE FOR PAPER INSERT INSTALLATION SPACE
FOR PAPER INSERT PROVIDE BACK PLATE (SAME SIZE AND COLOR AS SIGN) WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS INTERIOR ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE: 1. A ROOM SIGN, AS DETAILED HERE, SHALL BE PROVIDED AND
INSTALLED FOR EACH NEW DOOR IN THE PROJECT AREA. 2. WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS, PROVIDE BACKING (SAME SIZE AS SIGN) ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE GLASS. 3. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING SCHEDULE
LAYOUT, PROFILES AND PRODUCT COMPONENTS, INCLUDING MATERIAL DETAILS, DIMENSIONS, ANCHORAGE, AND ACCESSORIES FOR ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL BEFORE STARTING FABRICATION. 4. ALL SIGNAGE
SYSTEMS SHALL MEET REQUIREMENTS OF THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES (ADAAG) AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS. 5. RAISED LETTERING AND/OR NUMERALS:
COMPUTER-CUT CHARACTERS WITH MATTE FINISH, COLOR AS SPECIFIED FROM MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD COLOR CHART. SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 1/32" FROM THE SIGN SURFACE. PHOTOPOLYMER TAGS SHALL
NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. 6. GRADE 2 BRAILLE: CLEAR RASTER BALLS COMPUTER DRILLED AND PRESSURE INSERTED INTO SIGN FACE, SHALL BE HALFHEMISPHERE IN SHAPE AND SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 0.025"
FROM THE SIGN SURFACE. OTHER METHODS OF MANUFACTURE, INCLUDING SURFACE APPLIED PHOTOPOLYMER BRAILLE TAGS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. 7. FASTENER: VERY HIGH BOND (VHB) .030 INCH THICK DOUBLE-FACE
TAPE. FINISHES: 1. COLORS AS SELECTED FROM THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CHART. 2. PATTERNS: AS SELECTED FROM THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CHART. 1' - 0" 0' - 9 1/2" 7/8" THUMBSLOT 0'
- 8 3/8" 0' - 10 7/8" 0' - 11" 1/8" ACRYLIC BACKER INSERT SLOT VINYL TAPE FILLER 1/16" NON-GLARE ACRYLIC FILLER 1/16" NON-GLARE ACRYLIC Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard
McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E
Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 January 20, 2021
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 Addendum #1January 20, 2021 As indicated FINISH SCHEDULE & PARTITION TYPES A-603 6" = 1'-0" 1 ROOM SIGNAGE DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" 2 ROOM SIGNAGE DETAIL
FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBERROOM NAMEFLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH WALL FINISH CEILING FINISHCOMMENTS NORTHEASTSOUTHWEST 50044CORRIDORCP-1RB-1PT-3PT-3PT-3PT-3ACT 551LABORATORYEXPOSED CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1
PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5INCLUDE FLOOR PAINT MARKING ON EXPOSED CONCRETE 551BSTORAGEEXPOSED CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5 551ASTORAGEEXPOSED CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5
CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CRCRCRCR CR CR CR CR CRCRCRCR CRCR CRCR J J J J J M M G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594
STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room
50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room
521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E)LP-5(1) (E)LP-5(2) (E)DP-5AC1 (E)DP-CC1
(E)UP-5A (E)UP-5B (E)UP-5E T T T (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 (E) GFI OC GFI 1 351 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 28 5 50 47 6 7 8 910 11 12 35 12 12 39 14 16 17 15 30 18 19 32 34 20 21 36 38 22 23
40 42 24 25 44 46 27 26 48 VAV VAV 29 29 GFI12 2 T UP-5LAB NTX-45-5 GFI GFI 5 5 3133 41 43 45 49 54 3 37 41 45 47 67 54 51 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 (E) VAV 55 57 5 5 12 OC GFI 69 67 65 63
71 71 OC GFI OC GFI DOOR OPERATOR DOOR OPERATOR 6 6 UP-5LAB 66 UP-5LAB 66 13 53 7 1 41 E-200 GENERAL NOTES: A. ALL CIRCUITING SHOWN IN THIS LAB SPACE SHALL BE FED FROM PANEL UP-5LAB.
B. CORD REEL SHALL BE FED FROM A JUNCTION BOX BY 15' OF SO CABLE. POWER CONNECTION TO JUNCTION BOX SHALL BE FED BY EMT FROM SOURCE PANEL. C. ALL GFI RECEPTACLES NEAR SINKS SHALL BE
GASKETED GFI RATED FOR WASHDOWN APPLICATIONS. D. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH END USER FOR CEILING HOOK LOCATIONS TO MOUNT CORD REEL. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE KINDORF WITH RACK
FOR CORD REEL PERMANENT LOCATION WHEN NOT IN USE ABOVE CEILING. THIS LOCATION SHALL BE COORDINATED IN FIELD AROUND OTHER CONTRACTORS SCOPE AND BE COORDINATED WITH END USER AND ARCHITECT
SO THAT IT IS IN AN EASILY ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. F. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT VAV AS NECESSARY. CONFIRM WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FOR EXACT LOCATIONS. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506
Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN POWER NEW WORK E-200 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - POWER NEW WORK E-200 DRAWING NOTES 1 DEDICATED
RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED UNDERCOUNTER ON A DEDICATED CIRCUIT TO SERVE THE DRAIN PUMP THAT WILL BE INSTALLED UNDERNEATH SINK. 2 RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED IN ABOVE COUNTER CABINETS
THAT WILL FEED UNDERCABINET LIGHTING. RECEPTACLE SHALL BE TIED INTO RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT #12. 3 WIREMOLD THAT SHALL FEED THESE (2) RECEPTACLES SHALL RUN ALONG WALL INTO AND BEHIND THE
CABINET. RECEPTACLES SHALL BE FLUSH MOUNTED TO SIDE OF CABINET. 4 RECEPTACLES SHALL BE FED FROM 2 CHANNEL ANODIZED CLEAR FINISH WIREMOLD. RECEPTACLES SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 36" AFF. 5
JUNCTION BOX SHALL FEED (3) LAB VALVE BOXES. 20A-1P CIRCUIT SHALL FEED THEM, CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED. FINAL JUNCTION BOX LOCATION SHALL BE DETERMINED IN FIELD. FIELD COORDINATE
WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 6 PROVIDE WIRING IN 3/4" CONDUIT PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 7 CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM WITH ARCHITECT DRAWINGS FOR FINAL LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT
FOR PWB-270 CRESTRON WALL BOX, THAT CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 120V POWER CONNECTION TIED INTO NEAREST RECEPTACLE AVAILABLE. 1 1 Addendum #1 January 20, 2021
T GB CP ABCDE WAP WAP WAP CR CRCR DC DC DC G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR
588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room
50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room
516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 E-202 GENERAL NOTES: A. TIE CARD READER
INTO NEAREST EXISTING RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. B. NEW CABLE TRAY SHALL BE 12" WIDE. C. PROVIDE (3)20A-1P CIRCUIT FOR DOOR HARDWARE CONTROLS FROM PANEL UP-5LAB. D. EXISTING CABLE TRAY IN
LABORATORY MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED DEPENDING ON EXISTING HEIGHT. CABLE TRAY SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN 9'-0" & 9'6". Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN SPECIAL SYSTEMS NEW WORK E-202 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL 5TH FLOOR PLAN - SPECIAL SYSTEMS E-202 DRAWING NOTES 1 THE 2 CHANNEL
WIREMOLD SHALL HAVE 6 DATA PORTS ABOVE THE RECEPTACLES. 2 (1) TELEPHONE CONNECTION FOR AN EMERGENCY PHONE. REFER TO ARCHITECT DRAWINGS FOR FINAL EM PHONE LOCATION. 3 (1) NETWORK CONNECTION
FOR PWB-270 CRESTRON WALL BOX. REFER TO ARCHITECT DRAWINGS FOR FINAL LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT. 1 Addendum #1 January 20, 2021 1 H-501 1 NOT TO SCALE STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL
POINT LOAD SHED-1 STEAM LOAD SHED-2 STEAM LOAD SHED-3 STEAM LOAD SHED-4 STEAM LOAD SHED-5 STEAM LOAD SHED-6 STEAM ZONE CONTROL NON-RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE INDEX
TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 60 DEG F RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, RESETTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE SPACE TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 60 DEG F INDEX SPACE AIR CHANGE RATE TO
MIN UNPCCUPIED AC/PH AND CRITICAL SPACES (2) UNDER CONTROL AIR HANDLING SYSTEM CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - NON CRITICAL UNDER CONTROL TEMPERATURE TO 55 DEG F INDEX DISCHARGE
AIR INDEX UNIT "OFF" 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE TO 55 DEG F (1) LABORATORY MAKE-UP AIR SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL INDEX DISCHARGE
AIR TEMPERATURE TO 55 DEG F (1) LABORATORY EXHAUST SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL HYDRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL REHEAT LOOP SYSTEM - NON CRITICAL UNDER CONTROL SCHEDULE, WHICHEVER IS LOWER DEG F OR
MAINTAIN RESET INDEX LOOP TEMPERATURE TO 140 CLOSE STEAM VALVE, PUMPS "ON" REHEAT LOOP SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL GLYCOL HEATING LOOP SYSTEM UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (1) RETAIN
ORIGINAL SET POINT IF LOWER THAN 55 DEG F. (2) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL" SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS,
SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS
CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX NOT TO SCALE STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL SCHEMATICS AND SYSTEM SUMMARIES GS GR AI P BO M VFD S S SCAO COM R BI - AV: SPEED (RPM) - AV: POWER (KW) TYPICAL
VFD CONTROL/MONITORING POINTS T AI T AI SETPOINT AV SETPOINT AV M VFD M VFD P BI BACnet REFER TO PLANS FOR LOCATION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER. REMOTE DIFFERENTIAL STATIC NOT TO SCALE REHEAT
HOT WATER SYSTEM CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY 3 P-18 P-19 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER (CV-7A & CV-7B) REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP PUMPS (P-19, P-20) GENERAL
CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS
SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETPOINTS REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY TEMPERATURE: 13 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE: XX PSI (ADJ) START/STOP WITH THE SYSTEM ARE OPEN
AND CALLING FOR DEMAND. SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED WHEN 10% OF THE CONTROL VALVES ASSOCIATED AND THE LEAD PUMP SHALL INDEX TO STANDBY AND BE OFF. HOURS OF OPERATION THE STANDBY PUMP SHALL
INDEX TO LEAD AND RUN, THE LEAD PUMP SHALL START, STANDBY PUMP SHALL BE OFF. AFTER 1000 AND RUN. ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD PUMP, THE STANDBY PUMP SHALL INDEX TO LEAD SPEED CONTROL CRITICAL
ZONE CONTROL VALVE POSITION AT 95% OPEN. LOOP DIFFERENTIAL SETPOINT SHALL BE RESET AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT. THE WHEN
ENABLED, PUMP SHALL MODULATE VIA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE AS REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP CONTROL TO LEAD AND THE LEAD HEAT EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX TO LAG. BE CLOSED. AFTER 1000 HOURS (ADJ)
THE LAG HEAT EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX EXCHANGER ISOLATION CONTROL VALVE AND STEAM CONTROL VALVE SHALL WATER REHEAT LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. THE LAG HEAT STEAM CONTROL VALVE
SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE HOT THE LEAD HEAT EXCHANGER ISOLATION CONTROL VALVE SHALL OPEN AND THE EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX TO LEAD. ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD EXCHANGER CONTROL
VALVE(S), THE LAG HEAT CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL POINT DAYTIME (DEFCON 3) LOAD SHED 1 - CHILLED WATER (DEFCON 2) LOAD SHED 2 - CHILLED WATER NIGHT EMERGENCY (DEFCON 1)
LOAD SHED 3 - CHILLED WATER EMERGENCY (DEFCON) LOAD SHED 4 - CHILLED WATER LCS ZONE CONTROL NON-RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE UNDER CONTROL CHILLED WATER COIL CONTROL
VALVE INDEX CHILLED WATER COIL CONTROL VALVE CLOSED RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, RESTTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE VALVE CLOSED INDEX CHILLED WATER CONTROL CRITICAL SPACES
(2) UNDER CONTROL AIR HANDLING SYSTEM CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - NON CRITICAL SET POINT TO 65 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 70 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE
AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 75 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE VALVE CLOSED INDEX CHILLED WATER CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL LABORATORY MAKE-UP
AIR SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL SET POINT TO 65 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE LABORATORY EXHAUST SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL HYDRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL BUILDING RECIRCULATION LOOP - NON
CRITICAL INDEX CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE TO 53 DEG F INDEX PUMPS "OFF" AND OPEN RECICULATING LOOP VALVE TO 100% BUILDING RECIRCULATION LOOP - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (1) RETAIN
FREE COOLING IF REQUIRED AND AVAILABLE (2) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL" SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS,
SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION T AI T AI CV-7 AOE GHWS GHWR 2 POINT SCHEDULE REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER CV-7 HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV
SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X IF NOT PROVIDED GLOBALLY GLYCOL LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE
X X X X X GLYCOL LOOP RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X + / - 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMP
SETPOINT X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE X X X X 10% DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS REHEAT HOT WATER
LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SYSTEM PRESSURE X X X X LOW PRESSURE X REFER TO PLANS REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP START/STOP X X X TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT
WATER PUMP STATUS X X X X FAILURE X VIA CONTACT ON DRIVE - TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP SPEED COMMAND X X X TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP POWER (KW) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK
POINT - TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP SPEED (RPM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT - TYPICAL OF 2 NOT TO SCALE 4 INDICATES EXISTING M SETPOINT AV T AI N.C. T AI AIR TEMPERATURE
(E)OUTSIDE AO (E)P-16 (E)GHWS (E)GHWR E P S S CS BI BO SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP CONTROL VALVE GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP PUMP (P-16) SHOWN SOLID ON THE
CONTROL DIAGRAM) (EXISTING CONTROL POINTS ARE SHOWN DASHED AND NEW CONTROL POINTS ARE GENERAL ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. CONTROL POINTS SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED. EXISTING
SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH NEW CONTROL POINTS. ALL EXISTING SETPOINTS GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP SUPPLY TEMPERATURE: SEE RESET SCHEDULE SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH
THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING HEAT EXCHANGER (E)CV-5 HOT
WATER LOOP (E)ACS-3&4 PREHEAT MODIFIED CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: ACS-3&4 GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER (CV-5) START/STOP FOR DEMAND. WHEN THE CONTROL VALVE
ON HEAT EXCHANGER CV-7 IS OPEN AND CALLING SYSTEM SHALL BE WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 55î€ GLYCOL PREHEAT HOT WATER LOOP CONTROL TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. REQUIRED TO
MAINTAIN THE GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP SUPPLY WATER THE HEAT EXCHANGER STEAM CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS SCHEDULE: THE SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE SHALL BE RESET ON THE FOLLOWING SWT
= 18 ---OAT = 10F & SWT = 14 ---OAT = 5 1 January 14, 20211 Addendum #1 EXISTING GLYCOL PREHEAT LOOP CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY Revisions: Richard McElhiney
Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering,
P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
December 4, 2020 December 15, 2020Issued for Bid S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI PLAN VIEW ELEVATION VIEW 3'-6"4'-1"4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-1" 3'-10.5" 23'-3.5" 1 2 2 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 4'-2" 3 MAKE-UP AIR SUPPLY AIR 1 8 10910910 2'-1" 2 2 4 5 6 7 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Scale: As Indicated January 20, 2021 Rhodes Hall Fifth Floor Renovation Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNIT DIMENSIONS & DETAILS -
HVAC H-700 DRAWING NOTES 1 35x14 MAKE UP AIR CONNECTION. 2 ACCESS DOOR. 3 PRE-FILTER AND FINAL FILTERS. 4 40% ETHLYENE GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY COIL. 5 SUPPLY AIR FAN. 6 40% PROPLYENE GLYCOL
PRE-HEAT COIL. 7 CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL. 8 26x16 SUPPLY AIR CONNECTION. 9 8" BASE FRAME. 10 6" CONCRETE PAD, REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS. NOT TO SCALE 1 AIR HANDLING UNIT ACS-8 DETAIL
1 Addendum #1 December 15, 2020 January 20 , 2021 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130
F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers
Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes:
Scale: As Indicated January 20, 2021 Rhodes Hall Fifth Floor Renovation Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 SCHEDULES - HVAC H-800 2. PROVIDE FILTER
WITH 36"x36" CLARK AIR SYSTEM SIDE-LOCK FILTER HOUSING. 1. PROVIDE FILTER WITH INTEGRAL 1" RECESS FOR USE WITH PRE-FILTER. REMARKS: PRE-FILTER 2 24 12 4 14 Tri-Dim Tri-Pleat Ultra F-3
DUCT MOUNTED (E)LEF-1 SIDE SERVICE 4400 0.18 1.0 1 24 24 4 VARIES PLEATED PANEL MERV 9 40-45 29 Tri-Dim Tri-Pleat Ultra 2 1 24 12 12 58 VILEDON MV85 F-1 ACS-8 ACS-8 FINAL FILTER FRONT
ACCESS 3700 0.23 1.0 1 24 24 12 VARIES V BANK MERV 13A 80-90 131 VILEDON MV85 1 2 24 12 2 8 F-1 ACS-8 ACS-8 PRE-FILTER FRONT ACCESS 3700 0.31 0.75 1 24 24 2 VARIES PLEATED PANEL MERV
8 25-30 17 CAMFILL FARR 30/30 (In.) (In.) (In.) (CFM) HEIGHT WIDTH LENGTH RATING (%) (Sq. Ft.) BANK NO. AIR FLOW (In. WC) (In. WC) NO. SIZE ARRANGEMENT FRAME MERV EFFICIENCIES AREA
FILTER LOCATION SERVICE TYPE SYSTEM INITIAL P.D. FINAL P.D. CARTRIDGES HOLDING EFFICIENCY MEDIA MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS AIR FILTER SCHEDULE LP-1 ROOF ACS-8 INTAKE ALUMINUM
7.1 5 46 19 3/4" 46 3700 525 0.055 GREENHECK WIH - 32x32 (CFM) (FPM) (Sq. Ft.) (In.) (In.) (In.) FLOW VEL. (In. WC) AREA TIERS WIDTH HEIGHT DEPTH AIR THROAT MAX P.D. UNIT NO. LOCATION
SERVICE TYPE MATERIAL THROAT NO. OF DIMENSIONS (APPROX.) AIR PERFORMANCE MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS LOUVERED PENTHOUSE SCHEDULE RHC-3 LABORATORY 551 EQUIPMENT 551 FLANGED 30.2
700 55 95 0.15 414.8 2.0 130 100 0.4 WATER 6 5 13.5 18 AEROFIN W-5.0CF-13.5X18.0-6-0.333 RHC-2 LABORATORY 551 EQUIPMENT 551 FLANGED 56.2 1300 55 95 0.22 436.4 4.0 130 100 0.2 WATER
8 5 16.5 26 AEROFIN W-5.0CF-16.5X26.0-8-0.666 RHC-1 LABORATORY 551 EQUIPMENT 551 FLANGED 59.6 1380 55 95 0.18 463.2 4.0 130 100 0.9 WATER 6 5 16.5 26 AEROFIN W-5.0CF-16.5X26.0-6-0.333
(CFM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (In. W.C.) (FPM) (GPM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (Ft. HD) (In.) (In.) FLOW TEMP. TEMP. P.D. VELOCITY FLOW TEMP. TEMP. P.D. INCH LENGTH WIDTH (MBH) AIR ENT. AIR LVG.
AIR AIR MAX. FACE WATER ENT. WATER LVG. WATER WATER FLUID DEEP PER UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE MOUNTING CAPACITY AIR SIDE WATER SIDE ROWS FINS COIL FACE DIMENSIONS MANUFACTURER & MODEL
No. REMARKS HEATING COIL SCHEDULE - HOT WATER CV-7 PENTHOUSE MER REHEAT LOOP PLATE EXCHANGER 9.5 140 105 150 0.63 40% EG 10 100 130 150 0.55 5 14 WATER 61.03 BELL AND GOSSETT GPX-AP20
(GPM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (GPM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (FPS) RATE ENT. LVG. (MBH) (Ft. HD) RATE ENT. LVG. (MBH) (Ft. HD) TUBE VEL. PASSES (Sq. Ft.) FLOW WATER TEMP. CAPACITY PRESS. DROP FLUID
FLOW WATER TEMP. CAPACITY PRESS. DROP MAXIMUM NO. OF FLUID SURFACE AREA UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE TYPE HIGH TEMP. SIDE LOW TEMP. SIDE HEAT TRANSFER MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS
HEAT EXCHANGER SCHEDULE - WATER TO GLYCOL A RETURN STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL 355-RL 2 SUPPLY STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL 272-RL 1 SUPPLY STEEL WHITE TITUS MODEL TMS TYPE APPLICATION MATERIAL
FINISH MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS REGISTER GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE 2. INTEGRAL SOUND ATTENUATOR. 1. FIBER FREE LINER. REMARKS: VAV-2 LOUNGE 568 520 270 0.01 8 22 27 TITUS
DESV 1,2 VAV-1 CORRIDOR 50044 450 300 0.01 8 19 25 TITUS DESV 1,2 (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC) FLOW FLOW MAX CFM (In.) AIR AIR PRESS AT SIZE AT 1" S.P. AT 1" S.P. UNIT NO. SERVICE MAX MIN MIN
INLET INLET RAD N.C. DISCH N.C. MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS VAV - SINGLE DUCT - AIR TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE 1. COIL PERFORMANCE BASED ON TURBULATORS INSIDE OF THE TUBES. REMARKS:
HRC-2 PENTHOUSE MER EXHAUST AIR STANDARD FLANGED 150 4400 70 45 0.55 489 12 45.76 70 38.6 40% PG 8 12 36 36 AEROFIN W 1, 2 HRC-1 PENTHOUSE MER OUTSIDE AIR STANDARD FLANGED 150 3700
-5 25 0.74 431 P-20 12 42.43 -5 32.8 40% PG 8 10 37.5 33 AEROFIN W 1 (CFM) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (In. W.C.) (FPM) (GPM) (Ft. HD) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (In.) (In.) FLOW TEMP. TEMP. P.D. VELOCITY
NO. FLOW P.D. TEMP. TEMP. INCH LENGTH WIDTH (MBH) AIR ENT. AIR LVG. AIR AIR MAX. FACE PUMP WATER WATER ENT. WATER LVG. WATER FLUID DEEP PER UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE TYPE MOUNTING CAPACITY
AIR SIDE WATER SIDE ROWS FINS COIL FACE DIMENSIONS MANUFACTURER & MODEL No. REMARKS ENERGY RECOVERY "RUN-AROUND" COIL SCHEDULE 6. PROVIDE WITH TIGHT SHUT-OFF 5. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY
DRAW BAND CLAMPS IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 4. PROVIDE WITH FAN STATIC RESET IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 3. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY SOUND NEUTRALIZER IF VENTURI STYLE
VALVE IS PROVIDED. 2. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL RANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SETPOINTS IN SOFTWARE. 1. REFER TO THE LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES
FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. REMARKS: GEV-3 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 3 12" 1790 180 800 400 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6 GEV-2 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 2 14" 2750 250 1500
750 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6 GEV-1 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 1 14" 2750 250 1380 680 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6 SAV-3 LABORATORY 551
ZONE 3 12" 1790 180 700 300 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6 SAV-2 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 2 14" 2750 250 1400 140 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6
SAV-1 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 1 14" 2750 250 1380 680 HORIZONTAL 0.2 ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC6000 1,2,3,4,5,6 (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC) FLOW FLOW FLOW FLOW PRESSURE (In.) MAX AIR MIN
AIR MAX AIR MIN AIR POSITION OPERATING UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE SIZE FACTORY RANGE OPERATIONAL RANGE MOUNTING MINIMUM MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS LAB AIR VALVE SCHEDULE 1 Addendum
#1 January 20, 2021 STD. 279 -5 65 431 0.2 21.1 130 100 4.13 40% EG 408 3 8.76 BUFFALO AIR HANDLING 1 (DEG. F) (DEG. F) VEL. (FPM) (In. WC) FLOW (GPM) TEMP. (DEG. F) TEMP. (DEG. F)
(Ft. HD) (MBH) ENT. AIR TEMP. LVG. AIR TEMP. MAX. FACE AIR P.D. WATER ENT. WATER LVG. WATER WATER P.D. FLUID VOLTS PHASE FLA TYPE CAPACITY AIR SIDE WATER SIDE PREHEATING COIL (HOT WATER)
UNIT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS MANUFACTURER & MODEL No. REMARKS AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE - CHILLED WATER /HOT WATER, CONT'D 1. BOTTOM OF DRAIN CONNECTION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3"
ABOVE THE BOTTOM OF THE EQUIPMENT RAIL. REMARKS: ACS-8 PENTHOUSE MER 5TH FLR LAB 3700 3700 2.5 7.25 PLENUM 1 - 15" 7.7 3485 DIRECT 7.5 ASD 151.9 21.3 1.45 91 74 53 53 449 26 14.7 47
67 12 9 (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC) (In. WC) & MIN DIA. BHP RPM (MBH) (TONS) (In. WC) DB WB DB WB VEL. (FPM) FLOW (GPM) (Ft. HD) TEMP. (DEG. F) TEMP. (DEG. F) INCH FLOW O.A. STATIC STATIC
TYPE FAN NO. MAX FAN DRIVE HP STARTER SENSIBLE TOTAL AIR P.D. EAT (DEG. F) LAT (DEG. F) MAX. FACE WATER WATER P.D. ENT. WATER LVG. WATER PER AIR MIN EXT. TOTAL FAN CHARACTERISTICS MOTOR
CAPACITY AIR SIDE WATER SIDE ROWS FINS UNIT NO. LOCATION SERVICE SUPPLY FAN COOLING COIL (CHILLED WATER) AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE - CHILLED WATER /HOT WATER 1 3. STAND-BY 2. GLYCOL
- PROPYLENE, 40%. 1. GLYCOL - ETHLYLENE, 40%. REMARKS: P-21 PENTHOUSE MER ACS-8 PREHEAT COIL INLINE 21 30 175 3995 1/2 208 1 INTEGRAL ASD - 180 46.7 0.92 1-1/4 BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC
XL 55-45 1 P-20 PENTHOUSE MER HEAT RECOVERY INLINE 12 70 95 3450 3 208 3 ASD 4.875 60 28 0.998 1 BELL & GOSSETT E-90 1AAB 2 P-19 PENTHOUSE MER REHEAT LOOP INLINE 10 40 175 3995 1/2
208 1 INTEGRAL ASD - 180 28.9 0.45 1-1/4 BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC XL 55-45 3 P-18 PENTHOUSE MER REHEAT LOOP INLINE 10 40 175 3995 1/2 208 1 INTEGRAL ASD - 180 28.9 0.45 1-1/4 BELL & GOSSETT
ECOCIRC XL 55-45 (%) (In.) (GPM) IN FEET (DIA. In.) (DEG. F) EFF. SIZES & DESCRIPTION FLOW TOTAL HEAD WWP RPM HP VOLTS PHASE STARTER SIZE TEMP. PUMP BHP DISCHARGE PUMP NO. LOCATION
SERVICE UNIT TYPE PUMP CAPACITY MAX MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS IMPELLER FLUID MIN. MAX. SUCTION & MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS PUMP SCHEDULE 1 LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET
50075 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 571 Room 572 Room 574 Room 576 Room 578 STAIR# 3 50003 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584
DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 STAIR# 2 50002 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room
508 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 516 Room 518 Room 520 Room 517 Room 519 Room 521 Room 521A Room 523 CORRIDOR 50044 G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X 3" (E)IW
3" (E)IW (E)IW 3" (R) 3" IW & 3/4" DOWN TO SERVICE SINK W/ AIR GAP 3" (E) 4" SAN, (E) 3" V, (E) 2" CW, (E) 1" HW UP AND DN (E) 4" S.P.O., (E) 3" V.P.O, (E)CW C.O.,
(E)HW C.O. REMOVE HW BACK INTO CHASE I.E. = 107" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (E)IW (E)IW 3"3" 3/4" 3/4" 1 1 1 (E) 3" IW UP (E) 3" IW UP (E) 3" IW UP Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347
West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley
Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point
4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN -PLUMBING P-100 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN DEMOLITION NOTES 1DISCONNECT AND REMOVE CONDENSATE
ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC EQUIPMENT BACK TO MOP BASIN. VERIFY EXTENT OF REMOVALS IN FIELD. 1 1Addendum #1January 20, 2021 PROJECT: RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION Date: January 20, 2021
RFI Form RFI/ Page/ Response Dwg./Spec./Rep. Section/ Design Team Index Number Paragraph/Topic RFI Response 1 42200 Full section Spec 042200: Is this section applicable? I did not notice
masonry looking through drawings and just want to confirm. There is only minor penetration work at the existing block wall in the mechanical shaft. See plumbing Drawings. 2 A-141 Note
5 - wire mesh curtain and track Drawing A-141: Is there a spec for note #5, wire mesh curtain & track? Please see Addendum No 1, Item 2 for added specification 018211. 3 A-141 Note
9 - open shelving Drawing A-141: Is there a spec for note #9, Open Shelving? Please see Addendum No 1, Item 7. The shelving is N.I.C. 4 Temporary Walls, T-004 Keynote 1 Are there locations
you would like temporary walls installed? It looks like portions of work area may be exposed to occupied areas. Yes, see drawing T-004, Keynote 1. 5 Air Handling Unit It appears as
though the intent is to bring the sections of the air handling unit to the penthouse via the elevator. Can you please provide the maximum dimensions and weights that the elevator will
accommodate? If that is not the intended method to get the air handler to the penthouse can you please tell me the anticipate method to get the unit there. That is the intended method.
Please see Addendum No 1, Item 4 for additional elevator weight and dimension information. 6 Steel Frame Entrances & Storefront, Section 084123, Drawing A-601 1. Door & Frame System
Schedule, Sht. A-601: Dr. 551-1 (base bid & alt 1), 551-2 (base bid & alt 1), & 551-3 are showing as steel framed entrance and storefront system type openings per Section 084123 Steel
Frame Entrances & Storefront. Para. 2.3, A. Steel Framing System, is calling for VDS Framing fire rated steel frame system..also noted as E119 Framing from Assa Abloy, Ceco Door. The
rating is shown to be as indicated on the drawings and as 60 minutes. The Door & Frame System Schedule, Sht. A-601, shows only Dr. 551-1 (base bid & alt 1) to be 60 minute rated. Are
Dr. 551-2 (base bid & alt 1) & 551-3 to be provided as E119 fire rated framing regardless of the lack of a fire rating requirement (none) according to the Door & Frame System Schedule?
The head & jamb details referenced on both these openings show 60 minute fire rated door frame. Clarification is requested. Yes, E119 shall be provided even when no rating is required
on the drawings. This is for consistency in appearance (to match adjacent existing framing in the corridor). Please note the glazing varies and is not rated where no wall rating is
required. 7 Door Hardware Schedule. Section 080671 3.1 Door Hardware Schedule Section 080671: Hardware Set 5.0 (Dr. 50021-1 & 50022-1) is showing simply as "to follow". Please provide.
Please see Addendum No 1, Item 1 for updated set in the specifications. 8 Resinous Flooring Is Stonhard an acceptable resinous flooring? No. Stonhard does not appear to meet the design
intent. 9 Wire Mesh Divider Curtain Please provide Specifications for the Wire Mesh Divider Curtains as indicated per Key Note 9/A-101. Please see Addendum No 1, Item 2 for added specification.
10 Barn-Door Style White Boards Please provide Specifications for the Moveable Barn-Door Style White Boards to be provided in Alternate #2. Please see section 101116 Glass Markerboards
and Section 087100, 2.17 Sliding Track Hardware. 11 Wire Mesh Curtains Can a manufacture/Specification be provided for the Wire Mesh Divider Curtains and Track? There are many different
mesh wire sizes and materials. Please see Addendum No 1, Item 2 for added specification. 12 Wall Reveal Detail A-502 8/A-502 Does Wall Reveal Detail ( 8/A-502) need to be maintained
at the Acoustic Panels along the windows? ( Ref. 6/A-502, 11/A503) No, it does not need to be maintained in the acoustical panels. Please see detail 6/502. 13 Carpet Tile Finish Schedule
A-603 at CPT-1 Carpet tile specifies Interface Honor Roll Collection; This is a collection of Four Different Styles Exposed, Cubic, Verticals and Profiles; all Four styles have different
price points. Please specify a style name for clarification and accurate pricing. Link to Carpet brochure: https://interfaceinc.scene7.com/s7viewers/html5/eCatalogView er.html?asset=InterfaceInc/ec_
amhonorrollviewbook2018&config=InterfaceInc/Universal_HTM L5_eCatalog_Adv_2 Please see Addendum No 1, Item 12 for style clarification.
Drawings_Rhodes Hall 5th Flooring Renov INDEXED.pdf
Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway,
Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065
518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation COVER SHEET T-001 TITLE T-001COVER SHEET T-002SYMBOLS, NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS T-003ACCESSIBILITY NOTES & DETAILS
T-004AREA OF WORK & CODE INFORMATION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK ABATEMENT AR-101ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PLAN ARCHITECTURAL DA-101FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION
DA-111FIFTH FLOOR CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN A-101FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-101AFIFTH FLOOR PLAN - ALTERNATES A-102SIXTH, SEVENTH AND EIGHTH FLOOR PLANS A-111FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-111AFIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - ACCOUSTIC TREATMENT A-121POWER & COMMUNICATIONS - FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-131FIFTH FLOOR - FLOOR FINISH PLAN A-141FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT PLAN -
FIFTH FLOOR A-301INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-302INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-410BUILDING SECTIONS A-501DETAILS I A-502DETAILS II A-503DETAILS III A-541MILLWORK DETAILS A-542MILLWORK DETAILS A-601DOOR
AND GLAZING SCHEDULE A-602DOOR AND GLAZING DETAILS A-603FINISH SCHEDULE & PARTITION TYPES A-700INTERIOR 3D VIEWS FIRE PROTECTION FP-000 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST AND DETAILS - FP
FP-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - FP FP-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION PLUMBING P-000 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST, AND SCHEDULES - PLUMBING P-100 PARTIAL
FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - PLUMBING P-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING P-201 PENTHOUSE PLAN - PLUMBING ELECTRICAL E-000 GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST E-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR
PLAN - POWER & SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION E-101 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION E-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - POWER NEW WORK E-201 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING
NEW WORK E-202 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - SPECIAL SYSTEMS NEW WORK E-203 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM NEW WORK E-204 PENTHOUSE ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK E-400 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E-500 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES MECHANICAL H-000 GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST - HVAC H-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - DUCTWORK DEMOLITION H-101 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PIPING DEMOLITION
H-200 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH FLOOR PLANS - DUCT H-201 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH FLOOR PLANS - PIPING H-300 PARTIAL PENTHOUSE PLANS - HVAC H-400 PIPING SCHEMATICS - HVAC
H-500 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM SUMMARIES H-501 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM SUMMARIES H-502 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM SUMMARIES H-600 DETAILS - HVAC H-700 AIR HANDLING UNIT DIMENSIONS
& DETAILS - HVAC H-800 SCHEDULES - HVAC STRUCTURAL S001DESIGN DATA AND GENERAL NOTES S100PARTIAL FRAMING PLANS C B C B C B C B UPSON HALL 2045 GRUMMAN HALL 2043 UPSON AUTO SHOP 2045A
RHODES DRIVE WARD CENTER 2061 SYMBOLS: KEYNOTE DETAIL SECTION ELEVATIONS VERTICAL ELEVATION PARTITION TYPE (SEE A-602 FOR DETAILS) ACCESSORY TYPE DOOR NUMBER REVISION NUMBER ROOM NUMBER
ALIGNING SURFACES ? ? ? 01 A-000 00 0.00' FINISH FL. A1012 4 3 1 A1 ? 101 100 1 T-1 ALIGN LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN NEW INTERIOR PARTITION NEW 1-HR RATED PARTITION NEW 2-HR RATED
PARTITION NEW FIXED FURNITURE/ CASEWORK EXISTING WALL PARTITION TO BE DEMOLISHED ABBREVIATIONS: &A N D @A T AA S S O C I A T E ACALTERNATING CURRENT/ACOUSTICAL A/CAIR CONDITIONING ACMASBESTOS
CONTAINING MATERIAL ACTACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADAREA DRAIN ADJADJUSTABLE/ADJACENT AFACCESS FLOOR AFFABOVE FINISH FLOOR ALTALTERNATE ALUMALUMINUM AMPAMPERE ANODANODIZED APACCESS PANEL
APPDAPPROVED ARCHARCHITECT/ARCHITECTURAL ASPHASPHALT ASYMASYMMETRICAL AVBAIR & VAPOR BARRIER AVGAVERAGE BBBUILDING BOARD BDBOARD BLDGBUILDING BLKGBLOCKING BMBEAM/BENCH MARK B.O.BY OTHERS
BRKBRICK BSMTBASEMENT BTMBOTTOM BTWBETWEEN BURBUILT UP ROOFING BVLBEVEL CABCABINET C.C.CENTER TO CENTER CERCERAMIC CFMCUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CJCONTROL JOINT CLCLOSER CLGCEILING CLRCLEAR
CMUCONCRETE MASONRY UNIT C.O.CASED OPENING COL(S)COLUMN(S) COMMCOMMUNICATION CONCCONCRETE CONDCONDUIT CONFCONFERENCE CONNCONNECTION(S) CONSTRCONSTRUCTION CONTCONTINUOUS COORDCOORDINATE
CORRCORRIDOR CPCIRCUIT PANEL CPTCARPET CRCOLD ROLLED CRSCOURSE(S) CSOCASED OPENING CTCERAMIC TILE CTAICOOLING TOWER AIR INTAKE CTRCENTER CUCUBIC CWCOLD WATER CYCOPY DDEEP/DEPTH DBLDOUBLE
DCDIRECT CURRENT DEMODEMOLITION DETDETAIL DFDRINKING FOUNTAIN DIADIAMETER/DIAGONAL DIMDIMENSION DISPDISPENSER DLDEAD LOAD DNDOWN DODOOR OPENING DRDOOR DWGDRAWING EE A S T (E)EXISTING
TO REMAIN EAEACH ECEMPTY CONDUIT EECEXISTING EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION EFEXHAUST FAN EIFSEXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM ELELEVATION(S) ELECELECTRICAL ELEVELEVATOR EMEMERGENCY EMTELECTRICAL
METALLIC TUBING ENCLENCLOSURE EQEQUAL (ER)EXIST. TO BE REMOVED (ERR)EXIST. TO BE REMOVED & RELOCATED EWCELECTRICAL WATER COOLER EXHEXHAUST EXIST,EXEXISTING EXP BTEXPANSION BOLT EXP
JTEXPANSION JOINT EXTEXTERIOR FF I L E FAFIRE ALARM FDFLOOR DRAIN FEFIRE EXTINGUISHER FECFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FHCFIRE HOSE CABINET FINFINISH FIXTFIXTURE FLRFLOOR FLUORFLUORESCENT
F.O.FACE OF FPFIRE PROOF FPSCFIRE PROOF SELF CLOSING FPBFIRE PULL BOX FRFRAME FSPFIRE STANDPIPE FTFOOT FTGFOOTING FWCFABRIC WALL COVERING GAGAUGE GALVGALVANIZED GBLKGYPSUM BLOCK GCGENERAL
CONTRACTOR GFIGROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER GLGLASS GR,GDGRADE GWBGYPSUM WALLBOARD GYPGYPSUM HBHOSE BIBB HCHANDICAPPED HMHOLLOW METAL HDWHARDWARE HDWDHARDWOOD HORIZHORIZONTAL HPHIGH POINT
HPLHIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE HRHOUR HTHEIGHT HTGHEATING HVACHEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING HVPHIGH VOLTAGE PANEL HWHOT WATER IBCINSTALL BY CONTRACTOR IBOINSTALL BY OWNER IDINSIDE
DIAMETER INCLINCLUDE/INCLUDING INSULINSULATION INTINTERIOR JBOXJUNCTION BOX JSJAMB SWITCH JTJOINT KWKILOWATT LACLACQUER LAMLAMINATE LAVLAVATORY LBSPOUNDS LFLINEAR FEET LHLEFT HAND LHRBLEFT
HAND RETURN BEVEL LLLIVE LOAD LSCLOCKSET CYLINDRICAL LSMLOCKSET MORTISED LDLINEAR DIFFUSER LTLIGHT LVLOUVER LVPLOW VOLTAGE PANEL MAGMAGNETIC MARBMARBLE MASMASONRY MAXMAXIMUM MCMAIL
CHUTE MEZZMEZZANINE MFRMANUFACTURER MINMINIMUM MISCMISCELLANEOUS MLDGMOLDING M.O.MASONRY OPENING MOD-BITMODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING MPMEASURE POINT / MASONRY PAINT MTDMOUNTED MTLMETAL
MULMULLION NN O R T H / N E W NATNATURAL NECNEW EXPOSED CONSTRUCTION NICNOT IN CONTRACT NONUMBER NOMNOMINAL NRNOISE REDUCTION NRCNOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT NTSNOT TO SCALE OCON CENTER
ODOUTSIDE DIAMETER OHOPPOSITE HAND OPPOPPOSITE PARTPARTITION PCPLPORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PGLPLATE GLASS PBOPROVIDED BY OWNER PLFPOUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT PLAMPLASTIC LAMINATE PLASPLASTER
PSIPOUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PTPAINT PTDPAINTED PTGPAINTING PTDRPAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PTRPAPER TOWEL RECEPTACLE PVCPOLYVINYL CHLORIDE PWDPLYWOOD R/ARETURN AIR RADRADIUS RBRUBBER BASE RDROOF
DRAIN (RE)RELOCATED EXISTING RCPREFLECTED CEILING PLAN REFREFRIGERATOR REINREINFORCING/REINFORCED REQDREQUIRED RHRIGHT HAND RHRBRIGHT HAND REVERSE BEVEL RMROOM ROROUGH OPENING RUBRUBBER
SSOUTH/SUPPLY SAFBSOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BATT SBSTRAIGHT BASE SCSEPARATE CIRCUIT/SELF CLOSING SCHSCHEDULE SEALSEALANT SIMSIMILAR SLCSOLID CORE SNDSANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL SNVSANITARY
NAPKIN VENDOR SPECSPECIFICATION SQSQUARE SSSTAINLESS STEEL STDSTANDARD STLSTEEL STNSTAIN STRUCTSTRUCTURE SUBSUBSTITUTE SUSPSUSPENDED SVCSERVICE SYMSYMMETRICAL SYSSYSTEM TBTOWEL BAR
TBDTO BE DETERMINED TDTRENCH DRAIN TELTELEPHONE TGLTEMPERED GLASS T>ONGUE & GROOVE THTHRESHOLD THRUTHROUGH THKTHICK/THICKNESS TLTILE T.O.TOP OF T.O.S.TOP OF SLAB TPDTOILET PAPER DISPENSER
TSTILE START TYPTYPICAL U.O.N.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VV O L T VBVINYL BASE VCTVINYL COMPOSITE TILE VERTVERTICAL VIFVERIFY IN FIELD VNRVENEER V. PLASVENEER PLASTER VTVINYL TILE WWEST/WATT
W/WITH WCWATER CLOSET WDWOOD WFWIDE FLANGE WPWATER PROOF WRWASTE RECEPTACLE WSWET STACK WWFWELDED WIRE FABRIC WWMWELDED WIRE MESH YDYARD DUMPSTER LOCATION 2 COORDINATE WITH EXISTING
IN-GROUND TANK DUMPSTER LOCATION 1 PARKING SPOT LIMITED TO 10 YARDS OR LESS Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501
New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606
585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue
Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated SYMBOLS, NOTES
& ABBREVIATIONS T-002 N.T.S 1SITE PLAN 1/32" = 1'-0" 3STAGING PLAN 2010 ADAAG FIG.302.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.302.3 ELONGATED OPENINGS IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES 2010 ADAAG FIG.303.2
2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.303.2 VERTICAL CHANGE IN LEVEL 2010 ADAAG FIG.303.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.303.3(A) & 303.3(B) BEVELED CHANGE IN LEVEL DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL LONG DIMENSION PERPENDICULAR
TO DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL 1/2" MAX. 1 / 4 " M A X . M A X . 1 / 4 " M A X . 1 / 4 " 1 / 2 " M A X . 2 1 2 1 1 / 4 " 1 / 2 " (A)(B) SIZE OF TURNING SPACE 2010 ADAAG FIG.304.3.2
2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.304.3.1.1, 304.3.1.2, & 304.3.2.1(A), (B) & (C) CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE 2010 ADAAG FIG.305.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.305.3.1 & 305.3.2 36" MIN. X > 2 4 " 60" MIN.
X > 1 5 " NOTE:ALCOVES SHALL BE 36 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE DEPTH EXCEEDS 24 INCHES. NOTE: ALCOVES SHALL BE 60 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE DEPTH EXCEEDS 15 INCHES. MANEUVERING
CLEARANCE IN AN ALCOVE, FORWARD APPROACH 2010 ADAAG FIG.305.7.1 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.305.7.2 MANEUVERING CLEARANCE IN AN ALCOVE, PARALLEL APPROACH 2010 ADAAG FIG.305.7.2 2017 ICC A117.1
FIG.305.7.1 CLEAR WIDTH OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE 2010 ADAAG FIG.403.5.1 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.403.5.1(A) & (C) POSITION OF CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE 2010 ADAAG FIG.305.5 2017 ICC A117.1
FIG.305.5(A) & (B) FORWARDPARALLEL 67" MIN.* 60" MIN. CIRCULAR 5 2 " M I N . * 4 8 " M I N . MIN. 30" *REQUIREMENT FOR NEW BUILDING 68" MIN. 3 6 " M I N . 6 0 " M I N . 16" MIN. 36"
MIN. 8" MIN. 8 " M I N . 2 4 " M I N . 16" MIN. T-SHAPED NEW BUILDING -OPTION 1 T-SHAPED EXISTING BUILDING 60" MIN. 3 6 " M I N . M I N . 2 4 " MIN. 12" MIN. 36" MIN. 12" 6 0 " M I
N . 64" MIN. 3 8 " M I N . 6 0 " M I N . 11" MIN.42" MIN.11" MIN. 2 2 " M I N . 64" MIN. 4 0 " M I N . 6 0 " M I N . 12" MIN.40" MIN.12" MIN. 2 0 " M I N . T-SHAPED NEW BUILDING -OPTION
2 T-SHAPED NEW BUILDING -OPTION 3 *REQUIREMENT FOR NEW BUILDING*REQUIREMENT FOR NEW BUILDING MAX. 24" 52" MIN.* 48" MIN. MAX. 24" 3 6 " M I N . 3 2 " M I N . TOE CLEARANCE ELEVATION
2010 ADAAG FIG.306.2 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.306.2(A) & (B) 9 " 6" MAX. 3 0 " M I N . 17"-25" PLAN * 2 7 " M I N . 11" MIN. 9 " M I N . 8" MIN. 3 0 " M I N . 25" MAX. PLAN *KNEE CLEARANCE
FOR CHILDREN SHALL BE 24" MIN. KNEE CLEARANCE ELEVATION 2010 ADAAG FIG.306.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.306.3(A) & (B) X > 8 0 " MAX. 4" X > 2 7 " 2 7 " M A X . X > 12" NOTE: WHERE AN OBSTRUCTION
IS MOUNTED BETWEEN POSTS, AND THE CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN POSTS IS GREATER THAN 12", THE LOWEST EDGE OF SUCH OBSTRUCTION SHALL BE 27" MAX. OR 80" MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND
SURFACE. LIMITS OF PROTRUDING OBJECTS 2010 ADAAG FIG.307.2 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.307.2 POST MOUNTED PROTRUDING OBJECTS 2010 ADAAG FIG.307.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.307.3(A) & (B) 2 7 " M
A X . X < 8 0 " VERTICAL CLEARANCE 2010 ADAAG FIG.307.4 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.307.4 NOTE: GUARDRAILS OR OTHER BARRIERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE THE VERTICAL CLEARANCE IS LESS THAN 80"
HIGH. THE LEADING EDGE OF SUCH GUARDRAIL OR BARRIER SHALL BE LOCATED 27" MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR OR GROUND. > 2 7 " A N D < 8 0 " POST MAX.* 4" MAX.* 4" 2 7 " 8 0 " 4" MAX.
4" MAX. X <12" X > 12" . >80" UNLIMITED 20" MAX. 4 8 " M A X . MAX. >20" - 25" 4 4 " M A X . NOTE: -WHERE REACH DEPTH EXCEEDS 20", THE HIGH FORWARD REACH SHALL BE 44" MAX. IN HEIGHT,
AND THE REACH DEPTH SHALL BE 25" MAXIMUM. NOTES: -WHERE REACH DEPTH EXCEEDS 10", THE HIGH SIDE REACH SHALL BE 46" MAXIMUM, FOR A REACH DEPTH OF 24" MAXIMUM. -OPERABLE PARTS SHALL COMPLY
WITH SECTION 309. 3 4 " M A X . 4 8 " M A X . 10" MAX. 3 4 " M A X . 4 6 " M A X . MAX. >10" - 24" OBSTRUCTED HIGH FORWARD REACH 2010 ADAAG FIG.308.2.2 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.308.2.2(A)
& (B) OBSTRUCTED HIGH SIDE REACH 2010 ADAAG FIG.308.3.2 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.308.3.2 A D U L T 1 5 " M I N . A D U L T 4 8 " M A X . A G E 5 8 1 8 " M I N . * A G E 9 1 2 1 6 " M I N
. * A G E 5 8 " 4 0 " M A X . * A G E 9 1 2 4 4 " M A X . * UNOBSTRUCTED FORWARD REACH 2010 ADAAG FIG.308.2.1 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.308.2.1 *THIS IS AN ADVISORY REQUIREMENT FOUND ONLY
IN 2010 ADAAG. 2010 ADAAG FIG.308.3.1 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.308.3.1 10" MAX. M I N . 1 5 " 4 8 " M A X . UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE REACH MIN. 22" 4 2 " M I N . * * MIN.* 12" *IF BOTH A CLOSER
AND A LATCH ARE PROVIDED **48" MIN. IF BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH ARE PROVIDED ***2017 ICC A117.1 REQUIRES ADDITIONAL 12" MANEUVERING CLEARANCE BEYOND LATCH SIDE (NOT REQUIRED BY 2010
ADAAG) AND THEREFORE PROVIDES GREATER ACCESSIBILITY. HINGE APPROACH, PUSH SIDE*** MANEUVERING CLEARANCE (MANUAL SWING DOORS & GATES) 2010 ADAAG FIG.404.2.4.1 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.404.2.3.2(A),
(B), (C), (D), (E), (F), (G), & (H) 9 0 . 0 0° 32" MIN. 32" MIN. 32" MIN. > 2 4 " 36" MIN. HINGED DOOR SLIDING DOOR FOLDING DOOR DOORWAYS WITHOUT DOORS NOTE: -CLEAR OPENINGS OF DOORWAYS
WITH SWINGING DOORS SHALL BE MEASURED BETWEEN THE FACE OF THE DOOR AND THE STOP, WITH THE DOOR OPEN 90 DEGREES. -OPENINGS MORE THAN 24" IN DEPTH AT DOORS AND DOORWAYS WITHOUT DOORS
SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR OPENING WIDTH OF 36" MIN. CLEAR WIDTH OF DOORWAYS 2010 ADAAG FIG.404.2.3(A), (B), & (C) 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.404.2.2(A), (B), (C), & (D) SIDE APPROACH -STRICTER
2010 ADAAG REQUIREMENTS (NOT REQUIRED BY 2017 ICC A117.1) 5 2 * M I N . * 4 8 " M I N . FRONT APPROACH MANEUVERING CLEARANCE AT DOORWAYS WITHOUT DOORS 2010 ADAAG FIG.404.2.4.2 2017
ICC A117.1 FIG.404.2.3.4(A), (B), & (C) MIN. 22" 4 2 " M I N . MIN. 24" 4 2 " M I N . POCKET OR HINGE APPROACHSTOP OR LATCH APPROACH 18" MIN. 6 0 " M I N . FRONT APPROACH, PULL SIDEHINGE
APPROACH, PULL SIDE 6 0 " M I N . 36" MIN. HINGE APPROACH, PULL SIDE 5 4 " M I N . 42" MIN. *REQUIREMENT FOR NEW BUILING 4 8 " M I N . 12" MIN. 5 2 " M I N . * 4 8 " M I N . FRONT APPROACH,
PUSH SIDE (NO CLOSER AND LATCH) FRONT APPROACH, PUSH SIDE (WITH CLOSER AND LATCH) LATCH APPROACH, PUSH SIDE (NO CLOSER) MIN. 24" 4 2 " M I N . LATCH APPROACH, PUSH SIDE (WITH CLOSER)
MIN. 24" 4 8 " M I N . LATCH APPROACH, PULL SIDE (NO CLOSER) LATCH APPROACH, PULL SIDE (WITH CLOSER) 4 8 " M I N . 24" MIN. 5 4 " M I N . MIN. 24" 4 2 " M I N . X > 8 " MIN. 18" 6 0
" M I N . 4 8 " M I N . * X > 8 " X > 8 " MIN. 12" 4 8 " M I N . * MANEUVERING CLEARANCES AT RECESSED DOORS AND GATES 2010 ADAAG FIG.404.2.4.3 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.404.2.3.5(A), (B),
& (C) PULL SIDEPUSH SIDE PUSH SIDE (WITH CLOSER AND LATCH) NOTE: -MANEUVERING CLEARANCES FOR FORWARD APPROACH SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN ANY OBSTRUCTION WITHIN 18" OF THE LATCH SIDE OF
A DOORWAY PROJECTS MORE THAN 8" BEYOND THE FACE OF THE DOOR, MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO THE FACE OF THE DOOR OR GATE. *52" MIN. FOR NEW BUILDING DOOR AND GATES IN SERIES* -EXISTING BUILDING
2010 ADAAG FIG.404.2.6 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.404.2.5(A),(B),(C),(D),(E), & (F) *2017 ICC A117.1 REQUIRES ADDITIONAL 60" CLEAR WIDTH WHERE 2010 ADAAG DOES NOT REQUIRE MIN. WIDTH. **2010
ADAAG REQUIRES 48" MINIMUM W I D T H D O O R 4 8 " M I N . W I D T H D O O R 60" MIN.* 60" MIN.* 6 0 " M I N . * * 4 8 " M I N . W I D T H D O O R 60" MIN.* ELECT.OUTLET TELE/DATA JACK
WALL MTD. T.V. MONITOR 1 ' 6 " 6 ' 6 " FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET 3 ' 0 " NOTE: -THESE DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS AND HEIGHTS.
-DEVICES THAT ARE NEAR ONE ANOTHER SHALL BE ALIGNED VERTICALLY AND/OR HORIZONTALLY M A X . 4 ' 0 " FIRE WARDEN FLOOR STATION 4 ' 0 " FA PULL STATION 3 ' 1 0 " CARD READER 3 ' 2
" L I G H T S W I T C H 3 ' 1 0 " F A D E V I C E S 8 0 " 9 6 " EXIT OF SIGN OF DOOR OF LEVER L C L C L C R O O M I D S I G N 4 ' 6 " M I N . 9" L C L C F I R E A L A R M / S T R
O B E 8 0 " 9 6 " L I G H T S W I T C H 3 ' 1 0 " O U T L E T 1 ' 6 " T H E R M O S T A T 5 ' 0 " 6" L C FINISHED FLOOR NOTE: -WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT A DOOR, THE SIGN
SHALL BE LOCATED ALONGSIDE THE DOOR AT THE LATCH SIDE. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH TWO ACTIVE LEAFS, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED TO THE RIGHT OF THE RIGHT HAND
DOOR. WHERE THERE IS NO WALL SPACE AT THE LATCH SIDE OF A SINGLE DOOR OR AT THE RIGHT SIDE OF DOUBLE DOORS, SIGNS SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT WALL. -SIGNS CONTAINING TACTILE
CHARACTERS SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OF 18" MIN. BY 18" MIN. CENTERED ON THE TACTILE CHARACTERS, IS PROVIDED BEYOND THE ARC OF ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED POSITION
AND 45 DEG. OPEN POSITION. EXCEPTION: SIGNS WITH TACTILE CHARACTERS SHALL BE PERMITTED ON THE PUSH SIDE OF DOORS WITH CLOSERS AND WITHOUT HOLD-OPEN DEVICES. LOCATION OF TACTILE SIGNS
AT DOORS 2010 ADAAG FIG.703.4.2 2017 ICC A117.1 FIG.703.3.11 4 5 . 0 0 ° L C M I N . 1 8 " MIN. 18"CENTERED ON RAISED CHARACTERS Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney
Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering,
P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As indicated ACCESSIBILITY NOTES & DETAILS T-003 12" = 1'-0" 1OPENINGS AND CHANGES IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES 1/4" = 1'-0" 2WHEELCHAIR TURNING RADIUS AND FLOOR CLEARANCE 1/2" = 1'-0"
3CLEARANCE AND ONSTRUCTIONS 1/4" = 1'-0" 4DOORS AND OPENINGS 1/4" = 1'-0" 5TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS GENERAL NOTES: - THE DETAILS ON SHEETS T-003 COMBINE THE REQUIREMENTS OF ICC A117.1
-2017 AND THE 2010 ADAAG STANDARDS. -THE TEXT OF ICC A117.1 -2017 AND THE 2010 ADAAG PREVAILS OVER DRAWN FIGURES. -WHERE THE NOTATIONS ON T-003 INDICATE A DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE REQUIREMENTS
OF THE 2010 ADAAG AND ICC A 117.1 -2017, FOLLOW THE MORE RESTRICTIVE STANDARD UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. 1/4" = 1'-0" 6LOCATION OF TACTILE SIGNS AT DOORS LEGEND: AREA OF WORK, UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED 1 HOUR RATED WALL 2 HOUR RATED WALL CODES & STANDARDS 2020 NYS EXISTING BUILDING CODE (NYSEBC) 2020 NYS BUILDING CODE (NYSBC) 2020 NYS MECHANICAL CODE (NYSMC) 2020 NYS
PLUMBING CODE (NYSPC) 2020 NYS FIRE CODE (NYSFC) 2020 NYS ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE (NYSECCC) NYS UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION CODE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARDS
(NFPA) AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) STANDARD CORNELL UNIVERSITY'S, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS FM GLOBAL DATA SHEETS NATIONAL
ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE CODE (ANSI) AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION CITY OF ITHACA, NY WORK LEVEL
ALTERATION TYPE II (WORK AREAS IS UNDER 50% OF THE FLOOR AREA) CONSTRUCTION TYPE IB (EXISTING CONSTRUCTION) FIRE-RESISTANCE RATINGS FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS: STRUCTURAL FRAME: 2 HOURS
EXTERIOR BEARING WALL:2 HOURS INTERIOR BEARING WALL:2 HOURS EXTERIOR NONBEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS:1 HOUR INTERIOR NONBEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS:0 HOUR FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING
SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS:2 HOURS ROOF CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS:1 HOUR USE TYPE B-BUSINESS (PROJECT AREA) NO CHANGE OCCUPANCY & EGRESS NOTES: (2020 BUILDING
CODE OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK) 1004OCCUPANT LOAD TABLE 1004.5MAXIMUM FLOOR AREA ALLOWANCES PER OCCUPANT FUNCTION OF SPACEOCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR ACCESSORY300 SF GROSS BUSINESS150 SF NET
CONFERENCE 15 SF NET ASSEMBLY (SEE SECTION 1004.6 FIXED SEATING) LOUNGE 150 SF NET SHOP 50 SF NET PROJECT AREA IS INCLUDED IN BUSINESS -12,783 SF GROUP BELOW AREA PER
DESIGN ROOM #/NAME AREA OCCUPANTOCCUPANT LOAD 551 -LABORATORY 3,368 SF150 SF23 TOTAL23 FIFTH FLOOR TOTAL (EXISTING EXCPET SPACE NOTED ABOVE)
AREA PER DESIGN OCCUPANT GROUPSAREA OCCUPANTOCCUPANT LOAD ACCESSORY 89 SF300 SF 1 ACCESSORY 168 SF300 SF 1 ACCESSORY 87 SF300 SF 1 BUSINESS 568 SF 150
SF 4 BUSINESS 12,783 SF150 SF86 CONFERENCE693 SF 15 SF47 CONFERENCE267 SF 15 SF18 CONFERENCE218 SF 15 SF15 EDUCATIONAL 2,403 SF 20 SF 121 LOUNGE451
SF150 SF 4 SHOP175 SF 50 SF 4 SHOP670 SF 50 SF14 SHOP454 SF 50 SF10 SHOP388 SF 50 SF 8 TOTAL 334 1005.3.2OTHER EGRESS COMPONENTS THE CAPACITY, IN INCHES,
OF MEANS OF EGRESS COMPONENTS OTHER THAN STAIRWAYS SHALL BE CALCULATED BY MULTIPLYING THE OCCUPANT LOAD SERVED BY SUCH COMPONENT BY A MEANS OF EGRESS CAPACITY FACTOR OF 0.2 INCH PER
OCCUPANT. STAIR # PROVIDED INCH PER DOORDESIGN OCCUPANT DOOR WIDTH OCCUPANT CAPACITYLOAD 5th FLOORSTAIR #1 40" 0.2 200111 STAIR #2
40" 0.2 200111 STAIR #3 40"0.2 200112 5th FLOOR TOTAL DOOR CAPACITY = 600 > 334 4th FLOORSTAIR #1 40" 0.2 200 STAIR
#2 40" 0.2 200 STAIR #3 40"0.2 200 4th FLOOR TOTAL DOOR CAPACITY = 600 > 3rd FLOORSTAIR #1 40" 0.2 200 STAIR
#2 40" 0.2 200 STAIR #3 40"0.2 200 3rd FLOOR TOTAL DOOR CAPACITY = 600 > 2nd FLOORSTAIR #1 40" 0.2 200 STAIR
#2 40" 0.2 200 STAIR #3 40"0.2 200 2nd FLOOR TOTAL DOOR CAPACITY = 600 > 1006NUMBER OF EXITS AND EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYS TABLE
1006.3.2MINIMUM NUMBER OF EXITS OR ACCESS TO EXITS PER STORY OCCUPANT LOAD PER STORYMIN. NUMBER OF EXITS 1 -5002 501 -1,0003 3 EXITS PROVIDED (EXISTING, NO CHANGE) 1009ACCESSIBLE
MEANS OF EGRESS 1009.3.2STAIRWAY WIDTH STAIRWAYS SHALL HAVE A CLEAR WIDTH OF 48 INCHES MINIMUM BETWEEN HANDRAILS EXCEPTION:1. THE CLEAR WIDTH OF 48 INCHES BETWEEN HANDRAILS IS NOT
REQUIRED IN BUILDINGS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM. 1010DOORS, GATES AND TURNSTILES 1010.1.1SIZE OF DOORS THE REQUIRED CAPACITY OF EACH DOOR OPENING
SHALL BE SUFFICIENT FOR THE OCCUPANT LOAD THEREOF AND SHALL PROVIDE A MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING WIDTH OF 32 INCHES. THE CLEAR OPENING WIDTH OF DOORWAYS WITH SWINGING DOORS SHALL BE MEASURED
BETWEEN THE FACE OF THE DOOR AND THE STOP, WITH THE DOOR OPEN 90 DEGREES. 1011STAIRWAYS 1011.2WIDTH AND CAPACITY THE REQUIRED CAPACITY OF STAIRWAYS SHALL BE DETERMINED AS SPECIFIED
IN SECTION 1005.1, BUT THE MINIMUM WIDTH SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 44 INCHES. 1017EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE TABLE 1017.2EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE OCCUPANCYWITHOUT SPRINKLER SYSTEMWITH
SPRINKLER SYSTEM B200 FEET300 FEET 5th FLOORPRIMARY TRAVEL DISTANCE = 110'-8" SECONDARY TRAVEL DISTANCE = 182'-6" BUILDING IS EQUIPPED THROUGHOUT WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER
SYSTEM. 1005MEANS OF EGRESS SIZING 1005.3.1 STAIRWAYS THE CAPACITY, IN INCHES, OF MEANS OF EGRESS STAIRWAYS SHALL BE CALCULATED BY MULTIPLYING THE OCCUPANT LOAD SERVED BY SUCH STAIRWAYS
BY A MEANS OF EGRESS CAPACITY FACTOR OF 0.3 INCH PER OCCUPANT STAIR # EXISTING INCH PER STAIRDESIGN OCCUPANT STAIR WIDTH OCCUPANT CAPACITYLOAD 5th FLOORSTAIR #1
50"0.3 166111 STAIR #2 50"0.3 166111 STAIR #3 45"0.3 150112 5th FLOOR TOTAL STAIR CAPACITY = 482 >334 4th FLOORSTAIR #1
50"0.3 166 STAIR #2 50"0.3 166 STAIR #3 45"0.3 150 4th FLOOR TOTAL STAIR CAPACITY = 482 > 3rd FLOORSTAIR #1 50"0.3
166 STAIR #2 50"0.3 166 STAIR #3 45"0.3 150 3rd FLOOR TOTAL STAIR CAPACITY = 482 > 2nd FLOORSTAIR #1 50"0.3 166
STAIR #2 50"0.3 166 STAIR #3 45" 0.3 150 2nd FLOOR TOTAL STAIR CAPACITY = 482 > G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 J
J 17 16 15 18 H Y1 H X Y LABORATORY 551 551B 5 9 ' 0 " 65'-0" 5 2 ' 0 " 24'6 " 41'-0" TOTAL DISTANCE: 182'-6" 4 2 ' 0 " 9'-8" T O T A L D IS T A N C E : 1 1 0 ' 8 " 59 STAIR #3 STAIR
#2 DOORSTAIR WIDTH40"50" CAPACITY200166 LOAD111111 DOORSTAIR WIDTH40"50" CAPACITY200166 LOAD112112 DOOR 551/1REQUIREDPROVIDED WIDTH32"36" CAPACITY160180 LOAD12 DOOR 551/3REQUIREDPROVIDED
WIDTH32"68" CAPACITY160340 LOAD11 STAIR #1 DOORSTAIR WIDTH40"50" CAPACITY200166 LOAD111111 1 1 1 501 503 500 502 504 504A 522 524A 524 525 527 526 528 529 531 530 532 533 535 534 536
537 539 538 541 520 518 516 514B 523 521A 521 519 517 508 512 514 571 Department Legend ACCCESORY ASSEMBLY BUSINESS CONFERENCE LOUNGE SHOP 572 574 576 578 580 596 594592590588586584582
BUSINESS 12,783 SF 86 PEOPLE EDUCATIONAL 2,403 SF 120 PEOPLE CONFERENCE 218 SF 15 PEOPLE SHOP 454 SF 10 PEOPLE SHOP 388 SF 8 PEOPLE CONFERENCE 267 SF 18 PEOPLE CONFERENCE 693 SF 47
PEOPLE SHOP 670 SF 14 PEOPLE SHOP 175 SF 4 PEOPLE BUSINESS 568 SF 4 PEOPLE OCCUPANCY LEGEND ACCESSORY 87 SF 1 PEOPLE ACCESSORY 168 SF 1 PEOPLE ACCESSORY 89 SF 1 PEOPLE LOUNGE 235 SF
5 PEOPLE KEY NOTES: 1TEMPORARY PARTITION AND DOOR. FIRE RATED TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36
Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated
AREA OF WORK & CODE INFORMATION T-004 ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION ALTERNATE 1 ADDITIONAL FIRE RATED GLAZING IN CORRIDOR WALL 50044 ALTERNATE 2 PROVIDE SOFFIT ALONG COL. LINE D AND INSTALL
SLIDING GLASS WHITEBOARDS ON BARN DOOR STYLE HARDWARE ACROSS THE OPENING. ALTERNATE 3 PROVIDE A FOLDABLE ACOUSTICAL PANEL WALL (WITH ONE SWING DOOR) ALONG COL. LINE D. ALTERNATE 4 PROVIDE
A SOLID STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD WALL WITH HOLLOW METAL FRAME AND DOOR ALONG COL. LINE D. PROVIDE POWER AND DATA IN THE WALL, BOTH SIDES. 1/16" = 1'-0" 1CODE INFORMATION -LEVEL 5 UP UP
UP TGB C P BA DC E FBFB FBFB FB FB G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 8 ' 6 3 / 1 6 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 1 4 ' 4 5 / 1 6 " 4 '
1 7 / 8 " 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"18' - 6 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" 1 ' 7 5 / 8 " 1' - 7 5/8" EQ EQ TERRACE 517 514B 519 518 521A 520 523 500 502 504 504A 503 501 512 514
50076 50073 50044 578 576 574 572 50063 50062 50061 508 516 521 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 DATA
CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 LOUNGE 568 WOMEN 50021 MEN 50022 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 1 A-410 2 A-410 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 6 7 1 7 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 9 9 4 8 7
7 NOTE: NOISY WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE LECTURE HALL SCHEDULE AND WILL NOT BE PERMITTED WHILE CLASS IS ON-GOING. SEE ALSO SPECIFICATIONS. 10 10 557A 551 551A 555 557 50047
559 559A 597 DEMOLITION KEY NOTES: REMOVE EXISTING RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM SET ON 8" STEEL LEGS. LEGS ARE SET IN ADHESIVE, REMOVE ADHESIVE COMPLETELY FROM EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB. REMOVE
EXISTING RAMP AND RAILINGS. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME, AND HARDWARE AND WALL STRUCTURE TO DECK ABOVE. INDICATES EXISTING PARTITION TO BE REMOVED. EXISTING WINDOW TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE
EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE. SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION. PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN. SALVAGE DOOR HOLD OPENS FOR REINSTALLATION. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISH (CARPET
AND RUBBER BASE) REMOVE EXISTING SPRAY ON FIREPROOFING. PREPARE STEEL TO RECEIVE NEW INTUMESCENT COATING REMOVE EXISTING RADIATOR COVERS. REMOVE WALL FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW ADA PUSH
BUTTON. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN DEMOLISHED ELEMENT REMOVE DOOR AND FRAME Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/8" = 1'-0"
FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION DA-101 1/8" = 1'-0" 1DEMOLITION -LEVEL 5 GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. REMOVE ALL EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES COMPLETELY (CARPET UNLESS NOTED AS RAISED FLOOR). 2.
PREPARE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED TO RECEIVE NEW RESINOUS FLOOR FINISH. THIS INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO SHOT BLASTING OR OTHER MECHANICAL MEANS REQUIRED TO CREATE
A LEVEL SURFACE AS DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 LEGEND INDICATES EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND
SUSPENSION SYSTEM TO BE DEMOLISHED, INCLUDES ALL CEILING MOUNTED LIGHTING AND DEVICES AND SUPPLY REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS. EXISTING DUCTWORK AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED. DEMOLITION KEY NOTES: REMOVE EXISTING SOFFIT. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL CONSTRUCTION, INSULATION, AND BRACING TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING CEILING. REMOVE EXISTING ACCESS
PANEL. REMOVE AND REINSTALL EXISTING ACT GRID AND TILE TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW PARTITION INSTALLATION. 1 2 3 4 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
1/8" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN DA-111 1/8" = 1'-0" 1DEMOLITION -LEVEL 5 UP UP UP G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22'
- 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"14' - 4 5/16"4' - 1 7/8" 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"18' - 6 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" 1' - 7 5/8" EQ EQ TERRACE GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS
594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 578 576 574 572 50044 LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 WOMEN
50021 50073 50076 512 514 508 504A 504 502 500 503 501 517 519 521 521A 523 520 518 516 514B 571 503 SF505 SF 1 A-410 2 A-410 42 460 SF505 SF 31 503 SF 5 1 1 1 11 11 11 11 3 4 4 11
11 11 11 44 SF STORAGE 551B 551B 1 500 1 LABORATORY 551 A1 4 6 7 7 A-301 1 9 TYP. A-301 3 5 4 6 A-541 1 A-541 3 A-541 4 A1 A1 551 1 12 A-501 1 C1 13 13 13 B1 A1 D2 9 9 9 13 13 STORAGE
551A 551A 1 E1 551 3 B1 6 A-502 TYP. 12 TYP. 12 TYP. D1 A-302 1 A-501 3 E1 A-3017 A-301 8 A-301 2 2 A-502 2 A-502 2 A-502 10 10 A-501 2 A-501 2 SIM. TYP. 2 50046 STAIR# 3 50003 50040
50042 STAIR# 2 50002 50063 50062 50061 571A A-501 4 551 2 1' - 4" 11' - 0"3' - 1" 6' - 9" 3' - 0" 50021 1 50022 1 14 14 14 14 14 A1 1' - 4" A1 EQEQ TYP. TYP. TYP. 1' - 1" ALIGN OF WALL
AND COLUMN 0' - 4" 4' - 5"8' - 1" ALIGN KEY NOTES: FIXED WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK, WOOD WITH EPOXY COUNTERTOP. PREPARE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH, SEE ALSO A-131.
WALL MOUNTED OPEN SHELVING BY LABORATORY CASEWORK MFR. SINK WITH COUNTERTOP MOUNTED EYEWASH. NOT USED. RELOCATED CORRIDOR DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE. NOT USED. INCLUDE PAINTED FLOOR MARKINGS,
APPROXIMATELY 4" WIDE AND LOCATED ALONG THE COLUMN LINES IN THE PROJECT AREA. WIRE MESH DIVIDER CURTAIN. SUSPENDED FROM C CHANNEL TRACK WITH TROLLEY ACCESSORY. RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER
CABINET. 2-HOUR RATED INTUMESCENT COATING ON COLUMNS. PREPARE EXISTING STEEL TO RECEIVE COATING REPLACE EXISTING RADIATOR COVERS. ADD END CAPS. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE
. SURFACE MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD, 8' TALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 / 1A-603 13 14 LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN NEW INTERIOR PARTITION NEW 1-HR RATED PARTITION NEW
2-HR RATED PARTITION NEW FIXED FURNITURE/ CASEWORK EXISTING WALL PARTITION TO BE DEMOLISHED Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street
Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester,
NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park
Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated FIFTH FLOOR
PLAN A-101 1/8" = 1'-0" 1LEVEL 5 GENERAL NOTE: 1. GRIND EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB, FILL ALL CRACKS WITH EPOXY SEALANT, AND PREPARE TO RECEIVE SPECIFIED FINISH. 2. PAINT ALL WALLS AND
EXPOSED CEILING ELEMENTS IN THE PROJECT AREA. PAINT ALL WALLS IN EXISTING CORRIDOR 50044. 3. REFER TO SHEET A-141 FOR LOOSE FURNITURE PLAN UP UP G F8 F E D C B A 234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11
10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 A-410 2 A-410 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"14' - 4 5/16"4' - 1 7/8" 22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"18' - 6 5/8"1' - 7 5/8" EQ EQ TERRACE GRAD.
STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 578 576 574 572 50044 LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC.
CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 WOMEN 50021 50073 50076 512 514 508 504A 504 502 500 503 501 517 519 521 521A 523 520 518 516 514B 571 503 SF505 SF 42 460 SF505 SF 31 503 SF 5 ALTERNATE 1: GLAZED
WALL PARTITION. ALTERNATE 2: MOVABLE BARN-DOOR STYLE WHITE BOARDS. OPENING HEIGHT 8'-2". 3'-6" X 8'-0" PANELS BY CLARIDGE OR SIMILAR. A-302 4 STORAGE 551B A-302 3 LABORATORY 551 LABORATORY
597 551 1 50046 STAIR# 3 50003 50040 50042 STAIR# 2 50002 50063 50062 50061 571A STORAGE 597A 551 2 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/8" = 1'-0"
FIFTH FLOOR PLAN ALTERNATES A-101A 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 LEVEL 5 -ALTERNATE 2 DN DN DN UP DN G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 657B 657A 653 653A 654668 60075 652
655 627 657 658 651 REMOVE AND REINSTALL NEW 2 HOUR RATED SHAFT CONSTRUCTION TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF NEW DUCTWORK . SEE PARTITION C1. G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10
9 8 12 13 14 H X 757757B 70044 757A 757C 751 705 752 70075 768 SERVER/DATA CENTER REMOVE AND REINSTALL NEW 2 HOUR RATED SHAFT CONSTRUCTION TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLATION OF NEW DUCTWORK
. SEE PARTITION C1. G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 80060 80064 802 804 80061 801 803 805 NEW AHU AND HOUSEKEEPING PAD, SEE ALSO MECHANICAL AND STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS ACS 3 & 4 REMOVE EXISTING SECURITY FENCE AND GATE AND REINSTALL IN NEW LAYOUT. NEW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND HOUSEKEEPING PAD, SEE ALSO MECHANICAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS G
F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 12 H NEW OPENING AND FRAME SUPPORT IN EXISTING ROOF CONSTRUCTION FOR NEW LOUVERED PENTHOUSE. SEE ALSO STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.
LIMITS OF ROOF REPLACEMENT WORK. ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE TO MAINTAIN EXISTING ROOF WARRANTY. 10 A-502 A-502 9 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC
347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley
Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy
Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
1/16" = 1'-0" SIXTH, SEVENTH AND EIGHTH FLOOR PLANS A-102 1/16" = 1'-0" 1SIXTH FLOOR PLAN 1/16" = 1'-0" 2SEVENTH FLOOR PLAN 1/16" = 1'-0" 3PENTHOUSE FLOOR PLAN 1/16" = 1'-0" 4ROOF FLOOR
PLAN G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 A-410 2 A-410 B.O. BEAM 10' - 1 1/2" TYP. A2 A-111 2 1 TYP. A3 3 3 1 A-502 9 A-503 4 10' - 8" 4 2 A4 A1 A1 A5 6 6 A2
A2 1 TYP. 1 TYP. 8' - 8" 8' - 8" 8' - 8" 11' - 7" B.O. BEAM 10' - 1 1/2" 11' - 7" 10' - 1 1/2" B.O. BEAM B.O. BEAM B.O. BEAM 11' - 10 1/2" B.O. BEAM 9' - 1" 8' - 0"9 A-503SIM. 11' -
4 1/2" B.O. BEAM A-111 3 A-111 4 A7 A7 11 A-503 TYP. 8' - 2" 4 LINE OF NEW TO EX. CEILING L INE OF EX. TO N EW CEI L ING 4 A8 A8 7 TYP. ALIGN EQEQ T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q EQEQ TYP.
EQ TYP. EQ OF GRID OF GRID 2 1 / 4 " 3 ' 7 " 3' - 3" EQEQ E Q E Q 2 ' 1 0 " 2 ' 1 0 " EQEQ E Q E Q ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN 7 A-503 KEY NOTES: 1DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE
SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE FLUSH MOUNTED CEILING ACCESS PANEL, 2'X2' SUSPENDED STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD ENCLOSURE AROUND EXISTING MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT (ABOVE CEILING) FOR ACOUSTICAL PURPOSES. NEW GYPSUM BOARD CEILING FLUSH WITH ADJACENT EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN. PATCH AND PAINT CEILING. TRANSFER DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL.
GYPSUM ENCLOSURE AROUND EXISTING BEAM. FIREPROOFING TO REMAIN. SEE DETAILS ON A-502. 2 3 4 5 6 7 LIGHT LEGEND: A1LINEAR PENDANT, 8'-0" LONG A2LINEAR PENDANT, 4'-0" LONG A3LINEAR PENDANT,
6'-0" LONG A42X2 RECESSED DIRECT/INDIRECT A5RECESSED CAN LIGHT A6 FLAT RECESSED LET LIGHT, 8'-0" LONG A7 FLAT RECESSED LET LIGHT, 3'-0" LONG A8LINEAR PENDANT, 7'-0" LONG CEILING FINISH
LEGEND: FOAM ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT ADHERED TO CEILING. PROVIDE SONEX, TECH WEDGE ACOUSTICAL FOAM BY ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS INC. 2" THICK, 2'X4' PANEL SIZE. PROVIDE FULL RANGE OF
MFR. COLOR SAMPLES FOR SELECTION EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM NEW ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM NEW SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILING ACOUSTICAL
WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL LIGHT SUSPENDED ABOVE C CHANNEL SYSTEM. CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED
FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. E Q E Q E Q NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 10% ADDITIONAL ATTIC STOCK OF ALL CCHANNEL SUSPENDED SYSTEM 2. ALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS TO BE
PAINTED. 3. DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8 ' 6 " 8' - 6" EQEQ T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q LEGEND: SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN GRILLE WIRELESS WALL MOUNTED ACCESS POINT RETRACTABLE
POWER CHORD WAP F 2 UNISTRUT OR KINDORF CCHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. 8' - 6" ALIGN ALIGN 9' - 0" B.O SOFFIT 9' - 6" B.O CURTAIN ROD
38° 10 A-503 INDICATES BLACKOUT CURTAIN AND TRACK (BY OWNER) ALIGN ALIGN D E Q E Q E Q 8 ' 6 " 4' - 3" UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE.
HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. ALIGN T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-111 1/8" = 1'-0"
1LEVEL 5 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 2TYPICAL SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING LAYOUT 1/4" = 1'-0" 3SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING LAYOUT 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 SLOTTED METAL FRAMING CEILING
LAYOUT GENERAL NOTES: 1. ONLY DOWNTURNED SPRINKLER HEADS ARE SHOWN. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR UPTURNED AND DOWNTURNED SPRINKLER HEADS. 2. LIGHTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER
TO MEP FOR CEILING MOUNTED FIXTURES. G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X 1 A-410 2 A-410 ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN TYP. EQ TYP. EQ E Q E Q T Y P . E Q T Y P . E Q OF
ACOUSTIC PANELS OF ACOUSTIC PANELS CEILING FINISH LEGEND: FOAM ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT ADHERED TO CEILING. PROVIDE SONEX, TECH WEDGE ACOUSTICAL FOAM BY ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS INC.
2" THICK, 2'X4' PANEL SIZE. PROVIDE FULL RANGE OF MFR. COLOR SAMPLES FOR SELECTION EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM NEW ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND SUSPENSION
SYSTEM NEW SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILING ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
1/8" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -ACCOUSTIC TREATMENT A-111A 1/8" = 1'-0" 1LEVEL 5 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -ACCOUSTICAL TREATMENT TGB C P A B DC E DH DH DC DC CR 3 a,b
D CR 3 a,b D 3 a,b D CR G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 H X LABORATORY 551 STORAGE 551B WAP WAP WAP A-501 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 STORAGE 551A F F F F F F F S S S EP LEGEND:
WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) DATA
RECEPTACLE (O.F.C.I.) CARD READER DOOR HOLD OPEN, TIED TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DOOR STRIKE MAG LOCK CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S) WIRELESS ACCESS POINT PUSH BUTTON LIGHT
SWITCH DIMMER SWITCH ALARM SIGNAL, STROBE SPACE SENSOR/ TEMPERATE ADJUSTMENT EMERGENCY PHONE CR DH DS ML WAP S D F S EP POWER & DATA KEY NOTES: DEDICATED POWER RECEPTACLE TO SERVE THE
CONDENSATE PUMP. TO BE MOUNTED INSIDE THE BASE CABINET. INDICATES CORD REELS LOCATED ON CEILING. SEE ALSO DETAIL FOR LAYOUT OF DEVICES AT COLUMN RACEWAY. LOCATE SWITCH
ON COLUMN FACE. EXPOSED CONDUIT PAINTED TO MATCH COLUMN FINISH. 1 2 3 4 / 7A-502 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite
1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester,
NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park
Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated POWER &
COMMUNICATIONS FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-121 1/8" = 1'-0" 1POWER & COMMUNICATIONS -LEVEL 5 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ARCHITECTURAL POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLANS SHOW GENERAL LOCATION OF RECEPTACLES
AND DEVICES. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT ON SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLING BACK BOXES. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR COMPLETE ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS. 2. RECEPTACLE
COVER PLATES ARE VERTICAL U.O.N. 3. CENTER LINE OF ELECTRICAL AND DATA RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES ARE 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. UP UP UP G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14
H X 1 A-410 2 A-410 1 8 ' 6 3 / 1 6 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 2 2 ' 8 " 1 4 ' 4 5 / 1 6 " 4 ' 1 7 / 8 " 18' - 6 3/16"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"22' - 8"18' - 6 5/8" 1' - 7
5/8" 1 ' 7 5 / 8 " 1' - 7 5/8" EQ EQ TERRACE 578 576 574 572 50044 50073 50076 512 514 508 504A 504 502 500 503 501 517 519 521 521A 523 520 518 516 514B 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD.
STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 WOMEN 50021 LABORATORY
551 STORAGE 551B STORAGE 551A CURTAINS ABOVE TO ALIGN WITH FLOOR MARKINGS MARKINGS TO ALIGN WITH COL. CL E Q E Q EQEQ 2' - 11" ALIGN ALIGN 11 A-502 LINE OF NEW TO EX. CARPET TILE LEGEND
CARPET TILE AND 6" RUBBER BASE. EXISTING CARPET TILE TO REMAIN. EXPOSED CONCRETE. PREPARE SURFACE AS REQUIRED TO RECEIVE SPECIFIED FINISH, INCLUDING PROVIDING A LEVEL SURFACE PER THE
SPECIFICATIONS, FILL CRACKS WITH EPOXY FILLER, POLISH, AND SEAL. USE SIKAFLOOR 160 (PRIMER), SIKAFLOOR 217 (CLEAR EPOXY COAT), SIKAFLOOR 315N (CHEMICAL RESISTANT CLEAR URETHANE). EPOXY
FLOOR COATING SIKAFLOOR 2870 (LINE STRIPING) IN PATTERN SHOWN. APPLY BEFORE APPLICATION OF CLEAR URETHANE TOP COAT. COLOR TBD. NOTES 1. INSTALL 6" BASE MOLDING IN ROOM 551, STORAGE
ROOMS 551A AND 551B, AND CORRIDOR 50044 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T
212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/8" = 1'-0" FIFTH FLOOR -FLOOR FINISH PLAN A-131 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 FLOOR
FINISH PLAN -LEVEL 5 KEY NOTES: MOVABLE STORAGE CABINET WITH WOOD TOP (N.I.C.) INDUSTRIAL WORKBENCH WITH BUTCHER BLOCK TOP, ON CASTERS. SIZE 60"X30". (N.I.C.) STORAGE RACK ON CASTERS,
APPROX. 7' HIGH. (N.I.C.) BLACK OUT CURTAIN BOOTH, SUSPENDED FROM CEILING GRID (N.I.C.) FULL HEIGHT WIRE MESH CURTAIN. TRACK SUSPENDED FROM SLAB ABOVE. FLOOR MOUNTED SCREEN WITH METAL
GRID PANEL. SEE . EXPERIMENT AREA, WOOD BOX, ROBOTIC ARM, ETC. (N.I.C.) STOOL ON WHEELS, ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT. (N.I.C.) 8'-8" HIGH OPEN SHELVING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 2A-141
9 4 ' 0 " 6 ' 0 " 1' - 0" 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" STEEL TUBE FRAME, PAINTED. FULLY WELD ALL JOINTS WIRE MESH INFILL BASIS OF DESIGN: CHAOS BY CAMBRIDGE ARCHITECTURAL MESH 1/4" DEEP STABILIZING
LEG (STEEL) 1" = 1'-0" PROVIDE WEIGHT IN BASE FOR STABILITY G F8 F E D C B 1234 G59 H 50044 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 33 8 8 8 8 5 5 5 5 8 8 8 21 2 3 2 1 3 3 1 2 1 22 3 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 2
6 8 8 8 5 8 1 2 38 8 21 8 66 8 6 6 6 8 6 8 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 LABORATORY 551 STORAGE 551A STORAGE 551B 9 9 9 9 99 6 6 6 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As indicated FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT PLAN -FIFTH FLOOR A-141 2DEMOUNTABLE TYPE PANEL 3/16" = 1'-0" 1 FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT -LEVEL 5 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" G F8 F E D 1 1
1 A-502 7A 7A PT-3PT-3PT-3 551 1 NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTING WALL 8 8 14 NEW WALL EXISTING WALL RB, TYP. EXISTING WALL EQEQ KEY NOTES: NEW FRAME AND GLAZING. SEE A-601. WIRELESS WALL
MOUNTED ACCESS POINT (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE (SEE RCP) UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF.
CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S) DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE. PROVIDE AT EACH EXTERIOR
WINDOW. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE . NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. PROVIDE 8.5" X 11" INSERT. WIRE MESH CURTAINS ON UNISTRUT TRACK ASSEMBLY. GLASS MARKERBOARD PANEL ON STAINLESS STEEL
SLIDING TRACK HARDWARE SYSTEM. FOAM ACOUSTICAL PANELS ADHERED TO CEILING. WIREMOLD WITH POWER RECEPTACLES. TRANSFER DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION IN FIELD WITH ARCHITECT.
RECESSED FIRE CABINET. DOOR HOLDER CONNECTION. CABLE TRAY. SEE ELECTRICAL. SMOKE DETECTOR. FIN TUBE RADIATOR COVER. INDICATES NEW SHAFT WALL PARTITION, EXTEND 6" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING,
DO NOT DISTURB EXISTING WALL FIRE DAMPERS. RELOCATED CONTROLS WALL STOP PIPING TO SERVICE SINK BELOW, INSTALL TIGHT TO COLUMN, PAINT. ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED
ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL EMERGENCY PHONE. 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 1A-603 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7A 22 23 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 234 CORRIDOR 50044 A-541 2 6 TYP. 6"
2 10 PT-1 PT-2 13 16 RB, TYP. 20 WAP 11 PT-4 A-502 6 SIM. LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" GF8FEDC CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. A-502 5 5 TYP. 8 TYP. PT-1 PT-2 6 ' 8 " 15 NEW WALL
EXISTING WALL EXISTING WALL NEW WALL 5" 3 ' 1 0 " T Y P . EQEQ 10 9 A-503 551 1 551 2 10 TYP. 23 S LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 3 4 CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. 7 6 2 10 13
551 3 16 1/2" RB, TYP. EQEQ 2 WAPWAP A-503 11 11 16 A-503 7 SS LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" F E D C CORRIDOR 50044 3 4 TYP. TYP. 5 TYP. 6 TYP. A-541 6 A-541 5 A-502 2 A-502 2 A-502
2 8 TYP. 22 TYP. 6 A-502 PT-4 15 17 TYP.22 15 21 22 TYP.22 TYP.22 TYP. 22 TYP. 6 TYP. 6 TYP.6 TYP.6 TYP. 10 TYP. GENERAL NOTES: 1. FOR POWER / DATA OUTLET LOCATIONS, SEE 2. WHERE EXISTING
WALL HATCH IS NOTED ON ELEVATIONS IT IS TO DELINEATE NEW VS EXISTING WALL LOCATIONS/ EXISTING WALLS ON OTHER ELEVATIONS ARE NOT ALL INDICATED BY THIS HATCH. 3. ALL ABOVE CEILING ITEMS,
INCLUDING PIPING, DUCTS, CONDUITS, ETC. TO BE PAINTED. / 1A-121 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" FE PT-3PT-3 3 A-501 16 16 18 18 14 RB, TYP. EXISTING WALL 19 3 ' 1 0 " NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTIN
G WALL LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 3 PT-3 PT-3 NEW WALL CONSTRUCTIONEXISTING WALL 551 3 RB, TYP. 1 7A LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" G F8 7 PT-1 PT-2 A-541 9 16 LEGEND WALL
MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) DATA RECEPTACLE
(O.F.C.I.) STROBE LIGHT (SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS) LIGHT SWITCH CARD READER WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SPACE SENSOR CR WAP S Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-301 1/4" = 1'-0" 1WEST ELEVATION @ CORRIDOR 1/4" = 1'-0" 3INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 5INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551
LOOKING EAST 1/4" = 1'-0" 4INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 6INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING WEST 1/4" = 1'-0" 7INTERIOR ELEVATION IN CORRIDOR 50044
LOOKING EAST 1/4" = 1'-0" 2INTERIOR ELEVATION IN CORRIDOR 50044 LOOKING NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 551 LOOKING WEST LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 5 EQEQEQEQ
12 12 KEY NOTES: NEW FRAME AND GLAZING. SEE A-601. WIRELESS WALL MOUNTED ACCESS POINT (SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE (SEE RCP) UNISTRUT OR KINDORF C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED
FROM THREADED ROD FASTENERS TO SLAB ABOVE. HUNG AT 8'-8" AFF. CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S) DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE BLACK OUT SHADE.
BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE. PROVIDE AT EACH EXTERIOR WINDOW. NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. SEE . NEW ROOM SIGNAGE. PROVIDE 8.5" X 11" INSERT. WIRE MESH CURTAINS ON
UNISTRUT TRACK ASSEMBLY. GLASS MARKERBOARD PANEL ON STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING TRACK HARDWARE SYSTEM. FOAM ACOUSTICAL PANELS ADHERED TO CEILING. WIREMOLD WITH POWER RECEPTACLES. TRANSFER
DUCTS. SEE MECHANICAL. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION IN FIELD WITH ARCHITECT. RECESSED FIRE CABINET. DOOR HOLDER CONNECTION. CABLE TRAY. SEE ELECTRICAL. SMOKE DETECTOR. FIN TUBE RADIATOR
COVER. INDICATES NEW SHAFT WALL PARTITION, EXTEND 6" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING, DO NOT DISTURB EXISTING WALL FIRE DAMPERS. RELOCATED CONTROLS WALL STOP PIPING TO SERVICE SINK BELOW, INSTALL
TIGHT TO COLUMN, PAINT. ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT, GROOVED AND PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD PANEL EMERGENCY PHONE. 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 1A-603 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7A 22
23 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 3 8 ' 0 " 9 PT-1 PT-2 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" G F8 F E D 1 1 1 1 7A 7A PT-3PT-3PT-3 551 1 14 RB, TYP. Revisions: Issue for BidDecember
15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/4" = 1'-0" INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-302 1/4" = 1'-0" 1INTERIOR ELEVATION IN ROOM 571 LOOKING SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 3INTERIOR ELEVATION AT WHITE BOARD PARTITION
-ALTERNATE 2 1/4" = 1'-0" 4WEST ELEVATION @ CORRIDOR -ALTERNATE 1 LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 1234567 LEVEL 7 894' -0" T.O. PARAPET 910' -8" PENTHOUSE FLOOR T.O.S. 907' -4" HIGH
ROOF T.O.S. 927' -4" T.O. PARAPET 3 930' -8" PROJECT AREA50044 2 A-410 A-502 6 A-502 9 55150042512514 800648028006080060803 PENTHOUSE MECHANICAL SHAFT LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880'
-8" F8FEDCBA LEVEL 7 894' -0" T.O. PARAPET 910' -8" PENTHOUSE FLOOR T.O.S. 907' -4" HIGH ROOF T.O.S. 927' -4" T.O. PARAPET 3 930' -8" 1 A-410 PROJECT AREA 50044 551 8006480060 A-502
5 PENTHOUSE Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South
Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall
Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/8" = 1'-0" BUILDING SECTIONS A-410 1/8" = 1'-0" 1SECTION 1 1/8" = 1'-0" 2SECTION 2 F 3 EXISTING
STRUCTURAL COLUMN . REMOVE EXISTING SPRAY ON FIREPROOFING AND PREPARE SURFACE TO RECEIVE NEW 2 HR RATED INTUMESCENT COATING. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. WIREMOLD/RACEWAY WITH POWER AND DATA.
SEE ALSO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. A-502 7 F 4 3 ' 0 1 / 2 " 3 ' 0 1 / 2 " EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION ALIGN ALIGN CORRIDOR 50044 LABORATORY 551 SHAFT 0' - 2 1/2" 0' - 2 1/2" RELOCATED
DOUBLE SWING DOOR AND FRAME WITH HOLD OPENS EXISTING SHAFT CONSTRUCTION 3 4 A-502 RECESSED FIRE CABINET WALL TYPE -SEE PLAN E 4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN WIRE MOLD ALIGN BASE MOLDING
BELOW A-502 7 STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. 1 ' 0 " Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New
York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606
585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue
Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated DETAILS I A-501
1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1TYPICAL WIREMOLD AT COLUMNS 3/4" = 1'-0" 3PLAN DETAIL AT CORRIDOR POCKET DOOR 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2PLAN DETAIL AT RECESSED FIRE CABINET 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4PLAN DETAIL AT DOOR
OPENING LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM WITH FIREPROOFING A-602 H3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL & SUSPENSION SYSTEM (SEE RCP FOR TYPE) EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 3 5/8" METAL
STUDS @ 24" O.C. MAX 21/2" METAL STUDS DIAGONAL BRACES 48" O.C. AS REQUIRED. 21/2" CONTINUOUS METAL TRACK, 18 GAUGE SECURED TO STRUCTURE 6 " GWB SOFFIT 8' - 8" EDGE OF THE WALL BEYOND
LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" E 1/2" DIA. THREADED HANGER ROD PAINTED C-CHANNEL NUT AND WASHER (TYP.) EXISTING STEEL FRAMING WITH FIREPROOFING SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE FINISHED FLOOR
DUCT BEYOND CEILING MOUNTED RETRACTABLE POWER RECEPTACLE(S) SPRINKLER SYSTEM ACOUSTICAL FOAM PANEL CHANNEL BRACE WIRE MECH CURTAIN C CHANNEL TRACK WITH TROLLEY ACCESSORY A-503 5 METAL
GRID: B.O. GRID 8'-8" -8'-10" LIGHTING: B.O. LIGHT 9'-1" -9'-6" SPRINKLER: 9'-7" -9'-11" DUCTS: B.O. 10'-0" -12'-10 3/4" CEILING MOUNTING HEIGHT ZONES CHANNEL AND GYPSUM BD ENCLOSURE
LEVEL 5 867' -4" E 3 A-502 EXISTING WINDOW SILL NEW WINDOW SILL EXISTING WINDOW SILLNEW WINDOW SILL EXISTING WINDOW FRAME EXISTING WINDOW SILL NEW PLASTIC LAMINATE WINDOW SILL TO MATCH
EXISTING EXISTING RADIATOR (TYP.) PROVIDE NEW END CAP AND COVER FOR PIPING EXPOSED WHEN COLUMN ENCLOSURE IS REMOVED. SEAMLESS TAPED AND SPECKLED JOINT BETWEEN NEW AND EXISTING WALL
BASE MOLDING EXISTING WINDOW EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION PLASTIC LAMINATED SILL, COLOR TO MATCH EXISTING ALIGN 0 ' 2 " METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD 0 ' 0 1 / 2 " WALL REVEAL TO ALIGN
WITH BOTTOM OF SUSPEND METAL GRID, INSTALL IN NEW WALL PARTITION OR CUT INTO EXISTING. AT ALL PERIMETER WALLS IN LAB 551 PT-1 PT-2 8'-8" WALL TYPE SEE PLAN PRESSURE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING
PREFABRICATED EQUIPMENT CURB ADHESIVE CEMENT SPLICING CEMENT IN-SEAM SEALANT FLASHING LOUVER PENTHOUSE FOR EXHAUST FAN, SET ON WATER CUTOFF MASTIC 4" RIGID INSULATION NEW SLAB OPENING
EXISTING ROOF SYSTEM TO REMAIN LAP MEMBRANE OVER EXISTING NEW EPDM ROOF SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING NOTE: SEE ALSO STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL NEW
STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS. APPLY SPRAY ON FIREPROOFING TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 DUAL ROLLER WINDOW SHADES WITH FASCIA, ONE SOLAR AND ONE
BLACK OUT SHADE. BASIS OF DESIGN URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE ACOUSTIC PANELS C-CHANNEL SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE (SEE RCP) A-503 11 LEVEL 5 867' -4" 3 ± 2 ' 6 " EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN
QUAD RECEPTACLE DATA OUTLET WIRE MOLD LEVEL 5 867' -4" 3 ' 0 " 5/8" GWB RECESSED FIRE CABINET FINISHED FLOOR EXISTING CARPET NEW CARPET TRANSITION STRIP EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
10 A-502 LOUVERS EXISTING ROOF CONSTRUCTION Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated DETAILS II A-502 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1DETAIL @ GLAZED PARTITION
3/4" = 1'-0" 5SECTION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2TYPICAL WINDOW ELEVATION BEHIND COLUMNS 3" = 1'-0" 3WINDOW SILL DETAIL 12" = 1'-0" 8WALL REVEAL DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 10TYPICAL VENTILATION LOUVER
DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" 6SECTION DETAIL AT WINDOWS 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 7TYPICAL ELEVATION OF WIREMOLDS AT COLUMN 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4SECTION DETAIL AT RECESSED FIRE CABINET 12" = 1'-0" 11NEW TO
EXISTING CARPET TRANSITION DETAIL 1" = 1'-0" 9ELEVATION @ VENTILATION LOUVER PAINTED UNISTRUT C CHANNEL SYSTEM SUSPENDED LED LIGHTS ACOUSTIC CEILING PANELS FLOOR CONSTRUCTION ABOVE
CORNER FITTING SEE / 2A-503 T-INTERSECTION FITTING SEE / 3A-503 INTERSECTION FITTING SEE / 4A-503 NOTE:PROVIDE
ALL REQUIRED ACCESSORIES FOR THE METAL GRID SYSTEM, INCLUDING HANGARS, RODS, ATTACHMENT TO DECK ABOVE, NUTS, BOLTS, SLOTTED C CHANNEL, CONNECTION PIECES, BRACING, ETC. PROVIDE MOCKUP
GRID AT FULL SIZE IN SINGLE LOCATION TO SERVE AS MODEL FOR THE BALANCE OF THE INSTALLATION ALL COMMENTS OF HANGING METAL GRID SYSTEM SHALL BE PAINTED. E PAINTED C CHANNEL STAINLESS
STEEL MESH CURTAIN 1/4" DIA. THREADED HANGER ROD. , PROVING BRACING BETWEEN HANGERS WASHER AND BOLT 8' - 8" TROLLEY SYSTEM, ACCESSORY BY CHANNEL MFR. EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM EXISTING
STRUCTURAL COLUMN BEYOND CENTER MOUNT BEAM CLAMPS REMOVE EXISTING SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING TO INSTALL BEAM CLIP. INSTALL NEW SPRAY ON FIREPROOFING WHERE DISTURBED. INSTALL GYPSUM BOARD
TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING. A-503 8 HANGING WIRE (TYP.) MAIN BEAM (TYP.) ACOUSTIC LAY-IN CEILING PANELS (REFER TO R.C.P. FOR TYPE) EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION ABOVE
REFER TO R.C.P. CEILING HEIGHT CROSS TEE (TYP.) CONTINUOUS 1/2" SHADOW MOULDING PERIMETER (TYP) PARTITION -SEE PLAN CEILING HEIGHT REFER TO R.C.P. ANGLE MOLDING REVEAL WIDTH TO MATCH
WIDTH OF TEE GRID. ACOUSTIC LAY-IN CEILING PANEL (REFER TO R.C.P. FOR TYPE) FACE OF PARTITION OR FASCIA LEVEL 6 880' -8" 571 SEALANT TAPE & SPACKLE, TYP. 1 LAYER 5/8" GWB 1 LAYER 1"
GWB LINER PANEL STEEL J-RUNNER 2 LAYER 5/8" GWB CORNER BEAD SEALANT EXISTING WALL EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 3 1/8" 2 1/2" EXISTING HVAC UNIT 9' - 1" A-502
8 ATTACH SUSPENSION ROD TO THE SOFFIT LEVEL 6 880' -8" F C-CHANNEL 9' - 0" 9' - 6" DUCT EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAMS WITH FIREPROOFING METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD BEAM ENCLOSURE. FIREPROOFING
TO REMAIN. INSTALL GYPSUM BOARD TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF FIREPROOFING BLACKOUT CURTAIN TRACK (N.I.C.) METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT HUNG FROM CEILING FOR FUTURE BLACKOUT CURTAIN (BLACKOUT
CURTAINS AND TRACK BY OWNER) PAINTED C CHANNEL THREADED HANGER ROD BRACING PAINTED C CHANNEL PAINTED C CHANNEL LEVEL 6 880' -8" 2 EXISTING WINDOW NEW ROLLER SHADES FUR OUT WALL USING
1 5/8" STUD AND 5/8" GWB ACOUSTICAL PANELS A-503 12 A-503 13 ± 11' - 0 1/2" EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM WITH FIRE PROOFING 1 5/8" STUD 2 1/2" STUD ALIGN CONTINUOUS WALL TRACK SHIM AS REQUIRED
ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP ALIGN DRIVE CHAIN ROLLER TUBE AND SHADE ASSEMBLY WITH DOUBLE SHADE 1 " EDGE BAND ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP SHIM AS REQUIRED CONTINUOUS WALL TRACK EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION
MATCHING VENEER SPLINE RAW SAW-CUT EDGE SHIM AS REQUIRED ALUMINUM "Z" CLIP CONTINUOUS TRACK 1/16" 1/8" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 EXISTING STRUCTURAL BEAM WITH FIREPROOFING NEW OR EXISTING
CORRIDOR WALL ± 10' - 9 1/2" METAL STUD AND GYPSUM BOARD BEAM ENCLOSURE. FIREPROOFING TO REMAIN. Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated
DETAILS III A-503 13D VIEW LOOKING AT THE GRID SYSTEM 3" = 1'-0" 5SECTION DETAIL AT CURTAIN ROD 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6A.C.T. CEILING DETAIL (TYP.) 12" = 1'-0" 8CEILING EDGE DETAIL 1 1/2"
= 1'-0" 9SOFFIT DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 10SECTION DETAIL AT BLACKOUT BOOTH 3" = 1'-0" 2CORNER FITTING 3" = 1'-0" 3T-INTERSECTION FITTING 3" = 1'-0" 4INTERSECTION FITTING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"
11SECTION DETAIL AT ACCOUSTICAL PANELS 6" = 1'-0" 12ACCOUSTIC PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT BASE 6" = 1'-0" 13ACCOUSTIC PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT TOP 6" = 1'-0" 14ACCOUSTIC PANEL BUTT
ATTACHMENT AND CORNER DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 7BEAM ENCLOSURE AT CORRIDOR WALL G F8 A-541 2 ALIGN UNDERMOUNT SINK WITH DRYING PAN ADJACENT LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" 4 4 ' 2 "
1 ' 8 " 3' - 8" 3' - 8" 3' - 8" 10 A-541 CABINET RESERVED FOR WATER PUMP 9 A-541 3 A-542 SIM. EYE WASHER C 2 A-541 5 4 1 / 4 " UNDERMOUNT SINK WITH DRYING PAN ADJACENT E 2 1 A-410
A-541 6 A-541 13 UNDERMOUNT SINK WITH DRYING PAN ADJACENT LEVEL 5 867' -4" LEVEL 6 880' -8" C 3' - 0"3' - 6"3' - 0"3' - 0" CABINET RESERVED FOR WATER PUMP 5 A-542 3 A-542 EYE WASHER
CUT CASEWORK END PANEL AROUND EXISTING FIN TUB RADIATOR. 1 A-542 PROVIDE 12"X12" ACCESS PANEL E Q E Q 4 A-542 LEVEL 5 867' -4" E 3' - 6"3' - 0"3' - 0" 2 A-542 CABINET RESERVED FOR WATER
PUMP 3 A-542 EYE WASHER CUT CASEWORK END PANEL AROUND EXISTING FIN TUB RADIATOR. 5 A-542 CUT CASEWORK END PANEL AROUND EXISTING FIN TUB RADIATOR. PROVIDE BRACING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED
(3) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; SHELF PIN HOLES INSIDE PANELS END WOOD CABINET (2) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; HOLES IN END PANELS WOOD TOEKICK 4 ' 4 " 1 ' 8 " 2 ' 1 0 " 2' - 6" 3/4" MARINE GRADE
PLYWOOD EPOXY COUNTERTOP PROVIDE METAL FRAMING OR METAL FABRICATIONS PARTITION REINFORCING AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT WOOD ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLY. 1' - 2" UNDER CABINET LED STRIP LIGHT POWER
AND DATA RECEPTACLE WOOD CABINET WITH PULL 0 ' 4 " 1 ' 1 1 " 0 ' 5 1 / 2 " 0 ' 1 1 / 2 " UNDERMOUNT STAINLESS STEEL SINK BY CASEWORK MFR. WOOD ACCESS PANEL WOOD PANEL MIN. 0' -
8" TOE CLR. 0' - 6" MIN. 0' - 11" M I N . 0 ' 9 " MIN. 1' - 5" M I N . 2 ' 3 " 2' - 6" FAUCET FINISH FLOOR ADA CLEARANCE (SHOWN DASHED) BACKSPLASH LINE OF BASE CABINET BEYOND EPOXY
COUNTERTOP PANEL ATTACHMENT CLIPS ALLOWING PANEL TO BE EASILY REMOVED FOR ACCESS. METAL OR TREATED WOOD FRAMING PROVIDE METAL FRAMING OR METAL FABRICATIONS PARTITION REINFORCING AS
REQUIRED TO SUPPORT WOOD ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLY. PROVIDE BRACING AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (3) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; SHELF PIN HOLES INSIDE PANELS END WOOD CABINET 1' - 2" 4 ' 4 " 1 '
8 " 2 ' 1 0 " UNDER CABINET LED STRIP LIGHT WIRE MOLD WITH GFCI RECEPTACLES LEVEL 5 867' -4" 2 POWER OUTLET FIN TUBE RADIATOR Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney
Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering,
P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674
T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As indicated MILLWORK DETAILS A-541 3/8" = 1'-0" 1ENLARGED PLAN AT FIXED LABORATORY CASEWORK 3/8" = 1'-0" 2ELEVATION AT CASEWORK 3/8" = 1'-0" 3 ENLARGED PLAN AT FIXED LABORATORY CASEWORK
3/8" = 1'-0" 4 ENLARGED PLAN AT FIXED LABORATORY CASEWORK 3/8" = 1'-0" 5ELEVATION AT CASEWORK 3/8" = 1'-0" 6ELEVATION AT CASEWORK 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 9BASE AND UPPER CABINET DETAIL 1 1/2"
= 1'-0" 10ADA SINK AND UPPER CABINET DETAIL 8 3D VIEW LOOKING AT MILLWORK 3/8" = 1'-0" 13SIDE ELEVATION AT CASEWORK (2) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; HOLES IN END PANELS WOOD TOEKICK 0 ' 1 1
/ 2 " 0 ' 5 1 / 2 " 2' - 6" 3/4" MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD EPOXY COUNTERTOP 0 ' 3 1 / 2 " FIN TUBE PIPING LOCATED IN CHASE BEHIND CASEWORK A-502 3 0' - 5 1/2" WOOD CABINET WITH PULL E
Q E Q E Q 0 ' 4 " (2) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; HOLES IN END PANELS WOOD TOEKICK, FLUSH, TO COVER ALL CABINET ENDS 0 ' 1 1 / 2 " 0 ' 5 1 / 2 " 1 ' 1 1 " 0 ' 4 " 2' - 6" 3/4" MARINE GRADE
PLYWOOD EPOXY COUNTERTOP 0 ' 3 1 / 2 " POWER AND DATA RECEPTACLE RECESSED, FLUSH WITH FRONT FIN TUBE PIPING LOCATED IN CHASE BEHIND CASEWORK A-502 3 0' - 5 1/2" WOOD CABINET WITH PULL
E Q E Q (2) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES; HOLES IN END PANELS WOOD CABINET WITH PULL WOOD TOEKICK, FLUSH, TO COVER ALL CABINET ENDS 2 ' 1 0 " 3/4" MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD EPOXY COUNTERTOP 0 '
3 1 / 2 " 0 ' 4 " 1 ' 1 0 1 / 2 " 0 ' 5 1 / 2 " DRAWER ON SELF-CLOSING BOTTOM SLIDERS W/ RECESSED PULL 2' - 6" FIN TUBE PIPING LOCATED IN CHASE BEHIND CASEWORK A-502 3 0' - 5 1/2"
PROVIDE 12" X 12" ACCESS PANEL FOR ACCESS TO FIN TUBE CONTROLS BEYOND UNDERMOUNT STAINLESS STEEL SINK BY CASEWORK MFR. WOOD ACCESS PANEL ON 3/4" MARVEL GRADE PLYWOOD WOOD PANEL MIN.
0' - 8" TOE CLR. 0' - 6" MIN. 0' - 11" M I N . 0 ' 9 " MIN. 1' - 5" M I N . 2 ' 3 " FAUCET FINISH FLOOR ADA CLEARANCE (SHOWN DASHED) BACKSPLASH LINE OF BASE CABINET BEYOND EPOXY COUNTERTOP
PANEL ATTACHMENT CLIPS ALLOWING PANEL TO BE EASILY REMOVED FOR ACCESS. METAL OR TREATED WOOD FRAMING FIN TUBE PIPING LOCATED IN CHASE BEHIND CASEWORK A-502 3 0' - 5 1/2" ± 3 1 / 2 "
WOOD TOEKICK, FLUSH, TO COVER ALL CABINET ENDS 0 ' 5 1 / 2 " 1 ' 1 1 " 0 ' 4 " FALSE DRAWER FIN TUBE PIPING LOCATED IN CHASE BEHIND CASEWORK A-502 3 0' - 5 1/2" WOOD CABINET WITH
PULL UNDERMOUNT STAINLESS STEEL DEEP SINK BY CASEWORK MFR. FAUCET BACKSPLASH ± 3 1 / 2 " Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street
Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester,
NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park
Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1 1/2" = 1'-0" MILLWORK
DETAILS A-542 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4BASE CABINET DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5BASE CABINET DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 3BASE CABINET DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1ADA SINK @ LABORATORY CASEWORK 1 1/2" = 1'-0"
2ADA SINK @ LABORATORY CASEWORK -D1INSULATED -HOLLOW METAL DOOR S E E S C H E D U L E SEE SCHEDULE DOOR TYPES SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" -D2FIRE RATED METAL DOOR WITH VISION LITE NOTE: GL-11
HOUR RATED GLAZING INCLUDES GLASS PRIVACY FILM, BASIS OF DESIGN: SOLYX SXJ-0561 MATTE FINE DOT GRADIENT 72". GL-2NON RATED DOUBLE GLAZED UNIT INCLUDES GLASS PRIVACY FILM, BASIS OF DESIGN:
SOLYX SXJ-0561 MATTE FINE DOT GRADIENT 72". -D3METAL DOOR WITH VISION LITE SEE DOOR SCHEDULE J4 H3 S4 GL-1 H2 S1 J5 G R A D I E N T F I L M 6 ' 2 " 3' - 7" 2 3/4" 2 3 / 4 " 2" 2 "
2 3/4" 2 3 / 4 " SEE DOOR SCHEDULE SEE DOOR SCHEDULE J4 H3 S4 GL-2 J2 H2 S1 PANIC BAR J4 H3 S3 SEE DOOR SCHEDULE GL-1 J5 H2 S1 2 ' 4 " G R A D I E N T F I L M 6 ' 2 " 3' - 6" 2 3/4"2
3/4" 2 3 / 4 " 2 " 2" 2 3 / 4 " J4 H3 S3 M1 EQEQEQEQEQEQEQ SEE DOOR SCHEDULE SEE DOOR SCHEDULE GL-2GL-2 J2 H2 S1 2 ' 4 " G R A D I E N T F I L M 6 ' 2 " 2 3/4"2 3/4" PANIC BAR SIM.
2 3 / 4 " 2 3 / 4 " 2 3 / 4 " 22' - 3"9' - 10 1/2" 2"2 3/4" 15' - 8" -F1FIRE RATED STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM -F2STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM FRAME TYPES
SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" -F6ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY FIRE RATED STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM -F5ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM 0 ' 2 " DOOR SIZE
SEE SCHEDULE -F4FIRE RATED METAL FRAME SYSTEM 0 ' 2 " DOOR SIZE SEE SCHEDULE -F3FULLY WELDED INSULATED HOLLOW METAL J3 H1 J2 H2 S1 0' - 2"0' - 2" SIM. GL-2GL-2 REMOVABLE MULLION WHERE
SPECIFIED PANIC BAR SEE SCHEDULE S E E S C H E D U L E 1 0 " GL-1 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York,
NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590
T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New
York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 1/2" = 1'-0" DOOR AND GLAZING SCHEDULE A-601
500/1CORRIDOR1 HREXISTINGEXISTING26' - 0"8' - 8"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET 3H1J1-EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME - SALAVAGE AND REINSTALL 551/1LABORATORY1 HRD2HM / GLASS13' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F1STLPNTSET
1H2J5S1PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. RATED DOORS INSTALLATION AND GAP MEASUREMENT MUST COMPLY WITH NFPA 80 STANDARD. 551/2LABORATORYNONED3HM / GLASS26' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F2STLPNTSET 2H2J2S1PROVIDE
ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT 551/3LABORATORYNONED3HM / GLASS25' - 11 1/2"8' - 4 7/8"0' - 2"F4STLPNTSET 2H2J2 SIM.S1PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT 551A/1STORAGENONED1HM12' -
6"7' - 0"0' - 2"F1HMPNTSET 4H1J3-3/4" UNDERCUT 551B/1STORAGENONED1HM13' - 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"F1HMPNTSET 4H1J3-3/4" UNDERCUT 551/1LABORATORY1 HRD2HM / GLASS13' - 0"8' - 6"0' - 2"F6STLPNTSET
1H2J5S1ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY. PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. RATED DOORS INSTALLATION AND GAP MEASUREMENT MUST COMPLY WITH NFPA 80 STANDARD. 551/2LABORATORYNONED3HM / GLASS26' - 0"8' - 6"0'
- 2"F5STLPNTSET 2H2J2S1ALTERNATE BID 1 ONLY. PROVIDE ACCESS CONTROL. 3/4" UNDERCUT GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL INTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE LOCK SETS ARE SARGENT "STANDARD LEVER, STYLE J" MORTISE
LOCKS/EXIT DEVICES OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2. REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR DOOR SWING. 3. A SOLID WALL FROM TOP OF FRAME TO UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE ABOVE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED ABOVE ALL FRAMES,
INCLUDE BRACING AT DOOR OPENINGS. PROVIDE HEADER AND/OR LINTEL AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT WALL CONSTRUCTION AT HEAD OF ALL FRAMES. SEE WALL PARTITIONS A-603. 4. ALL CYLINDERS/KEYING TO
BE ‘BEST’. 5. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GLAZING TYPES. 6. PROVIDE ALL ACCESS CONTROL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM. INSTALLATION
AND COMMISSIONING TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. 7. OPENING FORCE ON ALL DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 POUNDS. 8. HARDWARE SHALL COME FROM A SINGLE SOURCE. SUBSTITUTIONS TO THE SETS BELOW
IS SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT AND UNIVERSITY. 9. SEE THE POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLAN AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ACCESS CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND DIAGRAMS. 10. DOOR
CLOSERS, WHERE SCHEDULED, SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INTERIOR (NON-CORRIDOR) SIDE. 11. POWER SUPPLY BPS-24-1 SHALL BE INCLUDED FOR EACH ELECTRIFIED MORTISE LOCKSET. READER INTERFACE MODULES
TO BE FIELD LOCATED ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE DOOR. 12. INSTALL ALL FIRE RATED GLAZING PER MFR. INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTAIN REQ'D RATING. 13. POWER TRANSFER (WHERE SCHEDULED) SHALL BE
LOCATED BETWEEN MIDDLE AND TOP HINGE. 14. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOOR HARDWARE SETS. -ALT 1 -ALT 1 DOOR AND FRAME SYSTEM SCHEDULE DOOR NO.ROOM NAME FIRE RATINGDOOR TYPE DOOR MATERIAL
# OF LEAFS DOOR FRAME TYPE FRAME MATERIALFINISH HARDWARE SET HEAD DETAIL JAMB DETAILSILL DETAILCOMMENTS WIDTHHEIGHTTHICKNESS 50021/1WOMEN1 HREXISTINGEXISTING13' - 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET
5H1J350022/1MEN1 HREXISTINGEXISTING13' - 0"7' - 0"0' - 2"EXISTINGHMPNTSET 5H1J3 STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. GLAZING ALIGN CORRIDOR 1 " 2 3/4" 2 1 / 2 " CORRIDOR
ALIGN STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. GLAZING EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION WITH NEW FINISH SURFACE GLAZING STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. CARPET
BASE MOLDING BEYOND CORRIDOR 1" 0' - 2 1/2" 2 3 / 4 " GLAZING STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. ALIGN CORRIDOR 0' - 2 1/2" 2 3 / 4 " STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR
AND FRAME TYPE. BUTT JOINT BETWEEN GLAZING 2 1 / 2 " GLASS 1 " EXTEND GYP. BD. INTO FRAME 5/8" MIN. WELDED H.M. DOOR AND #16 GA. STL. FRAME. SET FRAME AND BRACE AS REQUIRED PRIOR TO
WALL CONSTR. METAL STUD BOX HEADER METAL FRAME JAMB ANCHOR, SECURE WALL FRAMING AS REQUIRED FILL H.M. FRAME VOIDS WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION PRIOR TO WALL CONSTR. DOOR LEAF. SEE DOOR
SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. SECURE GWB SHEATHING TO HEADER FRAMING AS REQUIRED 1/2" SEE PLAN PARTITION TYPE 1 15/16" 1 15/16" 5 / 8 " 2 " 1 3/4" FILL H.M. FRAME VOIDS WITH
FIBERGLASS INSULATION PRIOR TO WALL CONSTR. SECURE GWB SHEATHING TO JAMB FRAMING AS REQUIRED WELDED H.M. DOOR AND #16 GA. STL. FRAME. SET FRAME AND BRACE AS REQUIRED PRIOR TO WALL CONSTR.
EXTEND GYP. BD. INTO FRAME 5/8" MIN. METAL FRAME JAMB ANCHOR, SECURE WALL FRAMING AS REQUIRED DOOR LEAF. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 1 1 5 / 1 6 " 1 1 5 / 1 6 " 2"5/8"
S E E P L A N P A R T I T I O N T Y P E 1 / 2 " STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. ALIGN LEVER HANDLE SIDELITE GLAZING GLAZING STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME
TYPE. CORRIDOR 6" 1 3 / 4 " HINGE VARIES, SEE HARDWARE SET 0' - 4 7/8" 0' - 7 3/8" SHAFT LABORATORY 551 CORRIDOR 50044 EXISTING DOOR, SALVAGE AND RE-INSTALL EXISTING FRAME, SALVAGE
AND RE-INSTALL INDICATES OPEN POSITION CORRIDOR SIDELITE GLAZING LEVER HANDLE GLAZINGSTEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. PANIC BAR REMOVABLE MULLION 6" 1 " 1 " ALIGN HINGE
VARIES, SEE HARDWARE SET 1 3 / 4 " 2 5/8" 2 5 / 8 " 1 A-602 BASKER ROD AND SEALANT, BOTH SIDES SOLID BLOCKING (2) LAYERS 5/8" GWB TO MAINTAIN 60 MIN FIRE RATING 60 MIN FIRE RATED DOOR
FRAME CLOSER STEEL DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. GLAZING ALIGN CORRIDOR 6 " BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, BOTH SIDES FIN FLOOR 1 0 " 1 3/4" 1 / 4 " 3" BASE MOLDING GLAZING STEEL
DOOR FRAME SYSTEM. SEE DOOR AND FRAME TYPE. SOLID BLOCKING & CAULK (2) LAYERS 5/8" GWB TO MAINTAIN 60 MIN FIRE RATING DOOR FRAME DOOR ALIGN CORRIDOR REMOVABLE MULLION ATTACHMENT ADAPTER
BASE RECEIVER, ATTACHED INTO EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated DOOR AND GLAZING DETAILS A-602 3" = 1'-0" J4PLAN DETAIL
@ GLAZED PARTITION 3" = 1'-0" H3SECTION DETAIL @ GLAZED PARTITION HEAD 3" = 1'-0" S4SECTION DETAIL @ GLAZED PARTITION SILL 3" = 1'-0" S3 SECTION DETAIL @ GLAZED PARTITION SILL -ALTERNATE
1 3" = 1'-0" M1MULLION DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" H1DOOR HEAD DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" J3DOOR JAMB DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" J5DOOR JAMB DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" J1DOOR JAMB DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" J2DOOR JAMB DETAIL 6"
= 1'-0" H2GLAZED DOOR HEAD DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" S1GLAZED DOOR THRESHOLD DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" 1SECTION DETAIL AT REMOVABLE MULLION GWBGYPSUM WALL BOARD*SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM WALL BOARD *SEE
PARTITION TYPES FOR GWB TYPES GWB-IRIMPACT RESISTANT GWBSECTION 092900 -GYPSUM WALL BOARD CEILING GWBPAINTED GYPSUM BOARDSECTION 092900 -GYPSUM DRYWALL ACT-1CEILING PANEL SECTION 095113
-ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS ULTIMA TILE WITH REGULAR EDGE AND PRELUDE XL SUSPENSION SYSTEM BY ARMSTRONG CODEDEFINITIONSPECIFICATION
FLOOR EXPOSED CONC.EXISTING CONCRETESECTION 096726 -RESINOUS FLOORING CPT-1CARPET TILESECTION 096813 -TILE CARPETING BASE RB-1THERMOSET RUBBER BASE -COLOR 1SECTION 096512 -RESILIENT
BASE AND ACCESSORIES WALLS PRODUCT SIKAFLOOR 160 (PRIMER), SIKAFLOOR 217 (CLEAR EPOXY COAT), SIKAFLOOR 315N (CHEMICAL RESISTANT CLEAR URETHANE), AND SIKAFLOOR 2870 (LINE STRIPING) HONOR
ROLL COLLECTION BY INTERFACE JOHNSONITE 6" RUBBER BASE APT -1ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENTSECTION 098414 -ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT DECOUSTICS SOLO GROOVED WOOD PANEL PAINT PT -1PAINT -WALL
GENERALSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS AFP -1ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENTSECTION 098400 -ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT SONEX TEC WEDGE FOAM BY ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS
PT -2PAINT -UPPER WALLSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -3PAINT -WALL GENERAL, CORRIDORSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -4PAINT
-BLACKOUT BOOTHSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS PT -5PAINT -CEILINGSECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND FINISHES SEE SPECIFICATIONS WINDOW TREATMENTS WT-1MANUAL OPERATED
WINDOW SHADE WITH SINGLE ROLLER SECTION 122413 -WINDOW SHADES DUAL ROLLER URBANSHADE BY MECHOSHADE PLASTIC LAMINATE PL-1PLASTIC LAMINATE WINDOW SILL SECTION 062000 WILSONART HPL (HIGH
PRESSURE LAMINATE) UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION STEEL STUD (1) LAYER 5/8" WALLBOARD EACH SIDE. SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE CONTINUOUS FIRERATED SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES
AND AT VERTICAL INTERFACE AT FIRE RATED PARTITIONS. CONTINUOUS ACOUSTIC SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS. CONTINUOUS STEEL RUNNER A: NON RATED
ALL NOTES REFER TO BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION, U.O.N. GAUGE AND SPACING AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPAN AND DEFLECTION REQUIREMENTS CONTINUOUS FIRERATED SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL
INTERFACE AT FIRE RATED PARTITIONS. CONTINUOUS ACOUSTIC SEALANT TYPICAL BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS. CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE
MOVEMENT GAP PARTITION: NON RATED A1 4 7/8" (3 5/8" STUD) A STUD DEPTHS BASED ON THE FOLLOWING: 2 1/2" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 11'-3" 3 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 16'-5" 4" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 18'-4"
TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR WALL FINISH. PLAN NOTES HEAD BASE BPARTITION-1 HOUR RATED ASSEMBLY TO COMPLY WITH UL U419 B1 B: 1 HOUR-RATED WIDTH TO
MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING PLAN NOTES HEAD C: 2 HOUR RATED SHAFT WALL -2 HOUR RATED ASSEMBLY TO COMPLY WITH UL U415 C1 5" 2 1/2" STUD C (2) LAYER 1/2" FIRECODE C GWB UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR
CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS FIRE RATED SEALANT BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE TYPICAL CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE MOVEMENT GAP STEEL STUD SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH
AND BASE CONTINUOUS FIRE RATED SEALANT BOTH SIDES AND VERTICAL INTERFACE TYPICAL CONTINUOUS STEEL RUNNER TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 1 1/2" THERMAFIBER SOUND ATTENUATION
FIRE BLANKET 1" SHAFT WALL LINER BASE PLAN NOTES HEAD SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE ACOUSTICAL CAULKING UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT WALL FURRING
-NON RATED NO ACOUSTIC BATT E TOP OF EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. RESILIENT CHANNEL BASE E: INSULATED E1 4 1/8" 1/2" RESILIENT CHANNEL SCHEDULED WALL FINISH 5/8" WALLBOARD 3/4"
PLYWOOD MINERAL WOOL AS PER FIRE RATED MASTIC MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION 1/2" AIR SPACE PLAN NOTES HEAD FULL HEIGHT SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET AT PARTITION TYPE P U.O.N. D: NON-INSULATED
TYPICAL: 1. WIDTH VARIES, SEE PLAN 2. ANCHOR STUD TO EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION, SPACE CLIPS EQUALLY AS REQUIRED PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION FOR HEIGHT OF FURRED WALL UNDERSIDE
OF FLOOR CONSTRUCTION NOTE: STUD DEPTHS BASED ON BRACING BACK TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED CONTIN. STL RUNNER DEFLECTION TRACK TYPICAL. PROVIDE MOVEMENT GAP AS REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL CONTINUOUS
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT WALL FURRING -NON RATED WITH INSULATION D1 5 1/4" 3 5/8" STUD WITH 1/2" SPACE STUD DEPTHS BASED ON THE FOLLOWING: 1 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 11'-0" 2 1/2" STUDS MAX
HEIGHT 12'-6" 3 5/8" STUDS MAX HEIGHT 18'-7" D2 3 5/8" 2 1/2" STUD WITH 1/2" SPACE BASE SCHEDULED WALL FINISH. SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AND BASE ACOUSTICAL CAULKING STEEL RUNNER TOP OF
EXIST. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. D 000 RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE PLASTIC SIGN FIELD 1/8" SLIDING ACRYLIC LENS INSERTED INTO C-CHANNEL SHAPE FOR PAPER INSERT INSTALLATION SPACE
FOR PAPER INSERT 0.06" CLEAR ACRYLIC UNDERSIZED BACKER PROVIDE BACK PLATE (SAME SIZE AND COLOR AS SIGN) WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE PLASTIC SIGN FIELD 1/8"
SLIDING ACRYLIC LENS INSERTED INTO C-CHANNEL SHAPE FOR PAPER INSERT INSTALLATION SPACE FOR PAPER INSERT PROVIDE BACK PLATE (SAME SIZE AND COLOR AS SIGN) WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS INTERIOR
ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE: 1. A ROOM SIGN, AS DETAILED HERE, SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED FOR EACH NEW DOOR IN THE PROJECT AREA. 2. WHEN MOUNTING ON GLASS, PROVIDE BACKING (SAME
SIZE AS SIGN) ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE GLASS. 3. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING SCHEDULE LAYOUT, PROFILES AND PRODUCT COMPONENTS, INCLUDING MATERIAL DETAILS, DIMENSIONS, ANCHORAGE, AND
ACCESSORIES FOR ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL BEFORE STARTING FABRICATION. 4. ALL SIGNAGE SYSTEMS SHALL MEET REQUIREMENTS OF THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
(ADAAG) AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS. 5. RAISED LETTERING AND/OR NUMERALS: COMPUTER-CUT CHARACTERS WITH MATTE FINISH, COLOR AS SPECIFIED FROM MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD COLOR
CHART. SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 1/32" FROM THE SIGN SURFACE. PHOTOPOLYMER TAGS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. 6. GRADE 2 BRAILLE: CLEAR RASTER BALLS COMPUTER DRILLED AND PRESSURE INSERTED
INTO SIGN FACE, SHALL BE HALFHEMISPHERE IN SHAPE AND SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 0.025" FROM THE SIGN SURFACE. OTHER METHODS OF MANUFACTURE, INCLUDING SURFACE APPLIED PHOTOPOLYMER BRAILLE
TAGS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. 7. FASTENER: VERY HIGH BOND (VHB) .030 INCH THICK DOUBLE-FACE TAPE. FINISHES: 1. COLORS AS SELECTED FROM THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CHART. 2. PATTERNS:
AS SELECTED FROM THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CHART. 1 ' 0 " 0' - 9 1/2" 7/8" THUMBSLOT 0' - 8 3/8" 0 ' 1 0 7 / 8 " 0 ' 1 1 " 1/8" ACRYLIC BACKER INSERT SLOT VINYL TAPE FILLER 1/16"
NON-GLARE ACRYLIC FILLER 1/16" NON-GLARE ACRYLIC Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated FINISH SCHEDULE & PARTITION TYPES A-603 6" = 1'-0" 1ROOM
SIGNAGE DETAIL 6" = 1'-0" 2ROOM SIGNAGE DETAIL FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBERROOM NAMEFLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH WALL FINISH CEILING FINISHCOMMENTS NORTHEASTSOUTHWEST 50044CORRIDORCP-1RB-1PT-3PT-3PT-3PT-
3ACT 551LABORATORYEXPOSED CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5INCLUDE FLOOR PAINT MARKING ON EXPOSED CONCRETE 551BSTORAGEEXPOSED CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5 551ASTORAGEEXPOSED
CONC.RB-1PT-1PT-1PT-1PT-1EXPOSED, PNT-5 Revisions: Issue for BidDecember 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T
212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation 12" = 1'-0" INTERIOR 3D VIEWS A-700 N.T.S 2 PRELIMINARY RENDERING
LOOKING EAST -ALTERNATE BID 1 N.T.S 1 PRELIMINARY RENDERING LOOKING EAST N.T.S 3 PRELIMINARY RENDERING LOOKING WEST DESIGN DATA NOTES SEISMIC LOADS:4. GENERAL:1. LOADING SCHEDULE (PSF)
MISC. LIVE LOAD LEVEL EXISTING SLAB EXISTING CEILING AND MECHANICAL 6. STRUCTURAL MATERIAL STRENGTHS: STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL: ROLLED STEEL W SHAPES ROLLED STEEL C, S, M,
MC, AND HP SHAPES ROLLED STEEL PLATES, BARS, AND ANGLES HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (HSS) PIPE FOR CONNECTIONS, PROVIDE HIGHER GRADE AS REQUIRED FOR CAPACITY. - ASTM A 992 - ASTM A
36 OR ASTM A 572, GRADE 50 - ASTM A 36 OR ASTM A 572, GRADE 50 - ASTM A 500, GRADE C - ASTM A 53, TYPE E OR S, GRADE B REINFORCING STEEL FOR CONCRETE: ASTM A 615, GRADE 60 2020
BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE (BCNYS)DESIGN PROVISIONS RISK CATEGORY TERRAIN/EXPOSURE CATEGORY SEE 1/S001 FOR ADDITIONAL WIND LOAD DATA FOR ROOFS, OVERHANGS, COMPONENTS, AND CLADDING.
117 mph 91 mph 0.85 1.0 0.85 ENCLOSED ±0.18 116 feet ULTIMATE WIND SPEED (3 SECOND GUST) (Vult): NOMINAL WIND SPEED (3 SECOND GUST) (Vasd): DIRECTIONALITY FACTOR (kd): TOPOGRAPHIC FACTOR
(Kzt): GUST EFFECT FACTOR (G): ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION: INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT (GCpi): HEIGHT OF MAIN ROOF: CODE COMPLIANCE FOR EXISTING STRUCTURES:2. DESIGN PROVISIONS COMPLIANCE
METHOD (EBCNYS) ALTERATION LEVEL 2CLASSIFICATION OF WORK (EBCNYS) 2020 EXISTING BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE (EBCNYS) WORK AREA THE FOLLOWING GRAVITY LOAD CARRYING ELEMENTS HAVE
BEEN EVALUATED BASED ON THE LIVE LOAD AND DEAD LOAD REQUIREMENTS DESCRIBED BELOW: PENTHOUSE FLOOR BEAMS AT NEW MECHANICAL UNIT. ROOF BEAMS AT NEW EXHAUST FAN. EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
RESISTING LATERAL LOADS ARE NO LESS CONFORMING TO THE PROVISIONS OF THE 2020 EBCNYS WITH RESPECT TO EARTHQUAKE AND WIND DESIGN THAN THEY WERE PRIOR TO THIS WORK. THEREFORE LATERAL LOADS
HAVE NOT BEEN EVALUATED FOR THIS STRUCTURE. SITE CLASS: SHORT-PERIOD DESIGN ACCELERATION (Sds): ONE-SECOND DESIGN ACCELERATION (Sd1): SHORT PERIOD MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE (Ss): ONE-SECOND
MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE (S1): SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY: IMPORTANCE FACTOR (Ie): D (ASSUMED) 0.127 0.073 0.119 0.045 B 1.25 WIND LOADS: GROUND SNOW LOAD (Pg) FLAT-ROOF SNOW LOAD (Pf)
SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR (Ce) THERMAL FACTOR (Ct) IMPORTANCE FACTOR (Is) 40 psf 31 psf 1.0 1.0 1.1 5. SNOW LOADS:3. III C TOTAL LOAD REMARKS HIGH ROOF PENTHOUSE 65 77 70 10 20 38 30 200
185 325 INCLUDES HUNG MEP EQUIPMENT 3" TOPPING SLAB ROOFING AND INSULATION * *** ** * *** ** 1. DIMENSIONS TO, OF, AND IN EXISTING STRUCTURE SHALL BE VERIFIED IN FIELD BY CONTRACTOR.
2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IN DIMENSIONS BETWEEN EXISTING CONDITIONS AND/OR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.
3. DO NOT CHANGE SIZE OR SPACING OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. 4. DETAILS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL; SIMILAR DETAILS APPLY TO SIMILAR CONDITIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5. THE NOTES ON THIS DRAWING
ARE TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER IN WRITING OF PROPOSED DEVIATIONS OR SUBSTITUTIONS FROM DIMENSIONS, MATERIALS, OR EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON
THE DRAWINGS AND MAKE ONLY THOSE DEVIATIONS OR SUBSTITUTIONS ACCEPTED BY ENGINEER. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. CONTRACTOR
AGREES TO BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES WHICH MIGHT OCCUR AS A RESULT OF FAILING TO EXACTLY LOCATE AND PRESERVE EXISTING UTILITIES. 8. THESE DRAWINGS DO NOT INCLUDE NECESSARY COMPONENTS
FOR CONSTRUCTION SAFETY. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION SAFETY. GENERAL NOTES 1. LOCATE MECHANICAL UNITS AS SHOWN; COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. NOTIFY
ENGINEER IF ACTUAL UNIT WEIGHTS EXCEED THE WEIGHTS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 2. CONNECTION DESIGN BY FABRICATOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY ENGINEER. 3. DO NOT PLACE HOLES THROUGH STRUCTURAL
STEEL MEMBERS EXCEPT AS SHOWN AND DETAILED ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 4. WHERE FILLET WELD SIZES ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY NOTED, THE FABRICATOR SHALL DETAIL A MINIMUM SIZE FILLET WELD IN ACCORDANCE
WITH AWS STANDARDS. THE ACTUAL SIZES SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS. STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTES 1. THE OWNER WILL ENGAGE THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED SPECIAL INSPECTOR FOR THIS PROJECT,
WHO WILL PROVIDE AND/OR COORDINATE INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS AS NECESSARY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 17 OF THE BCNYS. 2. THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL
HAS PREPARED A STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, WHICH INCLUDES SPECIFICATION 014533, AND THE SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. THESE DOCUMENTS WILL BE SUBMITTED WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
AND THE APPLICATION FOR BUILDING PERMIT TO THE CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING SHALL BE CONTINUOUS OR PERIODIC DURING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, AS NOTED.
4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HOLD A PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING WITH THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, SPECIAL INSPECTOR, TESTING AGENCY, AND AFFECTED SUB-CONTRACTORS TO REVIEW THE REQUIRED
SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISTRIBUTE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES TO EACH ATTENDEE. 5. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL SUBMIT INTERIM REPORTS
AND, AT THE COMPLETION OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, A FINAL STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. REPORTS SHALL BE STAMPED AND SIGNED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER. 6. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL
NOTIFY THE CONTRACTOR IMMEDIATELY OF DISCREPANCIES. SUBSEQUENT REPORTS SHALL NOTE WHEN AND HOW DEFICIENCIES WERE CORRECTED. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE REGISTERED DESIGN
PROFESSIONAL AND THE CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL OF DISCREPANCIES WHICH HAVE NOT BEEN CORRECTED. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE WITH THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR INCLUDING ADVANCE NOTIFICATION
OF REQUIRED INSPECTION OR TEST, INCIDENTAL LABOR, AND SAFE ACCESS TO THE WORK AREAS, AND ACCESS TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SO THAT INSPECTIONS AND TESTING MAY BE PERFORMED WITHOUT HINDRANCE.
8. THE SPECIAL INSPECTION PROGRAM SHALL IN NO WAY RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF THE OBLIGATION TO PERFORM THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR FROM
IMPLEMENTING AN EFFECTIVE QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM. 9. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES Revisions: Issue for Bid December 15, 2020
Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor
Renovation 12" = 1'-0" DESIGN DATA AND GENERAL NOTES S001 December 15, 2020 S001_ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND ADJ ADJACENT EXT EXTERIOR PE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER L ANGLE EOD EDGE OF DECK PERP
PERPENDICULAR APPROX APPROXIMATE EOS EDGE OF SLAB PLF POUNDS PER LINEAL ARCH ARCHITECT FD FLOOR DRAIN FOOT ARCHITECTURAL FDN FOUNDATION PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE B/ BOTTOM OF FTG FOOTING
FOOT BLDG BUILDING GA GAUGE PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE BRG BEARING GALV GALVANIZED INCH BP BASE PLATE HSS HOLLOW STEEL SECTION PCF POUNDS PER CUBIC CANT CANTILEVER HORIZ HORIZONTAL FOOT
CJ CONTROL, HI HIGH PC PRECAST CONTRACTION, HP HIGH POINT PSL PARALLEL STRAND CONSTRUCTION JOINT HVAC HEATING/VENTILATING/ LUMBER CMU CONCRETE MASONRY INFO INFORMATION R RADIUS UNIT(S)
INT INTERIOR RD ROOF DRAIN CONC CONCRETE INV INVERT RDP REGISTERED DESIGN CONT CONTINUOUS K KIPS PROFESSIONAL COL COLUMN LG LONG REQD REQUIRED CFMF COLD-FORMED LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL
REINF REINFORCING OR METAL FRAMING LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL REINFORCED COORD COORDINATE LOC LOCATION REV REVISION OR REVISED DIA DIAMETER LW LIGHT WEIGHT RO ROUGH OPENING DIM DIMENSION
LVL LAMINATED VENEER SIM SIMILAR DN DOWN LUMBER SPA SPACE do DITTO LO LOW STD STANDARD DWG DRAWING MANUF MANUFACTURER SF SQUARE FEET EA EACH MAX MAXIMUM SS STAINLESS STEEL EF EACH FACE
MECH MECHANICAL STL STEEL EJ EXPANSION JOINT MIN MINIMUM SQ SQUARE ELEC ELECTRICAL MISC MISCELLANEOUS T/ TOP OF EL ELEVATION MO MASONRY OPENING TYP TYPICAL ELEV ELEVATOR NA NOT APPLICABLE
UNO UNLESS NOTED ENGR ENGINEER NIC NOT IN CONTRACT OTHERWISE EMBD EMBEDDED NOM NOMINAL VERT VERTICAL EQ EQUAL NW NORMAL WEIGHT VIF VERIFY IN FIELD EQUIP EQUIPMENT OC ON CENTER W/ WITH
ES EACH SIDE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER WP WORK POINT EW EACH WAY OPNG OPENING WWR WELDED WIRE EXIST EXISTING OPP OPPOSITE REINFORCEMENT PAF POWDER ACTUATED WCJ WALL CONTROL OR FASTENER CONSTRUCTION
JOINT eG eF8 eF eE eD e3 e4 eW21X50 eW12X16 eW24X55 eW24X55 eW16X31 eW24X55 eW24X55 eW16X31 eW16X26 eW24X76 eW16X31 eW16X26 eW16X26 eW16X26 eW16X26 OUTLINE OF ACS-8 AHU, MAX WT = 5,600LB
OUTLINE OF 6" CONC HOUSEKEEPING PAD, SEE 3/S100. SEE MECH DWGS FOR EQUIPMENT SIZE, HOUSE KEEPING PAD EXTENDS 6" BEYOND EQUIPMENT EXTENTS EXIST 4 1/2" CONC SLAB ON 3" x18GA GALV MTL
DECK WITH 3" CONC TOPPING (10 1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS) eG eF8 eF eE eD e3 e4 eW18X40 eW14X22 eW14X22 eW18X40 eW18X40 eW18X40 eW18X40 eW24X55 eW12X19 eW12X22 eW12X19 eW12X19 eW12X19 eW12X19
eW14X22 6" (TYP) OUTLINE OF NEW OPENING FOR INTAKE LOUVER, SEE MECH AND ARCH DWGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION. SEE 4/S100 FOR FRAME DETAIL. INSTALL FRAME PRIOR TO SAWCUTTING OPENING. EXIST
2 1/2" CONC SLAB ON 3" x18GA GALV MTL DECK (5 1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS) DRILL AND GROUT #4x1'-0" AT 2'-0"OC 3/4" CHAMFER #4 AT 16"OC 3" ± 6" NOTE: COORDINATE PAD LOCATIONS WITH ACCEPTED
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS. EXIST 3" CONC TOPPING EXIST 3" COMPOSITE METAL DECK 7 1/2" ± < << << SPAN MEMBER 1 A A PLAN A-A MEMBER 1, (4) SIDES (TYP) SEE TABLE SEE ARCH OR MECH DWGS
FOR FRAME DIMS AND LOCS L 4'-0" 4'-0" L 6'-0" 6'-0" L 13'-0" L3x3x1/4 L4x4x1/4 C6x8.2 EXIST STEEL BEAM COPE MEMBER AS REQD WHERE DECK IS TIGHT TO T/EXIST BEAM 7'-6 5/8"±
(VIF) 3/16 1 1/2 (TYP) 1. T/EXISTING STEEL ELEVATION (+98'- 8 1/2") UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. ELEVATIONS NOTED THUS ( ) ARE TO T/STEEL WITH RESPECT TO ELEVATION (+98'- 8 1/2").
3. NOTIFY ENGINEER IF ACTUAL WEIGHTS OF MEP EQUIPMENT EXCEED WEIGHTS NOTED IN DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT LOAD DATA TO ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION
OF EQUIPMENT AND ANY ASSOCIATED STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING HOUSEKEEPING PADS, RAILS, STRUCTURAL FRAMING, ETC.) WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND
EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS. NOTES: 1. T/STEEL ELEVATION (+118'-10 1/2") UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. ELEVATIONS NOTED THUS ( ) ARE TO T/STEEL (B/DECK) WITH RESPECT TO ELEVATION (+118'-10
1/2"). NOTES: S100 2 S100 1 Revisions: Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As indicated PARTIAL FRAMING PLANS S100 December 15, 2020 1/4" = 1'-0"S100 1 PARTIAL
PENTHOUSE FLOOR FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"S100 2 PARTIAL PLAN HI ROOF FRAMING 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 3 HOUSEKEEPING PAD DETAIL 1/4" = 1'-0"S100 4 WELDED ANGLE FRAME DETAIL GENERAL NOTES: A.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION DEBRIS AND MATERIALS OFF SITE IN A PROPER LEGAL MANNER. B. ALL NEW PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOFS
SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, ETC. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE/SMOKE
STOPPED. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON RATED WALLS SHALL BE SEALED WITH A NON-HARDENING SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL PENETRATION TO REDUCE NOISE TRANSMISSION. C. THE DUCTWORK SIZES
AND TYPES (ROUND, RECTANGULAR AND FLAT OVAL)WERE SELECTED FOR SPACE LIMITATION WITHIN THE RENOVATED AREA. IN ADDITION, THE DUCTWORK SIZES AND TYPES WERE CHOSEN TO ALLOW SPACE ABOVE
THE CEILINGS FOR FUTURE DUCTWORK, PIPING AND/OR CONDUIT. IT IS NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO CHANGE THE SIZE OR TYPE OF DUCTWORK FOR BIDDING OR INSTALLATION UNLESS SPECIFICALLY
APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. D. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS OF AIR HANDLING, CHILLED WATER, HOT WATER, STEAM, ETC. SYSTEMS WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY
FACILITY PERSONNEL FOR TIE-IN CONNECTIONS. ALL SHUT DOWNS WILL OCCUR DURING NIGHTS OR WEEKENDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSIST THE UNIVERSITY PERSONNEL IN SHUTTING DOWN, DRAINING, VENTING,
ETC. OF SYSTEM TO FACILITATE THE INTENDED WORK. E. A MINIMUM OF 1'-6" SHALL BE PROVIDED IN FRONT OF CONTROL ACCESS ENCLOSURES AT ALL TERMINAL UNITS. NO PIPING OR CONDUIT SHALL BE DIRECTLY
INSTALLED BELOW AIR TERMINAL UNIT ACCESS ENCLOSURES THAT WILL PROHIBIT ACCESS UP TO THE CONTROL ENCLOSURE. COORDINATE THESE REQUIREMENTS WITH ALL OTHER TRADES ON THE PROJECT. IF PROPER
SERVICE ACCESS IS NOT MAINTAINED BECAUSE OF POOR COORDINATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RELOCATE OBSTRUCTIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. F. PROVIDE A VOLUME DAMPER AT EACH DIFFUSER
AND GRILLE FOR PROPER BALANCING REGARDLESS IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. ALL VOLUME DAMPERS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6'-0" FROM DIFFUSER OR GRILLE CONNECTION. IF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK IS UTILIZED
FOR FINAL CONNECTION AT GRILLES, THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE GRILLE NECK. G. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF
THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THE LOCATIONS OF ALL ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A WALK THROUGH WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER TO
LOCATE SENSOR LOCATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THE TEMPERATURE SENSORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ALIGNMENT WITH ELECTRICAL, FIRE, AND OTHER DEVICES WHEN LOCATED ON COMMON WALLS. H. DAMAGE
TO EXISTING SYSTEMS (EQUIPMENT, PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES) SHOWN TO REMAIN AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTORS WORK IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REPAIR AND/OR
REPLACE WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. I. COORDINATE ALL SHUT DOWNS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. J. THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHOW IN GENERAL
MAJOR EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK REMOVALS. THE INTENT IS NOT TO IDENTIFY ALL MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, PIPING ACCESSORIES, DUCTWORK, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, SUPPORTS, CONTROLS, CONTROL
ACCESSORIES, CONTROL WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CONTROL PNEUMATIC TUBING AND ACCESSORIES TO BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED BUT IS THE REQUIREMENTS UNDER THIS CONTRACT. NO EQUIPMENT, PIPING OR
DUCTWORK SHALL BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. K. THE MOUNTING HEIGHT FOR ALL ROOM THERMOSTATS OR SENSORS SHALL BE 48 IN. TO TOP OF THE COVER. L. UNLESS
SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACT TO PATCH WITH LIKE MATERIAL AND FINISH ALL EXISTING DUCTWORK OR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS
AFTER DEMOLITION. M. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND ARE NOT GUARANTEED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS
PRIOR TO BID. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS DUE TO CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS. N. THE OWNER OCCUPIED AREAS INCLUDE SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
AND RESEARCH WHICH MUST NOT BE INTERRUPTED OR OTHERWISE DISTRUPTED WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE AND APPROPRIATE PLANNING. MBHTHOUSAND BTU/HOUR (E)EXISTING DOUBLE LINE RECTANGULAR DUCT CONTINUED
FPMFEET PER MINUTE AIR FLOW AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PIPE ANCHOR G.C.GENERAL CONTRACTOR PIPE GUIDE E.C.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXPANSION COMPENSATOR WITH GUIDES N.C.NORMALLY CLOSED PRE-FAB
EXPANSION LOOP TEMPERATURE SENSOR STRAINER PRESSURE GAUGE THERMOMETER UNION 24x12 DNUP AIR VENT V 24x12 14x8 6" BOOT TAP TTTHERMOSTATIC TRAP 14" 18" LATERAL FTFLOAT & THERMOSTATIC TRAP
SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE TDTHERMODYNAMIC TRAP FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BTBUCKET TRAP COMPRESSED AIR A DIRECTION OF FLOW BBDBOILER BLOW DOWN CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY CS CRCONDENSER
WATER RETURN CWSCHILLED WATER SUPPLY CWRCHILLED WATER RETURN DDRAIN FUEL OIL FILL FOF FUEL OIL GAUGE FOG FOSFUEL OIL SUPPLY FORFUEL OIL RETURN FOVFUEL OIL TANK VENT GGAS GLYCOL SUPPLY
GS GLYCOL RETURN GR HPWSHEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY HPWRHEAT PUMP WATER RETURN HWSHOT WATER SUPPLY HWRHOT WATER RETURN HGHOT GAS LPSLOW PRESSURE STEAM LPCLOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE MPSMEDIUM
PRESSURE STEAM MPCMEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE HPSHIGH PRESSURE STEAM HPCHIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE PCPUMPED CONDENSATE RDREFRIGERANT DISCHARGE RLREFRIGERANT LIQUID RSREFRIGERANT SUCTION
VACVACUUM CWDOMESTIC COLD WATER EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED DOUBLE LINE PIPE OR ROUND DUCT CONTINUED E PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT NTSNOT TO SCALE (DBL)DOUBLE WALL LINED DUCT CFMCUBIC FEET
PER MINUTE ADACCESS DOOR P.C.PLUMBING CONTRACTOR N.O.NORMALLY OPEN HUMIDISTAT ROUND DUCT -IN INCHES 12" 24x12 DNUP 14" CONICAL TEE 18" VOLUME DAMPER CAP OR PLUG ELBOW DOWN ELBOW UP
AADAUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER FDFIRE DAMPER SDSMOKE DAMPER BDDBACK DRAFT DAMPER MMOTORIZED DAMPER BALL VALVE GATE VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
PRV CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUG (L) (2L)ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING -2" THICK M.C.MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR W/WWALL TO WALL GTHERMOSTAT/SENSOR WITH GUARD G DUCT SECTION -SUPPLY
DUCT SECTION -RETURN WIDTH A x DEPTH B A B R D 24x12 14" 6" BOOT TAP BGBLAST GATE FIN TUBE RADIATION VALANCE A B C REGISTER, GRILLE OR DIFFUSER TAG A = TYPE B = NECK SIZE C = CFM B
C D FIN TUBE RADIATION TAG FT-A = TYPE B = FIN TUBE LENGTH C = ENCLOSURE LENGTH D = GPM FT-A A B C D VALANCE TAG A = TYPE B = COIL SIZE C = COOLING GPM D = HEATING GPM POINT OF CONNECTION
POINT OF DISCONNECTION BOTTOM TAP TRIPLE DUTY VALVE TD GLOBE VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE SUCTION DIFFUSER SD DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE CONNECTION, CAP AND CHAIN FCFLEX CONNECTOR -DUCTWORK
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR -PIPING AIR TERMINAL UNIT AND TAG (OPTION 1) A B C AIR TERMINAL UNIT TAG (OPTION 2) A = UNIT NO. B = MAXIMUM CFM C = MINIMUM CFM AxB FO DUCT SECTION -FLAT OVAL (FO)
VVENT REDUCER S H S ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING -1-1/2" THICK EXHAUST GRILLE RETURN REGISTER SINGLE LINE PIPE CONTINUED TRANSITION SQUARE TO ROUND RISE IN DUCT -IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW
DROP IN DUCT -IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW SUPPLY DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN RETURN DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN RECTANGULAR BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN
ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH MITERED ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES DESCRIPTION SYMBOLDESCRIPTION SYMBOL T RELIEF VALVE T HVAC
SYMBOL LIST X X DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION KEYNOTE A B C RADIANT CEILING PANEL TAG A = TYPE B = LENGTH C = GPM CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR C CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR CO GAS SENSOR G SYMBOLDESCRIPTIONSYMBOLD
ESCRIPTION AVERAGING SENSOR S SSTART/STOP O COPEN/CLOSE E DENABLE/DISABLE T TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DUCT OR PIPE MOUNTED) H HUMIDITY SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) I P ELECTRICAL INTERFACE AUTOMATIC
AIR DAMPER (PARALLEL BLADE) AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER (OPPOSED BLADE) EELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) E ESEND SWITCH EAEXHAUST AIR MOISTURE SENSOR OCCUPANCY SENSOR FLOW METER
SUPPLY FAN SF BTU ENERGY METER BTU P DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE SWITCH ALARM STATUS PROBE SENSOR RELAY FREEZE-STAT FZ EELECTRIC ACTUATOR CURRENT TRANSDUCER FLOW SENSOR AIR FLOW MEASURING
STATION HARD WIRE INTERFACE S SOLENOID VALVE S MMANUAL SWITCH THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO 2 BINARY POINT ANALOG POINT THERMOWELL PDIFFERENTIAL
STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER CONTROLS SCHEMATIC SYMBOL LIST ASDADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE R134a REFRIGERANT R134a SENSOR (WALL MOUNTED) C C COOLING COIL BASE MOUNTED PUMP FILTER BANK RETURN
AIR FAN RF EFEXHAUST AIR FAN H C HEATING COIL SMOKE CONTROL FAN SC HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION GRID E P ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC SWITCH OR RELAY P E PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC SWITCH OR RELAY FFLOW TRANSMITTER
PPRESSURE TRANSMITTER ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER I E ELECTRONIC/ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE
(2-WAY) PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR MAIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL AIR SOURCE A IN LINE PUMP HR C HEAT RECOVERY COIL AIR TERMINAL UNIT WITH FACTORY ATTENUATOR (OPTION 1) VAV-X-XX VAV-X-XX LAB AIR
VALVE RADIANT CEILING PANEL FLOW SWITCH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE G B GAS BURNER PPRESSURE SWITCH HUMIDIFIER H A R S OS M FS F BUTTERFLY CONTROL DAMPER VFD OAOUTSIDE AIR RARETURN AIR
SASUPPLY AIR CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO F.L.FAIL LAST DEWPOINT SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) DP CCONDENSATE SENSOR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) SP CT BIBINARY INPUT BOBINARY
OUTPUT AIANALOG INPUT AOANALOG OUTPUT BVBINARY VALUE AVANALOG VALUE HIGH LEVEL SWITCH HI LOWLOW LEVEL SWITCH VENTURI AIRFLOW CONTROL VALVE TRANSFORMER MOTOR STARTER MS ROTATION DETECTOR
RD SMOKE DETECTOR SD MODMODULATING ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER E P SPEED COMMAND SC AOMADDRESSABLE OUTPUT MODULE (FIRE ALARM INTERFACE) COM NETWORK COMMUNICATION INTERFACE POINT
SIGNAL OUT CURRENT SENSOR CS SIGNAL OUT A SIGNAL IN AIR IN A SIGNAL IN ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT T NITROGEN DIOXIDE SENSOR N MOTOR S SPACE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT
ADJUSTMENT SA S SPACE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE S SPACE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY S SPACE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT T T
T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH DIGITAL INPUT (GENERAL) DI DO DIGITAL OUTPUT
(GENERAL) ANALOG INPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG OUTPUT (GENERAL) AI AO LIQUID IMMERSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR T SINGLE POINT SENSOR M M OV D F SA OV D F F.O.FAIL OPEN RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR
RH LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE SWITCH FZ PCWS PROCESS COLD WATER RETURN BUILDING COLD WATER SUPPLY BUILDING COLD WATER RETURN PCWR BCWS BCWR PROCESS COLD WATER SUPPLY DSDDUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591
914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper
Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December
15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST -HVAC H-000 G F8 F E D C B 234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 X (E)75x55
UP & DOWN (E)52x14 (E)14x4 (E)16x6 (E)8" (E)14x8 (E)26x10 (E)20x6 (E)30x10 (E)28x8 (E)8x4 (E)26x10 (E)12" UP & DOWN (E)26x12 UP (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)75x55 UP& DOWN (E)FD (E)FD
(E)8" 14x4 (E)8" (E)26x8 (E)20x8 (E)14x4 (E)16x6 (E)14x4 (E)12" (E)30x14 (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)6" (E)24x8(E)18x8 (E)12x6 (E)30x14 (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)12x6 (E)18x8 (E)24x8 (E)16x12 (E)20x10
(E)8" (E)12x6 (E)12x4 (E)8" (E)12" (E)10" (E)30x8 (E)24x12 (E)18x8 (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)12x6 (E)12x6 (E)12" (E)18x6 (E)12x6 (E)12x4 (E)12x4 (E)14x6 (E)26x10 (E)24x8 (E)12x6 (E)18x6 (E)12x6
(E)12x6 (E)26x10 (E)20x6 ( E) 60 x14 ( E) 60 x14 (E)48x12 (E)75x55 (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD 5 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV(E)VAV (E)VAV
(E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 5 5 (E)52x14 (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD(E)FD(E)FD(E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD 1 1 1 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 6 (E)24x10 UP & DOWN
(E)FD 7 7 Room 571 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 LOUNGE 568 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 503 SHOP 501 Room 504 Room 504A Room 502 Room 500 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 508 Room 512 Room 514 Room
517 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 8 O.E.D. O.E.D. 9 1 1 1 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501
New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606
585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell,
New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December
15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN DUCTWORK DEMOLITION H-100 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN -DUCTWORK DEMOLITION DEMOLITION NOTES 1DISCONNECT AND REMOVE DUCTWORK AND DUCTWORK
ACCESORIES. 2DISCONNECT AND REMOVE DIFFUSER OR GRILLE. 3DISCONNECT AND REMOVE FAN COIL UNIT, ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS. 4DISCONNECT AND REMOVE AIR TERMINAL, AIR TERMINAL ACCESSORIES,
ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS. 5CAP DUCT AT POINT OF DISCONNECT. 6DISCONNECT AIR TERMINAL AND AIR TERMINAL ACCESSORIES. STORE AIR TERMINAL FOR REUSE. REFER TO NEW WORK PLANS FOR
FURTHER DETAILS. 7REMOVE DUCTWORK TO THE WALL PENETRATION AND CAP. DUCTWORK CAP SHALL BE CONCEALED BY THE NEW WALL FINISHES. 8DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FIRE DAMPER. 9DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE DUCTWORK. TERMINATE WITH AN O.E.D. G F8 F E D C B 234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 X (E)FCU (E)AC (E)AC (E)AC (E)AC (E)AC (E)8" PCWS/R UP & DOWN (E)8" BCWS/R UP & DOWN (E)2"
(E)4" (E)3" (E)1-1/2" (E)2" (E)2" (E)2" (E)1" (E)CWS (E)FCU (E)CWR (E)2-1/2" 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 4 4 (E)1-1/2" HWS UP & DOWN (E)1-1/4" HWS UP & DOWN (E)1" HWR UP & DOWN (E)3/4"
(E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)1" HWR UP & DOWN (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)3/4" (E)3/4" 4 1 1 6 6 6 666 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)FINTUBE (TYP)
(E)FINTUBE (TYP) 7S S 8 S 7 S 7 S 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7S FINTUBE RADIATION PIPING SCHEMATIC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Room 571 Room 503 SHOP 501 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 508 Room 50073
WOMEN 50021 Room 50076 MEN 50022 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 STAIR# 2 50002 1 9 9 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506
Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN PIPING DEMOLITION H-101 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN -PIPING DEMOLITION DEMOLITION NOTES 1DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE PIPING AND PIPING ACCESSORIES. 2DISCONNECT AND REMOVE AC UNIT, ASSOCIATED PIPING AND CONTROLS. 3DISCONNECT AND REMOVE FAN COIL UNIT, ASSOCIATED PIPING AND CONTROLS. 4DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE. 5DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FINTUBE ENCLOSURE. 6DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FINTUBE. 7DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING SENSOR. 8DISCONNECT AND
REMOVE EXISTING OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE SWITCH. 9REMOVE INSULATION ON PIPING RISER WITHIN FIFTH FLOOR RENOVATION AREA. G F8 F E D C B 234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 X (E)75x55 UP & DOWN
(E)12" UP & DOWN (E)26x12 UP (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)75x55 UP& DOWN (E)FD (E)FD (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)22x6 (TYP) (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)AAD (E)VAV SAV-1 (E)VAV
(E)VAV (E)VAV (E)VAV (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD(E)FD(E)FD(E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD ( E) 60 x14 ( E) 60 x14 (E)6" (E)24x8(E)18x8 (E)12x6 (E)12x6 (E)18x8 (E)24x8 (E)16x12 (E)12x6 (E)12x4
(E)8" (E)12" (E)10" (E)30x8 (E)24x12 (E)18x8 (E)12x6 (E)12x6 (E)12" (E)18x6 (E)12x6 (E)12x4 (E)12x4 (E)14x6 (E)26x10 (E)20x6 ( E) 60 x14 ( E) 60 x14 (E)48x12 (E)75x55 (E)52x14 LABORATORY
551 STORAGE 551B Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 MEN 50022 Room 50076 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 DATA CLOSET 552 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 572 Room 574 Room 576 Room 578 Room 571 SAV-3 GEV-3 R D 30x16 22x10
VAV-1 38x12 38x12 UP 30x16 UP 30x16 D D (E)24x10 (E)24x8LOUNGE 568 R R 6" 6" 6" " 1 6 150 TYP=3 x2222 A 30x14 1 FD/SD (E)24x10 UP & DOWN (E)12" 52x14 (E)52x14 FD/SD FD/SD x3612 A FD/SD
x3612 A 12" 46x16 (E)30x14 14x8 D R 30x12 24x10 16x8 RHC-2 8" 28x16 16x8 x2222 A 700 x86 A 100 8x6 12" GEV-1 22x10 GEV-2 x86 A 1008x6 x2222 A 700 TYP=2 14" 14" 26x12 SAV-2 D RHC-1 24x10
16x8 16x8 12x612x6 VAV-2 20x10 16x8 14" 24x10 8" 22x10 26x12 x208 2 345 TYP=4 x208 2 350 TYP=2 x208 2 350 TYP=2 46x16 28x16 32x12 D R D R D R D 22x10 x4212 A 1380 20x10 20x10 12" RHC-3
24x10 R R 14" 4 33 3 3 3 3 3 24x10 x226 2 350 TYP=2 x2222 A (E)36x12 O.E.D. O.E.D. 2 30x14 2 2 2 2 DSD DSD DSD 18x12 18x12 DSD 6 652 60021 60073 60063 F 45 G5H5 10 26x16 UP & 38x12
DOWN 30x16 UP & DOWN (E)24x20 UP & (E)24x10 DOWN (E)76x54 UP & DOWN (E)36x10 (E)FD (E)50x14 48x16 (E)FD (E)FD 5 6 752 70021 70063 70073 F 45 G5H5 10 30x16 UP & DOWN (E)24x20 UP & (E)24x10
DOWN (E)76x54 UP & DOWN 26x16 UP & DOWN (E)36x10 (E)FD (E)FD (E)FD (E)48x16 (E)50x14 5 6 G F8 F E 23456 G5H5X1 11 10 9 (E)GENERATOR EXHAUST (E)LOUVERED PENTHOUSE INTAKE (E)LAB EXHAUST
FAN (LEF-1) (E)VENT INTAKE PENTHOUSE LP-1(E)LOUVERED PENTHOUSE INTAKE (E)LOUVERED PENTHOUSE INTAKE LP-1 TO BE 25' FROM ANY EXHAUST TERMINATION (E)PLUMBING VENT (E)ROOF DRAIN (E)ROOF
DRAIN (E)ROOF DRAIN (E)PLUMBING VENT Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway,
Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065
518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH FLOOR PLANS -DUCT H-200 DRAWING
NOTES 1RELOCATE EXISTING AIR TERMINAL UNIT. RECONNECT AND EXTEND CONTROL WIRING. TIE NEW DUCTWORK INTO TERMINAL UNIT. 2TIE DUCTWORK INTO EXISTING. TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE
CONNECTION. 3PROVIDE ASJ - JACKETING OVER DUCTWORK INSULATION IN PREPARATION FOR PAINTING. 4ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK WITHIN LAB SHALL BE CLEANED AND DEGREASED IN PREPARATION FOR PAINTING.
5MAINTAIN 18" CLEAR BETWEEN SUPPLY DUCT RISER AND EXISTING OPEN ENDED RETURN DUCT. 6REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF EXISTING BEAMS WITHIN THE CHASE. OFFSET DUCTWORK
WITHIN CHASE AS REQUIRED TO COORIDINATE WITH EXISTING BEAMS 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN -DUCTWORK 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 PARTIAL SIXTH FLOOR PLAN -DUCTWORK 1/8" = 1'-0" 4 PARTIAL
SEVENTH FLOOR PLAN -DUCTWORK 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN -DUCTWORK G F8 F E D C B 234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 X (E)8" PWS/R UP & DOWN (E)8" BCWS/R UP & DOWN (E)4" LABORATORY
551 STORAGE 551B CORRIDOR 50044 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 Room 50076 MEN 50022 WOMEN 50021 Room 50073 Room 571 Room 572 Room 574 Room 576 Room 578 (E)1-1/2" HWS
UP & DOWN (E)1-1/4" HWS UP & DOWN (1.87GPM) (E)1" HWR UP & DOWN (1.87 GPM) (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)3/4" (E)3/4" 3/4" 3/4" (E)1" HWR UP & DOWN (E)FINTUBE (TYP) (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (3.27GPM)
3 3 3 3 RHC-1 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3 1-1/2" HWS/R UP HWS (E)FINTUBE (TYP) 3/4" 3/4" S S S S HWR (E)2-1/2" 12 12 CWS CWR 4 S FINTUBE RADIATION PIPING SCHEMATIC 12 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 S TO VAV-2
3/4" 1 1/2" RHC-2 RHC-3 1" 1" 6 6 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 1ZONE 2 LABORATORY 551 ZONE 3 S TO VAV-1 7 7 7 7 652 60021 60073 60063 F8 F 45 G5H5 10 1-1/2" HWS/R UP & DOWN 752 70021 70063 70073
F8 F 45 G5H5 10 1-1/2" HWS/R UP & DOWN Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South
Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall
Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH FLOOR PLANS -PIPING
H-201 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN -PIPING DRAWING NOTES 1PROVIDE NEW 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ACTUATION, CONTROLS AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES. PROVIDE PIPING AND
PIPING ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONNECTION. 2PROVIDE NEW CONTROLS AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES FOR EXISTING FIN TUBE RADIATION. REFER TO CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY
FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 3PROVIDE NEW FINTUBE ENCLOSURE. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE EQUAL TO STERLING JVA-14. 4PROVIDE NEW OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE SWITCH. 5TIE PIPING INTO EXISTING. PROVIDE ALL
PIPING MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION. 6RE-INSULATE PIPING RISER. PROVIDE JACKETING AS REQUIRED FOR PAINTING 7PROVIDE NEW FINTUBE ENCLOSURE TO WRAP THE COLUMN. ENCLOSURE
SHALL BE EQUAL TO STERLING JVA-7. 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 PARTIAL SIXTH FLOOR PLAN -PIPING 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 PARTIAL SEVENTH FLOOR PLAN -PIPING 807 801 801A 802 80062 804 80060 F8 F E D 34567 G5H5X1K
11 10 9 12 (E)94x58 DOWN (E)94x58 DOWN (E)24x20 DOWN (E)12" DOWN TO 4TH FLOOR (E)24x20 DOWN (E)P-16 (E)CV-5 (E)GHWR (E)GHWS (E)EF CV-7 EXPANSION TANK SERVING REHEAT LOOP EXPANSION TANK
SERVING GLYCOL RUN-AROUND LOOP 55 GALLON POLY BARREL 1 PUMP P-18 & P-19 PUMP P-20 26x16 26x16 SA DN 26x16 30x16 30x16 EA DN 30x16 30x16 HRC-2 (E)12" 36x14 32x32 UP TO LP-1 ACS-8 1 2
BCWS BCWR GHWR GHWS 12" 24x22 24x22 24x22 UP TO (E)LEF-1 3 ( E)PCWS ( E)PCW R ( E)BCWS ( E)BCW R ( E)LPS (E)PC (E)LPS (E)BCWS (E)BCWR (E)PCWS (E)PCWR GHWR GHWS 1 1/2" HWS/R DOWN HWS
HWR (E)ACS-3(E)ACS-4 PUMP P-21 (E)8" (E)8" (E)6" 2" 2" (E)2" (E)8" (E)2 1/2" 3/4" 1 1/2" (E)2 1/2" (E)8" (E)124x58 (E)40x18 (E)124x58 (E)220x76 ( E) 24 x20 ( E) 30 x30 (E)24x20 ( E)
30 x30 ( E) 36 x30 ( E) 36 x30 (E)64x58 (E)124x58 DOWN (E)220x76 DOWN (E)124x58 DOWN (E)120x72 1 1/2" 1 1/2" FD/SD FD/SD 4 AAD 5 1" 6 F-3 2 D 1 D 7 D 6" CONCRETE PAD 8 8 8 9 AAD DSD
DSD 10 10 80062 80060 E 5 G510 12" UP TO (E)LEF-1 1 (E)64x58 (E)220x76 (E)120x72 12" 2 GENERAL NOTES: A. REFER TO PIPING SCHEMATIC ON DRAWING H-400 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Revisions:
Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL PENTHOUSE PLANS HVAC H-300 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL PENTHOUSE PLAN -HVAC 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 PARTIAL PENTHOUSE
PLAN -DUCTWORK DEMOLITION DRAWING NOTES 1REFER TO PIPING SCHEMATIC ON DRAWING H-400 FOR PIPING REQUIREMENTS. 2LOCATE AIR HANDLING UNIT ON 6" CONCRETE PAD. REFER TO AHU DETAILS FOR
FURTHER INROMATION / REQUIREMENTS. 3TIE DUCTWORK INTO EXISTING EXHAUST FAN. OFFSET DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED TO TIE INTO EXISTING DUCTWORK AT ROOF PENETRATION. 41" MAKE-UP WATER LINE. REFER
TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 5PROVIDE A DUCT MOUNTED AIRFLOW STATION. 6PROVIDE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION AND TRAP. REFER TO PLUMBING DRWAINGS FOR CONTINUATION
OF PIPING. REFER TO DETAILS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. 7THE AIRFLOW STATION SHALL BE LOCATED PER THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENT. THE BASIS OF DESIGN REQUIRES 1 DUCT DIAMTER (1D) OF STRAIGHT
RUN DUCT PRIOR TO AN ELBOW AND 2 DUCT DIAMETERS (2D) OF STRAIGHT RUN DUCT AFTER AN ELBOW. 8TIE PIPING INTO EXISTING. PROVIDE ALL PIPING MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION.
9TIE PIPING INTO EXISTING. PROVIDE ALL PIPING MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION. 106" CONCRETE PAD SHALL EXTEND 6" PAST EQUIPMENT ON ALL SIDES. DEMOLITION NOTES 1REMOVE
EXHAUST DUCTWORK BACK TO THE CONNECTION TO THE ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN LEF-1. 2DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING EXHAUST DUCTWORK AND PREP FOR CONNECTION TO NEW. H-400 PIPING SCHEMATICS
- HVAC 1 (TYPICAL) CAP AND CHAIN WITH HOSE END, ƒ" BALL VALVE (TYPICAL) P/T PLUG TO SIDE OF MAIN HEADER) SYSTEM CONNECTION (CONNECT VALVE LOCK-SHIELD THERMAL TRAP 24" MIN. ƒ" ƒ " ƒ"
ƒ" CAP & CHAIN ƒ" BALL VALVE W/ GLYCOL SYSTEM FILL POINT COIL HRC-1 HEAT RECOVERY COIL HRC-2 HEAT RECOVERY V V •" 1 21 2 POLY BARREL 55 GALLON EXPANSION TANK NOT TO SCALE JAER-23-601
OR EQUAL JOHN WOOD MODEL (PRECHARGE TANK TO 12 PSI) ACCEPTANCE VOLUME 10 GALLON DRAWING NOTES: 1 2 P-20 TRAP THERMAL 24" MIN. VALVE LOCK-SHEILD ƒ" SIDE OF PIPE CONNECT TO ƒ" OR EQUAL
MODEL VJS150 SEPARATOR SPIROVENT AIR ƒ" REHEAT COILS FLOOR HWS TO 5TH REHEAT COILS 5TH FLOOR HWR FROM SEPARATOR SPIROVENT AIR OR EQUAL MODEL VJS150 ƒ" EXPANSION TANK JAER-23-601 OR
EQUAL JOHN WOOD MODEL (PRECHARGE TANK TO 12 PSI) ACCEPTANCE VOLUME 10 GALLON REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS DOMESTIC WATER CONNECTION WATER VALVE MAKE UP •" •" P-18 P-19 AIR VENT AUTOMATIC
SITE GLASS 1" FEEDER POT CHEMICAL ƒ" ƒ" NOT TO SCALE REHEAT HOT WATER SYSTEM PIPING SCHEMATIC - HVAC 2 GLYCOL RUN AROUND LOOP PIPING SCHEMATIC - HVAC 1•" 1•" 1•" 1•" 1•" 1•" 1•" 1•"
1•" 1•"1•" 1•" CV-7 HEAT EXCHANGER PLATE AND FRAME 1•" 1•" 1•" GHWS GHWR 2" 2" 1•" 1•" GHWS GHWR P-16 TO (E)PUMP GHWS GHWR COIL PREHEAT TO ASC-8 CONNECTION SHALL BE ON THE DISCHARGE
AIR SIDE OF THE COIL. PIPE COIL FOR COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT. SUPPLY ARRANGE PIPING WITH UNIONS TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF COIL. 1•" 1•" AIR VENT MANUAL CONTAINMENT SYSTEM PIPE TO GLYCOL RELIEF
VALVE (75 PSI) AIR VENT MANUAL FLOOR DRAIN PIPE TO NEAREST RELIEF VALVE (50 PSI) Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York,
NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590
T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New
York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated December 4, 2020 December 15, 2020Issued for
Bid H-500 CONTROL SCHEMATIC & SYSTEM SUMMARY BO S S SCAO R BI TYPICAL VFD CONTROL/MONITORING POINTS VFD M R AOM SYSTEM FIRE ALARM WIRE TO COM BACnet / MSTP AV: SPEED (RPM) AV: POWER
(KW) SP AI SETPOINT AV M BYPASS MOD AO AIR EXHAUST REFER TO PLANS ES BI HR C T AI T AI HR C T AI T AI AIR OUTSIDE P AI T AI AI P BI S S BO CS BI M MS T M VFD F AI ES BO O C BI P BI
CIRCUIT TO FAN C PH T AI AO N.O. COIL PREHEAT M VFD COIL VALVE PREHEAT SETPOINT AV FZ BI CIRCUIT TO FAN C C COIL COOLING AO N.C. COIL VALVE COOLING T AI CIRCUIT TO FAN P BI SP REFER
TO PLANS SETPOINT AV AI AIR SUPPLY SETPOINT AV T AI SD BI AOM SYSTEM ALARM TO FIRE 1 NOT TO SCALE AIR HANDLING UNIT ACS-8 AND EXISTING EXHAUST FAN LEF-1 CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM
SUMMARY INDICATES EXISTING RH AI DEWPOINT AV ES O C BIBO SC AO LEF-1 ACS-8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 100% OUTSIDE AIR HANDLING UNIT (ACS-8) SUPPLY AIR FAN EXISTING LAB
EXHAUST FAN (LEF-1) GYLCOL PRE-HEAT COIL CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL GLYCOL RUN AROUND ENERGY RECOVERY COILS (HRC-1 & HRC-2) ARE SHOWN SOLID ON THE CONTROL DIAGRAM) (EXISTING CONTROL
POINTS ARE SHOWN DASHED AND NEW CONTROL POINTS GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND NORMAL POWER. POWER FOR THE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE FED FROM CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FED FROM NORMAL POWER. ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SEVEN DIFFERENT DAILY SCHEDULES PER WEEK. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE
OF STARTING AND STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME AND SHALL REQUIRE MANUAL
RESET. ALL SAFETIES SHALL BE HARD WIRED INTO THE FAN MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT, CONTROL WHEN THE FAN IS OFF FOR CONTINUED FREEZE PROTECTION. DURING HEATING MODE, THE HEATING CONTROL VALVE
SHALL CONTINUE TO ACTUATOR. THE MAXIMUM STROKE TIME SHALL BE 15 SECONDS. EXHAUST FAN ISOLATION DAMPER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FAST ACTING CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
SHALL BE VERIFIED FOR PROPER OPERATION. MODIFIED EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE RECOMMISSIONED AND ALL EXISTING FAN CONTROLS EXISTING EXHAUST FAN LEF-1 SERVES THE 4TH FLOOR LAB. THE
EXISTING SETPOINTS AHU DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE (DAT): SEE RESET SCHEDULE ERC DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE: SAME AS AHU DAT SETPOINT F 0 FREEZESTAT LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE: 38 FILTER
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE HIGH LIMIT: 1.XX" W.C. SUPPLY FAN DISCHARGE HIGH STATIC PRESSURE LIMIT: -6.0" W.C. SUPPLY FAN SUCTION LOW STATIC PRESSURE LIMIT: -6.0" W.C. SUPPLY FAN MINIMUM
START SPEED: 1400 CFM (20% OF MAX) OWNER) SYSTEM OCUPANCY SCHEDULE: 6 AM - 8 PM, MON-FRI (COORDINATE WITH START/STOP ASSOCIATED LABORATORY EXHAUST FAN. AIR HANDLING UNIT SUPPLY FAN
SHALL BE INTERLOCKED WITH THE SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED AT ALL TIMES. SHUTOFF DAMPER CONTROL EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SYSTEM FANS ARE OFF, THE OUTSIDE AIR AND ASSOCIATED
PRIOR TO STARTING THE SYSTEM FANS. ASSOCIATED EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL PROVE OPEN VIA END SWITCH WHEN THE SYSTEM FANS ARE INDEXED TO START, THE OUTSIDE AIR AND SUPPLY FAN SPEED CONTROL
MAINTAIN THE CRITICAL ZONE DAMPER POSITION AT 95% OPEN. DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT SHALL BE RESET AS NEEDED TO REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT.
THE THE SUPPLY AIR FAN SHALL MODULATE VIA A VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE AS EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM CONTROL SHALL MODULATE TO FULL OPERATING SPEED. SHALL BE INDEXED TO OPEN. ONCE THE DAMPER
IS PROVEN OPEN, THE FAN MINIMUM START SPEED (20%), AT WHICH TIME THE FAN ISOLATION DAMPER ON A CALL TO OPERATE, THE FAN SHALL BE INDEXED TO START AND RUN AT MODULATE CLOSED AS NEEDED
TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. RISES MORE POSITIVE THAN SETPOINT, THE BYPASS DAMPER SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. IF THE EXHAUST DUCT STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT WITH THE FAN AT FULL SPEED,
THE BYPASS DAMPER WILL OPEN AND IF THE EXHAUST DUCT STATIC PRESSURE FALLS MORE NEGATIVE THAN TO MAINTAIN THE CRITICAL ZONE DAMPER POSITION AT 95% OPEN. THE DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE
SETPOINT SHALL BE RESET AS NEEDED FLOW. DAMPER SHALL CLOSE, AND THE FAN SHALL INDEX TO 40% OF FULL DESIGN EXHAUST FAN, THE SYSTEM SHALL INDEX AIRFLOW CONTROL. THE BYPASS ON FAILURE
OF AIR HANDLING UNIT ASSOCIATED WITH THE LABORATORY GLYCOL RUN AROUND HEAT RECOVERY CONTROL PUMP SHALL BE ENABLED AND OPERATE AT CONSTANT SPEED. F BELOW THE SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT.
THE 0 TEMPERATURE IS 7-10 WINTER MODE: WINTER MODE SHALL BE INITIATED WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR BE DISABLED. F BELOW THE EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE. THE PUMP SHALL 0 SETPOINT AND 5 OUTSIDE
AIR TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE THE SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE INTERMEDIATE MODE: INTERMEDIATE MODE SHALL BE INITIATED WHEN THE THE PUMP SHALL BE ENABLED AND OPERATE AT CONSTANT SPEED. F ABOVE
THE EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. 0 TEMPERATURE IS 7-10 SUMMER MODE: SUMMER MODE SHALL BE INITIATED WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL SCHEDULE: TEMPERATURE SHALL
BE ALLOWED TO RESET BASED ON THE FOLLOWING DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE RESET: THE AHU DISCHARGE AIR DAT = 5---OAT = 75F & DAT = 6---OAT = 55F & CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE
AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. SHALL START AND RUN AT A CONSTANT SPEED, AND THE PREHEAT COIL CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED, THE PREHEAT COIL PUMP WHEN THE AHU DISCHARGE
AIR TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW SETPOINT, THE MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. SHALL BE CLOSED, AND THE CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE SHALL PREHEAT COIL PUMP SHALL BE OFF, THE PREHEAT
COIL CONTROL VALVE WHEN AHU DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE SETPOINT, THE SAFETIES UPON ACTIVATION OF THE LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE SWITCH. GLYCOL COIL PUMP SHALL START AND THE CONTROL
VALVES SHALL OPEN DOWN, THE OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL CLOSE, THE FREEZE PROTECTION: THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL SHUT OF THE HIGH FAN DISCHARGE STATIC PRESSURE
SWITCH. THE OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL CLOSE UPON ACTIVATION HIGH FAN STATIC: THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL SHUT DOWN, OF THE LOW FAN SUCTION STATIC PRESSURE
SWITCH. THE OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS SHALL CLOSE UPON ACTIVATION LOW FAN STATIC: THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR FANS SHALL SHUT DOWN, DAMPER SHALL CLOSE UPON ACTIVATION OF A
DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR. SMOKE DETECTION: THE FAN SHALL SHUT DOWN AND THE OUTSIDE AIR (P-21) COIL PUMP COIL PUMP (P-20) HEAT RECOVERY F AI AI CSBI POINT SCHEDULE AIR HANDLING UNIT ACS-8
AND EXISTING EXHAUST FAN LEF-1 HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS
FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER STATUS X X X OUTSIDE AIR RELATIVE HUMIDITY X X OUTSIDE
AIR DEWPOINT X X X OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X AVERAGING SENSOR FILTER RACK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE X X X X HIGH LIMIT X MAGNEHELIC INDICATING TRANSMITTER HEAT RECOVERY LOOP PUMP START/STOP
X X X HEAT RECOVERY LOOP PUMP STATUS X X X X FAILURE X VIA CONTACT ON DRIVE HEAT RECOVERY LOOP PUMP SPEED COMMAND X X X HEAT RECOVERY LOOP SYSTEM PRESSURE X X X X LOW PRESSURE X PRESSURE
SWITCH HEAT RECOVERY LOOP SYSTEM PRESSURE SETPOINT X HRC SUPPLY COIL ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE X X X HRC SUPPLY COIL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X X X HRC SUPPLY COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE
X X X AVERAGING SENSOR HRC SUPPLY COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT X X X AVERAGING SENSOR HRC EXHAUST COIL ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X AVERAGING SENSOR HRC EXHAUST COIL LEAVING
AIR TEMPERATURE X X X AVERAGING SENSOR HRC HEAT RECOVERY EFFECTIVENESS X X X CALCULATE BASED ON TEMPERATURE HRC RECOVERED ENERGY (BTUH) X X X CALCULATE BASED ON TEMPERATURE HRC TOTALIZED
RECOVERED ENERGY (BTU/YR) X X X CALCULATE BASED ON TEMPERATURE SUPPLY FAN START/STOP X X X X INTERLOCK WITH FA SYSTEM SUPPLY FAN SPEED COMMAND X X X SUPPLY FAN STATUS X X X FAILURE
X VIA CONTACT ON DRIVE SUPPLY FAN POWER (KW) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY FAN SPEED (RPM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY FAN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR STATUS X X SUPPLY
FAN DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH STATUS X X X HIGH LIMIT X SUPPLY FAN SUCTION PRESSURE SWITCH STATUS X X X LOW LIMIT X SUPPLY FAN AIRFLOW X X X INSTALL IN INLET CONE PREHEAT COIL VALVE
POSITION COMMAND X X X X F DELTA T ACROSS COIL WITH VALVE COMMANDED CLOSED o 5 X NORMALLY OPEN PREHEAT COIL PUMP START/STOP X X X PREHEAT COIL PUMP STATUS X X X X FAILURE X VIA CONTACT
ON DRIVE PREHEAT COIL PUMP SPEED COMMAND X X X PREHEAT COIL PUMP POWER (KW) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT PREHEAT COIL PUMP SPEED (RPM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT PREHEAT COIL
DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X AVERAGING SENSOR LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE STATUS X X X LOW LIMIT X COOLING COIL VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X X DELTA T ACROSS COIL WITH VALVE COMMANDED
CLOSED o 5 X NORMALLY CLOSED COOLING COIL DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X AVERAGING SENSOR AHU DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X X DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X SINGLE POINT SENSOR AHU DISCHARGE
AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT X X X EXHAUST FAN AIRFLOW X X X INSTALL IN DUCT EXHAUST FAN ISOLATION DAMPER OPEN/CLOSED X X EXHAUST FAN ISOLATION DAMPER STATUS X X X EXHAUST FAN DOWNSTREAM
STATIC PRESSURE X X X X 10% DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X EXHAUST FAN DOWNSTREAM STATIC PRESSURE SETPOINT X X X Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501
New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606
585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue
Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated December 4, 2020 December 15,
2020Issued for Bid H-501 1 NOT TO SCALE STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL POINT LOAD SHED-1 STEAM LOAD SHED-2 STEAM LOAD SHED-3 STEAM LOAD SHED-4 STEAM LOAD SHED-5 STEAM LOAD SHED-6 STEAM
ZONE CONTROL NON-RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE INDEX TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 60 DEG F RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE, RESETTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE
SPACE TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 60 DEG F INDEX SPACE AIR CHANGE RATE TO MIN UNPCCUPIED AC/PH AND CRITICAL SPACES (2) UNDER CONTROL AIR HANDLING SYSTEM CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS
- NON CRITICAL UNDER CONTROL TEMPERATURE TO 55 DEG F INDEX DISCHARGE AIR INDEX UNIT "OFF" 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE TO 55
DEG F (1) LABORATORY MAKE-UP AIR SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE TO 55 DEG F (1) LABORATORY EXHAUST SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL HYDRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL REHEAT LOOP SYSTEM
- NON CRITICAL UNDER CONTROL SCHEDULE, WHICHEVER IS LOWER DEG F OR MAINTAIN RESET INDEX LOOP TEMPERATURE TO 140 CLOSE STEAM VALVE, PUMPS "ON" REHEAT LOOP SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER
CONTROL GLYCOL HEATING LOOP SYSTEM UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (1) RETAIN ORIGINAL SET POINT IF LOWER THAN 55 DEG F. (2) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL"
SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS, SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN
INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX NOT TO SCALE STEAM LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL SCHEMATICS AND SYSTEM SUMMARIES
GS GR AI P BO M VFD S S SCAO COM R BI - AV: SPEED (RPM) - AV: POWER (KW) TYPICAL VFD CONTROL/MONITORING POINTS T AI T AI SETPOINT AV SETPOINT AV M VFD M VFD P BI BACnet REFER TO PLANS
FOR LOCATION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER. REMOTE DIFFERENTIAL STATIC NOT TO SCALE REHEAT HOT WATER SYSTEM CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY 3 P-18 P-19 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION REHEAT HOT WATER
LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER (CV-7A & CV-7B) REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP PUMPS (P-19, P-20) GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS
SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETPOINTS REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE: 13 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE: XX PSI (ADJ) START/STOP WITH THE SYSTEM ARE OPEN AND CALLING FOR DEMAND. SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED WHEN 10% OF THE CONTROL VALVES ASSOCIATED AND
THE LEAD PUMP SHALL INDEX TO STANDBY AND BE OFF. HOURS OF OPERATION THE STANDBY PUMP SHALL INDEX TO LEAD AND RUN, THE LEAD PUMP SHALL START, STANDBY PUMP SHALL BE OFF. AFTER 1000 AND
RUN. ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD PUMP, THE STANDBY PUMP SHALL INDEX TO LEAD SPEED CONTROL CRITICAL ZONE CONTROL VALVE POSITION AT 95% OPEN. LOOP DIFFERENTIAL SETPOINT SHALL BE RESET AS NEEDED
TO MAINTAIN THE REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT. THE WHEN ENABLED, PUMP SHALL MODULATE VIA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE AS REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP CONTROL TO
LEAD AND THE LEAD HEAT EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX TO LAG. BE CLOSED. AFTER 1000 HOURS (ADJ) THE LAG HEAT EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX EXCHANGER ISOLATION CONTROL VALVE AND STEAM CONTROL VALVE SHALL
WATER REHEAT LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. THE LAG HEAT STEAM CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE HOT THE LEAD HEAT EXCHANGER ISOLATION CONTROL VALVE
SHALL OPEN AND THE EXCHANGER SHALL INDEX TO LEAD. ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD EXCHANGER CONTROL VALVE(S), THE LAG HEAT CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED MATRIX CONTROL POINT DAYTIME (DEFCON 3) LOAD
SHED 1 - CHILLED WATER (DEFCON 2) LOAD SHED 2 - CHILLED WATER NIGHT EMERGENCY (DEFCON 1) LOAD SHED 3 - CHILLED WATER EMERGENCY (DEFCON) LOAD SHED 4 - CHILLED WATER LCS ZONE CONTROL
NON-RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED MODE UNDER CONTROL CHILLED WATER COIL CONTROL VALVE INDEX CHILLED WATER COIL CONTROL VALVE CLOSED RESEARCH SPACES INDEX SPACE TO UNOCCUPIED
MODE, RESTTABLE TO OCCUPIED MODE VALVE CLOSED INDEX CHILLED WATER CONTROL CRITICAL SPACES (2) UNDER CONTROL AIR HANDLING SYSTEM CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - NON CRITICAL SET POINT
TO 65 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 70 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINT TO 75 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE VALVE CLOSED INDEX
CHILLED WATER CONTROL 100% OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEMS - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL LABORATORY MAKE-UP AIR SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL SET POINT TO 65 DEG F (1) INDEX DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE LABORATORY
EXHAUST SYSTEMS UNDER CONTROL HYDRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL BUILDING RECIRCULATION LOOP - NON CRITICAL INDEX CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE TO 53 DEG F INDEX PUMPS "OFF" AND OPEN RECICULATING
LOOP VALVE TO 100% BUILDING RECIRCULATION LOOP - CRITICAL (2) UNDER CONTROL NOTES: (1) RETAIN FREE COOLING IF REQUIRED AND AVAILABLE (2) THE DETERMINATION OF WHETHER A SYSTEM OR ZONE
IS CONSIDERED "CRITICAL" SHALL BE DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS. GENERALLY ANIMAL ROOMS, SERVER ROOMS AND LIBRARIES ARE THE ONLY SPACES THAT ARE PREQUALIFIED AS "CRITICAL" EACH
PROJECT SHALL CONDUCT AN INDEPENDENT MEETING WITH THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF MAKING LOAD SHED DECISIONS SEQUENCE OF OPERATION T AI T AI CV-7 AOE GHWS GHWR 2 POINT SCHEDULE REHEAT HOT WATER
LOOP HEAT EXCHANGER CV-7 HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM
EMCS OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE X X X IF NOT PROVIDED GLOBALLY GLYCOL LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X X GLYCOL LOOP RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY
WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X + / - 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMP SETPOINT X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE X X X X X REHEAT HOT WATER
LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE X X X X 10% DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT X X X REHEAT HOT WATER LOOP SYSTEM PRESSURE X X
X X LOW PRESSURE X REFER TO PLANS REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP START/STOP X X X TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP STATUS X X X X FAILURE X VIA CONTACT ON DRIVE - TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER
PUMP SPEED COMMAND X X X TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP POWER (KW) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT - TYPICAL OF 2 REHEAT HOT WATER PUMP SPEED (RPM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT
- TYPICAL OF 2 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown
NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca,
NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated December 4, 2020 December 15, 2020Issued for Bid H-502 CONTROL SCHEMATICS AND SYSTEM SUMMARIES NOT TO SCALE 1 H C H C AIR SUPPLY
BI OS sa d AI T AI T SETPOINT AV E E AO F.L. AIR EXHAUST GEV CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AI AI FLOW ALARM AV SETPOINT
SAV ZONE P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM P CONTROLLER ANALOG ELECTRIC MOD AO AV SETPOINT AI AI FLOW ALARM GEVSAV EA SA **NOTE: FOR VENTURI STYLE VALVES
THIS DETAIL SHALL REPLACE THE VALVES SHOWN WITHIN THE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC** HWSHWR F.L. N.O. AO WHERE SHOWN FIN TUBE RADIATION, INDICATES EXISTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL EXHAUST AIR
VALE (GEV) SUPPLY AIR VALVE (SAV) DUCT MOUNTED REHEAT COIL (RHC) EXISTING BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATING GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING
AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME FROM THE SPACE.
LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW HEIGHT). CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE
RATE, THE BACS SHALL SETPOINTS LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL,
AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED,
THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. SUPPLY AIR VALVE SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE
RATE. THE WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE SHALL ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED
ON A COMBINATION OF AND REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE CLOSED. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE BASEBOARD RADIATION VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT. BASEBOARD RADIATION CONTROL VALVE FULLY OPEN, THE REHEAT CONTROL SETPOINT. IF THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS NOT AT SETPOINT WITH THE CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE
SPACE TEMPERATURE OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE BASEBOARD RADIATION OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED
DURING THE SCHEDULED VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT COIL CONTROL OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING:
IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE
OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY,
BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS
UNOCCUPIED DURING THE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT, THE ABOVE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION POINT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT
HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED
X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET
ACTUAL (CFM) X X GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X GENERAL EXHAUST VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X GENERAL
EXHAUST VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE STATUS X X VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X TRI-STATE ALARMX 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X LOW DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE STATUS X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X TRI-STATE ALARMX VALVE COMMAND NOT EQUAL TO FEEDBACK X LOW DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE (VIA SWITCH) SUPPLY VALVE POSITION COMMAND (CFM) X X X SUPPLY VALVE MIN AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X SUPPLY VALVE MAX AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE
X X X SINGLE POINT SENSOR REHEAT COIL VALVE POSITION COMMAND (%) X X X 5 DEG DELTA ACROSS COIL WITH VALVE COMMANDED CLOSED X FAIL LAST BASEBOARD RADIAITON CONTROL VALVE POSITION COMMAND
(%) X X X FAIL LAST, REFER TO PLANS FOR QTY SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM
SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO
PLANS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F 0 75OCCUPIED: F 0 78UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: F 0 81UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F 0 70OCCUPIED: F 0 67UNOCCUPIED SETBACK:
F 0 64UNOCCUPIED: TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW
SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET GENERAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE
AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE 30 MINUTESMINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER TYPICAL LAB CONTROL SCHEMATIC
AND SYSTEM SUMMARY NOT TO SCALE 2 POINT SCHEDULE HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS GRAPHIC SHOWN ON NOTES BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND ALARM BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION VAV DAMPER POSITION X
X X VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X 10% DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) X X
X VALVE COMMAND DOES NOT EQUAL FEEDBACK X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT ZONE TEMPERATURE X X X + / - 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS ZONE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT X X X REFER TO PLANS
AIR SUPPLY MOD AO COM OR BACnet / MSTP: BACnet / ARCNET - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) EXISTING VAV AI T sa SETPOINT AV TYPICAL VAV
WITHOUT REHEAT CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SUPPLY BOX GENERAL SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F
O 75OCCUPIED: F O 81UNOCCUPIED: SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: F O 70OCCUPIED: F O 64UNOCCUPIED: ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). SYSTEM SHALL
BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS
PROGRAMMING AND TIME ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. PROGRAMMED SCHEDULED OCCUPANCY. TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON AIRFLOW SETPOINT. OCCUPIED HEATING: THE SUPPLY
AIR VAV BOX SHALL INDEX TO THE HEATING NEEDED TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. MODULATE BETWEEN THE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM AIRFLOW SETPOINTS AS COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE SUPPLY AIR VAV BOX
SHALL AIRFLOW SETPOINT. IF THE ZONE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED OCCUPIED COOLING: THE SUPPLY AIR VAV BOX SHALL INDEX TO THE MINIMUM ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL BI OS REFER TO
PLANS REFER TO PLANS X REFER TO PLANSX XSPACE OCCUPANCY LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ZONE NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER (NOTE 1) AREA
HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VALVE VALVE OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE POINT SIZE RANGE MODES AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE
4) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3) MAX MIN MAX MIN (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) 1 AC/HR LAB 1245 11.0 334 1.5 1245 5.5 GEV-1 14" 2750
250 1380 6.0 680 3.0 SAV-1 14" 2750 250 1380 680 0 2 AC/HR LAB 1360 11.0 345 1.4 1360 5.5 GEV-2 14" 2750 250 1500 6.0 750 3.0 SAV-2 14" 2750 250 1400 140 -100 3 AC/HR LAB 730 11.0 241
1.8 730 5.5 GEV-3 12" 1790 180 800 6.0 400 3.0 SAV-3 12" 1790 180 700 300 -100 NOTES 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE
LABORATORY DRIVES THE EXHAUST RATE 2. CFM/SQFT WITH A DEFAULT OCCUPANY DENSITY OF 25 PEOPLE PER 1000 SQFT. CODE MINIMUM OUTDOOR VENTILATION AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL
CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 10 CFM/PERSON + 0.18 3. CODE MINIMUM EXHAUST AIRFLOW: NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM MECHANICAL
CODE (2020 MCNYS), TABLE 403.3.1.1, OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION - EDUCATION SCIENCE LABORATORIES, 1.0 CFM/SQFT. 4. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE
FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303
South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton
Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 607-231-6674 T Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes
Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated December 4, 2020 December 15, 2020Issued for Bid COIL HWRHWS TEST WELLS V 3/4" DRAIN VALVE W/
HOSE END CONNECTION, CAP & CHAIN (TYPICAL). BALL VALVE CONTROL VALVE DETAIL NOTES: A.ARRANGE PIPING FOR REMOVAL OF COIL WITHOUT DISTURBING PIPING AHEAD OF UNIONS. B.PROVIDE DUCT ACCESS
DOOR UPSTREAM OF COIL. C.PIPE COIL FOR COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT IF COIL IS MORE THEN ONE ROW. HOT WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION SHALL BE ON THE DISCHARGE AIR SIDE OF THE COIL. ROOF DECK FLASHING
ROOF INSULATION INSULATE OUTSIDE OF PLENUM CROSSBREAK BOTTOM TO CREATE PITCH ROOF 6" WATERTIGHT DRAIN PAN PLENUM FULL SIZE OF THROAT, ALL JOINTS SOLDERED WATERTIGHT ANGLE IRON SUPPORTS
INTEGRAL BIRDSCREEN (TYP. ALL SIDES) DRIP LEG REMOVABLE ROOF CAP 1/4" MASTIC SOUND DEADENER DUCTMATE 3/4" NPT DRAIN FITTING AND CHROME PLATED BRASS CAP. HEIGHT AS SPECIFIED [18" -24"]
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT STEEL, ALL SIDES DETAIL NOTES: A.G.C. TO PROVIDE ROOF OPENING, FRAMING AND FLASHING. B.LOCATION, SETTING AND SECURING OF CURB BY HVAC. C.PROVIDE SHIMS WHERE REQUIRED
TO LEVEL CURB. D.PROVIDE WIND RESTRAINT PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 230550-WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS. DETAIL NOTES: A.AHU'S TO HAVE A 6" HOUSEKEEPING PAD AND A 6" HIGH (MIN.) FACTORY
BASE RAIL. B.PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL DRAIN PAN TRAP ASSEMBLY FOR COIL SECTIONS. C.REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PIPING CONTINUATION AFTER THE TRAP. PUMP AND TERMINATE DRAINS AT NEAREST
FLOOR DRAIN. C.SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPE TYPE. COND. DRAIN PAN H = FAN OUTLET PRESSURE (IN. W.C.) + 1" MIN. H FAN OUTLET PRESSURE 1 1/4" 1" MIN. BLOW THRU UNITS (POSITIVE STATIC PRESSURE)
CLEANOUT (TYP.) MIN. HEIGHT OF TRAP = H+1+1.5(PIPE DIA.) OFFSET FROM PAN CONNECTION TO ALLOW FULL ACCESS TO CLEANOUT PLUG COIL CWRCWS V PRESSURE GAUGE WITH 1/4" BALL VALVE (TYPICAL)
3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE END CONNECTION, CAP & CHAIN (TYPICAL). DETAIL NOTES: A.ARRANGE PIPING TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF COIL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF PIPING AHEAD OF UNIONS AND TO ALLOW ACCESS
TO FILTERS AND ACCESS PANELS. B.PIPE COIL FOR COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT. SUPPLY CONNECTION SHALL BE ON THE DISCHARGE AIR SIDE OF THE COIL. C.WHERE THERE IS MORE THAN ONE COIL SECTION,
PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES, AIR VENTS, DRAIN CONNECTIONS, PRESSURE GAUGES, UNIONS AND FLOW BALANCER FOR EACH SECTION. PIPE SIZE TO EACH COIL SECTION SHALL MATCH THE COIL CONNECTION SIZE.
CONTROL VALVE COIL GHWRGHWS V 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE END CONNECTION, CAP & CHAIN (TYPICAL). DETAIL NOTES: A.ARRANGE PIPING TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF COIL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF PIPING AHEAD
OF UNIONS AND TO ALLOW ACCESS TO FILTERS AND ACCESS PANELS. B.PIPE COIL FOR COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT. SUPPLY CONNECTION SHALL BE ON THE DISCHARGE AIR SIDE OF THE COIL. C.WHERE THERE
IS MORE THAN ONE COIL SECTION, PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES, AIR VENTS, DRAIN CONNECTIONS, PRESSURE GAUGES, UNIONS AND FLOW BALANCER FOR EACH SECTION. PIPE SIZE TO EACH COIL SECTION SHALL
MATCH THE COIL CONNECTION SIZE. P/T TEST PLUG 90 5 0 4 0 60 80 70 100 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 90 5 0 4 0 60 80 70 100 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 INLINE PUMPSEE SCHEDULE FOR CAPACITY COMPOUND GAUGE STRAINERDRAIN
VALVE W/HOSE END CONNECTION, CAP & CHAIN. FLANGE CONNECTION (TYP.) CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE ISOLATION VALVE, (TYP.) PRESSURE GAUGE BALL VALVE (TYP.) DETAIL NOTES: A.PRESSURE GAUGES
-SELECT GAUGE RANGE TO PLACE MAXIMUM SYSTEM OPERATING PRESSURE IN MIDDLE THIRD OF RANGE. B.PROVIDE UNION ON PUMP INLET AND OUTLET IF PUMP IS NOT FLANGED. C.INSTALL PUMP WITH SHAFT HORIZONTAL.
PIPING MAY BE INSTALLED HORIZONTAL, AS SHOWN, OR VERTICAL DEPENDING ON SITE CONDITIONS. D.INSTALL CHECK VALVE HORIZONTALLY, OR VERTICALLY WITH FLOW UPWARD. INSTALL STRAINER HORIZONTALLY.
E.WHERE PIPING IS GREATER THAN 2", PROVIDE A TRIPLE DUTY VALVE IN PLACE OF CHECK VALVE, FLOW BALANCER AND SHUTOFF VALVE. F.OMIT BALANCING VALVE ON VARIABLE FLOW SYSTEMS. GHWRGHWS COIL
V COIL PUMP 12" 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE END CONNECTION, CAP & CHAIN (TYPICAL). PRESSURE GAUGE WITH 1/4" BALL VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE WITH 1/4" MANIFOLD & BALL VALVES DETAIL NOTES: A.ARRANGE
PIPING TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF COIL WITHOUT REMOVAL OF PIPING AHEAD OF UNIONS AND TO ALLOW ACCESS TO FILTERS AND ACCESS PANELS. B.PIPE COIL FOR COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT. SUPPLY CONNECTION
SHALL BE ON THE DISCHARGE AIR SIDE OF THE COIL. CONTROL VALVE SHEETMETAL PLENUM SAME SIZE AS RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK SIZE RETURN/EXHAUST DUCTWORK RETURN/ EXHAUST GRILLE NECK RETURN/
EXHAUST GRILLE FACE DUCT SAME SIZE AS SUPPLY GRILLE NECK SIZE SUPPLY DUCTWORK SUPPLY AIR GRILLE BOOT TAP INSTALLATION IS SIMILAR OF BOTH BOTTOM AND SIDE MOUNTING OF GRILLE. DETAIL NOTES:
A. DECK, BEAM, OR JOIST NOTE: FLEX SHALL BE 4'-0" MAXIMUM WITH (1) 90 DEG BEND ELBOW SUPPORT FOR FLEX DUCT AND DIFFUSER SIZE AND TYPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. FLEX DUCT MAXIMUM LENGTH
IS 24" WITH A 6" MAXIMUM OFFSET. OMIT FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION AND PROVIDE HARD CONNECTION TO DIFFUSERS WHERE DUCTWORK/DIFFUSER CONNECTION IS LOCATED ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DO NOT PROVIDE
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK ABOVE HARD CEILINGS. DETAIL NOTES: A. B. C. FASTENERS DAMPER (WITH BLADE POSITION INDICATOR) OPTIONAL FIRESTAT DAMPER SLEEVE: SLEEVE LENGTH TO INCLUDE WALL THICKNESS
PLUS ADDITIONAL LENGTH REQUIRED BY DAMPER MANUFACTURER IN ROOM. INSTALL FACTORY FURNISHED 1/4" FIBER FRAX THERMAL BLANKET FOR EXPOSED SLEEVE IN ROOM. WALL THICKNESS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED
PRIOR TO ORDERING DAMPERS. 14 GA. WIRE MESH DAMPER ACTUATOR GRILLE MOUNTING FLANGE GRILLE WALL DETAIL NOTES: A.FOR COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS TO BE PROVIDED IN EXISTING OR NEW DUCTS
PENETRATING EXISTING WALLS, THIS CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO REFRAME AND RECONSTRUCT THE EXISTING WALL PENETRATION AND FRAMING AS PER SMACNA FIRE DAMPER OPENING PROTOCOL DETAIL FIG. 3-1
(FIRE DAMPER GUIDE) AS WELL AS MANUFACTURER AND UL LISTING INSTALLATION DETAIL. SLIP JOINT FIRE DAMPER DETAIL NOTES: A.HORIZONTAL FREE AREA DAMPER INSTALLATION SIMILAR. B.FOR DOUBLE
WALL DUCT, USE INSULATION END CAP AND INSULATE SLEEVE. C.FOR FIRE DAMPERS TO BE PROVIDED IN EXISTING OR NEW DUCTS PENETRATING EXISTING WALLS, THIS CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO REFRAME
AND RECONSTRUCT THE EXISTING WALL PENETRATION AND FRAMING AS PER SMACNA FIRE DAMPER OPENING PROTOCOL DETAIL FIG. 3-1 (FIRE DAMPER GUIDE) AS WELL AS MANUFACTURER AND UL LISTING INSTALLATION
DETAIL. WALL: FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION ROUND/FLAT OVAL OR RECTANGULAR DUCT ACCESS DOOR: SIZE AND TYPE PER SPECIFICATIONS SLEEVE MATERIAL GAUGE, ANGLE SIZE AND GAUGE, ANGLE FASTENING,
AND OVERSIZED WALL OPENING AS PER CURRENT SMACNA STANDARD AND UL LISTING INSTALLATION DETAIL DO NOT BOLT ANGLES TO WALL 6" MIN. CAULKING MATERIAL DETAIL NOTES: A.HORIZONTAL DAMPER INSTALLATION
SIMILAR. B.FOR DOUBLE WALL DUCT, USE INSULATION END CAP, INSULATE SLEEVE. C.FOR COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS TO BE PROVIDED IN EXISTING OR NEW DUCTS PENETRATING EXISTING WALLS, THIS
CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO REFRAME AND RECONSTRUCT THE EXISTING WALL PENETRATION AND FRAMING AS PER SMACNA FIRE DAMPER OPENING PROTOCOL DETAIL FIG. 3-1 (FIRE DAMPER GUIDE) AS WELL AS
MANUFACTURER AND UL LISTING INSTALLATION DETAIL. DAMPER (WITH BLADE POSITION INDICATOR) DAMPER ACTUATOR WALL: FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION DO NOT BOLT ANGLES TO WALL S-JOINT/DUCT MATE, SLEEVE
TO DUCT OVER CENTER LOCK AUXILIARY OPERATING JACK SHAFT ACCESS DOOR: SIZE AND TYPE PER SPECIFICATIONS S-JOINT/DUCT MATE, SLEEVE TO DUCT ROUND/FLAT OVAL OR RECTANGULAR DUCT DAMPER SLEEVE
OPTIONAL FIRESTAT SLEEVE MATERIAL GAUGE, ANGLE SIZE AND GAUGE, ANGLE FASTENING AND OVERSIZED WALL OPENING AS PER SMACNA STANDARD AND UL LISTING INSTALLATION DETAIL Revisions: Richard
McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E
Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 DETAILS -HVAC H-600 NOT TO SCALE 4 TERMINAL REHEAT COIL PIPING DETAIL -HOT WATER NOT TO SCALE 5 LOUVERED
PENTHOUSE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 6 CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 3 AHU COOLING COIL PIPING DETAIL -2 WAY NOT TO SCALE 2 ENERGY RECOVERY COIL PIPING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 7 INLINE
PUMP PIPING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 AHU PREHEAT COIL PIPING DETAIL -2 WAY WITH PUMP NOT TO SCALE 8 EXHAUST GRILLE PLENUM INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 12 LAB SUPPLY GRILLE INSTALLATION
DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 13 TYPICAL DIFFUSER INSTALLATION DETAIL -LAY-IN CEILING NOT TO SCALE 11 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER W/ INTEGRAL GRILLE INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 10 FIRE DAMPER INSTALLATION
DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 9 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER INSTALLATION DETAIL S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI S GFCI PLAN VIEW ELEVATION VIEW 5'-1" 5'-1" 5'-1"5'-1"5'-1" 3'-10.5"
23'-6.5" 1 22 222 345678 9 4'-2" 34567 MAKE-UP AIRSUPPLY AIR 18 10 9 10 9 10 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195
T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark
Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006
T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 AIR HANDLING UNIT
DIMENSIONS & DETAILS -HVAC H-700 NOT TO SCALE 1 AIR HANDLING UNIT ACS-8 DETAIL DRAWING NOTES 135x14 MAKE UP AIR CONNECTION. 2ACCESS DOOR. 3PRE-FILTER AND FINAL FILTERS. 440% ETHLYENE
GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY COIL. 5SUPPLY AIR FAN. 640% PROPLYENE GLYCOL PRE-HEAT COIL. 7CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL (DESATURATION). 826x16 SUPPLY AIR CONNECTION. 98" BASE FRAME. 106" CONCRETE
PAD, REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway,
Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065
518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 SCHEDULES -HVAC H-800 STD.18020654310.213.61301004.6340%
EG40838.76BUFFALO AIR HANDLING1 (DEG. F)(DEG. F)VEL. (FPM)(In. WC)FLOW (GPM)TEMP. (DEG. F)TEMP. (DEG. F)(Ft. HD) (MBH)ENT. AIR TEMP.LVG. AIR TEMP.MAX. FACEAIR P.D.WATERENT. WATERLVG.
WATERWATER P.D.FLUIDVOLTSPHASEFLA TYPECAPACITYAIR SIDEWATER SIDE PREHEATING COIL (HOT WATER)UNIT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS MANUFACTURER & MODEL No.REMARKS AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE
- CHILLED WATER /HOT WATER, CONT'D 2.PROVIDE FILTER WITH 36"x36" CLARK AIR SYSTEM SIDE-LOCK FILTER HOUSING. 1.PROVIDE FILTER WITH INTEGRAL 1" RECESS FOR USE WITH PRE-FILTER. REMARKS:
PRE-FILTER22412414Tri-Dim Tri-Pleat Ultra F-3DUCT MOUNTED (E)LEF-1 SIDE SERVICE44000.181.0 124244 VARIESPLEATED PANELMERV 940-45 29Tri-Dim Tri-Pleat Ultra 2 124121258VILEDON MV85 F-1ACS-8
ACS-8 FINAL FILTER FRONT ACCESS37000.231.0 1242412 VARIESV BANKMERV 13A80-90 131VILEDON MV85 1 2241228 F-1ACS-8 ACS-8 PRE-FILTER FRONT ACCESS37000.310.75 124242 VARIESPLEATED PANELMERV
825-30 17 CAMFILL FARR 30/30(In.)(In.)(In.) (CFM)HEIGHTWIDTHLENGTHRATING(%)(Sq. Ft.) BANK NO.AIR FLOW(In. WC)(In. WC)NO.SIZEARRANGEMENTFRAMEMERVEFFICIENCIESAREA FILTERLOCATIONSERVICETYPESYSTEMINITIA
L P.D.FINAL P.D.CARTRIDGESHOLDINGEFFICIENCYMEDIAMANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS AIR FILTER SCHEDULE LP-1ROOFACS-8INTAKEALUMINUM7.154619 3/4"4637005250.055GREENHECK WIH - 32x32(CFM)(FPM)
(Sq. Ft.)(In.)(In.)(In.)FLOWVEL.(In. WC) AREATIERSWIDTHHEIGHTDEPTHAIRTHROATMAX P.D. UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICETYPEMATERIALTHROATNO. OFDIMENSIONS (APPROX.)AIR PERFORMANCEMANUFACTURER &
MODEL NO.REMARKS LOUVERED PENTHOUSE SCHEDULE RHC-3LABORATORY 551EQUIPMENT 551FLANGED30.270055950.15414.82.01301000.4WATER6513.518AEROFIN W-5.0CF-13.5X18.0-6-0.333RHC-2LABORATORY 551EQUIPMENT
551FLANGED56.2130055950.22436.44.01301000.2WATER8516.526AEROFIN W-5.0CF-16.5X26.0-8-0.666RHC-1LABORATORY 551EQUIPMENT 551FLANGED59.6138055950.18463.24.01301000.9WATER6516.526AEROFIN
W-5.0CF-16.5X26.0-6-0.333(CFM)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(In. W.C.)(FPM)(GPM)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(Ft. HD)(In.)(In.) FLOWTEMP.TEMP.P.D.VELOCITYFLOWTEMP.TEMP.P.D.INCHLENGTHWIDTH (MBH)AIRENT. AIRLVG.
AIRAIRMAX. FACEWATERENT. WATERLVG. WATERWATERFLUIDDEEPPER UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICEMOUNTINGCAPACITYAIR SIDEWATER SIDEROWSFINSCOIL FACE DIMENSIONS MANUFACTURER & MODEL No.REMARKS HEATING
COIL SCHEDULE - HOT WATER 1.BOTTOM OF DRAIN CONNECTION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" ABOVE THE BOTTOM OF THE EQUIPMENT RAIL. REMARKS: ACS-8PENTHOUSE MER5TH FLR LAB370037002.57.25PLENUM1
- 15"6.33485DIRECT7.5ASD147.920.471.2917455.5544493812.2476288 (CFM)(CFM)(In. WC)(In. WC)& MIN DIA.BHPRPM(MBH)(TONS)(In. WC)DBWBDBWBVEL. (FPM)FLOW (GPM)(Ft. HD)TEMP. (DEG. F)TEMP. (DEG.
F)INCH FLOWO.A.STATICSTATICTYPEFAN NO.MAXFANDRIVEHPSTARTERSENSIBLETOTALAIR P.D.EAT (DEG. F)LAT (DEG. F)MAX. FACEWATERWATER P.D.ENT. WATERLVG. WATERPER AIRMINEXT.TOTALFAN CHARACTERISTICSMOTORCAPACITY
AIR SIDEWATER SIDEROWSFINS UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICESUPPLY FANCOOLING COIL (CHILLED WATER - DESATURATION) AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE - CHILLED WATER /HOT WATER CV-7PENTHOUSE MERREHEAT
LOOPPLATE EXCHANGER9.51401051500.6340% EG101001301500.55514WATER61.03BELL AND GOSSETT GPX-AP20 (GPM)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(GPM)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(FPS) RATEENT.LVG.(MBH)(Ft. HD)RATEENT.LVG.(MBH)(Ft.
HD)TUBE VEL.PASSES(Sq. Ft.) FLOWWATER TEMP.CAPACITYPRESS. DROPFLUIDFLOWWATER TEMP.CAPACITYPRESS. DROPMAXIMUMNO. OFFLUIDSURFACE AREA UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICETYPEHIGH TEMP. SIDELOW TEMP.
SIDEHEAT TRANSFERMANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS HEAT EXCHANGER SCHEDULE - WATER TO GLYCOL 3.STAND-BY 2.GLYCOL - PROPYLENE, 40%. 1.GLYCOL - ETHLYLENE, 40%. REMARKS: P-21PENTHOUSE MERACS-8
PREHEAT COILINLINE143017539951/22081INTEGRAL ASD-18034.80.451-1/4BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC XL 55-451 P-20PENTHOUSE MERHEAT RECOVERYINLINE127095345032083ASD4.87560280.9981BELL & GOSSETT
E-90 1AAB2 P-19PENTHOUSE MERREHEAT LOOPINLINE104017539951/22081INTEGRAL ASD-18028.90.451-1/4BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC XL 55-453 P-18PENTHOUSE MERREHEAT LOOPINLINE104017539951/22081INTEGRAL
ASD-18028.90.451-1/4BELL & GOSSETT ECOCIRC XL 55-45(%)(In.) (GPM)IN FEET(DIA. In.)(DEG. F)EFF.SIZES & DESCRIPTIONFLOWTOTAL HEADWWPRPMHPVOLTSPHASESTARTERSIZETEMP.PUMPBHPDISCHARGE PUMP
NO.LOCATIONSERVICEUNIT TYPEPUMP CAPACITYMAXMOTOR CHARACTERISTICSIMPELLERFLUIDMIN.MAX.SUCTION &MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS PUMP SCHEDULE ARETURNSTEELWHITETITUS MODEL 355-RL2SUPPLYSTEELWHITETITUS
MODEL 272-RL1SUPPLYSTEELWHITETITUS MODEL TMSTYPEAPPLICATIONMATERIALFINISHMANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS REGISTER GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE 2.INTEGRAL SOUND ATTENUATOR. 1.FIBER FREE
LINER. REMARKS: VAV-2LOUNGE 5685202700.0182227TITUS DESV1,2 VAV-1CORRIDOR 500444503000.0181925TITUS DESV1,2 (CFM)(CFM)(In. WC) FLOWFLOWMAX CFM(In.) AIRAIRPRESS ATSIZEAT 1" S.P.AT 1"
S.P. UNIT NO.SERVICEMAXMINMIN INLETINLETRAD N.C.DISCH N.C.MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS VAV - SINGLE DUCT - AIR TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE 1.COIL PERFORMANCE BASED ON TURBULATORS INSIDE
OF THE TUBES. REMARKS: HRC-2PENTHOUSE MEREXHAUST AIRSTANDARDFLANGED150440070450.554891245.767038.640% PG8123636AEROFIN W1, 2 HRC-1PENTHOUSE MEROUTSIDE AIRSTANDARDFLANGED1503700-5250.74431
P-20 1242.43-532.840% PG81037.533AEROFIN W1 (CFM)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(In. W.C.)(FPM)(GPM)(Ft. HD)(DEG. F)(DEG. F)(In.)(In.) FLOWTEMP.TEMP.P.D.VELOCITYNO.FLOWP.D.TEMP.TEMP.INCHLENGTHWIDTH
(MBH)AIRENT. AIRLVG. AIRAIRMAX. FACEPUMPWATERWATERENT. WATERLVG. WATERFLUIDDEEPPER UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICETYPEMOUNTINGCAPACITYAIR SIDEWATER SIDEROWSFINSCOIL FACE DIMENSIONS MANUFACTURER
& MODEL No.REMARKS ENERGY RECOVERY "RUN-AROUND" COIL SCHEDULE 6.PROVIDE WITH TIGHT SHUT-OFF 5.PROVIDE WITH FACTORY DRAW BAND CLAMPS IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 4.PROVIDE WITH
FAN STATIC RESET IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 3.PROVIDE WITH FACTORY SOUND NEUTRALIZER IF VENTURI STYLE VALVE IS PROVIDED. 2.THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET
AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL RANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SETPOINTS IN SOFTWARE. 1.REFER TO THE LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. REMARKS: GEV-3LABORATORY 551ZONE 312"1790180800400HORIZONTA
L0.2ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 GEV-2LABORATORY 551ZONE 214"27502501500750HORIZONTAL0.2ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 GEV-1LABORATORY 551ZONE 114"27502501380680HORIZONTAL0.2ACCUTROL
ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 SAV-3LABORATORY 551ZONE 312"1790180700300HORIZONTAL0.2ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 SAV-2LABORATORY 551ZONE 214"27502501400140HORIZONTAL0.2ACCUTROL
ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 SAV-1LABORATORY 551ZONE 114"27502501380680HORIZONTAL0.2ACCUTROL ACCUVALVE AVC60001,2,3,4,5,6 (CFM)(CFM)(CFM)(CFM)(In. WC) FLOWFLOWFLOWFLOWPRESSURE (In.)MAX
AIRMIN AIRMAX AIRMIN AIRPOSITIONOPERATING UNIT NO.LOCATIONSERVICESIZEFACTORY RANGEOPERATIONAL RANGEMOUNTINGMINIMUMMANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.REMARKS LAB AIR VALVE SCHEDULE SPRINKLER BRANCH
LINE IF OFFSET LENGTH EXCEEDS 2', PROVIDE PIPE HANGER DROP NIPPLE CLOSE NIPPLE REDUCERSUSPENDED CEILING SPRINKLER PER SPEC (RECESSED PENDENT SPRINKLER SHOWN) (CONCEALED PENDENT) (PENEDENT
WITH GUARD) (PENDENT) THREADED 90° ELBOW (TYPICAL) SPRINKLER PER SPECIFICATION (CONCEALED PENDENT SPRINKLER SHOWN) REDUCERSUSPENDED CEILING SPRINKLER PER SPECIFICATION (PENDENT SPRINKLER
WITH GUARD SHOWN) REDUCERSUSPENDED CEILING SPRINKLER PER SPECIFICATION (PENDENT SPRINKLER SHOWN) SUSPENDED CEILING REDUCER DESCRIPTION SYMBOL FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOL LIST QUICK RESPONSE
UPRIGHT SPRINKLER POINT OF CONNECTION SIDEWALL SPRINKLER NTSNOT TO SCALE (ETR)EXISTING TO REMAIN GCGENERAL CONTRACTOR PCPLUMBING CONTRACTOR FCFLUSHING CONNECTION NEW PIPING SSPRINKLER
MAIN/BRANCH PIPING (S) ELBOW DOWN DRAIN VALVE ELBOW UP CHECK VALVE TOP TEE CONNECTION FLUSHING CONNECTION CONCEALED PENDENT SPRINKLER SHUT-OFF VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH (TS) EXISTING
WORK TO BE REMOVED AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR MCMECHANICAL CONTRACTOR ECELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (E)EXISTING PIPING FPFIRE PROTECTION SERVICE (FP) DSPRINKLER DRAIN PIPING (D) 45°OFFSET BOTTOM/TEE
CONNECTION PIPE CONTINUATION QUICK RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLER POINT OF DISCONNECTION FSFLOW SWITCH (FS) FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE (FDV) INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION (ITC) (E)EXISTING OR
DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION/REMOVAL KEYNOTE X X FULL SIZE FLUSHING VALVE FULL PIPE CAP FINAL SPRINKLER HEAD SPRINKLER CROSS MAIN, REFER TO PLAN FOR SIZE FLUSHING DETAIL NOTES: A. B.
C. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SUPPORTING CALCULATIONS FOR THE FLUSHING VALVES, AS PART OF THE SPRINKLER SHOP DRAWINGS. THE FLUSHING VALVES HAVE TO BE SIZED, PER NFPA 20, FOR A MINIMUM VELOCITYM
AND THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CALCULATIONS, WITH SUBMITTED SHOW DRAWINGS THAT THE FLUSH VALVE WILL FLOW AT THE MINIMUM VELOCITY, PER NFPA 20. REFER TO FP-000 FOR ADDITIONAL
NOTES. 05/22/20208:21 AM JARED HOYT 135 HOY ROAD, CITY OF ITHACA, NY 14850 160 PSI1000 GPM PRESSURE (PSI) 10 FLOW (GPM) FIRE PUMP FLOW TEST DATA DATE: ADDRESS: TIME: STATIC PRESS:FLOW
AT 125 PSI: FLOW TEST PERFORMED BY: 5 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 200400600800100012001400160018002000 SCALE: B 125 PSI @ 1000 GPM 91
PSI @ 1500 GPMFLOW TEST NOTES: A. FLOW TEST RESULTS ARE BASED ON FIRE PUMP TEST: • 160 PSI @ 0 GPM • 125 PSI @ 1000 GPM • 91 PSI @ 1500 GPM Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC
347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley
Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point
4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST AND DETAILS -FP FP-000 NOT TO SCALE 1 RETURN BEND DETAIL THESE NOTES ARE APPLICABLE TO THE FULL SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
PROVIDE A COMPLETE FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR THE SPACES INDICATED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NYS FIRE CODE, STATE CODE REFERENCED EDITION OF NFPA 13 AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING
JURISDICTION. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE HYDRAULICALLY CALCULATED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM ALL PIPE SIZES BY HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS.THERE SHALL BE NO DECREASE IN PIPE SIZES
UNLESS DIRECTED BY ENGINEER. THE PLANS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE ONLY THE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF PIPING, SPRINKLER HEADS AND EQUIPMENT. ALL MAINS, BRANCH LINES, SPRINKLER HEADS,
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. THE PLANS ARE NOT INTENDED TO SHOW EVERY ITEM OF WORK OR EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ANY COMPONENT NECESSARY
TO COMPLETE THE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BEST PRACTICE OF THE TRADE, NFPA AND THE AHJ WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST. DRAWINGS DO NOT INDICATE ALL OFFSETS, CHANGES IN ELEVATION, ETC.
WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE SUCH CHANGES IN PIPING AND LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, ETC. TO ACCOMMODATE WORK, OBSTACLES, AND WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS. INSTALL EQUIPMENT
AND PIPING TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE OPERATION, SERVICE, AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF REQUIRED SERVICE CLEARANCES. ALL NEW PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS
AND ROOFS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THIS CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLATION OF FP SYSTEMS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC.. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR ALL PIPING
PENETRATING THROUGH RATED WALLS AND FLOORS. SLEEVES SHALL BE INSTALLED AND BE FIRESTOPPED. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON RATED WALLS SHALL BE SLEEVED AND SEALED WITH A NON-HARDENING
SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES OF THE WALL. DISPOSE OF ALL WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACTOR. LEGALLY DISPOSE ALL MATERIALS TO A LOCATION OFF SITE. COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE WORK
AND SHUTDOWNS WITH THE OWNER AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ARRANGE PIPING TO DRAIN BACK TO LOW POINTS. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE PROVIDE AUXILIARY DRAINS ON SPRINKLER MAIN. PROVIDE
SPRINKLER GUARDS FOR ALL SPRINKLERS, LOCATED BELOW DUCTWORK IN MECHANICAL ROOMS, AND FOR SPRINKLERS IN MECHANICAL AND STORAGE SPACES LESS THAN 8 FT. ABOVE FLOOR. DO NOT DRILL, CORE,
OR CUT ANY PORTION OF COLUMNS, BEAMS, JOISTS, OR BRIDGING RIBS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL. CONFIRM ALL ELEVATIONS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS. PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CONCEALED ABOVE
FINISHED CEILINGS WITH SPRINKLER HEADS LOCATED IN CENTER OF CEILING TILES. IN AREAS WITH NO CEILINGS PIPING SHALL BE EXPOSED. FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
I. J. K. L. M. N. O. NO WORK SHALL BE DONE ON FP SYSTEM UNTIL HEAT DETECTORS ARE UP AND OPERATIONAL. REFER TO 'E' DRAWINGS. NOTE: 1. NOT TO SCALE 2 CORNELL UNIVERSITY TYPICAL FLUSH
ASSEMBLY FOR ALL MAINS, CROSS MAINS, BRANCHES AND RUN OUTS FOR HYDRAULIC REFERENCE ONLY 3 FIRE HYDRANT FLOW TEST DATA CHART HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS: -SYSTEM TO BE DESIGNED
TO FM GLOBAL DATA SHEETS AND HAZARD CLASSES AS WELL AS NFPA 13. -CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DOWNLOAD, REVIEW, AND PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS TO MEET FM GLOBAL DATA SHEETS.
-PROVIDE SUBMISSION OF DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS WITH EXTRA TIME BUILT IN FOR FM GLOBAL REVIEW COMMENTS. -PROVIDE COMMENTS TO REPLY BACK TO FM GLOBAL REVIEW AND REVISE CALCULATIONS
AND DRAWINGS AS REQUIRED. G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 571 Room 572 Room 574 Room 576 Room
578 STAIR# 3 50003 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 STAIR# 2 50002 SHOP 501 Room
503 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room 508 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 516 Room 518 Room 520
Room 517 Room 519 Room 521 Room 521A Room 523 CORRIDOR 50044 (E) 6" FP, (E) 2" DRAIN UP AND DN 1" (E)FP (E)S (E)FP 1" 1" 2" 1" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1" 1 1/4"1 1/4" 1" 1" 1" 1" IE = ?
(E) FLOW CONTROL VALVE IN CABINET (E)S ( E)S ( E)S (E)S (E)S (E)S(E)S CAP AT THIS LOCATION SO REST OF THE SYSTEM REMAINS OPERATIONAL. TIE BACK IN WHEN SYSTEM HAS BEEN REVISED CAP AT
THIS LOCATION SO REST OF THE SYSTEM REMAINS OPERATIONAL. TIE BACK IN WHEN SYSTEM HAS BEEN REVISED Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York,
NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590
T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York
14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020
PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN -FP FP-100 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596
GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003
LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room
521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 1" 1" 1" 2" 1"
1" (E) 6" FP, (E) 2" DRAIN UP AND DN (E) FLOW CONTROL VALVE S S 1" (E)S (E)S ( E)S (E)S ( E)S (E)S S (E)S(E)S (E)FP (E)FP (E)S 2" 2" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1" 1" 2" 1" 2" 1 1/2"1 1/4"1" 1" 1"
1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2" 2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" 2" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 2" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1" 1 1/2" RISER 1 1/4" 1" PENDENT SPRINKLER
IN CEILING. REFER TO ARCH. PLANS FOR HEIGHT PENDENT SPRINKLER IN CEILING. REFER TO ARCH. PLANS FOR HEIGHT PENDENT SPRINKLER IN CEILING. REFER TO ARCH. PLANS FOR HEIGHT PENDENT SPRINKLER
IN CEILING. REFER TO ARCH. PLANS FOR HEIGHT CONCEALED SPRINKLER IN CEILING. REFER TO ARCH. PLANS FOR HEIGHT PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING. (TYP) QR UPRIGHT
SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING. (TYP) PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING. (TYP) QR UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING.
(TYP) PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING. (TYP) QR UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD. REFER TO DETAIL 2 ON THIS DRAWING. (TYP) 1 1 1 1 1 1111 2 5TH FLOOR 6TH FLOOR 2" S
MAIN PENDENT SPRINKLER HEAD. INSTALL DEFLECTOR BELOW ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS. QR UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New
York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590
T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York
14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020
PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION FP-200 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN NONE 2 TYPICAL SPRINKLER HEAD ELEVATION DRAWING NOTES 1RELOCATE SPRINKLER HEAD TO CENTER IN NEW
CEILING GRID. REVISE PIPING AS NECESSARY. VENT PIPING SHOCK ABSORBER (SA) BACKFLOW PREVENTER (BFP) UNION PIPE GUIDE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE SHUT OFF VALVE INDIRECT WASTE PIPING
(IW) IW CLEANOUT (CO) WALL PLATE CLEANOUT (WPCO) DECK PLATE CLEANOUT (DPCO) CAP OR PLUG PIPE CONTINUATION "P" TRAP TOP TEE CONNECTION BOTTOM/TEE CONNECTION ELBOW UP 45°OFFSET ELBOW
DOWN DESCRIPTION PLUMBING SYMBOL LIST SYMBOL STSTORM WATER SEWER PIPING (ST) ACID VENT PIPING (AV) AV ACID WASTE PIPING (AW) AW SANITARY SEWER PIPING SAN HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PIPING
(HWR) HOT WATER PIPING (HW) COLD WATER PIPING (CW) NEW PIPING LOCATED BELOW FLOOR/SLAB NEW PIPING LOCATED ABOVE FLOOR/SLAB (E)EXISTING PIPING ECELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PCPLUMBING CONTRACTOR
MCMECHANICAL CONTRACTOR GCGENERAL CONTRACTOR VTRVENT THRU ROOF BFFBELOW FINISHED FLOOR AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR (ETR)EXISTING TO REMAIN (E)EXISTING NTSNOT TO SCALE POINT OF DISCONNECTION
POINT OF CONNECTION EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED PDPUMP DISCHARGE PIPING (PD) DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION/REMOVAL KEYNOTE X X ST(S)SECONDARY STORM WATER SEWER PIPING (ST(S) DETAIL NOTES:
DOMESTIC COLD WATER FLOW DIRECTION LABEL. PROVIDE 360 DEGREE WRAP OVERLAPPING BOTH ENDS OF THE PIPE FUNCTION LABEL AND MATCHING THE FLOW DIRECTION OF THE PIPE CONTENTS. PIPE FUNCTION
LABEL A. B. C. D. E. F. PROVIDE A PIPE LABEL FOR EACH PIPE FUNCTION. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE LABEL ON EACH PIPE FOR EVERY ROOM THE PIPE PASSES THROUGH. PROVIDE LABELS IN LARGE SPACES ON
MAXIMUM 20' CENTERS FOR EVERY PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. LABELS TO BE LOCATED IN AN EASILY VISIBLE LOCATION AS THEY WOULD NORMALLY BE SEEN. IE. ON THE BOTTOM
HALF OF PIPES IN THE AIR AND ON THE TOP HALF OR SIDES OF PIPES MOUNTED LOW. LABELS SHALL BE, COLOR CODED, PRE-PRINTED, SELF ADHESIVE VINYL. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS
AND LIST OF PIPE FUNCTIONS. DETAIL NOTES: A.ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INCLUDES PANELS, TRANSFORMERS, DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, SWITCHGEAR, ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES, AND
FUSED SWITCHES (THIS ALSO APPLIES TO ELECTRICAL GEAR MOUNTED DIRECTLY ON MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT). B.DEDICATED ELECTRICAL SPACE IS DEFINED BY NEC 110. C.NO PIPING OR DUCTWORK MAY BE INSTALLED
IN DEDICATED ELECTRICAL SPACE OR WORKING SPACE. STRUCTURAL CEILING STRUCTURAL CEILING 6'-6" SPRINKLER ALLOWED DEDICATED ELECTRICAL SPACE WORKING SPACE 3'-0" TO 9'-0" PER NEC 110 6'-0"
DUCT WORKING SPACE SIDE VIEW LUMINAIRE PERMITTED 6'-6" MIN. SIDE VIEW DEDICATED ELECTRICAL SPACE 6'-0" OR LESS SUSPENDED CEILING SUSPENDED CEILING FRONT VIEW 6'-6" MIN. LUMINAIRE PERMITTED
FRONT VIEW 30" MIN. PIPING PERMITTED LUMINAIRE PERMITTED PIPING PERMITTED TYPICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PIPING PERMITTED M A I N O N O F F M A I N O N O F F M A I N O N O F F M A I N
O N O F F M A I N ON OF F M A I N ON OF F 6'-0" WORKING SPACE 36" MIN. PUMP SCHEDULE NO.LOCATIONSERVICEGPM HEAD FT WATER MOTOR TYPEDESIGN MAKE HPVOLTAGEPHASERPM FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT
CONNECTION SCHEDULE DESIGNATIONDESCRIPTION COLD WATER HOT WATER WASTE OR SANITARY VENTREMARKS SHOCK ABSORBER SCHEDULE NO. FIXTURE UNIT RATING SIZE IN INCHES PDI SYMBOL SA-A1 -111/2"A
SA-B12 -323/4"B SA-C33 -601"C UCP-1AT SINKSANITARY301/21153450 10LIBERTY MODEL 405 SK-ASINK1/2"1/2"1 1/2"1 1/2" DRAIN 1 EW-AEMER. EYEWASH1/2" TEPID---CP-1PENTHOUSE MERINDIRECT WASTE1/30115LIBERTY
MODEL LC-20 DRAIN 1 (E)CW MAIN IW A. DETAIL NOTES: B. FINISHED FLOOR C. D. E. BY DIVISION 22 BY DIVISION 23 2'-6" MINIMUM 5' MAXIMUM TO HVAC EQUIPMENT MAKEUP WATER INDIRECT WASTE. RUN
TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN WITH 1" MINIMUM AIR GAP. FLOOR DRAIN 3" AIR GAP 3" FUNNEL DRAIN FINAL CONNECTION BY DIVISION 23 3/4" RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER BACKFLOW PREVENTER SHALL BE LOCATED
UPSTREAM OF ALL CONNECTIONS TO HVAC EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE PROPER SUPPORTS FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTER AND PIPING. PROVIDE 8" CLEARANCE BEHIND BACKFLOW PREVENTER, 1' ABOVE AND 2'-6" CLEARANCE
IN FRONT OF DEVICE. THE INSTALLATION OF A FIXED AIR GAP FITTING IS NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR USE ON DRAIN LINE. PROVIDE FUNNEL DRAIN AS INDICATED. PAINT SUPPORTS WITH ONE (1) PRIMER AND TWO
(2) FINISH COATS OF COLOR AS SPECIFIED. 3/4" DRAIN VALVE 2" IW REDUCER INCREASER 1" 1" 1/2" HW, 1/2" CW, 1 1/2" V, & 2" FORCE MAIN UP. REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR ROUTING 1 1/2" DRAIN LINE
UCP -1 TMV-A SINK EYEWASH Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite
G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506
T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca,
NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST, AND SCHEDULES -PLUMBING P-000 NOT TO SCALE 1 PIPING
IDENTIFICATION LABEL DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DETAIL THESE NOTES ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL PLUMBING CONTRACT DRAWINGS. DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER
WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACT. LEGALLY DISPOSE OF ALL MATERIALS TO A LOCATION OFF SITE. COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE WORK AND SHUTDOWNS WITH THE OWNER AND OTHER TRADES
PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. PATCH HOLES IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION LEFT BY THE REMOVAL OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. MAINTAIN THE FIRE/SMOKE RATING OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. DEMOLITION SHALL INCLUDE,
BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PIPING, VALVES, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND INSULATION EXCEPT ASBESTOS. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING
FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE SLEEVED AND FIRE/SMOKE STOPPED. REFER TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR FIRE WALL AND FLOOR LOCATIONS. ALL PENETRATIONS
THROUGH NON RATED WALLS SHALL BE SLEEVED AND SEALED. SEAL WITH A NON-HARDENING SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL PENETRATION TO REDUCE NOISE TRANSMISSION. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF
ALL EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF ALL REQUIRED SERVICE CLEARANCES. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT THE BASE OF ALL STORM, SANITARY AND WASTE STACKS. PITCH 4" AND LARGER SANITARY, STORM, AND
WASTE PIPING AT 1/8" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FOR SANITARY, STORM, AND WASTE PIPING 3" AND SMALLER PITCH AT 1/4" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE PLANS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC
AND INDICATE THE GENERAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT. ALL PIPING MAINS, EQUIPMENT, BRANCH LINES, AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. THE PLANS ARE NOT INTENDED TO SHOW EVERY
ITEM OF WORK OR EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL COMPONENTS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BEST PRACTICE OF THE TRADE WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST. ITEMS
OF WORK OR EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ONLY, OR CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS ONLY, SHALL BE PROVIDED IN THE SAME MATTER AS IF THEY APPEARED ON BOTH THE DRAWINGS AND THE SPECIFICATIONS.
DRAWINGS DO NOT INDICATE ALL OFFSETS, CHANGES IN ELEVATION, ETC. WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL SUCH CHANGES IN PIPING AND LOCATIONS OF EQUIPMENT, ETC. TO ACCOMODATE
WORK, OBSTACLES, AND WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS. INSTALL EQUIPMENT AND PIPING TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE OPERATION, SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF REQUIRED
SERVICE CLEARANCES. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF EXISTING OR NEW FIREPROOFING WHICH IS DISTURBED OR REMOVED DURING THE COURSE OF ANY DEMOLITION OR NEW WORK
THAT IS PART OF THIS CONTRACT. FIELD VERIFY ALL FLOOR ELEVATIONS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES,
LOCATIONS OF GRAB BARS AND CONTROLS, ETC. PROVIDE SHUTOFF VALVES ON ALL CW AND HW BRANCHES SERVING INDIVIDUAL PLUMBING FIXTURES. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL
PROVIDE CUTTING AND PATCHING AND ALL CORING OF SLABS, WALLS AND OTHER ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PLUMBING WORK. GENERAL NOTES: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. NOT TO SCALE 4
MAKE-UP WATER BACKFLOW PREVENTER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 3 SINK AND EYEWASH SCHEMATIC NOTE: ALL LOCATIONS ARE SIMILAR LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 571
Room 572 Room 574 Room 576 Room 578 STAIR# 3 50003 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS
580 STAIR# 2 50002 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room 508 Room 512 Room 514 Room
514B Room 516 Room 518 Room 520 Room 517 Room 519 Room 521 Room 521A Room 523 CORRIDOR 50044 G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X (E) 3" IW UP (E) 3" IW UP (E)IW
3" 3" (E)IW (E) 3" IW UP 3" (E)IW (E)IW 3" (E)IW 3" (R) 3" IW DOWN TO SERVICE SINK W/ AIR GAP 3" (E) 4" SAN, (E) 3" V, (E) 2" CW, (E) 1" HW UP AND DN (E) 4" S.P.O., (E) 3"
V.P.O, (E)CW C.O., (E)HW C.O. REMOVE HW BACK INTO CHASE I.E. = 107" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018
212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan
Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219
716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL
FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN -PLUMBING P-100 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN DEMOLITION NOTES 1DISCONNECT AND REMOVE CONDENSATE ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC EQUIPMENT BACK
TO MAIN & CAP. VERIFY ROUTING AND EXTENT OF REMOVALS IN FIELD. (E) HW RISER (E) HW RISER REMOVE SECTION 1" HW 1" HW BYPASS VALVE IN CLOSED POSITION, LABEL "NORMALLY CLOSED" G F8 F E
D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS
580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET
50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR#
2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E) 3" IW UP (E) 3" IW UP (E) 3" IW UP 3" IW DOWN TO SERVICE SINK W/ AIR GAP (E) 4" SAN, (E) 3" V, (E) 2" CW, (E) 1" HW
UP AND DN (E)IW 3" 3" 3" (E)IW (E)IW (E)IW 3" 3" SK-A 1/2" CW, HW, 1 1/2" V, AND 1 1/2" FM DN 1/2" CW, HW, 1 1/2" V DN 1/2" CW, HW, 1 1/2" V DN SK-A SK-A ●● 3/4" ● ●● ● PD 1 1/2" 1/2"
1 1/2" ●● ●● 1" 1" 2" V 2" SAN (E)1 1/2" CW TAP CUT AND PATCH WALL TO CONNECT TO 1" HW RISER, REFER TO DETAIL 1/P201 PUMP UCP-1 TO BE UNDER COUNTER AT SINK, REFER TO DETAIL 3/P-000
PUMP UCP-1 TO BE UNDER COUNTER AT SINK, REFER TO DETAIL 3/P-000 PUMP UCP-1 TO BE UNDER COUNTER AT SINK, REFER TO DETAIL 3/P-000 PD ● ●● (E)IW (E)IW EW-A EW-A EW-A ●● ● 1/2" 1" ●● 1"
●● 1" 1" 1/2" PD 1 1/2" 3/4" 1 1/2" ROUTE PIPING UP IN CHASE SPACE ROUTE PIPING DOWN COLUMN EXPOSED RACK PIPING ON WALL IN CHASE PD ●● ●● 1 1/2" ● ●● ROUTE 3" IW AROUND DOOR HEADER
& THRU SHAFT. I W Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown
NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY
14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING P-200 NOT TO SCALE 1 RISER CONNECTION DETAIL 1/8"
= 1'-0" 2 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN 80064 80061 809 807 801 801A 803 803A 805 8004680047 802 811 80062 804 80060 G F8 F E D C B A 1234567 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X (E)FD AHU NEW
(E)FD (E)FD(E)FD (E)FD (E)FD ● LABEL "NON-POTABLE" PROVIDE 3/4" RPZ DESIGN BASIS WATTS LF009 AND ROUTE DISCHARGE TO FD. REFER TO DETAIL 4/P-000 CONNECT TO HVAC MAKE-UP WATER, CONT'D
ON HVAC DRAWINGS 1" ● TERMINATE PIPING ABOVE FLOOR DRAIN W/ AIR GAP PUMP CP-1. CONNECT TO HVAC CONDENSATE, CONT'D ON HVAC DRAWINGS IW 1 1/4" (E)4" CW (E)3/4" 1" ● Revisions: Richard
McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E
Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PENTHOUSE PLAN -PLUMBING P-201 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PENTHOUSE PLAN OPEN FULL ARROW(S) INDICATES 480 VOLT CIRCUIT
TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OPEN HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 277 VOLT CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SOLID FULL ARROW(S) INDICATES
208 VOLT CIRCUIT TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SOLID HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 120 VOLT CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. LP-404
HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD. LETTERS/NUMBERS INDICATE PANEL. NUMBERS INDICATE CIRCUITS. NUMBER OF ARROWS EQUALS NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. CIRCUIT SHALL BE 20 AMP, 120 VOLT, 2 #12, 1 #12 EG.,
IN " C, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SIZE AND NUMBER TO MATCH HOMERUN. REFER TO SPEC'S FOR RACEWAY TYPE. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 HEAVY SOLID IS NEW, EXISTING
ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, SOLID LIGHT IS EXISTING TO REMAIN , EXISTING ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, DASED LIGHT IS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED , REFERENCE
TO DRAWING NOTE DH OS D J DOOR HOLD CORD DROPCD DIMMER - SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH FIXTURES PROVIDED. TOGGLE SWITCH, VOLTAGE AS INDICATED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE, SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE:
2 - TWO POLE SWITCH 3 - THREE WAY SWITCH 4 - FOUR WAY SWITCH M - MONENTARY CONTACT K - KEY OPERATED a,b,c - SWITCHING DESIGNATIONS NUMBER OF LETTERS EQUALS NO. OF GANGED SWITCHES V
- VACANCY SENSOR VD - VACANCY SENSOR, DIMMER SWITCH VDS - VACANCY SENSOR, DUAL SWITCHED WP - WEATHERPROOF QUAD RECEPTACLE 20 AMP, 125 VOLT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT SUBSCRIPTS
INDICATE TYPE: G - GROUND FAULT INTERUPT OC - OVER COUNTER UC - UNDER THE COUNTER WP - WEATHER PROOF TP - TAMPER PROOF P - CEILING PROJECTOR, MOUNT IN PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATE
USB - INTEGRAL USB CHARGER H - MOUNT IN HORIZONTAL DIRECTION SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE. PROVIDE PROPER VOLTAGE, CLASS, CURRENT RATING AND NEMA CONFIGURATION AS REQUIRED BY BRANCH
CIRCUIT AND/OR MATCH CAP ON EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED BY OTHERS. PROVIDE CORD AND CAP. SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: J CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR JUNCTION BOX 3 a,b,c 3 REFERENCE
TO DEMOLITION NOTE EXISTING TO REMAIN - INDICATES EXISTING ITEM SHALL REMAIN. MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (E) EXISTING TO BE RELOCATED - INDICATES
EXISTING ITEM SHALL BE RELOCATED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE, REINSTALL AT NEW LOCATION AND RECONNECT ITEM AS REQUIRED. (ER) CORD REELCR PUSH BUTTON LAB BENCH RECEPTACLES. VARIOUS CONFIGURATIONS.
FB FLOOR BOX. SHALL BE WIREMOLD RFB4E_OG, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. PROVIDE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FOR POWER TO TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES, (1) 1" CONDUIT FOR FUTURE DATA DROP AND (2) 1" CONDUIT
FOR AV TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING. COVER PER ARCHITECT. COMMUNICATIONS DIDF DATA INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION FRAME DMDF DATA MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME EXISTING COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET TEL/DATA
DROP: 4"x4"x2.50" BOX WITH A 1-GANG MUD RING & FACEPLATE WITH DUPLEX DESIGN. 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR ( UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. TERMINATE
CONDUIT AT J HOOK IN CORRIDOR WITH CONDUIT BUSHING. PULL (2) CAT 6 CABLE, TERMINATE AT PATCH PANEL IN BDF. W - SINGLE GANG BACK BOX WITH MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST
CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. WALL MOUNT AT 46"AFF. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. DDC - SINGLE GANG BOX WITH BLANK COVER PLATE. PROVIDE 3/4"C STUBBED
TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. DDC ALARM WIRING BY DIV 23. C - CAMERA, COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. TV - COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS. DSD FSD FS TS FAAP FACP WAP H F F F SD S FIRE ALARM SMOKE DAMPER CONNECTION DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SHUT DOWN RELAY SMOKE DETECTOR, BEAM TYPE RECEIVERSRX SMOKE DETECTOR,
BEAM TYPE TRANSMITTERSTX FLOW SWITCH CONNECTION TAMPER SWITCH CONNECTION FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATION PANEL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL REMOTE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TEST INDICATOR RATE-OF-RISE
HEAT DETECTOR ALARM SIGNAL, STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE ALARM SIGNAL, SPEAKER AND STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE MANUAL PULL STATION SMOKE DETECTOR M D CB T CONTACTOR ENCLOSED CIRCUIT
BREAKER COMBINATION FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH AND MAGNETIC STARTER 208Y/120 VOLT PANELBOARD. TRANSFORMER COMPLETE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A d A d CEILING MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE
WALL MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE STRIP LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE
TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE LIGHTING ZONE WALL MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE
LIGHTING ZONE LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY POWER WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE WITH BATTERY PACK MOTOR CONNECTION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE
FOR SIZE POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL 480Y/277 VOLT PANELBOARD. DISCONNECT SWITCH FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD. MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION LUMINAIRES TRACK LIGHTING
DOUBLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE SINGLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE A E N LA G EGAP RTSA TVSS ONE LINE DIAGRAM SYMBOLS GROUND CONNECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH GENERATOR EMERGENCY
GENERATOR ANNUNCIATOR PANEL REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH ANNUNCIATOR PANEL TRANSFORMER, REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND TYPE POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER LIGHTNING ARRESTOR TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE
SUPPRESSOR PT CT A E N LA G EGAP RTSA TVSS ONE LINE DIAGRAM SYMBOLS FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH THERMAL MAGNETIC MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH GENERATOR EMERGENCY
GENERATOR ANNUNCIATOR PANEL REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FEEDER DESIGNATION. REFER TO FEEDER SCHEDULE CURRENT TRANSFORMER POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR
PT CT CEILING RECEPTACLE 4'-0" EXIT LIGHT SWITCH 2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO CENTER OF OUTLETS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IN MASONRY CONSTRUCTION THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE USED FOR
REFERENCE TO NEAREST BLOCK OR BRICK COURSING. THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE ADHERED TO UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 1'-6"
DIVIDED SURFACE RACEWAY HORN/LIGHT LENS ON TOP FINISHED FLOOR PULLSTATION COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT. ENTIRE LENS SHALL BE MINIMUM 80" AFF AND NOT GREATER THAN
96" AFF. WHERE NOT PERMITTED BY CEILING HEIGHT DEVICE SHALL BE MOUNTED WITHIN 6" OF THE CEILING. 4'-0" EXIT SIGNS CENTERED ABOVE DOOR CR CARD READER, REFER TO DETAIL DC DOOR CONTACT
COMBINATION POWER/COMMUNICATION SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED. WIREMOLD G4000. RACEWAY SHALL BE MOUNTED "OVER COUNTER" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ML MAG LOCK WAP - WIRELESS
ACCESS POINT WALL MOUNT AT 90"AFF 4"x4"x2.25" BOX WITH DOUBLE GANG PLASTER RING. 1" EMT CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). PROVIDE TWO (2)
CAT 6A CABLES. TERMINATE IN BDF AND 6-8" PIGTAIL WITHOUT FACEPLATE. EM TYPICAL EMERGENCY PHONE OUTLET LOCATION. PROVIDE 4"x4" BACKBOX WITH A SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND (1) 3/4" CONDUIT
TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DAS ANTENNAANT DS DAYLIGHT SENSOR EM EMERGENCY PHONE: INTERIOR
LOCATIONS EMERGENCY PHONES PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DETAIL SHEETS FOR INSTALLATION DETAILS. PT POKE THROUGH - WIREMOLD 8AT SERIES. PROVIDE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT FOR POWER
TO TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES, (1) 1" CONDUIT FOR FUTURE DATA DROP AND (1) 1-1/2" CONDUIT FOR AV TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING. COVER PER ARCHITECT. P PROJECTOR - (1) DUPLEX AND (1) TEL/DATA DROP.
RTS ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY SIZE PER QUANTITY OF CABLES AND 50% FUTURE CAPACITY AT A MINIMUM. AV PT STEELCASE TWO DOOR LOW PROFILE CONNECTOR COVER MODEL #16-0011519. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED
ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WALL POWER IN FEED, POWER TRACK, CONNECTORS, ETC. FIRE ALARM HORN/SPEAKERF DC DOOR CONTACT G. H. I. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION,
WHICH IS TO REMAIN, IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF DEMOLITION AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, AS MUCH AS
POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO THE OWNERS APPROVAL. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS
FROM DAMAGE. COORDINATE PHASING OF WORK WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS WITH UNIVERSITY PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWNS SHALL BE SCHEDULED THROUGH
CUSTOMER SERVICE WITH AT LEAST 24 HOURS NOTICE BEFORE WORK IS TO BE STARTED. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE AND
ARE NOT GARAUNTEED. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, VISIT SITE AND IDENTIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIFFICULTIES THAT WILL AFFECT THE DEMOLITION WORK. NO COMPENSATION WILL BE GRANTED FOR ADDITIONAL
WORK CAUSED BY UNFAMILIARITY WITH SITE CONDITIONS THAT ARE VISIBLE OR READILY CONSTRUED BY EXPERIENCED OBSERVERS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PARTICIPATE IN SURVEY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECT AND CAP ALL SERVICE LINES TO BE DISCONNECTED FOR THOSE SERVICES WHICH NORMALLY ARE INCLUDED IN HIS FIELD OF WORK. PARTICULAR CARE SHALL BE TAKEN
TO AVOID CREATING HAZARD OR CAUSING DISRUPTION IN ADJOINING AREAS. NOT ALL DEVICES TERMINATIONS, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIRING HAVE BEEN SHOWN. REFER TO PLUMBING CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR. EXISTING FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM SHALL BE KEPT OPERATIONAL DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD THE BUILDING UNDER RENOVATION MAY BE DISCONNECTED FROM SERVICE DURING THE HOURS THE CONTRACTOR IS WORKING, AT THE DISCRETION
OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, BUT MUST BE OKACED BACK ON LINE DURING OTHER PERIODS. APPROVAL TO BE IN WRITING. THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
WITHIN DEMOLITION AREA SHALL BE DEMOLISHED ALONG WITH ALL FEEDERS AND CONDUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL ITEMS SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED
AND REMOVED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALLBOXES, BACKBOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE REUSED AS DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR. ALL UNUSED CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED. DISCONNECT AND MAKE SAFE ANY
EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. MAINTAIN AND RESTORE, IF INTERRUPTED BY REMOVALS OR IN PATH OF NEW CONSTRUCTION,
ALL CIRCUITS, CONDUITS AND FEEDERS PASSING THROUGH AND SERVING UNDISTURBED AREAS (SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN). ALL EXISTING CONDUITS STUBBED THROUGH FLOOR SERVING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED AND NOT
SHOWN OR REQUIRED TO BE REUSED, SHALL BE CUT OFF FLUSH WITH SLAB LEVEL WITH CONCRETE. IN ANY AREA REQUIRING THE PERFORMANCE OF ANY TRADE'S WORK WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY
REMOVE AND STORE ANY OR ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS IN PATH OF WORK, REINSTALLING AND RECONNECTING SAME AS REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS AND/OR AS DIRECTED AFTER COMPLETION OF OTHER
TRADE'S WORK IN THAT AREA. DISCONNECT, MAKE SAFE AND REMOVE ALL TEMPORARY AND ABANDONED WIRE WITHIN THE SPACE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO DEVICES IN AREAS OF DEMOLITION SHALL BE DISCONNECTED,
MADE SAFE AND REMOVED COMPLETELY BACK TO THE PANELBOARD. THE CONTRATOR SHALL NOT ABANDON BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO ANY AREAS WICH ARE TO REMAIN BUT ARE AFFECTED BY THE DEMOLITION OR
NEW CONSTRUCTION. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE PANEL, FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE PRIOR TO THE START OF DEMOLITION, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS
AND MAINTAIN THOSE CIRCUITS THAT EXTEND OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK. AFTER RENOVATING EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THAT ALL REMAINING AND NEW EQUIPMENT WILL
OPERATE PROPERLY. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT DETECTORS IN AREAS WHERE SPRINKLERS ARE REMOVED FROM SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR. GENERAL DEMOLITION
NOTES:(APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE-RATED PENETRATIONS. UTILIZE REMOVABLE FIRESTOPPING
MATERIAL AT CABLE TRAY PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT FOR ALL NON RATED PENETRATIONS. ALL FIRE RATINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE
EXACT LOCATION OF ALL CONDUIT ROUTES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4" FOR POWER CIRCUITS UOI. PROVIDE NYLON
PULLSTRING IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS. FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THE ENTIRE LENS IS NOT LESS THAN 80 INCHES AND NOT GREATER THAN 96 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED
FLOOR. CIRCUITING TO DEVICES/EQUIPMENT SHALL BE 2-#12AWG & 1-#12EG (MULTIPLE HOME RUNS IN SAME CONDUIT MAY SHARE SAME EQUIPMENT GROUND) FOR EACH 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
ALL CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE SEPARATE NEUTRALS (CIRCUITS SHALL NOT SHARE NEUTRALS). PROVIDE CONDUIT/WIRING (CIRCUITING) AND REQUIRED EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES/EQUIPMENT. CONNECT
TO CIRCUIT(S) AS INDICATED. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REFERENCE STANDARD EDITION OF NFPA CODES, AS CITED BY THE FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE, BUILDING CODE
OF NEW YORK STATE AND CORNELL UNIVERSITY DESIGN STANDARDS. ALL CONDUITS AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE AS TIGHT TO DECK AS POSSIBLE. PROVIDE PULLBOX FOR EVERY 180 DEGREE OF BENDS FOR TEL/DATA
AND 360 DEGREES OF BENDS FOR POWER CONDUITS. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES (RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM, ETC.) SHALL BE ALIGNED HORIZONTALLY AND VERTICALLY. CONTRACTOR TO SCHEDULE AND
COORDINATE PROJJECT WALKTHROUGH WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY DEVICE ROUGH-IN FOR FINALIZATION OF ALIGNMENTS. ALL EXISTING DEVICES CIRCUITED TO PANELS BEING
RENAMED SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH UPDATED LABELS. PROVIDE ALL PATHWAYS AND BACK BOXES AS CALLED FOR ON AV DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY ANOTHER CONSULTANT. COORDINATE IT SERVICE CHANGES OR DISRUPTIONS
IN SERVICE WITH CIT OPERATIONS AT (607)255-5500. GENERAL NOTES: (APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. J. K. L. M. N. J. K. L. M. N. FCU FAN COIL UNIT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE
ALARM TERMINAL CABINET CONT. CONTACTOR F.A.T.C. F.A.C.P. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER DISTRIBUTION PANEL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GENERAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HEATING,
VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING F.A. FIRE ALARM H.V.A.C. G.C. E.C. BSMT. BASEMENT CLG. EA. CONTR. GEN. CEILING EACH GENERATOR A. AMPERE DN. EXIST. AUTO. DOWN EXISTING AUTOMATIC DP
EMERG. ELEC. G.F.C.I. ELECTRIC EMERGENCY HORSEPOWER GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL GND. GROUND GRS. ABBREV. ABBREVIATIONS C BKR. HP. CAMERA BREAKER DESCRIPTION FZ (3) FIRE ZONE (3) ABOVE FINISHED
FLOORA.F.F. EM. EMERGENCY CONTRACTOR A.F.G. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE EWC MOUNTED UNDER COUNTER HEIGHT TV TELEVISION WEATHERPROOF REFRIGERATOR SPECIFICATION MOUNTED OVER COUNTER HEIGHT PLUMBING
CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET T.B.B. MICRO T.T.C. MICROWAVE P.C. REFRIG. TYP. TYPICAL SPEC. P. SP. SPACE POLE NL NIGHT LIGHT V. VOLT SW. SWITCH MAIN CIRCUIT
BREAKER MAIN LUG ONLY P = POLE A = AMPERE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY LTG. U.L. 4 W. KW. LIGHTING KILOWATT WIRE M.L.O. 3P.15A. PH. M.C.B. PHASE PNL. PANEL PV POWER VENTILATOR WP OC UC
UV WG VP EF EHP CUH UNIT VENTILATOR WIRE GUARD FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER EXHAUST FAN CABINET UNIT HEATER VANDAL PROOF POLYCARBONATE GUARD ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV. DESCRIPTION WAP WIRELESS
ACCESS POINT O. UH UNIT HEATER P. O. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway,
Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065
518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell
University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST E-000 T GB CP B AD CE FBFB FB
FB FB FB F F F F F F F F F F J DH DH G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 571 Room 572 Room
574 Room 576 Room 578 STAIR# 3 50003 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 STAIR# 2
50002 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room 508 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 516
Room 518 Room 520 Room 517 Room 519 Room 521 Room 521A Room 523 CORRIDOR 50044 (E)LP-5(1) (E)LP-5(2) (E)UP-5A (E)UP-5B (E)DP-5AC1 (E)DP-CC1 (E)UP-5E (E) DATA RACKS (E) (E) T T T (E)
(E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) VAV 2 3 E-202 GENERAL NOTES: A. EXISTING CABLE TRAY IN LABORATORY MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED DEPENDING ON EXISTING
HEIGHT. CABLE TRAY SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN 9'-0" & 9'6". THIS SHALL BE ASSESSED IN FIELD BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT IF CAN BE RELOCATED OR PROVIDE NEW. B. ANY EXISTING CABLE
TRAY NOT SHOWN IN LABORATORY SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130
F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers
Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes:
Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN POWER & SPECIAL
SYSTEMS DEMOLITION E-100 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION E-100 DEMOLITION NOTES 1 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL, FIRE ALARM,
AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEVICES IN THIS AREA. ALL DEVICES MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON PLANS. ALL CIRCUITS IN THESE SPACES SHALL BE DEMOLISHED BACK TO SOURCE AND BE PREPARED TO BE REUSED IN THE
NEW PHASE OF THIS PROJECT. 2 REMOVE AND SALVAGE DOOR HOLDS FOR REUSE IN PROJECT. SALVAGE WIRE FOR REUSE IN NEW WORK PHASE. 3 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING CABLING UNDERNEATH RAISED
FLOOR IN THIS ROOM. . G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X LOUNGE 568 DATA CLOSET 552 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 571 Room 572 Room
574 Room 576 Room 578 STAIR# 3 50003 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 STAIR# 2
50002 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 500 Room 502 Room 504 Room 504A Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 MEN 50022 Room 50076 Room 508 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 516
Room 518 Room 520 Room 517 Room 519 Room 521 Room 521A Room 523 CORRIDOR 50044 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) E-101 GENERAL NOTES: A. DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING LIGHTING BACK TO SOURCE OR NEAREST EXISTING TO REMAIN JUNCTION BOX. SALVAGE CIRCUIT FOR REUSE AND EXTENSION. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347
West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley
Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point
4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN LIGHTING DEMOLITION E-101 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CRCRCRCR CR CR
CR CR CRCRCRCR CRCR CRCR J J J J J M M G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR
588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room
50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room
516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E)LP-5(1) (E)LP-5(2) (E)DP-5AC1 (E)DP-CC1 (E)UP-5A (E)UP-5B (E)UP-5E
T T T (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 (E) GFI OC GFI 1 351 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 28 5 50 47 6 7 8 910 11 12 35 12 12 39 14 16 17 15 30 18 19 32 34 20 21 36 38 22 23 40 42 24 25 44 46 27 26 48
VAV VAV 29 29 GFI12 2 T UP-5LAB NTX-45-5 GFI GFI 5 5 3133 41 43 45 49 54 3 37 41 45 47 67 54 51 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 (E) VAV 55 57 5 5 12 OC GFI 69 67 65 63 71 71 OC GFI OC GFI DOOR OPERATOR
DOOR OPERATOR 6 6 UP-5LAB 66 UP-5LAB 66 13 53 E-200 GENERAL NOTES: A. ALL CIRCUITING SHOWN IN THIS LAB SPACE SHALL BE FED FROM PANEL UP-5LAB. B. CORD REEL SHALL BE FED FROM A JUNCTION
BOX BY 15' OF SO CABLE. POWER CONNECTION TO JUNCTION BOX SHALL BE FED BY EMT FROM SOURCE PANEL. C. ALL GFI RECEPTACLES NEAR SINKS SHALL BE GASKETED GFI RATED FOR WASHDOWN APPLICATIONS.
D. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH END USER FOR CEILING HOOK LOCATIONS TO MOUNT CORD REEL. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE KINDORF WITH RACK FOR CORD REEL PERMANENT LOCATION WHEN NOT IN
USE ABOVE CEILING. THIS LOCATION SHALL BE COORDINATED IN FIELD AROUND OTHER CONTRACTORS SCOPE AND BE COORDINATED WITH END USER AND ARCHITECT SO THAT IT IS IN AN EASILY ACCESSIBLE LOCATION.
F. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT VAV AS NECESSARY. CONFIRM WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR FOR EXACT LOCATIONS. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New
York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590
T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York
14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020
PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN POWER NEW WORK E-200 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - POWER NEW WORK E-200 DRAWING NOTES 1 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED UNDERCOUNTER ON A
DEDICATED CIRCUIT TO SERVE THE DRAIN PUMP THAT WILL BE INSTALLED UNDERNEATH SINK. 2 RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED IN ABOVE COUNTER CABINETS THAT WILL FEED UNDERCABINET LIGHTING. RECEPTACLE
SHALL BE TIED INTO RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT #12. 3 WIREMOLD THAT SHALL FEED THESE (2) RECEPTACLES SHALL RUN ALONG WALL INTO AND BEHIND THE CABINET. RECEPTACLES SHALL BE FLUSH MOUNTED TO SIDE
OF CABINET. 4 RECEPTACLES SHALL BE FED FROM 2 CHANNEL ANODIZED CLEAR FINISH WIREMOLD. RECEPTACLES SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 36" AFF. 5 JUNCTION BOX SHALL FEED (3) LAB VALVE BOXES. 20A-1P
CIRCUIT SHALL FEED THEM, CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED. FINAL JUNCTION BOX LOCATION SHALL BE DETERMINED IN FIELD. FIELD COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 6 PROVIDE WIRING IN 3/4"
CONDUIT PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 3 a,b,c D 3 a,b D 4 c,d D OS OS OSOS OS OS OS OS OS OS OS OS OS OS DS DS DS DS M M OS G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13
14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room
572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR
50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503
Room 502 Room 504 A2 A1 A1A1A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1A1A1A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1A1A1A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1A1A1A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A6A6 A1A1 A1A1 A1 A1 A1 A2A1 A2A1 A1A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E)
(E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) aaa a a aaaa a a b b b b bb c c c c cc c c c c ccc d d d dd d d d X1 X1 X1 X1EM EM EM EM EM A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 X1 X1 X1 EM/NL
EM/NL EM/NL EM/NL EM/NL EM/NL EM/NL EM/NL (E)UP-5E (E)LP-5(1) (E)LP-5(2) (E)UP-5A (E)UP-5B (E)DP-5AC1 (E)DP-CC1 (E) (E) (E) A5 A4 a b c d X1 X1 X1 DAYLIGHT SENSOR ZONE a DAYLIGHT SENSOR
ZONE b DAYLIGHT SENSOR ZONE c DAYLIGHT SENSOR ZONE d UP-5LAB A7 A7 d d a a b c d E-201 GENERAL NOTES: A. CONNECT ALL NEW EXIT SIGNS IN EXISTING EXIT SIGN CIRCUITS. REWORK AND EXTEND
CIRCUITING AS REQUIRED. CONNECT ALL NEW LIGHTING IN EXISTING CIRCUITS MADE SPARE DURING DEMOLITION. REWORK AND EXTEND CIRCUITING AS REQUIRED. B. ALL EM/NL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL HAVE
UL924 RELAY INSTALLED TO CONTROL THE LIFE SAFETY LIGHTING. C. ALL LIGHT FIXTURE STEM MOUNTING SHALL BE FIELD COORDINATED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MAY HAVE TO CROSS-BRACE FIXTURES AROUND
DUCT WORK AND OTHER UTILITIES. D. OCCUPANCY SENSOR IN LOUNGE SHALL CONTROL THE VAV SYSTEM. REFER TO ARCHITECT AND OWNER IF THEY SHALL ALSO LIKE IT TIED INTO THE EXISTING LIGHTS. Revisions:
Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069
T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020
Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN LIGHTING NEW WORK E-201 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING NEW
WORK T GB CP ABCDE WAP WAP WAP CR CRCR DC DC DC G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594 STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC.
DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room 50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063
Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room 521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518
Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E) (E) (E) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 E-202 GENERAL NOTES: A. TIE CARD READER
INTO NEAREST EXISTING RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. B. NEW CABLE TRAY SHALL BE 12" WIDE. C. PROVIDE (3)20A-1P CIRCUIT FOR DOOR HARDWARE CONTROLS FROM PANEL UP-5LAB. D. EXISTING CABLE TRAY IN
LABORATORY MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED DEPENDING ON EXISTING HEIGHT. CABLE TRAY SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN 9'-0" & 9'6". Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard
Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588
South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN SPECIAL SYSTEMS NEW WORK E-202 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL 5TH FLOOR PLAN - SPECIAL SYSTEMS E-202 DRAWING NOTES 1 THE 2 CHANNEL
WIREMOLD SHALL HAVE 6 DATA PORTS ABOVE THE RECEPTACLES. 2 (1) TELEPHONE CONNECTION FOR AN EMERGENCY PHONE. REFER TO ARCHITECT DRAWINGS FOR FINAL EM PHONE LOCATION. S S S S S S S F F
F F F F F S DH DH F S S S S S SD SD DSD DSD RTS RTS SD SD DSD DSD RTS RTS G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11 10 9 8 12 13 14 X Room 571 GRAD. STUDENTS 596 GRAD. STUDENTS 594
STAFF 592 STAFF 590 ASSOC. DIRECTOR 588 LIBRARY 586 CLERICAL 584 DIRECTOR 582 GRAD. STUDENTS 580 Room 578 Room 576 Room 574 Room 572 LABORATORY 551 STAIR# 3 50003 LABORATORY 551 Room
50073 WOMEN 50021 Room 50063 Room 50062 Room 50061 DATA CLOSET 552 LOUNGE 568 ELEC. CLOSET 50075 MEN 50022 Room 50076 CORRIDOR 50044 CORRIDOR 50044 Room 523 Room 521A Room 520 Room
521 Room 519 Room 517 Room 518 Room 516 Room 512 Room 514 Room 514B Room 504A Room 508 STAIR# 2 50002 Room 500 SHOP 501 Room 503 Room 502 Room 504 (E) 1 UP-5LAB 62 UP-5LAB 62 UP-5LAB
64 UP-5LAB 64 E-203 GENERAL NOTES: A. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT DETECTORS IN AREAS WHERE SPRINKLERS ARE REMOVED FROM SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR.
B. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY WITH FA DISTRIBUTER THAT INITIATING ZONES AND NOTIFICATION ZONES HAVE ENOUGH CAPACITY TO ADD THE PROPOSED SMOKE AND NOTIFICATION DEVICES. C. PROVIDE 20A/1P
CIRCUIT THAT SHALL FEED SMOKE DAMPERS. D. ALL FIRE ALARM SPEAKERS AND STROBES SHALL BE IN SYNC. E. ALL SMOKE DETECTORS WITHIN THE CORRIDORS SHALL BE ADDED TO ZONE 65 WHICH IS "SMOKE
DETECTORS CORRIDOR SMOKE DOORS". F. FOR THE SMOKE DETECTORS IN RM 551, THESE SHALL BE ADDED TO ZONE 66 WHICH IS "SMOKE DETECTOR ROOM 586". THE DIRECTORY SHALL BE UPDATED TO SHOW ZONE
66 AS ROOM 586 AND 551. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite
G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506
T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca,
NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM NEW WORK E-203 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PARTIAL 5TH
FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM E-203 DRAWING NOTES 1 DOOR HOLD OPEN SHALL BE TIED INTO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL REUSE EXISTING DOOR HOLDERS AT THIS LOCATION THAT WERE REMOVED
IN DEMOLITION PHASE. M M M M M ASD ASD SD SD DSD DSD RTS RTS 80064 80061809 807 801 801A 803 803A 805 80046 80047 802 811 80062 804 80060 G F8 F E D C B A 1 2 4 5 6 7 G5 H5 X1 K 11
10 9 8 12 13 14 X (E)UP-P (E)LP-P (E)EUP-P(1) (E)ELP-P (E)EUP-P(2) T UP-P2 NEW 30 CKT 60A PANEL P-18 P-19 ACS-8 P-20 P-21 P-20 ACS-8 1 NTX-15-P 2 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300
Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506
Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation
As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 PENTHOUSE ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK E-204 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 PENTHOUSE - ELECTRICAL NEW WORK E-204 DRAWING NOTES 1 RECEPTACLE SHALL BE FED FROM
PANEL UP-P2 NEXT AVAILABLE 20A/1P CIRCUIT. RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED ON UNIT OR CLOSE ENOUGH THAT PUMP CAN BE CONNECTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE FINAL LOCATION IN FIELD. 2 SMOKE
DAMPER SHALL BE FED FROM PANEL UP-P2 NEXT AVAILABLE 20A/1P CIRCUIT PANEL NUMBER BRANCH BREAKER NUMBER 4LN3B-17 DYMO LABEL, VERIFY COLOR WITH OWNER, ADHERE TO COVERPLATE USING CONTACT
CEMENT. FACTORY ADHESIVE WILL NOT BE SUFFICIENT. ACTUAL CIRCUIT INFORMATION SHALL BE AS INSTALLED AND NOT NECESSARILY THE SAME CIRCUIT NUMBER AS SHOWH ON THE PLANS. GROUNDING PIN ON
TOP OR TO LEFT OF OUTLET ON HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLES 4LN3B-17 PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. CONNECT TO GROUND BUS IN PANEL. DO NOT INSTALL RECEPTACLES,
COMPUTER OR TELEPHONE OUTLETS BACK TO BACK. INSTALL IN ADJACENT STUD CAVITIES, TO REDUCE SOUND TRANSMISSION. TYPICAL DETAIL NOTES: A. B. EQUIPMENT: "INSERT DESIGNATION" POWER SOURCE:
"INSERT SOURCE" TYPE SUPPLY: INSERT-NORMAL, OR CRITICAL OPERATION POWER, OR OPTIONAL STANDBY, OR LEGALLY REQUIRED, OR LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY AS APPLICABLE" VOLTAGE: "INSERT APPLICABLE
VOLTAGE-208/120V OR 480/277V, ETC." CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: PHASE A - "BLACK OR BROWN" PHASE B - "RED OR ORANGE" PHASE C - "BLUE OR YELLOW" NEUTRAL - "WHITE OR GRAY" GROUND - GREEN
AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: "INSERT AMPS RMS" PROVIDE CUSTOM NAMEPLATE AS INDICATED FOR ALL PANELBOARDS, MCC'S, SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, TRANSFER SWITCHES, GENERATORS ETC. NAMEPLATE
SHALL BE ENGRAVED (WHITE LETTERING, BLACK BACKGROUND) AND ATTACHED TO THE EQUIPMENT WITH SCREWS. LETTERING SHALL BE 1/4" HIGH WITH SPACE BETWEEN LINES 1/8" MINIMUM. MINIMUM SHALL
BE 8"H x 8"W. PROVIDE SAMPLE NAMEPLATE FOR REVIEW. THE AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE PROVIDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. 2. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 3. 4. LOAD CEILING SENSOR 120/277V SWITCH
DETAIL NOTES: PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SENSORS AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURERS. PROVIDE INDICATED SWITCHING. CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24 VDC SWITCH PACK NEUTRAL
LINE 2 1 2 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ROOM UNOCCUPIED: LIGHTING TO BE OFF AFTER TIME DELAY FROM LAST MOTION SENSING. ROOM OCCUPIED: UPON SENSING OF MOTION IN THE SPACE, THE SENSOR SHALL
ENABLE THE SWITCH PACK TO ENERGIZE THE LIGHTING (LOAD). LIGHTING SHALL REMAIN ENERGIZED UNTIL MOTION IS NOT SENSED (INITIATE TIME DELAY, SET FOR 30 MINUTES). 1. 2. POWER PANEL (SUPPLY)
CONTROL TRANSFORMER HC MOTOR CONNECTION (EQUIPMENT) COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH (CONTROL UNIT) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WIRING CONTROL WIRING PROVIDED UNDER MECHANICAL WORK
OL OL OL HC H O A OL POWER WIRING AND CONNECTIONS PROVIDED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. MOTOR STARTER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK CONTROL DEVICES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. DISCONNECT SWITCH PROVIDED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. BOND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR TO ENCLOSURE. BOND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR TO MOTOR FRAME. LOCAL DISCONNECT
SWITCH (WHERE INDICATED) 3 4 5 111 M DETAIL NOTES: 2 1 3 4 5 6 3/4" BOLT THRU WALL (TYP) 4" X 1/2" FLAT STOCK (TYP)ANGLE BRACE (TYP) ALL CHANNEL FRAME PLATFORM TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW WELD
ENTIRE ASSEMBLY TO MATCH TRANSFORMER BASE. PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATORS BETWEEN TRANSFORMER BASE AND SUPPORT. MAXIMUM 30 KVA SIZE TRANSFORMER. DETAIL NOTES: A. B. C. 20' CORD REEL #12/3
CORD WIRE MESH CORD GRIP, HUBBELL 074010 TYPE UTILITY BOX AND COVER. HARDWIRED CONNECTION TO CORD REEL. 15' SO CABLE PROVIDE CHANNEL OR ANGLE SUPPORT STEEL MOUNTED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE
BOX WITH 20A DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE LOCATED 8'-0" FROM FLOOR HARD MOUNTED. REFER TO OWNER/ARCH FOR FINAL REEL LOCATION. DETAIL NOTES: ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITE CABLE ROUTED
TO LOCAL DATA ROOM VIA CABLE TRAY SYSTEM. 8"x8"x4" ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SYSTEM ON SECURE SIDE OF DOOR. LEAVE 20FT. OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
COMPOSITE CABLE COILED AT BOX LOCATION FOR CONNECTION TO DOOR DEVICES. NOT USED. 3/4" RACEWAY FROM JUNCTION BOX TO DOOR FRAME FOR DOOR CONTACT, REQUEST-TO-EXIT DEVICE WIRING. DOOR CONTACT.
ELECTRIC LATCH, LOCKING HARDWARE. 3/4" RACEWAY FROM JUNCTION BOX TO CARD READER. CARD READER - MOUNTED ON DOOR SILE. 120 VOLT POWER SOURCE FROM LOCAL EMERGENCY POWER PANELBOARD. ACCESS
CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITE CABLE SHALL BE: PAIGE ELECTRONIC WIRE AND CABLE #454932AYW OR APPROVED EQUAL. 1 11 10 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DETAIL NOTES: ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
COMPOSITE CABLE ROUTED TO LOCAL DATA ROOM VIA CABLE TRAY SYSTEM. 8"x8"x4" ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SYSTEM ON SECURE SIDE OF DOOR. LEAVE 20FT.
OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITE CABLE COILED AT BOX LOCATION FOR CONNECTION TO DOOR DEVICES. NOT USED. 3/4" RACEWAY FROM JUNCTION BOX TO DOOR FRAME FOR DOOR CONTACT, REQUEST-TO-EXIT
DEVICE WIRING. DOOR CONTACT. ELECTRIC LATCH, LOCKING HARDWARE. ELECTRIC STRIKES SHALL AND NOT PART OF THE HARDWARE. 3/4" RACEWAY FROM JUNCTION BOX TO CARD READER. CARD READER - MOUNTED
ON DOOR SILE. 120 VOLT POWER SOURCE FROM LOCAL EMERGENCY POWER PANELBOARD. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITE CABLE SHALL BE: PAIGE ELECTRONIC WIRE AND CABLE #454932AYW OR APPROVED EQUAL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 10 1 11 2 8 9 4 5 6 7 Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303
South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton
Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point 4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes
Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-400 NTS 1 TYPICAL RECEPTACLE
IDENTIFICATION NTS 2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DETAIL NTS 3 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR NTS 4 TYPICAL THREE PHASE MOTOR CONNECTIION NTS 5 TRANSFORMER MOUNTING DETAIL - WALL MOUNTED NTS
6 CORD REEL DETAIL 1/8" = 1'-0" 7 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING - SINGLE DOOR - TYPICAL DETAIL 1/8" = 1'-0" 8 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING - DOUBLE DOOR - TYPICAL DETAIL EXISTING PANEL
LP-P SHALL HAVE 30A-3P BREAKER INSTALLED THAT WILL FEED NEW PANEL UP-P2. A 15KVA WALL MOUNTED TRANSFORMER SHALL BE INSTALLED. SEE DRAWING E-202 FOR LOCATIONS. DETAIL NOTES: A. UP-P2
60A 208/120V MCB (E)LP-P 100A 480/277V MCB 30A 15kVA 60A B1 D EXISTING INCOMING BOTH 30A & 60A BREAKERS, TRANSFORMER, PANEL UP-P2, AND ALL ASSOCIATED WIRING IS NEW. REFER TO DRAWING
E-204 FOR TRANSFORMER AND PANEL LOCATION. B. NTX-15-P REFERENCE NOTES: 1. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT FOR FIXTURE COLOR. 2. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR EXACT
CEILING TYPES FOR MOUNTING TYPE AND TRIM REQUIRED. EXISTING PANEL DP-CC51 SHALL HAVE 70A-3P BREAKER INSTALLED THAT WILL FEED NEW PANEL UP-5LAB. A 45KVA FLOOR MOUNTED TRANSFORMER SHALL
BE INSTALLED. SEE DRAWING E-200 FOR LOCATIONS. DETAIL NOTES: A. UP-5LAB 175A 208/120V MCB (E)DP-CC51 400A 480/277V MLO 70A 45kVA 175A E1 I EXISTING INCOMING BOTH 70A & 175A BREAKERS,
TRANSFORMER, PANEL UP-5LAB, AND ALL ASSOCIATED WIRING IS NEW. REFER TO DRAWING E-200 FOR TRANSFORMER AND PANEL LOCATION. B. NTX-45-5 C. Revisions: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347
West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 212-245-5195 T 212-239-7130 F Jacobs 303 South Broadway, Suite G20 Tarrytown NY 10591 914-841-1069 T M/E Engineering, P.C. 300 Trolley
Boulevard Rochester, NY 14606 585-288-5590 T Ryan Biggs Clark Davis 257 Ushers Rd Clifton Park, NY 12065 518-406-5506 T Delta 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 12065 518-406-5506 Trophy Point
4588 South Park Avenue Blasdell, New York 14219 716-823-0006 T Key Plan: Notes: Rhodes Hall Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 December 15, 2020 Scale: Fifth Floor Renovation As Indicated
Issue for Bid December 15, 2020 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E-500 NTS 1 ONE LINE DIAGRAM - POWER PENTHOUSE 3. IF IDENTIFICATION ON ONE-LINE DIAGRAM SHOWS CONDUCTORS WELL ABOVE OVER-CURRENT
PROTECTION, VOLTAGE DROP HAS BEEN ACCOUNTED FOR. 2. WHERE MULTIPLE SETS ARE SPECIFIED, PROVIDE THREE (3) PHASE, NEAUTRAL AND GROUND IN EACH CONDUCTOR. CONDUCTORS AND CONDUITS SHALL
BE EQUAL IN LENGTH AND OF SAME MANUFACTURER. 1. CONDUIT SZIES ARE BASED ON TYPE THHN, THWN, THWN-2 CONDUCTORS, AS SHOWN IN TABLE C1 IN NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE GENERAL NOTES 6000 16
500 (2) 500 CC 3 1/2" CC1 3 1/2" 5000 12 600 (2) 500 BB 3 1/2" BB1 3 1/2" 4000 10 600 500 AA 3 1/2" AA1 3 1/2" 3000 8 500 500 Z 3 1/2" Z1 3 1/2" 2500 6 600 350 Y 3 1/2" Y1 3 1/2" 2000
5 600 250 X 3 1/2" X1 3 1/2" 1600 4 600 4/0 W 3 1/2" W1 3 1/2" 1200 3 600 3/0 V 3 1/2" V1 3 1/2" 1000 2 500 2/0 U 3" U1 3" 800 2 500 1/0 T 3" T1 3" 700 2 500 1/0 S 3" S1 3" 600 2 350
1 R 3" R1 3" 500 2 250 2 Q 2 1/2" Q1 2 1/2" 450 2 4/0 2 P 2 1/2" P1 2 1/2" 400 1 500 2 O 3" O1 3" 350 1 500 2 N 3" N1 3" 300 1 350 4 M 3" M1 3" 250 1 250 4 L 2 1/2" L1 2 1/2" 225 1
4/0 4 K 2 1/2" K1 2 1/2" 200 1 30/ 6 J 2" J1 2" 175 1 2/0 6 I 2" I1 2" 150 1 1/0 6 H 2" H1 2" 110 1 1 6 G 1 1/2" G1 1 1/2" 100 1 2 8 F 1 1/4" F1 1 1/4" 70 1 4 10 E 1 1/4" E1 1 1/4"
60 1 6 10 D 1" D1 1" 40 1 8 10 C 3/4" C1 3/4" 30 1 10 10 B 3/4" B1 3/4" 20 1 12 12 A 3/4" A1 3/4" PHASE & NEUT GROUND IDENTIFIER CONDUIT SIZE IDENTIFIER CONDUIT SIZE OVERCURRENT DEVICE
RATING # SETS WIRE SIZE (PER SET) 4 WIRE FEEDERS WITH GROUNDING CONDUCTOR 3 WIRE FEEDERS WITH GROUNDING CONDUCTOR CONDUIT AND COPPER CABLE SCHEDULE NTS 2 ONE LINE DIAGRAM - POWER 5TH
LAB Notes: Total Est. Demand: 53 A Total Conn.: 65 A Spare 2500 VA 100.00% 2500 VA Total Est. Demand: 18950 VA Receptacle 18900 VA 76.46% 14450 VA Total Conn. Load: 23400 VA Power 2000
VA 100.00% 2000 VA Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals Legend: Total Amps: 56 A 68 A 74 A Total Load: 6720 VA 7980 VA 8700 VA 83 84 81 82
79 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 80 77 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 78 75 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 76 73 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 74 71 Receptacle
20 A 1 720 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 72 69 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 70 67 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 68 65 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Bathroom
Door Power 66 63 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Duct Smoke Connection 64 61 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Duct Smoke Connection 62 59 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Door
Hardware Controls 60 57 Lab Valve Boxes 20 A 1 500 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Door Hardware Controls 58 55 Lab Valve Boxes 20 A 1 500 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Door Hardware Controls 56 53 Receptacle
20 A 1 360 VA 540 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 54 51 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 52 49 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 360 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 50 47 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 180 VA
1 20 A Receptacle 48 45 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 46 43 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 44 41 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle
42 39 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 40 37 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 38 35 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 36 33 Receptacle
20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 34 31 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 32 29 VAV 20 A 1 1000... 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 30 27 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 360 VA
1 20 A Receptacle 28 25 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 26 23 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 24 21 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle
22 19 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 20 17 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 18 15 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 16 13 Receptacle
20 A 1 360 VA 180 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 14 11 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 1080... 1 20 A Receptacle 12 9 Receptacle 20 A 1 360 VA 360 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 10 7 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA
360 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 8 5 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 540 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 6 3 Receptacle 20 A 1 900 VA 540 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 4 1 Receptacle 20 A 1 180 VA 360 VA 1 20 A Receptacle
2 CKT Circuit Description Trip Poles A B C A B C Poles Trip Circuit Description CKT Notes: Enclosure: Type 1 MCB Rating: 175 A Mounting: Surface Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 225 A Supply
From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: MCB Location: Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 22K Branch Panel: UP-5LAB ELEC CLOSET 50075 P-21 PUMP PENTHOUSE 1/2 1 208 5.4 UP-P2 15/2 2#12 1#12 3/4"C
2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU P-21 P-20 PUMP PENTHOUSE 3 3 208 10.6 UP-P2 30/3 3#12 1#12 EG 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 EG 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU P-20 P-19 PUMP PENTHOUSE 1/2 1 208 5.4 UP-P2 15/2
2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU P-19 P-18 PUMP PENTHOUSE 1/2 1 208 5.4 UP-P2 15/2 2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU P-18 ACS-8 AIR HANDLING UNIT PENTHOUSE
7 1/2 3 480 11.0 ELP-P 30/3 3#12 1#12 3/4"C 3#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU ACS-8 PHASE GROUND CONDUIT PHASE GROUND CONDUIT SWITCH AMPS FUSE SIZE LOC. WEATHER PROOF REF. NOTES ITEM ID
NAME ROOM LOCATION HP KW PHASE SYSTEM VOLTS MCA or SYSTEM AMPS PANEL or CONTROL CENTER CIRCUIT BREAKER or "FU" FOR FUSE POWER WIRING FROM PANEL TO CONTROL UNIT POWER WIRING FROM CONTROL
UNIT TO EQUIPMENT NEMA SIZE STARTER NEMA TYPE MANUAL MOTOR STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER
COMBINATION STARTER MP/FUSE (F) SIZE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH BYPASS ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH REDUNDANT ASD PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT FURNISHED BY OTHERS DUPLEX
PUMP CONTROLLER BY OTHERS FIRE ALARM FAN SHUTDOWN REQUIRED SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION RETURN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION EXHAUST DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
W/ REMOTE TEST STATION THERMOSTAT CONNECTION AQUASTAT CONNECTION MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION START/STOP PUSHBUTTONS HAND/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL DEVICE LOCATION SAFETY SWITCH
ITEM ID EQUIPMENT POWER SOURCE, PROTECTION & WIRING CONTROL DEVICES AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS BY ITEM DESIGNATION G. "IU" INDICATES INTEGRAL WITH UNIT. F. "NF" INDICATES NON-FUSED. E. "AU"
INDICATES CONTROL DEVICES IS LOCATED AT THE UNIT. D. PROVIDE OVERLOADS, SIZE AS REQUIRED, BY THE DIVISION 22/23 CONTRACTOR. C. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED. B. ITEM NUMBER INDICATES EQUIPMENT NUMBER A. ALL DEVICES PROVIDED BY THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: X1 EXIT SIGN
SIMKAR SLEDARW LED 120/277V 1 A7 2' LINEAR FLUSH MOUNTED FIXTURE COOPER: 2-FSN6-750-L9SCT3 LED 120/277V 1,2 A6 8' LINEAR FLUSH MOUNTED FIXTURE COOPER: 8-FSN6-750-L9SCT3 LED 120/277V
1,2 A5 4" RECESSED DOWNLIGHT GOTHAM LIGHITNG MODEL: EVO4-35-15-4AR-WD-LSS-MVOLT-TRW-CRI90 LED 120/277V 1,2 A4 2'x2' RECESSED FIXTURE METALUX 22FP LED - 3500K LED 120/277V 1,2 A3 6'
LINEAR PENDANT NEO-RAY: S124DP-C795D-9-40-S4-6FO-1-U-DD-A-S LED 120/277V 1,2 A2 4' LINEAR PENDANT NEO-RAY: S124DP-C795D-9-40-S4-4FO-1-U-DD-A-S LED 120/277V 1,2 A1 8' LINEAR PENDANT
NEO-RAY: S124DP-C795D-9-40-S4-8FO-1-U-DD-A-S LED 120/277V 1,2 TYPE DESCRIPTION MFR. & CATALOG No. LAMP VOLTAGE/BALLAST REFERENCE NOTES LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE DP-CC51 1 30A 3 UP-P2 PENTHOUSE
X 208/120 3 4 60A. 10k X 1 1 25A 2 2 9 20A 1 3 3 15A 2 30 VOLT PHASE WIRE F S ACTIVE SPARE SPACE NAME ROOM LOCATION DIST. BRANCH CIR. MLO MCB MFS QUANTITY TRIP / FUSE SIZE-FU POLES
PANEL INFORMATION TYPE VOLTAGE RATING BUS RATING MAIN AMPERE RATING KAIC (RMS SYM) MOUNT BRANCH CIRCUIT DEVICES TOTAL NO. OF CIRCUITS NOTES PANELBOARD SCHEDULE
Specs_Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation (2).pdf
RHODES HALL 5th FLOOR RENOVATION Project Manual & Specifications December 15, 2020 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect Richard McElhiney Architects
LLC 347 West 36 Street, Suite 1501 New York, New York 10018 RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission
Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section
01 23 00 Alternates Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction
Schedule Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements
Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 35 45 Refrigerant Compliance Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section
01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01 45 33 Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary
Utilities Section 01 51 23 Heat During Construction Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section
01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning
Requirements RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02- EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Section
02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DIVISION 03- CONRETE Section 03 30 20 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS DIVISION 04- MASONRY Section 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05- METALS Section
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05 43 00 SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING DIVISION 06- WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES Section 06 20 00 CARPENTRY DIVISION 07- THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 81 00 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS Section 07 81 23 INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION Section 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION
08- OPENINGS Section 08 06 71 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Section 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS Section 08 41 23 STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT
Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Section 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD Section 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Section 09 65
13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Section 09 67 26 RESINOUS FLOORING Section 09 68 16 CARPETING Section 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT Section 09 84 14 ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT
Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 11 16 GLASS MARKERBOARDS Section 10 26 00 CORNER GUARDS Section 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 24 13 WINDOW SHADES Section 12 35 53 LABORATORY CASEWORK RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 DIVISION 21 - FIRE
SUPPRESSION Section 21 05 00 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS Section 21 05 53 FIRE PROTECTION IDENTIFICATION Section 21 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES Section 21 13 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 05 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Section 22 05 23 VALVES Section 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION Section
22 07 00 INSULATION Section 22 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES Section 22 10 30 PUMPS Section 22 30 10 EQUIPMENT Section 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM DIVISION 23 -
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 04 ELECTRIC WIRING Section 23 05 13 MOTORS Section 23 05 19 GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS
Section 23 05 23 VALVES Section 23 05 30 ROOF CURBS Section 23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 23 05 50 WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS Section 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Section 23 07 10 INSULATION Section 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES Section 23
09 31 CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW Section 23 20 10 PIPING SYSTEMS Section 23 21 10 WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES Section 23 21 23 PUMPS Section 23 31 00 SHEET METAL & DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION Section 23 33 13 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS Section 23 36 00 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS Section 23 37 13 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS Section 23 37 23.16 PENTHOUSES
Section 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS Section 23 57 00 HEAT EXCHANGERS Section 23 75 13 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) Section 23 8216.11 COILS Section 23 82 35 GRAVITY HEATING EQUIPMENT (HYDRONIC)
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING Section 26 20 00 ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
Section 26 50 00 LIGHTING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 21 00 LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM DIVISION 28 -
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 15 00 INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES Section 28 31 03 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM DRAWINGS TITLE T-001
COVER SHEET T-002 SYMBOLS, NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS T-003 ACCESSIBILITY NOTES & DETAILS T-004 AREA OF WORK & CODE INFORMATION ABATEMENT AR-101 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PLAN ARCHITECTURAL
DA-101 FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION DA-111 FIFTH FLOOR CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN A-101 FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-101A FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - ALTERNATES A-102 SIXTH, SEVENTH AND EIGHTH FLOOR PLANS
A-111 FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-111A FIFTH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - ACCOUSTIC TREATMENT A-121 POWER & COMMUNICATIONS - FIFTH FLOOR PLAN A-131 FIFTH FLOOR - FLOOR
FINISH PLAN A-141 FURNITURE & EQUIPTMENT PLAN - FIFTH FLOOR A-301 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-302 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-410 BUILDING SECTIONS A-501 DETAILS I A-502 DETAILS II
A-503 DETAILS III A-541 MILLWORK DETAILS A-542 MILLWORK DETAILS A-601 DOOR AND GLAZING SCHEDULE A-602 DOOR AND GLAZING DETAILS A-603 FINISH SCHEDULE & PARTITION TYPES A-700
INTERIOR 3D VIEWS STRUCTURAL S-001 DESIGN DATA AND GENERAL NOTES S-100 PARTIAL FRAMING PLAN RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 5 MECHANICAL H-000
GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST - HVAC H-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - DUCTWORK DEMOLITION H-101 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PIPING DEMOLITION H-200 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH
FLOOR PLANS - DUCT H-201 PARTIAL FIFTH, SIXTH & SEVENTH FLOOR PLANS - PIPING H-300 PARTIAL PENTHOUSE PLAN - HVAC H-400 PIPING SCHEMATICS - HVAC H-500 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM
SUMMARIES H-501 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM SUMMARIES H-502 CONTROL SCHEMATICS & SYSTEM SUMMARIES H-600 DETAILS - HVAC H-700 AIR HANDLING UNIT DIMENSIONS & DETAILS - HVAC H-800
SCHEDULES - HVAC FIRE PROTECTION FP-000 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST AND DETAILS - FP FP-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - FP FP-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - FIRE PROTECTION
PLUMBING P-000 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST, AND SCHEDULES - PLUMBING P-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - PLUMBING P-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING P-201 PENTHOUSE
PLAN – PLUMBING ELECTRICAL E-000 GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS LIST E-100 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION E-101 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION
E-200 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN – POWER NEW WORK E-201 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN – LIGHTING NEW WORK E-202 PARTIAL FIFTH FLOOR PLAN - SPECIAL SYSTEMS NEW WORK E-203 PARTIAL FIFTH
FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM NEW WORK E-204 PENTHOUSE ELECTRICAL - NEW WORK E-400 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-500 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West
36 Street, Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2)
Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5)
Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. • Pre-Bid Conference video and other materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/57ag0cw6eyx94wrm
otrn4d9cys8wcd8z Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current
set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents
Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell
University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use. b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit,
display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together
"Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove
or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. Rev. 9-2016
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service
marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document
Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission
of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of
Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character
of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A PreBid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to
ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant
to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are
furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other
sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each
Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that
the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with
the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance.
3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall
at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be
responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of
the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has
been scheduled for 9:00am on January 12, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/96190688681?pwd=cy8wQUhHWHNRZWVxSEJrZX JWczlvZz09 In person, on site Pre-Bid walkthroughs
will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed
to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in
an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step
1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders
5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the
Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in
the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations,
or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole
and reasonable discretion. d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such
Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that
the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below. 6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell
University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner,
Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors
and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits
in their proposals or quotations. 9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished
by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each
portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to
himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier
shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly
with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions
of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing
is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract,
to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which
prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested,
a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom
Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work
in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation
for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation
of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS
a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction
set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response
Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is
accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference.
13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the
eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection
therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid
Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional
Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 2:00PM, on January 28, 2021. d. Bid
Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 15. BID OPENING
a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.co
rnell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction
to Bidders or amendments thereto. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor
for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder
submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed
principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract
award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and
in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit
or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty
(60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder
shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the
total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS
PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each
in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders
Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Upon discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work or
the Project has been deemed essential, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder further agrees to achieve substantial completion within
the established Project Duration Schedule. 1. Work shall be completed by August 13, 2021. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7 2. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site
construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may
commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule
and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS
a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS
BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors
(3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart)
(5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1 RHODES HALL 5th FLOOR RENOVATION Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION
FORM Vendor Name: Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable Street Address, City, State, Zip Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions
of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated December 15, 2020, prepared
by Richard McElhiney Architects LLC, 347 West 36 Street, Suite 1501, New York, New York 10018, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material,
equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with
the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business
Enterprises (M/WBEs) a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good
faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows: • A goal of 2.3% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum
of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. • A goal of 2.4% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall
be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. 3. Milestone Dates a. Upon project being
deemed essential or discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work, construction activities
on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration. i. Work shall be completed by August
13, 2021. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2 b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor
shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established. c. Following are additional Milestone Dates: d. The undersigned agrees, if awarded
the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades
and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements,
Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder
Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list
of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor
may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right
to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond
in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment
Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor
and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered
into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3 d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been
entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to
the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if
any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions
a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications,
with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form
– Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted.
d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason
of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9.
Unit Price Schedule a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner
and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which
prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or
omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be
computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal
Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4 10. Acceptance a. The undersigned
agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information
Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the
Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt
of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable).
ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly
reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal,
Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended
and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based
upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. e. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (as applicable):
f. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the sole discretion of the Owner,
is qualified to perform the Work. g. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site.
h. Alternates: 1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with
the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division
1 of the Specifications. Addendum No. __ dated ____. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5 2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate
Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and
Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
Bid Proposal Certification Form (this Form) signed and executed Project Duration Schedule Bid Bond Proposed Project Team Resumes (Bidder) By: Title: Business
Address: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder
certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices
in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to
such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly,
by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to
induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________
of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then __________________
_____________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and executed for and
on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated: Rev 12.2018 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 12.2018 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's
Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor
3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract
Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14
Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection
of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02
Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE
6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01
Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE
10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04
Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section
10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party
Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section
12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions
Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE
14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27
Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative
28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE
Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND
PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name
31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 12.2018 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request
Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action
Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University".
B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether
furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work
of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract
relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation
to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between
the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines,
and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation
of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall
be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are
entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans,
shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto.
When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's
Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply
with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction
of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union
labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay
for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among
members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make
all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is
affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner
or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials
A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances.
B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a
material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number,
or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 3
Rev 12.2018 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract,
or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by
the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed
to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality
and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective
kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information
concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent
rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that
the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative
materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular
materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective,
responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for
the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory
to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent
without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 12.2018 Section
2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems
proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps
and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event
that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could
not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor
shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon
promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make
such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and
warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other
laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely
and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied
as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities
needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in
performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions
at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to
the Owner. 5 Rev 12.2018 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed
with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all
Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork
and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner,
the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge,
up to five (5) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias. B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost
of reproduction and mailing. C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with
the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as
requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work
to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish
the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall
examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 6 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.14
- Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe
benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new
agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University
Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report
Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked
and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations,
suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect,
or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor
shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access
to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section
3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested,
accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The
Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 12.2018 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate
in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All
Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection
of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced
or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance,
or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject
to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract.
If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results
are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred
by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must
be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not
to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner,
it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation
to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall
relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure
by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor
shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a
change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an
adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration
is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously
bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices;
except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project
as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied
by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable
markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract
and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office),
small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "asbuilt" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 12.2018 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below
the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed
exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general
conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By
determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages
1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said
costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor:
Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit
of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost.
The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases
or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime
pay. 10 Rev 12.2018 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's
profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses,
branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing;
legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits;
auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty
expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools
and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will
apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order
would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted
and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within
thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details,
of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically
provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor
by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said
damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access
to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work
or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract,
the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the
Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen
(14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the
part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and
any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said
alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with
documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls,
subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection
with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated
by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and
subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and
the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order,
work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional
compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order,
change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances
as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis
for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and,
in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint
and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the
Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above. ARTICLE 5
-- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the
date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion
of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion
within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the
average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance
in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's
judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated
areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall
not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the
Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference,
priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence
of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes,
freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev 12.2018 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement
of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor
or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the
Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and
remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at
the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the
Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section
6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor
a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt
of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred
by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract.
In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor,
without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may
deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 14 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims
that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner
is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the
dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance
of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract.
2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with
the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within
ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision
of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's
claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision
and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner.
C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's
failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or
omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result
of said order, work, action or omission. 15 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any
Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors,
and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work
to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power
to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the
Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship
between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single
Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate
its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor.
The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the
part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give
notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination
with the Work. 16 Rev 12.2018 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the
Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation
may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by
the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other
contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor;
and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected
or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any
act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim
against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor,
the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS,
PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance
of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency
and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of
said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or
causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results
in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and
Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and
their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder
Accident Form. 17 Rev 12.2018 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on
site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought
to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label
shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards
associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times.
3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must
receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment.
The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury
or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury
unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition
and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining
property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under,
for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act,
without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately
thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks
Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against
all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily
or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional
or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification
obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability
benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in
addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final
acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the
Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this
Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance
A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance:
1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage
B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19 Rev 12.2018 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability
insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all
work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor
shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and
shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage
under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY
INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with
the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle
Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY
INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as
required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed
under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 12.2018 D. Before commencing
the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the
foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain,
in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued
in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each
of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to
the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time
any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the
Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at
its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own
cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily
injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 21 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire
and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written
on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University
and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire
until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation
for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site.
The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation
and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University
a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall
provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such
losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage
for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses,
if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable
disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any
loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair,
replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless
of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss
or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be
included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect
for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 22 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance
A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release
the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section
10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond
such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial
completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose
for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates
or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final
Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings,
the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall
not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect
the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor
shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01
- Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations.
The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 23 Rev 12.2018 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed
within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments
made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract
Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract
Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule
of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved
schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting
shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall
submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job
site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all
previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that
the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment,
have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the EBuilder Payment Application Process. Before
final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including
final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application
for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such
application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 24 Rev 12.2018 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes
a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge,
information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall
make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the
Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect
has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor
has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days
after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready,
but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule
or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation
into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the
Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no
obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made
provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment.
2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice
for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their
integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 25 Rev 12.2018 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University,
and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A
written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at
the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's
invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter.
Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period
shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site
to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and
equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property
of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim
by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement
shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B.
Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims
associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the
project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. 26 Rev 12.2018 Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently
discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not
remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable
doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor.
6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation
1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size
Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract
Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions,
file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section
01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23.
27 Rev 12.2018 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or
Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete,
the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list
of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include
any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection,
determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready
for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents,
and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached
hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and subsubcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a
final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed
in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have
been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release
of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt
from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to
be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials
which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes,
including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 28 Rev 12.2018 B.
The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates
or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove,
replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for
the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all
work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace
and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding
B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit
a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for
the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of
law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is
not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing
the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject
matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive
jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. 29 Rev
12.2018 Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights
as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except
when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless
said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action
is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its
behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable
delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Dustin Sutherland) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE
16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority
group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority
and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate
with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities
for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions
shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor
shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor
and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. 30 Rev 12.2018 C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in the Bid
Proposal Certification Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise
participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned
Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs.
D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the
Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html. E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor
must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract. F. Where it appears that a Contractor
is unable to comply with the MWBE participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all
of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation. Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan
A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed.
B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in Article 16
hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors.
Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports
shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D". Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms,
attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic versions are available in the E-Builder
Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/projectcontractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report 31 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor
shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a
single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE goals of the Contract.
Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner for purposes of investigation to ascertain
compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor. ARTICLE
17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without
limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives
at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been
completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or
audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting
the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project.
ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance
warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based
on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion
by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and
shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified
by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on
account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. 32 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release
of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.)
to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor
shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information,
as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell
University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University
during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information
to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized
by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential
information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply
with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to
defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures
are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of
Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation
of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. 33 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT
Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard
of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants
This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors,
or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships
by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional
business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and
employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards.
All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?cli
entid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. EXHIBIT "A" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract
Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply
with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation
of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective
cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost
of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented
in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name
of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on
the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of
all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include
the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and
craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional
Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate
shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK: NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TOTAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED
CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS
AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract
Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges
that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the
above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the
below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements
now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights
of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which
said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute
this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified
quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used
or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or
materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises
were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend,
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by
the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received,
the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or
under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished
and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract
with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship
for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of
project – PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address: Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
% Goals MBE: 2.3% WBE: 2.4% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor
Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor
or Supplier Start and End Dates (Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or
Officer: Title: Signature: Date: MWBE Contract Percentages Summary % MBE Totals WBE Totals EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 2 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within
15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors
fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, SubSubcontractor, or
Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS
AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount
Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional
sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT
NO. CONTRACTOR: TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: Base Hourly Rate: $ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment
(Base on 1500 hours of work) * Worker's Compensation * Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % = $ * Supplemental
Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe
Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices: $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the
labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium
discounts and experience modifications have been applied against manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________ DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific
Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. $ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified
materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete
ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible
for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________ Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project
Number___________________________ Evaluators; Project Team_____________________________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________ Substantial
Completion________________ Contractor______________________________________________ Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________
Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________ Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent________________________________________
____ Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___ Subcontractor___ Construction Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating
for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and
accuracy c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completeness b. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project schedule e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity
of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information
only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve
Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation
effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety a. Timely
submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation of safety rules and regulations d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall
housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's,
Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptly e. Timely submission of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working
Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons
Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel
and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b.
Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of
close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questions Comments: Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:______________________________
__________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category % Scoring 1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00% 0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00% 0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00% 0 4 MBE/WBE Participation
0 10.00% 0 5 Safety 0 10.00% 0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00% 0 7 Working Relationships 0 10.00% 0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00% 0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%
0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectatio
5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS: (To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS,
CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines from civil authorities including, but not
limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”) surrounding health
and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related work. Contractors
and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued. 1.0 These Supplemental
Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health
and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document
is to set forth recommended elements and practices to safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses, entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their
existing protocols and practices as necessary to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract
with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the
job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of
the foregoing elements. 2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site, project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods
and means of advancing the Contracted Work. 2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety
measures and practices communicated by applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary to engage in qualifying construction activities. 2.3
Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to: 2.3.1 Contractors
and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site 2 2.3.2 Contractors and their
subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State Department of Labor and the standards imposed
under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State Executive Orders 2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are
also required to comply with all applicable job site safety requirements 2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County, City or State of New
York safety requirements for projects within the City or State of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and contractors are required to provide written
Safety Plans for the site demonstrating how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of the Work for the duration of the contract. 3.0 Contractors,
their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19, pathogens,
or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on
the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices
are in place, not for substantive review or approval. 3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers
must remain current with, and immediately implement updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of the Contractor’s
written safety plan to address evolving best practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately
upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion.
4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces
for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf 4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization) Standard
at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home 4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html 3 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended
on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work
site and project status narrative. 6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety
Protocols and Measures as set forth in applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the
Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any onsite construction activity. DECEMBER 15, 2020 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION CORNELL
UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ...........................
.........................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................
.....1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................2 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS ............................................2 2.0
PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..............................................................
.........................3 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .........................................................
...........................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE
OF PREMISES ..............................................................1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2 1.4
WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2 1.5 PARKING 2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS...................................................................4 1.9 EXISTING
EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...............................
....................................................7 1.12 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT
USED .........................................................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .............................................................................
..........8 SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES ....................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .............................................................
.......................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS........
....................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION
...............................................................................................................1 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES ..........................................................
............1 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................
................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ..................
.................................................................................1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ...............................................................
..................2 1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ................................
........................3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS ....................................................
.........................................6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ......................
....................................8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ............................
.............................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................8 SECTION
01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................
............................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .........................
........................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
......................................................4 1.5 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS ......................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ...................
......................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................
............1 1.1 SUMMARY 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...............................................
....................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..........................................................
.............................4 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .....................................
...............................................................................1 1.1 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1
1.2 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...........................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS REVISIONS .........................................................................
........2 1.4 SUBMISSIONS .................................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..................................................
........................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION..............
..................................................................................3 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1 1.0 GENERAL
....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................
.................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................
................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.....................................................
.............................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ................................................
...........................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3 1.5 SAMPLES 4 1.6 QUALITY
ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ...................
.........................................8 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................
..............................................11 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ................................
.................................................12 1.13 DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................13 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT
USED .......................................................................................13 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..............................................................................
.......13 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ...........................................................
.........................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S
PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1 1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS .......................................................................2 1.4 ASBESTOS 3 1.5
LEAD 3 1.6 MERCURY COLLECTION ..............................................................................3 1.7 SITE VISITS 3 1.8 CONFINED SPACE ...................................................
.......................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..................
.....................................................................4 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ..........................................
..........................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...........................................................................
.......................1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................
..............................2 1.6 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................
................................2 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4
1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL .....................................................
.........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .....................
..................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING
AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5 3.0
EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE..........................
...........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.........................
.........................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1
1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS .................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ......................................................................
...................2 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................2 3.1 LEAK TESTING ..................................
.............................................................2 3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR ...........................................................................
.....................3 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .........................................................................
...........................................1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES .............................................................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................
................................................................1 1.3 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................1 1.4
OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ..............................................................................
...........2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ............................................
........................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENT
OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS ............................................................
.....................4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ..............................................................................4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................
................5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................17 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED .........................................
.............................................17 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................
...................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4
TESTING 3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .................................................................
........................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING
LABORATORY SERVICES ..........................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY ..................................................
......1 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES .................................................................................2 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY ...............3 1.5
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .....................................................................................
....3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
............................................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................
........................................1 1.1 REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS .............................
......................................................................1 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.5 PAYMENT 2 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES ..........................................
...............................2 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................2 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY ................................................
...............................3 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING ................................................................................3 2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .............................
...........................................3 2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL ....................................................................................5 3.0 DOCUMENTATION .............................
....................................................................14 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS ...........................................................................14 3.2 COMMUNICATION
.......................................................................................15 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS .....................................................................15
3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS............................................15 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.....................................................
.............................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS............................................................
......................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID
FACILITIES.........................................................1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION
AIDS ..................................................................................3 2.5 SUPPORTS 3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES .....................................................................
...4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................5 2.9 PROJECT
IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................5 2.10 SECURITY 5 2.11 FIELD OFFICES .....................................................................................
..........5 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................6 3.1 PREPARATION ............................................
....................................................6 3.2 GENERAL 6 3.3 REMOVAL 6 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.....................................................
.............................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS............................................................
......................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY,
LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ..............................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ......................
............................3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................4 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 REMOVAL 4 SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
.................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY.................................................................
...........................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..............................
.........................................................1 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL
....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................
.................................1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.......................................................
..................................1 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE .................................................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ...........................................
........................................................3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ..........................
...............................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION
01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ...................................1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................
........1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...........................................................
.......................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES ......................................
...........................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4
2.1 MATERIALS 4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 INSPECTION 4 3.2 PREPARATION ......................
..........................................................................5 3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5
3.4 CLEANING 7 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................................................
..................................................1 1.1 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS
..................................................................................................2 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...............................................................................
............3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................5 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................
................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
...............................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1
FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ...................................................................................
......2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
DATA .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION.............
.....................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................1
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES .............................................3
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..........................................................
.............................7 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .........................................................
...........................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY
1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .........................................................
........................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................
...................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED .............................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ...................................................
......................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................
................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND
SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING 1 1.4 SUBMITTAL 4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 DECEMBER 15, 2020 SECTION 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
.....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY 1 1.2 DESCRIPTION................
..................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................
3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................7 1.5 COORDINATION ...........................................................................
..................7 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................7 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT ................................
..........................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................8
3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS .....................................8 3.2 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES .....................................................................9 3.3
ARCHITECT’S DUTIES ................................................................................10 3.4 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................10
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................11 3.6 COMMISSIONING AGENT’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................12 3.7 GENERAL TESTING
REQUIREMENTS .....................................................16 3.8 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ...........................................................19 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS ......................................19 3.10 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL ........................................................19 3.11 REPORTING 21 3.12 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
.....................................................21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1
RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work to be Done 1. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary to complete the Work shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Generally, the project includes a full interior renovation on the 5th floor of Rhodes Hall consisting
of about 3,500 sf including existing rooms 551, 551A, 557, 557A, 555, 559, 559A, 597, and 50047. There is work outside of the areas described above, to support the work. The scope
includes all construction required to accomplish the work, as shown on drawings, including but not limited to the following: a. Provide temporary partitions at work areas. Maintain
proper egress and life safety systems at all times. Maintain all existing building element fire ratings. b. Remove existing floor finishes, including raised floor system at select
locations in the project area. Remove existing walls partitions and ceilings, includes mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and fire protection systems. Prepare all surfaces to receive
new construction and finishes. c. Provide new floor finish on existing concrete floor. Provide new wall partitions, finishes, and ceilings in the project area. Provide ceiling acoustical
panels and suspended c channel grid. Provide new LED lighting throughout. Provide new power and data throughout. Provide complete fire protection and life safety systems in the renovated
areas. d. Provide new mechanical system to serve the project which includes a new Air Handling Unit located in the Penthouse and associated ductwork and equipment. Existing building
shafts to be used for ductwork mains. Alterations to existing fin tube radiation are included. e. The project also includes wood laboratory casework with epoxy countertops, fire rated
doors and glazing systems with privacy glass film, access control at select doors, moveable furniture and storage, new window shades, and wire mesh privacy curtains. B. The Scope
of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the
Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 2. Items not specifically mentioned
in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. 3. It is the intent and purpose of the
Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect
operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment,
apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion
of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to
the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the
Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written
addendum to the Contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other
costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. The Contractor shall receive, unload,
store and install Owner furnished equipment as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications. B. Storage 1. Upon written acknowledgment by Contractor of receipt in proper
condition, the Contractor shall maintain responsibility for proper storage and protection of the equipment. Provide insurance for the Owner-furnished products up to the time of Final
Acceptance by the Owner. C. Receiving and Unloading 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for logging in, checking and verifying receipt of items and shall be responsible for confirming
that the quantities and condition of the materials are appropriate for installation and the completion of the Work of the project. 2. The Contractor shall note any damage and/or short
count on the Bill of Loading for any Owner Furnished Equipment received at the storage facility, such listing of damages or short count being required to establish the Owner's potential
claim against the carrier. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner directly on any such damage and/or short count. 3. Unload Owner Furnished Equipment at the job site using necessary
care and equipment as required to handle the equipment in a safe manner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUMMARY OF
WORK 01 11 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 4. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers necessary to handle, receive and install Owner Furnished Equipment. 5. Install Owner Furnished
Equipment as called for in the Drawings or in these Specifications. D. Installation 1. Install products in conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Provide interconnecting
structures, equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a complete and functional system. E. Use of Materials 1. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the use of Owner provide materials in an efficient manner in accordance with industry standards and best practices to reduce waste materials. 2.0 PRODUCTS –
NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01
14 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication
devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall
provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall
post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard
the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning
the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only
at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to
roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities
to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed
in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through
the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will
take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material
storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such
repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall
be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. L. Parking
may be made available for staging at a pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area.
All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement,
follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus.
They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will
not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification
System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set
up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year
on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions
in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project site. B. The Contractor shall make
all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01
14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking
on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Dustin
Sutherland) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornel
l.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all
employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees
from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. 4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between
the designated parking area and the construction site. E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other
materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected
by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall
be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation
of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections
required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during
normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor
shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit
lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety
or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability
(hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to
be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1. Plans show general design arrangement.
Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect.
Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts
of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system,
walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The
Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed
with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved
by the Architect. B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of
doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment
of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other
manufacturers' names are mentioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 RENOVATION December
15, 2020 B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required
changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional
control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and
connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient
clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed
and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION
OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. 2.
Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect all adjacent work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 3. All work is to be conducted in such a manner as to cause a minimum
degree of interference with the Campus’ operation and academic schedule. Prior to the commencement of each phase, submit Shutdown / Demo action plans that clearly describe the steps
required to safely shut down utilities, systems and infrastructure that are within the work area (or effecting the work area); and those outside the work area and within approximately
25 feet of the work area limits, as approved by the Owner. The Shutdown / Demo action plan shall identify the shut off point(s) for each utility, system and infrastructure as well
as the secondary shut off point(s) to account if the primary points fail or are otherwise inaccessible. To identify shutoff points, trace each utility, system and infrastructure in
the presence of the campus representative from the work area to the shutoff points and place clear label on same indicating what the shutoff point is and what it effects and whether
it is the primary or secondary shut off. The Shutdown / Demo action plan shall describe the shutdown procedure, identify tools and material required for shutdown, sequence of activities
required for proper shutdown, the name of the person(s) or trade(s) deemed competent to perform each activity in the shutdown sequence and names and telephone numbers of the campus
staff required to provide access to shut off points, assist in the shut off or perform portions of the shutdown activities. Additionally, the plan will address the Contractor’s plan
for maintaining MEP to adjacent occupied areas, inclusive of planned tie-in points for any and all necessary, temporary infrastructure, alarming, monitoring etc. Submit the Shutdown
/ Demo action plan for review and approval at least two weeks prior to field work in the work area. Field work shall not begin until the Shutdown / Demo action plan is reviewed. Contractor
is to assign and include a competent crew, knowledgeable of each unique system involved (i.e. Mechanic, Electrician, Sheet metal, Plumber, Controls, IT, etc.). Field investigation
is to include any and all necessary ladders, scaffold, temp lighting, cutting tools, photos, labels, PPE, etc. needed to properly locate, access and label shut off points. The University
is explicitly requesting heightened awareness and an earnest mitigation of impact. This requirement supplements all other contractual obligations, and requires the dedication of no
less than an aggregate 40 hours. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration,
additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. D. Existing or Archived Drawings 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended
in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The
Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the
following dates and hours is required. 1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): a. Commencement Weekend (2021 Commencement) Saturday, May 29, 2021 Sunday,
May 30, 2021 b. Commencement Weekend (Re-scheduled 2020 Commencement) Saturday, June 5, 2021 Sunday, June 6, 2021 c. Reunion Weekend Saturday, June 12, 2021 Sunday, June 13,
2021 2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Friday, May 28, 2021 2021 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop
at noon Friday, June 4, 2021 Rescheduled 2020 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon Friday, June 11, 2021 Reunion weekend- deliveries and work outside
fence stop at noon 3. Courses Study Time & Final Exams: * See below. While future dates are unknown at this point, the Contractor shall assume these general timeframes for the duration
of the project. May 15, 2021 through May 25, 2021 * Contractor shall assume that the “Study Time and Final Exam” periods are accurate for the University, but that the Owner has
specific exam times falling within these periods. Contractor should assume 40 hours wherein a no noise restriction applies to be used at the discretion of the Owner, but falling within
the “Study Time and Final Exam” Periods noted above. Specifically, this means that absolutely no construction noise may be transmitted by virtue of this project to the lecture halls,
tutorial rooms, classrooms, library, etc. during the to-be-determined 40 hour period. The Owner will provide information relative to the specific times and locations no less than two
weeks in advance of scheduled exams at the Contractor’s request. The 40 hours are to be included with no right to claim for additional cost or time or delays to construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-8 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. That
Contractor shall not permit any major noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents during the dates and hours listed below. Should any conditions necessitate
work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation
of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. a. February 8, 2021 through March 8, 2021 Monday through Friday: 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Saturday/Sunday:
No Restrictions b. March 9, 2021 and March 10, 2021 No Restrictions (No Classes) c. March 11, 2021 through April 22, 2021 Monday through Friday: 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Saturday/Sunday:
No Restrictions d. April 23, 2021 through April 26, 2021 No Restrictions (No Classes) e. April 27, 2021 through May 25, 2021 Monday through Friday: 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Saturday/Sunday:
No Restrictions f. May 26, 2021 through project completions Restrictions will be limited (Summer Break; however there will be summer instruction where coordination will be required)
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 23 00 Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ALTERNATES 01
23 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section describes the changes to be made under each Alternative. B. The
Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: An alternate
is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Proposal Submission Form and in he eBuilder Bid Module for certain items that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount
if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the product, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods
described in the Contract Documents. Alternates shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses, including bond costs, in connection therewith. B. Coordination: Coordinate related
Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. C. Notification: Immediately
following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred
for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this
Section. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned
as part of the alternate. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 Provide fire rated glazing system in the corridor as indicated on drawings
A-101A and A-302. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 23 00 Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ALTERNATES 01 23 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 B. ALTERNATE NO. 2 Provide
sliding barn-style markerboards along column line D, as indicated on drawings A-101A and A-302. ***END OF SECTION 01 23 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions
for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory
changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed
by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating
into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar
intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged
from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT
OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific
manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related
to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. In addition to submission
of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid 1.4
PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate
the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of
the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of
Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests
recommended by manufacturers. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with
products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other
products and construction methods. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 RENOVATION
PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall
be used. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products. 1.7 EQUIVALENTS –
APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the
purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding
Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products
are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make
or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for
the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with
the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor
shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making
such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved. 3. Nothing
in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal
to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal
to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure
of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 B. Equivalents
or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot
be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration
of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g.,
the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines
that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project
should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety (90) calendar
days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and
such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore
shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section
approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the
work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products
specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any
one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the
phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS
AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications
include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include
the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers):
Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a
list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements
in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated
on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications
indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs
or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the
other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs
titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25
00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 C. For products specified by naming
one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such
substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified
by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders.
Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests
for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for
Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed
"Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as
such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction
of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and
address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar
projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS
AND 01 25 00-7 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or
projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result
in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals
without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. F. Substitute
products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If
the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers
are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product
does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions
of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product
specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses
of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBSTITUTIONS
AND 01 25 00-8 RENOVATION PRODUCT OPTIONS December 15, 2020 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations
to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements
of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has
determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests
for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or
rejection of the request for substitution. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT
MEETINGS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and
administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written
notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings
and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's
Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 7. Commissioning Agent D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs
and approximate schedule 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures
for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary
facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31
19-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative
Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives
5. Commissioning Agent, as appropriate to agenda 6. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 7. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 8. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures
to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of schedules CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 12.
Maintenance of quality standards 13. Building Commissioning 14. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders 15. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction
Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 16. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or
its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where
required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor,
Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics,
material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven
(7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 1.5 COMMISSIONING
MEETINGS A. The Commissioning (Cx) Agent will schedule and conduct Cx coordination meetings as noted below. 1. Kick-off Meeting near the beginning of construction 2. TAB/ATC coordination
meeting prior to commencement of TAB services 3. Routine commissioning meetings during the Acceptance Phase on a not less than biweekly basis. B. Attendance: 1. Architect's professional
consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 2. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 3. Owner's Representative CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New
York PROJECT MEETINGS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-5 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 4. Commissioning Agent 5. Subcontractors involved in the Cx process a. Mechanical
Contractor b. Electrical Contractor c. ATC Contractor d. TAB Contractor e. Fire Alarm Contractor f. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of
minutes of previous Commissioning Meetings 2. Schedule update 3. Action items 4. Update Cx Record 5. New Issues 6. Coordination and look ahead until next meeting 7. Other business of
significance that affects commissioning goals D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Owner’s Commissioning Agent or its representative at these meetings shall
be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC
PROJECT MANAGEMENT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1.0
GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY B. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall manage
the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use
on the Project. C. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository.
All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided a username and password.
The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper
training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal C. The Contractor shall provide
on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient
manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM December 15, 2020 2. Color printer
and plotter capable of full-size document production 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly 4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex
(SLR) type camera 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised
of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes,
discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and preconstruction surveys. 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The
Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM
system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on
this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s
exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded
to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings
as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically
linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends.
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights
to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited. G. Submittals: All submittals
shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca,
New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM December 15, 2020 I. Field Reporting: The Contractor
shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location
reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including
but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification Sections K. Project Schedule: The
contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats. L.
Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond
to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM
system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system
and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation
supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to
by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown
structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR ELECTRONIC
PROJECT 01 31 50-4 RENOVATION MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM December 15, 2020 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above
as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation
in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL
SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work,
with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project
to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner
and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted
schedules. 1.1 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or
operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The
chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.2 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Demolition
work b. Subcontractor work CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 RENOVATION December 15,
2020 c. Equipment installations d. Finishes e. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated
dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items
as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule
will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review.
Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will
be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical
path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.3 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission
of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a
narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes
on schedules of other prime contractors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 1.4 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return
review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application
for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B.
Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01
32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress
of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Submittals 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building
with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. 2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within
five (5) days of taking photographs. 3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING
CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction.
3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first
week for review. C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note
location on Key Plan. 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 RENOVATION December 15,
2020 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop
Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings 6. Certification of Asbestos free products 7. Owner audio/visual 8.
Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images
in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be
created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any nonelectronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis
and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry
in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be
responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. B. The submittal registry
and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with
the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH
FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification,
Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description
of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor
(Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal
or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals
in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management
system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s
preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration
period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in
the baseline schedule submittal described in section 01 32 16. F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure
to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals
are received. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.3 SHOP
DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without
specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings.
Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation
of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically
via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT
DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials
and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction
or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH
FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information
that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where
selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system
and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured
or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity
to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples
and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3.
Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the
areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples
in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification
of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units
that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture,
or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with
action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph
sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance
and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications:
Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional.
Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test
Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted
instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field
representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via
the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The
Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn
at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system,
lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide
electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms,
boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within
the space available. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item. C.
Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan
and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained
within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted.
Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies
of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. 1. Show architectural, structural and
other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing,
fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings. 2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe
relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 3. Include room names and numbers of
each space. 4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information
and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. 5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs,
fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings.
Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the design intent. 6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure
maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components
are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible. 8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing,
fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing
conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor
shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and
dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments. 9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. 11. Indicate required installation sequences. 12.
Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment
and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult
installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling
grid. 14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers. 15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems,
mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures
indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect. 16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated
information, show fullydimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit,
and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor. 17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms:
Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fireprotection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate
paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca,
New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations
and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and
structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural
penetrations. 19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges,
accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 20. Electrical
Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency
battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations.
Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets
and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. 21. Fire Suppression System:
Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work
in those Sections. 23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings. 24. Review: Architect will review
coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that
coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing
conditions and each portion of the Work. D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined
and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened
with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and
satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals
is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change
in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors.
Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues
prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples
representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review
of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated
on the review shop drawings. L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca,
New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals
with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing,
testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed
to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's
Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted
below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is
critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified
in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. 7. Allow time for reprocessing
each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made
which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 3. Provide space on label or beside title block
on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction
criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system
including meaningful description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate
to clearly identify intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards,
such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract
Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7.
Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit
submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples.
Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal to the Commissioning Agent in electronic
format. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. Provide document in PDF format.
B. Record copy of the submittal must be forwarded to the Commissioning Agent within fourteen (14) calendar days of the final approved submittal. C. Provide a record copy of the submittal
(electronic format) for the O&M Manual. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data,
and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required
for initial submittal. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review
Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)"
indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered
by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay.
Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity
may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)”
is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. 6. “Not
Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor
upon return to them 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational
submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13
RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals
to sender without action. E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.13 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data
when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators
8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL
HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health
and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements
of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications
may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT
SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site.
The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site
Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information,
controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP
may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted
a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using
the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to
the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative,
who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. The Contractor
is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure
all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration
of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP):
A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document
is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local
government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health,
Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email
at askEHS@cornell.edu 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS A. The preferred method for Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs) boom storage is fully retracted
and fully lowered to the ground. B. In some circumstances booms may need to be stored in the air because of vandalism concerns, minimal size of storage location, etc. 1. If this is
case, the area under the elevated boom must be blocked or arranged such that prevents people from walking, standing, working or parking vehicles underneath. 2. When booms are stored
in the air consult the extended weather forecast. Booms should not be stored in the air during predicted high winds, or severe storms. AWPs become unstable at winds or gusts greater
than 25 mph and must be fully lowered to prevent a tip-over. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
01 35 29-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.4 ASBESTOS A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior
to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor
has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products
for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified
in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Removal and disposal of asbestos
containing material shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with Division 2 specifications. 1.5 LEAD A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect
workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers
based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes
meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building
occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.6 MERCURY COLLECTION A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal
that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling
old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered,
mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill,
leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team. 1.7 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers
or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the
safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL HEALTH
& SAFETY 01 35 29-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.8 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” December 14, 2020 Mr.
William Knapp Richard McElhiney Architects LLC 347 West 36 Street Suite 1501 New York, NY 10018 Re: Rhodes Hall (2051) 5th Floor Interior Renovation Project Asbestos Inspection
and Bulk Sampling Report Delta Project No.: 2017.286.007 Dear Mr. Knapp: Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form, the associated Laboratory Analytical Result
Sheets, and the sample location Drawings for the bulk sampling performed by Delta Certified Inspector Thomas Ferro. Sampling was performed on December 8th, 2020 and addressed suspect
materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Interior Renovations Project. Based on a review of the 90% CD Drawing Set (dated November 11th, 2020),
a review of existing sample information for the building, and a visual inspection of the affected areas, a total of four (4) bulk samples were collected representing two (2) homogenous
materials. All four (4) of the samples collected were “Non-Friable Organically Bound” (NOB) representing the two (2) homogenous materials and results for both materials were reported
as being “Asbestos Containing”.” Several other suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the project were observed to be present but not sampled as they were addressed
through previous sampling efforts and all reported as being non-asbestos. These included sheetrock/joint compound wall systems, 2’ x 2’ fissured ceiling tiles, 12” x 12” black w/white
specks floor tile and associated mastic, carpet mastic, cove base mastic, spray-on fireproofing, mastic from foam acoustic wall panels and raised floor pedestal mastic. Results for
these non-asbestos materials are on file at Delta EAS and Cornell University. All observed wiring was non-suspect vinyl. “Asbestos Containing” materials identified as part of this
survey that are present within the renovations area and will be impacted by the Project included the following: • Asbestos containing grey glazing compound present on Room 551 Window
Wall – Less than 1 square foot (based on 14 linear feet @ ¼” bead) • Asbestos containing grey glazing compound present on Rooms 551, 551A, 557A, 559, 597 and Corridor 50047 transom
windows – approximately 1 square foot total (based on 52.5 linear feet @ ¼” bead) for the 7 transom windows (Corridor 50047 has a double transom) Bulk sample analysis was performed
by AmeriSci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved / accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all Non-Friable Organically Bound (NOB) materials was initially performed by Polarized “We are a seamless extension
of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP
198.6 Methodologies. If the PLM results were reported as “non-asbestos”, the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology.
“Positive Stop” sample analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous material set with multiple samples and based on this; 3 of the 4 samples collected were analyzed. Please
reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for sample particulars and details. I have also attached Delta Company, Personnel, and Laboratory Licenses/Certifications. If you have
any questions or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Stephen Prislupsky
Director of Environmental Services Att: Project Paperwork “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of
11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:607.231.6600 Fax:607.231.6640 www.delta-eas.com
Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2017.286.007 - 01A 01 5 Grey Window Glazing Compound, Room 551 Misc. Trace
1.5% 2017.286.007 - 01B 01 5 Grey Window Glazing Compound, Room 551 Misc. Trace NA/PS 2017.286.007 - 02A 02 5 Grey Transom Glazing Compound, Room 551A Misc. ND ND 2017.286.007 - 02B
02 5 Grey Transom Glazing Compound, Room 597 Misc. Trace 1,5% Client: Richard McElhiney Architects, LLC Delta Proj. No.: 2017.286.007 Asbestos Inspector(s): Thomas P. Ferro Asbestos
Bulk Sample Report Form Sample Client Project No.: N/A Date Sampling Performed: 12/08/2020 Date of Report: 12/14/2020 Laboratory: AmeriSci, NY Labs Project: Cornell University Rhodes
Hall (2051) 5th Floor Renovations Asbestos Bulk Sampling HA* Floor Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 4 / TEM - 3 HA - Homogenous
Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous
Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Number of Samples Collected: 4 Number Chrysotile Chrysotile Cornell University Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovations Asbestos
Bulk Sampling Page 1 of 1 “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 4 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment B Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 5 of
11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment C Sample Location Drawings “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND
SURVEYORS, DPC Page 6 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment D Photos “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 7 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY HA 01 – Grey Window Glazing Compound, “Asbestos Containing” HA 02 – Grey Transom
Window Glazing Compound, “Asbestos Containing” “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 8 of 11 AN ISO
9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY 2’ x 2’ Fissured Ceiling Tile, Previously Sampled, “Non-Asbestos” Pedestal Mastic, Previously Sampled, “Non-Asbestos” “We are a seamless extension
of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 9 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY 12” x 12” Black w/White Specks Floor Tile and Mastic,
Previously Sampled, “NonAsbestos” Mastic from Foam Acoustic Wall Panels, Previously Sampled, “Non-Asbestos” “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS,
ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 10 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Sheetrock/Joint Compound Wall System, Previously Sampled, “Non-Asbestos” “We are a seamless
extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 11 of 11 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment E Licenses and Certifications
New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Delta Engineers,
Architects, Land Surveyors, & Landscape, Architects, D.P.C. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF
ISSUE: 10/06/2020 EXPIRATION DATE: 10/31/2021 Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article
30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation
of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos
material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license
verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform,
by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements
of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections,
all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention
exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire
Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01
35 44 – Spill Control B. Section 01 35 45 – Refrigerant Compliance 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Analytical laboratory
sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”). 2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material
Supplier. 4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management. 5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 6. Copies of manifests for all waste
materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority
to act for the Contractor at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35
43-2 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise
unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent
without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee
who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations.
Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance
with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading,
saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of
construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor
does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers
or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being
done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.7 PROTECTION
OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all
pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of
work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream
sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment
in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage
ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location
on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent
or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind
from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations
shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential
contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities
that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed
in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing
of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the
Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to
observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices
or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at
every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health
and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal,
or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete
care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with
all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A.
Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste
transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this
form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions.
Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve
or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting
on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction,
of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the
Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1.
All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular
damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent
discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the
potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove
immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other
hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum
spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an
emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be
followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel,
notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35
44-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils
or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this
area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following
actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames,
sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires,
explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials,
cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification
of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment
as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment
for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following
spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled
waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with
all applicable state and federal regulations. d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled
material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its
proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to
avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including
a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate
the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible
measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations,
collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4)
ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 RENOVATION December
15, 2020 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate
with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills
must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200,
within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL
of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill
must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain
or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater
or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable
quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information: When
making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical
name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material
released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or
other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for,
the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL
CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The
steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries,
if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12.
Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117,
40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable
phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description
of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description
of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers
reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for
knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining
shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01
35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01
35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible and accountable for compliance with the EPA Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 608, 40 CFR Part
82 and any state or local codes for all refrigerant-related work. In general, an EPA-certified technician shall perform any activity involving refrigerant-containing equipment that
includes: (1) attaching and detaching hoses and gauges to and from refrigerant containing equipment to measure pressure; (2) adding refrigerant to, or removing refrigerant from equipment;
or (3) any other activity that violates the integrity of a refrigerant containing circuit (for example any activity where a refrigerant containing circuit is ‘opened’ in any manner).
B. Refrigerant and oil shall be recovered from any equipment that does not meet the definition of a small appliance in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F before removal and subsequent disposal.
Small appliances (as defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F) may be removed from the site with the charge (refrigerant) intact, provided it is properly labeled and handled in such a manner
so as to prevent damage to coils. Small Appliances are defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F as: Any appliance that is fully manufactured, charged, and hermetically sealed in a factory
with five (5) pounds or less of a Class I or Class II substance used as a refrigerant, including, but not limited to, refrigerators and freezers (designed for home, commercial, or consumer
use), medical or industrial research refrigeration equipment, room air conditioners (including window air conditioners and packaged terminal air heat pumps), dehumidifiers, under-thecounter
ice makers, vending machines, and drinking water coolers. C. All new equipment installed shall utilize non-CFC refrigerants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting construction, demolition,
or service work Contractor shall provide to Owner a list of all service technicians with EPA certification numbers and level of certification. (Copies of EPA certification cards are
acceptable for those who will be working on the site.) 1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall provide to the Owners Representative all Service Invoices (or equivalent service documentation
acceptable to owner) for all work performed by EPA- certified Technicians. Service Invoices (or equivalent documentation) shall include the following information at a minimum for each
piece of refrigerant containing equipment serviced: • Date of Service • Name of EPA-Certified Technician • Technicians Certification Level • Type of Equipment Serviced • Equipment Manufacture
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 • Equipment Model
and Serial Number • Description of Service Performed • Date Leak Discovered (if applicable) • Date Leak Repaired (if applicable) • Date Follow-Up Leak Test Performed (if applicable)
• Type of Refrigerant • Normal System Full Charge (in pounds) • Amount of Initial Refrigerant Charge Recovered During Service • Amount of Recovered Refrigerant Returned to System •
Type of Additional Refrigerant Added to System • Amount of Additional Refrigerant Charged to System • System Charge at End of Service B. Contractor shall provide to Cornell’s Environmental
Health and Safety Office and IPP Facilities Management Administration Preventative Maintenance Group, via the Owner’s Representative, complete equipment documentation including: make,
model number, serial number, refrigerant type and full refrigerant charge (quantity), equipment ID tag number and location (room number) for all equipment installed that does not meet
the definition of a small appliance (40CFR Part 82). C. Contractor shall provide Owners Representative a copy of complete manifests, invoices, or other documentation showing any refrigerant
removed from the project by the contractor was disposed of appropriately or reclaimed by an EPA-certified reclaimer. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 LEAK TESTING A. All new
equipment not meeting the definition of a small appliance, including packaged equipment, factory charged, field charged, split systems or field-constructed systems with field-installed
refrigerant piping shall be leak tested prior to or during startup. Leak testing shall utilize appropriate electronic leak-testing equipment. B. Leak testing shall be conducted by an
EPA-certified technician. The contractor shall provide written verification of the leak testing and results. C. If a leak is detected, the following procedure shall be followed: 1.
Notify the Owner’s Site Representative (who will notify the Refrigerant Compliance Coordinator). 2. Document the leak. 3. Repair the leak. 4. Document the procedures followed. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 5. Leak test to verify the
leak was repaired. 6. Schedule and provide a 30-day follow-up verification leak test witnessed by a designated HVAC technician. 7. Document follow-up leak testing. 8. Repeat the above
process if follow-up leak is detected. 3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor, in contractor-provided refrigerant recovery cylinders, shall take
ownership of the recovered refrigerant and transport off site to a proper disposal company or certified reclaimer. B. Service Invoices, as described in RECORD DOCUMENTS, shall be provided.
C. The Contractor technician shall tag the unit that the refrigerant was removed. D. Once an EPA-certified technician has removed the refrigerant and tagged the unit, a noncertified
person may perform the remainder of the demolition. ***END OF SECTION 01 35 45*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain
and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building,
electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the
regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure,
the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance
of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction
/ Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca. D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca
Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope
of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department
is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified
as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay
all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws,
rules and regulations applicable to the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2
RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing
conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt
or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid.
This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state,
in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on
any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings
shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work
in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International
Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h. International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International
Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National Electric Code 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 6.
All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents
consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents
listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire
integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary
to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The
Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and
is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”:
The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or
materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”:
Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements
expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified"
have the same meaning as “indicated.” L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements
within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 N. "Install": Operations
at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning,
and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work
not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical
with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions
which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project
construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed
items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor,
for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor
for construction purposes. AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland
Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council,
Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood
of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood
of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated
with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for
trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered
by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force
and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication
Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should
be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards
are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations
and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural
Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866)
512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense
Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925
www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from
Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door
Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664
www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca,
New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141
www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI
ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association
of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American
Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
(202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American
Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American
Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural
Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800
www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703)
295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org
(703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org
(303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312
www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel
Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800)
882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 CSI Construction Specifications Institute
(The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040
www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888)
786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 RENOVATION December 15, 2020
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550
www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete
Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
(847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available
from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com
(713) 407-3500 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 ITU International Telecommunication
Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple
Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material
Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute
(888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association
of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703)
713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber
Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing
Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555
(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866)
342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604)
524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 NRMCA National
Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
(602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
(301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES
01 42 00-14 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843)
626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National
Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North
America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847)
438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864)
646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700
www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile
Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association
(503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 B. Code
Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing
and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800)
423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate
and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301)
504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202)
586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications
Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202)
708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National
Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building
Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department
(202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service
(202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an
effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract
Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for
performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until
the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all
sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place
on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the
following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule
of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section
01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY
CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections
and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be
at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements
with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to
assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment
to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on
a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections
on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality
control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release
of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall
be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty
may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of
an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The
Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject
work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes
or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track nonconforming materials or sub-standard workmanship
identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY
SERVICES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The
Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution
of its required services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Testing Laboratory services are specified
in connection with work including but not limited to the following: 1. New York State Building Code, Chapter 17, Special Inspections 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended
Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard
Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing ". C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York. D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under
the direction of Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all testing and inspections and shall certify any local
agency requirements. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection,
with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. F. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:
a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate
with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction.
1. Comply with specified standards, ASTM, other recognized authorities, and as specified. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify
Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate
that strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. The Architect
shall determine whether remedial action is necessary. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record
Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory
inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location
of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents. F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection
certifying that the work has been inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which have not yet been repaired or resolved. G. Perform additional
tests as required by Architect or the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01
45 29-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of
Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel.
Provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and for
which testing is specified. C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.
D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the
Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify
laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after
such notice, reimburse laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's responsibility. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples
and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections,
sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-1 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS
AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Special Inspections and Structural Testing shall be
in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of New York State (BCNYS). B. Hold a Special Inspections preconstruction meeting at least seven (7) days prior to the initial planned
date for start of construction. 1. Discussion shall include the following: a. Review of specifications and Schedule of Special Inspections for work requiring Special Inspections.
b. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional. c. Notification and reporting procedures. 2. Attendees shall include
the Contractor, Owner’s representative, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professionals for Structural Engineering and for Architecture. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Registered
Design Professional: The licensed Professional Engineer or Registered Architect whose seal appears on the Construction Drawings. B. Code Enforcement Official: The Officer or other
designated authority charged with administration and enforcement of the BCNYS. C. Testing/Inspecting Agency: An agent retained by the Special Inspector or by the Owner and coordinated
by the Special Inspector, to perform some of the inspection services on behalf of the Special Inspector. (An example of an Inspecting Agent is a Geotechnical Engineer.) D. Statement
of Special Inspections: A document prepared by the Registered Design Professional and filed with and approved by the Code Enforcement Official that includes the Schedule of Special
Inspections listing the materials and work requiring Special Inspections. This document includes the inspections and verifications required for the project and the individuals, agencies,
and/or firms who will be retained to perform these services. E. Continuous Special Inspection: The full-time observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency while the
work is being performed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-2
RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 F. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing
Agency for work that has been or is being performed and at the completion of the work. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall be accepted by
the Owner. B. Special Inspections shall be performed by agents who have relevant experience for each category of inspections indicated on the drawings. C. Minimum qualifications of
inspection agents are indicated on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit to the Registered Design Professional and Code
Enforcement Official for review, a copy of their qualifications including the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections
or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any
of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.5 PAYMENT A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency. B.
If any materials requiring Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant not located within 200 miles of the project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses
of the Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work failing to comply with the requirements
of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will provide the Special Inspector with a complete set of Contract Documents sealed by the Registered Design Professional
and approved by the Code Enforcement Official. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and his agents so that Special Inspections
and testing may be performed without hindrance. B. As indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections, the Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and/or Testing/Inspecting Agency
at least 48 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH
FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-3 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access
to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing
of test samples. D. If Special Inspections or testing require the use of the Contractor’s scaffolding to access work areas, the Contractor shall provide a competent person to perform
the daily evaluation of the scaffolding to verify that it is safe to use. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and Testing Agent of this review before each use. The Contractor
is responsible for the safe assembly and stability of the scaffolding. E. The Contractor shall keep the latest set of Construction Drawings, field sketches, accepted shop drawings,
and specifications at the project site for field use by the Inspectors and Testing Technicians. F. The Contractor shall perform remedial work (if required) and sign non-conformance
reports stating that remedial work has been completed. The Contractor shall submit signed reports to the Special Inspector as work proceeds. G. The Special Inspection program shall
in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program.
H. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not release, revoke,
alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have control over the Contractor’s means and methods
of construction. C. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall
not have the authority to stop the work. 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING 2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Special Inspector shall perform the following: 1. Inspect reinforcing steel and placement.
2. Inspect embedded bolts and anchor rods prior to concrete placement. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-4 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 B. Testing Agency shall perform the following: 1. Verify use of required
design mix. 2. Sample and test concrete during placement as follows. Test shall be taken at point of discharge into structure: a. Record time concrete is batched, time placement begins/sample
time, and time of completion. b. Sample fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. c. Perform slump test in accordance with ASTM
C 143. d. Measure air content in accordance with ASTM C 231, pressure method. e. Record temperature of concrete. f. Record unit weight of fresh normal-weight concrete in accordance
with ASTM g. Perform concrete compressive tests as follows: i. Prepare compressive test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. Take a set of six 6 x 12 cylinders or nine 4 x 8 cylinders
for each type of concrete. Store undisturbed in insulated box during cold weather. Deliver to laboratory between 16 and 32 hours after making. Perform compressive tests in accordance
with ASTM C 39: two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8 specimens) tested at 7 days, two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8 specimens) tested at 28 days, and two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8
specimens) retained for later testing if required. h. Perform additional testing as follows if required:. i. Make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified
concrete strengths or other characteristics have not been attained in structure. ii. Perform tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by
other methods acceptable to Architect. iii. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for cost of additional tests. 3. Inspect concrete placement for proper application techniques. 4. Inspect
for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-5 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Special Inspector shall perform the following: 1.
Verify Fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and Quality Control procedures: a. Review procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to code requirements. 2. Review manufacturer’s
Certificates of Compliance for high-strength bolts and weld filler material. 3. Review certified mill test reports. 4. Inspect steel frame joint details for compliance with approved
Construction Documents. 5. Inspect end connections and bridging of open-web steel joists and joist girders. B. Testing Agency shall perform the following: 1. Material verification
of high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers, including review of identification markings and manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. a. Test high-strength bolt assemblies in a tension
measuring device to verify material conformance prior to installation. Assemble bolt, nut, and washer on a loose plate and tension by tightening nut to develop required tension in Table
7.1 of “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts.” 2. Verification that copies of accepted field welding procedure specifications are available on site for reference
by erector’s welders. 3. Verification that erector’s welder’s qualifications are current and appropriate for joint type, welding position, and welding process to be used. 4. Inspect
high-strength bolting. a. Joints designated as snug tight require only visual inspection. 5. Material verification of structural steel, including review of identification markings.
6. Perform pull-out tests on adhesive, expansion, and sleeve anchors. 7. Material verification of weld filler materials, including review of identification markings. 8. Inspect welding
of structural steel. a. Visually inspect welds according to AWS. b. Schedule inspection of field welding in timely manner utilizing vertical access means and methods utilized by Contractor
to perform the welding. c. Magnetic particle inspection according to ASTM E 709 is required for 10 percent of field fillet welds. 9. Inspect condition of erected materials. a. Visually
inspect erected steel for damage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL
01 45 33-6 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 b. Visually inspect connections and framing to verify compliance with Contract Documents and accepted shop
drawings. 10. Additional testing shall be performed as follows if required. a. Testing Agency shall perform additional tests of connections and framing members field modified by Contractor
to correct errors in shop drawings, fabrication, or erection. b. Testing and reporting of field modifications shall be in accordance with this section, Special Inspections, and have
the following additional requirements: I. Magnetic particle inspection according to ASTM E 709 is required for 100 percent of fillet welds. a. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for cost
of additional tests performed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL
01 45 33-7 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR BUILDING STRUCTURES INSPECTION AGENTS 1. SPECIAL INSPECTOR, P.E. 2.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING/INSPECTOR 3. TESTING/INSPECTING AGENCY 4. TESTING/INSPECTING AGENCY THE OWNER OR THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL RETAIN A SPECIAL INSPECTOR WHO WILL
PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTING AND/OR OVERSEE THE WORK OF AN INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCY. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER EXPERIENCED IN THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS
AND REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF NEW YORK. THE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR PERFORMING THE WORK CANNOT RETAIN THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR. ANY CONFLICT OF INTEREST MUST BE DISCLOSED TO THE
CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. THE NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS OF AGENTS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL AND REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL
PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. THE QUALIFICATIONS OF ALL PERSONNEL PERFORMING INSPECTION AND TESING ACTIVITIES ARE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY THE CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL. MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS
OF THE TESTING AGENTS ARE INDICATED IN THE SCHEDULE. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED
SPECIAL 01 45 33-8 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 KEY OF MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF INSPECTION AGENTS (MQIA) PE NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL
ENGINEER RDP NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER EIT ENGINEER IN TRAINING SUPERVISED BY A PE – INTERN ENGINEER ACI-CCI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CERTIFIED CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR ACI-CFTT AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CERTIFIED CONCRETE FIELD TESTING TECHNICIAN – GRADE 1 ICC-RCSI ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE SPECIAL INSPECTOR ICC-RCC ICC REINFORCED
CONCRETE CERTIFICATION ICC-SMC ICC STRUCTURAL MASONRY CERTIFICATION ICC-SSWC ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING CERTIFICATION AWS-CWI AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY CERTIFIED WELDING INSPECTOR
ICC-SAFC ICC SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING CERTIFICATION ASNT AMERICAN SOCIETY OF NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING – LEVEL II OR III ICC-PCC ICC PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-9 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
December 15, 2020 CATEGORY MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF INSPECTION AGENTS (MQIA) A. REINFORCED CONCRETE 1. CURRENT ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE SPECIAL INSPECTOR OR ACI CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
INSPECTOR 2. CONCRETE FIELD TESTING CAN BE BY AN ACI CONCRETE FIELD TESTING TECHNICAL WITH GRADE 1 CERTIFICATION 3. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 4. NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (RDP) WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE B. PRE-STRESSED PRE-TENSION CONCRETE 1. CURRENT ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION AND ACI CONCRETE FIELD TESTING TECHNICAL
WITH GRADE 1 CERTIFICATION PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE C. PRE-STRESSED POST-TENSION CONCRETE
1. CURRENT POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI) CERTIFICATION 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE D. WELDING 1. CURRENT AWS CERTIFIED WELDING
INSPECTOR 2. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING CERTIFICATE PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. CURRENT LEVEL II CERTIFICATION FROM THE AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NON-DESTRUCTIVE
TESTING (NDT) 4. CURRENT LEVEL III PROVIDED PREVIOUSLY CERTIFIED AS NDT LEVEL II E. HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING AND STEEL FRAME INSPECTION 1. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING CERTIFICATE
PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE F. MASONRY 1. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL MASONRY AND ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT
EXPERIENCE 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE G. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS 1. CURRENT ICC SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING CERTIFICATION
AND ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE H. EXCAVATION AND FILLING VERIFICATION OF SOILS PILES AND DRILLED
PIERS 1. CURRENT LEVEL II CERTIFICATION IN GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY/CONSTRUCTION FROM THE NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES (NICET) 2. INTERN
ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL
01 45 33-10 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 MODULAR RETAINING WALLS 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE I. INSPECTION OF FABRICATORS 1. PRECAST: CURRENT
ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. BAR JOISTS: SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS 3. METAL BUILDINGS: SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS 4. STRUCTURAL STEEL:
SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS J. EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 1. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE K. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND
FINISH SYSTEM 1. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE L. SMOKE CONTROL 1. EXPERTISE IN FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING, MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, AND
CERTIFIED AS AN AIR BALANCER 2. THE RDP RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGN M. SEISMIC RESISTANCE 1. SEE APPLICABLE CATEGORIES IN THIS TABLE N. GENERAL 1. QUALIFIED PERSON WITH ONE YEAR OF
RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE 3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-11 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 ☐ CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION: SPECIAL INSPECTION AND
TESTING IS REQUIRED. (TABLE 1705.3) TYPE AGENT NO. MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD CODE ☐ INSPECT REINFORCEMENT AND VERIFY PLACEMENT. 1 OR 3 A.1, A.3 M.1 B.1, B.2 C.1, C.2
X ACI 318 Ch. 20, 25.2, 25.3, 26.6.1 - 26.6.3 1908.4 ☐ A. HOUSEKEEPING PADS. X 50% ☐ VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. 3 A.2 X 100% ACI 318 Ch. 19, 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1904.1, 1904.2,
1908.2, 1908.3 ☐ PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF CONCRETE. 3 A.2 X ASTM C172
ASTM C31 ACI 318: 26.5, 26.12 1908.10 ☐ A. TAKE SIX STANDARD FOR EACH CLASS OF CONCRETE. ☐ B. RECORD TIME CONCRETE IS BATCHED, TIME CONCRETE IS SAMPLED, AND TIME OF COMPLETION.
☐ C. PERFORM ONE SLUMP TEST; TWO IF THE CONCRETE IS PUMPED. ☐ D. MEASURE AIR CONTENT. ☐ E. RECORD CONCRETE AND AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE. ☐ F. RECORD UNIT
WEIGHT OF CONCRETE. ☐ G. PERFORM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS. ☐ INSPECT CONCRETE PLACEMENT FOR 3 A.1, A.2 X ACI 318: 26.5 1908.6, 1908.7, CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01
45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-12 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December
15, 2020 PROPER APPLICATION TECHNIQUES. 1908.8 ☐ VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. 3 A.1, A.2 X ACI 318: 26.5.326.5.5 1908.9 ☐ INSPECT FORMWORK FOR
SHAPE, LOCATION, AND DIMENSIONS OF CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED 1 OR 3 A.1, A.3, A.4 X ACI 318: 26.11.1.2(b) CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-13 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December
15, 2020 ☐ STEEL CONSTRUCTION: SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED. (SECTION 1705.2.1) TYPE AGENT NO. MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD CODE ☐ MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL
STEEL: ☐ A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 1 OR 3 E.1-E.3 X 100% ☐ B. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFIED MILL
TEST REPORTS REQUIRED. 1 X 100% ☐ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS PRIOR TO WELDING 3 D.1, D.2, M.1 X AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 ☐ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS DURING WELDING 3 D.1, D.2, M.1 X AISC 360
TABLE N5.4-2 ☐ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS AFTER WELDING 3 D.1, D.2, M.1 X 100% AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 ☐ MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED ON FILLET WELDS X 10% ☐ MINIMUM
INSPECTION AFTER HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING 3 E.1, M.1 X 100% AISC 360 N6, TABLE N5.6-3 ☐ INSPECT FABRICATED OR ERECTED STEEL AS APPROPRIATE TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION
DRAWINGS. INSPECT MEMBER LOCATIONS, AND JOINT DETAILS. 1 OR 3 E.1, E.2, E.3, M.1 X AISC 360 N5.8 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-14 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 3.0 DOCUMENTATION 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS A.
Detailed reports shall be prepared of each test or inspection. The reports shall include the following general information: 1. Project name and number. 2. Date of test or inspection.
3. Name of Testing Agency or Inspecting Agency. 4. Name of technician or inspector. 5. Weather conditions. 6. Locations and elevations of specific areas tested or inspected referenced
to gridlines. 7. Description of test or inspection. 8. Reference to applicable ASTM standard. 9. Summary of observations, results, and recommendations. 10. Description of any areas
or materials requiring retesting or re-inspection. B. Concrete compressive strength test reports shall contain the following information: 1. Name of Contractor and concrete supplier.
2. Name of concrete testing service. 3. Name of technician making and testing specimens. 4. Truck number and delivery ticket number. 5. Date and location within the structure of concrete
placement. 6. Concrete type, class, mix proportions of materials, and design compressive strength at 28 days. 7. Slump, air content, unit weight, and concrete temperature. 8. Total
time period between batching and completion of placement for each truck. 9. Compressive strength and type of break for all tests. C. Field reports for concrete inspection shall contain
the general information noted above, plus ambient temperature and cylinder numbers. D. Test reports for masonry materials shall include proportions, composition, and compressive strength.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-15 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS
AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 3.2 COMMUNICATION A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall immediately notify the Owner, Contractor, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional
by telephone, fax, or email of any test results failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector shall immediately notify the Contractor of
any work found to be in nonconformance with the Contract Documents during inspections. If the nonconforming work is not corrected while the Special Inspector is on-site, the Special
Inspector shall notify the Owner and Registered Design Professional within 24 hours (one business day) and issue a nonconformance report. The Special Inspector may use the Special Inspection
NonConformance Report form at the end of this section or other similar form. C. If the nonconforming work is not corrected at the time of substantial completion of the structure or
other appropriate time, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner. 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit reports to the Owner, Special Inspector
and the Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspection or test. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. B. The
Special Inspector shall submit reports to the Owner and Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspections. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final
typed copies are not available. C. If requested by the Code Enforcement Official, the Special Inspector shall submit interim reports which include all inspections and tests performed
since the beginning of construction or since the previous interim report. Interim reports shall be addressed to the Code Enforcement Official with copies sent to the Registered Design
Professionals (Structural Engineer and Architect) and Contractor. Interim reports shall be signed by the agent performing inspections. 3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. At
the completion of work, each Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit an Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections to the Special Inspector stating that work was completed in substantial
conformance with the Contract Documents and that appropriate inspections and tests were performed. The Testing/Inspecting Agency may use the Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections
form provided at the end of this section or other similar form. B. At the completion of work, the Special Inspector shall compile all inspection and test reports generated by each Agent
into a Final Report of Special Inspections. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall state that required inspections have been performed and shall itemize any nonconforming work
not corrected or resolved. C. The Special Inspector may use the Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form based on CASE Form
102-2001. D. The Special Inspector shall submit The Final Report of Special Inspections to the Owner, Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official prior to issuance
of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-16 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December 15, 2020 SPECIAL INSPECTION NON-CONFORMANCE
REPORT NO. DATE: ___________________________ TO: CC: Contractor: FROM: ___________________________, Special Inspector PROJECT: PART I: REFERENCE SPECIAL INSPECTION
REPORT NO. (Attach copy of report) DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE: RDP RESPONSE: (PROVIDE ATTACHMENTS IF NECESSARY) RDP SIGNATURE ____________________________________
DATE__________________ IS RE-INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTOR REQUIRED □ YES □ NO PART II: CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION (To be completed by either the [General Contractor
or Construction Manager] or Subcontractor and returned to the Special Inspector and the RDP.) I verify that as of the date listed, the non-conforming item noted above has been corrected
as required. Date Completed By (Contractor’s Site Representative) RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-17 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES December
15, 2020 AGENT’S FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Project Name: Special Inspector: Location: Agent: Special Inspector’s Project: Agent’s Project: To the best
of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this project and designated for this Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes
the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments:
[Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.] Respectfully submitted, Agent of the Special Inspector _______________________________________
_______ (Type or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ______________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________
City, State, Zip Design Professional Seal or Certification RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-18 RENOVATION INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
December 15, 2020 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS Project Name: Registered Design Professionals Location: Architecture: Name Address
Owner: CORNELL UNIVERSITY Owner’s Address: Structural Engineering: Name Address Special Inspector: Name Address To the best of my information, knowledge, and
belief, the Special Inspections required for this project and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit
have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: [Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description
of uncorrected discrepancies.] Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Agent’s Final
Reports of Special Inspections are attached and are also a part of this Final Report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector ______________________________________________ (Type
or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ***END OF SECTION 01 45 33*** Professional Seal CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca,
New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and
by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of
all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate,
maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not
violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously
available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services
and hospitals. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction
operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project
site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 1. Impairments
“Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial
Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification
will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system”
or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority
Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch
Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing
equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board
of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure
and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide
additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers,
fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection
services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 8. At earliest
feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fireprotection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct
key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in
the vicinity of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating
units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall
be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating
condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental
Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety
for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness,
tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain
all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases,
braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation
shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight
enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection
of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions,
provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials.
3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or
curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas
of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees
and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable
codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where
fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure
systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing
removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure
systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately
after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain
and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent
property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails,
barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction
site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed
sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor
shall install Owner provided project identification signage. 2.10 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.11
FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca,
New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult
with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected
by execution of the work. 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment
of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in
sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service
and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage
or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from
accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the
approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A.
Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B.
Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-7 RENOVATION AND CONTROLS December 15, 2020 C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified,
or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations
to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain
temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility
company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions,
and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric
power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the
capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long
as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of
these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and
charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided
is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained
for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to
be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting
to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside
of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits
shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and
maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated
when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner
or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall
provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating
to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2.
Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for
such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY
UTILITIES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the
Owner's Representative. c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of
Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before
initial use. d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall
be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project. e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator
use. f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car
and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction
work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. h. Procure and coordinate the elevator
maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may
be necessary for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent
heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written
maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication,
operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. 1. If the Contractor elects to use the
building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each returnair grille in system, maintain to keep them free
of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. D. Any temporary system shall be
removed when no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 F. The Contractor shall provide
for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials,
including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental
to the Project. 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to
Cornell project representatives for communication during Work. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during
construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated
with such usage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary
installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01
51 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 23 Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 01 51 23-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020
SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish the following: 1.
Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold temperatures. 2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with
the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract. B. Include in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required. C.
Existing central steam systems may be used to the extent that they do not interfere with the safe and effective completion of Work. However, any modifications to existing systems shall
be corrected prior to the conclusion of work. D. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat. E. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall
be returned to functional order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary
heat. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to provide heat during any portion of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION
– NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 51 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to
be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from
public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions;
using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,
theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and
products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the
Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning
of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's
written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area.
The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor
has no impact at all on the Campus. E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall
be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the
progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's
Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the project location shall be
stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell
harmless from any accident or injury occurring at the designated storage site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty
regarding any security at the designated site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or
storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor
is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible
for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees
as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident
agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the storage site. All barrels must have labels affixed
identifying contents. G. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from
Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca,
New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel
and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all
materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course
of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing
facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities
in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings
used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All
surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint,
tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall
be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such
areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care
shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected
by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants.
The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or
installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once
installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided
products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits
of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish
floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid
materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed
and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces
from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape
areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials
for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger
any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E.
Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation
and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020 3. Furnish and install
all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration
or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description
of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project.
5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission
of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request
for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the
work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity
for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction b. Bearing and retaining walls CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING
01 73 29-3 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020 c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall
back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements
or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that
would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following
operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements:
Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut
and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the
Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner
and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials,
and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through
foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor
shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change
and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner
as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place
or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or
cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of inplace or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect
in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure
the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required
to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but
not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting
existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ
skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide
for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces
to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible,
neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill
from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with
the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020 C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate
paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire
surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system.
All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and
comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane
surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing
patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in
units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry
walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 RENOVATION AND REPAIRING December 15, 2020 9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing,
adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing
surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry
patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or
damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore
work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and
patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work
are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces
where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint
or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New
York PROJECT CLOSEOUT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. Substantial
Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and
apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been
met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value
of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine
that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will
submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on
the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor
as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection
System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire
Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be
in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require
the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. c. The
Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire
detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77
00-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated
from the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System
where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has
been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping fur a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic
test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect.
After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection.
A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification
of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items
appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces
in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by
major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's
Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion
of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in
new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials,
concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected
by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or
its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This
includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs,
utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished
as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed
and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned
over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after
final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas: 1.
Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and
experienced supervisors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 2.
Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include: a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including
coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces. b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork. c. Marking of duct-mounted
damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers. d. Cleaning
of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same. f. Removal
of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof. g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion. h. Removal and reinstallation of
ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning. i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning. 3. Cleaning
shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide
re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations
involved. b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building. c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000
cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine.
d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at
the furthest point of the supply ductwork. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-5 RENOVATION December
15, 2020 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance
stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY RHODES HALL 5TH
FLOOR FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner
shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be
inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of
equipment shall include: 1. Name of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8.
Acquisition Date (Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment
with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information,
visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the
equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals)
to the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 RENOVATION
December 15, 2020 F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST • Building Equipment • AC Drive/VSD • Air Dryer • Backflow Preventor • Air Compressor • Building • Sprinkler • Control • Vacuum • Pump
• Condensate • Glycol • CWC • HWC • Potable • Sanitary Sewer • Storm Sewer • Sump • Quality Water • Fuel • Fan • Exhaust • Supply • Return • Fume Hood • Furnace • Generator • Hot Water
Heater • Heat Exchangers • Boiler • Tank • Unit Heater • Fan Coil • VAV Box • Transfer Switch • Motor • Pump • Fan • Lift/Levelers • Water Softener • Reverse Osmosis 2.0 PRODUCTS –
NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 22*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR OPERATING
AND 01 78 23-1 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall compile product data
and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section,
as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to
the Owner prior to substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare
data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final
form. 1. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”. b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. c. Drawings in electronic format - Drawings are required in PDF
format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format. d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide type description of product,
and major component parts of equipment. - Provide indexed PDF bookmarks. - Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various
documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December
15, 2020 e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: - Title of Project - Identity of separate structure as applicable. - Identity of
general subject matter covered in the manual. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible
principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone
number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific
product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable
information. C. Submittal Data: 1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which
has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR OPERATING AND 01
78 23-3 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 D. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment
and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record
Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings
for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information
sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information
on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. d. Certification as to
asbestos free 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which
are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving
full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements
for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content,
for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance
curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating
instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance
Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's
parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8.
As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with
the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12.
Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine
and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly,
repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current
prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance
data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines
of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals. B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project. C. Submit
specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct
Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to
fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with
personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 RENOVATION MAINTENANCE DATA December 15, 2020 C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's
personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures
to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals
to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements
for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms
of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for
warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other
commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations
on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required
to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular
products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WARRANTIES
AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided
by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements
relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and
special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate
of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar
days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance
of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written
statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the
malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner,
an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during
non-normal working hours. 2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments
and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize
the existing warranty. 3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment
or facility. 4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four
(24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the
Owner in relation to the above conditions are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or
damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted
Work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work
regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner
are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted
as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for,
or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment
is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification,
or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required
to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion.
If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion
of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate
agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated
portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document
that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0
PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the
name of the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties,
bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence.
Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider.
Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning
of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure
in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals
within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0
GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications
to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE
OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents
in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the
Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01
78 39-2 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall
be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change
Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic
mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day
construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following
areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door
and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. Site related elements including: - Building outlines, entranceways, areaways,
roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data. e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing,
lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems g. Geotechnical subsurface
information h. Items that will require future maintenance i. Life safety critical items CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 RENOVATION December 15, 2020 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) a. Products where submittals are requested b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and
actuators. f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited
to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals
were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations
of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant
changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. 5. Environmental a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure D. Specifications
and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made
by Field Order or by Change Order. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 RENOVATION December 15,
2020 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature
of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-1 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 SECTION 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for the commissioning process to supplement other general commissioning process activity
sections and other technical sections that specify testing of components, systems and assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of
Plumbing" for commissioning process activities for plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 2. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process
activities for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 3. Division 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for commissioning process activities for electrical
systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Commissioning is a systematic process of confirming that all building systems perform interactively according to the
Owner’s Program Requirements and the Basis of Design and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. B. Commissioning
during design is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: 1. Verify the Owner’s Program Requirements and Basis of Design are clearly documented and they meet the Owner’s
goals and objectives. 2. Provide Design Review during AE design efforts. 3. Verify commissioning for the construction phase is adequately reflected in the bid documents. C. Commissioning
during the construction phase of this project is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: 1. Provide direction for the commissioning process during construction, particularly
providing resolution to issues and providing details not developed during design (ex. scheduling, participation of various parties, lines of reporting and approvals, coordination, etc.)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-2 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December
15, 2020 2. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. 3. Verify and document proper performance
of equipment and systems. 4. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. 5. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained. D. The Commissioning process
does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers to design a workable system nor the installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.
E. The CxA directs and coordinates the commissioning activities and reports to the Owner. All members in the construction process work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities
and meet the objectives of the Owner’s Project Requirement’s as detailed in the Contract Documents. F. The CxA works with the CM/GC according to established protocols to schedule
the commissioning activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the CM/GC and Owner for scheduling commissioning activities. Meanwhile, the CxA will integrate these activities
into the master construction schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.
G. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur. 1. Commissioning during construction
begins with a Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team conducted by the CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members. 2. Additional
meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems.
3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CxA through the submittal process, including detailed start-up procedures. 4. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds
from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with Prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing begins. 5. The contractors,
under their own direction, document and perform startup and initial checkout. The CxA documents that startup was completed according to the approved plans, when contracted. This may
include the CxA witnessing start-up of selected equipment, if contracted. 6. The CxA verifies installation integrity thru the use of checklists. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00
Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-3 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 7. The CxA develops specific
equipment and system functional performance test procedures. The contractors review the procedures. 8. The procedures are executed by the contractors, under the direction of, and documented
by the CxA. 9. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the contractor's expense and the system retested. 10. The CxA reviews the O&M documentation
for completeness. 11. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion, whenever possible. 12. The CxA reviews and pre-approves the training plan provided by the contractors.
13. The contractors coordinate and provide training via qualified instructors. 14. Training occurs. 15. The Owner verifies that training has occurred and provides a written statement
that training has occurred. 16. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Acceptance: A formal action, to declare that some aspect of the project meets
defined requirements, thus permitting subsequent activities to proceed. B. Acceptance Phase: Phase of commissioning after start-up and initial checkout when functional performance tests,
O&M documentation review and training occurs. C. Architect/Engineer (AE): the prime Consultant (Architect) and Subconsultants who comprise the design team, generally the HVAC Mechanical
Designer/Engineer, the Electrical Designer/Engineer and various other Subconsultants. D. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is
functioning in the tested modes according to the contract documents. E. Basis of Design (BOD): A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions and product selections used
to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of
individual items that support the design process. Also known as the Design Criteria. F. Checklists: Verification checklists that are developed and used during all phases of the commissioning
process to verify that the Owner’s Project Requirements are being achieved. This includes checklists for general verification, plus testing, training, and other specific requirements.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-4 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December
15, 2020 G. Commissioning Authority (CxA): An entity identified by the Owner who plans, schedules and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the Commissioning Process. The
Owner has engaged Horizon Engineering Associates, LLP as the CxA under a separate contract. H. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. I. Commissioning Process: A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project and includes verifying
and documenting that the facility and its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated and maintained to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. J. Commissioning
Process Progress Report: A written document that details activities completed as part of the commissioning process and significant findings from those activities that is continuously
updated during the course of a project. K. Commissioning Report: A document recording the results of the commissioning process, including the record documents, performance of the commissioned
systems and documents all sign-offs. L. Commissioning Specifications: The contract document that details the objective, scope and implementation of the construction and acceptance
phases of the commissioning process as developed in the Commissioning Plan. M. Commissioning Team: A team comprised of the CxA, Owner, AE, Construction Manager/General Contractor,
Contractors, maintenance and operations personnel, and occupants. Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to
implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. N. Contract Documents: The documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings, specifications,
change orders, amendments, contracts, Cx Plan, etc.) O. Contractor: the CM or subcontractors authorized representatives. P. Construction Manager (CM): the prime contractor for this
project. Generally refers to all the CM’s subcontractors as well. Also referred to as the Contractor, in some contexts. Q. Data Logging: The monitoring and recording of flow, current,
status, pressure, etc. of equipment using ‘stand-alone’ data recorders separate from the control system or the trending capacities of control systems. R. Deferred Performance Tests
(DPTs): Performance tests that are performed, at the discretion of the CxA, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design, or other
site conditions that disallow the test from being performed. S. Deficiency: A condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in
compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the Owner’s Project Requirements). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New
York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-5 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 T. Equipment Manufacturer: The multiple
companies that will manufacturer equipment and products for the commissioned systems and who will participate as required in the commissioning activities. U. Factory Testing: Testing
of equipment on-site or at the factory, by factory personnel, with or without Owner’s representative present. V. Functional Performance Test: The testing of the dynamic function and
operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under
full operation. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, etc.
The systems are run through all the control system’s sequence of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops
the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor.
W. General Contractor: The prime contractor for this project. Generally refers to all the GC’s subcontractors as well. Also referred to as the Contractor, in some contexts. X. HVAC&R:
Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration. Y. Issues Log: A formal and ongoing record of problems or concerns – and their resolution – that have been raised by members
of the commissioning team during the course of the commissioning process. Z. Manual Test: Using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify
performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the ‘observation’). AA. Monitoring: The recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.)
of equipment operation using data loggers or the trending capabilities of control systems. BB. Non-Compliance: See Deficiency. CC. Non-Conformance: See Deficiency. DD. Owner’s Project
Requirements (OPR): A written document that details functional requirements of the Project and the expectations of how the Project will be used and operated. This includes project
and design goals, measurable performance criteria, budgets, schedules, success criteria, and supporting information. (Also formerly known as the Design Intent Document.) EE. Owner’s
Representative or Project Manager (Owner): The contracting and managing authority for the Owner who oversees the design and/or construction of the project. FF. Over-written Value:
Writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES
HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-6 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 GG. Phased Commissioning: Commissioning that is completed in phases (by floors, for example)
due to the size of a project or other scheduling issues, in order to minimize the total construction time. HH. Re-Commissioning Management Manual: A single manual that contains information
required for recommissioning the projects’ building systems. II. Sampling: Functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment.
JJ. Seasonal Performance Test: Performance tests that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to their design conditions based on weather conditions. KK.
Simulated Condition: Condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (eg. Raising/lowering the set-point of a thermostat to see the response in a VAV box).
LL. Simulated Signal: Disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to simulate a sensor value for the purpose of testing a full range of conditions. MM. Startup: The initial
starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including completing construction checklists. NN. Systems Manual: A systems focused composite document that includes the operation manual,
maintenance manual, and additional information of use to the Owner during the occupancy and operations phase. OO. Systems, Subsystems, and Equipment: Where these terms are used together
or separately, they shall mean “as-built” systems, subsystems, and equipment. PP. Test Procedures: The step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements.
The test procedures are developed by the CxA. QQ. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed
test procedures. The test requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. RR. Training Plan: A written document that details the expectations, schedule, budget and deliverables
of commissioning process activities related to training of project operating and maintenance personnel, users, and occupants. SS. Trending: Monitoring over a period of time. TT. Verification:
The process by which specific documents, components, equipment, assemblies, systems, and interfaces among systems are confirmed to comply with the criteria described in the Owner’s
Project Requirements. UU. Warranty Period: Warranty period for the entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends typically for
SUBMITTALS CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-7 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS
December 15, 2020 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate
test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records
to CxAupon request. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team: Contractors will attend a meeting of the Commissioning Team, chaired by the CxA, to review
the scope of commissioning process activities and the Commissioning Plan with discussions on milestones, activities, and assignments of responsibilities. The flow and type of documents
and the amount of submittal data given to the CxA will be determined. Meeting minutes will then be distributed to all parties by the CxA. B. Commissioning Meetings: Contractors will
attend coordination meetings with the Commissioning Team, chaired by the CxA, to review progress on the Commissioning Plan, construction deficiencies, scheduling conflicts, and to discuss
strategies and processes for upcoming commissioning process activities. C. Miscellaneous Construction Meetings: The CxA attends selected planning and job-site meetings in order to
remain informed on construction progress and to update parties involved in the commissioning process. D. Pre-testing Meetings: Contractors will attend pretest meetings with the Commissioning
Team, chaired by the CxA, to review startup reports, pre-test inspection results, testing procedures, testing personnel and instrumentation requirements, and manufacturers’ authorized
service representative services for each system, subsystem, equipment, and component to be tested. E. Testing: Contractors will coordinate with testing personnel and agencies for timing
and access for CxA to witness test. F. Manufacturers’ Inspection and Startup Services: Contractors will coordinate services of manufacturers’ inspection and startup services. G. Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing: Contractors will coordinate with plan and schedule for testing, adjusting and balancing for timing and access for CxA to witness process. 2.0 PRODUCTS CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-8 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment
being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls system in Division
23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special
equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from the vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and
left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming
and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in
the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. Data logging
equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner. E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality
and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature
sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy
of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals:
See Section 1.5 – SUBMITTALS for requirements. B. Checklists 1. The CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems. C. Red-lined
Drawings: The Contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings. Preliminary red-lined drawings must
be available to the Commissioning Team for use prior to start of the Functional Performance Testing. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final
as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the asbuilt drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-9 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 D. Operation
and Maintenance Data: Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment
and systems. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections
have been made by the Contractor. E. Demonstration and Training: Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. A complete training plan and
schedule must be submitted by the Contractor to the CxA two weeks (2) prior to any training. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA two (2) weeks
prior the training session. 3.2 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractors for use in developing the Commissioning Plan; testing plans and
checklists. B. Provide the Basis of Design documents, prepared by the architect and approved by the Owner, for use in developing the Commissioning Plan; testing plans and checklists.
C. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in Commissioning Team activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Commissioning meetings.
2. Construction phase coordination meetings. 3. Piping and ductwork testing and flushing verification meetings. 4. Procedures meeting for testing, adjusting and balancing. 5. Testing
and demonstration of systems, subsystems and equipment. 6. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems and equipment. 7. Final review and acceptance meetings D. Provide
utility services required for the commissioning process. E. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work between the CxA, the Contractor and the Architect and Engineers to
ensure that the commissioning activities are incorporated into the master schedule. F. Review and approve the commissioning plan. G. Coordinate any seasonal or deferred testing. H.
Ensure that any seasonal, deferred testing and/or deficiency issues are addressed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL
5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-10 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 3.3 ARCHITECT’S DUTIES A. Attend the Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – Design Team, Commissioning
Kick-Off Meeting – Construction Team and selected team meetings. B. Perform submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing preparation, other items as contracted. C. Provide
the Basis of Design Document. The designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications,
control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. D. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during the
commissioning, according to the contract documents. E. Construction Record documents and specifications. F. Insure that the CxA’s submittals comments are incorporated into the Design
Professional’s submittal comments prior to sending to CM or GC for distribution. G. Facility operating procedures for normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation. H. Participate
in resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies identified during the warranty-period commissioning process. 3.4 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall assign
representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to,
the following brief overview: 1. Facilitate the coordination of commissioning and incorporate commissioning activities into the overall project. 2. Provide copies of all applicable
submittals as required in Division 01 including all changes thereto. 3. Provide detailed startup procedures. 4. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in
collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, perform corrective actions. 5. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.
6. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a scheduled basis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR
GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-11 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 7. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved submittals and shop
drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CxA. Furnish a copy of the O&M literature to the CxA forty five (45) days after final equipment submittals. 8. In each purchase order
or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M literature, commissioning tasks and training. 9. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with
construction schedule. 10. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA. 11. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the CxA. 12. Complete
commissioning process test procedures. 13. Submit training plan for approval, coordinate training and provide qualified instructors for training of Owner personnel. 14. Assist the CxA
as necessary in the seasonal testing, deferred testing an deficiency resolution. 15. Ensure that subcontractors correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to submittals, O&M
manuals and red-lined drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 16. Provide written as-built controls drawings and sequences of operation for all equipment.
17. Provide a written list of time of day schedules and a schedule frequency to review them for relevance and efficiency. 18. Provide written recommendations for recalibration frequency
of sensors and actuators by type and use. 19. Provide a written list of all user adjustable set-points and reset schedules with a brief discussion of the purpose of each and the range
of reasonable adjustments with energy implications 20. Provide a written schedule frequency to review the various set-points and reset schedules to ensure they are current relevant
and efficient values. 3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Roles and Responsibilities 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific
responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with subcontractors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL
COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-12 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding
equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. 3.6 COMMISSIONING AGENT’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Roles and Responsibilities 1. The CxA is not responsible for the design concept,
the design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating or construction management. 2. The CxA may assist with problem solving and non-conformance
items or deficiencies, but the CxA is not the Design Engineer / Engineer of Record, and the commissioning process does not preclude the design engineer / Engineer of Record of responsibilities
for system evaluations, adequacy of systems to meet the OPR, capacities of systems, quality control checks, or any of the other elements and recommended final acceptance of systems
to the Owner. 3. The primary role of the CxA is to coordinate and direct the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms,
centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultants with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise. B. Commissioning
Plan 1. The CxA shall develop a Commissioning Plan at the start of the project. The Commissioning Plan shall outline the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation
requirements of the Commissioning Process. 2. The Commissioning Plan shall be a “living document” in which information is added to or modified by the Commissioning Team during the course
of the Project. 3. At the end of the Project, the CxA shall provide the Owner with the Final Commissioning Plan for the Owner’s use. C. Document Review 1. Review the Owner’s Project
Requirements and Basis of Design developed by the design professionals. 2. Perform a focused review of the drawings and specification during the Design Development and near the end
of the Construction Document Phase, if contracted. 3. Develop full commissioning specifications for all systems and equipment to be commissioned. The commissioning specifications will
be subject to approval of the design team and included in the final construction specifications. 4. Review submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance for commissioning
needs, concurrent with the AE’s reviews. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01
91 00-13 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 D. Cx Team Meetings 1. Commissioning during construction will begin with a ‘Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting – for Construction Team’
conducted by the CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with all of the commissioning team members. 2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, and will
be scheduled by the CxA on a weekly basis with necessary parties of the commissioning team attending, in order to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities and resolve
problems. E. Coordination and Scheduling 1. Coordinate and direct commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized
documentation, clear and regular communications, and consultations with all necessary parties. 2. Coordinate commissioning work with the CM/GC to ensure that commissioning activities
are being scheduled into the master project schedule. F. Commissioning Progress 1. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. 2. Attend selected
planning and jobsite meetings to obtain information on construction progress. 3. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process.
G. Pipe Testing, Flushing and Cleaning 1. Review and approve the pipe testing, flushing and cleaning plan submitted by the Contractor. 2. Witness all or part of the pipe testing, flushing
and cleaning and be sufficiently confident that proper procedures are being followed. 3. Document via the online Commissioning Issues Log any deficiencies in the procedures or results.
H. Pre-Functional Checks 1. Verify proper installation of components, equipment, systems and assemblies. Sampling procedures may NOT be employed on systems and equipment. I. Equipment
and System Startup and Verification 1. Review and approve component, equipment, system and assembly startup plan developed and submitted by the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-14 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 2. Approve system
startup by reviewing startup reports, if contracted; and by selected site observation. 3. Review the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing execution plan for the project, which shall be
submitted by the TAB subcontractor. 4. Verify and document the accuracy of the air and water systems balancing by spot testing the air and water reported field values with TAB subcontractors
and by reviewing completed reports. J. Functional Performance Testing 1. With assistance from the Contractor, write Functional Performance Testing procedures for all components, equipment
or systems to be commissioned. 2. With the assistance of the Contractors, coordinate Functional Performance Testing. Witness and approve Functional Performance Testing performed by
the Contractors. 3. With the assistance of the Contractors, coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved. 4. Witness seasonal or deferred Functional
Performance Testing as necessary. K. Issue/Deficiency Logs 1. The CxA shall prepare a formal, ongoing, online record of deficiencies, problems and concerns – and their resolution –
raised by members of the Commissioning Team during the Commissioning Process. 2. Issues will be recorded on an online Commissioning Issues Log for the AE, CM/GC and Contractors to resolve
to the satisfaction of the Owner. Issues will be added by the CxA. Team members are required to post their own responses to issues pertaining to their work. Team members are required
to respond to issues added to the list within five (5) working days of being added by the CxA. 3. Issues will be revisited one (1) time to verify that the proper corrections have been
made. The Owner reserves the right to deduct from the Contractors’ contract costs associated with additional revisits required for outstanding issues. 4. When issues are resolved,
they will be closed on the Issues Log by the CxA. L. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. The CxA shall review of the documentation submitted by the Contractor as required by the Specifications
for completeness and accuracy. This commissioning review supplements, but does not replace, the Architect/Engineer’s review. 2. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s
responsibilities are clearly defined. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91
00-15 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 M. Training 1. The CM/GC and Contractors will provide all documentation and qualified training personnel for training. 2. The CxA will
verify through the Contractor’s plan and schedule, training agendas, and select observations that proper training procedures were followed on all commissioned systems. 3. See appropriate
section below pertaining to training. N. Systems Manual Requirements 1. Index of Systems Manual with notation as to content storage location if not in actual manual. 2. Executive Summary
3. A list of recommended operational record keeping procedures at the facility level, including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rationale for each. 4. Maintenance procedures,
schedules and recommendations. 5. Ongoing Optimization O. Post Occupancy Review 1. The CxA will return to the site within the 12-month warranty period to address the following: review
current building operations with facility staff and address outstanding issues related to the Owner’s Project Requirements; Interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns
with operating the building; Identify problems covered under warranty or under the original construction contract. 2. The CxA will make suggestions for improvements in the content of
the O&M Manuals. Any required changes shall be made by the contractor responsible for that section. 3. The CxA shall assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests
for services to remedy outstanding problems. P. Commissioning Final Report 1. The CxA shall provide a final report following the completion of all Functional Performance Testing. The
report is to outline compliance and non-compliance to the construction documents, as well as identify concerns relative to future performance CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca,
New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-16 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Prefunctional checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are installed and operational. They ensure that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout)
may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full Prefunctional checkout. The Prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior
to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system. The Commissioning Authority shall complete the Pre-Functional checks in the field, with assistance
from the installing Contractors (where necessary). B. The installing contractors, under the direction of the CxA, shall perform Functional Performance Testing of systems and sub-system
performance after Pre-Functional checks have been completed and all outstanding issues resolved. C. The installing contractor will perform tests specified in Division 1 commissioning
process activity Sections and other sections specifying testing procedures according to approved testing procedures. 1. Verify and test performance using actual conditions whenever
possible. 2. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test under actual conditions. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation.
After test, return settings to normal operating conditions. 3. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical. D. The CxA shall witness and document the results of all
functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the Contractors for review and comment. E.
Deficiencies/Non-Conformance 1. The CxA will record the results of the functional test on the test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance items shall be noted and reported to the
Owner and Contractors on a standardized form. 2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. 3. Every effort will be made
to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. 4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CxA
discusses the issue with the executing contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING
01 91 00-17 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 5. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the contractor accepts responsibility to correct it, the CxA documents the deficiency
and the contractor’s response and intentions or corrections. The CxA and contractor then proceed to another test or sequence. Once the contractor corrects the deficiency, the test
is rescheduled and repeated in the anticipation of correct operation or function. If a deficiency is identified, the cost of retesting will be as per section 3.7. 6. When there is
a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible, the CxA documents the deficiency and the contractor’s response. The deficiency is then forwarded
to parties assumed to be responsible for the deficiency. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussion as needed. Final
interpretive authority is with the AE. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner and CxA. The CxA will then document the resolution process. Once the interpretation and resolution
have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency. The CxA then reschedules the test as stated in the section above. Costs of retesting are as stated below in the applicable
section. F. Cost of Retesting 1. The cost for the contractor to retest a Prefunctional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are
not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the CM/GC. 2. For a deficiency identified, not related to any Prefunctional checklist or start-up fault,
the following shall apply: The CxA will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no “charge” to the CM/GC for their time. However, the CxA’s and owner’s time for a second retest
will be charged to the CM/GC, who may choose to recover costs from the responsible contractor or subcontractor. Before retesting occurs, the CM/GC will inspect the deficiency and respond
to the CA that the issue has been addressed. 3. The time for the CxA and owner to direct any retesting required because a specific Prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported
to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be back charged to the CM/GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible
for misinformation or deficiency. 4. The contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA and owner at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status
of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution. 5. Any required
retesting by any contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the CM/GC, contractors or subcontractors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-18 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 G. Failure due
to Manufacturer Defect 1. If 10% or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents
(mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CM/GC,
CxA or Owner. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following. 2. Within one week of notification from the CM/GC or Owner, the Contractor or manufacturer’s
representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the CM/GC or Owner within two weeks of the original notice.
3. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all
proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation.
4. The CM/GC, CxA or Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 5. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor
and the Contractor will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the CxA or owner will decide whether to accept the solution. 6. Upon acceptance, the Contractor
and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair
work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. H. Approval 1. The CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test
form. Formal approval of the functional test is made later after review by the CxA. The CxA recommends acceptance of each test to the Owner using a standard form. I. Deferred Testing
1. Unforeseen Deferred Testing – If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and
functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the Owner. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests, as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties
will be negotiated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-19 RENOVATION
REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 2. Seasonal Testing - During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system’s design) shall be
completed as part of this contract. The CxA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate contractors, with facilities
staff and the CxA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and record documents due to seasonal testing will be made by the contractor. 3.8 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A.
Refer to individuals sections listed in Section 1.2 – SUMMARY for specific systems to be commissioned. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The specific content and format requirements
for the standard O&M manuals are detailed in Division 01. Special requirements for the controls contractor and TAB contractor are found in Division 23. B. AE Contribution – The AE
will include in the beginning of the O&M manuals a separate section describing the systems including the Basis of Design prepared by the AE. They will also provide Simplified professionally
drawn single line system diagrams on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17” sheets. These shall include (ex. chillers/hot water system(s), condenser water system, supply air systems, exhaust systems,
etc.). These shall show major pieces of equipment such as (ex. pumps, chillers, heat exchangers, control valves, expansion tanks, coils, service valves, etc.). C. CxA Review and Approval
- Prior to substantial completion, the CxA shall review the O&M manuals, documentation and record documents for systems that were commissioned to verify compliance with the Specifications.
The CxA will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to the CM/GC, Owner or AE, as requested. Upon a successful review of the corrections, the CxA recommends approval and acceptance
of these sections of the O&M manuals to the CM/GC, Owner or AE. The CxA also reviews each equipment warranty and verifies that all requirements to keep the warranty valid are clearly
stated. This work does not supersede the AE’s review of the O&M manuals according to the AE’s contract. 3.10 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. The CM/GC and contractors shall be responsible
for training coordination, scheduling and ultimately for ensuring that training is completed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-20 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 B. The CxA shall oversee the training of Owner’s personnel for commissioned
equipment and systems. 1. The CxA shall interview the Owner’s staff to determine the special needs and areas where training will be most valuable. The Owner and CxA shall decide how
rigorous the training should be for each piece of commissioned equipment. The CxA shall communicate the results to the CM/GC and contractors. Who will in turn communicate to the subcontractors
and vendors who also have training responsibilities. 2. In addition to these general requirements, the specific training requirements of Owner personnel by contractors, subcontractors
and vendors is specified in the individual sections listed in Section 1.2 – SUMMARY. 3. Each Sub and vendor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the CM/GC
and/or contractors for review and approval prior to training. The CM/GC and/or contractors will submit one comprehensive training plan to the CxA and Owner. 4. The plan will be reviewed
by the CxA and Owner. Comments pertaining to its deficiencies will be forwarded to the CM/GC and Contractors. The training plan will be rewritten until approved by the CxA and Owner
The final approved training plan will cover the following elements: a. Equipment (included in training) b. Intended audience c. Location of training d. Objectives e. Subjects covered
(description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.) f. Duration of training on each subject g. Qualified instructor for each subject h. Instructor qualifications i. Methods
(classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.) 5. For the primary HVAC equipment, the Controls Subcontractor shall provide
a discussion of the control of the equipment during the mechanical or electrical training conducted by each subcontractor or vendor. 6. Training documentation shall include the following
items: a. Copy of the training plan, including schedule, syllabus, and agenda. b. Copy of the Owner’s Program Requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New York GENERAL
COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-21 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 c. Copy of the Basis of Design. d. Compiled operations
manuals. e. Compiled maintenance manuals. f. Completed manufacturer training manuals. g. Red-lined drawings. h. Other pertinent documents. 7. The CxA develops criteria for determining
that the training was satisfactorily completed, including attending some of the training, etc. The CxA recommends approval of the training to the Owner using a standard form. The
owner signs the approval form/letter template. 8. At one of the training sessions, the CxA presents a presentation discussing the use of the blank functional test forms for re-commissioning
equipment 9. Video taping of the training sessions in DVD format will be provided by the CM/GC, with tapes cataloged by the CM/GC and added to the O&M manuals, if required by Division
1 specifications. 10. The mechanical design engineer shall at the first training session present the overall system design concept and the design concept of each equipment section.
This presentation shall be one to two hours in length and include a review of mechanical systems using the simplified system schematics (one-line drawings). 3.11 REPORTING A. The CxA
will provide regular reports to the Owner, on a pre-determined frequency in accordance with the project schedule. The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning
team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through, memos, progress reports, etc. B. The CxA will keep all documentation and log all commissioning-related
issues that require current or future attention including deficiencies. An agreed-upon form will track the status of documentation and testing for each piece of equipment and system.
3.12 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A. The CxA oversees and maintains the development of commissioning documentation. The commissioning documentation shall be kept in three ring binders,
and organized by system and sub-system when practical. All pages shall be numbered, and a table of contents page(s) shall be provided. The commissioning documentation shall include,
but not be limited to, the following: 1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 91 00 Ithaca, New
York GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR GENERAL COMMISSIONING 01 91 00-22 RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS December 15, 2020 2. Identification of installed systems,
assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase. 3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's
prestart and startup checklists for systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested. 4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks,
and startup procedures have been completed. 5. Certificate of readiness certifying that systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing. 6. Test and inspection
reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 9. Approved final test and balance report for the building being
commissioned. 10. All accepted shop drawings of systems equipment. Shop drawings shall be full size sheets folded as required to fit in binders. 11. All pre-functional performance
test checklists, signed by personnel performing and/or witnessing test, organized by system and sub-system. 12. All verification and functional performance test checklists/results,
signed by personnel performing and/or witnessing test, organized by system and sub-system. This information may be used for calibrating the original energy simulation model. The revised
model will be used to create the baseline for energy use in the building. ***END OF SECTION 01 91 13* TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR RHODES HALL 5TH FLOOR RENOVATION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-1 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL SCHEDULE 0 - RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. SCHEDULE 1 - SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Repair procedures for
selective demolition operations. 3. Related Sections include the following: SCHEDULE 2 - DEFINITIONS B. Remove/Demolish: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose
of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. C. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, reinstall
them where indicated. D. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. E. Existing to Remain: Existing
items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. SCHEDULE 3 - MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except
for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and
shall be removed from Project site. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-2 SCHEDULE 4 - SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data:
For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures
proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. C. Schedule of Selective
Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Provide Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner’s
on-site operations are uninterrupted to greatest extent possible. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4.
Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 6. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner’s
partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. E. Predemolition Photographs
or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition
operations. Submit before Work begins. SCHEDULE 5 - QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar
in material and extent to that indicated for this project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply
with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-3 C. Standards:
Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but
not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations. SCHEDULE 6 - PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective
demolition so Owner’s operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than seven days notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations. B. Maintain access to existing
walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission
from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding
purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present on-site. Remove per drawings and specifications. 1. If materials
suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the Owner. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection
facilities in service during selective demolition operations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-4 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing
Warranties: Remove, replace, patch and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
D. PRODUCTS 1.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specifications
Sections. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. B. Inventory
and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict
with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Perform surveys as the
Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 2.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least seven
days notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-5 2.3
PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide alternative routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades
and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective
demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. C. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary
enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 2.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous
or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding or pollutions. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted
areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of
dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective operations began. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-6 2.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows. 1. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side
into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 2. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 3. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are
to remain condition existing before selective demolition operation began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager’s requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs,
walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean
and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during
transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in original locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations
after selective demolition operations are complete. E. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove
masonry between saw cuts. 2.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 1. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-7 2.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 1. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished
materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION SPECIFICATION SECTION 02 82 13 Asbestos
Abatement at Cornell University Rhodes Hall for the Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation Prepared for: Cornell University Facilities and Campus Services Humphreys Service Building Cornell
Ithaca, NY Campus Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Phone: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 Delta Project No. 2017.286.007 Stephen Prislupsky, Director of Environmental
Services NYS DOL Certified Asbestos Project Designer Certificate No. 90-10891 Issue for Bid Dated: December 15, 2020 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-2 SECTION 02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The asbestos abatement work will consist of the removal and
disposal of non-asbestos materials, asbestos containing materials and asbestos contaminated materials as a part of the Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation Project. B. Reference Drawing
AR-101 for asbestos abatement notes, locations, information and details. Reference the Division 00 Procurement Requirements section for the project’s PreRenovation Asbestos Survey
Report. C. Asbestos containing and asbestos contaminated materials to be removed include the following: 1. Transom Windows with Asbestos-Containing Glazing Compound – Remove eight
(8 qty) 12” x 34” Transom Windows with asbestos containing glazing compound. Transon Windows are present above doors in Rooms 551 (2 windows), 551A, 557A, 559, 597 and Corridor 50047
(2 windows). Approximately 1.25 square feet ACM Glazing Compound total for all 8 transom windows (7.67 lf @ ¼” bead width per window @ 8 windows). 2. Interior Wall Window with Asbestos-Containing
Glazing Compound – Remove one (1 qty) 42” x 42” Window with asbestos containing glazing compound in the Room 551A East Wall. Approximately 0.3 square feet ACM Glazing Compound (14
lf @ ¼” bead width). D. Window Unit removals shall be performed within minor-project negative pressure tent work areas having attached airlock systems for access/egress. E. The Contractor
shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor
of its obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the Work. F. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing
codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply. 1.03 SPECIAL JOB
CONDITIONS A. The Contractor may submit for a Site Specific Variance to accomplish the Project. Variance petition shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for review and approval
prior to submission to the New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-3 B. Work
shifts and working hours shall be as necessary to complete the project in the required time frame and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review/approval. The Contractor
shall coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility, the Owner and the Owner’s representative. C. Contractor to submit man power and work schedule with bid. D. Owner will
provide a tie-in location for electric and water source. The contractor will be responsible for providing GFCI electrical panel(s) and connecting to the building system as necessary
for project power. E. Any air sampling necessary to meet OSHA requirements will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Contractor. F. Waste Dumpster locations shall be approved by
the Facility Representative. All dumpsters receiving RACM Waste shall be enclosed and lockable (i.e. no open-to dumpsters). 1.04 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall assume
full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers, authorized
visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the Work. B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code Rule 56 (herein referred to as
Code Rule 56), 40 CFR 61, 29 CFR 1926, and as specified herein. Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent requirements. C. The Contractor must
maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State Department of Labor and Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work related to this Project, including the removal, handling,
transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the Contractor to engage in or supervise
Work on any asbestos Project have a valid NYS asbestos handling certificate pursuant to Code Rule 56. E. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents shall constitute a breach of the
Contract and the Owner shall have the right to and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future
compliance. F. The contractor shall be responsible for any waste water permits required to perform his work under this contract. Any cost associated with waste water permits shall
be included in his Bid. G. The contractor shall be responsible for any Local City and/or State building permits required to perform his work. Any cost associated with building permits
shall be included in his Bid. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Reference the Front–end and Division 01 documents for eBuilder submittal requirements/procedures. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-4 B. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall submit an electronic
pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department
of Labor. 2. Progress Schedule: a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of Work for each floor. b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion
of each major element of Work including substantial completion dates for each Work Area and Floor. 3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory agencies together
with proof of transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt). 4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies. 5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that
clearly indicate the following: a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially. b. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container. 6. Disposal Site/Landfill
Permit from applicable regulatory agency. 7. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. C. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.D for all submittals,
documentation, and postings required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities. D. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 10 days of project completion, the Contractor shall
submit an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final payment. 1. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted
during the Work. 2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log. 3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name, NYS DOL certification number
and type of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.). E. Fully executed/signed Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted as per applicable State and
Federal Regulations and time frame requirements. F. The contractor shall also be responsible for completing and submitting the Owner’s “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form
included in the front-end Bid Documents. This form shall be submitted and approved by the Cornell Project Manager prior to the Owner issuing any payment for the project. 1.06 PRE-BID
MEETING A. Bidders shall attend a pre-bid meeting. Bidding Contractors will be notified in advance of the meeting. B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with the Contract
Documents prior to attending the conference. 1.07 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified: B. Federal Regulations: 1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA) Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS
ABATEMENT 028213-5 2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA) 3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA) 4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention
Signs and Tags" (OSHA) 5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA) 6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA) 7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails,
Handrails and Covers" (OSHA) 8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA) 9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA) 10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation
Standards (DOT) C. New York State Regulations: 1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL). 2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC) 3. 10
NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH) D. Standards and Guidance Documents: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory
Protection 2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems 3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings
(Purple Book) 4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance 5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” 1.08 NOTICES
A. When applicable, the Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities as indicated below. 1. At least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning
abatement activities, send written notification to: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator 26 Federal Plaza
New York, NY 10007. 2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities send written notification to: New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health,
Asbestos Control Program. State Office Campus Building 12 - Room 454 Albany, NY 12240 B. The Contractor is required to send notifications to regulatory agencies via mail or package
delivery service that will provide proof of delivery and receipt. C. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior to beginning abatement
activities as required by Code Rule 56. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-6 1.09 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING
A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who shall provide Project Monitoring and Air Sampling for the project. B. The Contractor is
required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall comply with
all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the Project. C. The Consultant shall review and approve or disapprove all onsite submittals as required by section 3.01.
D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s). This individual shall be designated as the Asbestos Project Monitor (APM). 1. The APM shall be on-site
at all times the Contractor is on-site. The Contractor shall not be permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is on-site (except for inspection of barriers and negative air system
during non-working days). 2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in writing to ensure compliance with the Project documents and all
regulations. The APM shall have the authority to Stop Work when gross Work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed, or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the
removal area exceed .01 f/cc or background level. a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until corrective measures have been taken and the situation
has been corrected. b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3. The APM shall provide the following services: a. Inspection of the Contractor's
Work, practices, and procedures, including temporary protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and Project specifications. b. Provide abatement Project air sampling
as required by applicable regulations and the Owner’s requirements. Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air
sampling. c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the Project are certified by the appropriate regulatory agency. d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's Work,
and report any deviations from the schedule to the Owner’s Representative. e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations. f. Verify that the Contractor is performing
personal air monitoring daily, and that results are being returned and posted at the site as required. g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and
Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences. 4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM. Additional inspections shall be conducted as required
by Project conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM. a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The
purpose of this inspection is to verify the existing conditions of the Work Areas and to document these conditions. b. Pre-Abatement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is
to verify the integrity of each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos containing material. This inspection shall take place only after the Work Area is fully prepped
for removal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-7 c. Work In-Progress Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is
to monitor the Work practices and procedures employed on the Project and to monitor the continued integrity of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall be
conducted by the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities at least twice every Work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as warranted. d. Visual Clearance
Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all materials in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue remains; no pools of
liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air clearance testing. e. Post-Clearance Inspection: The
purpose of this inspection is to ensure the complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the Work Area after satisfactory final clearance sampling and removal of all isolation/critical
barriers and equipment from the Work Area. E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or
AHERA). Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. 1. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Consultant
shall have samples analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If TEM clearance is required by the Owner, AHERA protocols/methodology shall be followed. 2. Samples shall be collected
as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearance air sampling is utilized by the owner,
the clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory clearance criteria, then TEM analysis of
the entire set of clearance air samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH/ELAP accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air sample result in
fibers per cubic centimeter. 3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber levels at or above .01 fibers/cc or the established background
level, whichever is greater, outside the regulated Work Area, Work shall stop immediately and corrective measures required by Code Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers
and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor shall bear the burden of any and all costs incurred by this delay. 4. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated
air sampling results collected during abatement and all final air clearance results to the Commissioner of Labor. 1.10 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING A. In addition to the requirements
of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to perform personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which abatement activities occur in order to determine
that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and utilized. B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time weighted average and
30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the permissible exposure and excursion limits. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS
ABATEMENT 028213-8 C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP approved laboratory, subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative.
D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24) hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports
shall be delivered and posted at the Work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in all work being stopped until compliance is achieved.
1.11 PROJECT SUPERVISOR A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following qualifications: 1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York
State certification as an Asbestos Supervisor. 2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined by OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum
of one year experience as a supervisor. 3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate in the primary language of the Workers. B.
If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete. The Project
Supervisor cannot be removed from the Project without the written consent of the Owner. The Project Supervisor shall be removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner. C.
The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes the entry/exit logs as required by New York State Department of Labor and section 2.03 of the specifications
and the Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the specifications. D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall represent the Contractor
in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor. 1.12 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before exposure to airborne
asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. 1. This examination is not required if adequate records
show the employee has been examined as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past year. 2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to
employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and within thirty (30) calendar days before or after the termination of employment in such occupations. 3. Medical Examination
records shall be maintained on site for each employee. 1.13 TRAINING A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct each employee with regard
to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of protective clothing and equipment. B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI
Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
028213-9 C. An onsite "tool box talk" is mandatory for all Contractor field personnel before the asbestos removal can begin. This talk will review Cornell University practices and
procedures pertaining to asbestos control. Workers not complying with these specifications or Cornell University practices and procedures will be asked to leave the job. 1.14 RESPIRATORY
PROTECTION A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department
of Health and Human Services. B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators
shall be permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that individual. Fit-test records shall be maintained on site for each employee. C. Where
fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to be utilized
during gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM. D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator training
program. E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment.
G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters will be
removed and discarded during the decontamination process. Filters cannot be reused. Filters must be changed if breathing becomes difficult. H. Filters used with negative pressure
air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than one eight (8) hour work day. I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the required
respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be permitted to return. J. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored
on site designated for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available by the Contractor. 1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver
all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-10 1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surfaces
and under cover. 2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft. 3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized. C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from
the job site. Materials contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary shutdown of HVAC and lock out
of electric power to abatement work areas shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be coordinated with the owner. If electrical circuits, machinery and other electrical
systems in or passing through a given regulated abatement work area must stay in operation, the contractor shall isolate/seal the live electric as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part
56 Subpart 56-7.7. B. The Owner will provide a tie-in location to building power for the Contractor’s GFCI electric panel for project power. All temporary power to the work areas
shall be brought in from outside the work area through a ground-fault circuit interrupter at the source. The contractor will be responsible for all temporary power (including the power
required by the owner's representative for air sampling equipment). All operations associated with electrical service work (i.e. lockout, temporary power hook-up, etc.) shall be performed
by a licensed electrician. C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all Work Areas including decontamination chambers. 1. The entire Work Area shall be kept
illuminated at all times. 2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. D. All temporary devices and wiring
used in the Work Area shall be capable of decontamination procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping. E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing
system. Provide hot water heaters with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project
with disposable protective whole body clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside
the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable
coverings with elastic wrists or tops. B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete disposable outfits per day for each individual
performing abatement Work. C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering any Work Area. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-11 D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye protection, and footwear whenever
they enter the Work Area. 2.02 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas. Locate signs at such distance that personnel
may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps required before entering the area. 1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum 20" x
14" displaying the following legend. DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA 2. Provide
3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to asbestos Work Area. Install
tape 3' to 4' AFF. B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos. 1. Provide asbestos danger
labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following legend: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD 2. Provide the
following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos contaminated material in
accordance with United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172: RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SOLID, NOS ORM-E, NA 9188 ASBESTOS 3. Generator identification information
shall be affixed to each waste container indicating the following printed in indelible ink: Generator Name Facility Name Facility Address Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-12 2.03 DAILY PROJECT LOG A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name, name, address
and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of Owner’s Representative; name, address and phone number of Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement
Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue department and all other New York State Department of Labor requirements. B. All entries into the log
shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no circumstances shall
pencil entries be permitted. C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name, social security number, and time. D. The Project Supervisor shall
document all Work performed daily and note all inspections required by Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and enclosures. 2.04 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS A. Provide
all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this Contract. Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular
welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding and ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry standards.
B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. 2.05 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER) A. Wet all asbestos-containing
materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. International Protective Coatings
Corp.: Serpiflex Shield 2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent 3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant 2.06 ENCAPSULANT A. Encapsulant
shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible. 2.07 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with
asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also be imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings. B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums
capable of being sealed air and water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around
drum circumference to assure ready identification. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-13 C. Containers and bags must
be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS and Code Rule 56. When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom,
the bags must also be appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on the bag/container in waterproof markings. D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for
non-ACM waste or trash. Any material placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled and disposed of as ACM waste. 2.08 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT
A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2.
B. Provide tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral vacuum hoods connected to a HEPA vacuum with flexible hose. 2.09 POWER TOOLS A. Any power tools
used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation. 2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING A. All polyethylene
(plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to sheeting used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container) shall
be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting. B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced
fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for the flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work
Area, immediately stop Work and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56. Should there be elevated fiber levels outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work, institute emergency
procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne
by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Medical approval, fit test reports, and NYS DOL certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any Contractor’s employees
to the asbestos Work Area. C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor during abatement activities at a location approved
by the Abatement Project Monitor: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS
ABATEMENT 028213-14 2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance: a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person employed in the removal, handling,
or disturbance of asbestos. b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by the regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. c. Documentation
that Workers have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project. 3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results. 4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for
the laboratory that will be analyzing the OSHA personnel air samples. 5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. 6. Project documents (specifications
and drawings.) 7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the most up-todate notifications and variances are on-site. 8. Applicable regulations. 9.
Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project. 10. Approved Abatement Work Plan. 11. List of emergency telephone numbers. 12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual
calibration certification. 13. Daily Project Log. D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor during abatement activities: 1. Contractor
license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Air Sample Log. 3. Air sample results. 4. Project Monitor Daily Log 5. Asbestos Survey Report. 6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368
“Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure construction and
Work Area preparation. F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be conducted within negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers.
Demolition debris may be disposed of as construction and demolition debris provided the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not contaminated with asbestos and there has
been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the demolition debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be disposed of as asbestos waste. 3.02
REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one
type of ACM shall be abated at a time within a Work Area. Where there are multiple types of ACM requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential abatement shall be followed.
B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to ensure full penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not
display evidence of saturation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-15 C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended
water while ACM is being removed. D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of
asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment and methods specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power operated tools used shall be provided with
HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation. E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be
thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods and any required solvents to completely remove any adhesive, mastic, etc. F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal
bags or other suitable container upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to fill
a single bag or container and minimally at the end of each workshift. G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Sharp components likely
to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then wrapped with sheeting. H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up procedures
unless approved in a Site Specific Variance. I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be encapsulated using lag cloth. J. All construction and
demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant to be contaminated with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste. K. The use of metal shovels, metal
dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area. 3.03 MINOR TENT ENCLOSURES A. Tent enclosures may only be used where specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific
Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor. B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or
construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted. C. Each tent work area shall be precleaned. All objects / equipment that will remain in the area during abatement shall be
sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene and tape. D. The tent shall be a single use barrier constructed with a rigid frame and at least two layers of six mil polyethylene unless
one layer of six mil polyethylene is otherwise permitted by Code Rule 56. Tents with twenty (20) square feet or less of floor space or no gross removal of friable ACM shall be constructed
of one (1) layer of six mil polyethylene and shall include walls, ceilings and a floor (except portions of walls, floors and ceilings that are the removal surface) with double folded
seams. All seams shall be sealed airtight using duct tape and/or spray adhesive. E. Minor-project tents shall be constructed with at least one airlock for worker/waste egress.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-16 F. A monometer shall be used for all OSHA Class I abatement. G. Negative
air shall be maintained at four (4) air changes per hour for non-friable tent enclosure work areas. In Minor tent enclosure work areas, a HEPA vacuum may be used to maintain the required
air changes. H. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.09. I. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.05. J. Waste material shall be placed
in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers. The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed and shall then be placed in a
second bag/container before being transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. These
carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day.’ K. Following completion of gross abatement and
after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed. 1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary
equipment shall be decontaminated and removed from the Work Area. 2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid,
and shall be decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area. 3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness and completion of
abatement. 4. After the waiting/settling and drying time requirements have elapsed, aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the Environmental Consultant.
5. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the tent shall be collapsed into itself, placed in suitable disposal bags, and transported to the waste decontamination
enclosure. Isolation and critical barriers shall then be removed. PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE 4.01 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal
Site shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from the site. Waste shall be removed
from the site only during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. No waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present and the
Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein. C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within ten (10)
calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work. D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental Consultant a
valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-17 Asbestos
Hauler's Permit. The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the hauler's permit with the proper authority. E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental
Consultant, shall inspect all material in the transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests. F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner,
the Contractor shall not permit any off-site transfers of the waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any other off-site asbestos material. The Hauler must travel
directly to the disposal site as identified on the notifications with no unauthorized stops. 4.02 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable
(i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.). No open containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically permitted by a Site Specific
Variance. B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags (license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental
Conservation Part 364 permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from the site immediately. C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers
of 6 mil polyethylene. Once on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies.
D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD E. The New York State
Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container. F. The container is not permitted to be loaded
unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container. 4.03 ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS A.
The proposed asbestos waste manifest shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start of the project for review and approval. B. The Manifest shall be completed
by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place. C. The Manifests shall have
the appropriate signatures prior to any waste being removed from the site. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-18 D.
Copies of the completed Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant and the Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection. E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site,
the Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Manifest
to the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Manifest to the Owner’s Representative within 14 days of the waste container being removed from the site. Failure
to do so may result in payment being withheld from the Contractor. G. Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner’s Representative
with the final close-out documentation. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 1 SECTION 033020
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification
sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section specifies miscellaneous cast-in-place concrete for housekeeping pads, including formwork, reinforcing, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." 2. ACI 117 “Specification for
Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” 3. ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete." 4. ACI 301 "Specifications
for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 5. ACI 304 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete" 6. ACI 305 "Hot-Weather Concreting." 7. ACI 306R "Cold-Weather Concreting."
8. ACI 311 "ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection" and "Guide for Concrete Plant Inspection and Testing of Ready-Mixed Concrete." 9. ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
10. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete." 11. ACI 347 "Guide to Formwork for Concrete." 12. ACI SP-15 "Field Reference Manual." A copy of this publication shall
be kept in the field office at all times during concrete construction. 13. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." 14. NYSDOT "Standard Specification for Construction and Materials." B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.” Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 2 C. Source Limitations: To minimize irregularities in appearance or color, obtain cementitious materials of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s
plant. Obtain aggregates, admixtures, and water for each type of concrete construction exposed to view in completed project from same source for duration of that type of construction.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Refer to Specification Section 014533 and Schedule of Special Inspections. 1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Refer to Specification Section 014533 and Schedule
of Special Inspections. 1.5 MATERIAL EVALUATION/QUALITY CONTROL A. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor shall employ Testing Agency acceptable to Engineer and Architect to perform material
evaluation tests and evaluate concrete mixes prior to submitting. 1. Testing Agency shall be qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E329. B. Submit concrete testing service qualifications
demonstrating experience with similar projects. C. Require concrete supplier to provide delivery tickets for each truckload of concrete. Tickets shall be presented to and reviewed
by Contractor and Special Inspector or Testing Agency prior to discharging concrete into structure. 1. Tickets shall contain project identification name, name of Contractor, name of
concrete supplier, location of batch plant, date and time of concrete batching, truck number, delivery ticket number, concrete type and class, concrete mix number, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, and amount of total mix design water that can be added at site prior to discharging into structure if total mix design water
was not used when batched. See Part 3 of this section for maximum water amount that can be added at site. D. The Registered Design Professionals (RDPs) for Structural Engineering and
Architecture and the Special Inspector will visit construction site at appropriate intervals to determine if work is in general conformance with Contract Documents and specifications.
Notify RDPs 48 hours before anticipated time of completion of reinforcement for a given section of work so they may determine if site observations are required. If site observations
are required, do not place concrete until RDPs have had opportunity to observe reinforcement. E. Concrete strength will be evaluated by compression testing in accordance with ASTM
C39 as part of the Special Inspections. Test results shall be provided to the Contractor, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional (RDP) responsible for Structural Engineering.
Evaluation and acceptance will be in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318, Section 26.12. Should evidence of low-strength concrete exist, or if test Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 3 results indicate non-conformance with these specifications, additional investigation as outlined in ACI
318 Section 26.12.4 may be directed by the project Registered Design Professionals (RDP). All such investigation, including the cost of the Architect’s and Engineer’s time, shall be
at the Contractor’s expense. F. If, after additional investigation, evidence of low-strength concrete still exists, load tests in accordance with Chapter 27 of ACI 318 may be ordered
by the project Registered Design Professionals (RDP). In the event the concrete is determined to be inadequate by the project Registered Design Professionals (RDP), the Contractor shall
remove it from the Project and replace it with concrete conforming to these specifications, subject to project Special Inspections and testing requirements herein. All such remedial
work shall be at the Contractor’s expense. G. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that all concrete and concrete placement are in accordance with the Project Specifications.
Failure of project Registered Design Professionals (RDP) or Testing Laboratory to detect defective work, workmanship, or materials shall in no way prevent rejection and the Contractor
taking accepted corrective action when such defects are discovered. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement.
Show bar sizes, lengths, material grade, schedules, spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements of reinforcement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, and supports for reinforcement.
a. Show elevations of reinforcement for all members at minimum 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale. b. Show locations of construction and control joints. c. Reference Contract Drawing number
and addendum number in each shop drawing. 2. Submit for information only formwork details. Design and construction of formwork remains sole responsibility of Contractor. Formwork drawings
shall be prepared and stamped by New York State Professional Engineer. B. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix designs for concrete 15 days minimum before start of concreting. Submittal
must be in the Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form at end of this section for each class of concrete. C. Submit to Special Inspector and Engineer material certificates signed by manufacturers
certifying each material complies with specifications. Submit proposed admixtures including chloride ion content prior to submitting mix design. D. Submit data and installation instructions
for proprietary materials. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 4 E. Maintain copies of approved submittals
on site and make available to Special Inspector and Authority having Jurisdiction for use in inspection of construction. F. Submit option for slab placement (see Part 3 of this section)
and layout of slab joints. G. Prior to slab placement, submit to Special Inspector and Engineer for information only, a written protection program for slab. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND
HANDLING A. Store materials so as to preserve their quality and fitness for work. 1. Store reinforcement and formwork in manner to prevent bending, damage and accumulation of dirt.
1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. Contractor shall be responsible for correction of concrete work not conforming to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by Architect. B. Remove work found to be defective. Replace with new acceptable work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete:
Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips,
3/4 by 3/4 inch minimum. C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with maximum VOC of 450 g/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion or impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound. 1. Formulate
form release agent with rust inhibiter for steel form-facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for uncoated deformed bars.
B. Supports for Reinforcement: Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS
CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 5 C. Minimum 16-gauge annealed tie wire, ASTM A 82. D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. Type
II or Type I/II only. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F, with loss on ignition of less than 6 percent. C. Ground-Granulated, Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. D. Water:
ASTM C 94, clean, fresh, drinkable. E. Aggregates: NYSDOT-approved, Section 703-02 (normal weight), one source and as herein specified. 1. Fine Aggregate: Coarse, clean, sharp, uniformly
graded natural sand free of loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. Less than 10 percent passing No. 100 sieve and less than 3 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 2. Coarse Aggregate
for Slabs: Uniformly graded to 1 1/2-inches, clean, processed, crushed stone obtained from quarried bedrock with low absorption and free of flat/elongated particles. NYSDOT-approved,
size 3A gravel can be used to meet large diameter requirement. Gradation similar to blended NYSDOT Type CA 2 and size 1A or ASTM C 33 Type 57 and Type 8, blended and modified as follows:
Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 95 to 100 3/4 inch 82 to 94 1/2 inch 40 to 68 3/8 inch 20 to 44 No. 4 0 to 10 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining: ASTM C 260. B. Set-Control Admixtures:
Not permitted. C. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. D. Water-Reducing Admixture: “Eucon WR-75” or “Eucon WR-91” by Euclid Chemical Co.; “MasterPozzolith 200” by Master Builders; or “Plastocrete
161” by Sika Chemical Corp. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A, and not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 6 E. Mid to High Range Water Reducer/Finish Enhancer: “MasterPolyheed 997” by Master Builders; “Sikament 686” by Sika
Chemical Corp; or accepted equivalent. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494 Type A and F and not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 ounces a square yard and complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. B. Curing-Sheet Materials: ASTM C
171; waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated burlap. 1. For slabs exposed to view, provide one of the following or accepted equivalent: a. “HydraCure S16" by PNA
Construction Technologies. b. “UltraCure NCF/SUN” by McTech Group. C. Crack Repair Material: For cracks smaller than 1/8 inch, use “Sika Pronto 19” methacrylate by Sika; “Rapid Refloor”
polyurea by Metzger McGuire; or accepted equivalent. For cracks greater than 1/8 inch, use specified joint filler material. D. Hardener: “MasterKure HD 300WB” by Master Builders, Inc.;
or accepted equivalent for exposed slabs. E. Chamfer Strips: Provide wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to provide 3/4-inch chamfer on exposed edges. 2.6 PROPORTIONING
AND MIX DESIGN A. Prepare design mixtures for type and strength of concrete in accordance with ACI 301, section 4.2.2 and these specifications. Use independent testing facility acceptable
to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Where concrete production facility can establish uniformity of its production for concrete of similar strength and
materials based on recent test data, the average strength used as a basis for determining mix design proportions shall exceed specified design strength by requirements of ACI 301, Section
4.2.3.3(a). C. When a concrete production facility does not have field-test records for calculation of standard deviation, the required average strength shall be determined in accordance
with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.3(b). D. Documentation of average compressive strength shall comply with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.4(a), 4.2.3.4(b), or 4.2.3.4(c). Submit sample standard
deviation calculation and/or results of trial mixtures used as basis for determination of f’cr. See Specification Section 1.6.B. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 7 E. Concrete Quality: Location Required 28-Day Compressive Strength (psi) Approximate Cementitious Materials Content (pounds)
Maximum Water/Cement Ratio Percent Entrained Air Normal Weight interior housekeeping slabs 3,000 530 0.50 (265 pounds maximum total water) 2* * Do not add air-entraining admixtures.
Air entrapment occurs as result of mixing. F. Slump: 5-inch maximum for normal and mid-range, water-reduced mixes. G. Concrete containing a high-range, water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)
shall have maximum slump of 6 inches unless otherwise accepted by Engineer. H. Use 564 pounds (6 sacks) maximum of cement for each cubic yard for interior slabs and minimum sand content.
I. For normal-weight concrete, quantity of coarse aggregate in pounds must be in range of 1.25 to 1.5 times quantity of fine aggregate in pounds. Provide minimum of 1,800 pounds of
coarse aggregate for each cubic yard of concrete. J. Pozzolans: 1. Pozzolans may be substituted for cement in normal-weight concrete for interior slabs, including fly ash at a maximum
rate of 20 percent by weight or groundgranulated, blast-furnace slag at a maximum rate of 35 percent by weight. 2. Pozzolans shall be used at a rate of 20 percent by weight of total
cementitious materials for exterior slabs. 3. Submittals shall include actual mix design, including percentage of pozzolans and test results showing mix meets specified 7-day compressive
strength where indicated, 28-day compressive strength, and air content. 4. Protect and heat concrete containing pozzolans during cold-weather conditions. Maintain protection and heat
until 70 percent of specified design strength is achieved. K. Pumping concrete is permitted only if mix designs specifically prepared and used previously for pumping are submitted.
Mix designs not previously used for anticipated pump line lengths shall be tested by Contractor to verify suitability for project before use at site. Pump line shall have 5-inch-minimum
inside diameter and be used with 5inch pumps. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GENERAL A. Examine conditions under which work shall be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Construct formwork
so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347 and ACI 117. B. Construct
forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for chamfers and other
features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent concrete mortar leakage. C. Fabricate forms
for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. D. Chamfer exposed
corners and edges as indicated using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. E. Fit corners and joints with gaskets
or tape to prevent leakage. F. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before
concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. G. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be
reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable. Apply new form-release agent. When forms are reused for successive concrete
placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patch forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect. H. Clean and coat forms before erection. Do not coat forms in place. 3.3 OPTION FOR SLAB PLACEMENT A. For placement of slabs that will be exposed
in final structure, place construction and contraction joints as shown in drawings or as recommended by ACI 302 if not shown. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 9 3.4 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement. B. Clean
reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. D. Use of nails in forms and use of clay
brick to support reinforcement is prohibited. E. Lap bar splices as indicated. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Wire-tie splices. F. At points where bars lap-splice, including distribution
steel, provide wire-tied minimum lap of 30-bar diameters unless otherwise required. G. Place concrete in manner to ensure alignment of elements remains unchanged. H. Place slab reinforcing
one-third of slab thickness below top surface of slabs on grade and 1 inch below top surface of slabs on metal deck. Support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, or bolsters as required.
I. Dedicate workers to placement of reinforcement to continuously monitor and adjust reinforcement location during concrete placement. 3.5 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Saw cut contraction
joints as soon as possible after finishing, generally within 4 to 16 hours. Make sample cut to determine if concrete surface is firm enough so it is not torn or damaged by blade. B.
Use soft-cut contraction joints. 1. Depth of cut shall be one-fifth of slab thickness with minimum of 1 inch. C. Obtain permission from Engineer if diamond blade cutting is to be used.
D. Continue half of bar reinforcement through contraction joints in concealed slabs. 3.6 PLACING CONCRETE SLABS A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork and
reinforcement is complete and in compliance with construction documents and approved shop drawings, and required inspections have been performed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 10 B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete" and as specified. C. Deposit concrete within 1-1/2 hour after water is added to dry batching, or use retarding admixture if accepted by the registered design professional
responsible for structural engineering. D. Maximum of 2 1/2 gallons for each cubic yard of total mix design water can be added in field. Water must be added prior to discharging and
testing concrete. At no time shall total water exceed amount listed in accepted mix design. E. Housekeeping Slabs: 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on plastic surface. Do not disturb slab surfaces before beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcement
in proper position during concrete placement operations. See requirements for reinforcement placement. F. Pumping concrete is permitted only if mix designs specifically prepared and
used previously for pumping are submitted. Pump line shall have 5-inch-minimum inside diameter and be used with 5-inch pumps. 3.7 SLAB FINISHES A. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Apply
trowel finish as specified and immediately follow with fine brooming to slightly scarify surface. B. Delay finishing as long as possible. Allow bleed water to evaporate before finishing.
C. Finish slabs to specified tolerances given. Patching low spots shall not be permitted. Perform grinding as soon as possible, preferably within 3 days, but not until concrete is sufficiently
strong to prevent dislodging coarse aggregate particles. 3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure interior slabs by sheet-curing by covering slabs with curing sheet material for 7 days minimum.
Avoiding rapid drying at end of curing period. Place curing cover in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed with waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair holes or tears in cover during curing period. B. Do not allow foot or other traffic over slabs during 7-day curing period. C. Cure slabs or pads 14 days minimum
before placing equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 11 D. Interior Exposed Slabs: 1. Apply two coats
of hardener after slabs have cured 28 days minimum at rate of 100 square feet/gallon in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.9 JOINT SEALANT A. Install joint sealant in
exposed contraction joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Clean joints thoroughly before applying sealant. 3.10 REPAIR OF SURFACES A. Contractor shall be responsible
for cost of repairing slab defects. B. Test surfaces for flatness and level tolerances. Test uniform surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope. C. Correct flatness and levelness
defects by grinding or removing and replacing slab. Patching low spots not permitted. Repair areas shall be remeasured and accepted by Owner. D. Repair cracks only when slab is more
than 90 days old. Use crack repair material. For cracks over 1/8 inch, fill crack with oven-dried sand prior to application of crack repair material as recommended by manufacturer.
Contractor has option to remove and rebuild areas of cracking. Mask cracks to limit crack repair material to crack only. E. Repair curling only when slab is more than 90 days old. F.
Curling at slab edges exceeding 1/8 inch when measured with a 10-foot straightedge shall be made level by grinding or planing. Locate straightedge with its end at the slab edge, and
measure space between straightedge and slab. G. If curling exceeds 1/4 inch, level slab by grinding or planing as stated above. In addition, core-drill slab 10 inches from joint at
2 foot intervals, alternating on each side of joint, and inject nonshrink grout to fill void beneath slab. H. Repair edge spalls occurring from shrinkage cracking or from Contractor's
operations with methods acceptable to Engineer. I. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/2 inch in any dimension down to solid concrete but not to a depth of less than 1 inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding
compound has dried. J. Repair methods not specified above may be used subject to acceptance of Architect. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid MISCELLANEOUS
CONCRETE SLABS 033020 - 12 END OF SECTION 033020 (3/16) Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-1 SECTION 042000 CONCRETE
UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the unit masonry work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Concrete block walls and partitions, patching and infill in existing walls. 2. Metal joint reinforcing, anchors, ties, weeps,
closures and related accessories for masonry. 3. Chases, recesses, pockets and openings in masonry as required for installation of work by others. 4. Building in of items furnished
by others into masonry, including access doors, door frames, anchors, sleeves and inserts, ducts, and other similar items to be embedded in masonry. 5. Protection, pointing and cleaning
of masonry. 6. Lintels (steel and block) and reinforcement for openings in masonry walls. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cutting, Patching, and Repairing - Section 017329. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Anchoring details. 2. Control and expansion joint locations and details. 3. Special brick shapes. B. Submit Samples for the following:
1. Each type of block in sufficient number and color to show full range of color, texture and shade. Submit certification that brick meets ASTM standards specified herein. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-2 a. Submit samples of all special shapes required showing color range and sizes, including,
but not limited to, wall blocks and brick wall base. 2. Joint reinforcing, each type, width and proposed location (labeled). 3. Anchors, wedges and ties, each type, width and proposed
location (labeled). 4. Joint filler, each type. 5. Mortar color, 12" long cured sample. C. Submit technical and installation information for the following: 1. Mortar materials, each
material and mortar type. 2. Certification of mortar mix. 3. Flashing material, descriptive literature. 4. Concrete block, joint reinforcing, anchors, ties and joint filler; submit
manufacturer's technical and descriptive literature. 5. Block manufacturer shall submit certifications of compliance with ASTM C 90, C 331 and UL 618 prior to any job site delivery.
Field sampling of concrete block may be tested by an Independent Testing Laboratory retained by the Owner according to the requirements of ASTM C 140. D. Cleaning Procedures: Submit
proposed procedures and materials for cleaning masonry work; including certification that cleaner will not adversely affect stone, gaskets, sealants, etc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform
to the following non-cumulative tolerances (any masonry work not meeting these standards shall be re-built as directed by the Architect). 1. Variation from the plumb: a. In lines and
surfaces of columns, walls and arrises: 1). In 10 feet 1/8" 2). In any story of 25 feet maximum 1/4" 3). In 40 feet or more 1/4" b. For external corners, expansion joints and other
conspicuous lines: 1). In any story of 25 feet maximum 1/4" 2). In 40 feet or more 3/8" 2. Variation from the level or the grades indicated on the drawings; for exposed lintels, sills,
parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: a. In any bay or 20 feet maximum 1/4" b. In 40 feet or more 1/4" Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-3 3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan related portion of columns and partitions: a. In any bay or 20
feet maximum 1/4" b. In 40 feet or more 1/2" 4. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls: a. Minus 1/8" b. Plus 1/8" 5. Variation in dimensions
of masonry openings: a. Horizontal dimension -0" + 1/16" b. Vertical dimension +0" - 1/16" B. Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the following: 1. 2011 "Building
Code Requirements for Masonry Structures," (TMS 402-11/ACI 530-11/ASCE 5-11). 2. 2011 "Specification for Masonry Structures," (TMS 602-11/ACI 530.1-11/ASCE 6-11). 3. Brick Industry
Association (BIA) "Technical Notes on Brick Construction." C. Pre-Construction Conference: Prior to installation of masonry and associated work, Contractor shall arrange a meeting
with Masonry Subcontractor, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with masonry wall performance, including the Architect and Owner. Contractor shall record discussions
and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least seventy-two (72) hours' advance notice to participants prior to convening conference. Review methods and procedures
related to masonry work, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review masonry requirements (drawings, specifications and other Contract Documents). 2. Review required submittals,
both completed and yet to be completed. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule related to masonry work and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and
facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 5. Review weather and forecasted weather
conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. 6. Coordinate work with air/vapor barrier membrane and related flashing, review details to avoid conflicts. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-4 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, handle and protect all materials from
damage, moisture, dirt and intrusion of foreign matter. Store all masonry units and mortar materials on raised platforms and under ventilated and waterproof cover. Store packaged
materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, marked with manufacturer's name and product brand name. Immediately reseal containers after partial use. Remove and replace damaged
materials. B. Masonry Units: Pack, deliver and store to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spalling or other damage. Store, protect and ventilate units at project site. C. Aggregate:
Store with provisions for good drainage. D. Reinforcement and Anchors: Store and protect so that when placed, joint reinforcement and anchors will be free of soil, dirt, ice, loose
rust, scale, or other coatings which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar, and will not be disfigured or bent out of shape. E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil
from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed
mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door
frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Standard Concrete Block 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1, low alkali (less than 0.6%), single
source for entire project. 2. Aggregates, ASTM C 331, lightweight expanded shale, clay or slate aggregates, manufactured by the rotary kiln process equal to "Solite," "Norlite," or
"Haydite." a. Block scheduled to receive painted finish shall contain normal weight aggregate meeting ASTM C 33 in addition to lightweight aggregate in order to receive a smooth, uniform
finish. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: Load-bearing, normal weight aggregate concrete masonry units conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 90, Type 1. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-5 a. Block for rated walls shall be 75% solid units. b. All other block may be hollow units. 4. The producer of
the concrete masonry units shall furnish certification from an independent testing laboratory confirming that all 8" or larger masonry units meet all of the UL 618 requirements for
two (2) hours or better (as required), referencing full scale fire test reports (ASTM E 119). All 4" and 6" units shall conform to "National Bureau of Standards" and "National Research
Council" full scale fire tests. 5. Sizes and Shapes: Nominal face size 8" x 16" by thickness as indicated on drawings, with stretcher units, jamb units, header units, square corner
units (at ends and corners of exposed or painted work), sash units (at control joints within masonry wall), lintel units and other special shapes and sizes required to complete the
work. 6. Finish: For exposed or painted block surfaces, in addition to ASTM requirements, block shall have uniformly dense, flat, fine grain texture, with no cracks, chips, spalls,
or other defects which would impair appearance. For concealed CMU, surfaces shall be free from deleterious materials that would stain plaster or corrode metal. 7. Curing: All concrete
block shall be steam cured, and air dried for not less than thirty (30) days before delivery. 8. Density of concrete block shall not exceed one hundred and five (105) lbs. per cubic
foot. 9. Shrinkage: Shrinkage of concrete blocks shall not exceed 0.065% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 426-99. 10. Water Content a. At the time of delivery to the job site,
concrete masonry units shall have a value, in weight of contained water, of not more than thirty (30) percent of the fully saturated content for the unit tested. b. Ship all units from
the factory, and store at the job site, with all necessary protection to prevent increase of water content from rain and other sources. B. Joint Reinforcing for Masonry Walls 1. For
interior block walls and partitions, provide standard reinforcing fabricated of 9 ga. side and cross rods, truss or ladder design, no ties, spaced every other block course. Provide
prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections of walls or partitions. Reinforcing shall be mill galvanized conforming to ASTM A 641, Class B-1, applied after fabrication. 2. Wire
used in assemblies noted above shall be cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82. 3. Approved Joint Reinforcing Manufacturers Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-6 a. Hohmann & Barnard b. Wire-Bond c. Heckmann Building Products d. National Wire Products Industries, Inc. C. Anchors and Ties 1.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 16 gauge, equal to No. 100 Dovetail Anchor Slot made by Heckmann Building Products, No. 305 anchor slot made by Hohmann & Barnard,
or approved equal by other manufacturers. 2. Flexible Metal Ties for Dovetail Slots: Hot-dip galvanized, 16 gauge by 1" wide by Heckmann Building Products Inc., or approved equal manufacturer
noted above in Para. C.5. a. No. 106 Dovetail Corrugated Anchor. b. No. 129 Dovetail Triangle Tie. 3. Wire Mesh: Hot-dip galvanized sixteen (16) gauge steel wire, square mesh, width
3" by length to suit condition; No. 268 by Heckmann Building Products, or approved equal by manufacturer noted above in Para. C.5. 4. For anchoring masonry to structural steel, provide
hot-dip galvanized steel, as listed, or approved equal by manufacturer noted above in Para. C.5: a. Made by Heckmann Building Products. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 153, with
zinc coating of 1.5 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. 1). No. 195 Column Anchors 2). No. 197 Column Anchors 3). No. 315 Weld-On Anchor Rods with No. 316 Triangle Ties 4). No. 315-B Weld-On
Anchor Straps with No. 316 Triangle Ties b. Made by Hohmann & Barnard or approved equal. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 153, with zinc coating of 1.5 oz. of zinc per sq. ft.
1). No. 355 Column Anchors 2). No. 356 Column Anchors 3). No. 357 Beam Anchors 4). No. 359 F anchor straps with VWT tie. 5. For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside
of steel beams, provide hot dip galvanized steel tube anchors equal to No. 419 and No. 421 made by Heckmann Building Products, No. PTA-420 made by Hohmann & Barnard, or approved equal
by manufacturer noted above in Para. C.5. 6. For anchoring CMU interior partitions to underside of structural deck, provide 4" x 4" x 1/4" galvanized steel angles (ASTM A 36), 3'-0"
long spaced 3'-0" o.c. alternately on each side of partition. Anchor partition securely to structural deck. D. Reinforcing Bars and Rods: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-7 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, standard color, one source. B. Hydrated
Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: Clean, washed, buff colored sand, graded per ASTM C 144. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable
for drinking. 2.3 MORTAR MIX A. Interior Masonry Construction: Provide Portland cement/lime mortar conforming to ASTM C 270, Type N. For load-bearing conditions, mortar shall conform
to ASTM C 270, Type S. B. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of unit masonry. Use grout of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement
which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019. C. Mixing 1.
General: Add cement just before mixing and mix dry. Use sufficient amount of water as necessary to produce workable mix. Mix in small batches to make plastic mass. 2. Mixing: Machine
mix all mortars in approved type mixer with device to accurately and uniformly control water. Add hydrated lime dry. Mix dry materials not less than two (2) minutes. Add water, then
mix not less than three (3) minutes, not to exceed five (5) minutes. Mix only amount of mortar that can be used before initial set. Do not use mortar which has reached its initial
set or two (2) hours after initial mixing, whichever comes earlier. Mortar may not be retempered. Clean mixer for each batch, whenever mortar type is changed, and at end of each day's
work. 3. Acceleration or other admixtures not permitted. 4. Mortar shall have a flow after suction of not less than seventy-five (75) percent of that immediately after mixing as determined
by ASTM C 91. D. Admixtures 1. No air-entraining admixtures or cementitious materials containing air-entraining admixtures shall be used in the mortar. 2. No antifreeze compounds or
other substances shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point. 3. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used in mortar. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-8 2.4 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Neoprene Joint Filler: Provide closed cell neoprene, Type NN-1, conforming
to ASTM D 1056, Grade 1, high performance, as manufactured by Williams Products Inc., or equal made by D. S. Brown, Norton, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation
may properly commence. 2. Verify that masonry may be completed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design. 3. Do not start
any work until mock-ups are approved by the Architect. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect in writing. 2. Do not proceed with installation
in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Starting of work by the Contractor means acceptance by the Contractor of the substrate. 3.2 COORDINATION
A. Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Concrete Block:
Do not wet concrete block units. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Build walls/infill to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units,
using units of nominal thickness shown. 2. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Create penetrations as required for the work of other trades
in existing block walls. 3. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately
adjacent to the opening. Coordinate with all trades. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-9 4. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed
masonry patterns to match existing walls to remain. If inconsistant, provide running bond. Lay concealed concrete block with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than
two (2) inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units of less than four (4) inches horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Alert Architect
if the existing varies from the running bond pattern described here. B. Mortar Bedding and Jointing 1. All joints between bricks shall be completely filled with mortar. Bed joints
shall be beveled per BMI recommendations, with the brick then shoved in place. At cavity wall construction, care shall be taken that no excess mortar goes into masonry cavity. Head
joints shall be completely filled with mortar and shall be formed by applying a full coat of mortar to the entire end or the entire side, as the case requires, and then shoving the
mortar covered end and/or side of the brick tightly against the bricks previously laid; the practice of “slushing” by throwing mortar into the head joints will not be permitted. All
brick shall be laid without disturbing the brick previously laid. Brick shall be laid within a minute or so after the mortar is placed. Dry or butt joints will not be permitted.
Grouting shall be done only as necessary. Do not slush head joints. 2. Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar
in starting course on exterior walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, where solid CMU is used and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with
concrete or grout. a. To ensure alignment of brick and block coursing, adjust block back-up by cutting block to insure alignment of coursing or use adjustable anchorage. 3. Lay masonry
walls with 3/8" joints unless otherwise shown on drawings. 4. Tool exposed joints slightly concave after the mortar joint is thumbprint hard. Concealed joints shall be struck flush.
5. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments
are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2 brick length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces
of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. D. Built-In Work 1. As the work progresses, build in items specified
under this and other Sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 2. Mortar in door frames, access doors, louvers and other metal items embedded
or built into masonry work solidly with mortar as the masonry units are laid up. 3. Grout under lintels, bearing plates, and steel bearing on masonry with solid bed grout. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-10 4. Sleeves, pipes, ducts and all other items which pass through masonry walls shall be caulked
with interior grade sealant meeting requirements of Section 079200, so as to be air tight and prevent air leakage. Refer to Section 078413 for packing of voids in rated masonry walls.
5. Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with grout which have anchoring, reinforcing rods, supporting or hanging devices embedded in the cell including stone anchors and window
or curtain wall anchors. 6. Fill vertical cells of masonry units solid with mortar on each side of door frames to sixteen (16) inches beyond. 7. Unless otherwise noted, fill vertical
cells of masonry units solid with grout which are below steel bearing plates, steel beams, and ends of lintels, to eight (8) inches beyond bearing and from floor to bearing. 8. Place
wire mesh in horizontal joint below masonry unit cells to be filled with mortar, to prevent mortar from dropping into unfilled cells below. E. Cutting and Patching 1. All exposed masonry
which requires cutting or fitting shall be cut accurately to size with motorized carborundum or diamond saw, producing cut edges. 2. Holes made in exposed masonry units for attachment
of fasteners or conduit penetrations and similar items shall be neatly drilled to proper size. 3. All masonry which requires patching in exposed work, if approved by Architect, shall
be patched neatly with mortar to match appearance of masonry as closely as possible and to the Architect's satisfaction. Rake back joints and use pointing mortar to match as required.
F. Ties and Anchors for Masonry Construction 1. Provide ties and anchors as shown or specified, but not less than one metal tie, spaced not to exceed sixteen (16) inches o.c. horizontally
and/or vertically. Provide additional ties within 1'-0" of all openings and adjacent to expansion joints and spaced not more than 16" apart around perimeter of openings. 2. Anchoring
Masonry to Structure: Provide an open space not less than 1/2" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials. 3. Attach brick veneer to cold formed metal framing by anchoring brick to studs using specified anchors penetrating through sheathing and through flange of stud. Prior to
application of anchors cover sheathing and vapor barrier with tape specified herein. Space anchors 8" o.c. at each stud; provide stainless steel screw anchors for attaching anchor
to studs. G. Control and Expansion Joints Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-11 1. Provide expansion, control and isolation
joints in masonry as shown. Build in related items as the masonry work progresses. 2. CMU Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints
spaced not to exceed 40'-0" o.c. In addition, locate joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following: a. At structural column or joint between bays.
b. Above control joints in the supporting structure. c. Above major openings at end of lintels upward and below at ends of sills downward. Place at one side of jamb for openings not
less than 6'-0" wide and at both sides for openings over 6'-0" wide. d. At reduction of wall thickness. e. Where masonry abuts supporting structure. f. If additional joints are required,
indicate same on approved shop drawings. H. Lintels 1. Install loose steel lintels, allowing eight (8) inch bearing at ends where indicated on the drawings for openeing. 2. Unless
otherwise noted, For door openings, duct penetrations, or louvers/dampers in concrete block walls, provide and install specially formed U-shaped concrete block lintel units with reinforcing
bars in accordance with the following table, filled with grout. Number and Size of Reinforcing Bars Required at Concrete Block Lintels Maximum Clearance Span Wall Width Rebar
No. - Size 2'-0" to 6'-0" 6'-0" to 8'-0" 6" 2 - #3 2 - #4 2'-0" to 6'-0" 6'-0" to 8'-0" 8" 2 - #3 2 - #4 2'-0" to 6'-0" 6'-0" to 8'-0"
12" 3 - #3 3- #4 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENT A. Protection 1. The Contractor shall take adequate precautions for the protection of all surfaces against mortar spatter,
and shall immediately remove any such spatter should it inadvertently occur, leaving no stain or discoloration. 2. Excess mortar shall be wiped off the masonry surfaces as the work
progresses. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-12 3. Wood coverings shall be placed over all such masonry surfaces
as are likely to be damaged during the progress of the entire project. 4. Protective measures shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. 5. Damaged masonry units
shall be replaced to satisfaction of the Architect. 6. Exterior masonry walls shall be draped with waterproof covering until copings are in place, to prevent water penetration in cavity.
B. Cleaning of Masonry: Upon completion, all exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned following recommendations of the BIA Technical Note No. 20. Before applying any cleaning agent
to the entire wall, it shall be applied to a sample wall area of approximately 4' x 4' in a location approved by the Architect. No further cleaning work may proceed until the sample
area has been approved by the Architect, after which time the same cleaning materials and method shall be used on the remaining wall area. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice,
the surface shall be thoroughly saturated with clear water and then scrubbed with a solution of an approved detergent masonry cleaner, equal to "Vana Trol" made by ProSoCo Inc. or equal
made by Diedrich or approved equal, mixed as per manufacturer's directions, followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. All lintels and other corrodible parts shall
be thoroughly protected during cleaning. 1. Unless otherwise required by cleaning agent manufacturer use only low pressure device (30 to 50 psi) for application of cleaning agent and
water rinsing. C. Pointing: Point any defective joint with mortar identical with that specified for that joint. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1 SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general
and supplementary conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes structural steel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with latest editions of: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Manual of Steel Construction," including: - ANSI/AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings.” - AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” - Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC), “Specification for Structural Joints Using
High-Strength Bolts.” 2. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS) a. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” b. AWS C5.4 “Recommended Practices for Stud Welding.” 3. Research Council
on Structural Connections (RCSC), Educational Bulletin No. 4, "Recommended Erection and Field Inspection Procedures for High-Strength Bolts in Structural Steel Assemblies." B. Qualifications
for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS standards. 2. Provide one of the following certifications for welders to be employed in work.
a. Certification of satisfactorily passing AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months to perform type of welding in work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 2 b. Work record signed by supervisor showing regular employment within previous 12 months to perform type of welding in work. C. Qualifications
for Fabricator, Detailer, and Erector: 1. Fabricator, Detailer, and Erector of structural steel shall have minimum 3 years experience in fabricating, detailing, and erecting structural
steel. a. Erector Qualifications: Erector shall be AISC Certified Erector, Category CSE. b. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator shall be AISC Certified Fabricator, Category STD. c.
AISC Certification for Fabricators and Erectors may be waived at the discretion of Owner, Architect, and Engineer provided acceptable written quality assurance and quality control plan
is submitted. 2. Submit written description of ability. 3. At completion of fabrication, Fabricator shall submit Certificate of Compliance to Special Inspector and Code Enforcement
Official stating work was performed in accordance with approved Construction Documents in accordance with Chapter 17 of the International Building Code (IBC) as referenced by the New
York State Uniform Code. 1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Refer to Specification Section 014533 and Schedule of Special Inspections. 1.5 MATERIAL EVALUATION/QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor
shall employ testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer and Architect to perform material evaluation tests. B. Submit testing service qualifications demonstrating experience with similar
types of projects. C. The Registered Design Professionals (RDPs) for Structural Engineering and Architecture will visit construction site at appropriate intervals to determine if work
is in general conformance with Contract Documents and specifications. Notify RDPs 48 hours before anticipated time of completion for a given section of work so they may determine if
site observations are required. If site observations are required, do not conceal framing until RDPs have had opportunity to make observations. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Review of
submittals will be for general conformance only. Compliance with requirements for materials, fabrication, erection, and dimensioning of structural steel Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 3 shall be Contractor's responsibility. Resubmitted shop drawings shall have revisions identified and dated. B. Connections:
Submit as follows: 1. Submit proposed connection types and calculations for review before preparing detailed shop drawings. 2. Submit connection calculations in accordance with Option
3 of AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Calculations shall be stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer in New York State (Connection Design Engineer)
retained by Fabricator. 3. Connections shown on shop drawings shall be coordinated with the submitted connection calculations. Submit written confirmation from Fabricator’s Connection
Design Engineer that the shop and erection drawings accurately incorporate the connection designs. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing
details of each individual steel shipping piece. 2. Submit Erection Drawings showing location and attachment of individual steel shipping pieces. Including field installation details
in Erection Drawings. 3. Reference Contract Drawing number and addendum number in each shop and Erection drawing. 4. Shop and Erection drawings shall show: a. Details including cuts,
copes, camber, connections, holes, bolts, and other pertinent information. b. Connection design loads. c. Material, including ASTM designations and grades or manufacturer’s data as
appropriate. d. Welds with size, length, and type. 5. Shop and Erection drawings shall be checked by detailer and noted as checked in drawings before submitting. Failure to submit checked
Shop and Erection drawings will be cause for their return without review. If drawings are not prepared by detailer under direct control of Fabricator, Fabricator shall stamp each drawing
and initial or sign stamp to certify review and approval of drawings and conformance with Fabricator’s shop practice and capability. D. Material Data: Submit to Special Inspector and
Engineer laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with specifications. Submit producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions
for the following products: 1. Structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.
3. Unfinished bolts and nuts. 4. Welding electrodes. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 4 E. Bolt Certification: Submit
to Special Inspector and Engineer certifications that bolts, nuts, and washers furnished comply with specifications. Submit manufacturer's inspection certificates for mill tests. For
fasteners to be accepted, lot numbers on kegs, boxes, or bags must correlate with lot numbers shown in accepted test certificates and identification numbers in mill test reports. Manufacturer's
symbol and grade markings must appear on bolts and nuts. F. Field Modifications: Submit drawings showing field modifications required to conform to actual field conditions or as required
to correct errors in shop drawings, fabrication, or erection. G. Erector’s Welding Procedure Specifications: Submit welding procedure specifications for joint types detailed for field
welding. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store material in horizontal position on supports above ground. B. Protect from weather, and keep free of dirt and debris. C. Handle material carefully
so it is not bent or marred. D. Store bolted fastener components in closed containers protected from moisture and contamination. Remove from protective storage containers only number
of fasteners required for one shift. Return fasteners not installed at end of work day to protective storage. E. Repair or replace damaged materials. Do not incorporate in work fastener
components that accumulate rust or dirt. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. Contractor shall be responsible for correction of work not conforming to specified requirements. Correct deficient work
as directed by Engineer. B. Remove work found to be defective. Replace with new acceptable work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new and free from rust. B. Rolled-Steel
Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Provide ASTM A 572, Grade 50 where indicated in the drawings. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 5 C. Rolled-Steel Angles, C, MC, S, M, ST and MT Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Provide ASTM A 572, Grade 50 where indicated in the drawings.
D. Unfinished Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A. E. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM F 3125, Grade A325 or Grade A490, Type 1, plain. F. Nuts: ASTM A 563. Grade and finish to
match bolt or rod type. G. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 844 for ASTM A 307 bolts, A 36 rods and F 1554 Grade 36 anchor rods). Finish to match bolt or rod type. H. Electrodes: E70 and
in accordance with AWS. 1. E308 for Type 304 stainless steel. 2. E316 for Type 316 stainless steel. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel in strict accordance with reviewed
shop drawings and referenced standards. B. Fabricate and assemble structural material in shop to greatest extent possible. C. Remove extension bars or runoff plates upon completing
and cooling groove welds. Grind ends of welds smooth and flush with edges of abutting parts. D. Provide holes for securing other work to structural steel framing. Comply with AISC
Specification 360, Section M2 for surface roughness for holes. 2.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements of this section unless indicated otherwise in drawings. B. A licensed Professional
Engineer (Connection Design Engineer) shall be retained by Fabricator to design connections in accordance with Option 3 in AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges.
C. Use connection dimensions and sizes complying with AISC-published recommendations and limitations shown in drawings. D. For shear connections, use only connections published in
the AISC Steel Construction Manual without modification unless otherwise indicated in Drawings. E. Connections shown in the Drawings are representative details. Design connections to
comply with the requirements and limitations as shown in the Drawings. F. Weld or bolt shop connections. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL
STEEL 051200 - 6 G. Bolt field connections wherever possible. H. Minimum Capacity of Beam Connections: For connections not detailed, provide connection capacity for shear, axial,
and moment reactions shown in drawings. If reactions are not shown in drawings, base on either Allowable Stress Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design as follows: 1. Shear Connections:
a. At least 50 percent of uniform load from Maximum Uniform Load Tables in AISC Steel Construction Manual, Part 3, for given steel member (ASD or LRFD, as appropriate). b. At least
70 percent of uniform load from Maximum Uniform Load Tables in AISC Steel Construction Manual, Part 3, for beams and girders with shear connectors (ASD or LRFD, as appropriate). c.
Concentrated loads near supports must be added. J. Use AISC Single-Plate, Single-Angle, Double-Angle, or End-Plate Shear Connection for beam-to-beam connections. K. Provide high-strength
or unfinished threaded fasteners installed snug-tight for bolted bearing connections of secondary framing members to primary members including girts, door framing systems, and roof
openings. L. Provide high-strength fasteners for principal bolted connections unless otherwise indicated. M. Fabricator shall provide connections to properly transmit total reactions,
moments, and axial forces either indicated in drawings or reasonably inferred from information provided. N. Provide snug-tightened joints using bearing bolts with thread condition N
for bolted connections unless indicated otherwise. O. Remove burrs that prevent solid seating of connected parts. P. ASTM F 3125 Grade F1852 or Grade F2280, twist-off-type, tension-control
bolt assemblies may be used at snug-tightened. Compliance with RCSC Specifications for pre-installation testing and installation inspection is mandatory for the use of twist-off type,
tension-controlled bolted connections, including pretensioned or slip-critical joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine conditions under which work shall be erected.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 7 3.2 ERECTION A. Set
structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. B. Fit
up connections to be field welded in compliance with AWS standard tolerances for review by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency prior to field welding. C. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact after assembly. D. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified tolerances. E. Splice members only where shown or specified. F. Maintain work in stable condition during erection. G.
Install snug-tightened bolted joints to comply with RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts” and to comply with RCSC Educational Bulletin No. 4, “Recommended
Erection and Field Inspection Procedures for High-Strength Bolts in Structural Steel Assemblies.” Compliance with RCSC Specifications and Bulletins is mandatory for installation of
all high-strength bolted connections. H. Install field connections and framing as detailed in Contract Documents and accepted shop drawings. If Contractor finds field modifications
are necessary, submit documentation of proposed field modifications to Architect and Engineer for review and acceptance before beginning. 1. Use of thermal cutting for field modifications
is prohibited unless documented and accepted by Engineer before beginning. 2. Use of thermal cutting for enlarging or cutting bolt holes in field is prohibited. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Tolerances
shall be within limits in AISC "Code of Standard Practice.” B. Fabrication and mill tolerance shall be within limits in AISC “Standard Mill Practice.” 3.4 TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING
A. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. B. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent
members are in place and final connections are made. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 8 C. Provide temporary guy lines
to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not use members for storage or work platforms until permanently secured. B. Do not exceed load capacity
of members with construction loads. 3.6 WELDING TO EXISTING STEEL A. Clean area to be welded using mechanical grinders and solvents to remove paint, rust, and other materials. B. Use
E7018, low-hydrogen electrodes stored in ovens as prescribed by AWS. Preheat steel to be welded and maintain temperatures as prescribed by AWS. END OF SECTION 051200 (03/20) Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SLOTTED METAL FRAMING 054300-1 PART I GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. B. Framing shall be a strut type metal framing system (Strut
System) Strut System shall be used: 1. To support mechanical and electrical equipment and devices. 2. For structural applications as applicable. 3. For the metal ceiling grid system
as described on the Drawings. Strut System and components must be supplied from a single approved Manufacturer. C. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s qualifications: 1. The manufacturer
shall have at least 10 years’ experience in manufacturing Strut Systems. 2. The manufacturer must certify in writing all components supplied have been produced in accordance with an
established quality assurance program. Work shall meet the requirements of the following standards:B. 1. 2. Federal, State and Local codes American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification
for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members 2001 Edition American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM) Metal Framing Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA) 3. 4. 1.03 DELEGATED
DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Provide for the metal ceiling grid system described on the Drawings: Structural calculations by a Registered Professional or Structural Engineer in the State of
New York for approval by the Professional of Record. Calculations may include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. Description of design criteria Stress and deflection analysis Selection
of framing members, fittings, and accessories, including bracing and attachment to structure B. Assembly drawings necessary to install the Strut System in compliance with the Contract
Drawings Pertinent manufacturers published dataC. SECTION 054300 SLOTTED METAL FRAMING Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid 054300-2 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,
STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All material is to be delivered to the work site in original factory packaging to avoid damage to the finish. Upon delivery to the work site, all components
shall be protected from the elements by a shelter or other covering. B. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant for 1 year from the shipment date that products will be free from
defects in material or manufacture. In the event of any such defect in violation of the warranty, Manufacturer shall have the option to repair or replace any such defective product.
Installer shall warrant for 1 year from the date of completion of work that the work will be free of defects in installation. In the event of any such defect in violation of the warranty,
Installer shall have the option to repair or replace any such defective product. B. SLOTTED METAL FRAMING 1.06 A. For the metal ceiling grid system described on the drawings: provide
a full size mock-up in its final installation location. The mock-up will be assessed by the Owner and Architect and the balance of the installation shall not proceed until the mock-up
is accepted. The mock-up shall include all members, fasteners, hangers, bracing, and other accessories required in the final installation. Multiple color for the members and fasteners
may be selected for review by the Owner and the Architect. B. MOCK UP C. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Strut Metal Grid System and components shall be UNISTRUT or
Kindord. All components and accessories shall be by a single manufacturer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SLOTTED METAL FRAMING 054300-3 2.03 FINISHES
A. Painted 1. Channel and Fittings a. Provide painted finished of all members in system per Section 099000 Painting and Finishing for Interior Ferrous Metals. Color a. To be selected
by Architect 2. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The installer shall inspect the work area prior to installation. If work area conditions are unsatisfactory, installation shall
not proceed until satisfactory corrections are completed. 2. Stainless Steel: a. ASTM 40 (Type 304 or Type 316) b.. ASTM 6 (Type 304 or Type 316) 3. Aluminum: D. Any substitutions of
product or manufacturer must be approved in writing ten days prior to bid date by the Professional of Record. B 209 (Type 1100F or Type 5052-H32) C. Attic Stock: Provide 10% attic stock
of all slotted member, fittings, fasteners, hangers, and accessories part of the system. 1. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All channel members shall be fabricated conforming to one of the following
ASTM specifications: 1. Plain Carbon Steel: ASTM 1011 SS Grade 33 B. All fittings shall be fabricated conforming to one of the following ASTM specifications and to match the material
of the framing members: 1. Carbon Steel: All carbon steel fittings shall be fabricated from steel that meets/exceeds the physical requirements of ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33and conforms
to one of the following ASTM specifications: a. b. c. d. e. f. ASTM 575 ASTM 576 ASTM 36 ASTM 635 ASTM1059 ASTM 1046 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
SLOTTED METAL FRAMING 054300-4 3.03 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of this section of work, remove all protective wraps and debris. Repair any damage due to installation of this section
of work. 3.04 PROTECTION A. During installation, it shall be the responsibility of the installer to protect this work from damage. B. Upon completion of this scope of work, it shall
become the responsibility of the general contractor to protect this work from damage during the remainder of construction on the project and until substantial completion. ASDF 3.02
INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be accomplished by a fully trained manufacturer authorized installer. Set Strut System components into final position true to line, level and plumb,
in accordance with approved drawings. Anchor material firmly in place, and tighten all connections to their recommended torques. B. C. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-1 SECTION 06 20 00 CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete
the carpentry work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Blocking and miscellaneous wood. 2. Plywood backing panels for
telephone, electrical closets, and select wall partitions. 3. Rough hardware. 4. Installation only of finish hardware. 5. Installation only of doors and hollow metal frames. 1.3 RELATED
SECTIONS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 081113. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20. B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1 and American Plywood
Assoc. (APA). C. Shop fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on-site fabrication. D. Grade Marks:
Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill
number or name, grade of lumber, species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. a. S-Dry:
Maximum nineteen (19) percent moisture content as per ASTM D 2016. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-2 E. Installation of doors,
frames and hardware shall conform to the minimum standards of "Installation Guides for Doors and Hardware" of the Door and Hardware Institute. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Pressure Treatment:
Include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards. B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include
certification by treating plant that treatment material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver
carpentry materials to the site ready to use with each piece of lumber clearly marked as to grade, type and mill, and place in an area protected from the elements. B. Deliver rough
hardware in sealed kegs and/or other containers which shall bear labels as to type and kind. C. Pile lumber for rough usage, when delivered to the site in stacks to insure drainage
and with a minimum clearance of six (6) inches above grade. Cover stacks with tarpaulins or other watertight coverings. Store grounds and similar small sized lumber inside the building
as soon as possible after delivery. D. Do not store seasoned lumber in wet or damp portions of the building. E. Protect fire retardant treated materials against high humidity and moisture
during storage and erection. F. Remove delivered materials which do not conform to specified grading rules or are otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace
with acceptable materials. G. All items specified in Section 087100 of this specification entitled "Finish Hardware" shall be received, accounted for, stored and applied under this
Section. H. Hardware shall be sorted and stored in space assigned by Contractor and shall be kept at all times under lock and key. The safety and preservation of all items delivered
will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Installer must examine the substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work
is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in a manner acceptable to the Installer and the Architect. B. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIAL A. General 1. All wood shall be sound, flat, straight, well seasoned, thoroughly dry and free from all defects. Warped or twisted wood shall not be
used. 2. For miscellaneous wood blocking, grounds, furring as required, use Utility Grade Coastal Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, free from knots, shakes, rot or other defects, straight,
square edges and straight grain, air seasoned with maximum moisture content of nineteen (19) percent. Wood shall be S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS20. 3. Plywood and rough carpentry
for telephone and electrical closets, provide 3/4" thick C-D EXT-APA plywood, fire retardant treated as specified herein. B. Wood Treatment 1. All interior wood material specified herein
shall be fire retardant treated to comply with the AWPA standard U1 to achieve a flame spread rating of not more than 25 (UL Class "FR-S") when tested in accordance with UL Test 723
or ASTM E 84. The fire retardant chemicals used to treat the lumber must comply with FR-1 of AWPA Standard P49 and be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. a. After treatment,
kiln dry to a moisture content of fifteen (15) percent; if wood is to be painted or finished, kiln dry to a moisture content of twelve (12) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Dricon"
made by Arch Wood Protection Inc. or approved equal. Provide UL approved identification on treated materials. 2. For exterior blocking, roofing and sheet metal, pressure treat wood
with copper azole, Type B (CA-B); ammoniacal copper quat (ACQ) or similar preservative product that contains no arsenic or chromium. Preservative shall comply with AWPA Standard U1,
(.25 lbs./cubic foot of chemical in wood). a. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of fifteen (15) percent. Treatment shall be equal to "Wolmanized Natural Select"
made by Arch Wood Protection Inc. or approved equal. 3. Treated wood which is cut or otherwise damaged shall be further treated in accordance with the AWPA Standard M-4. 2.2 HARDWARE
A. Rough Hardware for Treated Woods and Exterior Use: Hot-dipped galvanized or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails: Common steel wire, untreated for interior work as per ASTM F 1667.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-4 C. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron
or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers conforming to the following: 1. Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 3. Lag Screws and Bolts:
ASME B 18.2.1. D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Treated Woods and Exterior Use: Stainless
steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. E. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. F. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Standard expansion-shield self-drilling
type concrete anchors where so shown or noted on the drawings, or where approved by the Architect. 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE SILLS A. Face Sheets: NEMA Publication LD3, Grade GP50, Type
I, 0.05" thick, as manufactured by Formica, Nevamar, WilsonArt. Color, pattern and finish as selected by the Architect. B. Backing Sheets: Non-decorative, high-pressure plastic laminate,
NEMA LD3, Grade BK20, 0.02" thick. C. Material Thickness: See drawings for general material thickness. Provide treated plywood or particleboard sheets required to match existing thickness.
Minimum thickness of material sheets shall be ¾”. D. Edges: Finish with plastic laminate to match face and applied before face sheets are applied, unless otherwise shown or specified.
E. Submit samples to the Architect for approval. Finish to match existing adjacent to remain. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-5
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where carpentry is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Hardware shall
be carefully fitted and securely attached, in accordance with these specifications and the instructions of the various manufacturers. B. Unless otherwise noted, mount hardware units
at heights established in Section 081113. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required
to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the
finish application. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. Set units
level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units which are
not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames,
with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. G. All
keys used shall be construction keys which are to be tagged with fiber discs as approved, clearly labeled with identifying inscriptions and then neatly arranged in a temporary cabinet.
All construction keys shall be returned to the Owner. H. Adjusting and Cleaning 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation and function
of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated
to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 2. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy
of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and
re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-6 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES A. Preparation 1. Remove welded-in
shipping spreaders installed at factory. 2. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment:
Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. 3. Drill and tap doors and frames to
receive non-templated mortised and surfacemounted door hardware. B. Installation 1. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install steel doors
and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install frames
in accordance with ANSI 250.11-20001, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein. b. At fire-protection-rated openings,
install frames according to NFPA 80. c. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. d. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. e. Frames set in
masonry walls shall have door silencers installed in frames before grouting. f. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
g. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 3. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each
jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-7 a.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly
pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to
masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted
anchorage to frame jamb members. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the tolerance given in HMMA 841 of ANSI/NAAMM,
current edition. 7. Steel Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames to the tolerances given in HMMA 841 of ANSI/NAAMM, current edition. a. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors
with clearances according to NFPA 80. C. Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating
condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. 3.4 BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. General 1. Erect rough
carpentry true to line, levels and dimensions required; squared, aligned, plumbed, and securely fastened in place. 2. Shim where required to true up furring, blocking and the like.
Use wood or metal shims only. 3. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure work in place and to perform the work included herein. Do all the
cutting and fitting of carpentry work, for the work of other trades as required. B. Blocking and Miscellaneous Wood 1. Furnish and install all wood grounds, furring, blocking, curbs,
bucks, nailers, etc., that may be necessary and required in connection with the carpentry and with the work described for any other trades and including required carpentry for electrical
fixtures. All blocking and nailers shall be continuous wherever required, whether or not so indicated. 2. Blocking shall be as required for the proper installation of the finished
work and for items in mechanical sections as required. Blocking, edgings, stops, nailing strips, etc., shall be continuous, unless distinctly noted otherwise. Provide blocking as
required to install all equipment. Provide blocking and nailers where shown or required to fasten interior sheet metal work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-8 3. Fastening for wood grounds, furring and blocking shall be of metal and of type and spacing as best suited to conditions. Hardened steel nails,
expansion screws, toggle bolts, self-clinching nails, metal plugs, inserts or similar fastenings shall be used, of suitable type and size to draw the members into place and securely
hold same. C. Rough Lumber for Roofing and Sheet Metal 1. Furnish and install all wood nailing strips and wood blocking required in connection with respective types of roofing, fans,
flashings, and sheet metal work, using preservative treated wood as herein before specified. 2. Wood blocking shall be of sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings and/or designed
for the reception of curb flashings for roof ventilators and similar items. 3. All nailing strips and blocking shall be carried out in accordance with the printed installation instructions,
and/or recommendations of the accepted manufacturer of the roofing materials, and in coordination and cooperation with the sheet metal work trades. 4. All blocking and nailing strips
shall be firmly secured in place using counter bored bolt and nut fastenings, or secured by any other proposed flush surfaced fastenings. 5. Wood nailing strips or blocking required
to be embedded in concrete work shall be furnished in time due for placing, prior to start of concrete operations. Locations and spacings of nailing strips or blocking shall be performed
in coordination with the concrete trades, as required for respective installations. 3.5 TELEPHONE AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING BOARDS A. Furnish and install 3/4" thick plywood
panels to the walls of the telephone and electrical equipment rooms in accordance with the requirements of the local utility company. B. Secure to wall using proper devices for substrates
encountered, spaced twelve (12) inches o.c., maximum around the edges, 1-1/2" from corners, and in three (3) rows of three (3) each in the field. Recess fastening devices flush with
the plywood surface. Adjacent panels shall be butted with 1/16" space between without lapping. C. See partition types for 5/8” plywood block at select wall partitions. 3.6 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Securely fasten rough carpentry together. Nail, spike, lag screw or bolt as required by conditions encountered in the field and the Contract Documents. B. Provide rough or framing
hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings, and similar items of the best quality and of the proper size and kind to adequately
secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPENTRY 062000-9 C. Secure rough
carpentry to masonry with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other acceptable manner, with fastenings not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. Secure woodwork to hollow masonry
with toggle bolts spaced not more than sixteen (16) inches apart. D. Countersink bolts in nailers and other rough woodwork and include washers and nuts. Cut bolts off flush with surfaces
and peen as may be required to receive finished work. E. Inserts to secure wood nailers to concrete shall be malleable iron threaded inserts with 3/8" diameter bolts of length to allow
for countersinking. Locate at end of each nailer and at intervals not exceeding thirty (30) inches o.c. F. Furnish to the mason for building into the work, or attaching the work which
is to be built in, anchors, bolts, wall plates bolted to masonry, corrugated wall plugs, nailing blocks, etc., which are required for the proper fastening and installation for the work
or other items as called for in this Section. G. Detailed instructions with sketches of necessary requirements, shall be given to the masonry trade showing the location and other details
of such nailing devices. 3.7 CLEANING UP A. General: Keep the premises in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation
of sawdust, cut-ends and debris. B. Sweeping 1. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep all surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work
has settled. 2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces. END OF
SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-1 SECTION 078100 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this
Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the sprayed fire-resistive materials as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including,
but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Spray-on fireproofing for new structural steel. 2. Spray-on fireproofing for existin structural steel where the existing fireproofing
is disturbed by the Work. 3. Seal coat over fireproofing in special areas. 4. Preparation of surfaces. 5. Field quality control. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Structural steel – Section 051200.
B. Penetration Firestopping – Section 078413. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each fire-resistive product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit structural framing plans indicating
the following: 1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying sprayed fireresistive material. 2. Extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction
and fire-resistance rating, including the following: a. Applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED
FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-2 3. Identify restrained and unrestrained assemblies on shop drawings, show required thickness of fireproofing for each assembly. C. Product Certificates:
Signed by manufacturer of sprayed fire-resistive material certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying
that installers comply with specified requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. If primer is to be used steel
and/or metal deck, submit certifications by supplier of primer that primer is compatible with materials, and will not impair the required performance of the installed fireproofing.
Such certification shall be accompanied by evidence that the primer was successfully used in conjunction with the fireproofing material in a UL test applicable to the construction.
Submit his certification prior to application of primer. 1. Coordinate with Section 051200 – Structural Steel, and Structural Drawings prior to application of primer. G. Product Test
Reports: Indicate that physical properties of proposed sprayed fireresistive materials comply with specified requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations
by a qualified testing and inspecting agency according to requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Code Compliance: Proposed product must comply with prevailing Building
Code and be approved by those individual having jurisdiction. I. Letter from manufacturer stating that the UL Design selected for the project are not load restricted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer as having the necessary experience,
staff, and training to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed fire-resistive materials to Construction
Manager or to an installer engaged by Construction Manager does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Submit data indicating that products containing no detectable asbestos
as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." C. Mockups: After processing of initial submittals
and before delivery and installation of fireproofing materials, prepare a sample installation of fireproofing work, approximately 100 sq. ft. in area; providing an example of each type
required, applied on each different substrate, to produce each different rating as required and reasonably Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE
RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-3 representative of entire sprayed on fireproofing work, for joint approval by representative of fire resistant material manufacturer and Owner. Work in
other areas shall not proceed until mock-up has been completed. Mock-up work which remains in compliance with requirements and is in undamaged and acceptable condition may be retained
as final work in place. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying
product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated.
Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard materials that have deteriorated. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply sprayed fire-resistive material when ambient or substrate
temperatures are 40 deg F. or lower, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after
product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fireresistive material to achieve a minimum of four air changes per hour. Use
natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive
materials with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosures for interior applications to prevent deterioration
of fire-resistive material due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. 2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur
during construction operations subsequent to its application. 3. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic
during application and drying of fire-resistive material. Fireproofing shall be considered dry when the moisture content is 6% or less. 4. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material
until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. 5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying
fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-4
6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to defective applications.
7. Protect permanently exposed walls, floor or special surfaces. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Construction Manager under requirements
of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by Construction Manager and cosigned by Installer, agreeing to repair or replace sprayed fire-resistive
materials that fail within the specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; and delaminating
of sprayed fire-resistive materials from substrates due to defective materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period. 2. Not covered under the warranty are failures due
to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes
not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. C. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE
MATERIALS A. General: For concealed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated in this Article
for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. B. UL design listings must state that the loading was determined by Allowable Stress Design Method
or Load and Resistance Factor Design Method. UL design listings requiring a load restriction factor will not be allowed. C. Material Composition: As follows: 1. Cementitious sprayed
fire-resistive material consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project
site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. D. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance
ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed as follows: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE
MATERIALS 078100-5 1. Dry Density: Minimum 15 lb./cu. ft. for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in referenced fire-resistive design, or greater if required
to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for Density Determination." 2. Thickness: Provide minimum average
thickness required for fire-resistive design shown on approved submittals. a. Fireproofing shall be of thicknesses and density to meet the requirements of the International Building
Code for application in locations required. 3. Bond Strength: Not less than 200 lbf/sq. ft. per ASTM E 736. 4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. as determined in the laboratory
per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 lb./cu. ft. 5. Corrosion
Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking,
spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of sprayed
fire-resistive material is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb./cu. Ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after
24 hours. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products
per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Flame Spread: 10 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance:
No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material a. Pyrolite 5GP; Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div. b. Monokote Type MK-6; W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div. c. Cafco 300; Isolatek International
Corp., Cafco Products. d. Type F3; Promat Firetemp. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-6 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE
MATERIALS FOR EXPOSED FIREPROOFING A. General: For exposed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated
for material composition and for minimum physical properties of each product listed, measured by standard test methods referenced with each property. B. UL design listings must state
that the loading was determined by Allowable Stress Design Method or Load and Resistance Factor Design Method. UL design listings requiring a load restriction factor will not be allowed.
C. Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation, chloride-free formulation of Portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates,
mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, complying with the following requirements: 1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual
densities as required for fireresistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for Density Determination," but with an average
density of not less than 22 lb./cu. ft. 2. Bond Strength: 425 psf minimum per ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psf. per ASTM E 761. 4. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence
of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 5. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTM E 759. 6. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or
the like per ASTM E 760. 7. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859. 8. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Flame Spread: 10 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 11.
For exterior applications of sprayed fire-resistive material, provide manufacturer's formulation approved for surfaces exposed to the exterior. D. Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Cement-Aggregate Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED
FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-7 a. Pyrocrete 239; Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div. b. Monokote Type Z106HY; W.R. Grace & Co.--Conn., Construction Products Div. c. F4; Promat
Firetemp. d. Cafco 400, Isolatek International Corp; Cafco Products. 2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible
with sprayed fire-resistive materials and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistive
designs indicated. B. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of sprayed fire-resistive material, used where required by manufacturer to insure
proper bond. C. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistive designs indicated and fire-resistive
product manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive sprayed
fire-resistive material. D. Sealer for Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material in Elevator Shafts and Open Area Plenums: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible protective coating by manufacturer
of fireresistive material. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Firebond Concentrate" by W.R. Grace, or similar product recommended by the manufacturer. PART
3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine whether they are in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed fire-resistive material. A substrate
is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign
substances capable of impairing bond of fireresistive material with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including
clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction
that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material. B. Do not proceed with installation of fire-resistive material until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-8 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive
material, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale. B. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove any surface imperfections that
could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of sprayed fireresistive material. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive
products after application. C. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required
to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintenance of adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with fire-resistive
material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable
to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. B. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and
fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement
of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required for
secure attachment to substrate. C. Coat substrates with adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing
by fire-resistive material manufacturer for material and application indicated. D. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
E. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by method recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from the sprayed fire-resistive material over which they are applied. G. Maintain ambient conditions
during installation and for cure period following installation, as recommended by manufacturer. Provide ventilation and avoid excessive rate of drying. H. Fireproofing to the underside
of roof deck assemblies shall be done only after roofing application is complete, all roof mounted mechanical equipment is in place, and the roof is watertight. I. No fireproofing shall
be applied prior to completion of concrete work on steel decking. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-9 J. Installation
Sequence of Fireproofing 1. All patching and repairing of sprayed fireproofing, due to cutting by other trades or testing and inspection, shall be performed under this Section. K. Provisions
shall be made for ventilation to properly dry the fireproofing after application. In enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation, air circulation and ventilation must be provided. 3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing and inspecting of completed
applications of sprayed fire-resistive material will take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of fire-resistive
material for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fire-resistive material show compliance with requirements. 1. For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial
area, on each floor, testing and inspecting agency will evaluate the following characteristics. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and values required for approved
fire-resistance design. a. Thickness for Floors, Roofs, and Walls: From the average of 10 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per
ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 3. For each 10,000 sq. ft.
area, or partial area, on each floor, testing and inspection agency will evaluate the following characteristics. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and values required
for approved fire resistance design. a. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: Cohesion and adhesion at frequency and from sample size indicated for
determining thickness of each type of construction, per ASTM E 736. 4. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for
determining thickness of each type of construction, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for Density Determination." Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS 078100-10 5. When testing discovers applications of fire-resistive material not in compliance with requirements, testing
and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Remove and replace applications of fire-resistive material where test results indicate
that they do not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for density, or both. D. Apply additional fire-resistive material per manufacturer's written instructions
where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Construction Manager's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations
in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Cure exposed
sprayed fire-resistive material according to product manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent premature drying. C. Protect fire-resistive material, according to advice of product
manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion. D. Coordinate application of fire-resistive material with other construction to minimize the need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction
proceeds, inspect fire-resistive material and patch any damaged or removed areas. 1. Patch and repair fireproofing where Owner’s Testing Agency has performed tests. E. Repair or replace
work that has not been successfully protected. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION 078123 - 1 SECTION 078123
INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 Penetration
Firestopping 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference by phone. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:. 1. Mastic and intumescent
fire-resistive coatings. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Topcoat. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by mastic
and intumescent fire-resistive coating manufacturer as experienced and with Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION 078123
- 2 sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Assemblies: Provide fire protection,
including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested
according to ASTM E119 and UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered
unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS A. Mastic and Intumescent
Fire-Resistive Coating: Manufacturer's standard, single component and complying with indicated fire-resistance design. 1. Basis of Design: Interchar 1120 Water Borne Intumescent Coating
by Akzo Nobel. Product substitutions must be approved by the Architect. 2. Application: Designated for interior general purpose/ conditioned interior space purpose use by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 5. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard finishes. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with mastic
and intumescent fireresistive coating and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance
designs indicated. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION 078123 - 3 B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by mastic and
intumescent fire-resistive coating manufacturer for the required fire-resistance design. C. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coating;
of type recommended in writing by mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coating manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates,
areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance
design. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire protection materials during application. B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance
design and where recommended in writing by mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coating manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition
to receive fire protection. C. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness
in finished surface of fire protection. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fire protection assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested,
and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fire protection Work. B. Comply with mastic and intumescent
fire-resistive coating manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fire protection; as applicable
to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Spray apply fire protection to maximum extent possible. After the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coating manufacturer. D.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire protection has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTUMESCENT FIRE PROTECTION 078123 - 4 E. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fire protection to produce the following
finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied
with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC Subsection
1705.14, "Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings." B. Fire protection will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fire protection
that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fire protection, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness,
and retest. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray
and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 3.6 REPAIR A. Repair fire protection damaged by other work before concealing
it with other construction. B. Repair fire protection by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. END OF
SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-1 SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED
DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: for each type of product indicated. B.
Product schedule: for each penetration firestopping system. include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Qualification data: for qualified
installer. D. Installer certificates: from installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Product test reports: based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications:
a firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful performance. qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. manufacturer's
willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to contractor or to installer engaged by contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-2 B. Fire-test-response characteristics: penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to
those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products
bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1)
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." C. Preinstallation conference: conduct conference at project site. Project conditions D. Environmental limitations: do not install penetration
firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet. E. Install and cure penetration
firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction
of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes,
or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. notify testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on
day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-3 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings,
and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls: provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per astm e 814 or ul 1479, based on testing
at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 pa). 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than
the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies: provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per astm e 814 or ul 1479,
based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 pa). 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors and floor/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour,
but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except
for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. W-rating: provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to ul 1479. E. Exposed
penetration firestopping: provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per astm e 84. F. Voc content: provide
penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for voc content when calculated according to 40 cfr 59, subpart d (epa method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING 078413-4 G. Accessories: provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use
only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing
materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage
of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Latex sealants: single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop devices: factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized
steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent putties: nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. D. Intumescent wrap strips: single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. E. Mortars: prepackaged dry mixes
consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous
mortar. F. Pillows/bags: reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and
fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. G. Silicone foams: multicomponent, silicone-based
liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone sealants: single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical
and sloped Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-5 surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade
for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer
present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the work. B. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface cleaning: clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere
with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking tape: use masking
tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-6 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them
to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven
techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance
ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing
the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items
or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following
information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified testing
agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping
to comply with requirements. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-7 C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping
with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent
to openings as the work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration
at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and
install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where ul-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system
numbers in ul's "fire resistance directory". B. Firestopping with no penetrating items: 1. UL-Classified Systems. C. Firestopping for metallic pipes, conduit, or tubing: 1. UL-Classified
Systems D. Firestopping for nonmetallic pipe, conduit, or tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems E. Firestopping for electrical cables: 1. UL-Classified Systems F. Firestopping for insulated
pipes: 1. UL-Classified Systems G. Firestopping For Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants 1. UL-Classified Systems H. Firestopping for miscellaneous mechanical penetrants: 1. UL-Classified
Systems I. Firestopping for groupings of penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the joint sealers work as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Flashing reglets and retainers. 2. Exterior wall joints not specified to be sealed in other Sections of
work. 3. Interior wall joints not specified to be sealed in other Sections of work, including caulking to fill between architectural woodwork and any wall, floor and/or ceiling imperfections.
4. Control and expansion joints in walls. 5. Joints at wall penetrations. 6. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 7. All other joints required to be sealed to provide
a positive barrier against penetration of air and moisture. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Firestop sealants - Section 078413. B. Sealant within drywall construction - Section 092900. 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly familiar, skilled and specially trained in the techniques of sealant work, and who are completely
familiar with the published recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. B. Pre-Construction Field Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion
to project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 794 and C 1521 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints. C. Perform testing per ASTM C 1248 on interior and
exterior sealants to determine if sealants or primers will stain adjacent surfaces. No sealant work shall start until results Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 079200-2 of these tests have been submitted to the Architect and he has given his written approval to proceed with the work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop
Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing all joint conditions, indicating relation of adjacent materials, all sealant materials (sealant, bond breakers, backing, primers, etc.), and
method of installation. 1. Submit joint sizing calculations certifying that movement capability of sealant is not being exceeded. B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Color samples
of sealants, submit physical samples (not color chart). 2. Sealant bond breaker and joint backing. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions
for: 1. Sealant materials, indicating that material meets standards specified herein. 2. Backing rods. D. Submit manufacturer's certification as required by Article 1.6 herein. E. Submit
results of testing required in Article 1.4 herein. 1.6 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY AND CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall require sealant manufacturer to review the Project joint conditions
and details for this Section of the work. Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer that joints are of the proper size and design,
that the materials supplied are compatible with adjacent materials and backing, that the materials will properly perform to provide permanent watertight, airtight or vaportight seals
(as applicable), and that materials supplied meet specified performance requirements. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install all work of this Section when air temperature
is above forty (40) degrees F. and below eighty (80) degrees F., unless manufacturer submits written instructions permitting sealant use outside of this temperature range. B. Moisture:
Do not apply work of this Section on surfaces which are wet, damp, or have frost. 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section,
before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid JOINT
SEALANTS 079200-3 B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. C. Storage 1. Store sealant materials and equipment under conditions
recommended by their manufacturer. 2. Do not use materials stored for a period of time exceeding the maximum recommended shelf life of the material. 3. Material shall be stored in unopened
containers with manufacturers’ name, batch number and date when shelf life expires. 1.9 GUARANTEE A. Provide a written, notarized guarantee from the manufacturer stating that the applied
sealants shall show no material failure for a period of ten (10) years. B. Contractor to provide a written, notarized, guarantee stating that the applied sealants shall show no failure
due to improper installation for a period of five (5) years. C. Guarantee shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and executed by an authorized individual. D. Include in guarantee
provision, agreement to repair and/or replace, at Contractor's expense, sealant defects which develop during guarantee period, because of faulty labor and/or materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Exterior Wall Sealant: Provide one (1) part non-sag sealant equal to No. 790 or 795 made by Dow Corning, "Silpruf SCS 2000" or "LM SCS 2700" made by G.E.,
"Spectrem 1" or "Spectrem 3" made by Tremco, "Sonolastic 150" made by Sonneborn, or "Sikasil WS-295" or "Sikasil WS-290" made by Sika conforming to the minimum standards of ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50. B. Interior Sealant: Provide a one (1) part acrylic based sealant conforming to ASTM C 834, equal to "AC-20+ Silicone" made by Pecora or equal made by Tremco,
Sherwin Williams or approved equal. C. Colors: Colors selected from manufacturer's standard selection. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Back-Up Materials: Provide back-up materials
and preformed joint fillers, non-staining, non-absorbent, compatible with sealant and primer, and of a resilient nature, equal to "HBR" made by Nomaco Inc. or approved equal, twenty-five
(25) percent wider than joint width. Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen or similar Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4
materials shall not be used. Provide back-up materials only as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. B. Provide bond breakers, where required, of polyethylene tape as recommended
by manufacturer of sealant. C. Provide primers recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each material to receive sealant. Note that each exterior joint must be primed prior to sealing.
D. Provide solvent, cleaning agents and other accessory materials as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. E. Materials shall be delivered to the job in sealed containers with manufacturer's
original labels attached. Materials shall be used per manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where joint sealers are
to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to
permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and in accordance with ASTM
C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions required by this Project where more stringent installation requirements are specified herein,
such requirements shall apply. B. Sample Section of Sealant 1. During sealant installation work in exterior wall, the manufacturer of sealant shall send his representative to the site,
under whose supervision a section of the wall (used as "control section") shall be completed for purposes of determining performance characteristics of sealant in joints. Architect
shall be informed of time and place of such installation of control section. 2. Control section shall be installed according to specification given herein and shall not be considered
as acceptable until written acceptance is provided by the Architect. 3. Accepted control section shall be standard to which all other sealant work must conform. C. Supervision: The
Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer that the applicators have been instructed in the proper application of their materials.
The Contractor shall use only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of sealant. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 079200-5
D. Apply sealant under pressure with a hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill
joints as detailed. Neatly point or tool joint to provide the contour as indicated on the drawings. E. Preparation and Application 1. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign
matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt and frost. Sealant must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied film must be entirely removed. 2. Stone, masonry and
concrete surfaces to receive sealant shall be cleaned where necessary by grinding, water blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or combination of these methods as required to provide
a clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion. a. Do not use any acid or other material which might stain surfaces. b. Remove laitance by grinding or mechanical abrading. c. Remove
loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading, or blast cleaning by blowing out joints with compressed air, oil and water free, or vacuuming joints prior to application
of primer or sealant. 3. Clean non-porous surfaces such as metal and glass chemically. Remove protective coatings on metallic surfaces by solvent that leaves no residue and is compatible
with sealant. Use solvent and wipe dry with clean, dry lint free paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Clean joint areas protected with masking tape or strippable
films as above after removal of tape film. 4. Do not seal joints until they are in compliance with drawings, or meet with the control section standard. 5. Joint Size and Sealant Size:
Joints to receive sealant shall be at least 1/4" wide. In joint 1/4" to 3/8" wide, sealant shall be 1/4" deep. In joints wider than 3/8" and up to 1" wide, sealant depth shall be
one half the joint width. For joints wider than 1", sealant depth shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Depth of joint is defined as distance from outside face of joint
to closest point of the filler. 6. Primer: Thoroughly clean joints and apply primer to all surfaces that will receive sealant. Apply primer on clean, dry surfaces, and prior to installation
of joint backing. Completely wet both inner faces of the joint with primer. Mask adjacent surfaces of joint with non-staining masking tape prior to priming. Apply primer with clean
brush and only when temperature is above 45 deg. F. 7. Joint Backing: In joints where depth of joint exceeds required depth of sealant, install joint backing (after primer is dry)
in joints to provide backing and proper joint shape for sealant. Proper shape for sealant is a very slight "hourglass" shape, with back and front face having slight concave curvature.
Use special blunt Tshaped tool or roller to install joint backing to the proper and uniform depth required for the sealant. Joint backing shall be installed with approximately Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6 twenty-five (25) percent compressions. Do not stretch, twist, braid, puncture, or tear joint
backing. Butt joint backing at intersections. 8. Bond Breaker: Install bond breaker smoothly over joint backing so that sealant adheres only to the sides of the joint and not backing.
9. Sealant Application: Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's application manual and manufacturer's instructions, using hand guns or pressure equipment, on clean, dry,
properly prepared substrates, completely filling joints to eliminate air pockets and voids. Mask adjacent surfaces of joint with non-staining masking tape. Force sealant into joint
in front of the tip of the "caulking gun" (not pulled after it) and force sealant against sides to make uniform contact with sides of joint and to prevent entrapped air or pulling of
sealant off of sides. Fill sealant space solid with sealant. 10. Tooling: Tool exposed joints to form smooth and uniform beds, with slightly concave surface conforming to joint configuration
per Figure 4A in ASTM C 1193. Finished joints shall be straight, uniform, smooth and neatly finished. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling of sealant and before sealant face
starts to "skin" over. Neatly remove any excess sealant from adjacent surfaces of joint, leaving the work in a neat, clean condition. 11. Replace sealant which is damaged during construction
process. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 1 SECTION 080671 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section references specification sections relating to commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding Doors. 3. Other doors to the extent
indicated. B. Commercial door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical and access control door hardware.
3. Electromechanical and access control door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. 4. Automatic operators. 5. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related
Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. 2. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware Devices”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire
Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 2 E. Standards: Reference Related Sections for requirements regarding compliance with applicable industry standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational
descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format:
Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware
sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals
that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function,
size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced
to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule
must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and
other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final
keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to
approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671
- 3 D. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified
independent testing agency. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation
in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest
service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in the Related Sections. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt
and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without
prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item
or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight
package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements.
Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete
set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Refer to “PART 3 – EXECUTION” for required specification
sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The door hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should
not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior
to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of
hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field
inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed. B. Products listed
in the hardware sets shall be supplied by and in accordance with the requirements described in the specification section as noted for each item. 1. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
2. Section 28 15 00 – Access Control Hardware Devices. C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. MR - Markar 3. SA - SARGENT 4. OT -
Other 5. RO - Rockwood 6. PE - Pemko Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 5 Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0 Doors: 551/1, 551/1-Alt 1 4 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 087100 1 Access Control Rim Exit 12 43 55 56 70 M1-8844-24V-BIPSB-OE LNJ US32D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Cylinder
To Suit Existing Key System OT 1 Surface Closer 351 O EN SA 087100 1 Wall Stop 403 (or) 441CU (As Required) US26D RO 087100 1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100 1 Gasketing
S773BL PE 087100 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100 ⚡ 1 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100
⚡ 1 Power Distribution Board AQL4-R8E1 SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram Elevation and Point to Point as Specified OT Notes: Operation: *Door normally closed and secured. *Upon use
of mechanical key or presentation of authorized credentials door to unlock allowing authorized entry. *Built in request to exit switch to allow authorized egress, integrated door position
switch to be tied into security system to monitor status of door. *Upon loss of power door to remain locked. *Always free egress. Set: 2.0 Doors: 551/2, 551/2-Alt 1, 551/3 8
Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 630 MR 087100 1 Removable Mullion L980S / L980A (As Required) x Length Required PC SA 087100 1 Access Control Rim Exit 43 55 56 70 M1-8844-24V-BIPS-BOE
LNJ US32D SA 281500 ⚡ 1 Rim Exit Device, Exit Only 43 55 56 8810 EO US32D SA 087100 ⚡ 2 Cylinder To Suit Existing Key System OT 2 Surface Closer 351 P9 EN SA 087100 Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 6 1 Threshold to architect detail PE 087100 1 Gasketing S773BL PE 087100 2 Door Contacts
1078 X color SO 2 ElectroLynx Harness - Frame QC-C1500P MK 087100 ⚡ 2 ElectroLynx Harness - Door QC-CXXX (Size as required) MK 087100 ⚡ 2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT SU 087100
⚡ 1 Power Distribution Board AQL4-R8E1 SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Wiring Diagram Elevation and Point to Point as Specified OT Notes: Operation: *Door normally closed and secured. *Upon use
of mechanical key or presentation of authorized credentials door to unlock allowing authorized entry. *Built in request to exit switch to allow authorized egress, integrated door position
switch to be tied into security system to monitor status of door. *Upon loss of power door to remain locked. *Always free egress. Set: 3.0 Doors: 500/1 1 Cylinder To Suit Existing
Key System OT Notes: Existing hardware to remain. New cylinder as required. Remove existing door, hardware, & frame (including hold open devices tied into the fire alarm system)
and reinstall in new location. Set: 4.0 Doors: 551A/1, 551B/1 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 087100 1 Storeroom/Closet Lock 70 8204 LNJ US26D SA 087100 1 Cylinder
To Suit Existing Key System OT 1 Surface Closer 351 O EN SA 087100 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" high BEV CSK US32D RO 087100 1 Wall Stop 403 (or) 441CU (As Required) US26D RO 087100
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO 087100 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 080671 - 7 Set: 5.0 Doors: 50021/1, 50022/1 To follow
END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Louvers installed in
hollow metal doors. 4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Conditions". 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry"
for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 08 Section "Access Control Hardware". 6. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. C. Codes and
References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI
A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for
Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5.
ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy
and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for
General Requirements for Steel Sheet, MetallicCoated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box
Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 12.
ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252
- Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air
Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware
reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the
steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable
stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Samples are only required by request of the architect
and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source
from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8,
latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3 C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes
of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2.
Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point
of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors
to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying
with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according
to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance
by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical
knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to
provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum
4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames
to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal
frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation. B. Building Information Modeling (BIM) Support: Utilize designated BIM software tools and obtain training needed to successfully participate
in the Project BIM processes. All technical disciplines are responsible for the product data integration and data reliability of their Work into the coordinated BIM applications. 1.8
WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames from a SDI Certified manufacturer: 1. CECO Door Products (C). 2. Curries Company (CU). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel
Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180)
metallic coating. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible
joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867. B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold
rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. a. Fire
Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 2. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch
- 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 3. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground,
filled and dressed smooth. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not
less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous
channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C.
Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. CECO Door Products (C) Honeycomb Core - Regent Series. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for
type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated
on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 3. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products (C) - BU Series. b. CECO Door Products (C) -
SU Series. C. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated. D. Hardware Reinforcement:
Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic
coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor
Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames,
not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.6 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Unless otherwise indicated provide louvers to meet the following requirements. 1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted
V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color
where applicable. B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours
and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers to meet rating indicated. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed
for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.7 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops
and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow
multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings
for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed
Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior
and on secure side of interior doors and frames. D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with
baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding
or rigid mechanical anchors, unless noted otherwise. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal
work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble
units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances:
Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide
overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fireperformance rating or where
indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. 4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges
specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". D. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make smooth, flush, and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping
and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible
face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency
hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge
straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS
AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security
screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor
Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate
anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors
per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof
above 120 inches high. b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors
per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor
per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers:
Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware". 11. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or
asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service procedure.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications
for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated
to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's
standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate
and field-applied coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing
openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117
"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames:
Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned,
and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for
Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10 secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation
of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head
of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as
necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between
Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances
according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING
AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation. C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible
air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid ACCESS DOORS 083113-1 SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the access doors as
indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Frameless recessed panel access doors at drywall ceilings and walls. 2. Framed flush
panel access doors at tile walls. 3. Provide access doors and frames for access from occupied spaces to the following, where indicated or required, and as directed by the trades of
Divisions 23 and 26. a. All shutoff or balancing valves. b. Fire dampers, as required. c. Points of duct access. d. Pull boxes. e. Controls of mechanical and electrical items. f. Pipe
spaces, if required. g. Inlets of fans. h. Fusible link and splitter damper at filter bank. i. Automatic damper and motor. j. Equipment not otherwise accessible. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Drywall - Section 092900. B. Valves and connections - Division 23. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For actual installation of the work of this Section, use only personnel who are
thoroughly familiar with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who are completely trained in the skills required. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire-resistance
classification is shown, or for construction where access doors are installed, provide required access door assembly Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for
Bid ACCESS DOORS 083113-2 with panel door, frame, hinge and latch from manufacturers listed in Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building Materials Index" for the rating
shown. 1. Provide UL label on each access panel. 2. Provide flush, key operated cylinder lock. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units
which may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Before any materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete manufacturer's literature
to the Architect. Submit plans and schedules showing size and location of each and every access door for Architect's acceptance prior to installation. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Provide access door assembly manufactured by Milcor
Inc, or equal made by Nystrom Inc., Karp Associates, Inc. or approved equal. Assembly shall be an integral unit complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Fabricate units
of continuous welded steel construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of the type required to secure access panels
to the types of supports shown. C. Frames for masonry walls (Flush Panel Units): Fabricate frame from sixteen (16) gauge steel. Provide frame with exposed flange not less than one
(1) inch wide around perimeter of frame. Finish with manufacturer's factory applied baked enamel prime coat applied over phosphate protective coating on steel. D. Frameless Units for
Drywall Surfaces (Recessed Panel Units): Provide access doors without exposed frames for drywall adhered to recessed panel. E. Panels: Fabricate from fourteen (14) gauge steel, with
concealed spring hinges set to open to 175 degrees. Provide removable pin type hinges of the quantity required to support the access panel sizes used in the work. Finish with manufacturer's
factory applied baked enamel prime coat applied over phosphate protective coating on steel. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACCESS DOORS 083113-3
F. Locking Devices: For non-rated access doors, provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. For fire rated
doors, provide locks as described in paragraph 1.4, B. herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where access doors are to be installed and correct
any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation
of the work. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate all work with the mechanical trades to insure proper locations and in a timely manner to permit orderly progress of the total work. B. Set
frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust hardware and panels after installation
for proper operation. D. Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-1 SECTION 084123 STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire rated glazing, framing
systems and hardware for the following applications: 1. Interior vision lights and frames. 2. Interior doors and frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification
for Steel, Sheet, ColdRolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 2. ASTM A
1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength. 3. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Determining the Rate of Airflow through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across
the Specimen. 4. ASTM E 90 - Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 5. ASTM E 119 - Methods for Fire Tests
of Building Construction and Materials. 6. ASTM E 330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference. 7. ASTM E 331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. ASTM E 413 - Standard
Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 9. ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-2 10. ASTM E 783 - Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage
through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors. 11. ASTM E 1105 - Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain
Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. 12. ASTM F1915 - Standard Test Methods for Glazing for Detention Facilities B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
(AAMA): 1. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure. 2. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water
Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems. 3. AAMA 501.4 - Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and Storefront Systems
Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Interstory Drifts. 4. AAMA 501.5 - Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls. 5. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements
and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 6. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 7. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.: 1. BHMA
A156 - American National Standards for door hardware; (ANSI/BHMA A156). E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials. 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. NFPA 257: Fire Test of Window Assemblies. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 9: Fire
Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 10 C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window and Door Assemblies. 4. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction
and Materials. 5. UL 752: The Standard of Safety for Bullet-Resisting Equipment. 6. UL 972: Burglary Resisting Glazing Material. G. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC
16 CFR 120: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-3
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications, installation
instructions, warranty, and laboratory test data. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations and details of product showing component dimensions; framed opening requirements, dimensions,
tolerances, and attachment to structure. 2. Provide templates for the location of embeds and anchor locations required any adjoining work. D. Calculations: For the performance requirements
listed below requiring structural design provide data, calculations and Drawings signed and sealed by an engineer licensed in the state or province where the project is located. E.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. F.
Selection Samples for Glass Type and Color: For each glazing type specified, two samples representing manufacturer's full range of available styles and finishes. G. Verification Samples
for Glass Type and Color: For each product specified, two samples, two samples that are 6 inches by 6 inches (152 mm by 152 mm), representing actual product and finishes. H. Test Reports:
Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. I. Installer Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified. J. Field Quality-Control Reports. K. Maintenance Data. L. Warranties: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in the
Owner's name and registered with the manufacturer. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rating Requirements: As specified in Part 2 of this section. B. Structural Performance: 1. Wind
loads: Provide system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of ____ lbs./sq. ft. inward and ____ lbs./sq. ft. outward. The design pressures are based
on the (____) Building Code. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-4 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/(s x m2)) at a static air pressure differential of 6.27 psf. 3. Water Resistance,
Static: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differential of 15 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Water Resistance,
Dynamic: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1. There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 15 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 5. Uniform Load:
A static air design load of 50 psf (2394 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of
the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess
of 0.2 percent of their clear spans shall occur. 6. Bullet Resistance: Provide systems that meet a bullet resistance level of 1-8 for glass when tested per UL 752. Confirm requirement
with Owner 7. Burglary Rating: Provide systems that meet a security level for glass, frames and doors when tested per UL 972. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
Manufacturer shall have five years experience manufacturing and fabricating products of similar type and scope as those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced
installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful
in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers)
or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of materials and workmanship. 1. Finish areas
designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, finish are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
Mock-up may be incorporated into finished work upon approval from Owner. E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252, ASTM E 119. Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require
job site fabrication. F. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-5 NFPA 257, ASTM E 119. Assemblies must be factory-welded or come
complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication. G. Certification: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Door assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of NFPA 252, UL 10-C Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2.
Window assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of NFPA 257, UL 9 Standard methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 3. Wall assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance
criteria of ASTM E 119, NFPA 251, UL 263 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) shall conduct fire test. H. Impact
Safety Resistance: CPSC 16, CFR1201 (Cat. I and II). I. Listings and Labels, Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by an approved independent agency maintaining a
current listing or certification. Label assemblies in accordance with limits of manufacturer's listing. J. Window assemblies with ratings of less than 60 minutes may be tested in accordance
with NFPA 257, UBC 7-4, UL 9, CAN4-S106 Standard Test Methods. K. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: L. Generally retain Americans with Disabilities
Act Accessibility Guidelines below for private projects; FED-STD-795 for Federal, State, and local government projects. Verify with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where indicated
to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 2. Where indicated to
comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1. 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards." 4. Comply with NFPA 101 for means of egress doors. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations: 1.
Inspect all containers for damage at time of delivery. 2. Examine glass and frame units for damage. 3. List all damage to containers on the shipping company's Bill of Lading. 4. Report
damage to manufacturer immediately. 5. Store glazing materials and frame units in original packing containers 6. Do not expose glazing material of frame units to sunlight or weather.
7. Place glass and frames upright, no less than 6 degrees from vertical. Do not store horizontally. 8. Store all materials in dry conditions, off the ground. 9. Protect from construction
activities. 10. Glass and frame units must be separated by non abrasive pads such as cloth or Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 084123-6 cork. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for
optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Field Measurements: Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication
of frame units. If field measurements will not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of other sections. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings.
Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. C. Coordinate the work of this section with others affected including
but not limited to: Other exterior envelope components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Conduct a pre-installation conference
at least one week prior to the work of this section. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty on framing, doors, and glazing limited five year warranty dated from
shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Vetrotech - Fire-Rated Glass & Systems, which is located at: 2108 B St. N. W. Suite 110; Auburn, WA 98001;
Toll Free Tel: 888-803-9533; Tel: 253-333-0660; Fax: 253-333-5166; Email: request info vetrotech.sales@saintgobain.com; Web: www.vetrotechusa.com B. Requests for substitutions will
be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS - GLAZING A. Interior Rated Glazing: CONTRAFLAM by VETROTECH Saint-Gobain NA.
1. Fire Rating: 60 minutes. a. Manufacturer's Designation: CONTRAFLAM 60. b. Glazing Type: Monolithic. c. Nominal Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). d. Weight: 11 lbs / sq. ft. e. Visible Light
Transmission: 82 percent. f. Sound Transmission Coefficient: 40 dB. g. Bullet Resistance Rating per UL-752: Level 4 h. Burglary Resistance Rating per UL 972; Contraflam ULTIMAX. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-7 B. Interior non-rated Glazing: See 088000 Glazing for double pane assembly.
C. Labeling: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacturer, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, safety glazing
standards, and date of manufacture. D. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer's installation accessories including but not limited to compression gaskets and spacers. 2.3 MATERIALS - STEEL
FRAMING A. Steel Framing System: VDS FRAMING fire-rated steel frame system as manufactured by VETROTECH Saint-Gobain NA. Also noted as E119 FRAMING from Assa Abloy, Ceco Doors. 1.
Rating: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Rating: 60 minutes. 3. Compliance: NFPA 80, NFPA 251, NFPA 252, NFPA 257, UL 263, UL 10B, UL 10C. 4. Finish: Powder coated. 5. Finish: Kynar. a.
Finish Color: custom selected by architect. 6. Steel Frame: Profiled steel tubing permanently joined with steel bolts. 7. Insulation: Insulate framing system against effects of fire,
smoke, and heat transfer from either side. Insulate profiled steel tubing using a shell construction that incorporates PROMATECT intermediate interlayer. Firmly pack perimeter of framing
system to rough opening with mineral wool fire stop insulation or appropriately rated intumescent sealant. 8. Steel Glazing Beads: rolled steel beads with dimensions recommended by
manufacturer to securely hold glazing material in place. 9. Fasteners: Type recommended by manufacturer. 10. Glazing Accessories: Set CONTRAFLAM glass using calcium silicate or neoprene
setting blocks. 11. Glaze CONTRAFLAM glass with glazing gaskets, compounds and tapes with the following: a. Manufacturer approved EPDM glazing gaskets. b. Manufacturer approved closed
cell PVC tape. c. Manufacturer approved pure silicone sealant. d. Bullet Resistance Rating per UL-752: Level 1 – 8 (confirm with Owner). e. Burglary Resistance Rating per UL 972. 2.4
FABRICATION A. Frame: Furnish frame assemblies pre-welded. 1. Field splice frames too large for shop fabrication or shipping or to fit in available building openings. 2. Fit with
manufacturer approved fasteners. 3. Knock-down door perimeter frames are not permitted. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 084123-8 B. Door and Frame Assemblies: Field glazed. C. Steel Door Assemblies Factory prepared for field mounting of hardware. D. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate
fire rated assembly to dimensions verified in field. E. Obtain Architect reviewed and approved Shop Drawings prior to fabrication. 2.5 FlNlSHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's (National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish frames
after assembly. C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a removable, temporary protective cladding before shipping. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations
in appearance of adjacent frame sections are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. E. Color-Coated Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard powder coating
finish system complying with AAMA 2603 applied to factory-assembled frames before shipping, complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment,
application, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect conditions of
substrate and other conditions which may affect installation of signage. B. Do not begin installation until substrates are within manufacturer's specified tolerances and have been
prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. The manufacturer recommends 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) shim space at
all walls. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, do not proceed with installation. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation immediately. D.
Commencement of work is deemed as acceptance of installation conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. As written in manufacturer's installation instructions and shop drawing details, place
if required sill flashing, shims and sealant into the wall or door opening prior to framing installation B. Place window or door frame in prepared opening. Shim at anchor points. Plumb
and Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-9 level frame as required per manufacturer's instructions.
C. Attach frame around the perimeter using #10 screws x appropriate length through factory prepared access holes. D. Shim space must be properly sealed to maintain fire rating either
with tightly packed mineral wool or a fire rated intumescent sealant per manufacturer's instructions. E. Install glass as required per manufacturer's glazing installation instructions.
Modifications of framing material or glass in the field is not permissible. F. Upon completion, the frame may be trimmed with architectural sealant or material of choice ie: wood, tile,
painted gypsum board etc. *Reference architectural details. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Architect shall select units to be tested as soon as a representative portion
of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not
meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. B. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent
testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. 1. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration
shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, which ever is greater. 2. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with
ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 10 psf (479 Pa).
3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other hardware suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware. 3.5 PROTECTION
AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean "grit free" cloth and a small amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent. 2. Bullet
resistant glazing materials with sensitive protect surface applied film on exterior surface. Do not use any of the following: a. Steam jets. b. Abrasives. c. Strong acidic or alkaline
detergents, or surface-reactive agents. d. Detergents not recommended by manufacturer. e. Detergent above 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 Issue for Bid STEEL FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084123-10 f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones, alcohols, aromatic compounds,
glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances
resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended
by glass manufacturer. C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial
Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.6 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP A. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer's recommended products. 1.
Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view. 2. Repairs and touch-up not visible from a distance of 5 feet (1.5 m). Owner and Architect to approve. B.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent
indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors
in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Steel-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 3. Division 10 Section
“Glass Markerboards” 4. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware Devices”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall
be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series. 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. ANSI/UL 294 – Access Control System Units. 4. ULC-S319 - Electronic Access Control Systems. 5. ULC-60839-11-1, Alarm and Electronic Security Systems - Part 11-1: Electronic Access
Control Systems - System and Components Requirements. 6. UL 305 – Panic Hardware. 7. ULC-S132, Emergency Exit and Emergency Fire Exit Hardware. 8. ULC-S533 – Egress Door Securing and
Releasing Devices. 9. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks. 10. ULC-S328, - Burglary Resistant Key Locks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware
Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and
subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of
abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly
where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings
of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control
hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and
control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each
unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers,
point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related
sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place
prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware
set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports:
Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required
in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing
hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products
must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD). C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented
experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications:
Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility
in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a
single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be
accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label
demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference
to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and
future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery
of keys. H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of
Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware,
conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training
to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals,
hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed
by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -
5 I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic
access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and
related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware.
Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical
Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes,
low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared,
reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field
modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive
deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One
year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty
five years for manual overhead door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete
set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED
DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B.
Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware
Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed
for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for
substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with
the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the
following hinge quantity: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three
Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances
required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material:
Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard
weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all outswinging lockable
doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). B. Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges:
ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified pin and barrel continuous hinges with minimum 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel hinge leaves, concealed teflon coated stainless pin, and twin
self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle separation. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b.
Markar Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MR). c. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect
Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug
connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections
are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE) – EL-CEPT Series. b. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10
Series. B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly
to throughdoor wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function
of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine
the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Provide one each of the following tools
as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural
Door Accessories (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA) - Quick Connect. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK)
– QCC Series. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security
keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders
with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to
be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define
and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.
3. Existing System: Field verify and key cylinders to match Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three
(3). 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). F. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores. G. Key
Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list
in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. H. Manufacturer: 1. Best - To match existing building keying 2.5 KEY CONTROL A. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system
including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control
cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). P. Electronic
Key Management System: Provide an electronic key control system with Stand-alone Plug and Play features including advanced RFID technology. Touchscreen interface with PIN access for
keys individually locked in place. Minimum 1,000 system users and 21 iFobs for locking receptors. System shall have a minimum 250,000 audit events screen displayed or ability to be
exported via USB port. 1. Manufacturers: a. Medeco (MC). b. Traka (TA). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 2.6 MECHANICAL
LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to
be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Where specified, provide status indicators with highly
reflective color and wording for “locked/unlocked” or “vacant/occupied” with custom wording options if required. Indicator to be located above the cylinder with the inside thumb-turn
not blocking the visibility of the indicator status. Indicator window size to be a minimum of 2.1” x 0.6” with a curved design allowing a 180 degree viewing angle with protective covering
to prevent tampering. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. 2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES A. Electromechanical Multi-Point Locks: Vertical rod locking
devices designed for openings requiring multiple latching points within one locking mechanism. Rods are retracted by dual mounted outside lever trim controls available in a variety
of ANSI/BHMA operational functions. Option for single top latching only eliminates the need for bottom strikes. Electromechanical options include solenoid activated trim, electric latch
retraction, and inside and outside lever monitoring. 1. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12
or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 7000 Series. 2.8 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames
with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double
acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 B. Standards:
Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors
not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer
including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling
indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific
requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder
dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler
strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 5. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding
current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 6. Motorized Electric Latch Retraction:
Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not acceptable. 7. Lever Operating
Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets,
provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware
Sets. 8. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
9. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 10. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning
push bar matching functional push bar. 11. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 12. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and
trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit
hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent
Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. b. dormakaba Precision (PR) - Apex 2000 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series. 2.10 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet
or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of
application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of
fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency
of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide
heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers
on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for
proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size,
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast
iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1.
Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers (LC) – 4040SE Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 351 Series. 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units
to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side
of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting
hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door,
provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified
protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener
type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). c. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural
Door Accessories (RO). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers:
ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door
stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 stops where they will impede
traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). c. Rockwood Products;
ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in
the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications
provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all
smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency,
for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained
by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 2.14 ELECTRONIC
ACCESSORIES A. Switching Power Supplies: Provide power supplies with either single or dual voltage configurations at 12 or 24VDC. Power supplies shall have battery backup function with
an integrated battery charging circuit and shall provide capability for power distribution, direct lock control and Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) through add on modules. Power supplies
shall be Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide
individually protected, continuous outputs and/or individually protected, relay controlled outputs. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQD Series. B. Intelligent Switching Power
Supplies: Provide power supplies with single, dual or multi-voltage configurations at 12 and/or 24VDC. Power Supply shall have battery backup function with an integrated battery charging
circuit. The power supply shall have a standard, integrated Fire Alarm Interface (FAI). The power supply shall provide capability for secondary voltage, power distribution, direct lock
control and network monitoring through add on modules. The power supply shall be expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide individually protected,
continuous outputs and/or individually protected, relay controlled outputs. Network modules shall provide remote monitoring functions such as status reporting, fault reporting and information
logging. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQL Series. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for
machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations
used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers
for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards,
but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.17 SLIDING TRACK HARDWARE A. Provide Pemko G60 Stainless Steel Sliding Track Hardware System, Glass Door Model and all required mounting
accessories. Coordinate with glass markerboard manufacturer for mounting and penetrations. Alternate Bid 2 only. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled
fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule,
door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply
with ANSI/DHI A115 series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products
including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,
comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto
or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified
in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors
in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 17 E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion
of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout
Procedures” and “Cash Allowances”. Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly
installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected. 1. Organization
of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings.
2. Submit documentation of incomplete items in the following formats: a. PDF electronic file. b. Electronic formatted file integrated with the Openings Studio™ door opening management
software platform. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace
units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during
the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should
not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior
to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of
hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field
inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed. B. Refer to Section
080671, Door Hardware Sets, for hardware sets. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-1 SECTION 088000 GLASS
AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein,
including, but not limited to, glazing of the following: 1. Doors. 2. Frames. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 081113. B.
Steel Framed Entrances and Storefront – Section 084123 1.4 REFERENCES A. Comply with the recommendations of the following references unless more stringent requirements are indicated
herein. 1. FGMA Publications: FGMA Glazing Manual. 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA TIR-A7 Sloped Glazing Guidelines and Glass Design for Sloped Glazing. 3. LSGA Publications: LSGA Design
Guide. 4. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 Vertical Glazing Guidelines and TB-3001 Sloped Glazing Guidelines. 5. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements
of 16 CFR Part 1201, Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing, Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for
Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-2 6. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. b. ASTM C1036
- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. c. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012. d. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 7. ASTM C 920, Elastomeric Joint Sealant. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding
normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication,
and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses
indicated on drawings and/or specified herein are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with all structural requirments and fire-rated glazing requirements. 2. Probability of Breakage for Vertical
Glazing: a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites installed 15 degrees from the vertical
and under wind action. c. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection
at design wind pressure to 1/100 times the short side length or 1/2", whichever is less. 4. Thermal Movements (where applicable): Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-3
1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each
material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements, including performance requirements. B. Submit compatibility and adhesion test reports
from sealant manufacturer indicating materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, as well as other glazing materials including insulation units. C. Initial
Selection Samples: Submit samples of each glass and glazing material showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. 1. Submit complete range
of samples of standard colors and patterns for ceramic frits at insulating glass. 2. Submit complete range of samples of sandblasted glass showing variations of grits and opacity achieved.
D. Calculations: Provide wind load charts, calculations, thermal stress analysis, and certification of performance of this work. Indicate how design requirements for loading and other
performance criteria have been satisfied. Document shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of New York. E. Test Reports: Provide certified reports
for specified tests. F. Warranties: Provide written warranties as specified herein. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: For each glass and glazing type required for work of this Section,
provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. B. Installer:
A firm with a minimum of five years' experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials; and with a successful record
of in-service installations similar in size and scope to this Project. C. Glass Thickness: Glass thicknesses shown on drawings and/or specified herein are minimum thicknesses. Determine
and provide size and thickness of glass products that are certified to meet or exceed performance requirements specified in this Section. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published
recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated
Glass Design Guide." Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-4 2. IGMA Publications: IGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines
for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." E. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies (refer to Section 084123): Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.8 TESTS A. Preconstruction
Sealant Test: Submit samples of materials to be used to glazing sealant manufacturer to determine sealant compatibility. Include samples of glass, gaskets, glazing materials, framing
members, and other components and accessories of glazing work. Test in accordance with ASTM C 794 to verify what type of primers (if any) are required to ensure sealant adhesion to
substrates. 1. Submit minimum of nine pieces of each type and finish of framing member, and nine pieces of each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass, including monolithic,
laminated, and insulating glass for adhesion tests. 2. Provide manufacturer's written report and recommendations regarding proper installation. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature
Limits: Install sealants only when temperatures are within limits recommended by sealant manufacturer, except, never install sealants when temperatures are below 40 deg. F. 1.10 DELIVERY,
STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
and GANA Manual. 1. Protect materials from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame. 2. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES A.
General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not
less than five (5) years after date of substantial completion. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/FABRICATORS A. All glass and glazing used at the the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. The same manufacturer and the same furnace shall
be used for all tempered and heat strengthened glass used throughout the project. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. GGI – Ceneral Glass Internations.
2. Safti-First. 3. Vetrotech/St. Gobain. 4. Equal manufacturers pending approval. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Fire-Rated Glazing Material: Provide float glass based glazing
unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3. 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and
FT. 3. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria. 2.3 GLAZING UNITS A. Type G-1 - Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Refer to Section 084123 for
rating glazing material. Type, thickness, and configuration of glazing that contains flame, smoke, and blocks radiant heat, as required to achieve indicated fire-rating period exceeding
45 minutes. 1. Applications: a. Glazing in fire-rated door assembly. b. Glazing in sidelites, borrowed lites, and other glazed openings in fire-rated wall assemblies. B. Type G-2 -
Laminated insulating glass. One layer shall be 1/8” clear (low iron) glass plus 0.030” PVB interlayer plus 1/8” clear (low iron) glass and the other ¼” clear tempered glass (low iron),
with ½” air gap. Thickness shall be coordinated with approved interior glazing system. 1. Applications: a. Glazing in door assemblies. b. Glazing in sidelites, borrowed lites, and
other glazed openings in wall assemblies. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-6 2.4 GLAZING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A.
General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with glass sealants, with laminated
glass interlayers, and with any other surfaces in contact. All products shall be compliant in fire-rated assemblies. B. General Glazing and Cap Bead Sealant: Provide sealant with
maximum Shore A hardness of 50. Provide one of the following: 1. Dow Corning 795. 2. General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000. 3. Tremco Spectrem 2. C. Backer Rod:
Closed cell non-gassing polyethylene rod with rod diameter 25% wider than joint width. D. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Provide molded or extruded neoprene or EPDM gaskets,
Shore A hardness of 75+5 for hollow profile, and 60+5 for solid profiles, ASTM C 864. E. Cellular, Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Provide extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned
neoprene, Shore A 40+5, and 20% to 35% compression, ASTM C 509; Type II. F. Preformed Glazing Tape: Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with 100% solids content complying
with ASTM C 1281 AAMA A 800 with integral continuous EPDM shim. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form. Provide Tremco "Polyshim II" or approved equal. G. Setting Blocks:
Provide 100% silicone blocks with Shore A hardness of 80-90. Provide products certified by manufacturer to be compatible with silicone sealants. Length to be not less than 4". Width
for setting blocks to be 1/16" more than glass thickness and high enough to provide the lite recommended by glass manufacturer. When thickness of setting block exceeds 3/4" the glass
manufacturer must be consulted for sizes and configuration. In a vented system, setting block shall be designed so as to not restrict the flow of water within the glazing rabbet to
the weep holes. 1. Shims: For shims used with setting blocks, provide same materials, hardness, length and width as setting blocks. 2. Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide silicone
setting blocks where structural silicone occurs at sills and at insulating units with silicone edge seals. H. Edge Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone as required for compatibility
with glazing sealants. Provide blocks with Shore A hardness of 55+5. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-7 I. Spacers:
Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place. J. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials:
Provide sealant backer rods, primers, cleaners, and sealers of type recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. 2.5 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate
glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written
instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic
lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION
OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that the minimum
required face and edge clearances are being provided. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps
are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E. Proceed with glazing
system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24
hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 088000-8 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass,
gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in
accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D. Set glass
lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. F. Prevent
glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, firesafing, plastering,
mortar droppings, etc. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. C. Monitor and report
installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners
recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.06 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract
Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum board work for partitions, ceilings, column enclosures, furring, and elsewhere where gypsum drywall work is
shown on drawings. 2. Metal supports for gypsum drywall construction, interior and exterior. 3. Acoustical insulation for gypsum drywall work. 4. Sealant for gypsum drywall work. 5.
Taping and finishing of drywall joints. 6. Installing rings and frames in drywall surfaces for grilles, registers and lighting fixtures. 7. Bracing and connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Steel doors and frames - Section 081113. B. Painting and Finishing- Section 099000. C. Rings for grilles, registers and light fixtures - Division 23 and 26. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following standards, as well as other standards which may be referred to in this Section, shall apply to the work of this Section: 1. The Gypsum Construction Handbook, latest
edition, USG. 2. Construction Guide, latest edition, National Gypsum. 3. ASTM A 568 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
General Requirements For" Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2 4. ASTM C 475 "Standard Specification for Joint Treatment Materials
For Gypsum Wallboard Construction" 5. ASTM C 645 "Standard Specification for Non-Structural Steel Framing Members" 6. ASTM C 754 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products" 7. ASTM C 840 "Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" 8. ASTM C 919 "Standard Specification for
Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications" 9. ASTM C 954 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From
0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness" 10. ASTM C 1002 "Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board" 11. ASTM C 1177 "Standard Specification
for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing" 12. ASTM C 1178 "Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board" 13. ASTM C 1278 "Standard Specification
for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel" 14. ASTM C 1396 "Standard Specification for Gypsum Board" 15. ASTM D 3273 "Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber" B. Allowable Tolerances: 1/32" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/16" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. System Design
Load 1. Provide standard drywall wall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a lateral load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with
deflection limited to L/240 of partition height. 2. Provide drywall ceiling assemblies designed, fabricated and installed to have a deflection not to exceed L/360. D. Fire-Resistance
Rating: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM
E 119 by fire testing laboratories, or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and compliant with UL Test #2079; criteria for cycle movement for all field height wall sections requiring allowance for vertical deflection within framing details. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3 E. Installer: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of specified
materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system showing size and gauges of framing members, hanger and anchorage devices, wallboard
types, insulation, sealant, methods of assembly and fastening, control joints indicating column lines, corner details, joint finishing and relationship of drywall work to adjacent work.
B. Samples: Each material specified herein, 12" x 12", or 12" long, or in manufacturer's container, as applicable for type of material submitted. C. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit
technical and installation instructions for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system specified herein, and for each fire-rated and sound-rated gypsum board assembly. Submit
other data as required to show compliance with these specifications, including data for mold resistant joint compound. D. Test Reports: This Contractor shall submit test report, obtained
by drywall manufacturer, indicating conformance of drywall assemblies to required fire ratings and sound ratings. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store and handle drywall
work materials to prevent damage. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers or bundles, and store where protected from moisture, damage and from exposure to the elements.
Store wallboard in flat stacks. B. Protect wallboard from becoming wet. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Provide and maintain minimum temperature of fifty-five (55) degrees F. and adequate
ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building in the area of the drywall work for at least twenty-four (24) hours, prior to, during and after installation of drywall
work. Installation shall not start until windows are glazed and doors are installed, unless openings are temporarily closed. Space above suspended ceilings shall be vented sufficiently
to prevent temperature and pressure build up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Gypsum Drywall Panels and Accessories: U.S. Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific,
CertainTeed Corporation, Lafarge North America, or National Gypsum Co. meeting specification requirements are acceptable. 1. All drywall products must be manufactured in North America.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Metal Supports of Drywall Assemblies: Unless otherwise noted, provide products manufactured by ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Super Stud Building Products,
Marino/Ware, or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4 2.2 METAL SUPPORTS A. Metal Floor and Ceiling Runners 1.
Channel Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless otherwise noted) galvanized steel, width to suit channel type metal studs. Use 20 ga. top runners with 1-1/4" minimum flanges.
2. Ceiling runners and head of wall connections at rated partitions shall conform to UL #2079 for cycle movement. Provide positive mechanical connection of framing to structure, allowing
for vertical movement within connections. Minimum of 20 ga. galvanized steel for clips, 25 ga. galvanized steel for ceiling runners. Providing a friction free – anti-seizure movement
capacity. a. As manufactured by the Steel Network, VertiClip or VertiTrack or equal made by Metal-Lite Inc. b. FireTrak (including stud clips) by FireTrak Corp. or equal made by Metal-Lite
Inc. 3. "J" Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge galvanized steel, 1" x 2-1/2" or 4" wide (to suit detail). 4. Deflection track as detailed at shaft wall locations. B. Metal Studs,
Framing and Furring 1. For each type of metal framing required, interior and exterior, provide manufacturer’s stand steel runner, tracks, blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements,
fasteners and accessories, as recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. 2. Channel Type Studs: Channel type
with holes for passage of conduit formed from minimum 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless heavier gauge is required to meet deflection limits) galvanized steel, width as shown on drawings. 3.
Furring Channels: Hat shaped, formed from galvanized steel, 25 U.S. Std. gauge. 4. Continuous 16 gauge x 8" wide steel wall plate screwed to studs as required for support of railings
and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. C. Suspended Ceiling and Fascia Supports 1. Main Runners: 1-1/2" steel channels, cold rolled at 0.475 lbs. per ft., rust-inhibitive
paint finish. 2. Furring Members: Screw-type hat-shaped furring channels of 25 ga. zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C 645. 3. Hangers: Galvanized, 1" x 3/16" flat steel slats capable
of supporting 5x calculated load supported. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5 4. Hanger Anchorages: Provide inserts, clips,
bolts, screws and other devices applicable to the required method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Size devices for 5x calculated load supported. 5. Furring Anchorages:
16 ga. galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard clips, bolts or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer. D. All galvanized steel members shall have coating conforming to
ASTM A 653, G60. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD TYPES A. Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick "Sheetrock" by USG, "Gold Bond" by National Gypsum, or "Regular Gypsum" by CertainTeed Corp., 48" wide,
in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wall Board: 5/8" thick "Sheetrock Firecode C" by USG, "Firecheck Type C" by Lafarge/Continental,
or "Gold Bond Fireshield" by National Gypsum, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. C. Moisture/Mold Resistant Gypsum Wall Board at locations listed
below, unless otherwise shown on drawings: 5/8" thick "Mold Tough" or "Mold Tough FR" by U.S. Gypsum, "DensArmor Plus" by Georgia Pacific, "Mold Defense" and/or "Mold Defense Type
X" by Lafarge/Continental, or "Gold Bond EXP Interior Extreme Gypsum Board" by National Gypsum, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. Board must
have a rating of 10 per ASTM D 3273 with a core that meets ASTM C 1396, Section 6 or ASTM C 1658. 1. Areas in toilet rooms, lockers, janitor's closets not scheduled to receive ceramic
tile, or where fire rating is required. 2. Walls and ceilings of spaces containing condensers, wet equipment such as ice makers, water tanks, water pumps and pressure reduction valves.
3. Portions of walls within 2 feet of sinks to a height of 4 feet above the floor. 4. All perimeter walls and wet shafts. D. Impact Resistant Wallboard: 5/8" thick as indicated on
drawings, "Fiberock Brand VHI Abuse Resistant Panel" by USG, "DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Panels" by Georgia-Pacific, "EXP Interior Extreme IR" or "Gold Bond Brand Hi-Impact XP"
by National Gypsum, "Protecta HIR 300" by Lafarge/Continental, or "AirRenew Extreme Impact" by CertainTeed Corp., 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt
joints. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: Paper-less, non-combustible, semi-rigid mineral fiber mat, 2" thick, in walls (unless otherwise indicated), 3 lb./cu. ft. maximum
density; Thermafiber LLC "Thermafiber," or approved equal. B. Fasteners for Wall Board: USG Brand Screws; Type S Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to lighter gauge interior metal
framing (up to 20 ga.). Type S-12 Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to heavier gauge interior metal framing (20 ga. to 12 ga.); Type Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-6 S and Type S-12 Pan Head for attaching metal studs to door frames and runners; and Type G Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to wall board.
Lengths specified below under "Part 3 - Execution" Articles and as recommended by drywall manufacturer. C. Laminating Adhesive: "Sheetrock Brand Joint Compound." D. Metal Trim - Corner
Beads: For 90 degree External Corners - "Dur-A-Bead" No. 103, 27 U.S. Std. ga. galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4", for 90 degree external corners. E. Metal Trim - Edge Beads: "Sheetrock
Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim." F. Metal Trim Treatment Materials and Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Drywall Boards: Paper tape for joint reinforcing; Setting Type (Durabond
90) or Lightweight Setting Type Joint Compound for taping and topping; and Ready Mix Compound for finishing. 1. For mold-resistant drywall, water resistant drywall, and tile backer
board, use glass mesh tape with setting joint compound that is rated 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 3274. Acceptable joint compound
is "Rapid Set One Pass" made by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp. or "Rapid Joint" manufactured by Lafarge North America or approved equal meeting standards noted herein. G. Control Joints:
No. 0.093, USG. H. Acoustical Sealant: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or "Tremco Acoustical Caulking" of Tremco Mfg. Co., or approved equal. I. Neoprene Gaskets: Conform to ASTM D 1056.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where gypsum drywall is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion
of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General
1. Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on drawings and specified herein. 2. All metal framing for drywall partitions
shall extend from floor to underside of structural deck above. Provide for vertical deflection with positive mechanical connections of framing members to structure. 3. Provide concealed
reinforcement, 16 ga. thick by eight (8) inches wide or as detailed or as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment of railings and other Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-7 items to be supported on the partitions which cannot be attached to the metal framing members. Concealed reinforcement shall span
between metal studs and be attached thereto using two (2) self-tapping pan head screws at each stud. a. Back of drywall shall be scored or notched to prevent bulging out where reinforcement
plate occurs. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, Underwriters' Laboratories and test results
obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the fire-rated drywall assembly types indicated on the drawings. C. Acoustical Assemblies: Install acoustically-rated assemblies
to achieve a minimum STC as noted on drawings, in accordance with test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the drywall assembly type indicated on the drawings.
D. Sealant 1. Install continuous acoustical sealant bead at top and bottom edges of wallboard where indicated or required for sound rating as wallboard is installed, and between metal
trim edge beads and abutting construction. 2. Install acoustical sealant in 1/8" wide vertical control joints within the length of the wall or partitions, and in all other joints,
specified below under "Control Joints." Install bead of acoustical sealant around electric switch and outlet boxes, piping, ducts, and around any other penetration in the wallboard;
place sealant bead between penetrations and edge of wallboard. 3. Where sealant is exposed to view, protect adjacent surfaces from damage and from sealant material, and tool sealant
flush with and in same plane as wallboard surface. Sealant beads shall be 1/4" to 3/8" diameter. E. Wall Board Application 1. Do not install wallboard panels until steel door frames
are in place; coordinate work with Section 081113, "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 2. See drawings for all board types. Use fire-rated wallboard for fire-rated assemblies. Use sag-resistant
board for ceilings. Use water-resistant wallboard where indicated on drawings and where wallboard would be subject to moisture. Install water-resistant wallboard in full, large sheets
(no scraps) to limit number of butt joints. 3. Apply wallboard with long dimension parallel to stud framing members, and with abutting edges occurring over stud flanges. 4. Install
wallboard for partitions from floor to underside of structure above and secure rigidly in place by screw attachment, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide "Thermafiber" safing insulation
meeting standards of Section 078413 at flutes of metal deck where partitions carry up to bottom of metal deck. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-8 6. Neatly cut wallboard to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping, ducts, and other items which penetrate wallboard; fill gaps with acoustic
sealant. 7. Where wallboard is to be applied to curved surfaces, dampen wallboard on back side as required to obtain required curve. Finish surface shall present smooth, even curve
without fluting or other imperfections. 8. Screw fasten wallboard with power-driven electric screw driver, screw heads to slightly depress surface of wallboard without cutting paper,
screws not closer than 3/8" from ends and edges of wallboard. 9. Where studs are doubled-up, screw fasten wallboard to both studs in a staggered pattern. F. Cementitious Backer Board
1. General: Furnish cementitious backer board in maximum available lengths. Install horizontally, with end joints over framing members. 2. Fastening: Secure cementitious backer board
to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 12 inches on center and not closer than 1/2" from the edge. Install screws with a conventional screw gun so that the screw heads
are flush with the surface of the board. 3. Joint Treatment: Fill space between edge of backer and receptor with dry-set Portland cement or latex-Portland cement mortar. Fill all
horizontal and vertical joints and corners with dry-set Portland cement or latex-Portland cement mortar. Apply fiberglass tape over joints and corners and embed with same mortar. G.
Metal Trim: Install and mechanically secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; and finish with three (3) coats of joint compound, feathered and finish sanded smooth with
adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Corner Beads: Install specified corner beads in single lengths at all external corners, unless corner
lengths exceed standard stock lengths. 2. Edge Beads: Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all terminating edges of wallboard exposed to view, where edges abut dissimilar
materials, where edges would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings. Where indicated on drawings, seal joint between metal edge bead and adjoining surface with specified
gasket, 1/8" wide minimum and set back 1/8" from face of wallboard, unless other size and profile indicated on drawings. 3. Casing beads shall be set in long lengths, neatly butted
at joints. Provide casing beads at juncture of board and vertical surfaces and at exposed perimeters. H. Control Joint Locations: Gypsum board surfaces shall be isolated with control
joints where: 1. Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or other vertical penetration. 2. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-9 3. Shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Ceiling dimensions exceed thirty (30) feet in either direction.
5. Wings of "L," "U," and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 6. Expansion or control joints occur in the structural elements of the building. 7. Shaftwall runs exceed 30' without
interruption. 8. Partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 9. Partition or furring runs exceed 30' without interruption. 10. Where control joints
are required, ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. I. Joint
Treatment and Spackling 1. Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at internal corners of intersecting partitions and joints at internal corners of intersections between
ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound. 2. Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be applied in three
(3) coats, feathered and finish surface sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Treatment of joints and screw heads with joint
compound is also required where wallboard will be covered by finish materials which require a smooth surface, such as vinyl wall coverings. 3.3 METAL STUD PARTITIONS A. Unless otherwise
noted, steel framing members shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Runner Installation: Use channel type. Align accurately at floor according to partition layout.
Anchor runners securely sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum with power-driven anchors to floor slab, with power-driven anchors to structural slab above. See "Stud Installation" below
for runners over heads of metal door frames. Where required, carefully remove sprayed-on fireproofing to allow partition to be properly installed. C. Stud Installation 1. Use channel
type, positioned vertically in runners, spaced as noted on drawings, but not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c. 2. Anchor studs to floor runners with screw fasteners. Provide snap-in
or slotted hole slip joint bolt connections of studs to ceiling runners leaving space for movement. Anchor studs at partition intersections, partition corners and where partition abuts
other construction to floor and ceiling runners with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for
Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-10 3. Connection at ceiling runner for non-rated partitions shall be snap-in or slotted hole slip joint bolt connection that shall allow for movement. Seal
studs abutting other construction with 1/8" thick neoprene gasket continuously between stud and abutting construction. 4. Connections for fire rated partitions at ceiling runners shall
conform to UL Design #2079. 5. Install metal stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are cut or wallboard is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations, and anchor
horizontal bracing to vertical studs with sheet metal screws. 6. At jambs of door frames and borrowed light frames, install doubled-up studs (not back to back) from floor to underside
of structural deck, and securely anchor studs to jamb anchors of frames and to runners with screws. Provide cross braces from hollow metal frames to underside of slab. 7. Over heads
of door frames, install cut-to-length section of runner with flanges slit and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely anchor runner to adjacent vertical
studs with sheet metal screws. Install cut-tolength vertical studs from runner (over heads of door frame) to ceiling runner sixteen (16) inches maximum o.c. and at vertical joints
of wallboard, and securely anchor studs to runners with sheet metal screws. 8. At control joints, in field of partition, install double-up studs (back to back) from floor to ceiling
runner, with 1/4" thick continuous compressible gasket between studs. When necessary, splice studs with eight (8) inches minimum nested laps and attach flanges together with two (2)
sheet metal screws in each flange. All screws shall be self-tapping sheet metal screws. D. Runners and Studs at Chase Wall: As specified above for "Runners" and "Studs" and as specified
herein. Chase walls shall have either a single or double row of floor and ceiling runners with metal studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum and positioned vertically in the runners
so that the studs are opposite each other in pairs with the flanges pointing in the same direction. Anchor all studs to runner flanges with sheet metal screws through each stud flange
and runner flange following requirements of paragraph 3.4, B. Provide cross bracing between the rows of studs by attaching runner channels or studs set full width of chase attached
to vertical studs with one self-tapping screw at each end. Space cross bracing not over thirty-six (36) inches o.c. vertically. E. Wallboard Installation - Single Layer Application
(Screw Attached) 1. Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and with abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Install wallboard with long dimension
perpendicular to framing members above and below openings in drywall extending to second stud at each side of opening. Joints on opposite sides of wall shall be arranged so as to occur
on different studs. 2. Boards shall be fastened securely to metal studs with screws as specified. Where a free end occurs between studs, back blocking shall be required. Center abutting
ends over studs. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth, true. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-11
3. Wallboard screws shall be applied with an electric screw gun. Screws shall be driven not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of board to provide uniform dimple not over 1/32" deep.
Screws shall be spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the abutting edges. 4. All ends and edges of wallboard shall occur over screwing
members (studs or furring channels). Boards shall be brought into contact but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be staggered. Joints on opposite
sides of a partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs. 5. At locations where piping receptacles, conduit, switches, etc., penetrate drywall partitions, provide non-drying
sealant and an approved sealant stop at cut board locations inside partition. F. Wallboard Installation - Double-Layer Application 1. General: See drawings for wallboard partition
types required. 2. First Layer (Screw Attached): Install as described above for single layer application. 3. Second Layer (Screw Attached): Screw attach second layer, unless laminating
method of attachment indicated on drawings or necessary to obtain required sound rating or fire rating. Install wallboard vertically with vertical joints offset thirtytwo (32) inches
from first layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of wall. Attach wallboard with 1-5/8" screws sixteen (16) inches o.c. along vertical joints and sixteen (16) inches o.c. in
the field of the wallboard. Screw through first layer into metal framing members. 4. Second Layer (Laminated): Install wallboard vertically. Stagger joints of second layer from first
layer joints. Laminate second layer with specified laminating adhesive in beads or strips running continuously from floor to ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
After laminating, screw wallboard to framing members with 1-5/8" screws, spaced twelve (12) inches o.c. around perimeter of wallboard. G. Wallboard Installation - Laminated Application:
Where laminated wallboard is indicated, use specified laminating adhesive, install wallboard vertically and maintain tolerances as specified for screw attached wallboard. H. Insulation
Installation: Install where indicated on drawings. Place blanket tightly between studs. I. Deflection of Structure Above: To allow for possible deflection of structure above partitions,
provide top runners for non-rated partitions with 1-1/4" minimum flanges and do not screw studs or drywall to top runner. Where positive anchorage of studs to top runner is required,
anchorage device shall be by means of slotted hole (in clip connection with screw attachment to web of steel through bushings located in slots of clips), or other anchorage device approved
by Architect. J. Control Joints 1. Leave a 1/2" continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface mounted joint. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-12 2. Back by double framing members. 3. Attach control joint to face layer with 9/16" galvanized staples six (6) inches o.c. at both flanges
along entire length of joint. 4. Provide two (2) inch wide gypsum panel strip or other adequate seal behind control joint in fire rated partitions and partitions with safing insulation.
3.4 DRYWALL FASCIAS AND CEILINGS A. Furnish and install inserts, hanger clips and similar devices in coordination with other work. B. Secure hangers to inserts and clips. Clamp or
bolt hangers to main runners. C. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. D. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in
12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. E. Metal Furring Channels: Space sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum. Attach to 1-1/2" main
runner channels with furring channel clips (on alternate sides of main runner channels). Furring channels shall not be let into or come in contact with abutting masonry walls. End
splices shall be provided by nesting furring channels no less than eight (8) inches and securely wire tying. At any openings that interrupt the furring channels, install additional
cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability. F. Mechanical accessories, hangers, splices, runner channels and other members used in suspension system shall be of metal, zinc coated,
or coated with rust inhibitive paint, of suitable design and of adequate strength to support units securely without sagging, and such as to bring unit faces to finished indicated lines
and levels. 1. Provide special furring where ducts are over two (2) feet wide. G. Apply board with its long dimension at right angles to channels. Locate board butt joints over center
of furring channels. Attach board with one (1) inch self-drilling drywall screws twelve (12) inches o.c. in field of board at each furring channel; eight (8) inches o.c. at butt joints
located not less than 3/8" from edges. 3.5 FINISHING A. Taping: A thin, uniform layer of compound shall be applied to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall
be applied immediately, centered over the joint, seated into the compound. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall not function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly
folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. B. Filling: After initial coat of compound has hardened, additional compound shall be applied, filling the board taper flush
with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least
four (4) inches on either side of the tape. No fill coat is necessary on interior angles. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GYPSUM BOARD 092900-13
C. After compound has hardened, a finishing coat of compound shall be spread evenly over and extending slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a smooth, uniform
finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound,
and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sanding shall be done between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface, ready for painting. D. Fastener
Depressions: Compound shall be applied to all fastener depressions followed, when hardened by at least two (2) coats of compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the
surface. E. Finishing Beads and Trim: Compound shall be applied to all bead and trim and shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of the surface. When hardened, this shall
be followed by two (2) coats of compound each extending slightly beyond the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the surface and sanded
as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration. F. Except as otherwise noted, level of finish for surface exposed to view shall conform to Level 4 of ASTM C 840
and GA-214 of the Gypsum Association. G. Drywall construction with defects of such character which will mar appearance of finished work, or which is otherwise defective, will be rejected
and shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Owner. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the completion of installation of the work, all rubbish shall be removed from the building
leaving floors broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other equipment shall be removed from the building. B. Work shall be left in clean condition ready for painting
or wall covering. All work shall be as approved by Architect. C. Cutting and Repairing: Include all cutting, fitting and repairing of the work included herein in connection with all
mechanical trades and all other trades which come in conjunction with any part of the work, and leave all work complete and perfect after all trades have completed their work. 3.7 PROTECTION
OF WORK A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-1 SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor,
materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the acoustical panel ceilings as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical panel units. 2. Exposed "T" suspension system, including hangers and inserts. 3. Provisions for the installation of lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles and similar items
provided under other Sections. 4. Cutting, drilling, scribing and fitting as required for electro-mechanical penetrations. 5. Perimeter and column moldings, trim and accessories for
acoustical ceilings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drywall ceilings - Section 092900. B. Diffusers, grilles and related frames - Division 23. C. Lighting fixtures - Division 26. 1.4 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations published by the Ceilings and Interior
Systems Contractor’s Association. B. Qualifications of Installers 1. The suspended ceiling subcontractor shall have a record of successful installation of similar ceilings acceptable
to Architect and shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the ceiling suspension system. 2. For the actual fabrication and installation of all components of the system, use
only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-2 C. The work is subject to the following standards: 1. ASTM C 635 "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings," American Society for Testing and Materials. 2. ASTM C 636 "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels," American Society for Testing and Materials. D. In addition to suspension system specified, provide seismic struts and seismic clips to
meet seismic standards as required by prevailing Codes and Ordinances. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit completely dimensioned ceiling layouts for all areas where acoustical
ceilings are required, showing: 1. Any deviations from Architect’s reflected ceiling plan layouts, especially lighting fixture and dimensions. Also indicate if any light fixtures will
not fit into Architect’s ceiling layout due to dimensional restrictions or field conditions. 2. Direction and spacing of suspension members and location of hangers for carrying suspension
members. 3. Direction, sizes and types of acoustical units, showing suspension grid members, and starting point for each individual ceiling area. 4. Moldings at perimeter of ceiling,
at columns and elsewhere as required due to penetrations or exposure at edge of ceiling tiles. 5. Location and direction of lights, air diffusers, air slots, and similar items in the
ceiling plane. 6. Details of construction and installation at all conditions. 7. Materials, gauges, thickness and finishes. 8. Especially showing the layout of the suspended cloud ceiling
with edge trims located in the Maker Space. B. Samples and Product Literature: Submit the following samples and related manufacturer’s descriptive literature. 1. Twelve (12) inch
long components of suspension systems, including moldings. 2. Acoustical units — full size. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-3 B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature
and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical
ceilings until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings has been completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained
at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work
supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition system. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Stock: Deliver
stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Provide mineral fiber panels with square
tegular edges, manufactured by Armstrong World Industries USG Interiors, Inc., Roxul Rockfon, or approved equal. Panels shall meet ASTM E 1264, Class A, with minimum flame spread of
25 and smoke developed of 50 per ASTM E 84. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Provide Prelude XL (15/16”) steel suspenesion system with low sheen white baked enamel finish as manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries, USG Interiors, Inc., Chicago Metallic Corp., or approved equal. B. The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly shown on the drawings and specified
herein, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span, in accordance with ASTM C 635. C. Provide min. 12 ga. galvanized wire hangers, soft annealed steel conforming to ASTM A 641,
prestretched, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, size so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-4 D. Provide ceiling clips and inserts to receive hangers, type as recommended by suspension
system manufacturer, sizes for pull-out resistance of not less than five (5) times the hanger design load, as indicated in ASTM C 635. E. Suspension systems shall conform to ASTM C
635, intermediate duty. F. Provide manufacturer’s permitted angle moulding, in profile to be approved by architect with off-white baked enamel finish to match suspension systems. For
circular penetrations of ceilings, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas where acoustical
panel ceilings are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected to permit proper installation of the layout. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by
other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid
use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Codes and Standards: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations and industry standards. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with wire hangers supported only from
building structural members. Locate hangers not more than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0" along direct-hung runner, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". C. Secure wire hangers
by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or
fail with age or elevated temperatures. D. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural
or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, reinforcing, countersplaying or other equally
effective means. E. Install edge moldings at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the
work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113-5 1. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through vertical
leg. Space holes not more than 3" from each end and not more than sixteen (16) inches o.c. between end holes. Fasten tight against vertical surfaces. 2. Level moldings with ceiling
suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". F. Install acoustical units in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members.
Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. G. Install hold-down clips in toilet areas, and in areas where required by governing regulations; space 2'-0"
o.c. on all cross tees. H. Light fixtures or other ceiling apparatus shall not be supported from main beams or cross tees if their weight causes the total load to exceed the deflection
capability of the ceiling suspension system. In such cases the load shall be supported by supplemental hangers furnished and installed by this Section of work. I. Where fixture or
ceiling apparatus installation causes eccentric loading on runners, provide stabilizer bars to prevent rotation. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings,
including trim, edge molding, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot
be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES 096513-1 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the resilient
accessories, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Rubber base 2. Accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum Drywall -
Section 092900. B. Resilient Tile Flooring – Section 096519 C. Carpet Tile – Section 096813 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the skills required and completely familiar with the requirements established for this work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only,
submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for type of resilient base. B. Submit color sample chips of standard colors requested by Architect for initial
selection. C. Samples: Submit four (4) samples of each color of base, each sample to be six (6) inches long. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the project site in the
manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly marked to indicate pattern, gauge, lot number and sequence of materials. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-2 B. Carefully handle all materials and store in original containers at not less than seventy (70) degrees F. for at least forty-eight
(48) hours before start of installation. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Continuously heat spaces to receive base to a temperature of seventy (70) degrees F. for at least forty-eight (48) hours
prior to installation, whenever project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain seventy (70) degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended
by the manufacturer, but for not less than forty-eight (48) hours. Maintain a temperature of not less than fifty-five (55) degrees F. in areas where work is completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BASE A. Provide "Traditional Wall Base" as manufactured by Johnsonite, or equal by Armstrong, Roppe, or approved equal, 4" high by 1/8" thick, continuous vulcanized SBR rubber,
toeless, with pre-formed internal and external corner pieces, color as scheduled. Base shall conform to ASTM F 1861, Type TS, Group 1 (solid). B. Flexibility: Does not crack, break,
or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1/4" (6.4 mm) diameter cylinder when tested according to ASTM F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials
protocols. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based formulation manufactured and warranted by a reputable manufacturer,
as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Waterproof, stabilized type, as recommended by the manufacturer for site conditions and the type of service indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Transition Strips: "Adapters", "Slim Line Transitions" or wheeled traffic transitions as indicated on drawings, or if not indicated, as is most approprriate for the condition.
as manufactured by Johnsonite, or approved equal. Colors shall be approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where resilient base is
to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513-3 C. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. D. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient wall base. B. Fill cracks, holes, and
depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered
by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. In all spaces where base is indicated, install bases tight to walls, partitions, columns, built-in cabinets,
etc. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable with tops of adjacent pieces aligned, without gaps at top or bulges at bottom, with tight joints and flush edges, with
preformed corner pieces at internal and external corners. Install preformed corners before straight pieces. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. Provide end stops adjacent
to flush type door frames and where base does not terminate against an adjacent surface. Keep base in full contact with walls and floor until adhesive sets. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from base using neutral type cleaners as recommended by the manufacturer. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. B. Protect
resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END
OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING 096726 - 1 SECTION 096726 RESINOUS FLOORING Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Labor, products, equipment and services necessary for resinous flooring Work in accordance with the Contract Drawings covering the following components: .1 Primer: Sikafloor® 160
.2 Body Coat: Sikafloor® 217 .3 Top Coat: Sikafloor® 315N Clear with added texture .4 Line Striping: Sikafloor® 2870 B. Section 03 20 20 – Miscellaneous Concrete Slabs. 1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C579, Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. B. ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method
for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness. C. ASTM D2369, Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings. D. ASTM D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic
Coatings by the Taber Abraser. E. ASTM D4541, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. F. For additional standards please refer to Product
Data Sheets 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including physical properties and colors available.
C. Manufacturer’s Safety Data Sheet for each product being used. D. Product Samples: Submit Architectural Standard samples representative of the final finish, as applied. The Standard
shall be approved in writing by the Architect and shall be the final standard of acceptance of the finish. E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING 096726 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: .1 Acceptable Manufacturer:
Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Drive, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 .1 No request for substitution shall be considered that would change the generic type of system specified. Equivalent materials
of other manufacturers may be substituted only on approval of the Architect or Engineer. Requests for substitution will be considered only if submitted 10 days prior to bid date. Requests
shall include the respective manufacturer’s technical literature for each product giving the name, generic type, descriptive information, recommended dry film thickness (DFT), Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and certified test reports showing results to equal performance criteria of products specified herein. B. Applicator Qualifications: .1 Pre-Qualification:
Each bidder for this project shall be pre-qualified and approved in writing by the material manufacturer. .2 Applicator Experience: Each bidder must have a minimum 5 years experience
in the application of the type of system specified. Contractor shall submit a list of five projects of similar size, scope and complexity. C. Mock-Up: .1 Construct one 100 sq.ft.
(10 sq.m.) mock-up of each type and color of resinous flooring in location acceptable to Architect/Engineer to demonstrate quality of finished system, complying with manufacturer's
instructions. .2 Arrange for Architect/Engineer's review and acceptance, obtain written acceptance before proceeding with Work. .3 Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum
standard of quality for the balance of the work of this Section. Mock-up shall be left in place for the duration of the work. D. Pre-application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting
two (2) weeks before start of application of floor coating. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, applicator, and
manufacturer's representative. Review surface preparation, priming, application, curing, protection, and coordination with other work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery:
.1 Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, batch or lot number, and date
of manufacture. .2 Material should be delivered to job site and checked for completeness and shipping damage prior to job start. B. Storage: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING 096726 - 3 .1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. .2 Keep containers sealed until ready for use.
Material should be stored in a dry, enclosed, protected area from the elements. .3 Do not subject material to excessive heat or freezing. .4 Shelf life: Established based on manufacturer’s
written recommendation for each material being used. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. D. Condition materials for use
accordingly to manufacturer’s written instructions prior to application. E. Record material lot number and quantity delivered to jobsite/storage. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not install
the Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges with Manufacturers’ written acceptance: .1 Material Temperature: Precondition material for at least 24 hours between
65° to 75°F (18° to 24°C) .2 Ambient Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C) .3 Substrate Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C). Substrate temperature must be at
least 5˚F (3˚C) above measured Dew Point. .4 Mixing and Application attempted at Material, Ambient and/or Substrate Temperature conditions less than 65˚F (18˚C) will result in a decrease
in product workability and slower cure rates. .5 Relative Ambient Humidity: Minimum ambient humidity 30%, maximum ambient humidity 75% (during application and curing) .6 Measure and
confirm Substrate Moisture Content, Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and Surface Temperature and Dew Point. B. Substrate moisture: .1 Moisture content of concrete substrate must
be ≤ 4% by mass as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. .2 Additionally, relative humidity tests may be conducted per ASTM F2170 and values must be ≤ 85%.
.3 If moisture content of concrete substrate is > 4% by mass as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type and/or if relative humidity tests per ASTM F2170 exceed values > 85%, consider
moisture mitigation systems or moisture tolerant primer. C. Utilities, including electric, water, HVAC and permanent lighting to be supplied by General Contractor D. Maintain constant
ambient room temperature of plus or minus 15ºF (plus or minus 7ºC) with a minimum temperature of 50ºF (10ºC) and maximum temperature of 85ºF (30ºC). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING 096726 - 4 Maintain constant ambient room temperature for 48 hours before, during and after installation, or until cured.
Do not apply while ambient and temperatures are rising. E. Erect suitable barriers and post legible signs at points of entry to prevent traffic and trades from entering the work
area during application and cure period of the floor. F. Protection of finished floor from damage by subsequent trades shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. G. Insure
adequate ventilation and air flow. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s warranty covering the resinous flooring against defects in materials for one year from date of installation. Part 2
PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer shall be certified under ISO 9001: 2008 All liquid materials, including primers, resins, curing agents, finish coats, and sealants are manufactured
and tested under an ISO 9001:2008 registered quality system. B. Approved Manufacturer shall be Sika Corporation, Industrial Flooring, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071, Phone 201.933.8800,
Fax 201.933.6225, www.sikafloorusa.com 2.2 SYSTEM A. Resinous flooring system: Sikafloor Morritex Coating System is a solid clear, resin-rich, seamless, resinous floor system to consist
of the following components: .1 Primer: Sikafloor 160 applied between 8 – 10 mils .2 Body Coat: Sikafloor 217 applied at 12 – 20 mils .3 Top coat: Sikafloor 315N Clear applied at 3
– 6 mils with added texture .4 Line Striping: Sikafloor® 2870 applied at 8 mils WFT, under Top Coat 2.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive flooring system. Notify Architect/General
Contractor/Owner/Owner’s representative if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. Do not apply
to substrate treatments for moisture, repair, or leveling not of the same Manufacturer. B. Surface must be clean, sound and dry. Remove dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds bond
inhibiting impregnations, waxes and any other contaminants. All projections, rough spots, etc. should be dressed off to achieve a level surface prior to the application. C. Concrete
imperfections, static cracks, bolt holes, divots etc should be patched with Sikafloor 160. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING
096726 - 5 D. Concrete substrate to have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days and a minimum of 215 psi (1.5 MPa) in tension at time of application. E. Substrate
moisture: .1 Measure and confirm Substrate Moisture Content, Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and Surface Temperature and Dew Point. .2 Confirm and record above values at least once
every 3 hours during installation, or more frequently whenever conditions change (e.g. Ambient Temperature rise/fall, Relative Humidity increase/decrease, etc.). .3 Substrate Moisture
Content: Moisture content of concrete substrate must be ≤ 4% by mass (pbw– part by weight) as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter on mechanically prepared
surface according to this product data sheet (preparation to CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Do not apply to concrete substrate with moisture levels > 4% mass (pbw – part by
weight) as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. If moisture content of concrete substrate is > 4% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex®
CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter, use Sikafloor 1610 NA or Sikafloor PurCem 24NA. When relative humidity tests for concrete substrate are conducted per ASTM F2170 for project
specific requirements, values must be ≤ 85%. If values are > 85% according to ASTM F2170 use Sikafloor 1610 NA or Sikafloor PurCem 24NA. F. Ensure concrete substrate conforms to the
minimum requirements of the flooring manufacturer. G. Flooring system shall not be applied to sand-cement setting beds. Sand-cement beds shall be removed to structural concrete substrate
and re-leveled/sloped as necessary to achieve grade and/or adequate drainage. H. Flooring system shall not be applied to asphaltic or bitumen membranes, soft wood, aluminum, copper
or fiberglass reinforced polyester/vinyl ester composites. I. Application to glazed or vitrified brick and tile, structural wood, steel shall only be permitted with Manufacturer’s
written recommendation. 2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare surface to receive flooring systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove dirt, oil, grease, wax,
laitance, curing compounds, water-soluble concrete hardeners, and other surface contaminants. Remove sealers, finishes, and paints. Remove unsound concrete by appropriate mechanical
means. C. Concrete: Shall be cleaned and prepared to achieve laitance-free and contaminant-free, open textured surface by shot blasting or equivalent mechanical means (CSP level as
per ICRI guidelines and manufacturer’s written recommendation). Provide for entire floor surface. D. Chemical Surface Preparation: Chemical surface preparation (acid etching) is unacceptable
and will void Manufacturer’s warranty. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid RESINOUS FLOORING 096726 - 6 E. Control joints and cracks: Provide
repair and treatment of control joints and surface cracks utilizing manufacturer’s standard materials and installation details. 2.5 APPLICATION A. Mix and apply material with strict
adherence to manufacturer’s written installation procedures and coverage rates. B. Follow Manufacturer’s written recommendations on terminations and connections to walls, drains, doorways,
columns and floor-to-floor transitions. C. Do not apply while ambient and substrate temperatures are rising. D. Apply resinous flooring with care to ensure that no laps, voids, or
other marks or irregularities are visible, and with an appearance of uniform color, sheen and texture, all within limitations of materials and areas concerned. E. Match colors and textures
of approved samples. 2.6 CLEAN UP A. Disposal of this product, solution and any by-products should at all times comply with the requirements of environmental protection and waste disposal
legislation and any regional local authority requirements. B. Empty containers should be taken to an approved waste handling site for recycling or disposal. 2.7 PROTECTION A. Freshly
applied material should be protected from dampness, condensation and water for at least 72 hrs. B. Beware of air flow and changes in air flow. Introduction of dust, debris, and particles,
etc. may result in surface imperfections and other defects. C. Follow manufacturer’s written recommendation with respect to cure, wait time and return to service. END OF SECTION
PRODUCT DATA SHEET Sikafloor®-217 VERSATILE UV RESISTANT EPOXY RESIN USED AS A PRIMER, HIGH BUILD COATING AND FOR DECORATIVE QUARTZ AND FLAKE APPLICATIONS PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sikafloor®-217
is a low odor, 100% solids, epoxy resin coating system primarily designed for high build coatings, decorative quartz and decorative flake applications. Sikafloor 217 may be used as
a primer and may be applied clear or pigmented using Sikafloor Epoxy Color Additive-N. USES Sikafloor®-217 is ideal as a broadcast clear, low odor top coat, or intermediate coat over
decorative quartz or vinyl flake floor broadcast systems. Sikafloor 217 can also be field pigmented. Sikafloor 217 clear and/or pigmented may also be top coated with an aliphatic urethane
when increased chemical and abrasion resistance are required. When used as a primer, Sikafloor 217 can be considered where ≤ 4% moisture content by mass (pbw – part by weight) is measured
on concrete substrate with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. Typical applications may include: Auto dealerships▪ Institutions▪ Grocery, department and retail stores▪
Pharmaceutical laboratories, production rooms and offices. ▪ Museum and galleries.▪ Animal shelter and veterinary clinics.▪ Laboratories, bathroom/shower areas▪ CHARACTERISTICS / ADVANTAGES
Good chemical resistance▪ 100% solids as supplied▪ Attractive, high gloss, reflective coating▪ Tough, smooth, non-porous surface is easy to clean▪ Durable, impermeable and seamless▪
Easily applied with brush, roller or squeegee▪ Good abrasion resistance▪ Optional integral cove base and curbs may be installed without seams and joints ▪ Excellent impact resistance▪
Unlimited design capabilities available in various textures, patterns and colors ▪ Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-217 October 2019, Version 01.02 020811020020000141 1 / 5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
Packaging Component A: 3.00 US gal. (11.3 L) Component B: 1.50 US gal. (5.68 L) Component A: 5.00 US gal. (18.9 L)* Component A: 50 US gal. (189 L)* Component B: 5.00 US gal. (18.9
L) Component B: 50 US gal. (189 L) Components A+B: 15 US gal. (56.7 L) Components A+B: 150 US gal. (567 L) * (2 units needed) Mix ratio: 2:1 by volume Appearance / Color Clear or field
pigmented with Sikafloor Epoxy Color Additive-N Shelf Life 2 years in original unopened container under proper storage conditions Storage Conditions Store dry between 40° - 90°F (4°
- 32°C). Solid content by weight 100% Solid content by volume 100% Volatile organic compound (VOC) content 34 g/L Shore D Hardness 80 (ASTM D-2240) Abrasion Resistance 58 mg (CS-17/1000
cycles/1000g) (ASTM D-4060) Compressive Strength Resin (filled 1:0,9 with Sikadur® 504) 7,250 psi (50 MPa) (28 days) 7,978 psi (55 MPa) Resin only (ASTM C-579) Flexural Strength 9,284
psi (64 MPa) (ASTM D-790) Tensile Strength 5,078 psi (35 MPa) (ASTM D-638) Elongation at Break 15% (ASTM D-638) Tensile Adhesion Strength >350 psi (2.4 Mpa) (ASTM D-4541) Indentation
1.30% (MIL-PRF-24613) Chemical Resistance Please consult Sikafloor Technical Services. Water Absorption 0.13% (2 hours boiling) (ASTM C-413) Permeability to Water Vapor 0.41 g/hour/sq-meter
(ASTM E-96) Gloss Level @ 60 degrees 90 (ASTM D-523) Coverage Smooth Finish Coating: Prime coat: 160 - 200 ft2 / US gal (3.9 – 6.5 m2 / L) at 6 - 10 mils (0.15 – 0.25 mm) wet film thickness
(w.f.t.) Wear coat: 100 - 133 ft2 / US gal (2.6 - 3.3 m2 / L) at 12 - 16 mils (0.30 – 0.40 mm) wet film thickness (w.f.t.) Product Temperature Precondition material for at least 24
hours between 65° to 75°F (18° to 24°C) Ambient Air Temperature Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C) Relative Air Humidity Maximum ambient and humidity 85% (during application and curing)
Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-217 October 2019, Version 01.02 020811020020000141 2 / 5 Dew Point Beware of condensation! The substrate must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above the Dew Point
to reduce the risk of condensation, which may lead to adhesion failure or “blushing” on the floor finish. Be aware that the substrate temperature may be lower than the ambient temperature.
Substrate Temperature Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C). Substrate temperature must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above measured Dew Point. Mixing and Application attempted at Material, Ambient
and/or Substrate Temperature conditions less than 65˚F (18˚C) will result in a decrease in product workability and slower cure rates. Substrate Moisture Content Moisture content of
concrete substrate must be ≤ 4% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter on mechanically prepared surface according to this
product data sheet (preparation to CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Do not apply to concrete substrate with moisture levels > 4% mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with
Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. If moisture content of concrete substrate is > 4% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete
moisture meter, use Sikafloor 1610 or Sikafloor 22NA PurCem. When relative humidity tests for concrete substrate are conducted per ASTM F2170 for project specific requirements, values
must be ≤ 85%. If values are > 85% according to ASTM F2170 use Sikafloor 1610 or Sikafloor 22NA PurCem. ASTM F2170 testing is not a substitute for measuring substrate moisture content.
Use a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter as described above. Pot Life Material Temperature Time +50°F (10°C) ~ 50 minutes +68°F (20°C) ~ 25 minutes +86°F (30°C) ~ 15
minutes Cure Time Ambient & Substrate Temperature Foot traffic Light traffic Full cure +50°F (10°C) ~24 hours ~3 days ~10 days +68°F (20°C) ~8 hours ~2 days ~7 days +86°F (30°C) ~6
hours ~36 hours ~4 days Waiting / Recoat Times Before applying second coat of Sikafloor 217 allow: Ambient & Substrate Temperature Minimum Maximum +50°F (10°C) ~24 hours ~36 hours +68°F
(20°C) ~8 hours ~24 hours +86°F (30°C) ~6 hours ~24 hours Before applying Sikafloor Epoxy or Polyurethane on Sikafloor 217 allow: Ambient & Substrate Temperature Minimum Maximum +50°F
(10°C) ~24 hours ~3 days +68°F (20°C) ~8 hours ~2 days +86°F (30°C) ~6 hours ~1 day Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-217 October 2019, Version 01.02 020811020020000141 3 / 5 APPLICATION
INSTRUCTIONS SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound and dry. Remove dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, Preparation bond inhibiting impregnations, waxes and any other
contaminants. All projections, rough spots, etc. should be removed to achieve a level surface prior to the application. Concrete - Should be cleaned and prepared to achieve a laitance-free
and contaminant-free, open textured surface by shot blasting or equivalent mechanical means (CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Sweep and vacuum any remaining dirt and dust with
a wet/dry vacuum. Removing residual dust will help ensure a tenacious bond between the primer/coating and the substrate. Whenever “shot-blasting” is utilized, be careful to leave concrete
with a uniform texture. “Over-blasting” will result in reduced coverage rates of the primer and/or subsequent topcoats. The “shotblast” pattern may show through the last coat, known
as “tracking”. The compressive strength of the concrete substrate should be at least 3,500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days and at least 215 psi (1.5 MPa) in tension at the time of application.
For other substrates, please contact Sikafloor Technical Services. MIXING Mixing Ratio - 2 : 1 by volume. Each component must be pre-mixed separately to ensure product uniformity. Clear
Resin: Premix each component separately. Empty Component B (Hardener) in the correct mix ratio into Component A (Resin). Mix the combined components for at least 3 minutes and until
uniform using a low speed drill (300 - 450 rpm) and Exomixer or Jiffy type paddle suited to the volume of the mixing container to minimize entrapped air. Be careful not to introduce
any air bubbles while mixing. Make sure the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in the coating. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides
and bottom of the container with a flat or straight edge trowel at least once to ensure complete mixing. Field Pigmented: Premix each component separately. If color is desired, the
appropriate Sikafloor Epoxy Color Additive-N is added to Component A at a rate of 1 quart (1L) per 5 mixed gallons (18.9 L) [Components A+B)] for all colors except colors such as White,
Safety Yellow or Tile Red which require 2 quarts (2 L) per 5 mixed gallons (18.9 L) [Components A+B]. Mix Component A and Sikafloor Color Additive-N for 2 minutes and until a uniform
color is achieved with a low speed drill (300 - 450 rpm) and Exomixer or Jiffy type paddle suited to the volume. Empty Component B (Hardener) in the correct mix ratio to Component A
(Resin) and mix for additional 2 minutes. Be careful not to introduce any air while mixing. Make sure the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in
the coating. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides and bottom of the container with a flat or straight edge trowel at least once to ensure complete mixing. Do not mix more
material than can be applied within the working time limits (i.e. Pot Life) at the actual field temperature. Do not hand mix Sikafloor materials. Mechanically mix only. Do not thin
this product. Addition of thinners (e.g. water, solvent, etc.) will slow cure and reduce ultimate properties of this product. Use of thinners will void any applicable Sika warranty.
Improper mixing procedure or incorrect mixing ratio may result in moisture sensitivity, whitening, slow cure, soft spots, and other defects APPLICATION As Primer: Apply Sikafloor 217
by squeegee at the rate of 160 - 266 ft2 / US gal (3.9 – 5.4 m2 / L) at 6 - 10 mils (0.15 – 0.25 mm) wet film thickness (w.f.t.) and back-roll with pressure immediately. Coverage will
vary depending on the porosity and texture of the prepared floor. Product has a limited pot life, see Typical Data. Do not apply by dipping roller into mixing container. Pour a bead
of product in the form of a ribbon on the surface to be coated, then spread with squeegee and back-roll. Ensure that the coating is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and
complete coverage over the entire concrete substrate. If necessary, apply an additional coat to ensure the coating is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage
over the entire concrete substrate. As Sealer/Intermediate: Sikafloor 217 is applied with a 12 to 40 mil (0.30 - 1 mm) notched squeegee over a smooth surface and a flat squeegee over
a rough decorative quartz or decorative flake surfaces. Back rolling is typically done with an 18 inch (455 mm) wide 3/8-inch (10 mm) nap, solvent-resistant roller cover. Back-roll
the Sikafloor 217 only to level the squeegee applied material. Over-rolling and late back rolling may cause bubbling and leave roller marks. If used as a primer. Apply the primer/coating
to the prepared substrate using a squeegee and back roll to provide uniform coverage. Ensure that the substrate is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage
over the entire concrete substrate. If necessary, apply an additional coat to ensure the substrate is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage over the
entire substrate. Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-217 October 2019, Version 01.02 020811020020000141 4 / 5 LIMITATIONS Prior to application, measure and confirm Substrate Moisture Content,
Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and Surface Temperature and Dew Point. During installation, confirm and record above values at least once every 3 hours, or more frequently whenever
conditions change (e.g. Ambient Temperature rise/fall, Relative Humidity increase/decrease, etc.). BASIS OF PRODUCT DATA Results may differ based upon statistical variations depending
upon mixing methods and equipment, temperature, application methods, test methods, actual site conditions and curing conditions. OTHER RESTRICTIONS See Legal Disclaimer. ENVIRONMENTAL,
HEALTH AND SAFETY For further information and advice regarding transportation, handling, storage and disposal of chemical products, user should refer to the actual Safety Data Sheets
containing physical, environmental, toxicological and other safety related data. User must read the current actual Safety Data Sheets before using any products. In case of an emergency,
call CHEMTREC at 1-800-424-9300, International 703-527-3887. LEGAL DISCLAIMER • KEEP CONTAINER TIGHTLY CLOSED • KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN • NOT FOR INTERNAL CONSUMPTION • FOR INDUSTRIAL
USE ONLY • FOR PROFESSIONAL USE ONLY Prior to each use of any product of Sika Corporation, its subsidiaries or affiliates (“SIKA”), the user must always read and follow the warnings
and instructions on the product’s most current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet which are available at usa.sika.com or by calling SIKA’s Technical Service Department
at 1-800-933-7452. Nothing contained in any SIKA literature or materials relieves the user of the obligation to read and follow the warnings and instructions for each SIKA product as
set forth in the current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet prior to use of the SIKA product. SIKA warrants this product for one year from date of installation
to be free from manufacturing defects and to meet the technical properties on the current Product Data Sheet if used as directed within the product’s shelf life. User determines suitability
of product for intended use and assumes all risks. User’s and/or buyer’s sole remedy shall be limited to the purchase price or replacement of this product exclusive of any labor costs.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED SHALL APPLY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SIKA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. SIKA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A MANNER TO INFRINGE ON ANY PATENT OR ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS HELD BY OTHERS.
Sale of SIKA products are subject to the Terms and Conditions of Sale which are available at https://usa.sika.com/en/group/SikaCorp/termsandcondi tions.html or by calling 1-800-933-7452.
Sikafloor-217-en-US-(10-2019)-1-2.pdf Sika Corporation 201 Polito Avenue Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 Phone: +1-800-933-7452 Fax: +1-201-933-6225 usa.sika.com Sika Mexicana S.A. de C.V. Carretera
Libre Celaya Km. 8.5 Fracc. Industrial Balvanera Corregidora, Queretaro C.P. 76920 Phone: 52 442 2385800 Fax: 52 442 2250537 Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-217 October 2019, Version
01.02 020811020020000141 5 / 5 Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version 01.02 020812040030000006 PRODUCT DATA SHEET Sikafloor®-315 N ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE FLOOR COATING
CONTAINING UV BLOCKER TECHNOLOGY, LOW VOC, LOW ODOR, HIGH GLOSS SMOOTH FINISH OR OPTIONAL SEMI-GLOSS FINE AGGREGATE TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sikafloor®-315 N is a high solids,
low VOC, low odor, highly abrasion resistant, aliphatic polyurethane coating. This high performance system contains unique UV blocker technology that provides superior ultraviolet light
screening properties that significantly improves color retention values of the underlying resin floor system. It has excellent clarity when applied as a two part clear high gloss smooth
coating, or as a three-part semi-gloss textured finish with the addition of prepackaged optional wear aggregate. Sikafloor 315N Clear provides excellent adhesion and wear resistance
properties when overcoating epoxy or polyurethane substrates. It has excellent chemical resistance. USES Sikafloor®-315 N may only be used by experienced professionals. Sikafloor®-315
N is typically used in light to heavy traffic areas such as: Laboratories, Life Sciences, Pharmaceutical industries and Health Care industry. ▪ Education (e.g. Schools and Universities).▪
Leisure & Culture (e.g. Museums, Stadiums).▪ Retail (e.g. Shopping Malls).▪ Manufacturing facilities and warehouses.▪ CHARACTERISTICS / ADVANTAGES Low maintenance▪ Excellent UV resistance▪
Low VOC-content, low odor▪ Durable, impermeable and seamless▪ Smooth glossy finish, optional slip resistant semi-gloss finish ▪ Unique UV blocker technology provides superior ultraviolet
light screening ▪ 1 / 6 PRODUCT INFORMATION Packaging Mix Unit: Component A: 1.0 US gal. (3.78 L) Resin Component B: 2.00 US gal. (7.56 L) Hardener Component C: 9 lb (4.1 kg) Optional,
Wear Aggregate Components A+B: 3 US gal. (11.34 L) Appearance / Color Clear only, do not add any type of color additive. Shelf Life 2 years in unopened container Storage Conditions
Store dry between 40° - 90°F (4°- 32°C) Volatile organic compound (VOC) content 5 1 g/L g/l (A + B Combined) 54 g/l Sikafloor®-315 N clear Part A + Sikafloor® 315 N Part B + Sikafloor®
372 Urethane Accelerator Combined. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Shore D Hardness 73-78 ASTM D2240 at 73 °F (23°C) and 50 % R.H: Abrasion Resistance Taber Abraser, Wheel CS 17/1000g (2.2 lb)
/ 1000 cycles 8 mg loss (smooth high gloss) ASTM D4060 at 73 °F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Tensile Strength 4,641 psi. (32 Mpa) ASTM D-638 at 73 °F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Elongation at Break
85% ASTM D-638 at 73 °F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Tensile Adhesion Strength Pull-off Strength - Primed Concrete > 360 psi (2.5 MPa) (100% concrete failure) ASTM D4541 at 73 °F (23°C) and
50 % R.H Chemical Resistance Please consult Sikafloor Technical Services. Water Absorption 0.68% (2 hours boiling) ASTM C413 at 73 °F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Gloss Level 90 (smooth high
gloss) 65 (textured semi gloss) ASTM D523 60 degrees Coefficient of Friction ANSI-NFSI B101.3 / ANSI A137.1 BOT 3000 0.32 Wet (smooth high gloss) 0.48 Dry (smooth high gloss) 0.53 Wet
(textured semi gloss) 0.62 Dry (textured semi gloss) DCOF Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version 01.02 020812040030000006 2 / 6 APPLICATION INFORMATION Mixing Ratio
1:2 See special mixing instruction for partial mixes. Coverage Coverage of materials on a primed or prepared substrate will vary depending on the porosity or density, profile and texture
of the substrate. The theoretical coverages are: Smooth Glossy Finish: Sikafloor 315N Clear applied at 4 - 10 wet mils (160 - 401 sq. ft./gal) per coat Textured Semi-Gloss Finish: Sikafloor
315N applied at 2 - 4 wet mils (401 - 801 sq. ft./gal) per coat. Note: This requires the addition of the Part C wear additive. Product will not cure properly if applied at excessive
thickness. Product Temperature Precondition material for at least 24 hours between 65° to 75°F (18° to 24°C) Ambient Air Temperature Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C) Relative Air
Humidity Minimum ambient humidity 30% Maximum ambient humidity 75% (during application and curing) Dew Point Beware of condensation! The substrate must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above the
Dew Point to reduce the risk of condensation, which may lead to adhesion failure or “blushing” on the floor finish. Be aware that the substrate temperature may be lower than the ambient
temperature. Substrate Temperature Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C). Substrate temperature must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above measured Dew Point. Mixing and Application must adhere
to Material, Ambient and Substrate temperatures listed above or a decrease in product workability and slower cure rates will occur. Substrate Moisture Content Moisture content of concrete
substrate must be ≤ 4% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter on mechanically prepared surface according to this product
data sheet (preparation to CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Do not apply to concrete substrate with moisture levels > 4% mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex®
CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. If moisture content of concrete substrate is > 4% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture
meter, use Sikafloor 1610 or Sikafloor 22NA or 24NA PurCem®. When relative humidity tests for concrete substrate are conducted per ASTM F2170 for project specific requirements, values
must be ≤ 85%. If values are > 85% according to ASTM F2170 use Sikafloor 1610 or Sikafloor 22NA or 24NA PurCem®. ASTM F2170 testing is not a substitute for measuring substrate moisture
content with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter as described above. Pot Life Material Temperature Time +50°F (10°C) 50 minutes +68°F (20°C) 25 minutes +86°F (30°C)
15 minutes *Do not apply after indicated Pot Life is exceeded. End of Pot Life is not visible. Material will appear liquid, but is unusable and will result in poor adhesion. Product
Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version 01.02 020812040030000006 3 / 6 Cure Time Ambient & Substrate Temperature Foot traffic Light traffic Full cure +50°F (10°C) 48 hours
3 days 10 days +68°F (20°C) 24 hours 2 days 7 days +86°F (30°C) 18 hours 36 hours 5 days Cure times may be significantly decreased with the use of Sikafloor-372 Urethane Accelerator.
Refer to the Sikafloor-372 Urethane Accelerator for complete technical information. Waiting / Recoat Times Before applying second coat of Sikafloor 315N allow: Ambient & Substrate Temperature
Minimum Maximum +50°F (10°C) 18 hours 72 hours +68°F (20°C) 12 hours 48 hours +86°F (30°C) 8 hours 24 hours APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound
and dry. Remove dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, bond inhibiting impregnations, waxes and any other contaminants. All projections, rough spots, etc. should be removed to achieve
a level surface prior to the application. Concrete - Should be cleaned and prepared to achieve a laitancefree and contaminant-free, open textured surface by shot blasting or equivalent
mechanical means (CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Sweep and vacuum any remaining dirt and dust with a wet/dry vacuum. Removing residual dust will help ensure a tenacious bond
between the primer and substrate. Whenever “shotblasting” is utilized, be careful to leave concrete with a uniform texture. “Over-blasting” will result in reduced coverage rates of
the primer and/or subsequent topcoats. The “shotblast” pattern may show through the last coat, known as “tracking”. The compressive strength of the concrete substrate should be at least
3,500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days and at least 215 psi (1.5 MPa) in tension at the time of application. For other substrates, please contact Sikafloor Technical Services. Priming: Priming
for concrete substrate is required. Prime with either Sikafloor 160, Sikafloor 161, Sikafloor 1610, Sikafloor 165 FS or Sikafloor 2570. Allow the primer to cure (varies with temperature
and humidity) until tack free before applying subsequent coats. Ensure that the primer is pore-free, pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage over the entire substrate.
Please refer to the individual most current and respective Product Data Sheet for specific and detailed information. MIXING Mixing for Clear Application = Part A Clear + Part B Mix
Ratio: 1 Part A : 2 Part B by Volume Premixing of Part A is necessary to ensure product uniformity. If mixing a partial unit, it is essential that the Part A component be mixed immediately
prior to measuring out. Material separates quickly, measure out necessary quantity immediately after mixing. Empty the entire contents of the Component B (Hardener) into the Component
A (Resin) in a clean bucket/container large enough to accommodate the mix size quantity. Mix at low speed for 3 minutes (300 - 450 rpm). Be careful not to introduce any air while mixing.
Make sure the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in the coating. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides and bottom of the container
with a flat or straight edge tool at least once to ensure complete mixing. Note: Care must be taken not to use product beyond its recommended pot life. Material will appear liquid,
but is unusable and will result in poor adhesion. Semi-gloss Finish: Requires use of the wear aggregate. Premix as above. Empty the entire contents of the Component B (Hardener) into
the Component A (Resin) into a clean bucket/container large enough to accommodate the mix size quantity. Mix at low speed for 1 minute (300 - 450 rpm). Slowly add the Component C (Wear
Aggregate) to the mix material under agitation. Mix for 2 minutes. Note: Do not dump wear aggregate into mix! Be careful not to introduce any air bubbles while mixing. Make sure the
contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in the coating. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides and bottom of the container with a flat or
straight edge trowel at least once to ensure complete mixing. Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version 01.02 020812040030000006 4 / 6 Do not mix more material than
can be applied within the working time limits (i.e. Pot Life) at actual temperature. Do not hand mix Sikafloor materials. Mechanically mix only. Do not thin this product. Addition of
thinners (e.g. water, solvent, etc.) will slow cure and reduce ultimate properties of this product. Use of thinners will void any applicable Sika warranty. APPLICATION General Requirements:
It is extremely important to thoroughly clean the substrate before application of Sikafloor®-315 N. Dust particles, dirt, steel shot and other contaminates will be permanently sealed
into the cured film appearing as surface defects on high gloss, thin mil coatings. Roller covers should be low nap, lint free and of high quality to minimize the appearance and frequency
of entrapped roller fibers. Application of Sikafloor®-315 N for Glossy Finish using a Roller: Sikafloor 315N is applied with an 18 inch (454 mm) roller, 1/4 or 3/8-inch (6 - 10 mm)
nap, solvent resistant roller cover at a thickness of 4 – 10 mils. The floor area to be coated should be divided into sections that can be done completely in one application sequence.
Sections should be divided at expansion joints or doorways when possible. The end of a section should be taped off to form a straight, clean edge for an adjacent section. Pour the material
into a roller tray and saturate the roller, remove the excess material by lightly rolling it in the tray. Apply 3 pairs of 8 - 10 foot long paths on to the floor. Spread the material
with roller passes perpendicular to the originally applied paths. This material may be aggressively rolled to even out the application. It is extremely important to apply the coating
at a rate of 4 - 6 mils to achieve proper appearance, texture, and color stability. If material is applied too heavy, the coating may create microblisters. If the material is applied
too thin, the coating gloss levels may vary. Product will not cure properly if applied at excessive thickness. Do not exceed 10 mils. Application of Sikafloor®-315 N for Glossy Finish
using a Flat Squeegee, only for use without wear aggregate: Pour a thin ribbon, approximately 6’’- 8’’ wide of Sikafloor®-315 Nonto the floor surface. Using a flat squeegee spread the
material at the 160 - 400 sq. feet per gallon. Avoid leaving puddles of the Sikafloor®-315 N on the floor surface. Using a 3/8’’ nap roller, back roll the material in the oppositedirection
that it was squeegee applied. Continue to back roll the material to achieve even coverage across the floor. It is extremely important to apply this material at a rate of 4 – 10 mils
(WFT). To finish, the Sikafloor 315N should be cross rolled; uninterrupted across the entire width of the floor. This will help reduce roller marks. If material is applied too heavy,
the coating may create micro-blisters, if the material is applied too thin, the coating gloss levels may vary. Product will not cure properly if applied at excessive thickness. Do not
exceed 10 mils. Application of Sikafloor®-315 N for Semi Gloss Finish using a Roller, Use of the Wear Aggregate required: Sikafloor®-315 N is applied with an 18 inch (454 mm) roller,
3/8-inch (10 mm) nap, solvent resistant roller cover at a thickness of 2 - 4 mils (0.075 mm). The floor area to be coated should be divided into sections that can be done completely
in one application sequence. Sections should be divided at expansion joints or doorways when possible. The end of a section should be taped off to form a straight clean edge for an
adjacent section. Pour the material in a roller tray and saturate the roller, remove the excess material by lightly rolling it in the tray. It is important to apply the coating uniformly
at a rate of 2 - 4 mils to achieve proper appearance. If material is applied too heavy, the coating may create micro-blisters or result in loss of aggregate texture. If material is
applied too thin, the coating gloss level may vary. Do not exceed 4 mils. It is very important to remix the material often with the roller in the tray to keep the aggregate from settling
at the bottom of the mixing container. It is important to remix the remaining material in the mixing container before the material is poured into the tray. This will ensure that the
Wear Aggregate is evenly dispersed in the Sikafloor®-315 N. Cross roll the entire area with straight uninterrupted passes across the entire width of the floor. This will reduce roller
marks. If appearance is still not uniform after a few of these passes, repeat this procedure. Note: Care must be taken not to use product beyond its recommended pot life. Material will
appear liquid, but is unusable and will result in poor adhesion. Application: Apply the coating to the prepared substrate which should be pore-free and pinhole-free. If necessary, apply
an additional coat of a suitable material to ensure the substrate is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage over the entire substrate. Do not apply while
ambient and substrate temperatures are rising, as pinholes may occur. Ensure there is no vapor drive at the time of application. Refer to ASTM D4263, may be used for a visual indication
of vapor drive. ▪ Sikafloor 315N UV blocking aliphatic polyurethane coating may not completely prevent discoloration of underlying coatings in some applications ▪ Do not apply Sikafloor
to concrete substrate containing aggregates susceptible to ASR (Alkali Silica Reaction) due to risk of natural alkali redistribution below the Sikafloor product after application. If
concrete substrate has or is suspected to have ASR (Alkali Silica ▪ Reaction) present, do not proceed. Consult with design professional prior to use. ▪ Any aggregate used with Sikafloor
systems must be non-reactive and oven-dried. ▪ Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version 01.02 020812040030000006 5 / 6 This product is not designed for negative side
waterproofing. ▪ Typically not recommended for exterior slabs on grade where freeze/thaw conditions may exist. ▪ Use of unvented heaters and certain heat sources may result in defects
(e.g. blushing, whitening, debonding, etc.). ▪ Mechanical, chemical & physical properties will be fully achieved at full cure. ▪ Beware of air flow and changes in air flow. Introduction
of dust, debris, and particles, etc. may result in surface imperfections and other defects. ▪ For professional use only by experienced applicators.The previous version of Sikafloor-315
is not compatible with this new formulation. Do not mix components from Sikafloor®-315 N and Sikafloor®-315 N. ▪ LIMITATIONS Prior to application, measure and confirm Substrate Moisture
Content, Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and Surface Temperature and Dew Point. During installation, confirm and record above values at least once every 3 hours, or more frequently
whenever conditions change (e.g. Ambient Temperature rise/fall, Relative Humidity increase/decrease, etc.). BASIS OF PRODUCT DATA Results may differ based upon statistical variations
depending upon mixing methods and equipment, temperature, application methods, test methods, actual site conditions and curing conditions. OTHER RESTRICTIONS See Legal Disclaimer. ENVIRONMENTAL,
HEALTH AND SAFETY For further information and advice regarding transportation, handling, storage and disposal of chemical products, user should refer to the actual Safety Data Sheets
containing physical, environmental, toxicological and other safety related data. User must read the current actual Safety Data Sheets before using any products. In case of an emergency,
call CHEMTREC at 1-800-424-9300, International 703-527-3887. LEGAL DISCLAIMER • KEEP CONTAINER TIGHTLY CLOSED • KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN • NOT FOR INTERNAL CONSUMPTION • FOR INDUSTRIAL
USE ONLY • FOR PROFESSIONAL USE ONLY Prior to each use of any product of Sika Corporation, its subsidiaries or affiliates (“SIKA”), the user must always read and follow the warnings
and instructions on the product’s most current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet which are available at usa.sika.com or by calling SIKA’s Technical Service Department
at 1-800-933-7452. Nothing contained in any SIKA literature or materials relieves the user of the obligation to read and follow the warnings and instructions for each SIKA product as
set forth in the current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet prior to use of the SIKA product. SIKA warrants this product for one year from date of installation
to be free from manufacturing defects and to meet the technical properties on the current Product Data Sheet if used as directed within the product’s shelf life. User determines suitability
of product for intended use and assumes all risks. User’s and/or buyer’s sole remedy shall be limited to the purchase price or replacement of this product exclusive of any labor costs.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED SHALL APPLY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SIKA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. SIKA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A MANNER TO INFRINGE ON ANY PATENT OR ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS HELD BY OTHERS.
Sale of SIKA products are subject to the Terms and Conditions of Sale which are available at https://usa.sika.com/en/group/SikaCorp/termsandconditions.html or by calling 1-800-933-7452.
Sika Corporation 201 Polito Avenue Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 Phone: +1-800-933-7452 Fax: +1-201-933-6225 usa.sika.com Sika Mexicana S.A. de C.V. Carretera Libre Celaya Km. 8.5 Fracc. Industrial
Balvanera Corregidora, Queretaro C.P. 76920 Phone: 52 442 2385800 Fax: 52 442 2250537 Sikafloor-315N-en-US-(01-2020)-1-2.pdf Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-315 N January 2020, Version
01.02 020812040030000006 6 / 6 PRODUCT DATA SHEET Sikafloor®-160 EPOXY EPO-ROK MORTAR SYSTEM PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A general service, two component, high solids, epoxy system for use
as a primer, coating or as a binder for pigmented slurry/broadcast system or epoxy mortar. USES Sikafloor®-160 may only be used by experienced professionals. Its formulated to restore
and protect concrete floors from impact and abrasive traffic. Sikafloor®-160 is designed as a primer for Sikafloor epoxy and urethane coatings, as well as a binder resin for broadcast
and troweled systems. CHARACTERISTICS / ADVANTAGES Low VOC.▪ Excellent penetration and adhesion.▪ Multi-purpose use.▪ 100 % solids as supplied.▪ Protects new concrete from abuse.▪ Rejuvenates
worn surfaces, to a smooth finish.▪ Designed to take heavy loads.▪ Formulated for easy application.▪ Fast curing reduces downtime.▪ Smooth and slip resistant surface possible (Optional)
Use of Sikadur-506 RC Type Aggregate which contains 30 % recycled basalt, Pre-Consumer Recycled Material. ▪ Meets the qualifications for acquiring LEED points.▪ APPROVALS / STANDARDS
Flammability (Epo-Rok mortar system) (ASTM D-635): Self Extinguishing ▪ With Sikafloor-264, 264 Thixo Top coat (ASTM E-648 2017): Class I ▪ Sikafloor 340 or 315N Top coat: Class I▪
Sikafloor 217, Sikafloor 510 Quartz Broadcast topcoat: Class I ▪ PRODUCT INFORMATION Packaging Component A: 5.00 US gal. (18.9 L)* Component A: 50 US gal. (189 L)* Component B: 5.00
US gal. (18.9 L) Component B: 50 US gal. (189 L) Components A+B: 15 US gal. (56.7 L) Components A+B: 150 US gal. (567 L) Component C: 20 bags (50 lbs. each) Component C: 200 bags (50
lbs. each) * (2 units needed) Appearance / Color Neutral aggregates or pigmented with Sikafloor Epoxy Color Additive-N; 1 quart (1.0 L) size. Depending on the color chosen,1 or 2 of
color packs may be required per 5 gallon mix Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-160 May 2019, Version 03.02 020811020010000052 1 / 6 Shelf Life 2 years in original unopened container under
proper storage conditions Storage Conditions Store dry between 40–90 °F (4–32 °C) Solid content by weight ~100 % Solid content by volume ~100 % Volatile organic compound (VOC) content
13 g/L (A+B Combined) TECHNICAL INFORMATION Shore D Hardness 80 (ASTM D-2240) Abrasion Resistance 110 mg (ASTM D-4060) (CS-17/1000 cyc/1000g) Compressive Strength 9,200 Psi (63.4 MPa)
(ASTM C-579) Flexural Strength 5,795 psi (39.95 MPa) (ASTM C-580) Tensile Strength 2,176 psi (14.7 MPa) (ASTM C-307) Tensile Adhesion Strength > 350 psi (Concrete failure) (ASTM D-4541)
Indentation 0.23 % (MIL-PRF-24613 ) Chemical Resistance Please consult Sikafloor Technical Services. Thermal Resistance Pass (ASTM C-884) Water Absorption 0.55 % (ASTM C-413) (2 hours
boiling) APPLICATION INFORMATION Coverage Applied over relatively smooth concrete floors. Rough, worn or pitted concrete floors will require additional material. Size Unit Sq. feet/unit
Thickness 15 US gal unit (20 Bags) 448 ft2 (41.6 m2) 600 ft2 (52 m2) 1/4” (6 mm) 3/16” (4.8 mm) 150 US gal unit (200 Bags) 4,480 ft2 (416 m2) 6,000 ft2 (520 m2) 1/4” (6 mm) 3/16” (4.8
mm) Pot Life Material Temperature Time 50 °F (10°C) ~50 minutes 68 °F (20°C) ~25 minutes 86 °F (30°C) ~15 minutes Cure Time Ambient & Substrate Temperature Foot traffic Light traffic
Full cure 50 °F (10 °C) ~ 24 hours ~ 3 days ~ 10 days 68 °F (20 °C) ~ 12 hours ~ 2 days ~ 7 days 86 °F (30 °C) ~ 8 hours ~ 1 days ~ 5 days Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-160 May 2019,
Version 03.02 020811020010000052 2 / 6 Waiting / Recoat Times Before applying solvent free products on Sikafloor®-160 allow: Ambient and Substrate Temperature Minimum Maximum 50 °F
(10 °C) 24 hours 36 hours 68 °F (20 °C) 8 hours 24 hours 86 °F (30 °C) 6 hours 24 hours APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound and dry. Remove dust,
laitance, grease, curing compounds, bond inhibiting impregnations, waxes and any other contaminants. All projections, rough spots, etc. should be removed to achieve a level surface
prior to the application. Concrete - Should be cleaned and prepared to achieve a laitancefree and contaminant-free, open textured surface by shot blasting or equivalent mechanical means
(CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Sweep and vacuum any remaining dirt and dust with a wet/dry vacuum. Removing residual dust will help ensure a tenacious bond between the primer/coating
and the substrate. Whenever “shot-blasting” is utilized, be careful to leave concrete with a uniform texture. “Over-blasting” will result in reduced coverage rates of the primer and/or
subsequent topcoats. The “shotblast” pattern may show through the last coat, known as “tracking”. The compressive strength of the concrete substrate should be at least 3,500 psi (24
MPa) at 28 days and at least 215 psi (1.5 MPa) in tension at the time of application. For other substrates, please contact Sikafloor Technical Services. Priming Priming for concrete
substrate is required. For wet in wet application: Prime with either Sikafloor®160 or Sikafloor 161 using a squeegee and back roll to provide uniform coverage. Avoid ponding. If primer
becomes tack-free, re-prime the substrate. For application over cured primer: Apply either Sikafloor®-160 or Sikafloor® 161 using a squeegee and back roll to provide uniform coverage
and broadcast a 20 mesh quartz sand into the fresh primer. Avoid ponding. Please refer to the individual most current and respective Product Data Sheet for specific and detailed information.
MIXING Mixing Ratio - 2 : 1 by volume. For bulk packaging, when not mixing full units, each component must be pre-mixed separately to ensure product uniformity. Note: If a small mix
unit is needed, mix the following quantities: 64 oz of Component A (Resin) + 32 oz of Component B (Hardener) + 1 bag of Sikadur 506 (50 lbs) This mix would yield approximately 22 ft2
at 1/4” (6 mm). Clear Resin: Premix each component separately to ensure product uniformity. Empty Component B (Hardener) in the correct mix ratio into Component A (Resin). Mix the
combined components for at least 2 minutes using a low speed drill (300–450 rpm) and Exomixer or Jiffy type paddle suited to the volume of the mixing container to minimize entrapped
air. Be careful not to introduce any air bubbles while mixing. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides and bottom of the container with a flat or straight edge trowel at
least once to ensure complete mixing. Transfer the mixed binder (components A+B) into a suitable mechanical mixer. Gradually add aggregate (Component C) to the binder. Once all ingredients
are combined, mix continuously and thoroughly for 2 to 4 minutes to ensure complete mixing. Make sure the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in
the mortar. Immediately transfer the materials onto the floor or into a screed box for application. Field Pigmented: Premix each component separately to ensure product uniformity.
If color is desired, the appropriate Sikafloor® Epoxy Color Additive-N is added to Component A at a rate of 1 quart per 5 mixed gallons (i.e. Components A+B). Mix Component A and Sikafloor®
Color Additive-N for 30 seconds or until a uniform color is achieved with a low speed drill (300–450 rpm) and Exomixer or Jiffy type paddle suited to the volume. Empty Component B (Hardener)
in the correct mix ratio to Component A (Resin) and mix for additional 2 minutes. Be careful not to introduce any air bubbles while mixing. During the mixing operation, scrape down
the sides and bottom of the container with a flat or straight edge trowel at least once to ensure complete mixing. Transfer the mixed binder (components A+B) into a suitable mechanical
mixer. Gradually add aggregates (Component C) to the binder. Once all ingredients are combined, mix continuously and thoroughly for 2 to 4 minutes to ensure complete mixing. Make sure
the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in the mortar. Immediately transfer the materials onto the floor or into the screed box for application.
Note: The color of the installed Sikafloor®-160 may vary in shades, due to the high consumption of natural Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-160 May 2019, Version 03.02 020811020010000052
3 / 6 aggregates and/or different finishing techniques like power or hand troweling. Do not mix more material than can be applied within the working time limits (i.e. Pot Life) at the
actual field temperature. APPLICATION Mortar Application Maintain all control joints and expansion joints through the screed where movement is expected. Place mortar onto the still
uncured primed surface while still tacky or fully cured primer with 20 mesh quartz sand and spread using a steel trowel, gauge rake or if using a screed box, pull the box across the
wet primer overlapping approximately 1 inch. The hand troweled or screed box applied material can then be power troweled. The power trowel will compact the material, remove voids and
make the floor smooth and dense. (Excessive power troweling will cause blisters.) The finished surface should be relatively smooth, free of trowel marks and without any process areas.
Finish using a clean steel finishing trowel or power trowel. Whenever Sikafloor®-160 does not abut a vertical surface, the mixed product should be troweled into a chase which is a special
groove cut into the concrete floor during the preparation process. Areas around drains and elevation changes or terminations must maintain a minimum 1⁄4 in (6 mm) thickness. Sikafloor®-160
has a wet consistency. To finish areas inaccessible to a power trowel, use light “feathering” strokes with a hand trowel to smooth the surface. When Sikafloor®160has cured, the surface
should be lightly ground or sanded to remove any burrs or surface defects then sweep and vacuum. Grout and Sealer Application Grouting and sealing of Sikafloor® 160 is required. The
following Sikafloor® products may be used, Sikafloor® 264, Sikafloor® 217 Thixo Lite or 264 Thixo Lite. Please refer to the individual most current and respective Product Data Sheet
for specific and detailed information. CLEANING OF TOOLS Clean all tools and application equipment with Thinner C immediately after use. Hardened and/or cured material can only be removed
mechanically. LIMITATIONS Notes on Limitations: Prior to application, measure and confirm Substrate Moisture Content, Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and Surface Temperature and
Dew Point. During installation, confirm and record above values at least once every 3 hours, or more frequently whenever conditions change (e.g. Ambient Temperature rise/fall, Relative
Humidity increase/decrease, etc.). Substrate Moisture Content: Moisture content of concrete substrate must be ≤ 4 % by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert
type concrete moisture meter on mechanically prepared surface according to this product data sheet (preparation to CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). Do not apply to concrete substrate
with moisture levels > 4 % mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter. If moisture content of concrete substrate is > 4 % by mass
(pbw – part by weight) as measured with Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter, use Sikafloor® 1610 or Sikafloor® 22NA or 24NA PurCem®. When relative humidity tests for concrete
substrate are conducted per ASTM F2170 for project specific requirements, values must be ≤ 85 %. If values are > 85 % according to ASTM F2170 use Sikafloor® 1610 or Sikafloor® 22NA
or 24NA PurCem. ASTM F2170 testing is not a substitute for measuring substrate moisture content. Use a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter as described above. Material
Temperature: Precondition material for at least 24 hours between 65 °F to 75 °F (18° to 24 °C) Ambient Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 50/85 ˚F (10/30 ˚C) Substrate Temperature: Minimum/Maximum
50/85 ˚F (10/30 ˚C). Substrate temperature must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above measured Dew Point. Mixing and Application must adhere to Material, Ambient and Substrate temperatures listed
above or a decrease in product workability and slower cure rates will occur. Ambient Relative Humidity: Maximum ambient humidity 85 % (during application and curing) Dew Point: Beware
of condensation! The substrate must be at least 5 ˚F (3 ˚C) above the Dew Point to reduce the risk of condensation, which may lead to adhesion failure or “blushing” on the floor finish.
Be aware that the substrate temperature may be lower than the ambient temperature. Mixing: Do not hand mix Sikafloor materials. Mechanically mix only. Do not thin this product. Addition
of thinners (e.g. water, solvent, etc.) will slow cure and reduce ultimate properties of this product. Use of thinners will void any applicable Sika warranty. Improper mixing procedure
or incorrect mixing ratio may result in moisture sensitivity, whitening, slow cure, soft spots, and other defects. RESULTS MAY DIFFER BASED UPON STATISTICAL VARIATIONS DEPENDING UPON
MIXING METHODS AND EQUIPMENT, TEMPERATURE, APPLICATION METHODS, TEST METHODS, ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS AND CURING CONDITIONS. ▪ Do not apply while ambient and substrate temperatures are
rising, as pinholes may occur. Ensure there is no vapor drive at the time of application. Refer to ASTM D4263, may be used for a visual indication of vapor drive. ▪ Product Data Sheet
Sikafloor®-160 May 2019, Version 03.02 020811020010000052 4 / 6 Certain physical and mechanical properties may vary depending on the type of aggregate and resin/aggregate ratio used.
Sika does not warrant any performance characteristic for the finished product when used in conjunction with aggregates not provided by Sika. ▪ Freshly applied material should be protected
from dampness, condensation and water for at least 24 h. ▪ Do not apply Sikafloor to concrete substrate containing aggregates susceptible to ASR (Alkali Silica Reaction) due to risk
of natural alkali redistribution below the Sikafloor product after application. If concrete substrate has or is suspected to have ASR (Alkali Silica Reaction) present, do not proceed.
Consult with design professional prior to use. ▪ Any aggregate used with Sikafloor systems must be non-reactive and oven-dried. ▪ This product is not designed for negative side waterproofing.
▪ Typically not recommended for exterior slabs on grade where freeze/thaw conditions may exist ▪ Use of unvented heaters and certain heat sources may result in defects (e.g. blushing,
whitening, debonding, etc.). ▪ Beware of air flow and changes in air flow. Introduction of dust, debris, and particles, etc. may result in surface imperfections and other defects. ▪
For professional use only by experienced applicators.▪ BASIS OF PRODUCT DATA Results may differ based upon statistical variations depending upon mixing methods and equipment, temperature,
application methods, test methods, actual site conditions and curing conditions. OTHER RESTRICTIONS See Legal Disclaimer. ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY For further information and
advice regarding transportation, handling, storage and disposal of chemical products, user should refer to the actual Safety Data Sheets containing physical, environmental, toxicological
and other safety related data. User must read the current actual Safety Data Sheets before using any products. In case of an emergency, call CHEMTREC at 1-800-424-9300, International
703-527-3887. Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-160 May 2019, Version 03.02 020811020010000052 5 / 6 LEGAL DISCLAIMER • KEEP CONTAINER TIGHTLY CLOSED • KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN • NOT
FOR INTERNAL CONSUMPTION • FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY • FOR PROFESSIONAL USE ONLY Prior to each use of any product of Sika Corporation, its subsidiaries or affiliates (“SIKA”), the user
must always read and follow the warnings and instructions on the product’s most current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet which are available at usa.sika.com or
by calling SIKA’s Technical Service Department at 1-800-933-7452. Nothing contained in any SIKA literature or materials relieves the user of the obligation to read and follow the warnings
and instructions for each SIKA product as set forth in the current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet prior to use of the SIKA product. SIKA warrants this product
for one year from date of installation to be free from manufacturing defects and to meet the technical properties on the current Product Data Sheet if used as directed within the product’s
shelf life. User determines suitability of product for intended use and assumes all risks. User’s and/or buyer’s sole remedy shall be limited to the purchase price or replacement of
this product exclusive of any labor costs. NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED SHALL APPLY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SIKA SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. SIKA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A MANNER TO INFRINGE ON ANY PATENT OR ANY OTHER
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS HELD BY OTHERS. Sale of SIKA products are subject to the Terms and Conditions of Sale which are available at https://usa.sika.com/en/group/SikaCorp/termsandcondi
tions.html or by calling 1-800-933-7452. Sikafloor-160-en-US-(05-2019)-3-2.pdf Sika Corporation 201 Polito Avenue Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 Phone: +1-800-933-7452 Fax: +1-201-933-6225 usa.sika.com
Sika Mexicana S.A. de C.V. Carretera Libre Celaya Km. 8.5 Fracc. Industrial Balvanera Corregidora, Queretaro C.P. 76920 Phone: 52 442 2385800 Fax: 52 442 2250537 Product Data Sheet
Sikafloor®-160 May 2019, Version 03.02 020811020010000052 6 / 6 Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-2870 Line Striping December 2019, Version 01.02 020811010030000001 PRODUCT DATA SHEET Sikafloor®-2870
Line Striping WATER BASED EPOXY LINE STRIPING FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE FLOOR FINISHES PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sikafloor 2870 Line Striping is a water-based, low VOC, two part epoxy resin line
striping and traffic marking coating. USES Sikafloor®-2870 Line Striping may only be used by experienced professionals. Sikafloor 2870 Line Striping is designed as a line striping coating
for Sikafloor epoxy and urethane coatings, as well as for broadcast and troweled systems. CHARACTERISTICS / ADVANTAGES Water based, low VOC’s▪ Bright, long lasting colors▪ Excellent
penetration and adhesion▪ Easy application▪ Reduced recoat times▪ PRODUCT INFORMATION Packaging Component A: 1.5 US gal. (5.68 L) fill in a 2 gal. pail Component B: 1.0 US gal. (3.78
L) fill in a 1 gal. can Components A+B: 2.5 US gal. (9.46 L) Appearance / Color Traffic Red White Safety Yellow Shelf Life 12 months in original unopened container under proper storage
conditions. Storage Conditions Store dry between 40°- 90°F (4°- 32°C) . Do not allow to freeze Volatile organic compound (VOC) content 40 g/L Components A+B Viscosity 3500 Cps ASTM
D2196 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Shore D Hardness 85 ASTM D2240 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Abrasion Resistance 0.141g (CS-17) 1000 rotations/1000g ASTM D2749 at 73°F (23°C) and 50
% R.H 1 / 4 Elongation at Break 3% ASTM D638 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Tensile Adhesion Strength >435 Psi (>3Mpa) ASTM D4541 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Impact Strength 3.6 ft-Ib
ASTM D2794 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Service Temperature 50°F (10°C) min./86°F (30°C) max. Water Absorption 2.50% (24 hours boiling) ASTM C413 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Permeability
to Water Vapor 9.7 Perm ASTM E96 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Coefficient of Friction 0.16 ANSI 137.1 at 73°F (23°C) and 50 % R.H Mixing Ratio 1.5 : 1 by volume. Coverage 160 - 530 ft2
/ US gal (3.9 – 4.9 m2 / L) at 3 - 10 mils (0.08 – 0.25 mm) wet film thickness Pot Life Material Temperature Time +73°F (23°C) ~ 25 min Pot life is not visible, product remains liquid
after exceeding pot life. Application after pot life limit may result in adhesion failure. Do not apply after pot life limit. Cure Time Ambient & Substrate Temperature Foot Traffic
Light Traffic Full cure 50 °F (10 °C) ~ 24 hours ~ 2 days ~ 3 days 73 °F (23 °C) ~ 14 hours ~ 24 hours ~ 36 hours 86 °F (30 °C) ~ 10 hours ~ 18 hours ~ 24 hours Waiting / Recoat Times
Ambient & Substrate Temperature Time Minimum 50 °F (10 °C) ~12 hours 73 °F (23 °C) ~ 3 hours 86 °F (30 °C) ~ 2 hours SURFACE PREPARATION Surface must be clean, sound and dry. Remove
dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds,Preparation Remove all bond inhibiting impregnations, waxes and any other contaminants. All projections, rough spots, etc. should be removed
to achieve a level surface prior to the application. Existing Coatings Abrade surface to remove glaze and create dull surface profile. Wipe to remove dust and to debirs. Bare ConcreteBare
Concrete Wipe to remove dust laitance-free and contaminant free,open textured surface by shot blasting or equivalent mechanical means (CSP-2 as per ICRI guidelines). Sweep and vacuum
any remaining dirt and dust with a wet/dry vacuum. Removing residual dust will help ensure a tenacious bond between the primer and substrate. Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-2870 Line
Striping December 2019, Version 01.02 020811010030000001 2 / 4 Whenever “shotblasting” is utilized, be careful to leave concrete with a uniform texture. “Over-blasting” will result
in reduced coverage rates of the primer and/or subsequent topcoats. The “shotblast” pattern may show through the last coat, known as “tracking”. The compressive strength of the concrete
substrate should be at least 3,500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days and at least 215 psi (1.5 MPa) in tension at the time of application. For other substrates, please contact Sikafloor Technical
Services. MIXING Mixing Ratio: - 1.5 : 1 by volume. For bulk packaging, when not mixing full units, each component must be pre-mixed separately to ensure product physical. Premix each
component separately. Empty component B (Hardener) in the correct mix ratio into component A (Resin). Mix the combined components for at least 3 minutes using a low speed drill (300
- 450 rpm) and Exomixer or Jiffy type paddle suited to the volume of the mixing container to minimize entrapped air. Be careful not to introduce any air bubbles while mixing. Make sure
the contents are completely mixed to avoid any weak or partially cured spots in the coating. During the mixing operation, scrape down the sides and bottom of the container with a flat
or straight edge trowel at least once to ensure complete mixing. Do not mix more material than can be applied within the working time limits (i.e. Pot Life) at the actual field temperature.
APPLICATION Apply by brush or roller at the rate of 160 - 320 ft2 / US gal (3.9 – 7.8 m2 / L) at 5 – 10 mils (0.13 – 0.25 mm) wet film thickness (w.f.t.) and back-roll with pressure.
Coverage will vary depending on the texture of the prepared floor. Product has a limited pot life, see Typical Data. Pour a bead of product in the form of a ribbon on the surface to
be coated, then spread with squeegee and back roll. Ensure that the coating is pore free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage over the entire concrete substrate.
If necessary, apply an additional coat to ensure the coating is pore-free and pinhole-free and provides uniform and complete coverage over the entire concrete substrate. LIMITATIONS
Prior to application, measure and confirm Substrate Moisture Content, Ambient Relative Humidity,Ambient and Surface Temperature and Dew Point. During installation, confirm and record
above values at least once every 3 hours, or more frequently whenever conditions change (e.g. Ambient Temperature rise/fall, Relative Humidity increase/decrease, etc.). Substrate Moisture
Content Moisture content of concrete substrate must be ≤ 6% by mass (pbw – part by weight) as measured with a Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter on mechanically prepared
surface according to this product data sheet (preparation to CSP-3 to CSP-4 as per ICRI guidelines). ASTM F2170 testing is not a substitute for measuring substrate moisture content.
Use aTramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter as described above. Material Temperature Precondition material for at least 24 hours between 65° to 75°F (18° to 24°C) Ambient
Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C) Substrate Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 50˚/85˚F (10˚/30˚C). Substrate temperature must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above measured Dew Point.
Mixing and Application must adhere to Material, Ambient and Substrate temperatures listed above or a decrease in product workability and slower cure rates will occur. Ambient Relative
Humidity Maximum ambient humidity 85% (during application and curing) Dew Point Beware of condensation! The substrate must be at least 5˚F (3˚C) above the Dew Point to reduce the risk
of condensation,which may lead to adhesion failure or “blushing” on the floor finish. Be aware that the substrate temperature may be lower than the ambient temperature. Product Data
Sheet Sikafloor®-2870 Line Striping December 2019, Version 01.02 020811010030000001 3 / 4 Mixing Do not hand mix Sikafloor materials. Mechanically mix only. ▪ Do not thin this product.
Addition of thinners (e.g. water, solvent, etc.) will slow cure and reduce physical properties of this product. Use of thinners will void any applicable Sika warranty. Improper mixing
procedure or incorrect mixing ratio may result in moisture sensitivity, whitening, slow cure, soft spots, and other defects. ▪ Do not apply to bare, unsealed concrete in rising temperature
conditions. ▪ Will discolor over time when exposed to sunlight (UV) and under certain artificial lighting conditions. Use of clear UV resistant top coat may not prevent discoloration
of underlying coatings. ▪ Do not apply Sikafloor to concrete substrate containing aggregates susceptible to ASR (Alkali Silica Reaction) due to risk of natural alkali redistribution
below the Sikafloor product after application. If concrete substrate has or is suspected to have ASR (Alkali Silica Reaction) present, do not proceed. Consult with design professional
prior to use. ▪ Any aggregate used with Sikafloor systems must be non-reactive and oven-dried. ▪ This product is not designed for negative side waterproofing. ▪ Use of unvented heaters
and certain heat sources may result in defects (e.g. blushing, whitening, debonding, etc.). ▪ Beware of air flow and changes in air flow. Introduction of dust, debris, and particles,
etc. may result in surface imperfections and other defects. ▪ For professional use only by experienced applicators.▪ BASIS OF PRODUCT DATA Results may differ based upon statistical
variations depending upon mixing methods and equipment, temperature, application methods, test methods, actual site conditions and curing conditions. OTHER RESTRICTIONS See Legal Disclaimer.
ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY LEGAL DISCLAIMER • KEEP CONTAINER TIGHTLY CLOSED • KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN • NOT FOR INTERNAL CONSUMPTION • FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY • FOR PROFESSIONAL
USE ONLY Prior to each use of any product of Sika Corporation, its subsidiaries or affiliates (“SIKA”), the user must always read and follow the warnings and instructions on the product’s
most current product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet which are available at usa.sika.com or by calling SIKA’s Technical Service Department at 1-800-933-7452. Nothing
contained in any SIKA literature or materials relieves the user of the obligation to read and follow the warnings and instructions for each SIKA product as set forth in the current
product label, Product Data Sheet and Safety Data Sheet prior to use of the SIKA product. SIKA warrants this product for one year from date of installation to be free from manufacturing
defects and to meet the technical properties on the current Product Data Sheet if used as directed within the product’s shelf life. User determines suitability of product for intended
use and assumes all risks. User’s and/or buyer’s sole remedy shall be limited to the purchase price or replacement of this product exclusive of any labor costs. NO OTHER WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED SHALL APPLY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SIKA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES. SIKA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A MANNER TO INFRINGE ON ANY PATENT OR ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS HELD BY OTHERS. Sale of SIKA products
are subject to the Terms and Conditions of Sale which are available at https://usa.sika.com/en/group/SikaCorp/termsandconditions.html or by calling 1-800-933-7452. Sika Corporation
201 Polito Avenue Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 Phone: +1-800-933-7452 Fax: +1-201-933-6225 usa.sika.com Sika Mexicana S.A. de C.V. Carretera Libre Celaya Km. 8.5 Fracc. Industrial Balvanera
Corregidora, Queretaro C.P. 76920 Phone: 52 442 2385800 Fax: 52 442 2250537 Sikafloor-2870LineStriping-en-US-(12-2019)-1-2.pdf Product Data Sheet Sikafloor®-2870 Line Striping December
2019, Version 01.02 020811010030000001 4 / 4 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPETING 096816-1 SECTION 09 68 16 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section
includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the carpeting as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Sheet carpet, glue down installation, including adhesive. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Resilient Base and Accessories - Section 096513. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:
Firm with not less than five (5) years of experience in installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this Section. B. Manufacturer
Qualifications: Firm (carpet mill) with not less than five (5) years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this Section; and whose published product literature
clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this Section. C. General Terminology/ Information Standard: Refer to current edition of "Carpet Specifier's Handbook"
by The Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. D. Carpet used on Project must be from
same dye lot for each carpet type. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical product data for each type of carpet and accessory item required. B. Shop
Drawings: Submit carpet layout and seaming drawings, clearly indicating carpet directions, locations and methods of jointing seams and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate
columns, doorways, enclosing wall/partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cut-outs are required in carpet. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for
Bid CARPETING 096816-2 C. Samples: Submit 18" x 27" samples of each carpet required and six (6) inch long samples of each type exposed edge stripping. D. Certification: Submit
manufacturer's certification stating that carpet materials furnished comply with specified requirements. 1. Include listing of mill register numbers for carpet furnished. 2. Include
supporting certified laboratory test data indicating that carpet meets or exceeds specified test requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's printed maintenance recommendations,
including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining carpet in optimum conditions under anticipated traffic and use conditions. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Overrun: Produce and deliver
to project at least five (5) percent overrun on calculated yardage. Provide required overrun exclusive of carpet needed for proper installation, waste and usable scraps. 1.7 PRODUCT
DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags attached. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected
from weather, moisture and soiling. 1.8 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall promptly repair seams and edges in the carpet as required, for a period of two (2) years after Substantial Completion
of the Project. The exact time for this work shall be left to the discretion of the Owner. Fourteen (14) day notice for repairs shall be given by the Owner, so that the Contractor
can make the necessary arrangements. B. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty that the face yarn of the carpet will not wear more than ten (10) percent in five years. If the carpet
wears more than ten (10) percent in five (5) years, the manufacturer will replace the carpet including parts, labor and materials, to the Owner’s satisfaction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
CARPETING A. Provide broadloom carpet as scheduled on the drawings. Carpet by Mohawk, Bentley Mills, or approved equal. Design and color shall be selected from any manufacturer collection.
2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide vinyl edges, reducers and threshold plates where required. They shall be sized to be compatible with the thickness of the carpet, in a color as selected
by the Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPETING 096816-3 Architect, of a commercial quality as manufactured by Armstrong, Burke Mercer Industries
or approved equal. The type shall be as required by site conditions, as is the custom of the trade, and installation shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Adhesive:
Provide adhesive as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Provide adhesive which complies with flame spread rating required for the carpet installation, if any. C. Leveling Compound:
Latex/Portland cement flash patching and leveling compound equal to No. DSP-520 made by H.B. Fuller or No. 226 with 3701 admixture made by Laticrete or equal made by Mapei, or approved
equal. D. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide the types of seaming, adhesives and tape, thread, and other accessory items recommended by the carpet manufacturer and Installer for the
conditions of installation and use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where carpet is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS A. Floor shall be clean and free of cracks and protrusions. Any gaps or cracks more than 1/16" wide to be filled in with latex leveling compound. Protrusions must be
sanded down smooth, the floor cleanly swept and vacuumed if necessary to remove all dust and grit. B. Floor temperature shall be 65 deg., at least 24 hours prior to installation; and
48 hours after carpet is installed. C. Conduct a moisture test. The presence of moisture in the concrete floor will interfere with the curing and subsequent performance of the adhesive.
Conduct the test as follows: 1. Drive a concrete nail a half inch into the floor. Then remove the nail. 2. Place a small amount of anhydrous calcium chloride or calcium sulphate crystals
over the hole. 3. Cover the crystals and the hole with a piece of flat glass and seal the edges with waterproof tape or putty. Since concrete pourings vary, repeat the test every 1500
sq. ft. 4. Leave in place 72 hours. Any color change in the crystals indicates the presence of moisture. Do not apply carpet until slab is free of moisture and meets with approval
of carpet adhesive manufacturer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPETING 096816-4 D. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility
of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Place seams in
the directions as accepted on shop drawings. Maintain direction of pattern and texture, including lay of carpeting. 2. Extend carpet under open-bottomed and raised-bottom obstructions,
and under removable flanges of obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated for such spaces. Extend
carpet under all movable furniture and equipment, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide cut-outs for removable access devices in the substrate. Bind edges as neatly as possible and
secure both sides of cuts to the substrate. Use double-faced tape on carpet cut-outs which must be lifted from the substrate to gain access to the devices. Cut only three (3) sides
wherever it is feasible to provide a carpet flat in lieu of a fully-removable cut-out. 4. Install vinyl carpet edge guard at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic,
except where another device is indicated. B. Direct Glue-Down Carpet Installation 1. Select best location for a starting seam; strike a chalk line on the floor at this point. (Use
white chalk; colored chalk should not be allowed on the job.) 2. Check the carpet for direction of pile lay. 3. Cut two lengths of carpet allowing about one inch to run up the walls
for trimming. 4. Place the untrimmed edge of one length along the chalk line and stay-nail along its center line, parallel to the seam. During this procedure, work out any wrinkles
allowing the carpet to lie smoothly on the floor. Stay-nail at approximately 12" - 18" intervals following the center line of the cut along its entire length. Make sure carpet does
not shift from the chalk line. 5. After checking for pile direction, unroll second length and overlap the edge of the first length by about 1" to 2". Stay-nail second length as in
Para. 4 above. 6. Depending on construction, the carpet edge may be trimmed by one of the following techniques: a. Utilizing a top cutter cut between the loops if rows are straight
and the cut is not too long. b. Scribe cut using a top cutter or cushion back cutter to follow a row on one edge, then overlap and use this cut edge as a guide to trim the second or
bottom edge. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPETING 096816-5 c. Double cut using a top cutter, make a free hand cut through both overlapped
edges. When cutting long areas, utilize an electric cutter. d. All cut edges must be sealed prior to seaming using a premium latex carpet seaming adhesive. 7. Fold back both lengths
towards stay-nails. Do not pull out any stay-nails or tear carpet. 8. The exposed floor between the folded cuts shall be swept and vacuumed if necessary. 9. Using a notched trowel
1/8" x 1/8" spread adhesive evenly, using a semi-circular motion to avoid excessive deposits and missed areas. The number of men required to spread the adhesive will depend on the
areas to be covered. If the area is large, use 2 men, one on either side of the center, and have them work in opposite directions. Check the trowels occasionally to see that they
are free of foreign matter and also that the 1/8" notch is maintained. It is important to allow sufficient open time in order to let the adhesive become tacky before adhering the carpet.
10. After the adhesive is spread as described in Para. 9 above, lay the folded back edge of the first cut over the cement. To do this, the installers shall position themselves at intervals
along the entire length of the fold and grasp the folded edge. Lift it up and walk towards the seam. The installer in the middle of the roll walks ahead, thus forming a wedge. Use
a 100 lb. roller to smooth the fabric towards the seam. 11. Next, grasp the folded edge of the second roll and place it over the adhesive as in Para. 10 with the exception that this
flap should be walked in evenly rather than using the wedge method. Walk in all but one ft. of this and fold this amount back again. 12. The installer shall now slide this edge until
it tightly abuts the edge of the first roll. Hold the edge in place by kneeling on it and work the wrinkles out toward the unglued side. 13. Continue the above procedure throughout
the installation. 14. While the cement is still tacky, the carpet must be pressed down along the wall and creased - the excess shall be trimmed. 15. Cross-seaming can be accomplished
by Scribe Cutting. Overlap the ends approximately 4". Cut the end with the yarn leaning toward the seam from the back with a straight edge. Use this end as a guide to cut the other
end utilizing a top cutter or similar tool. 16. Seal these ends the same as all other cut edges. 17. Exposed edges shall always be protected by a vinyl edging. The vinyl edge shall
be fastened to the floor with contract cement. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CARPETING 096816-6 18. Stains caused by adhesive can be removed
using a dry chlorinated or similar solvent. Apply solvent with a clean cloth using a blotting action. Do not saturate carpet with solvent. Dry with rag or tissue using a blotting
and not a rubbing motion. C. Stairway Carpeting: Install by secure method, recognized to be durable and safe for traffic. Conceal edges and avoid making seams in areas of high wear.
Match adjoining carpet installation in every way possible. 3.4 CLEANING UP A. Upon completion of the carpeting installation in each area, visually inspect all carpet installed in that
area and immediately remove all dirt, soil, and foreign substance from the exposed face; inspect all adjacent surfaces and remove all marks and stains caused by the carpet installation:
remove all packaging materials, carpet scraps, and other debris from the carpet installation to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. B. Usable carpet pieces shall be
turned over to the Owner. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary, protection against soiling or damage of carpet for the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT 098400-1 SECTION 098400 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Acoustical Sheets sound-absorptive Foam. B. Furnish and install all sound-absorptive wall products and associated installation accessories as shown
on the drawings, and specified herein, or as required to complete the work. C. Related Documents: This section applies to drawings and general provisions of the subcontract. Review
these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this Section. Cross-reference approved supplementary manufacturers’ sound-absorptive
Sheets and required installation accessories including, but not limited to construction-grade adhesive, or other mechanical fasters by others as applicable. 1.2 REFERENCES A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International: 1. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room
Method. 2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E795 Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption
Tests. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements 1. Provide sound absorptive wall sheet system designed and tested to provide a Class A flame spread rating when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84, unless otherwise specified. a. Flamespread: 25 maximum. b. Smoke Developed: 50 maximum. 2. Provide sound absorptive wall sheet which has been
manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating in accordance with ASTM C423-09a: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT 098400-2 a. ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS Acoustical Sheets. NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): Comply with ASTM C42390a up to 1.05 depending on
thickness. See specific products for ratings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for acoustical foam sheets including fire-resistive characteristics,
finishes, details of installation, and the following: 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with Performance Requirements
specified herein. B. Samples: One (1) 12” inch by 12” inch (305mm x 305mm) sample of desired thickness of the following specified units for all selected colors for selection or
verification. C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical foam sheets. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated with or supported by the structural ceiling or walls.
D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operating and Maintenance Manual, including cleaning and maintenance instructions. 2. Extra Material for Owner’s stock. 3. Safety Data Sheets (SDS).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS to provide Sonex® Tec Wedge Acoustical Foam Panel or equal pending approval by the Architect. B.
Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to the manufacturer of the product being installed. Utilize an installer having demonstrated 5 years minimum experience on projects of similar size
and acoustical complexity. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of installed appearance. 1. Install acoustical foam sheets in areas designated by the architect in coordination
with the slotted metal framing mock-up. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until proper authority approves workmanship and appearance. 3. Approved mock-up may remain as part of
the work. D. Surface Burning Characteristics 1. Tested in accordance to ASTM E84 2. Fire Class A a. Flame Spread Index <25 b. Smoke Developed Index <50 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT 098400-3 1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Delivery: Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened,
undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Provide labels indicating ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS brand name, style, size and thickness. C. Storage and Protection: Comply with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Store acoustical product indoors and protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended
by the manufacturer. 1.7 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations 1. Install Acoustical Foam Sheets only in conditions that are within the manufacturer’s published limits for
temperature and humidity. 2. Areas receiving sheets should be free of construction debris and dust. 3. Mechanical, sprinkler and electrical trades shall have completed their work above
the ceiling structure and within structural walls prior to commencement of product installation. 1.8 Maintenance A. Extra Materials: Provide a minimum of 1 box or 2%, whichever is larger,
of additional materials if required for use by owner or the building maintenance and repair. B. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS 1.2420 Grenoble Road, Richmond, VA 2329 | PH: 800-782-5742 | AcousticalSolutions.com
2.2 MATERIALS A. ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS Sonex® Tec Wedge Acoustical Foam Panel sheets: Acoustical sheets are manufactured from 100% open-cell melamine foam with the following characteristics:
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT 098400-4 1. Fire Resistance: ASTM E84, Class A 2. ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS White Acoustical
Sheets a. NRC: 1.00 per ASTM C423 Type A mounting at 2” inches thick 3. ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS Light Grey Acoustical Sheets a. NRC: 0.90 per ASTM C423 Type A mounting at 2” inches
thick 4. Foam Density: Light Grey 0.56 lbs./ft³ +/- 0.09 lbs./ft³ White 0.47lbs./ft³ +/- 0.13lbs./ft³ 5. Service Temperature: -40˚F to 350˚F 6. Size: Nominal:
24 inches x 48 inches (607 mm x 1220 mm) or 48 inches by 96 inches (1220mm x 2438mm). 7. Sheet Thickness: 2” inches (51mm). 8. Manufacturers Standard Textiles/Colors: Submit full
range of available colors for selection by Architect B. Product Substitutions: equal product pending approval by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.
Examine sheet installation, with installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other applicable Sections affecting product installation and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the selected ACOUSTICAL SOLUTIONS product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not begin installation until materials
sufficient to complete an entire room are received and prepared for installation. B. Symmetrically locate product layout, as desired, in each space. Coordinate work with other trades
so that lighting fixtures, HVAC and other ceiling and/or wall mounted fixtures work with Sheet and Baffle layout. C. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
and to comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated and industry standards applicable to the work. D. Take care not to damage or mark the product;
wear clean cotton or canvas gloves and avoid the use of latex gloves. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical product and any installation accessories to comply
with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING TREATMENT 098400-5 B. Touch up any minor finish
damage. C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products
until completion of project. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT 098414-1 SECTION 098414 ACOUSTICAL
WALL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include all labor, materials, and plant as required for the fabrication and delivery of acoustical wall system complete in
all respects as described and specified herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the acoustical
wall system as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical wood plank system 2. Wall mounting system 3. Accessories and
hardware required for complete installation and operation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer & Installer: Firm manufacturing the specified product shall have adequate capacity
required for projects listed and have successfully completed similar projects for a period of not less than five years. The Installer should be approved by the manufacturer as qualified
to perform work required.Provide materials in colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Reference Standards: Conform to all governing laws, building
codes, and the following performance criteria: 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide Solo 8 “no added formaldehyde” acoustic planks with surface burning characteristics as determined
by testing panel components in accordance with ASTM E84 test procedures. ASTM E 84 testing must be performed by an independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Panels will be finished with Fire retardant clear lacquer. ASTM E-84 Classification Class "A" Flame Spread: 25 or less Smoke Developed: 450 or less 2. Acoustical
Performance Characteristics: Provide “no added formaldehyde” acoustic product with acoustical absorption characteristics as indicated in Part 2, which have been determined by testing
fully assembled production material (using Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT 098414-2 96-112kg/cu.m. (6 - 7lb/cu.ft.)
density fiber glass insulation) in accordance with ASTM C 423 (Type A and F25 mounting method as defined by ASTME-795) by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Note: Acoustic performance may vary if formaldehyde free core materials are used. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and maintenance instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations, indicating location of
all acoustical products, trim, and mounting hardware. Shop drawings must also show seam/joint locations. Submit shop drawings showing details of installation and relation to adjoining
construction and conditions. C. Samples: Submit (3 sets) manufacturers standard 8" X 5" sample of each type of product as specified in Part 2 to the Owner for approval. Product shall
be original production material in veneer finish specified for final use. D. Certification: Submit to the owner a certificate of compliance to specified acoustical and fire performance
criteria as stated section 1.03 and Part 2 of this specification, signed by an officer of the panel manufacturer and attach independent laboratory test results for each product used,
showing that the products supplied as components meet or exceed the specified requirements. Submit additional test results to owner as requested detailing compliance to updated code
requirements. E. Single Source: All acoustical wall products, trim, and accessories shall be purchased from a single supplier. F. Mock-Up 1. Install product in its final location in
area approximately 3’x6’. 2. Approved mock-up shall be used as the standard for installation of work under this Section, and no further installation work shall proceed before Architect's
acceptance of the mock-up. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty covering product, accessories, and installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver product
and related components to the site for installation in accordance with a reasonable schedule furnished by the contractor. On site storage shall be such as to assure that all panels
and associated materials are protected from damage. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT 098414-3 B. Prior to installation
the site must be free of all wet and dusty trades and the climatic conditions stabilized to normal operational levels. Product shall be allowed to stabilize on site 72 hours prior to
installation. C. Product must be stored, installed and maintained only in a secure ambient environment (humidity min. 35% - max. 55%, temperature not to exceed 80º f (27º c)). 1.7 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish to the Architect in the Owner's name, the manufacturers written guarantee covering the products supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating
conditions for a period of one year from the date of shipment. Submit certificates of compliance showing warranty period by dates for each project completed to the Owner. B. All system
components shall be manufactured and supplied by the named manufacturer. Individual components, provided by individual suppliers will not be considered or accepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTIC WOOD PLANK A. Decoustics SOLO 8 Acoustic Planks Furnish and deliver Decoustics SOLO 8 “No added formaldehyde” Acoustic planks as described in this section for installation
in areas as shown on drawings meeting or exceeding the following requirements: Description: Decoustics SOLO 8 “No added formaldehyde” Acoustic PLANKS, as manufactured by: Decoustics
Limited 61 Royal Group Crescent TEL: (905)652-5200 Woodbridge, Ontario FAX: (905)652-2505 Canada, L4H 1X9 email: sales@decoustics.comStandard 1. Decoustics Solo 8 acoustic
planks shall be comprised of a single piece “no added formaldehyde” MDF core of 16mm (5/8”) thickness faced with a real wood veneer. The structure is perforated by means of “V” routing
on 8mm (5/16”) centers and intersecting perforations of 8mm (5/16”) diameter on staggered 16mm (5/8”) centers 2. Veneer to be: (A) Select veneer from Manufacturers standard range
of lacquer finished real wood veneers OR Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT 098414-4 (B) Architect / Designer specified
finish Source and laminate Architects specified veneer species, stained and lacquered to match Architects sample. Unless otherwise specified, veneer will be quarter cut, slip matched.
Veneer will not be sequenced. Clear lacquer finish to 30% sheen. 3. Solo planks of 192mm (7 9/16”) shall be installed by installed by means of Decoustics supplied clips and a tongue
and groove connection on hardwood blocking or metal furring. Solo 8 plank clips must be located at a maximum of 600mm (23 5/8”) on center. If necessary, formaldehyde free acoustically
absorptive material of adequate thickness required to meet the acoustic absorption requirements shall be installed between furring or horizontal wood blocking prior to panel installation.
The Solo 8 planks shall be supplied with a black facing on the back side to prevent fiber glass insulation color from “reading” through, and shall be site fabricated to sizes required
and neatly fitted to adjacent materials. Trim perimeter as detailed. Installer shall provide for shimming and adjustment as required to maintain consistent alignment of joints and of
finished panel faces. 4. Provide all required edge bands/trims and accessory pieces required for a complete installation. 5. Solo 8 “no added formaldehyde” Acoustic Planks shall have
noise reduction coefficient values of the following when tested in accordance with section 1.03 of this specification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT A. The
Owner shall inspect the installation and product on completion. The manufacturer shall provide repair or replacement of components not conforming to requirements as stated herein and
said work will then become bound by the terms of this specification. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT 098414-5 B. Installation
labor for removal and replacement of product improperly installed and not conforming to specified installation instructions as detailed in section 1.03 and Part 2 and shown on plans,
shall be the responsibility of the installing Contractor. Coordinate with the work of other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface
with the work of this Section. C. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the indicated design and the installation recommendations of the manufacturer as approved
by the Architect END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-1 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING PART
1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work
of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the painting and finishing as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including,
but not limited to, the following: 1. Prime painting unprimed surfaces to be painted under this Section. 2. Painting all items furnished with a prime coat of paint, including touching
up of or repairing of abraded, damaged or rusted prime coats applied by others. 3. Painting all ferrous metal (except stainless steel) exposed to view. 4. Painting all galvanized ferrous
metals exposed to view. 5. Painting gypsum drywall exposed to view. 6. Painting of wood exposed to view, except items which are specified to be painted or finished under other Sections
of these specifications. Back painting of all wood in contact with concrete, masonry or other moisture areas. 7. Painting pipes, pipe coverings, conduit, ducts, insulation, hangers,
supports and other mechanical and electrical items and equipment exposed to view. 8. Painting surfaces above, behind or below grilles, gratings, diffusers, louvers, lighting fixtures,
and the like, which are exposed to view through these items. 9. Incidental painting and touching up as required to produce proper finish for painted surfaces, including touching up
of factory finished items. 10. Painting of any surface not specifically mentioned to be painted herein or on drawings, but for which painting is obviously necessary to complete the
job, or work which comes within the intent of these specifications, shall be included as though specified. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Shop priming is required on some, but not all of the
items scheduled to be field painted. Refer to other Sections of work for complete description. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING
099000-2 B. Shop Coat on Machinery and Equipment: Refer to the Sections under which various items of manufactured equipment with factory applied shop prime coats are furnished, including,
but not necessarily limited to, the following Sections. All items of equipment furnished with prime coat finish shall be finish painted under this Section. 1. Plumbing - Division 22.
2. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning – Division 23. C. Color Coding of Mechanical Piping and Electrical Conduits – Divisions 22 and 26. 1. This Color Coding consists of an adhesive
tape system and is in addition to painting of piping and conduits under this Section, as specified above. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Items of equipment furnished
with complete factory finish, except for items specified to be given a finish coat under this Section. B. Non-ferrous metals, except for items specified and/or indicated to be painted.
C. Finished hardware, excepting hardware that is factory primed. D. Surfaces not to be painted shall be left completely free of droppings and accidentally applied materials resulting
from the work of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Mock-Up 1. In addition to the samples specified herein to be submitted for approval, apply in the field, at their final location,
each type and color of approved paint materials, applied 10 feet wide, floor to ceiling of wall surfaces, before proceeding with the remainder of the work, for approval by the Architect.
Paint mock-ups to include door and frame assembly. 2. These applications when approved will establish the quality and workmanship for the work of this Section. 3. Repaint individual
areas which are not approved, as determined by the Architect, until approval is received. Assume at least two paint mock-ups of each color and gloss for approval. B. Qualification
of Painters: Use only qualified journeyman painters for the mixing and application of paint on exposed surfaces. C. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with
the prime paints used. Review other Sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various substrates.
Upon request from other subcontractors, furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed to be used, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide
barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-3 required.
Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified with substrates primed by others. D. All paints must conform to the Volatile Organic
Compounds (VOC) standards of prevailing codes and ordinances. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List 1. Before any paint materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a
complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the work. 2. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for
those specified or accepted for this work by the Architect. B. Samples 1. Accompanying the materials list, submit to the Architect copies of the full range of colors available in each
of the proposed products. 2. Upon direction of the Architect, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) identical sets of Samples of each of the selected colors and glosses painted
onto 8-1/2" x 11" x 1/4" thick material; whenever possible, the material for Samples shall be the same material as that on which the coating will be applied in the work. C. Manufacturer's
Recommendations: In each case where material proposed is not the material specified or specifically described as an acceptable alternate in this Section of these specifications, submit
for the Architect's review the current recommended method of application published by the manufacturer of the proposed material. D. Closeout Submittal - Coating Maintenance Manual:
Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or plant manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual such as Sherwin Williams "Custodian Project Color and Product
Information" report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, MSDS,
care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver all paint materials to the job site in their original
unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Protection 1. Store only the approved materials at the job site, and store only in a suitable and designated
area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment. 2. Use all means necessary to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and the prompt and safe disposal
of waste. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-4 3. Use all means necessary to protect paint materials before, during
and after application and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary.
1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver to the Owner an extra stock of paint equaling approximately ten (10) percent of each color and gloss used and
each coating material used, with all such extra stock tightly sealed in clearly labeled containers. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces
to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply
solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. unless otherwise permitted
by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds eighty-five (85) percent; or to damp or wet
surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted
are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MANUFACTURERS A. Except as
otherwise noted, provide the painting products listed for all required painting made by one of the manufacturers listed in the paint schedule (Section 2.4). These companies are Benjamin
Moore, Akzo Nobel Paint (Glidden Professional), and Sherwin Williams (S-W). Comply with number of coats and required minimum mil thicknesses as specified herein. 2.2 MATERIALS A.
Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits. B. Colors and
Glosses: All colors and glosses shall be as selected by the Architect. Certain colors will require paint manufacturer to prepare special factory mixes to match colors selected by
the Architect. Color schedule (with gloss) shall be furnished by the Architect. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-5
C. Coloring Pigment: Products of or furnished by the manufacturer of the paint or enamel approved for the work. D. Linseed Oil: Raw or boiled, as required, of approved manufacture,
per ASTM D 234 and D 260, respectively. E. Turpentine: Pure distilled gum spirits of turpentine, per ASTM D 13. F. Shellac: Pure gum shellac (white or orange) cut in pure denatured
alcohol using not less than four (4) lbs. of gum per gallon of alcohol. G. Driers, Putty, Spackling Compound, Patching Plaster, etc.: Best quality, of approved manufacture. H. Heat
Resistant Paint: Where required, use heat resistant paint when applying paint to heating lines and equipment. 2.3 GENERAL STANDARDS A. The various surfaces shall be painted or finished
as specified below in Article 2.4. However, the Architect reserves the right to change the finishes within the range of flat, semi-gloss or gloss, without additional cost to the Owner.
B. All paints, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains and similar materials must be delivered in the original containers with the seals unbroken and label intact and with the manufacturer's
instructions printed thereon. C. All painting materials shall bear identifying labels on the containers with the manufacturer's instructions printed thereon. D. Paint shall not be badly
settled, caked or thickened in the container, shall be readily dispersed with a paddle to a smooth consistency and shall have excellent application properties. E. Paint shall arrive
on the job color-mixed except for tinting of under-coats and possible thinning. F. All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
material thinned or tinted. G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all mixed colors match the color selection made by the Architect prior to application of
the coating. 2.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. High Performance Coating On Exterior Galvanized Ferrous Metals First Coat: "27 Typoxy" or "N69 Epoxoline II" by Tnemec; "Intergard 345" by International
Protective Coatings; "Carboguard 893 SG" or "Carboguard 888" by Carboline; "Devran 203 WB Epoxy Primer" by Akzo; Epoxy Mastic Coating V 160 Series by Cortech/Moore or "Recoatable Epoxy
Primer 867-45" by Sherwin Williams. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-6 Second Coat: "V73 Endura Shield" or "1074/1075"
by Tnemec; "Interthane 870UHS" or "990 UHS" by International Protective Coatings; "Carbothane 133 LH" by Carboline; "Devthane 379UH Aliphatic Vizethne" by Akzo; Acrylic Aliphatic Urethane
V 500 (Gloss) or V 510 (Semi-Gloss) by Corotech/Moore or "Hi-Solids Urethane B65300/350" by Sherwin Williams. B. High Performance Coating On Exterior Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metals
Prime Coat: "Tneme-Zinc 90/97" by Tnemec; "Interzinc 52" or "315" by International Protective Coatings; "Carbozinc 859, Class B" by Carboline; "Cathacoat 302V Reinforced Inorganic Zinc
Primer" by Akzo; Organic Zinc Rich Primer V 170 by Corotech/Moore or "Zinc Clad II Plus Inorganic Zinc Rich Coating B69V212" by Sherwin Williams. Second Coat: "27 Typoxy" or "N69 Epoxoline
II" by Tnemec; "Intergard 345" by International Protective Coatings; "Carboguard 893 SG" or "Carboguard 888" by Carboline; "Bar-Rust 231V Multi Purpose Epoxy Mastic" by Akzo; Epoxy
Mastic Coating V 160 Series by Corotech/Moore or "Macropoxy 646 I.C. Epoxy B58-600" by Sherwin Williams. Third Coat: "V73 Endura Shield" or "1074/1075" by Tnemec; "Interthane 870UHS"
or "990 UHS" by International Protective Coatings; "Carbothane 133 LH" by Carboline; "Devthane 379 UH Aliphatic Urethane" by Akzo; Acrylic Aliphatic Urethane V 500 (Gloss) or V 510
(Semi-Gloss) by Corotech/Moore or "Hi-Solids Polyurethane B65300/350" by Sherwin Williams. C. Interior Ferrous Metal Satin Finish/Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Alkyd Metal Primer
(Z06) 1 coat Akzo Devflex 4020 PF DTM Prime/Flat Finish or touch-up shop primer 1 coat Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 First Coat: 1 coat Ben
Moore Ultra Spec-HP DTM Acrylic Low Luster P25 1 coat Akzo: Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP1403 1 coat S-W Pro-Classic Waterborne Acrylic Satin, B20 Second
Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec-HP DTM Acrylic Low Luster P25 1 coat Akzo: Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP1403 1 coat S-W Pro-Classic Waterborne Acrylic
Satin, B20 a. Total DFT not less than: 3.9 mils Semi-Gloss Finish/Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Super Spec-HP Acrylic Metal Primer (P04) 1 coat Akzo Devflex 4020 PF DTM Primer/Flat
Finish or touch-up shop primer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-7 1 coat Sherwin-Williams, Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl
Universal Primer B66-310 First Coat: 1 coat Moore Ultra Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (P29) 1 coat Akzo: Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic S/G 6P1407 1 coat S-W Pro-Classic
Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B31 Second Coat: 1 coat Moore Ultra Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (P29) 1 coat Akzo: Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic S/G 6P1407 1 coat S-W
Pro-Classic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B31 a. Total DFT not less than: 4.0 mils D. Interior Drywall Flat Finish/Vinyl Acrylic Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior
Latex Primer (N534) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Gripper GP 3210 1 coat S-W Promar 200 Interior Latex Primer First Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Flat (N536) 1
coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Flat GP 1201 1 coat S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 Second Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Flat (N536)
1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Flat GP 1201 1 coat S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 a. Total DFT not less than: 3.6 mils Eggshell Finish/Vinyl
Acrylic Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer (N534) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Gripper GP 3210 1 coat S-W Promar 200 Interior Latex Primer, First
Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Eggshell (N538) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP 1403 1 coat S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior
Latex Egg-Shell, B20-2600 Second Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Eggshell (N538) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP 1403 1 coat
S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Egg-Shell B20-2600 a. Total DFT not less than: 3.8 mils E. Drywall Surfaces to Receive High-Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating: Where epoxy
paint is indicated for application to gypsum drywall surfaces, provide the following over primer recommended by manufacturer of paint: 1. Provide 2 coats of high-performance polyamide
epoxy, total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. F. Interior Painted Wood Satin Finish/Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd Primer (790) 1 coat Akzo Glidden
Professional Gripper GP 3210 1 coat S-W Premium Wall and Wood Primer B28W111 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-8
First Coat: 1 coat Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd Satin (792) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP 1403 1 coat S-W Pro Classic Interior WB, Acrylic/Alkyd
Classic B20. Second Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd Satin (792) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic Eggshell GP 1403 1 coat S-W Pro Classic
Interior WB, Acrylic/Alkyd Classic B20. a. Total DFT not less than: 4.0 mils Semi-Gloss Finish/Latex Primer: 1 coat Ben Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd Primer (790) 1 coat
Akzo Glidden Professional Gripper GP 3210 1 coat S-W Premium Wall and Wood Primer B28W111 First Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd (793) 1 coat Akzo Glidden Professional
Diamond 350 Acrylic S/G GP 1407 1 coat S-W Pro Classic Interior WB, Acrylic/Alkyd Classic Semi-Gloss B31 Second Coat: 1 coat Ben Moore Advance Waterborne Int. Alkyd (793) 1 coat
Akzo Glidden Professional Diamond 350 Acrylic S/G GP 1407 1 coat S-W Pro Classic Interior WB, Acrylic/Alkyd Classic Semi-Gloss B31 a. Total DFT not less than: 3.8 mils 2.5 PIPING
AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT EXPOSED TO VIEW A. Paint all exposed piping, conduits, ductwork and mechanical and electrical equipment. Use heat resisting paint when applied to heating lines
and equipment. The Contractor is cautioned not to paint or otherwise disturb moving parts in the mechanical systems. Mask or otherwise protect all parts as required to prevent damage.
B. Exposed Uncovered Ductwork, Piping, Hangers and Equipment: Latex Enamel Undercoater and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat. C. Exposed Covered Piping, Duct Work and Equipment: Primer/Sealer
and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat. D. Panel Boards, Grilles and Exposed Surfaces of Electrical Equipment: Latex Enamel Undercoater and two (2) coats Latex Semi-Gloss. E. Equipment
or Apparatus with Factory-Applied Paint: Refinish any damaged surfaces to match original finish. Do not paint over name plates and labels. F. All surfaces of insulation and all other
work to be painted shall be wiped or washed clean before any painting is started. G. All conduit, boxes, distribution boxes, light and power panels, hangers, clamps, etc., are included
where painting is required. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-9 H. All items of Mechanical and Electrical trades
which are furnished painted under their respective Contracts shall be carefully coordinated with the work of this Section so as to leave no doubt as to what items are scheduled to be
painted under this Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where painting and finishing are to be applied and correct any conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
REQUIREMENTS A. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. Application may be by brush or roller. Spray application only upon acceptance from the Architect in writing. B. The Contractor
shall furnish the Architect a schedule showing when he expects to have completed the respective coats of paint for the various areas and surfaces. This schedule shall be kept current
as the job progresses. C. The Contractor shall protect his work at all times, and shall protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress
of his work. Upon completion of the work, he shall remove all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated
materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work in clean, orderly and acceptable condition. D. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device
plates, lighting fixtures, and factory finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items by
workmen skilled in the trades involved. E. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Paint separately and re-install after all paint is dry. F. All materials
shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and flowed on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles and excessive roller stipple. G. Coverage
and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or undercoats show through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the paint film is of uniform
finish, color, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to the Owner. H. All coats shall be dry to manufacturer’s recommendations before applying succeeding coats. I. Do not apply
paint behind frameless mirrors that use mastic for adhering to wall surface. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-10
3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. General 1. The Contractor shall be held wholly responsible for the finished appearance and satisfactory completion of painting work. Properly prepare
all surfaces to receive paint, which includes cleaning, sanding, and touching-up of all prime coats applied under other Sections of the work. Broom clean all spaces before painting
is started. All surfaces to be painted or finished shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth. 2. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil
and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces. B. Metal Surfaces 1. Weld Fluxes: Remove weld fluxes, splatters, and alkali contaminants from metal surfaces in an approved manner and leave
surface ready to receive painting. 2. Bare Metal: Thoroughly clean off all foreign matter such as grease, rust, scale and dirt before priming coat is applied. Clean surfaces, where
solder flux has been used, with benzene. Clean surfaces by flushing with mineral spirits. For aluminum surfaces, wipe down with an oil free solvent prior to application of any pre-treatment.
a. Bare metal to receive high performance coating specified herein must be blast cleaned SSPC SP-6 prior to application if field applied primer; coordinate with steel trades furnishing
ferrous metals to receive this coating to insure that this cleaning method is followed. 3. Shop Primed Metal: Clean off foreign matter as specified for "Bare Metal." Prime bare,
rusted, abraded and marred surfaces with approved primer after proper cleaning of surfaces. Sandpaper all rough surfaces smooth. 4. Galvanized Metal: Prepare surface as per the requirements
of ASTM D 6386. 5. Metal Filler: Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities in metal work to be painted with an approved metal filler suitable for the
purpose and meeting the requirements of the related Section of work; after setting, sand to a smooth, hard finish, flush with adjoining surface. C. Gypsum Drywall Surfaces: Scrape
off all projections and splatters, spackles all holes or depressions, including taped and spackled joints, sand smooth. Conform to standards established in Section 092900, "Gypsum
Drywall." Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-11 D. Wood Surfaces: Sand to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers,
or splinters and then brush to remove dust. Wash off grease or dirt with an approved cleaner. Fill all cracks, splits, nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with putty after
the priming coat has been applied. Putty shall be brought up flush with the surface and sanded smooth and touched-up with primer when dry. E. Touch-Up: Prime paint all patched portions
in addition to all other specified coats. 3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. B. Store materials
not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir any film which may form on the
surface into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where
multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish
each separate coat. 3.5 APPLICATION A. General 1. Apply paint by brush or roller in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material
being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by the paint manufacturer for material and texture required. 2. The number of coats and
paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has completely dried. Sand between each enamel
or varnish coat application with fine sandpaper, or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s directions.
3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Paint surfaces
behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-12 a. "Exposed surfaces" is defined as those areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector
covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be painted. 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles,
with a flat, non-specular black paint, before final installation of equipment. 6. Paint the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. 7.
Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the faces, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Enamel finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and then
cleaned between coats to produce an even surface. 9. Paste wood filler applied on open grained wood after beginning to flatten, shall be wiped across the grain of the wood, then with
a circular motion, to secure a smooth, filled, clean surface with filler remaining in open grain only. After overnight dry, sand surface with the grain until smooth before applying
specified coat. B. Scheduling Painting 1. Apply the first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat until paint has dried to where
it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Prime Coats: Re-coat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through
or other defects due to insufficient sealing. D. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
E. Touching-Up of Factory Finishes: Unless otherwise specified or shown, materials with a factory finish shall not be painted at the project site. To touchup, the Contractor shall
use the factory finished material manufacturer’s recommended paint materials to repair abraded, chipped, or otherwise defective surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,
whether to be painted or not, against damage by the painting and finishing work. Leave all such work undamaged. Correct any damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting,
as acceptable to the Architect. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid PAINTING AND FINISHING 099000-13 B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to
protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 3.7 CLEAN UP A. During
the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass
and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. C. At the completion
of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS MARKERBOARDS
101116-1 SECTION 10 11 16 GLASS MARKERBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the glass markerboards as shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum Drywall - Section 092900. B. Door Hardware - Section 087100 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards include:
1. American National Standard’s Institute A. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings –Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test 2. American Society for Testing
Materials A. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Profiles and Tubes 2. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute A. GREENGUARD Certified.
UL2818-2013 Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, Finishes and Furnishings. B. GREENGUARD Gold Certified. UL2818-2013 Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building
Materials, Finishes and Furnishings. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid GLASS MARKERBOARDS 101116-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: provide shop
drawings for each type of visual display board required. B. Product data: provide technical data for materials specified. Include material safety data sheets, when applicable. C. Samples:
provide sample to illustrate finish and texture, where required. D. Manufacturer’s instructions: provide manufacturer’s installation and cleaning instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of visual display boards in the United Stated 2. Manufacturer shall have a minium of 5 years
experience in the manufacture of visual display boards. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field measure prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrications to ensure proper fit. B. Comply
with all manufacturer recommendation for acclimating area for moisture and temperature to approximate normal occupied conditions. 1. Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture
of visual display boards in the United Stated 2. Manufacturer shall have a minium of 5 years experience in the manufacture of visual display boards. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Submit a warranty
stating that under normal usage and maintenance, and when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, glass markerboard writing surfaces are guaranteed
for ten (10) years. Guarantee covers replacement of defective boards but does not include cost of removal or reinstallation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 2. Approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid GLASS MARKERBOARDS 101116-3 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass markerboards: 1. Glass: ¼ -inch thick, tempered, low-iron, extra clear, safety writing glass with polished edges. 2.
Provide Glass Markerboard writing surface on both sides: Smooth finish intended for use with dry-erase markers 3. Glass Sizes: See drawings. 4. Back-Coated Color: Architect to select
from manufacturer’s standard colors. Back coating shall create a durable coating/glass bond that is fade resistant, water resistant, heat resistant, environmentally friendly, free of
unsafe chemicals. B. Mounting methods 1. Stainless Steel Sliding Track Hardware system by Pemko. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories. See Door Hardware specifications. PART
3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where glass markerboards are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion
of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Deliver factory built units completely
assembled and of dimensions shown in details and in accordance with manufacturer’s shop drawings as approved by the architect. B. Follow manufacturer;s instructions for storage and
handling of units before installation. C. Do not install on damp walls or in damp conditions. D. Install level and plumb, keeping perimeter trim straight in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Where exact location of cabinets and bracketmounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by the Architect. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Verify that all
accessories are installed as required for each unit. B. At completion of work, clean surfaces and trim in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, leaving all materials ready
for use. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CORNER GUARDS 102600-1 SECTION 10 26 00 CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor,
materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the wall and corner guards as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum Drywall – Section
092900 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cover materials shall be classified in accordance with ASTM E 84 as to flame spread and smoke development and shall be classified as self-extinguishing
in accordance with ASTM D 635. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Four (4) samples of corner guards each 12” long shall be delivered to the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings
for corner guards showing all anchorage devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Corner guards shall be mechanically fastened surface mounted, model CO-8 with 2” legs as manufactured
by Construction Specialties, Inc., or approved equal. Locations indicated on the drawings. Provide 8’ long. B. Material: Stainless Steel Type 304 C. Finish: Satin D. Appropriate fasteners
and other required fittings shall be provided. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid CORNER GUARDS 102600-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine
the areas and conditions where wall and corner guards are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall guards shall be installed by bolting with 1/4” toggle bolts
through the guard and the gypsum wallboard substrate. Corner guards shall be installed by self-tapping sheet metal screws through the guard, the gypsum wallboard substrate and the
metal wall stud. Screws shall be 20” o.c. for corner guards and shall securely anchor the corner guards. B. Corner guards shall be set in alignment with the corner bead of the gypsum
wallboard substrate. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation, exercise care to avoid damage to surfaces. B. Protect wall and corner guards from damage until
acceptance of work. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104416-1 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Gypsum Drywall - Section 092900. B. Fire suppression systems - Division 21. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets
and accessories by one manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification
of extinguisher indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all portable fire extinguishers required. For fire
extinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions, and details showing mounting methods, relationships to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim
style and door construction, style and materials. Where color selections by Architect are required, include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs
available. B. Samples: Submit samples, 6" square, of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gauge as metal to be used in the work. Where normal color variations are
to be expected, include 2 or more units in each sample showing the limits of such variations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
AND CABINETS 104416-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. J. L. Industries. 2. Larsen's Mfg.
Co. 3. Potter Roemer. 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. B. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher type related to UL classification and
rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. C. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated 2A-10B:C, 5 lb. nominal capacity,
in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B and Class C fires. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Provide manufacturer's standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of extinguisher,
of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher specified, in manufacturer's standard enamel finish; color to match extinguisher. 2.4 CABINETS A. Type and Style: Fire extinguisher
cabinets shall be Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, recessed, with plexiglass panel, sized to fit within the partition or wall depth. Provide fire rated cabinets within fire
rated partitions. By Larsen’s Mfg. Co. or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where fire extinguishers and cabinets are to be installed
and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this Section in locations indicated and at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104416-3 1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required
by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square
and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where exact location of cabinets and bracket-mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by the Architect.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" painted on door by silk-screen process. Provide lettering on door as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard letter sizes, styles, colors and layouts. B. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling 'FIRE EXTINGUISHER' applied
to wall surface. Letter size, style and location as selected by the Architect. 3.4 SERVICE A. Determine the approximate completion date of the work and then inspect, charge, and tag
the fire extinguishers at a date not more than 10 days before or not less than one day before actual completion date of the work. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid WINDOW SHADES 122413-1 SECTION 12 24 13 WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall
be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete
the window shades as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Manually-operated window shades. 2. Field measurements of as-built
conditions. 3. Accessories and hardware required for complete installation and operation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide assemblies which are complete assemblies produced by one manufacturer,
including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings. B. Provide materials in colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes,
and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit floor layout and elevations, indicating location of all window treatments, mechanism details, type and size of each unit, type
and location of controls. Shop drawings must also show seaming of shade fabric. Submit shop drawings showing details of installation and relation to adjoining construction and conditions.
C. Samples: Submit full size sample of each shade type for Architect's acceptance. D. Mock-Up 1. Install each type of shade assembly on one complete column bay for Architect's acceptance
of installation details, workmanship and operation. 2. Approved mock-up shall be used as the standard for installation of work under this Section, and no further installation work shall
proceed before Architect's acceptance of the mock-up. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid WINDOW SHADES 122413-2 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s standard
non-depreciating 25-year limited warranty covering all hardware, chains, motors, motor control system and shade cloth. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect shades from damage,
soiling and deterioration during transit, storage and handling to, until Owner's acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES A. Provide manually operated shade system made
by Mecho Systems, or approved equal conforming to standards specified herein. B. Shade system shall be pre-engineered overrunning clutch design that disengages to 90% during the raising
and lowering of the shade. The brake can stand a pull force of 40 lb. in the stop position. Requires no adjustment. Self-lubricating hub on to which the brake system is mounted includes
an articulated brake assembly which assures smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. System shall include the following components: 1. Provide shade hardware
allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware
that allows for removal and remounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Provide for universal, regular and offset
drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 4. Provide shade
hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.
5. Provide shade hardware system that allow for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from
the first to the last shade band. 6. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8" thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150% of the full weight of each shade. 7.
Drive Bracket/ Brake Assembly: a. Drive Bracket. b. Drive Chain: qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. c. Minimum Breaking Strength: Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid WINDOW SHADES 122413-3 8. Provide dual roller in same housing where noted on the drawings. 9. Provide retainer/safety
clip accessories for steel chain operators, mounted to wall or to window mullions. C. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem pocket, shade
roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF
welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed
hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be the same, for all shades within one room. 2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Provide extruded aluminum shade
roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without deflection. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive/ brake mechanism. b. Provide
for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable/ replaceable with a snap-on/snap-off spline mounting, without having to remove shade
roller from shade brackets. c. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples and/or rivets. D. Fascia: Provide fascia for shade in square design. Color/finish
to be selected by Architect. 2.2 SHADE CLOTH A. Solar Shade Cloth: Shade cloth shall be color and optical properties as selected by the Architect made by Mecho Systems, or equal by
other manufacturers. B. Black-Out Shades: Where indicated, shade cloth shall be opaque acrylic black-out shade cloth made by Mecho Systems, or equal by other manufacturers; color selected
by the Architect. 2.3 FABRICATION A. The shade and the fabric shall hang flat without buckling or distortion. The edge, when trimmed, shall hang straight without curling or raveling.
An unguided roller shade cloth shall roll true and straight, without shifting sideways more than +/- 1/8" in either direction due to warp distortion or weave design. Shades shall
fill window openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid WINDOW SHADES 122413-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where window treatments are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Coordinate with the work of other trades to assure
proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. 2. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the indicated design
and the installation recommendations of the manufacturer as approved by the Architect. 3. Upon completion of the installation, put all components through at least ten (10) complete
cycles of operation, adjusting as necessary to achieve optimum operation. B. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer’s written instructions and
located so shade band is not closer than 2" to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly,
easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturers written instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect installed units to ensure proper operating condition, without damage or blemishes. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 1 SECTION 12 35 53 LABORATORY CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED
DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnishing of materials, products, accessories, tools, equipment, services, scaffolding, ladders, transportation, supervision, labor, product protection, and other items that may
not be specifically mentioned, but are necessary for the fabrication and installation of laboratory casework. B. Furnish and install metal laboratory casework including, but not limited
to, counter tops, support framing, reagent shelves, standards, slotted studs, filler panels, scribes, knee space panels, accessories, and miscellaneous items of equipment as listed
in these specifications and as shown on drawings, including delivery to the building, unpacking, setting in place, leveling and scribing to walls and floors as required. C. Furnish
and deliver packed in boxes for receipt, handling and installation by others; electrical service fixtures, task lights, electrical receptacles and switches listed in these specifications
and as shown on drawings as part of the laboratory casework. The above-defined items are to be supplied, not attached, and loose in boxes, properly marked for tailgate delivery. D.
Furnish and set in place for installation by other trades; laboratory sinks, cup sinks, cup drains, strainers, overflows and sink outlets with integral or separate pieces, service fittings
where part of the laboratory casework, listed in the specifications or shown on drawings. Tailpieces shall be furnished less couplings required to connect to the trap or drain piping
system. E. Furnish and mount plumbing and electrical fixtures on fume hood superstructure. 1.3 RELATED WORK BY OTHER SPECFICATION SECTIONS A. Furnishing, installation and connection
of “Service Lines” within and/or attached to equipment, slotted studs, partitions, service tunnels or service turrets, through, under or along backs of working surfaces as required
for “Service Fixtures.” B. Receiving, installing and connecting “Service Fixtures” furnished by laboratory casework manufacturer including the pulling of wire and connecting of electrical
fixtures in service lines. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 2 C. Receiving, handling, installing and connecting separate
laboratory sinks, cup sinks or drains, overflows, sink outlets and tail-pieces furnished by the laboratory casework manufacturer. D. Furnishing, installing and connecting vents and
drain lines. E. Furnishing, installing, setting and connecting special electrical and plumbing fixtures and piping to meet local codes, even though not specifically called for in specifications
and shown on drawings. F. Furnishing, installing and connecting of ducts from fume hoods to blowers and from blowers to atmosphere. G. Furnishing, handling and installing fans with
motors (blowers). H. Furnishing, and installation of framing or reinforcements for wall, floors and ceilings to adequately support laboratory equipment and brick, plaster, metal or
wood grounds required for proper anchoring of the equipment. I. Furnishing and installation of pipe hangers. J. Furnishing in-wall exhaust duct and connection to vented cabinets. 1.4
RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for reinforcements
in metal-framed gypsum board partitions for anchoring laboratory casework. 3. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to metal laboratory
casework. 4. Division 22, 23, 26 & 27 Sections for installing service fittings specified in this Section. 5. Division 22, 23, 26 & 27 Sections for connecting service utilities at indicated
point. Piping and wiring for service fittings within laboratory casework up to point of connection are specified in this Section. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance:
Provide metal laboratory casework and support framing capable of withstanding the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses per support framing module without permanent deformation,
excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors: 1. Top of Support Framing System: 180 lb. 2. Wall Cabinets: 300 lb. 3. Shelves (Up to 15 Inches Deep): 180 lb. 4. Reagent Shelf:
180 lb. 5. Work Surface: 600 lb. 6. Total for Island Unit: 2820 lb. 7. Total for Wall Unit: 1680 lb. 8. Seismic Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing shall Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 3 meet local seismic restraint requirements. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. “Laboratory Casework Contractor”
is defined as the manufacturer and/or manufacturer’s representative furnishing and installing the laboratory casework, equipment, and accessories listed under these specifications,
laboratory equipment schedule and/or shown on drawings. B. “Service Fixtures” are defined as gas, air, and vacuum cocks, hot, cold, reagent grade water faucets, remote control valves,
electrical receptacles with necessary flush mounting boxes, conduits or pedestals and plates, fluorescent and/or incandescent light fixtures, light switches and/or motor switches for
hoods and other items which serve as a functional part of the equipment. C. “Service Lines” are defined as gas, air, vacuum, hot, cold, reagent grade and reference grade water piping,
drain lines, fittings and shut off valves necessary to carry respective services from building roughing-in floors or walls through equipment to “service fixture”. D. “Service Lines”
also include conduit, junction boxes, conduit fitting, wire disconnect switches and fuse or circuit breakers necessary to carry electrical services from building roughing-in outlets
in floors or walls through equipment to “service fixtures.” E. “Standards” are wall mounted, twin-tracked shelf supports. F. “Slotted Studs” are double-faced, twin-tracked studs comprising
the frame spanning between the utility chase and the building wall or workstation at peninsula bench assemblies. 1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Scientific Equipment & Furniture Association
(SEFA) 1. SEFA 1 2002 Laboratory Fume Hoods 2. SEFA 2.3 2002 Scientific Laboratory Furniture And Equipment 3. SEFA 3 1996 Work surfaces 4. SEFA 7 1996 Laboratory and Hospital
Fixtures 5. SEFA 8 1999 Laboratory Furniture-Casework-Shelving and Tables – Recommended Practices. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A240-Heat Resistant Chromium
and Chromium – Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for pressure Vessels 2. A312-Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe 3. D570-Water Adsorption of Plastics 4.
D695-Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 5. D790-Fluctural Properties of Un-reinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 4 Electrical Insulating Materials 6. E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 7. A554 Standard Specification
for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing 8. A513 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (BHMA) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 Flammable Liquid Storage F. National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) 70 Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories. G. National Particleboard Association (NPA) 8-Voluntary Standard for Formaldehyde Emission from Particleboard 1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to submittal section in Division 1 for requirements and procedures. Fabrication or purchase of any items prior to approval will be at the manufacturer’s risk. B. Product Data:
For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For metal laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate locations
of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory casework. 2. Indicate locations and types of service fittings, together with associated service supply connection required.
3. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping including access panels to such. 4. Include details of support framing system. 5. Include details of exposed
conduits, if required, for service fittings. 6. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and other laboratory equipment.
7. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes, epoxy sinks, epoxy countertops,
and wood veneer. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish, including countertop material, in manufacturer's standard sizes. F. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework finishes Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 5 and countertops with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework,
including countertops, sinks, service fittings, and accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain through same source from same manufacturer as fume hoods specified
in Division 11 Section "Laboratory Fume Hoods." C. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of the casework manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required
for this Project. D. Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8, "Laboratory Furniture--Casework, Shelving and Tables--Recommended Practices." 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect
finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do
not deliver or install metal laboratory casework until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature
and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for
support of metal laboratory casework. B. Coordinate installation of metal laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment. 1.13 EXCEPTIONS TO DRAWINGS
AND SPECIFICATION A. All exceptions shall be subject to written approval prior to receipt of bid. If no written communication is received prior to receipt of bid and approval indicated
in an addendum, it is assumed that bidder will be in total compliance with specifications and will be held responsible for default or delay, regardless of any statement to the contrary
in their written proposal. B. Requests for a substitution must be made directly to the Owner’s Representative’s office for consideration no later than fifteen (15) working days prior
to bid receipt date. C. Requests for a substitution following the bid opening will be rejected. D. Substitutions approved prior to bid date will be handled as an addendum and be Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 6 sent to all bidders. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Furnish a written warranty that Work performed under
this Section to be and remain free from defects as to materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Defects in materials and workmanship that may
develop within this time are to be replaced without cost or expense to the Owner. Defects include, but are not limited to: 1. Ruptured, cracked, or stained coating 2. Discoloration
or lack of finish integrity 3. Cracking or peeling of finish 4. De-lamination of components or edge banding 5. Slippage, shift, or failure of attachment to wall, floor, or ceiling 6.
Weld or structural failure (visible weld marks) 7. Warping or unloaded deflection of components 8. Failure of hardware 1.15 TESTING A. The laboratory casework manufacturer shall be
required to include in their initial submittals, certified test reports indicating compliance of their laboratory casework finish and work top materials with requirements specified
for chemical and physical resistance; and confirmation of load performance for movable tables. The material test reports shall be performed by an independent testing agency qualified
for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548. 1.16 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. It is the laboratory casework manufacturer’s responsibility to verify field measurements and
that equipment will fit through entryways, corridors and door openings enabling a smooth flow of equipment to its proper location in the building. Wallto-wall counter tops are to be
installed with a maximum ¼” gap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wood Laboratory
Casework: a. OC River Lab Furniture, Suring, WI b. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation c. Mott Manufacturing, Branford, ON, Canada d. CiF Lab Solutions, Ontario, Canada Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 7 2. Epoxy Countertops, Sinks, and Troughs: a. Durcon Company, Inc., Plymouth, MI b. American Epoxy
Scientific, Mountain Home, AR B. The naming of a manufacturer and designation of a product is for purpose of identifying a basis of design. Other manufacturers capable of producing
the same appearance and having the same quality, durability and performance may be proposed for use on this project subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative, prior to receipt
of bids. 2.2 WOOD CABINET MATERIALS A. Solid Hardwood. AWS Grade I, Solid hardwoods shall be properly air-dried, then kiln dried to 5% to 6% moisture content, and then tempered in inside
storage to moisture content of 6% to 8%. Wood used in interior construction to match exterior in species, finish and grade. B. Core. 1. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent
for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood. 2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1-2000, veneer core, hardwood cross plies and 1/42”-1/50” face veneers and shall be constructed from aspen or
basswood, made without urea formaldehyde 3. Particle Board Core: ANSI A208.1-1999, Grade M-3-Exterior Glue, 45 lb banded on vertical edge of the hinge side with 1-1/2” solid hardwood.
Doors shall be cross-banded with veneer then apply 1/42”-1/50” face veneer, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Edge-banding for Wood-Veneered Construction: Minimum
3/16” thick, square solid wood of same species as face veneer. D. Plywood. Plywood shall be veneer core construction glued with water resistant resin adhesives. Hardwood plywood
for exposed surfaces shall have face veneers of selected hardwood species and shall conform to ANSI/HPVA HP1 product standards, latest edition. Plywood for interior and unexposed surfaces
shall be hardwood plywood conforming to U.S. Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standard PS-1. E. Hardboard. Hardboard shall meet or exceed ANSI/AHA A135.4-1995 Untempered
hardboard ¼”, S1S, nominal thickness, smooth exposed side. F. Exposed Materials: 1. General: Provide materials that are selected and arranged for uniformity of grain and color. Do
not use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. 100% sapwood, no heartwood, no water stains, no sharp
contrasts at veneer joints. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 8 2. Wood Species and Veneer Cut: Species to be selected
by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard line, Book Matched a. Stain Colors and Finishes: Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish; As selected by architect. b. Solid Wood:
Clear hardwood lumber. c. Plywood: Hardwood plywood; Grade AA exposed faces at least 1/50 inch thick, solid cross-bands. Backs of same species as faces. G. Semi-exposed Materials:
1. Solid Wood: AWS Grade I, Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects of same species as exposed solid wood. 2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of same species as exposed
plywood. Grade A faces, Grade J cross-bands. H. Concealed Materials: 1. Solid Wood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. 2. Plywood: Hardwood
plywood. Grade 1, Concealed backs of plywood with exposed or semi-exposed faces shall be same species as faces. I. Veneer, grain and color shall be as follows: 1. Exposed surfaces:
Grade AA with vertical grain including doors and drawers. 2. Semi-Exposed surfaces: Grade A, vertical grain. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Grade 1. 4. Door and drawer heads within the same
cabinet shall be cut and vertically matched from the same sheet of veneer and book matched, centered and balanced across the cabinet width. 5. Sink cabinets or other cabinets with
a single piece apron across the front shall also have veneers that are vertically aligned book matched, centered and balanced matched across the cabinet width. 6. Cabinet fronts (include
but not limited to doors, drawers and pull-out boards etc.) shall be cut from the same sheet of veneer. For fixed casework, veneers shall be sequence matched across the entire elevation.
7. Grain direction on bottoms and tops of base, wall and tall cabinets and on shelves shall run lengthwise. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY
CASEWORK 123553 - 9 Grain direction on closure panels and/or trim panels at base, wall and tall cabinets shall match adjacent and base cabinetry as specified herein unless otherwise
noted. 2.3 CABINET FABRICATION A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts.
Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt and verminresistant
enclosure. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch. B. Flush, Overlay Doors & Drawer
Fronts: Full width and height doors as shown on drawings. Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors
with noncombustible, sound-deadening material. C. Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with glass held in resilient channels or gasket
material. D. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge edge. E. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box
formation, with no raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal.
Weld drawer front to sides and bottom to form a single, integral unit. Provide drawers with rubber bumpers, ball-bearing slides, and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact
or accidental removal. F. Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing channels. 1. Adjustable shelves
shall be 12” and 15” deep, as noted on the drawings. 2. Adjustable shelves shall be mounted to surface type steel standards (wall condition) or slotted studs (above peninsula benches).
Adjustable shelves shall be supported by steel shelf brackets. Brackets shall be cold rolled steel with epoxy powder coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112.
shelves shall be fastened to brackets with two stainless steel screws per bracket. 3. Adjustable shelves mounted on slotted studs shall be supplied with a continuous 2” high band to
create a 1” high curb at rear of shelf. The curb along the back shall be of similar material as the shelf. G. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches high by 3 inches deep, with no open
gaps or pockets. No exposed cabinet body end panels. Toe kick to be flush and uninterrupted for length of casework run. H. Table Legs: Welded tubing, not less than 2 inches square
with stretchers where needed to comply with product standard. Weld or bolt leg stretchers to legs and Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY
CASEWORK 123553 - 10 cross-stretchers and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg. I. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes,
conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies. J. Utility-Space Framing: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard steel
framing units consisting of 2 steel slotted channels complying with MFMA-2, not less than 1-5/8 inches square by 0.0966 inch thick, and connected together at top and bottom by U-shaped
brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch steel flat bars. Framing units may be made by welding specified channel material into rectangular frames instead of using U-shaped brackets. K.
Filler Strips and Utility-Space Closure Panels: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with
same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges 2.4 CASEWORK SYSTEM A. General: Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing,
lower cabinets, filler and closure panels, countertops, sinks, service supply lines and connection fittings, and fittings needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners
for securing support framing to permanent construction. 1. Cabinets shall be fabricated as sectional units and be capable of being removed and reinstalled without use of special tools
for relocation within system. Component parts of the unit shall be manufactured ensuring uniformity, interchangeability and accurate alignment. All base cabinets shall have integral
enclosed bases. 2. Base cabinets can be removed without removing or providing temporary support for countertops. 3. Sinks shall be supported independent of base cabinets. 4. Support
framing has provision for fastening pipe supports at utility space in not more than 1-inch increments. 5. System includes filler and closure panels to close spaces between support framing,
cabinets, shelves, countertops, floors, and walls, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate panels from same material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges.
6. System includes wall-mounted casework that matches all other laboratory casework in design and material. B. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting
of vertical supports and connecting braces and rails as follows: 1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports, except where floor-supported base cabinets
are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets, shelves, and countertops can be varied in 1inch increments through full height of supports. 2. Vertical supports rest on
adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 11 with metal clips fastened to
floor. 3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails connecting them to each other and to permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility
spaces where indicated. 4. Vertical supports are braced at floor with cantilevered horizontal leg members where indicated. 2.5 CABINET FINISH A. Chemical and Physical Resistance of
Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
Cured films shall be unaffected by 2 ft-lbs impact or ½” mandrel bend when supported on 18 gauge steel panel and shall have a pencil hardness of 8H to 9H. The finished product shall
have a smooth, hard and flexible finish that has superior resistance to abrasion, corrosion and chemical activity. The polymerized film shall resist the action of the following reagents
without any effect other than loss of luster or slight discoloration when subjected to a one c.c. puddle test for one hour: 1. Acetic Acid; 1% to glacial 2. Sulfuric Acid; 25% 3. Sulfuric
Acid: 50% 4. Sulfuric Acid: 85% 5. Hydrochloric Acid: 10% 6. Hydrochloric Acid: 37% 7. Nitric Acid: 10% 8. Nitric Acid: 25% 9. Nitric Acid: 60% 10. Phosphoric Acid: 85% 11. Perchloric
Acid: 60% 12. Formaldehyde: 37% 13. Phenol: 85% 14. Ammonium Hydroxide Concentrate 15. Carbon Tetrachloride 16. Chloroform 17. Acetone 18. Xylol 19. Furfural 20. Sodium Hypochlorite
B. Wood Finish: 1. Preparation: Exposed surfaces to receive finish shall be free of machine marks, carefully and smoothly sanded, prior to assembly, in preparation for finishing. Sand
edges of doors, drawer fronts and molded shapes with profile-edge sander. Sand casework after assembling for uniform smoothness at least equivalent to that produced by 600 grit sanding.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 12 2. Staining: Remove fibers and dust before applying stain to exposed and semiexposed
surfaces as necessary to match approved samples. Apply stain in a manner that shall produce a consistent appearance. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be first coated with a stain or toner
to secure the desired color. The color coat shall be thoroughly dried. Wood finish shall consist of two coats of sealer and three coats of a chemical resistant finish applied and thoroughly
dried and cured providing a semi-gloss finish. 4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces shall receive a stain coat, a double coat of resinous sealer and three coats of a chemical resistant finish.
5. Concealed Surfaces shall receive a double pass coat of resinous sealer. 6. Chemical Resistant Finish: Apply three coats of chemical resistant, transparent finish consisting of sealer
and catalyzed topcoat(s) complying with AWS TR-5. Finish shall be individually applied, sanded and allowed to individually dry. Top frames of drawer openings and toe spaces shall be
sealed with clear sealer. C. Colors for Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 WOOD CABINET DESIGN: A. Casework shall be fabricated
as sectional units, ready for placement in the laboratory as a complete integral rigid unit permitting relocation at any subsequent time. Base cabinets shall be capable of supporting
an equipment load per linear foot above and beyond the weight of the assembly including the counter top when tested in accordance with the test procedures as outlined in SEFA 8 Section
4. B. Where noted as such, provide wall-mounted casework that matches all other laboratory casework in design and material. The assembly shall be capable of supporting an equipment
load per linear foot above and beyond the weight of the assembly when tested in accordance with test procedures as outlined in SEFA 8, section 9. C. Cabinet Construction: 1. Cabinet
construction shall meet AWS, Flush Overlay requirements and specifically meet the following tolerances: a. The gap between doors, drawers and pull out boards shall be consistently straight
and not exceed 1/8”. b. The vertical gap between door, drawer head and pull out boards and the gap between adjacent cabinets shall not exceed 1/8”. This criterion shall require the
doors, drawer heads and pull out boards be no further than 1/16” from the exterior vertical edge of the cabinet. To achieve required tolerances, the hinge must be mortised into the
door side. Wall cabinets with hinged doors shall meet the same gap tolerances as base cabinets. 2. Equivalent to AWS Section 01600-Division A-Wood Cabinets, Premium grade Component
parts of the unit shall be manufactured ensuring Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 13 uniformity, interchangeability
and accurate alignment. No staples shall be permitted as fasteners on any cabinet components. All base cabinets to have integral enclosed bases. 3. Sectional units to be located on
the laboratory floor shall be equipped with adjustable leveling devices. 4. Ends of Cabinets: ¾ inch 7 ply veneer plywood with front exposed edges faced with a 1/8inch, squared, solid
hardwood. End panels shall be glued to horizontal frame units and to solid bottom panels. Joint construction shall be blind, not extended to face of cases. Joinery shall be blind mortise
and tendon, multiple doweled, interlocking mechanical or stopped tongue and groove. 5. Wall Storage Cabinet: a. End Panels: 3/4”- thick 7 ply veneer faced plywood where exposed, doweled,
cleated and/or rabbetted into back panels. b. Top and Bottom Panel: 3/4”- thick 7 ply veneer faced plywood with exposed edge faced with solid hardwood edge banding. c. Back Construction:
Stationary Cabinets: 1/2” thick veneer core plywood dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops where not exposed. Removable backs shall be removable from inside the cabinet. Removable panels
shall be designed to permit removal, utilizing only a screwdriver, through the front of the unit. d. Cabinet Bottom: 3/4” thick 7 ply veneer core plywood with exposed edge faced with
1/8inch solid hardwood. e. Shelves: 3/4” thick 7 ply veneer core plywood with exposed edge faced with solid hardwood edge banding on front and back (fixed shelving shall be provided
with edge banding on front edge only). The shelves shall be full depth adjustable type. 1) Removable and adjustable on maximum l inch centers. 2) Size: Wall cases shall have full depth
shelves sized appropriately for the depth of the unit. 6. Hinged Door Assembly: a. 3/4” thick, with particleboard cores, solid hardwood stiles and rails, and hardwood face veneers
and cross-bands. b. Doors over 4 feet high shall have 1-1/2 pair of hinges. c. Framed Glazed Door: Provide a continuous resilient gasket around glass panel. d. Doors three (3) feet
or less: std. thickness and a minimum of one (1) pair of hinges per door. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 14 e. Doors
four (4) feet high or greater: 1-1/8” thick and a minimum of 1-l/2 pair of hinges per door. f. Doors seven (7) feet high or greater: 1-1/8” thick and a minimum of two (2) pair of hinges
per door. g. Stiles and Rails of Glazed Doors: 3/4” thick solid hardwood. 7. Filler Panels and Scribe Strips: Material and profile to match adjacent casework. Provide as follows:
a. At each end of a run of cabinets to close to adjacent construction. b. At ends of service and utility chases which would otherwise be exposed to view in finished work. c. Below countertops
where service and utility chases which would otherwise be exposed to view in finished Work. d. Between cabinets spaced apart. 8. Drawer Box Front, Side and Back: 1/2” thick solid wood
or 1/2inch thick 7 ply veneer core plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints. 9. Drawer Bottom: 1/2” thick veneer core plywood glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides
of drawers. 10. All corners of cabinet box, doors, drawers and shelves shall be eased or chamfered not greater than 1/16”. Radiused corners shall not be permitted. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 15 2.7 CABINET HARDWARE A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's stainless steel, commercialquality,
heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type. B. Hinges: Stainless steel, #4 finish, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction
bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 for doors 48 inches and less in height and 3 for doors more than 48 inches in height, four for doors 84” or more in height. Hinges shall be capable
of supporting a 150lb. Dynamic load, 100 lbs. On each side of the door located 12” from the hinge. C. Drawer, Door Pulls: Solid stainless steel, fastened from back with two screws.
For sliding doors, provide stainless steel recessed flush pulls. Provide two (2) pulls for drawers more than 24 inches in width. D. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring loaded, self-aligning,
catch with a steel strike plate. Double doors without locks shall have a catch on each door. Tall cases shall have latching devices located on the structurally fixed center shelf.
The left hand door shall have a positive catch and the right hand door shall have a roller type catch. Where locks are used, catches and strike plates shall be used on left hand doors
of double door cases and shall be steel, cadmium plated. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches in height. E. Drawer Slides: Powder-coated, full-extension, self-closing,
heavy-duty, zinc plated drawer slides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091, and rated for 150 lbf at full extension dynamic
load and manufactured by Precision Slide, Accuride, Knape and Voght or Waterloo. Drawer slides shall have an integral stop mechanism to avoid inadvertent removal. F. Label Holders:
Stainless steel; sized to receive standard label cards approximately 1 by 2 inches, attached with screws or rivets. Provide where indicated. G. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type with
5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, E07111, or E07021. Locks shall be mounted in special housing so designed as to prevent removal
when in locked position. The locks and lock housings shall be fully concealed within the drawer heads and doors. The lock tongues shall engage the rails or stiles when in locked position.
Sliding door locks shall be push-type operating in sleeves and engaging both doors when in locked position and provided with positive door holding device. Install theft panels above
each drawer or cupboard segment in order to isolate locked section. Locks shall be separately keyed (including cabinets with multiple locks and cabinets in the same room). 1. Provide
minimum of two paracentric keys per lock and two master keys. 2. Provide where indicated. 3. The exposed face shall be stainless steel with satin finish. H. Toe space filler: At gap
created between the cabinet or ledge static panel and the floor due to leveling conditions, mechanically fasten (flat head screw) a 4” wide 18 gauge galvanized steel plate to the cabinet
behind the base molding to support Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 16 its application. Provide continuous clear silicone
sealant at intersection of floor/wall and steel plate. I. Shelf Adjustment: Adjustable shelf support clips inside wall, floor and base cabinets shall be designed for adjusting shelves
on 2” centers and shall be plated steel complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B04013. Clip shall be configured to clamp top and bottom of shelf to avoid movement. Clip may have one or
two pins. In addition to shelf clips required for initial assembly, six (6) dozen additional clips to be provided to the owner. J. Standards: Surface mounted adjustable shelves,
shall be mounted to twin-tracked standards. Standards shall be coated with an epoxy powder coating complying with BHMA A156.9 Types B04102 with a nominal cross section of 1-1/2” x
½”. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Reeve, Fixture Hardware Manufacturing Corporation, and Knape and Vogt. Standards and slotted studs shall have a fully compatible slot pattern.
Fasten standards to concrete masonry walls or properly blocked steel studded walls with appropriate flat head screws. Adjustable shelves, wall cabinets and pegboards will be furnished
with integral mounting brackets or clips. K. Slotted Studs: Adjustable shelves, wall cabinets and peg boards mounted above peninsula or island benches shall be mounted to a welded
double-sided, twin tracked stud assembly. Assembly shall be fabricated of 14 gage, fully welded steel tube with slots laser cut into uprights and be coated with an epoxy powder coat.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be Reeve, Fixture Hardware Manufacturing Corporation, and Knape and Vogt. Slotted studs and standards shall have a fully compatible slot pattern. Adjustable
shelves, wall cabinets and pegboards shall be furnished with integral mounting brackets or clips. L. Adjustable Leveling Devices: Each base cabinet shall have leveling devices, 3/8”16,
2.5” long similar to model # 2500T32 as manufactured by McMaster-Carr Supply Company, New Brunswick, NJ. M. At tall storage cabinets, provide a recessed single point hasp appropriate
for the locking the cabinet using a common combination lock, which will be supplied by the lab user. 2.8 COUNTERTOPS, SHELVES, AND SINKS A. Countertops, General: Provide units with
smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch, with continuous drip groove
on underside 1/2 inch from edge. Curbs shall be of the same material as the counter tops. The gap between the curb and the wall shall be sealed with silicone sealant, color matching
the counter top. Sink counter tops shall be fabricated in one piece and have a marine edge around the four sides to create a dished top. Counter tops shall be cut to maximum lengths
possible. B. Sinks, General: Provide undermount stainless steel sinks with side drain pan in sizes indicated on the drawings. 1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces,
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 17 otherwise indicated. 2. Overflows: For each sink except
cup sinks, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-top design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches less than sink depth. Provide in same material as strainer. C. Epoxy Countertops:
Factory molded of modified epoxy-resin formulation especially compounded and cured to give optimum physical and chemical resistant qualities. Material shall be a uniform mixture throughout
the full thickness with a smooth, non-specular finish in light gray color to be selected by Architect, unless noted otherwise. Exposed edges shall have a 1/8th inch radius on front
top edge and at vertical corners. Curbs shall typically be 4 inch high, unless otherwise noted and shall be 3/4inch thick bonded to the surface of the top to form a square joint. Epoxy
resin tops shall be 1inch. Joints between tops shall be smooth, even, 1/8 inch wide, maximum and shall be watertight by use of a silicone adhesive with corrosive resistant quality.
Epoxy resin counter tops shall be made with a separate service strip to accept service fixtures. 1. Physical Properties: a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa) b.
Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa) c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100 d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent e. Heat Distortion
Point: Not less than 260 deg F. 2. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethylformamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl
alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene. b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent). 3. Color: Pearl
Grey or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive
and pre-fitted, concealed metal splines. Field cutting or drilling will not be permitted. a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with rounded edge and corners, and with drip
groove and integral coved backsplash. b. Countertop Configuration: As indicated. c. Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Adjustable Wall Shelf
Supports: Mounted on surface-type steel standards (wall condition) or slotted studs (above peninsula benches). Shelves shall be supported Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 18 by cold rolled steel, shelf brackets. Brackets shall have an epoxy powder-coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types
B04102 and B04112. Shelves shall be fastened to brackets with two stainless steel screws per bracket. B. Adjustable shelves mounted on slotted studs shall be supplied with a continuous
2inch high band to create a 1inch high curb at the rear of the shelf. The curb along the back shall be of similar material as the shelf. 2.10 SINKS A. General: Provide sinks and accessories
as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Sinks to be undermount stainless steel with integral side drain pan. B. Sink Supports. Epoxy sinks and stainless-steel sinks mounted
in epoxy resin tops, shall be supported on steel channels attached to the ends of sink cabinets and adjustable by screw type rods to insure tight fit to the underside of the table with
a waterproof compound. Sinks installed in dissimilar material counter tops shall have self-rimming design. C. Sink Outlets, Tailpieces and Overflows. Sinks shall be equipped with
an integral overflow that is connected directly to the tailpiece. Overflow shall consist of an outlet located 2” (50.8mm) below counter top and ½” diameter tygon tubing to connect
overflow to tailpiece which shall be modified to accept tubing. D. Traps. Furnished under Division 22. 2.11 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS A. Service Fittings: Provide
units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures--Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other installation accessories.
Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and similar items. B. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Reagent-Grade
Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts in contact with water. C. Finish: Chromium plated. D. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1,
with renewable seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig. 1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with serrated outlets. 2. Aerators: Provide
aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets. 3. Self-Closing Valves. Provide self-closing valves where indicated. E. Ground-Key Cocks: Tapered core and handle of one-piece
forged brass, ground Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 19 and lapped, and held in place under constant spring pressure.
Provide units designed for working pressure up to 40 psig, with serrated outlets. F. Stainless Steel Ball Valves. Valve body, ball and stem are made of 316 stainless steel with Teflon
seal. Valves have removable serrated hose end. G. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L.". H. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm,
forged-brass handles for valves, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide lever-type handles for ground-key cocks. 2. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves. D. Service-Outlet Identification:
Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. E. Fixture Schedule: Basis of design WaterSaver (model#).
1. Laboratory: a. Hot Water/Cold Water L2222 2.12 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS A. Service Fittings, General: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals, switches,
pilot lights, device plates, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on laboratory casework. B. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, FS W-C-596, and UL 498. Duplex
type, Configuration 5 20R. 1. Receptacle Grade: General grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. GFCI Receptacles: Comply with UL 943, General grade. C. Switches: Comply with FS W-C-896
and UL 20. Provide single-pole, doublepole, or 3-way switches as required; rated 120 to 277-V ac; and in amperage capacities to suit units served. 1. Provide pilot lights adjacent
to toggle switches where noted as "PL" next to switch identification. 2. Provide thermal-overload switches, single or double pole, as required, with maximum over current trip setting
to suit particular motor controlled. D. Pedestal-Type Fittings: Cast-aluminum housings with sloped single face or two faces, as indicated, with neoprene gasket under base and with
concealed mounting Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 20 holes in base for attaching to laboratory casework. Provide
holes tapped for conduits. E. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on rigid steel conduit. Provide cover plates the same size as boxes.
F. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized steel boxes. G. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type fittings with manufacturer's
standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Color of Receptacles and Switches: As selected by Architect, unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. H. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, Type 304, stainless-steel cover plates with formed, beveled edges. I. Cover-Plate Identification:
Use 1/4-inch- high letters, unless otherwise indicated. On stainless steel or chrome-plated metal, stamp or etch plate and fill in letters with black enamel. Provide at the following
locations: 1. Receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type. Indicate voltage and phase. 2. Switches and thermal-overload switches. Indicate equipment being controlled.
3. Pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or switch, where function is not obvious. Indicate equipment being controlled. 4. Receptacles, switches, and other locations
indicated. J. Task lighting: Provide LED strip lighting at the leading edge of the lowest shelf or upper cabinet: 1. Task lighting shall increase the lighting level directly below
the light, at bench level by 15-foot candles. 2. Task lighting shall be switchable and dimmable, but no occupancy sensor is required. 3. Lighting transformers may be powered by adjacent
electrical raceway, but the transformer and wire shall be concealed within the casework system. 2.13 EYEWASH A. Provide countertop mounted Eye wash units as shown: Guardian model1805,
with auto flow switch . Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of metal laboratory casework.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS A. Install level, plumb, and true by means of the micro-adjustment
device located in each bottom corner of the base cabinets. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit with no visible gaps,
with fasteners concealed where practical. B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements
in partitions and to base cabinets. C. Base Cabinets: Adjust top rails and sub-tops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing,
wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar
adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. 1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches o.c. and at sides
of cabinets with not less than 2 fasteners per side. D. Wall Cabinets: Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing,
blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24 inches o.c. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises. F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without
warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. G. The assemblies listed below are to be fastened together with devices
of adequate strength to support cabinet of shelf fully loaded. Fully loaded is defined as twentyfive (25) pounds per linear foot per shelf for enclosed wall cabinets or open adjustable
shelves not inclusive of cabinet, shelf and bracket weight. Securely fasten wall-mounted items to solid supporting material only. Installation to meet seismic Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 22 requirements: 1. Wall cabinet to wall 2. Adjustable shelf to wall 3. Pegboard to wall 4. Wall cabinet
to slotted stud 5. Adjustable shelf to slotted stud 6. Pegboard to slotted stud 3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints
and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings. B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing
using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop. 1. Use concealed clamping devices for field joints in plastic-laminate
countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to
exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints. C. Fastening: 1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners
at each cabinet front, end, and back. 2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches o.c. 3.
Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness,
and appearance. 4. Where work surface is intended to be movable use a clamping device that is removable. D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings. E. Seal unfinished
edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with heavy coat of polyurethane varnish. F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash, with
walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound
where recommended by manufacturer. G. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SINKS A. Underside Installation of Stainless
Steel sinks: Use laboratory casework manufac Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK 123553 - 23 turer's recommended adjustable support
system for table- and cabinet-type installations. Set sink in countertop manufacturers' recommended chemical-resistant sealing compound or adhesive and firmly secure to produce a tight
and fully leakproof joint. Adjust sink and securely support to prevent movement. Remove excess sealant while still wet and finish joint for neat appearance. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive
bind. B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, and pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. C. Install shelf
standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated. D. Install signage indicated
eye wash locations, mounted on wall above sinks. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS A. Comply with requirements in Divisions 22, 23, 26 & 27 sections for installing water and laboratory
gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink-
and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to laboratory casework, unless
otherwise indicated. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish,
as approved by Architect. Clean units, including wiping out of drawers and cabinet shelves. Clean counter tops per manufacturer’s instructions leaving tops free of grease and streaks.
B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48 inches o.c. Mark
counter tops in large lettering “NO STANDING”. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS
210500-1 SECTION 210500 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic
only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in
elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered.
Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an
important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing
and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances
at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings.
Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate
all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers,
air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished
by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without
final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment.
For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in
new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement
in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS 210500-2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25
or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable
water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment
and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building.
If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install
only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets
will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and
Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct
and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final
location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened
during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop
all unused sleeves. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500-3 6. Provide angle iron frame where
openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes
smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain
the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit.
Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar
to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed
or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated
ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate
fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly
shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal
or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit
the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit
materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details
for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500-4
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide
an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or
failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling
finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural
plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish,
and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor
bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is
responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment
to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS 210500-5 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps,
pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for
requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining,
filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing
and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point
to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called
for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved
water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E.
Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment
all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for
requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections
to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C.
Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE PROTECTION IDENTIFICATION 210553-1 SECTION
210553 FIRE PROTECTION IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract
Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit
manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2
in. x 11 in. paper (minimum), indicating code number, location and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before labeling. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div., Emedco, Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc., Lab Safety Supply, Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application, selection
is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile
Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical
identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Snap-on type: Provide
manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi rigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI-A13.1. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid FIRE PROTECTION IDENTIFICATION 210553-2 2. Pressure sensitive type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl
pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: PIPE
FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION Fire Protection Water FIRE PROTECTION WATER Fire Sprinkler Water FIRE SPRINKLER WATER 2.3 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT LOCATOR A. 3/4 in. diameter adhesive stickers
placed on ceiling grid and color-coded. B. The color for all fire protection valves shall be RED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide piping identification with directional flow
arrows for all piping on project, maximum every 20'-0" or piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. B. Provide equipment
tags for all equipment provided. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-1 SECTION
211010 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation
and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific
UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2
- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. All piping needs to be FM approved and
UL listed for fire protection. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered
for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded Fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction,
butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped"
nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded Fittings: Class 125, cast or malleable
iron, black or galvanized, as called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings:
1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING
SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-2 b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors
are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly
valves. 3. Grooved Mechanical Connections: a. Couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and ASTM A536, with painted coating, designed for rolled grooved piping, hot dipped galvanized finish
complying with ASTM A153 where called for. b. Gaskets: Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber, -30°F to 230°F temperature range, suitable for water service. c. Bolts and Nuts: Heat treated,
hex head carbon steel, ASTM A183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. d. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM
A395 and A536. Fittings shall have grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer. e. Victaulic, rigid system, Style 005 couplings cast with offsetting angle
pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B 31.9. UL listed and FM approved; 300 psi wwp; follow all terms of listings/approvals. f.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Grinnell, Gruvlok by Anvil, Victaulic or approved equal. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type L, hard temper. Plans show copper tube sizes.
B. Tees, Elbows, and Reducers: Wrought copper, ASME B16.22 or cast bronze, ASME B16.18; solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast
bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder,
using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-3 2.4 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having
insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig
minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Victaulic,
Watts or approved equal. 2.5 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable
iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hotdipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable
ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated
zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. C. Spacing Schedule (Maximum Distance between Hangers (ft.-in.): NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (IN.) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2
2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8 Steel Pipe except Threaded Lightwall N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Copper Tube 8-0 8-0 10-0 10-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0
15-0 Rod Size (in.) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 D. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for
pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller, complying with NFPA 13. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for
pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements, complying with NFPA 13 . E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum
loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal, complying with NFPA 13. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-4 F. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members
for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety
of four. 2. For weights under 1,000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with
a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. G. Hangers for fire protection piping as specified and in accordance
with NFPA 13. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. Adjustable swivel ring type hangers are permitted for 3 in. and smaller
piping. 2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished
areas. B. All bushings and nipples required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces,
two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls,
wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.8 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene
link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-5 2.9 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR
ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard
fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling,
or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations
and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.10 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A" - Piping Materials at
end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. B. See Exhibit "B" - Testing at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install
equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish
grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring.
Changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow
for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required, to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide
adequate means of draining and venting systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. B. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing
cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. C. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings
during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings.
Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric
fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers,
disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING
SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-6 B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal
to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or
the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall
not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded
supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend
with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required
for proper support. Provide oversized hangers on diesel engine exhaust piping where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall
only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller
on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight
connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. B. Grooved Mechanical Joints: Pipes joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination
of fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves of a single manufacturer. Lubricate and install gasket and couplings. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean
and free of indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. C. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. D. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat. 3.5 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in
compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded piping fabricated by qualified welder. Use certified welder where
specifically required by code or insurance company. If indicated and permitted for fire protection systems, all provisions for welded pipe shall additionally be in accordance with
NFPA Standard 13. Use full length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe with inside smooth and
remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than
3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slip-on flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-7 B. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing
on joint following welding. 3.6 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed.
Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe
sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve
fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.7 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void
space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire
rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed walls/floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or
compound. 3.8 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler,
Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.9 TESTS A. Fire suppression systems shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for two (2) hours in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Provide all necessary items
to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs
to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. C. Contact Dan Phillips or Kathy Mac Cheyne at EHS to schedule testing with AHJ 3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING
A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative and shall be justified by hydraulic calculations. Where discrepancy
in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 211010-8 EXHIBIT
"A" - PIPING MATERIALS SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Sprinkler (wet) Schedule 40, black steel, 2 in. and smaller Cast or malleable iron Threaded Schedule 40, black steel,
2-1/2 in. and larger Ductile iron Roll grooved mechanical type couplings EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Sprinklers Test hydrostatically at 200 psi for two (2) hours
in accordance with NFPA 13. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300-1 SECTION
211300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS P ART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation
and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the 2020 New York State Fire Code referenced edition of the following National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standards: 1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.
3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code. 4. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations. B. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices
to comply with the latest edition of the following publications, codes, standards, and listings/approvals: 1. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Approval Guide. 2. Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 3. 2020 New York State Fire Code. 4. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 5. Requirements of Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities
Having Jurisdiction. C. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed or and FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service. D. The fire protection
work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection sprinkler systems. E. Preparation of working plans, calculations and site observation
of systems shall be completed by a NICET Level III technician under the direction of a qualified New York State Registered Professional Engineer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300-2 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire protection system shall be a wet pipe automatic sprinkler
system arranged to properly protect spaces as indicated. B. Water is supplied from existing fire pump. C. The system shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with all provisions
of the Contract Documents and any Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Calculations shall be based upon the specific hazard for the areas being protected. Refer to plans for minimum requirements.
E. Maximum coverage for any sprinkler head shall not exceed NFPA, and FM Global requirements and the listing for the sprinklers provided. F. A minimum 10 psi safety factor shall be
provided between the available municipal water supply curve and the total system demand point. The total system demand point shall be at the municipal water main and include the calculated
sprinkler and interior hose stream demands plus the exterior hose stream demand at the residual pressure required for proper system operation. G. The maximum flow velocity shall not
exceed 20 ft. per second in the piping system and 15 ft. per second in mains with paddle type waterflow indicators. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog
cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to: a. Manufacturer's
model number. b. Materials, size, finish and type of connection. c. Pressure ratings of components. d. FM approval/UL listing. B. Certification: Submit Contractor's NICET certification
and number. C. Samples: 1. If requested, submit sample of sprinklers. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER
SYSTEMS 211300-3 D. Drawings and Calculations: 1. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a New York State Registered Professional Engineer. 2. Submit complete
NFPA 13 drawings and hydraulic calculations with cross reference to applicable drawings, water supply data, and equipment schedule with ratings for the system to the Owner's Representative,
Insurance Underwriter, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. Submit hydraulic calculations for each design density/remote area with items in NFPA 13 incorporated including sketches
to indicate flow quantities, sprinklers operating and direction of flow for pipes in looped and gridded systems. 4. Drawing shall be fabrication drawings provided to indicate actual
sprinkler, standpipe and equipment layouts. Drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'-0" scale on reproducible sheets of uniform size. Drawings shall show all data required by NFPA 13. 5. Submit
drawings in one (1) complete package. E. Record Drawings and Documents: 1. Submit Record Drawings, hydraulic calculations, test reports, and NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and
Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. F. Include EHS and CU Fire Protection Engineer on all submittals. PART
2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable. 2.2 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Brass or bronze, 1/2 in. orifice,
1/2 in. NPT. 165°F ordinary temperature classification for light and ordinary hazards. Use 286°F sprinklers in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Rooms; in vicinity of heat equipment/sources;
and in accordance with NFPA 13. 1. Finished Ceiling Areas: Concealed pendent sprinklers with matching coverplate, color as selected by Architect. 2. Unfinished Ceiling Areas: Natural
brass/bronze finish pendent or upright sprinklers as required. B. Sprinkler Types and Design Equipment: 1. Quick Response Pendent and Upright: Reliable Model F1FR. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300-4 2. Quick Response Concealed Pendent: Reliable Model G5A. 3. Quick
Response Horizontal Sidewall: Reliable Model F1FR-HSW1. C. Flexible Sprinkler Drops: 1. FM Approved braided Type 304 stainless steel tube with union joints, factory tested to 400 psi
and listed for up to three (3) 90° bends including bracket for mounting to ceiling or building structure. a. Design Equipment: Victaulic "VicFlex". D. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Steel wire
cage with base plate and retaining clamps. Same manufacturer as sprinkler. 2. Design Equipment: Reliable Model C-1. E. Sprinkler Cabinets and Spare Sprinklers: 1. Steel or aluminum
construction with shelves and shell holes to accommodate the number of spare sprinklers required by NFPA 13. 2. Bright red finish with hinged front door and label. 3. Sprinkler wrenches
compatible for each type used. 4. Spare sprinklers for each system of the type and proportion of those used in each system. 5. Design Equipment: Reliable Model A-4. F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Reliable, Tyco, Victaulic, Viking or approved equal. 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. At control, test and drain valves, provide permanently marked identification signs constructed
of 18 gauge steel with baked enameled finish. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires
or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. Additional signs, shall be provided
at each alarm check and dry pipe valve to clearly indicate hydraulic calculation data. 2.4 ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AND SPRINKLER GUARDS A. Include allowance for providing 5 additional
sprinklers with related piping, fittings, hangers installed at locations where job conditions or equipment selections may be required. Provide a credit for sprinklers and guards not
installed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The
nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may
be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative
and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings. B. Piping shall not pass
directly over electric panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar electric and telephone equipment. However, protection for these spaces shall be provided. C. Piping
shall be installed concealed above finish ceiling area with sprinklers located in the center of ceiling tiles where ceiling tiles are used. D. Provide a readily removable flushing connection
consisting of a cap at each end of cross mains and run-outs. E. Provide sprinkler guards for sprinklers in mechanical and storage spaces, less than 8 ft. above finished floor subject
to mechanical damage. F. Securely install the spare sprinkler cabinets to the building wall at the main riser. G. Upright sprinklers directly on branch lines shall be installed with
their frame parallel to the piping. H. Provide sprinkler protection under ductwork, groups of ductwork and other obstructions to water spray and distribution. Use intermediate level
sprinklers if subject to waterspray from above. I. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting. J. Coordinate and activate the systems or portions of the system to operational status
as soon as possible. 3.2 PIPING, VALVES AND HANGERS A. Refer to other applicable sections. B. All piping shall be installed to permit drainage of the system through a main drain valve.
Where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of the system, auxiliary drains shall be provided. The auxiliary drain assembly shall consist of a lockable ball valve, nipple
and cap or plug and shall be located 7 ft. or less above the finished floor. Pipe drain to an accessible location. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211300-6 3.3 TESTS A. General: 1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building
construction or backfill. 2. Give the Owner's Representative advance notice of final tests. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully
completed. Use NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificate Forms. 3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking, etc. to correct
leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel. 4. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections if possible. 5. All piping, including
that will be hidden behind sheet rock, to be exposed during testing for leakage. B. Pressure Tests: 1. Hydrostatic Tests: Minimum 200 psi and in accordance with NFPA 13 for two (2)
hours. a. Air test not accepted as final test. 2. Do not subject existing systems to excess pressures. 3.4 SYSTEM TURNOVER A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative
in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. Provide one (1) new original pamphlet
of NFPA 25. Indicate in writing to the Owner's Representative the provisions for proper maintenance, testing, and inspection of the systems as required by local fire codes. END OF
SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500-1 SECTION 220500 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1
- GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated
for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract
work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations
at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative
for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference
with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other
equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact
route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location
of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling
plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers,
speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain
from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for
construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections
provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment:
Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make
space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500-2
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed
rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall
be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards
and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible
or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative
reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General
Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings
to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of
such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge
galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring.
Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500-3 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract
work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced
and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the
assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized
sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved
independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide
fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor
assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained
by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical
conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion,
and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed
utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall
and floor penetrations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220500-4 7. Fire-stopping products shall not
be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System
Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required
access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in.
by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information
in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal
to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access
panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening
slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment
provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting,
chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment
as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment
waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
220500-5 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains,
insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify
connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems
which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops,
sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece
furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that
is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment
type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and
lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves,
gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection
requirements before bidding. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy
duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power
wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory
equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 220523-1 SECTION 220523 VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to
perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical
and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES -
GENERAL A. Valves shall have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies. 2. Stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line. 3. All items here-in
used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372
- Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ball Valves: Apollo, , Nibco, Watts. 2. Check Valves:
Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Stockham, Watts. 3. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs.
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES A. Check Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free swing check with silicone bronze body, bonnet and trim, PTFE disc seat and stainless steel seat disc washer,
200 psi working pressure, Nibco T-413-Y-LF (threaded) or Nibco's S-413-Y-LF (solder). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 220523-2
B. Ball Valves 1. For all water services, ball valves shall be: a. Body Bronze b. Body Style Standard Port, 2 piece c. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension
to raise handle out of insulation d. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal e. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum f. Body Working P/T Rating
300 psig @ 300°F Minimum g. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum h. Lead free i. Design Basis Apollo 70LF-240 or approved equal, Nibco T-580-66LF, S-580-66-LF, Watts LFB6000-SS, LFB6001-SS.
C. Valves For Gauges And Instruments: 1. 1/2 in. size: Use a ball valve as listed above. a. Provide at all new pressure gauges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all
shutoff, check, balancing and other type valves as indicated, as required by Code and as required for proper system maintenance, isolation and safety. Provide at major building and
systems sections. Provide shutoff valves on all branch lines serving two fixtures or more, at all equipment, fixtures, before and after automatic control valves, and at future connections.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves with stems at or above the horizontal position. Install swing check valves in horizontal
position with hinge pin level. C. Provide drain valves with hose thread connections on all equipment. Provide hose thread drain valves at all low points to enable complete drainage
of all piping systems including, water mains, branches, at base of vertical risers and at strainers. D. Inspect valves for proper operation before installation. Unless otherwise noted,
leave in the open position. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 220523-3 END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 220553-1 SECTION 220553 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification
devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation
instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. paper (minimum), indicating valve number,
location and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.;
Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required
for each application. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green
Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's
existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color
coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 220553-2 2. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi rigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI-A13.1. B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: PIPE FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION Cold Water DOMESTIC COLD WATER Hot Water DOMESTIC HOT WATER
Hot Water Recirculating DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING Sanitary Waste SANITARY WASTE Indirect Waste INDIRECT WASTE Vent VENT Pump Discharge PUMP DISCHARGE 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high black-filled numerals. Attach to valve with brass jack chain and "S" hook. Identify between heating and
plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4507, or approved equal. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all
valves provided as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Mount in Mechanical Room. 2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: 1. Provide engraved vinyl nameplates
for each major piece of mechanical equipment provided, 2-1/2 in. x 3/4 in. size. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4562, or approved equal. 2.5 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT
LOCATOR A. 3/4 in. diameter adhesive stickers placed on ceiling grid and color-coded. B. The color for all plumbing valves shall be BLUE. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 220553-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project. B. Provide equipment
tags for all equipment provided on project. C. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, maximum intervals of 20'-0". For piping installed
through rooms, provide at least one (1) pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-1 SECTION 220700 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment
and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Shall include product description, manufacturer's
installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings
shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes
and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing
materials are prohibited. 4. 2020 Energy Conservation Code of New York State 5. All adhesives and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the
maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ E4.1 and EQ E4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the
standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least two (2)
years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's
name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-2 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Johns Manville, Owen-Corning,
Certainteed B. Adhesives: Childers Products, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Product meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible.
B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing
and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system shall consist of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts
shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures shall be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FIELD-APPLIED
JACKETS A. Piping: 1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by
insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.5 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat
insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-34, or
approved equal. B. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal.
C. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-3 2.6 PIPE SUPPORT INSULATION INSERTS A. 20 lbs./cu. ft. molded fiberglass, for
-120°F to +450°F service temperature, noncombustible, 0.30 thermal conductivity (k), same thickness as pipe insulation. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hamfab "H" Block, or approved equal.
2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged
in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover
seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be
exposed to the air. C. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling, floor, or roof openings, unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Sections
220500, "Basic Plumbing Requirements" and 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping and equipment
(as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier
must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces
shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra
care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams
must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress.
Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated
with Elastomeric insulation. F. Items such as manholes, handholds, clean-outs, plugged connections, pet cocks, air vents, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated
unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly
beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-4 G. Provide protective insulation
as required to prevent personal injury. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material becomes wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or
water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. J. All exposed surfaces shall be white, unless noted otherwise. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A.
Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. B. Insulation installed
on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers
on all water piping and storm water piping. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section 221010 "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Hanger shields shall be installed between hangers or supports
and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent
insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with
3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation.
E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with
staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white
vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints
shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1.
Domestic Hot and Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-5 2. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with
1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. H. Piping in exterior walls, spaces, overhangs, attics, or where subject to freezing:
Insulate pipe with double the thickness called for. Piping in wall chases: In addition to the above, pack chase with loose glass fiber insulation. I. Provide insulation on exposed
hot and cold plumbing piping to within 18 in. of fixture or equipment connection. J. Insulate exposed domestic water and waste piping for plumbing fixtures designated for use by the
handicapped. 3.3 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 220700-6 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS (Notes at end of Exhibit "I") SERVICE INSULATION
MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Domestic cold water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1/2 in. Domestic hot, tempered and circulation water (105°F - 140°F)
Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1 in. AC unit drains, overflows and indirect waste piping associated with any HVAC equipment Glass fiber All
sizes: 1/2 in. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-1 SECTION 221010 PIPING
SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related
Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved
firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All items here-in used to convey water for potable
use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance
shall be via third party testing and certification. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type K or L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube
sizes. B. Fittings: Wrought copper and copper alloy, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy, ASME B16.18; solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder
type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Flux Materials: Flux shall
comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. E. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc.,
"Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-2 2.3 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. 1. Copper not allowed for urinal waste. B. Fittings: Wrought
copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code.
D. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright
100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.4 NO-HUB CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI Standard 301, no-hub cast iron, bitumen coated. 1. For above grade
only. B. Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub drainage pattern, bitumen coated. C. Couplings: 1. 1-1/2 in. to 2 in.: CISPI standard 310 with 300 series stainless steel corrugated shield and
clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve (or) same as specified for 3 in. and larger. 2. 3 in. and Larger: 24 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel housing clamp assembly with
ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, 60 in. lbs. minimum torque rating, shall meet requirements of pipe manufacturer and shall be compatible with specified pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Clamp-All Coupling System, Tyler "Wide Body", Husky "Series 2000", Mission "Heavy Weight" or approved equal. D. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective
trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. 2.5 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Cast Iron to Lead Pipe: Red brass ferrules and wiped joints. Caulk
ferrule into cast iron hub. B. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. C. Copper to Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder
for drainage piping only. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-3 2. Dielectric pipefittings. D.
Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). E. No-Hub, Cast Iron, Glass, Polypropylene or High Silicon Cast Iron: Proper
adapter to piping being connected. F. Cast Iron and PVC Sovent: Aerators and deaerators as manufactured by Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2.6 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description:
Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly,
for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing,
Watts or approved equal. 2.7 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable
iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for
piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. 5. Provide hot dipped galvanized
finish for hangers and accessories installed in exterior locations and interior areas with moist environment conditions such as pools, pool filter rooms, areaways, garages and similar
areas. C. Spacing Schedule: Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size 3/4 in. to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Each 3/8 in. 1-1/4 in. to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Horizontal 3/8 in.
2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Joint 5 ft. 1/2 in. 5 in. and over 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Maximum 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. O.C. 3/4 in. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-4 Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions.
D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports: 1. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base, at each floor and 15 ft. on center, maximum. Freestanding
vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets
attached to the building construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative. 3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10
ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear.
Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement. E. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish,
UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved,
for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs.,
for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. G. Supports: 1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for
hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four.
2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING
SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-5 H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured
type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or pipe clamps, dissimilar metals shall not
touch, use isolation gaskets, similar to HoldRite strut-mounted cushion clamps. Fasten piping to trapeze at every third support, except uninsulated piping which shall be fastened at
every support using strut-mounted cushion clamps. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, HoldRite, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. I. Cabinet Pipe Space Supports: 1. Piping below
casework countertops within space behind cabinet shall be supported using continuous slot metal channels with pipe clamps. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or
approved equal. J. Hanger Insulation Shields: 1. Hanger insulation shields shall be provided for all water and storm water piping. Hangers shall attach directly to pipe for all remaining
services. 2. Piping 2 in. and Smaller: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized
steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. 3. Piping 3 in. and Larger: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation
shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield and pipe support insulation insert(s) between pipe and hanger. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120
degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. Provide temporary blocking to maintain proper spacing for insulation. K. Piping systems
with material not listed above shall be supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.8 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass,
split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-6 B. All cleanout plugs, bushings and nipples, required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. 2.9
SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer.
Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded
to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.10 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts. 1. Acceptable
Manufacturers: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. 2.11 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping
seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum
required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements
necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.12 STACK SLEEVE A. Cast iron body with caulking recess, flashing clamp and under deck clamp. B. Acceptable
Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Series 1720, Zurn, Wade. 2.13 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (Plumbing) piping.
B. See Exhibit "B", "Testing" at end of this Section. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-7
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations
having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for,
making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with
necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid
contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for.
Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream
pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide
clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a
system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid
installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches.
B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical
equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is
larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron,
chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beams clamps of proper
configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length
for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide
oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic piping per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers,
when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger that 21/2 in.; "C" types are permitted
for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-8 Provide riser
clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 inches of pipe unions and piping connections to
equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder.
B. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. C. Flanged
Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type and thickness for service applications. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
D. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric unions at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric unions in all open type piping systems
(condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors
that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. B. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains,
use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. C. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. D. Sleeves shall be
as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. E. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. F. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through
ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Cored Holes:
Use sealing element. 3. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-9 4. Waterproofed Walls/Floors: Use waterproof sealing element,
device or compound. 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except
in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to Exhibit "B" at the end of this section for testing of Plumbing Systems. B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper
testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests.
Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. C. Domestic Water: 1. Do not cover joints with insulation until required tests are completed and the Owner's Representative
accepts the system. 2. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Piping shall be tight and show no loss of pressure. 3. Air test not
acceptable as final test. 4. Confirm in writing that tests and flushing have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. D.
Sanitary and Storm: 1. There shall be no loss of water when testing interior piping. 2. Air test not acceptable as final test. 3. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction
be detected in sewers and/or floors or walls of appurtenant structures, they shall be permanently stopped. Should any defective pipes, fittings or accessories be discovered they shall
be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4. Confirm in writing that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative.
3.9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Cleaning and disinfecting shall be in accordance with requirements of New York State Department of Health and authority having
jurisdiction. Prior to disinfecting, flush piping to remove any sediment and debris. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS
AND ACCESSORIES 221010-10 B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. C. After
disinfection procedures, submit water samples in sterile bottles to an approved Department of Health Laboratory. Samples shall be proven equal to the water quality served to the public
from the existing water supply system and acceptable to the Department of Health. Flush and disinfect all sections of pipe that fail the laboratory tests. Submit test results indicating
water is potable. 3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size
occurs, the larger size shall be provided. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-11 EXHIBIT "A"
- PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Domestic water interior/hot, cold and circulating 3 in. and smaller Type L copper Wrought or cast copper
No-lead solder Sanitary and sanitary Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder
Indirect waste Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Pump discharge Type L Copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 221010-12 EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Domestic water Test hydrostatically at 150 PSI for two (2)
hours or at 1.5 times the working pressure when working pressure exceeds 100 PSI Sanitary and sanitary vent Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Indirect waste Maintain
10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Pump discharge Hydrostatically test at 5 PSI greater than the pump rating for two (2) hours. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 221030 - 1 SECTION 221030 PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to
perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices
to comply with the following publications, codes, standards and listings/approvals: 1. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF
61, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with the Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals
for all items specified under Part 2 of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNDERCOUNTER PUMP A. Pump: Simplex, submersible type, 1-1/2 in. discharge, cast iron construction, thermoplastic
impeller. B. Motor: Oil filled, permanent lubrication, inherent overload protection, water resistant power cord with plug. C. Electrical Control: Built-in automatic diaphragm-type
pressure switch. D. Basin: Five (5) gallon polypropylene tank, 1-1/2 in. inlet, 1-1/2 in, outlet, 2 in. vent, filter trap with access cover. E. See schedule on drawings for capacity
and electrical characteristics. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Little Giant, Liberty Pumps, Hartell Pumps or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 221030 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pumps shall be installed, aligned and started in accordance with manufacturers written installation
instruction. B. Install pumps in locations to provide access for maintenance and replacement of parts. C. Support pumps and piping separately so that piping does not support pumps.
3.2 TESTING A. Test sanitary pumping systems for operation at specified liquid depths. B. Certify in writing that tests have been performed and the systems are properly operating.
Submit three (3) copies of all test reports to the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid EQUIPMENT
223010-1 SECTION 223010 EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation
and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Walls:
Cast iron ferrule, with bronze plug and stainless steel smooth access cover. 1. Horizontal: Jay R. Smith Figure #4402. 2. Vertical: Jay R. Smith Figure #4531. B. Make: Josam, Jay
R. Smith, Wade, Watts or Zurn. 2.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Hydropneumatically controlled with permanently sealed expansion chamber pre-charged with non-combustible gas; lead-free, threaded
connection, meets or exceeds Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI WH-201 and ASSE Standard 1010. 1. Bellows Type: Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bellows.
2. Piston Type: Hard drawn copper body with brass piston, cap and adapter, and elastomer seals. B. Elastomer or rubber compound type bellows not allowed. C. Make: Watts #LF15M2, Precision
Plumbing Products, Jay R. Smith, or Zurn. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Plumbing Contractor shall: 1. Provide all roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air,
vacuum, diesel and/or oxygen connections to all equipment requiring same as called for on Contract Documents. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid EQUIPMENT 223010-2 2. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. 3. Provide loose key stops, "P"
traps, tailpieces, adapters, gas or air cocks and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. 4. Provide for installation of sinks provided by an Equipment Contractor.
These items to be delivered, in easily identified cartons, to the proper room for Contractor's installation. 5. Install controls and devices furnished by others. 3.2 CLEANOUTS A. Install
cleanouts out of traffic patterns and flush to floor. Provide offset from sanitary line served. Do not locate under doors or under lockers. Maintain distance between cleanouts on
piping 4 in. and smaller, 50 ft.; over 4 in., 100 ft. At changes in direction greater than 45°. Install at base of soil, waste, vent, stacks and roof conductors and where called for.
B. Cleanouts: Same nominal size as pipe, but not larger than 4 in. 3.3 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Install in vertical position. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000-1 SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment
and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance
with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 - Products of this section. 1.3
DESCRIPTION OF FIXTURES A. Fixtures and trim shall be of those manufacturers listed, unless otherwise indicated. Fixtures for this project shall be of same manufacturer. 1. Faucets:
Chicago Faucets, T&S Brass or Zurn. All faucets shall be lead-free in accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372. 2. Supplies, Stops and Traps: Brasscraft, EBC, McGuire or Sanitary Dash.
B. Exposed parts of trim shall have polished chrome plated finish. C. Tubular drainage products ("P" traps, nipples, etc.) shall be 17 gauge brass. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with
requirements of the Plumbing Fixture Law of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. B. Comply with the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 "Requirements
for the Physically Challenged". C. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard 61, Section 9 Standard for Drinking Water
and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third-party testing and certification. D. All fixture trim used to convey water for potable
use shall be lead free. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINKS A. SK-A
(ADA Compliant): 1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping,
and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following: a. Chicago #786-GRZAE35V317AB two handle concealed mount sink faucet, 11-5/8 in. high, 5 3/8 in. reach swing spout, pressure compensating
aerator, deck mounted, 8 in. centers, lead-free, ADA compliant and fitted with the following: b. Elkay #LKAD18 stamped brass drain outlet with 3 in. perforated grid strainer and LKADOS
1-1/2 in. O.D. offset tailpiece. c. Elkay #LK53 continuous waste, 1-1/2 in. OD. d. McGuire #8912 cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout plug, 1-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in., tubing outlet
and cast brass escutcheon with set screw. e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead-free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. OD flexible risers, loose key angle stops and cast brass escutcheons with set
screws. 2.2 EMERGENCY FIXTURES A. EW-A: (for the physically challenged) 1. Water Saver EW805, Deck mount swivel eyewash unit with stay open valve, and inline strainers, universal identification
sign and meeting ANSI Z358.1. 2. (TMV-A) Powers ES150 Emergency fixture thermostatic mixing valve meeting ASSE 1071, and cold water by-pass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT
AND SYSTEMS A. Install fixtures, equipment and systems as shown on Drawings or specified herein in accordance with provisions of each applicable Specification Section and all local
and state codes having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written installation
instructions. B. Carefully drill holes for through bolts to avoid chipping blocks or plaster. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PLUMBING
FIXTURES AND TRIM 224000-3 C. Seal fixtures in contact with walls, floors and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone caulk. Match color to fixture color.
D. Immediately after installation, provide protective covering over fixtures and trim. 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION A. Mount fixtures at height and location as indicated on Architectural
plans and elevations. B. Mount accessible fixtures in conformance with the requirements of ANSI A117.1. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping
systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 22. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to provide proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Clean fixtures,
fittings, spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. E. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation
and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components and retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500-1 SECTION 230500 BASIC
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be
interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc.
Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing,
verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement,
report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable
and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers,
motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate
work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain
from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate
all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers,
air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished
by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without
final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment.
For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in
new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement
in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS 230500-2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25
or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable
water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment
and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building.
If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install
only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets
will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and
Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct
and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final
location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened
during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop
all unused sleeves. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500-3 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings
are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller
than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain
the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit.
Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar
to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed
or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated
ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate
fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly
shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal
or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit
the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit
materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details
for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500-4
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide
an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or
failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling
finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural
plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish,
and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor
bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is
responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment
to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500-5 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure
reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements
of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling,
venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final
connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment.
Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide
continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent
to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents
for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping
accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory
equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment.
Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished
and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specification
s for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC WIRING 230504-1 SECTION 230504 ELECTRIC WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor control wiring and temperature control wiring as required in Contract Documents. Provide wiring
and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctive to the automatic temperature control system and for motor control regardless of the source of supply. Control
wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for control signals directing equipment operation. Control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum. Provide wiring in accordance with
requirements specified in Division 26 "Electrical" and the National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers,
disconnect switches, relays, and circuit breaker protection. B. Coordinate all work with Division 26 "Electrical". 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring for motors, motor starters and
associated starting and control equipment, as well as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packaged control/starters), are included in Division 26 "Electrical",
unless otherwise called for. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Wiring shall be installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26 "Electrical". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete wiring
diagrams for equipment systems. Deliver wiring diagrams to proper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay in construction schedule. Wiring diagrams
and roughing information to be wired as part of the Work of Division 26, "Electrical", shall be clearly indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 26 specifications
for required wiring materials. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC WIRING 230504-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Check
electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness of connections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal overload device, or device
which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due to incorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams. 3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide motor control
and temperature control wiring for equipment. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260501 for type of conduit to be used in specific applications.
Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devices subject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Do not attach directly to hot surfaces, piping, or ductwork.
Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all other wiring. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wire through conduit to each remote auxiliary
relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heating device, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as required by NEC. B. All temperature control
wiring shall be plenum rated type, meeting the requirements of NEC Article 300. C. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, and other
devices required to provide specified functions. D. Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be installed without conduit. Installation and wire
insulation types shall be as described by NEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50 volt and under shall: 1. Be adequately supported using bridle rings spaced a maximum
of 3 ft. on centers or other approved method when installed horizontally above accessible ceilings or run exposed in unfinished areas. 2. Be installed in conduit when run in wall cavity
or surface metal raceway where no access is available to wall cavity, in finished areas. 3. Be installed in conduit when installed vertically in Mechanical/Utility Rooms from panels
and devices up to above ceiling, or 10 ft. above finished floor if not ceiling. 4. Be installed in conduit in all cases not specifically covered by the above cases, or where subject
to physical damage. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC WIRING 230504-3 3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide power and control
wiring between sections of electrical radiation units, between shipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, disconnect switches, and their respective units. Provide control
wiring from the package control system, to each respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package. Power wiring to and including disconnect switch
shall be by Division 26, "Electrical". 3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS AND PANELS A. Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatly
in gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide suitably rated terminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relay terminal.
Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks. Provide nylon insulated, ring spade terminal for all control wires. Cables and wires shall be neatly bundled
and lashed with nylon cable straps. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid MOTORS 230513-1 SECTION 230513 MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed
in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on all motors. B. Product Data: For each motor, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; frame type, enclosure
type, location for conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings and characteristics. C. Motor Performance
Data: For each motor, include the following manufacturers' data: 1. Motor Performance: Percent Efficiency, Power Factor, Torque, RPM, Duty Rating and Design Category. 1.3 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Motor manufacturer shall be based and headquartered in the United States of America and shall design and manufacture motors in the United
States. 2. Motor manufacturer shall have over fifteen (15) years-experience in the motor industry and shall maintain active company-wide quality assurance program. 3. Motor manufacturer
shall maintain an authorized service center within 60 miles of the project site, capable of providing training, parts and emergency maintenance and repairs. B. Motor performance shall
be warranted against material and workmanship defects by manufacturer's limited warranty and service policy for the period of at least 18 months from the day of shipment from the factory
or the manufacturer's warehouse. 1. Premium efficiency motors shall be warranted for 36 months. 2. Severe duty motors (as applicable) shall be warranted for 60 months. 3. Extended warranty
shall be offered for certain products or as agreed by additional terms and specified elsewhere. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid MOTORS
230513-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. General Requirements: 1. Motors built for 60 Hz operation, three phase for 1/2 HP and larger; single phase for 1/3 HP and smaller. a. In compliance
with NEMA Standards, wound specifically for nameplate voltage, and selected for appropriate duty and environment. b. 1.15 minimum service factor at rated voltage and frequency. 1.0
service factor for inverter duty motors. c. Bearings: Bearings shall have a rated fatigue life of L-10 (B-10) of 150,000 hours for direct-coupled applications and 50,000 hours for
belted applications minimum. Belted rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG 1-14.43. The calculation will be determined from the pulley centerline
being at the end of the motor shaft. d. V-belt connected motors with adjustable slide rail bases and pulleys. e. Motors shall have Class F insulation system, with Class B temperature
rise, insulation meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31. Maximum allowable motor temperature rise for open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type at 1.15 service factor shall be
105°C above 40°C ambient with a total temperature rating of 155°C. f. NEMA locked rotor kVA code as required to match unit equipment torque characteristics. g. Single-phase motors shall
be capacitor start, induction run, or split phase type. h. Polyphase motors shall be constant speed, squirrel cage, unless otherwise specified. i. Nameplates shall have as a minimum,
all information as described in NEMA Standard MG-1-20.60. Motor nameplate shall be mounted on enclosure with stainless steel fastening pins. 2. Motors for use with adjustable speed
drive applications shall be premium efficiency inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA and be capable of a 20:1 turndown. a. These motors shall meet NEMA corona inception voltage
requirements, withstanding peak voltages up to 1600 volts, and be manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG 1 Part 30 and 31. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid MOTORS 230513-3 b. All motors controlled by adjustable speed drives shall be equipped with circumferential micro-fiber shaft grounding rings to provide
protection from electrical bearing damage, to meet NEMA MG 1, 31.4.4.3. Provide AEGIS Bearing Protection Ring Kit (or equal), installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
For motors controlled by adjustable speed drives and 50hp or greater the motor shall have a ceramic electrically insulating bearing assembly on the opposite end of the grounding brushes
3. Three phase motors rated 1 HP and greater shall be copper winding, re-lubable ball bearings, 1.15 service factor (1.0 service factor for inverter duty motors), premium efficiency,
energy-saver type with a guaranteed NEMA nominal fullload efficiency, by IEEE Standard 112 Test Method "B". Efficiency rating shall appear on nameplate, and shall be not less than
as follows; per NEMA MG 1 Part 12, Table 12-12, nominal minimum efficiencies: MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD MOTOR EFFICIENCY HP ODP MOTORS (RPM) TEFC MOTORS (RPM) 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800
3600 1.0 82.5 85.5 77 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5 86.5 86.5 84 87.5 86.5 84 2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 7.5 90.2 91.0
88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 30 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7
40 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 60 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 75 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 125 95.0 95.4 94.1
95.0 95.4 95.0 150 95.4 95.8 94.1 95.8 95.8 95.0 200 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.4 4. Nominal Motor Voltage Table: Nominal System Voltage Motor Nameplate 480V - 3 phase 460 volt 240V
- 1 phase and 3 phase 230 volt 208V - 1 phase and 3 phase 200 volt 120V - 1 phase 115 volt Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid MOTORS
230513-4 5. Motor Application; Provide the following enclosure types unless noted otherwise: Environment/Location Motor Enclosure Type General Purpose Open drip-proof, TEFC with cast
iron frame, or encapsulated Outdoors, below grade or high humidity TEFC with cast iron frame Hazardous Explosion-proof Packaged Refrigeration Compressors Hermetic or semi-hermetic
6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Motors need not all be of the same manufacturer. Subject to the requirements of this section provide products by the following: a. General Electric Energy
& Saver NEMA Premium Efficiency/(ODP); General Electric X$D Ultra NEMA Premium Efficiency (TEFC). b. Century/A.O. Smith Speed Plus c. Baldor-Reliance Super E. d. Lincoln Ultimate E
CTAC. e. Marathon XRI. f. Siemens GO100A. g. Nidec Motor Co. (U.S. Motors) Premium Efficient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTORS A. Furnished by equipment manufacturer and especially manufactured
and/or selected, mounted, and installed for intended use. Install motors accessible for maintenance and belt adjustment. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS 230519-1 SECTION 230519 GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment
and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data for gauges, thermometers
and thermowells. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES A. Pressure gauges shall be stainless steel case, non-repairable, silicone filled with minimum 3 1/2" diameter case. Gauges
shall have 3% accuracy over the appropriate range of 0-30 psi, 0-60 psi, or 0-160 psi. Gauges shall be suitable for operation at 160°F and include a shut-off ball valve (gauge cocks
not permitted). Include a pigtail cooling loop on all steam gauges. Scale shall be selected to provide a reading point at mid-scale during normal operation. No Snubbers. B. Make:
Trerice, Weiss, Weksler. 2.2 PIPING SYSTEM THERMOMETERS: A. Thermowells: All thermowells for steam service shall be stainless steel and for water service shall be brass. Thermowell
length shall be in accordance with ISA Standards and shall include the appropriate extension to allow for pipe installation. Extension neck shall be included when required to match
thermowell and insulation thickness. B. Thermometers: Provide one of the following: 1. Industrial stick type, mercury free, 9" case, with locking adjustable angle body and a case
of aluminum or non-metallic material. Thermometer shall be secured to well by tapered bushing and not by set screws. Provide the following characteristics: a. Scale Graduations: 2
˚F. b. Range: Select to provide a mid-scale reading at normal operating temperature. c. Accuracy: 1%. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS 230519-2 2. Industrial light-powered digital thermometer with adjustable-angle stem and a case of aluminum or high impact ABS plastic. Thermometer shall
be secured to thermowell by tapered bushing and not by set screws. Installation shall insure that thermometer is accessible and has been adjusted to be readable from a 5-foot level
as viewed from the floor. Display shall be LCD with digits a minimum of 0.5-inch high with the following characteristics: a. Resolution: 0.1 ˚F. b. Range: -40 to 300 ˚F. c. Sensor:
Glass passivated thermistor. d. Accuracy: 1%. C. Make: Trerice, Weiss, Weksler. 2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. 1/4 in. NPT plug shall be capable of reading either a pressure
or temperature. 1/8 in. o.d. dual seal core of Nordel 275°F with zero leakage from vacuum to 500 psig. B. Use extended body style to allow for insulation thickness. Seals shall be
appropriate for operating water temperature and pressure as follows: 1. Hot water, Glycol - Nordel (EPDM) seat. 2. Chilled water, Cold water - Neoprene seat. C. Makes: Peterson
Equipment Company, Sisco P/T plugs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide where called for in the drawings and as noted below. B. All gauges and thermometers shall be provided with
pressure and temperature ranges appropriate for the system in which they are installed. Select to operate in the middle third of the range under normal operating conditions. Gauges
and thermometers shall be suitable for the environment of their installed location, and if installed outdoors shall be acceptable for operation down to an ambient temperature of -20
degrees F. 3.2 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES A. Heating water and chilled water coils: 0 to 60 psi range. B. Heat exchangers: 0 to 60 psi range. C. Each water make-up valve assembly: 0
to 60 psi range. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS 230519-3 D. Provide 1/4 in. ball valve in each pump inlet
and outlet tapping, or in piping adjacent to same. Range 30 in. vacuum to 100 psi. E. On devices such as pumps, strainers, coils, etc., where the differential pressure is the desired
information, install only one pressure gauge with valved connections to the upstream and downstream taps. Include P/T test port in addition to the pressure gauge. Provide a second
set of isolating valves at the gauge if gauge location is not within reach of tap points. 3.3 THERMOMETERS A. Provide thermowells mounted in oversize tee, or elbow if necessary, to
provide as little restriction as possible to fluid flow. Provide thermometer stems and thermowell depths of proper length to allow accurate reading. Locate adjacent to control sensing
equipment. Install and adjust angles so as to be easily read from floor. B. Cooling Coil: Inlet and Outlet; Range 20° to 120°F. C. Heating Coil: Inlet and Outlets; Range 0° to 220°
F. D. Heat Exchanger: Inlet and outlet; range 30° to 300°F. 3.4 TEST PLUG A. Provide test plugs at locations as called for. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-1 SECTION 230523 VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide
labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation and related Work designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data for valves and
accessories. 1.3 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted, all valves for shut-off and bypass service shall be ball valves, 2" and below, and butterfly valves 2-1/2" and above. Ball valves
are acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper only. B. Valves for balancing operations shall not be ball or butterfly. C. All end connections shall be the same as is used for fittings for
2" and below. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and above, valves shall be flanged. Solder joints are also acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper piping systems. D. Provide valve tags
as called for in Specification Section 230553. E. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve type and major component materials. F. Install valves after
welding adjacent to valve is complete to protect seat and disk. G. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems. H. All valves for all services shall be fully bi-directional
and suitable for dead end service. I. On all valves the packing compression is to be independent of the stem, ball or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing
shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation. J. Plug or gate valves shall not be used on any services without approval by Facilities Engineering. K. All valves used for
vent or drain service on water systems shall be ball valves and have a brass hose connection with cap and chain. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLOBE VALVES A. 2-1/2 in. and Larger: Iron body, renewable seat and disc, 125 SWP, flanged ends, bolted bonnet, Milwaukee F-2981.
Provide 250 lb. SWP, Milwaukee F-2983 for steam and condensate at 75 psi and above. B. 2 in. and Smaller: Bronze body, renewable composition or bronze disc, union bonnet, rising stem,
threaded ends, 150 SWP, Milwaukee 590. Provide 200 lb. SWP, Milwaukee 592A for steam and condensate at 75 psi and above. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. For all water services, low pressure steam,
low pressure condensate and all other normal non-corrosive services, ball valves shall be: 1. Body Bronze 2. Body Style Standard Port, two piece 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball
and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation 4. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal 5. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum
6. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum 7. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum 8. Saturated Steam Rating 150 psig Minimum 9. Actuator Lever handle 10. Acceptable makes:
Apollo 70LF-140; Apollo 70-240; Nibco T-580-70-66, Nibco S-580-70-66; Watts B6000-SS, Watt B6001-SS. B. For high pressure steam service (16 to 125 psig) ball valves shall be: 1. Body
ASTM A216 WCB Carbon or ASTM A351 CF8M 316 Stainless Steel 2. Body Style Standard Port; three piece; 4-bolt clamp; butt or socket weld connection 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball
and Stem, with stem extension, to raise handle out of insulation Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-3 4. Seat High Temperature
RTFE, double seal 5. Seat Working P/T Rating 100 psig @ 450°F Minimum 6. Body Working P/T Rating 750 psig @ 100°F Minimum 7. WOG Rating 400 psig Minimum 8. Steam Rating 100 psig @ 450°F
Minimum 9. Actuator Lever Handle 10. Use carbon steel bodies when connecting to carbon steel piping systems, which are generally located within the building perimeter. Use stainless
steel bodies when connecting to stainless steel piping systems, which are generally located outside the building perimeter. 11. Acceptable makes: Jamesbury Series 4000; SVF Flow
Controls Series N8; JFlow Control Series 4600. 2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. General: 1. All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally deadendable to the
full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a
blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching
the seat ring to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being
acceptable. 2. Packing shall be able to be tightened without removing the insulation. 3. External disc position indicators shall be provided. 4. Valves must be fully factory assembled,
set and tested. 5. Gear operators on steam valves shall be spaced 4" (four inches) above packing assembly. 6. Install all steam valves with the stem at least 30° off vertical to protect
the bottom bearing from debris. 7. On all butterfly valve actuators located greater than 5' (five feet) above the floor, install chainwheels to 5' (five feet) above the floor when the
design engineer determines valve service is critical. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-4 8. Handwheel gear operators
shall be provided on all butterfly valves for low and high pressure steam and condensate service. This is to allow for slow opening, which minimizes the hydraulic, thermal, flow shock
and differential shock stresses on the system due to water hammer. The handwheel gear operator is slow acting. Proper warm-up procedures shall be followed to prevent water hammer.
B. Standard Butterfly Valves: For all water services and all other normal non-corrosive services, butterfly valves shall be single offset and have the following requirements: 1.
Body Ductile Iron or Cast Iron 2. Body Style Fully lugged 3. Trim 316 or 17-4 pH Stainless Steel 4. Disc Stainless Steel 5. Seat Resilient Seat, fully bi-directional dead-endable,
EPDM 6. Seat Working P/T Rating 150 psig @ 250°F Minimum 7. Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 8. Actuator: 4" and above………..Handwheel Gear Operator Under 4"………………..Locking Lever
Handle 9. Acceptable makes: Keystone Series 60; Nibco LD-3022; Watts BF-03. C. High performance for the chilled water building entrance, butterfly valves shall be double offset, and
have the following requirements: 1. Body Ductile Iron or Carbon Steel 2. Body Style Tapped Lug (full flange) 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel 4. Disc: 316 Stainless Steel 5. Seat PTFE
6. Seat Working P/T Rating 100 psig @ 375°F Minimum 7. Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 8. Actuator: Under 4" – Locking Lever Handle 4" and Above – Handwheel Gear Operator Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-5 9. Acceptable Models : Keystone: K-LOK F362, Metso Jamesbury: 815L, Tri-Seal Contromatics:
QF-1151. D. For low pressure steam and condensate (15 psig Maximum), butterfly valve shall be double offset and have the following requirements: 1. Body ASTM A216 WCB Carbon Steel
2. Body Style Tapped Lug (full flange) 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Double Offset Stem 4. Disc 316 Stainless Steel 5. Seat RPTFE, fully bi-directional dead-endable 6. Seat Working P/T
Rating 100 psig @ 450°F Minimum 7. Body Working P/T Rating ASNI 150 8. Actuator Handwheel Gear Operator 9. Acceptable Makes: Valve type V-6: Keystone K-LOK F362; Jamesbury 815L; Tri-Seal
Contromatics QF-1151. E. High performance for high pressure steam and condensate (16 to 125 psig), butterfly valves shall be triple offset, and have the following requirements: 1. Body
ASTM A216, WCB Carbon Steel 2. Body Style Double Flanged, ISO 5272 Short Pattern 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel 4. Disc: 316 Stainless Steel, ASTM A351 CF8M 5. Seal: Stainless Steel
6. Shaft Packing: Graphite 7. Seat Working P/T Rating 100 psig @ 450°F Minimum 8. Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 9. Actuator: Handwheel Gear Operator Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VALVES 230523-6 10. Acceptable Models: Adams: MAK, Miller: Quadax, Pentair Vannessa: Series 30,000, Weir: Tricentric,
Zwick Tri-Con: Model I1 2.3 GAUGE VALVES A. Provide ball valves for shut-off on all pressure gauges at the gauge and separate 1/2" (one half inch) ball valves for the various taps
to the gauge on a manifold gauge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Two inches (2") and under: 45" swing check, screwed end. B. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and over: Non-slam type globe style
lift check, nonslam type tilting disc or wafer body non-slam type lift check. Double disc or bi-folding disc type valves are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.
General: 1. Provide valves of type called for and where required to service equipment. 2. Provide at major building and systems sections. 3. Provide chain wheels, guides, and chain
loops for valves, where called for or in Mechanical Rooms where valves are mounted higher than 8’-0” AFF. 4. Isolating valves for individual fan convectors, room units, terminal units,
or other similar apparatus may be inside cabinet or at connection to branch mains where accessible. 5. Locate valves with handles at horizontal position when 5 feet or more above the
floor, for greater visibility. Otherwise, locate valves with handles at or above horizontal position. Swing check valves in upright position only. 6. Butterfly valves may be used for
water service over 2-1/2 in. unless otherwise noted. 7. Ball valves may be used for water service through 3 in., unless otherwise noted. Ball valves are acceptable in 2-1/2-inch and
3-inch copper only. 8. Provide hose threaded valves at low points, strainers, equipment, and as called for. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid ROOF CURBS 230530-1 SECTION 230530 ROOF CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete
installation of roof curbs as shown in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 230550 - Wind Restraint for HVAC Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Typical detail
and schedule for equipment. Details shall include cross-sectional view illustrating clearly the type of curb being submitted, i.e. double wall insulated, with or without cant. PART
2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF CURBS AND PIPE/DUCT/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements of this section, provide Roof Products and Systems Corp. (RPS)
or comparable product by one of the following: 1. RPI (Roof Products Inc.) 2. ThyCurb 3. Greenheck B. Configuration: Coordinate curb type with roof deck construction and insulation
thickness. 1. Self-flashing without cant strip, with mounting flange (RPS Series 2A). 2. Built-in cant and mounting flange (RPS Series 3A). 3. Built-in raised cant and mounting flange
(RPS Series 4A). C. Provide wind restraint as called for in Item 1.2 above. 2.2 FAN CURBS/DUCT CURBS A. Double wall, 1-1/2 in. minimum thickness, fully insulated in the interior cavity
with rigid insulation. Curb constructed of galvanized steel, 1-1/2 in. 3# density insulation with continuous welded corner seams and painted at all welds. 20 gauge up to 36 in., 18
gauge 38 to 72 in., 16 gauge over 72 in. in any dimension. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ROOF CURBS 230530-2 B. Intake penthouse
fan curbs shall be 24 in. high minimum; all other fan curbs shall be 18 in. high or as otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Provide curb with adhesive backed closed cell foam gasket
on the top edge to make airtight seal between curb and ventilator, fan, or air handling unit. Gasketing for kitchen exhaust fan curbs shall be woven ceramic gasket tape rated for the
operating temperature. D. Options: 1. Insulated curb extension with damper tray to allow access door for damper maintenance; access door shall be 10 in. high. 2. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture
curb for roof slope(s) E. Basis of Design: RPS - RC Roof Curbs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Height as recommended by equipment manufacturer, not less than described in this specification.
This Contractor shall be responsible for exact size, length, and location and shall set and secure each curb to the roof. Shim and level curb as required. Provide curb and supports
for all roof-mounted equipment. All roof penetrations shall be made through an appropriate curb. All roof mounted equipment including fans, air handling units, etc, shall be set on
an equipment support unless otherwise noted. Refer to Contract Drawings for details on plenums extending from curbs. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-1 SECTION 230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install vibration control devices, materials, and related items. Perform all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation
systems in proper working order. 1.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by one of the following approved manufacturers: 1. Mason Industries Inc.
(Hauppauge, NY) M.I. 2. Kinetics Noise Control Inc. (Dublin, OH) K.N.C. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls Group. (Butler, NJ) VMC Group 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. (Long Island City,
NY) V.E.C. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate the size, location and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions
with size of housekeeping pads. B. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes, with the proper loading to meet the specified deflection requirements. C. Supply and install
any incidental materials such as mounting brackets, attachments and other accessories as may be needed to meet the requirements stated herein even if not expressly specified or shown
on the Drawings, without claim for additional payment. D. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specification. E. Should
any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration when properly installed on the specified isolators, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-balancing, realignment, or other
remedial work required to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. F. Upon completion of work,
the Architect or the Architect's Representative shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments
as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to related sections elsewhere for procedural instruction for submittals.
B. Before ordering any products, submit shop drawings of the items listed below. The shop drawings must be completed when submitted and must be presented in a clear, easily understood
form. Incomplete or unclear presentation of shop drawings may be reason for rejection of the submittal. C. A complete description of products to be supplied, including product data,
dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. D. Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting equipment, including: 1. The equipment identification mark.
2. The isolator type. 3. The actual load. 4. The static deflection expected under the actual load. 5. The specified minimum static deflection. 6. Steel rails, steel base frames, and
concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method, and location of equipment attachment bolts. 7. Special details necessary to
convey complete understanding of the work to be performed. E. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned
for installation at the job if requested. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES A. General:
1. All springs installed out-of-doors shall be zinc electroplated or powder-coated after fabrication. Hardware and other metal parts shall be cadmium-plated or galvanized. Galvanizing
shall meet ASTM Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard No. 14. 2. All isolators installed out-of-doors shall have base plates with bolt holes for fastening the isolators
to the support members. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-3 3. Isolator types are
scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to
operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories and seismic restraint
features must not degrade the isolation performance of the isolators. 4. Static deflection of isolators shall be as provided in the EXECUTION section and as shown on the Drawings.
All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflections are not acceptable
and will be disapproved. B. Type FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene): 1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing. Spring diameter shall be not less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so
designed that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1 (one). All mounts shall have leveling bolts. The spring element in the isolator shall be set
in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each
isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the
manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is used, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the base plate. If
the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be
used between the friction pad and the NO isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, beating plate and friction pad
shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 2. Type FSN isolators shall be one of the following products with the appropriate neoprene
pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLF M.I. b. Type FDS K.N.C. c. Series A VMC Group C. Type FSNTL (Floor Spring and Neoprene Travel Limited): 1. Spring
isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compression height of the spring at the rated load. Spring shall have a minimum
additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ration of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately one (1).
All mounts shall have leveling bolts. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-4 All
mounts shall have vertical travel limit stops to control extension when weight is removed. The travel limit stops shall be capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment.
A minimum clearance of 1/4 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the limit stops and the spring to avoid interference with the spring action. 2. The spring element
in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene.
Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad
uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is use, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in
the base plate. 3. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum
bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NP isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, bearing
plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 4. Type FSNTL isolators shall be one of the following products, with
the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLR M.I. b. Type FLS K.N.C. c. Series AWR VMC Group D. Type FN (Floor Neoprene): 1. Neoprene
isolators shall be neoprene-in-shear type with steel reinforced top and base. All metal surfaces shall be covered with neoprene. The top and bottom surfaces shall be ribbed. Bolt
holes shall be provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. The mounts shall include leveling bolts that may be rigidly connected to the equipment. 2. Type FN isolators
shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type ND M.I. b. Type RD K.N.C. c. Series RD VMC Group Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-5 E. Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a free standing and laterally
stable steel spring and a neoprene element in series, contained within a steel housing. Spring diameters and hanger housing lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger
rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the housing. Alternatively, other provisions shall be made to allow for a 30° arc of movement of the bottom hanger rod without contacting
the isolator housing. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Spring elements shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid
equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene element shall be designed to have a 0.3 in. minimum static deflection. The deflection of both the spring element and the neoprene
element shall be included in determining the overall deflection of Type HSN isolators. 2. Type HSN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type 30N M.I.
b. Type SRH or SFH K.N.C. c. Type RSH or RFH VMC Group F. Type HN (Hanger Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a neoprene-in-shear element contained within a steel
housing. A neoprene neck brushing shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. The diameter of the
hole in the housing shall be sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hanger housing. 2. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following
products or approved equal: a. Type HD M.I. b. Type RH or FH K.N.C. c. Type RHD or RFD VMC Group 2.2 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Type BSF (Base-Steel Frame): 1. Steel base frames shall consist
of structural steel section sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner which will negatively affect the operation
of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS 230548-6 Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements,
or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. The depth of steel frame shall be at least 1/10
the longest dimension of the base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. 2. Frame bases shall include side mounting
brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 3.
Type BSF bases shall be supplied by the isolator manufacturer and shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type WFSL M.I. b. Type SFB or SRB K.N.C. c. Series WFB
VMC Group B. Type BIB (Base-Inertia Base): 1. Concrete inertia bases shall be formed of stone-aggregate concrete (150 lb./cu. ft.) and appropriate steel reinforcing cast between welded
or bolted perimeter structural steel channels. Inertia bases shall be built to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, deflect, or crack in any manner that would negatively
affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Inertia bases shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated
pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to
the building structure. Inertia base depth shall be at least 1/12 the longest dimension of the inertia base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide
stability for supported equipment. Inertia bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the
base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 2. The steel frame and reinforcement shall be supplied by the vibration isolator manufacturer. 3. Frame and
reinforcement for Type BIB bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type KSL M.I. b. Type CIB-L or CIB-H K.N.C. c. Series WPF VMC Group Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-7 2.3 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals
shall be field-fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that is 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall be used to
provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend 1 in. beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the penetrating
element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4 in. of the ends of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4 in. space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant
to form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without contacting the sleeve. Refer to details on Drawings. 2.4 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS
A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolation mounting manufacturer, or be custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate
neoprene isolation elements similar to Type FN that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of ducts or pipe. B. Resilient lateral supports shall be one of the
following products or approved equal: 1. Type ADA M.I. 2. Type RGN K.N.C. 3. Type MDPA VMC Group 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections shall be heavy glass fabric,
double neoprene coated, approximately 30 oz. per sq. yd. The clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of 3 in. and the connection shall have a minimum of 1.5 in. of slack
material. Materials for flex connection shall be fire retardant, water and milder resistant, and comply with UL standard 214. B. Flexible duct connections shall be one of the following
products or approved equal: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventglass". 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s)
shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band
(material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential
TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have
a minimum 4:1 safety factor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-8 C. Each braided
stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three
(3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel
flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver
or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. 2.7 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Thrust restraints shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad. The unit shall be designed
to have the same deflection due to thrust-generated loads as specified for the isolators supporting the equipment. The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and be
designed so it can be pre-compressed at the factory to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement during starting or stopping of the equipment. Allowable movement shall be field-adjustable.
The assembly shall be furnished complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both equipment and the adjacent fixed structural anchor. The thrust restraints shall be installed
on the discharge of the fan so that the restraint rods are in tension. Assemblies that place the rods in compression are not acceptable. The holes in the spring restraint brackets
through which the restraint rods pass must be oversized to prevent contact between the brackets and rods. B. Thrust restraints shall be one of the following products or an approved
equal: 1. Type WB M.I. 2. Type HSR K.N.C. 3. Type HTR VMC Group 2.8 GROMMETS A. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate,
and shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. B. Grommets shall either be custom made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or
be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type Isogrommets MBIS, Inc. (Bedford Heights, OH) 2. Type WB Barry Controls (Brighton, MA) 3. Type HG Mason Industries Inc.,
(Hauppauge, NY) Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-9 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Sealants
for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or one of the non-setting sealants indicated below: 1. Acoustical sealant D.A.P. 2. BR-96 Pecora 3. Acoustical
sealant Tremco 4. Acoustical sealant U.S.G. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Refer to the PRODUCTS section of this specification for vibration isolation devices identified
on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. The static deflection of all isolators specified herein are the minimum acceptable deflections for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected
solely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Major Equipment: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified on Drawings, all floor-mounted major equipment
shall be set on concrete housekeeping pads. 2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major equipment items shall be as specified hereunder. 3. Flexible
duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on the Drawings. 4. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment
shall be flexible, as called for in the electrical portion of the specification. 5. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all suspended fans and on all floor-mounted fans developing
4 in. or more of static pressure, unless the horizontal component of the thrust force can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the equipment weight. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-10 C. Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule: TYPE VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPE MINIMUM
STATIC DEFLECTION (In.) EQUIPMENT BASE Inline Pumps HSN .75 ---- Air Handling Units FSN 2.5 BSF NOTE 1: Equipment base and vibration isolators can be deleted where pumps are provided
on slabs on grade and if pumps are placed on concrete inertia slab isolated from surrounding floor slab. D. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment: 1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical
equipment such as converters, pressure reducing stations, dryers, strainers, storage tanks, condensate receiver tanks and expansion tanks which are connected to isolated piping systems
shall be vibration-isolated from the building structure by Type NP or Type HN isolators (selected for .01 in. static deflection) unless their position in the piping system requires
a higher degree of isolation as called for under "Pipe Isolation". E. Pipes: 1. All chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam main and engine exhaust piping shall be isolated
from the building structure within the following limits: a. Within mechanical rooms. b. Within 50 ft. total pipe length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (chillers, pumps, air
handling units, pressure reducing stations, etc.). c. Everywhere for piping that is 5 in. or larger. d. Piping shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolators,
resilient lateral supports, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals. e. Isolators for the first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve one half the specified
static deflection of the isolators supporting the connected equipment. When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than 1/2 in., Type FSN or Type HSN isolators
shall be used. When the required static deflection is less than or equal to 1/2 in., Type FN or Type HN isolators shall be used. All other pipe support isolators within the specified
limits shall be either Type FN or Type HN achieving at least 1/4 in. static deflection. f. Where lateral support of pipes is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished
by use of resilient lateral supports. g. Pipes penetrating the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-11 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT A.
General: 1. Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation. 2. Installation of vibration isolation
equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Isolators: 1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the supported
equipment. 2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical
constraints. 3. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking. Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system
and the location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base
is specifically called for herein. 4. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and the isolator base plates shall rest entirely on the pad.
5. Hanger rods for vibration-isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists, not the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide suitable intermediate support members
as necessary. 6. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that
the hanger housing may rotate a full 360° about the rod axis without contacting any object. 7. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, when allowed by Section 232010
that is isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated
and un-isolated pipes on the same trapeze. 8. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment. 9. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment
shall not come in rigid contact with the building construction or rigidly supported equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION
ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-12 10. The installed and operating heights of equipment vibration-isolated with Type FSNTL isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be
out of contact during normal operation. Adjust isolators to provide 1/4 in. clearance between the limit stop brackets and the isolator top plate, and between the travel limit nuts
and travel limit brackets. 11. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes. C. Bases:
1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitable rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the equipment
manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment
manufacturer's requirements, and is not specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional
expense. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1 in. between steel rails, steel frame base or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment.
The isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor
to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system. D. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Sheet metal
ducts and plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible connection, so that the clear
length is approximately equal all the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact
between connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut. E. Flexible Pipe Connections: 1. Install flexible pipe connections in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. F. Thrust Restraints: 1. Thrust restraints shall be attached on each side of the fan at the vertical centerline of thrust. The two rods of the thrust restraints shall
be parallel to the thrust force. This may require custom brackets or standoffs. The body of the thrust restraint shall not come in contact with the connected elements. Thrust restraints
shall be adjusted to constrain equipment movement to the specified limit. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VIBRATION ISOLATION OF
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230548-13 G. Grommets: 1. Where grommets are required at hold down bolts of isolators, bolt holes shall be properly sized to allow for grommets. The hold down bolt
assembly shall include washers to distribute load evenly over the grommets. Bolts and washers shall be galvanized. H. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals: 1. Maintain an airtight seal
around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight
on both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 230550-1 SECTION 230550 WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and
brace mechanical and electrical systems, as called for, to resist directional wind forces (lateral, longitudinal and vertical). 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Provide work in
compliance with the following codes and standards: B. 2020 Building Code of New York State (Section 1609 and 1613). C. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State (Section 301, Item 301.15).
1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures with Supplement No. 1 - Standard ASCE/SEI 716. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General:
1. The contractor shall provide Professional Engineer stamped and signed engineering calculations and details of wind restraint systems to meet total design lateral force requirements
for support and restraint of mechanical systems. Engineer shall be licensed to practice in the state in which the project is located. 2. The wind restraint engineering calculations
and details shall provide the quantity of attachments and size/type of attachments for the mounting of an equipment curb or support rail to the building structure, and for attachment
of the equipment or system to the equipment curb or support rail. It is not the intent for manufactured equipment curbs or support rails to be certified by their respective manufacturers,
nor is it the intent for them to be certified by the Professional Engineer who is providing the wind restraint calculations and connection methodology. 3. Systems requiring wind restraint
including, but not limited to: a. Intake penthouse. b. Roof curbs associated with any of the equipment listed above. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit wind force level (Fp) calculations from
applicable building code. Submit preapproved restraint selections, installation details, and plans indicating locations of restraints. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 230550-2 B. Calculations, plans, restraint selection, and installation details shall be stamped and signed by a
professionally licensed engineer experienced in wind restraint design. C. Submit manufacturer's product data. D. For each piece of equipment that requires wind restraint as outlined
in this section, include the following: 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify the center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchoring provisions.
2. Anchorage: Provide detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the calculations are based and their installation requirements. Identify anchor bolts, studs and
other mounting devices. Provide information on the size, type and spacing of mounting brackets, holes and other provisions. E. The Contractor shall provide photographs of the installed
roof mounted equipment, showing the fully installed wind restraint anchoring, prior to the roofing material installation, as a formal submittal for verification that the work has been
completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CODE INFORMATION A. This project is subject to the wind bracing requirements of the codes listed above. The following criteria are applicable to this
project: 1. Basic Design Wind Speed (V): 117 mph (ultimate). 2. Risk Category: III 3. Exposure Category: C 4. Height and Exposure Adjustment Coefficient: 116'-0", N/A. 2.2 WIND
BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, wind loads, and capacity of materials utilized for the connection of
the equipment or system to the structure. 2. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth. 3. All wind restraint devices shall be designed to accept without
failure the forces calculated per the applicable building code and as summarized in Section 2.1. B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to wind forces. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 230550-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wind Restraint of Piping:
1. All restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's restraint guidelines and all certified data. 2. Installation of restraints shall not cause any
change in position of equipment or piping, resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40 ft. maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where
lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80 ft. maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit
anchorage loads. 5. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint
is installed within 24 in. of the elbow or tee or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances. 6. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members
before applying restraints. 7. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 8. Provide reinforced clevis bolts when required. 9. Piping crossing building seismic or expansion
joints, passing from building to building, or supported from different portions of the building shall be installed to allow differential support displacements without damaging the pipe,
equipment connections, or support connections. Pipe offsets, loops, anchors, and guides shall be installed as required to provide specified motion capability and limit motion of adjacent
piping. 10. Do not brace a system to two independent structures such as roof and wall. B. Wind Restraint of Ductwork and Equipment: 1. All restraint systems shall be installed in strict
accordance with the wind restraint design submittal. 2. The interaction between mechanical and electrical equipment and the supporting structures shall be designed into the restraint
systems. 3. Installation of restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 230550-4 4. Exhaust fans with hinge kits shall have wind restraint fasteners installed on the hinged side, same
as the three (3) non-hinged sides. 5. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified.
6. Do not install any equipment or duct that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. 7. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect's/Engineer's
attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific equipment selection. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553-1 SECTION 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor,
materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATION A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1
for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification
material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11in. (Minimum) indicating valve number, location, and valve function. Submit schedule
of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc.; Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.; Industrial Safety Supply Co.,
Inc.; Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where this is
more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior
of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2.
C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with
ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
230553-2 B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: Pipe Function Identification Heating Water Supply HWS Heating Water Return HWR Chilled Water Supply
CWS Chilled Water Return CWR Glycol Supply GS Glycol Return GR 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high numerals. Identify
between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. Lettering to be stamped and in-filled black. Seton, or equal. a. Valve-tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link
or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves tagged as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Hang in Mechanical Room. 2.
Valve chart to include as a minimum, valve #, valve size, valve type, valve service description, valve location. 2.4 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and
Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025 in. minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required
label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72
in. and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel
rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553-3 B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, phenolic (micarta) labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/8 in. thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures
up to 160 F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing
distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds
to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label
and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on
8-1/2-by-11-in. bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification
Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. E. Provide for the following equipment: 1. Air handling
units 2. Pumps 3. Exhaust fans 4. Heat exchangers Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project, except for service valves at terminal equipment. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment listed above. C. Provide
piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, at maximum intervals of 20 feet. For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in
each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-1 SECTION
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting
and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents. B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of, mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements
include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. C. Test,
adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including constant volume and variable volume systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust
air systems; including kitchen exhaust systems. 4. Hydronic systems; including constant flow and variable flow systems. 5. Laboratory Fume Hoods. D. This Section does not include: 1.
Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. Specifications for materials and installation
of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.
4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form listing items required by specifications. Results
shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Strategies and Procedures
Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit testing and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Section 3.1.B, "Preparation", and
consistent with those listed in Part 3 of this specification. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-2
C. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, AABC agency shall provide system readiness checklists as specified in Section 3.1.C, "Preparation",
to be used and filled out by the installing contractors verifying that systems are ready for Testing and Balancing. D. Examination Report: Provide a summary report of the examination
review required in Section 3.1.D to the Engineer, documenting issues that may preclude the proper testing and balancing of the systems. E. Certified report format shall consist of the
following: 1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name.
2. Individual test sheets for air handlers, terminal units, air distribution, exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit
heaters and unit ventilators. 3. Manufacturer's pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated. 4. TAB Report Forms: Use standard
forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System testing, adjusting and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the
design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of air and water distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification
of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns
at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified
design quantities. E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-3 F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review.
This data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters
or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside
air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers. H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. I. Submain: Duct or
pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single
terminal. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing
Bureau (NEBB). 2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified personnel at project for system operation and trouble shooting. TAB contractor shall
change sheaves and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB. D. Instrumentation Type,
Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site
to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balance facilities. B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition.
1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing, adjust balancing devices for full flow;
fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers. 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy
job conditions. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-4 4. All outdoor conditions (Db, Wb, and
a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report. 5. Provide sheaves and belts as required to meet system performance requirements for
all belt-driven fan motors 10 HP and greater. Adjust and align sheaves to obtain proper settings and operation. Verify motors are not overloading. 6. Installing contractor shall replace
balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 7. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing
systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 8. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set prior to final
adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFM's is not acceptable. 9. If duct construction and/or installation prohibits proper traverse readings, provide
coil measurements at main coils and/or fresh air intake traverse with units operating in 100% outside air mode (where applicable). 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Testing
and Balancing agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital and hard copy formats. B. Controls contractor shall provide required BAS
hardware, software, personnel and assistance to Testing and Balancing agency as required to balance the systems. Controls Contractor shall also provide trending report to demonstrate
that systems are complete. C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by Testing and Balancing agency. D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves
and belts as required by Testing and Balancing agency. E. Flag all manual volume dampers with fluorescent or other high-visibility tape. F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test
ports, nameplates and other appurtenances as required by Testing and Balancing agency. G. Installing contractor shall replace or repair insulation as required by Testing and Balancing
agency. H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness for Testing and Balancing to begin. As a minimum verify the following: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with
all terminals installed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-5 b. All volume, smoke and fire
dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. ASD start-up is complete and all
safeties are verified. f. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b.
Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f.
All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started, and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump
inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. ASD start-up is complete and all safeties have been verified. j. System readiness checklists
are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Testing and Balancing. J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows
the Testing and Balancing agency to complete work prior to occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers,
anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, magnehelic gauges, amprobes, voltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-6 B. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six (6) months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine Bid Documents and submittals and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of any questions regarding balancing. 1. Examine the Contract
Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing and Balancing of systems and equipment. 2. Examine
the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. B. Prepare a Testing and Balancing Strategies and Procedures
Plan that includes: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific
identification for all equipment. C. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, for use by contractors in verifying system
readiness for Testing and Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers
are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Permanent electrical power wiring and ASD
start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-7 h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
j. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled
and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100%
open. g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior
to any valves or strainers. i. Permanent electrical power wiring and ASD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is
provided. D. Examine construction and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of outstanding issues related to balancing, as part of "Examination Report" submittal. 1. Examine ceiling
plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. 2. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings
are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and controls are ready for operation. 3. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes,
and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor and functioning. 4. Examine strainers to verify that Mechanical Contractor
has replaced startup screens with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. 5. Examine two-way valves for proper installation and function. 6. Examine three-way valves
for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING,
ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-8 7. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 8. Examine air vents to verify that mechanical contractor
has removed all air from all hydronic systems. 9. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
valves and fittings, weld-olets, and manual volume dampers prior to pressure testing. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for testing and balancing. 3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts,
pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe
holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment
and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fanspeed-control levers,
and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best
locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers,
through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped
with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-9 I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling
unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.4 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum
allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from
the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure
of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other
air-handling and treating equipment. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors
to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower
than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to sheaves sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that
result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-10 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows
within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where
sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for
that zone. 2. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating
factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above
the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum setpoint
airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among
the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air
dampers at minimum, and return-and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and
static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminalunit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated
airflow. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-11 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and
adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct,
balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum
airflow, report the conditions but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside
airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and
adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that the adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final
fan performance data. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and any manufacturer-recommended
testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required coil and heat exchanger gpms with pump design flow rate. B. Verify that hydronic systems are ready for testing and balancing:
1. Check liquid level in expansion tank and verify that tank is set to specified pressure for system fill and expansion. 2. Check that makeup water has adequate pressure to highest
vent. 3. Check that control valves are in their proper positions. 4. Check that air has been purged from the system. 5. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks,
and motor starters. 6. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-12 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position
valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump total dynamic head (TDH) or exchanger
pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves or fittings. b. Measure inlet
pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gauge heights. d. On single
stage centrifugal pumps, verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the
pump has the intended impeller size. e. With all valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures
and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.
2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust flow measuring devices installed at terminals for
each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at all terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 3. Re-measure each terminal after all have been adjusted. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-13 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass
valve to maintain design flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been balanced. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential
pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. E. For systems without pressure-independent valves
or flow measuring devices at the terminals: 1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature
tests after all flows have been verified. F. Verify final system conditions as follows: 1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Re-measure all final pump
operating data, TDH, volts, amps, static profile. 3. Mark all final settings. G. Verify that all memory stops have been set. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust
the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 1. Verify that the differential pressure (DP) sensor is located per the Contract Documents. 2. Determine if there is diversity in the system.
B. For systems with no diversity: 1. Follow procedures outlined for constant-flow hydronic systems. 2. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint.
3. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with ASD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow ASD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump
data under both conditions. 4. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-14 C. For systems with diversity: 1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves,
as approved by the design Engineer. 3. Follow procedures outlined for constant flow hydronic systems. 4. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves
that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance the terminals that were just opened. 5. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 6.
If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with ASD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow ASD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data
under both conditions. 7. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential
pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates
and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Zero to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Minimum
Outside Air: Zero to plus 10 percent. 4. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 5. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or
minus 10 percent. 6. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
230593-15 3.10 FINAL TEST & BALANCE REPORT A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations
found during the Testing and Balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements
and test results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the technicians or Test and Balance Engineers. B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include
the following information as a minimum: 1. Title Page: a. AABC or NEBB Certified Company Name. b. Company Address. c. Company Telephone Number. d. Project Identification Number. e.
Location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project Number. j. Date of Report. k. Certification Statement. l. Name, Signature, and Certification Number.
2. Table of Contents. 3. National Performance Guaranty. 4. Report Summary: a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design tolerances, with information that may
be considered in resolving deficiencies. 5. Instrument List: a. Type b. Manufacturer Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING
AND BALANCING 230593-16 c. Model d. Serial Number e. Calibration Date C. Required air side data - Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Motors: a. RPM b. BHP c. Full load amps
d. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts e. Shaft diameter f. Complete nameplate data 2. Fans: a. Cfm b. RPM c. Suction static pressure d. Discharge static pressure e. Sheave sizes,
number and size of belts, key sizes, shaft, diameter f. Complete nameplate data g. Sketch of system's inlet and outlet connections h. Location of test port 3. Duct: Traverse Zones:
a. Cfm b. Static Pressure 4. AHU: a. Minimum outdoor air Cfm b. Total discharge and return Cfm c. Static profile thru unit d. Complete nameplate data 5. Coil: a. Entering air temperature
(DB/WB) b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB) c. Static differential d. Face velocity and area e. Cfm f. Complete nameplate data 6. VAV Boxes and Lab Air Valves: a. Minimum Cfm b. Maximum
Cfm Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593-17 7. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: a. Cfm b. Set, adjust
and record air flow pattern 8. Filter Banks: a. Nameplate data b. Static pressure drop D. Required Fluid Data: Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Heat Transfer Devices: Including,
but not limited to air handlers, convectors, fin tube radiation sections, heat exchangers. a. GPM (coil and bypass) b. Entering water temperature c. Leaving water temperature d. Water
pressure drop e. Complete nameplate data 2. Pumps: a. Check rotation b. GPM c. Pump off pressures (suction and discharge) d. Running suction pressure e. Running discharge pressure
f. Running load amps g. RPM - motor h. Complete nameplate motor and pump i. Marked up pump curve illustrating final operating conditions 3. Heat Exchanger: a. GPM b. Entering water
temperature and pressure c. Leaving water temperature and pressure d. Complete nameplate data E. The final test and balance report shall be provided as a formal project submittal for
review by the Engineer of Record. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid INSULATION 230710-1 SECTION 230710 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete
installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data, product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended
thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 232010 - Piping Systems and Accessories. B. Section 233100 - Sheet Metal
and Ductwork Accessories Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing
for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes, and equipment,
shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited.
4. Comply with 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. All adhesives, coatings and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply
with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 6. Provide materials which
are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-2 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package
R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed.
(Board, Blanket and Liner) B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armacell, K-Flex. C. Adhesives, Coatings, Mastics, Sealants: Childers, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A.
Product Insulation meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature installed value. Maximum
Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC
Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system
consists of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F
mean temperature. Closures to be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers:
Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FLEXIBLE TYPE INSULATION A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
Closed-cell, foam material. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.25 BTU-in/ft2 hr. °F
at 75°F mean temperature. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. B. Insulation shall have a flame-spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index
of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN/ULC S-102, "Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 2.5 CALCIUM SILICATE A. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block
sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-3 2.6 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct insulation shall have a thermal resistance (R) value identification mark by the manufacturer
applied no less than every 10 feet, as per Energy Code requirements. B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: 1. Knauf Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard
compliant. 2. 'K' Value of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature (Faced): 250°F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. Provide ASJ
jacket for ductwork to be painted. 4. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate
pressuresensitive aluminum foil tape. 5. Density: Minimum 1.0 PCF. C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB. 2. 'K' Value of 0.23 at
75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450º F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. Provide
ASJ jacket for ductwork to be painted. 4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12 in. on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side
of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape. a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 3
lb./ft.3. b. Exposed Areas: 6 lb./ft.3 minimum density for duct less than 8 ft. - 0 in. above finished floor. 2.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: 1. Knauf Insulation
Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid. 2. Concealed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 3 PCF. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
INSULATION 230710-4 b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F. c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I,
or FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 3. Exposed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 6 PCF b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature. B. Foam Board. Polyisocyanurate core.
Foil faced on one side and opposite side faced with white acrylic coated embossed aluminum, 4-mil. equal to "Dow Chemical Therma Heavy Duty". 2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1.
PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.9 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat insulation on below ambient services
temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-24, or approved equal. B. Lagging Adhesives:
Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. C. Weather Barrier
Mastic: Used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal. D. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low
density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. E. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive: Used to bond elastomeric
insulation. Foster 85-75; Childers CP-82, or approved equal. F. Elastomeric Insulation Coating: Water based coating used to protect outside of elastomeric insulation. Foster 30-65,
or approved equal. G. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76,
or approved equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-5 H. Metal Jacketing Sealant: Used as a sealant on metal
jacketing seams to prevent water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. I. Reinforcing Mesh: Used in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce. Foster Mast
A Fab; Childers Chil Glass #10, or approved equal. 2.10 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials
shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes,
and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends
and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling or floor openings,
or sleeves unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Section 230500 "Basic Requirements" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after
piping, ductwork and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat"
must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections
that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied
to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor
retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh
to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, air separators,
drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. F. Items such as boiler manholes, handholds, clean-outs, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may
be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items.
Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-6 G. Provide protective
insulation as required to prevent personnel injury: Piping from zero to seven feet above all floors and access platforms including hot (above 140°F) piping and any other related hot
surface. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall
not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments
installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. Use cork insulation tape equal to Rubatex #Q-201 for piping inside unit ventilators or fan coil valve compartment. B. Insulation
installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section
232010 "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required
between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation
to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per
manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured
with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed.
2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 3. Vapor Barrier:
For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges,
and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. When using polyisocyanurate or cellular glass on below ambient piping/duct, seal all insulation joints with insulation joint sealant.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-7 F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Chilled Water: Premolded fitting insulation
of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Hot Services and Domestic Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the
adjacent pipe insulation. 3. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal
with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or ells may be continuous. 3. Insulation shall be adhered to 100% of the pipe. H. Apply PVC jacket
where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. I. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings,
and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping
may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. J. All exposed piping less than 8'-0" above finished floor in occupied spaces shall be insulated with polyisocyanurate insulation
(for cold services) or calcium silicate (for hot services) and rigid fiberglass fittings. All exposed piping shall have a continuous 30 mil thick white PVC jacketing. 3.3 DUCTWORK
INSULATION A. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors, thermometers,
instruments, and access doors. Apply as follows: 1. Rigid Board Type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two
rows per side. Secure insulation with washer clips. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Staple all joints. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape
and 4 in. glass-fab applied with specified vapor barrier coating. Apply tape over corner beading where exposed. 2. Flexible Blanket Type: Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value
using a maximum compression of 25%. Installed R-value shall be per ECC of NYS. Firmly butt all joints. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of
2 in. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-8 Where vapor retarder performance is required, all penetrations and
damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressure-sensitive foil tape, and coated with vapor barrier coating prior to system startup. Pressure-sensitive foil tapes shall be a minimum
3 in. wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723.
Duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 18 in. wide using mechanical fasteners on 18 in. centers. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable.
Care should be exercised to avoid over-compression of the insulation during installation. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Apply insulation with joints firmly butted as close as possible
to the equipment surface. Insulation shall be secured as required with adhesive, mechanical fasteners or banding material. Fasteners shall be located a maximum of 3 in. from each
edge and spaced no greater than 12 in. on center. B. Vapor retarders shall overlap a minimum of 2 in. at all seams and be sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive tape and vapor barrier
coating. All penetrations, facing damage, and mechanical fasteners shall be covered with a minimum 2 in. overlap of tape and vapor barrier coating. C. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation:
Secure fiberglass with pins, studs, or clips. Field apply 8 oz. knit fiberglass cloth, cemented and applied over standard jacket. Properly cut at fittings to avoid wrinkles and coat
with white lagging adhesive/coating. Leave ready for painting. D. For equipment insulation exposed in mechanical rooms or subject to mechanical abuse, finish with minimum 0.020 in.
thick PVC Jacketing or metal. All other insulation shall be finished as appropriate for the location and service or as specified on the drawings. 3.5 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing
insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Insulate existing piping, ductwork, and equipment as called for. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-9 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Hot water and glycol/hot water (200°F and lower) Glass fiber
1-1/2 in. and Larger: 2 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1-1/2 in. Cover with 30mil PVC jacketing applied per manufacturer's recommendations, where noted on the drawings. Chilled water,
glycol/chilled water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and Larger: 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1 in. Concealed AC unit condensate drains Glass fiber or flexible elastomeric All Sizes:
1 in. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-10 EXHIBIT "II" - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL
THICKNESS REMARKS HVAC Supply Within mechanical rooms or exposed at 8 feet or less above finished floor: Rigid fiberglass Exposed in occupied spaces: Rigid fiberglass Concealed:
Flexible fiberglass ……………..……..1-1/2 in. ……………..……..1-1/2 in. ……………..………….2 in Min. installed R value of 6 Min. installed R value of 6 Min. installed R value of 6 Supply
ducts, exposed within the conditioned space served ………………. …NOT INSULATED… Does not include the associated supply ductwork within the Mechanical Room or supply duct to the conditioned
space. Return and exhaust ducts within heated building envelope ………………. …NOT INSULATED… …………… Outside air ducts and plenums, connections and mixing boxes Rigid fiberglass ………………….…….
2 in. Min. installed R value of 8 Provide neat fit at intake plenum Exhaust, relief or vent ducts and plenums Exposed: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass ………………...………2
in. Min. installed R value of 8 Insulate 15 ft. from exterior opening and plenums Insulate from heat recovery coil to exterior opening. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid INSULATION 230710-11 EXHIBIT "III" - EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Air removal assemblies and
fabric filter assemblies --------------------- SAME AS WATER PIPING Heating system expansion tanks and chemical feed tanks --------------------- NOT INSULATED --------------- Cooling
system expansion tanks and chemical feed tanks ------------------- SAME AS WATER PIPING --------------- Chilled water pumps and cold heat exchangers. Flexible sheets of Elastomeric
foam ………………….…. 1 in. Arrange for easy removal. Coat with white finish. Filter assembly housings and sound attenuators when factory un-insulated Rigid fiberglass Same as associated
ductwork END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION
CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-1 SECTION 230923 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUILDLINES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The Building Automation Control System (BACS)
is configured as a network with control functions at multiple levels, and with multiple points of operator control and supervision. The BACS includes centralized head-end computers,
the Energy Management and Controls System (EMCS) workstations, data transmission systems, field panels and controllers, necessary interfacing controls, sensors and actuators. The controllers
contain microprocessors and other supporting electronics that perform local control functions and execute application programs without requiring communications with the centralized
head-end computers or workstations. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings.
Provide a complete Direct Digital Control System, to perform the functions described in this Section. Provide wiring and conduit required to connect devices furnished as a part of,
or accessory to, this automatic control system. Control wiring is defined as wiring up to and including 120 volts. Install wiring in accordance with requirements of "Electrical Wiring"
in Section 15A019, and the National Electrical Code. Provide all required devices for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, relays, pushbutton
stations, etc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The complete automatic temperature control system shall be comprised of electronic control devices with a microprocessor based Direct Digital
Control System. All work shall be installed only by skilled mechanics. B. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience in systems of similar
size, type and complexity installed within a 100 mile radius. C. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a local service department (within a 50 mile radius) and have available
a minimum of three factory trained technicians within a 24 hour period. D. All components shall be fully tested and documented to operate as a complete system. E. Supplier must guarantee
that all replacement parts will be carried in stock for a period of 10 years minimum from the data that the system is commissioned. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping and
wiring control diagrams and systems description for each system under control. 2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for component control panels and DDC panels. 3. Submit a valve and
damper scheduled showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Provide apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for all control system components. 4. A complete listing
of input and output points, control loops and/or routines, including time of day functions, and facilities management system functions for each controlled system. This listing shall
include point logical names, identifiers, and alarmable ranges. 5. Provide as part of a separate submittal a hard copy of all graphics showing system components, sensor locations, setpoints
and fixed/variable data. Engineer shall review and approve graphic format prior to final acceptance of system. 1.5 WORK INCIDENTAL TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL TRADE A. Furnish the following
materials: 1. For piping work: a. Control valves in piping. b. Immersion sensing wells in piping systems. c. Valved pressure taps. 2. For sheet metal work: a. All automatic dampers,
assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper and motors. b. Provide access
doors to other means of access through ducts or ceilings and walls for service and adjustment of controllers, valves, and dampers. B. Furnish written details, instructions and supervision
for the above trades to Ensure proper installation size, and location of any equipment furnished for installation by others. C. Electrical trade to provide 120 volt dedicated emergency
power with surge protection to all DDC panels and operator workstations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL
SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-3 D. Provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power and control transformers at all microprocessor based VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve
controllers. As an option, provide control transformers sized to serve multiple VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers. Provide a junction box or boxes
to obtain power, on a per floor basis. See electrical plans for locations. 1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new control system to be free from defects in material and
workmanship, for a period of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperatures within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Humidity devices shall maintain relative
humidity conditions within 3% of span 0-100% RH. B. Provide one year maintenance service of control components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service
shall include software updates and 24-hour, 7-day emergency and seasonal inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient and
defective during this period. C. The Contractor will provide monitoring of the DDC system as soon as the system is operating and then for a minimum of one (1) year (24 hours/day, 7
days/week) after the acceptance date. A monthly report will be sent to the Owner with a description of general system status and any alarms or off-normal conditions. D. The Contractor
will guarantee future availability of continuous, 24-hour, 7-day a week service for the systems through available maintenance contracts. 1.7 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION A. When
the Work has been completed, completely adjust and calibrate the control system. Review the operation of each system input and output, control loops and/or software routings, timing
functions, operator entered constants and facilities management functions and observe that they perform their intended functions. Provide a complete values and points log, printed
every hour, for one week to demonstrate control functions and programming. Provide one point log for summer operation and one winter. Points to be trended shall be selected by the
engineer. When above procedure has been completed and the control system is operating satisfactorily, submit a letter with one copy of completed values and points log to the Owner's
Representative advising them that the control system is 100% complete and operates in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. After review and approval of points log by the Engineer,
the control system trade shall schedule a technician on site for field review of system components, operation and graphics as part of final system appearance. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-4 1.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern
the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012: BACnet®. - A Data Communication Protocol for Building
Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2012. 2. ATA/ANSI
878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. 3. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. . 1.9 PROCEDURES A. For connection of devices and reconfiguration of existing devices on the Cornell University Building
Automation and Control System Network: 1. Contractor making changes to existing devices or installing new devices on the Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network
shall contact the Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Operation at 607255-5777 at least one (1) business day in advance of the anticipated work to initiate a service request
with the Cornell Control Shop. The requestor shall provide the following information: a. Desired time to ,start work and the expected duration b. The IP address of the device to be
installed or configured c. The physical location of the device including facility and room number. d. Cell phone contact information for the installer. 2. Work will be permitted from
7:00 AM — 1:00 PM on business days Monday through Thursday. The one (1) day notice requirement and hours restrictions will be waived if the work is deemed an emergency. Personnel shall
notify EMCS when the work is complete. Personnel are expected to be able to respond on site if contacted by EMCS to correct any anomalies related to the work for a period of up to four
(4) hours after work is complete or if released by the FMCS, whichever is sooner. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION
CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-5 1.10 BACNET/IP CHECKOUT A. Prior to connection to the campus backbone network, it must be demonstrated to Cornell personnel that these criteria have
been met: 1. The LP address, subnet mask and IP gateway address of the device to be connected must be shown to be correct for the network connection about to made. 2. The device's Device
Instance Number (DIN) must be shown to conform to Cornell standards. 3. In the case of devices that route to subordinate BACnet MS/TP or ARCNET networks, the network numbering must
be shown to conform to Cornell numbering standards. 4. The BACnet alarm Recipient List must contain the DIN (or BACnet Address, i.e., (BACnet Network Number, MAC Address)) of both the
appropriate vendor server (ALC) and the EMCS alarm server (currently Jarlsberg, DIN 510). 5. For each device containing network variables, a list of network variables must be provided
showing that each references a valid network-accessible point. 6. For each device containing points that are to issue Unconfirmed COV Notifications, a list of the points and their respective
Change of Value (COY) increments must be provided to prove that the device will not generate COV storms. 7. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) capability must be shown to be
disabled unless explicitly authorized by Cornell, i.e., the device's Broadcast Distribution Table (BDT) must be shown to be empty or non-existent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.
This section defines requirements for the sensors, controllers, computers, and generally the components that make up the system and the means and methods by which they are installed.
B. Software and Hardware Updates - At the end of the first six months, and during the second six months, the Contractor shall update the equipment and any controllers, servers, workstations
and HMI Web servers with the latest modifications and improvements in software, firmware, and hardware that the manufacturer may have incorporated in the furnished equipment. C. Devices
(i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use
of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING
AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-6 D. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g.,
do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 2.2 CONTROLLERS A. Overview 1. The control system shall consist of an inter-network
of controllers. B. Controller Installation Requirements 1. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand-alone fashion, with no communication
to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. 2. All points and
functions that make up a functional system (typically that shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone functionality. Where
control sequences depend on global variables such as OAT, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Design professional shall specifically
indicate point groupings for stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are: a. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly
associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include: 1)
Humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters; 4) Smoke modes. b. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system: pumps, flow
meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include:
1) OAT and humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters. c. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers,
valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any OA that may be necessary for control. 3. Controller software must be
capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this
state it shall issue an alarm. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-7 4. Controllers
must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the
shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate
the stand-alone requirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the
central server after an interruption of power occurs. 5. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to
provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. 6. Resumption of power
after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure
in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. 7. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source
that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors
critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided
with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment.
This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.3 SENSORS A. General 1. The following indicates basic requirements for the I/O devices.
2. All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above
finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors 1. Sensor Resolution - When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless
noted otherwise). 2. Room Temperature Sensor - These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. a. Sensing
element – RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point; Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL
SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-8 b. Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated for zones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment
shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system; c. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure and appropriate cabling where indicated
(this shall include all office spaces). This shall be a momentary contact closure; d. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display; e. Provide sensor with communications jack
and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. f. Temperature sensor shall be mounted at 46" A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a
common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 3. Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and
a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The temperature range as required for resolution is indicated above. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. a. Sensing element
- RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections
and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each, two square feet of coil/duct face area. Temperature range
shall be as required for resolution as indicated above. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 5. Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor a.
These shall include brass or stainless steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy
at calibration point. The temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.3°F; c. Refer to Cornell’s metering specification for temperature sensors that are used for metering.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-9 6. OA Sensors a. These shall consist of
a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. The temperature range shall be as required for the resolution indicated above; b. Sensing element
- RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point; c. On major/critical systems, one shall be provided for each; d. Sensors shall be located on a north
wall of the building and installed with stand-offs. On 100% OA systems and lab buildings, locate sensor in outside air plenum. e. Provide one sensor per mechanical room or building-level
controller. C. Pressure Sensors - The pressure transducers will be either diaphragm or strain gauge types: 1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Applications: Duct static
pressure, air flow VP, filter DP, Fan DP, etc.; b. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments; c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full
scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity; d. Acceptable Manufacturers (Airflow): Air Monitor, Paragon; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Filter DP): Dwyer; f. Acceptable Manufacturers
(General and Static Pressure): Mamac, Setra. 2. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Pressure transmitters shall gauge pressure in the form of a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-10
VDC signal. Sensor shall be installed with a valve manifold and pressure/temperature test ports in lieu of pressure gauges. DP transmitter shall be rated for 150 PSIG static pressure;
b. Span shall be no greater than 2 times the working differential pressure of the system to allow the highest possible resolution; c. Pressure transmitters shall meet the following
performance criteria: 1) External span and zero adjustments; 2) 1% accuracy over the entire span; Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-10 3) Wetted parts: Stainless steel with a silicone fluid-filled diaphragm; 4) Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.5% at maximum
span. d. Install all transmitters with a three-valve manifold for venting, draining, and calibration; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Gauge and Differential Pressure): Mamac, Setra.
D. Flow Sensors 1. General - Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that are required for accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate the location
of the sensors and indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipe upstream and downstream from the sensor. 2. Water: a. Water flow sensors shall meet the requirements necessary
for use for test and balance duty as defined in the DCS specifications; b. Water flow sensors for monitoring only shall follow CHW standards defined in the DCS specifications. 3.
Air Flow (For Laboratory VAV and AHU/Duct Flow Stations): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment. Fan inlet grids shall be used where possible
to measure fan flow; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less; d. Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere; e. All fan inlet style
flow elements shall be provided by the fan vendor and shall not block or affect fan efficiency; f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon; g. Field calibrate to +/- 5% of
field-measured airflow. 4. Air Flow (For Duct Airflow Monitoring): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-11 c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or
less; d. Field calibrate to +/- 5.0% of field-measured airflow. E. Current Switches (CS) 1. For Constant Speed Motors: a. CS shall be provided for status indication of constant
speed motors; b. Switch shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustable trip point; c. CS shall include LED indication of status; d. Acceptable Manufacturer:
Veris Industries (H708/ H908 series). 2. For Variable Speed Motors: a. Typically, status indication that indicates VSD or bypass operation shall be derived from contacts on the VSD.
The VSD must be specified to include this option; b. Otherwise, a current switch shall be provided for status indication. The switch shall be microprocessor based and suitable for
use on a VSD; c. Self-adjusting trip setpoint; d. Factory programmed to detect belt loss undercurrent conditions; e. CS shall include LED indication of status; f. Acceptable Manufacturer:
Hawkeye. F. Combination Temperature/CO2 Sensors/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting
height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg.
F accuracy at calibration point. 4. CO2 sensing equipment: +/- 30 PPM or +/- 3% accuracy at 400 to 1,250 PPM. 5. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy.
Element shall have less than 1% drift per year. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-HC-ALC or design equal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-12 G. Combination Temperature/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at
46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @
15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy. Element
shall have less than 1% drift per year. 5. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-H-ALC or design equal. H. Dewpoint Sensors 1. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room)
or outdoor mounting. Units shall be two-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humidity sensors. Units shall produce linear continuous
output of 4-20 mA for dewpoint temperature (°F). Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria: a. Accuracy: +/- 1.8°F; b. Sensor Operating Range: As
required by the application; c. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year; d. Digital display. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vaisala only. 2.4 CONTROL VALVES A. General 1.
All valves shall be provided and sized by the control trade. 2. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in
concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-13 3. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of
anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves.
General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation
between stroke and flow. Valves with a CV greater than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should only be used if a cost benefit analysis shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning
requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC; b. Electrically piloted valves shall have a pneumatic actuator with positioner; c. Pilot
positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. 4. The BACS output to modulating valves shall be analog. In addition:
a. Terminal reheat valves shall be proportional; b. Fan coils and similar terminal device valves shall be proportional; c. Radiation valves shall be two-position or proportional;
d. Unit heaters shall be two-position or proportional. B. Water 1. General - Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating
water valves shall typically be sized for 50-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9. 2. Chilled
Water Building Mixing Valve (two-way) a. Rotary-segmented ball ported industrial control valve; b. Body: Flanged carbon steel; c. Seat: Composition or stainless/Teflon; d. ANSI
leakage class: IV; e. Trim: 316 Stainless; f. Actuator: Electric Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL
SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-14 g. Typically CV shall be selected to give a 2 PSIG drop @ maximum building flow with the valve at the 90% open CV. Verify the necessary pressure drop with
the Department of Utilities and Energy Management (Utilities). For buildings located at extremities, check with Utilities since requirements may not be typical; h. Valve shall seat
against 40 PSI differential pressure (typical values; check with Cornell Utilities for location-specific values); i. Flow Characteristic Equal percentage or modified equal. j. Valve
shall be normally open. k. Acceptable Make: Fisher, Neles, Valve Solutions. 3. Coil Valves a. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against
120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed"; b. Type: Valves shall all be two-way, V-port valve with characterizing disc, 1/4 turn;
c. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated; d. Stem: Stainless steel; e. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon; f. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; g. Flow characteristics: Equal
percentage; h. Ball and Stem shall be stainless steel; i. Fail positions shall generally be as follows, contact Cornell for special circumstances requiring deviation from these requirements:
1) Terminal hot water radiation: fail last 2) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving animal rooms: normally closed spring return. 3) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving laboratories:
fail last 4) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving offices: fail last 5) Fan Coil Unit cooling coils: normally closed spring return 6) Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally
open spring return Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-15 7) Chilled water coils
in Air Handling Units: normally closed spring return 8) Chilled Beam terminal cooling: normally closed spring return j. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo, Valve Solutions. C. Steam
1. Steam control valves shall be rated for the highest system pressure and temperature and shall not lift when subjected to that pressure with the control system set to “fully closed.”
2. All steam control valves shall be pneumatically or electrically actuated and have a flanged or screw body with a rating of 400°F or higher, as appropriate. Trim shall be rated for
400°F. 3. Use high performance segmented V-ball control valves for all steam control applications. Since Cornell does not require 1/3-2/3 sizing, these valves are extremely cost-effective;
the energy savings associated with the reduced passthrough leakage often pays for the higher cost premium. In addition, these valves require less packing maintenance and use much less
vertical space than comparable valves. Steam valves shall have the following characteristics: a. Leakage Class: ANSI Class IV, minimum b. Flow Characteristic: Equal Percentage c.
Rangeability: 300:1 turndown 4. On steam control valves with a normal differential pressure of 15 PSIG or greater, stainless steel noise reducing trim shall be used. 5. Acceptable
Manufacturers: a. Fisher b. Neles c. Valve Solutions, Inc. 6. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Heat Exchangers/Converters: Normally closed spring return (to protect
for high temperature). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-16 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damper structural rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead. B. Modulating
dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade, dampers shall always
be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to be connected to a single jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will prevent excessive damper area or, more importantly,
length from being connected to a single jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be sufficient for specifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may have
field fabricated jackshaft connections. C. Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection of the damper actuator outside of the air stream. This
will allow for easier access to the actuators for maintenance. D. OA control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals. E. Output to modulating control dampers shall
be analog. F. Design make: Ruskin. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, and Nailor. 2.6 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate
dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. B. For AHU/ duct mounted
dampers: 1. Actuators shall be electronic. 2. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide
stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring
return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo. C. For terminal unit dampers: 1. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for
a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque. Provide stroke indicator. Output to modulating damper actuators may be analog or floating. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-17 2. Fast Acting Electronic Actuators: Provide fast acting electronic actuators for VAV
terminals on fume hood and associated tracking zone dampers. These actuators shall move full stroke in less than one second. Output to modulating damper actuators shall be analog.
3. Venturi Style Air Valves: Provide a factory mounted and calibrated electronic positioner and fast acting (less than one second full stroke) electric actuator with position feedback.
2.7 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral
to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with
wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical
rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports.
7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. B. Power Supplies 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least
33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating
temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Trade shall certify in writing at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its
operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-18 C. Panel Fabrication 1. The Contractor shall size the panel
such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient
wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring,
and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source
and circuit number for each panel. 2.8 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed
in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression or set screw couplings. 2. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway.
3. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 4. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT.
5. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU’s
shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 7. Wire shall be un-spliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 8. Control
wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 9. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded
pair cable. For sensors, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. For communications, the above control wiring requirements and the BACS equipment manufacturer’s
installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 10. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-19 11. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes,
enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities - The BACS Trade wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. All wiring from mechanical and
electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled on the drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS headend. 2. All line and low voltage wiring for the control
of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating
devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 3. The electrical trade shall provide "lock-out stop" control wiring. 4. A separate system of wiring
for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures
by the electrical trade. 5. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective
alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded
from the electrical trade work. 6. ATC Trade shall provide all power supply wiring for all ATC supplied components. PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL A. This section
of the guideline defines the requirements for the documentation of the installed systems. The BACS vendor shall generally provide the documentation covered herein. 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION
MANAGEMENT A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in
this section shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s
specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and
met. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-20 3.3 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. Hard
Copy (General): Paper copies of the indicated deliverables shall be provided as directed by the project manager. Quantities shall be enumerated in the contract documents. At a minimum,
three sets of hard copies shall be maintained; one at the facility, one in the HVACR shop, and one in the project maintenance manual. B. Hard Copy (Control Panels): Each control panel
on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic
protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. In addition, see Operation and Maintenance Materials. C. Electronic Copy: All submittal and as-built documents shall be provided
electronically, to the HVACR shop. Different documents may be in different formats, however each shall be provided in one of the first two formats as well as in the format in which
the document was originally created, if it is different. 1. Microsoft Office format (Word, Excel, etc.) 2. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). 3.4 SUBMISSIONS A. Submittals:
BACS documentation indicated herein shall be submitted for approval of the design professional and the project manager who shall get review and feedback information from the HVACR Shop.
B. As-Built Drawings: As-built documentation as indicated herein shall be maintained and submitted to reflect the final installed condition of the BACS. The as-built documents shall
be kept up to date throughout the warranty period and submitted as final at the end of the warranty period. One set of documents and files shall be provided to be stored locally at
the new facility and two sets shall be provided to be stored centrally. 3.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED A. Control Schematics: Control schematics shall be utilized to graphically indicate
the systems, show the schematic configuration of the systems and location of control devices, define the point names and addresses (as applicable), and define the setpoints for control
elements. Control schematics are required both as part of the contract documents (generated by the design professional), shop drawing submittals, and as-built document submittals.
The following shall be included in the controls schematics at a minimum: 1. Point names. 2. Point addresses (not applicable to the contract documents). 3. Point type. 4. Normal
position of output devices. 5. Device ranges. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-21
6. Initial design intent setpoints modified as refined during construction/ commissioning for as-built submittals. 7. Bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers
(not applicable to the contract documents). 8. Legend of device symbols. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller,
and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and
maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. Provide these as a part of the shop drawings and as-built submittal. C. Valve Schedules: Either with the control
schematic or separately in shop drawing submittal and as-built submittal provide a valve schedule listing the following: 1. Size. 2. CV. 3. Design maximum flow. 4. Pressure drop
at design maximum flow. 5. Position of valve at design condition. 6. Manufacturer. 7. Model/product number. 8. Close off rating. 9. Normal positions. 10. Valve characteristic.
11. Valve turndown. 12. Actuator information. 13. Design controlled circuit pressure differential range (coordinated with the submittals). D. Valves shall be selected such that
they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” Valve sizes shall be picked as close as possible to meet the design pressure drop. The minimum CV shall be no less than 1.9 on all valves
(See Section III, 3.04 “Control Valves” for additional information). E. Control System Architecture Diagram: Provide a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location
of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and
type of each LAN (See also DCS 15956). F. Control Sequence of Operations: 1. All projects shall include detailed sequence of operations. Sequences may be on the control schematics
or in the specifications in the contract documents, but shall be included with the control schematics for the shop drawing and as-built submittal. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-22 Control sequences shall be highly detailed in the design phase and shall
maintain this detail throughout the as-built submittal phase. The following shall be included as a minimum: a. Sequences in all modes of operation (i.e., on, off, occupied, unoccupied,
warm-up, cool-down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.); b. Detailed steps during mode switches; c. Details of operation during and after a power outage. Loss of status associated
with power outages must not be indicated as failures with a subsequent alarm or lock out; d. Specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips;
e. Setpoints, trip points, and ranges. Initially these shall be the designer’s intent, and eventually be the actual setting at time of as-built submittal; f. Smoke control systems;
g. Fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes. 2. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served. Also, group all sequences into functional sections
(i.e., start/stop, static pressure control, economizer, etc.). G. Points List: A detailed point list shall be provided in tabular form either with the control schematics or separately.
Indicate all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses (when known) and point types with applicable range as a minimum.
These shall be provided electronically in either a database format or in a spreadsheet format. H. Alarms and Alarms List: Either as part of the points list or as a separate list,
an alarms list shall be provided. The list shall include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. All analog control loops shall include an adjustable setpoint deviation
alarm based upon error and time. The alarm parameters shall be the state the point is in to cause a particular alarm. An example of a point in this list is as follows: 1. Supply
air temp (AI) +/-5°F from setpoint. I. Floor Plans: Provide a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, etc.,
located and identified. All network components (repeaters, routers, etc.) shall also be identified on the floor plan drawings. All BACS network wiring shall be shown and identified
on the floor plan drawings. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-23 J. Detailed
Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings and as-built submittals shall include detailed wiring diagrams. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder
logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers
identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. These shall be submitted with shop drawing and as-built submittals. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall
be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one drawing. The supply fan components and devices
should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). K. Sample Graphics and Trends: If the project includes web-based graphics and trends for the use of interfacing
to the BACS, the vendor shall submit for approval draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. Design professional and project manager, after consultation with
the HVACR Shop, shall approve the graphics. L. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials
shall include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals)
for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software.
4. All submittals with as-built information (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance
instructions, and spare parts lists). As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate
all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram (as detailed above). Also included (typically
noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc.). PART 4
- BACS INFRASTRUCTURE 4.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Automated Logic Corporation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION
CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-24 4.2 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEMS A. The control panels/enclosures housing the controllers will be located on each floor, to the extent possible, to
share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home-runs to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in the equipment rooms, where practicable,
and in locations such that the ambient conditions are between 50 and 90°F and 10 to 85% relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges
shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged
covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. The HVACR Shop must have quick, direct access
to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels will be located outside of user areas
where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. 4.3 CONTROLLERS
A. The controllers provided pursuant to this guideline shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in
this section. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While this specification contains
several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project
requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed
characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented,
rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers
with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used: 1. Building-level controller. These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network
and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other building-wide functions. They shall,
at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone
network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler or chiller and a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at
a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION
CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-25 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for
control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). 4.4 UPDATING
DATABASES AND GRAPHICS A. Controllers: Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide
a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time
clock/calendar and network time synchronization (except field-level controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software.
6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden
for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such
points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. B. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented,
documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve
the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. All software shall be submitted to the engineer and commissioning agent for review. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-26 C. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining,
the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability
of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow
in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The controls vendor shall provide
control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated
text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. D. Trend Graphs: Web-based
software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. Control vendor shall
configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog
control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. E. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values
in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in
a logical manner for each system. Consult with the Commissioning Team Members and Project Manager for required configuration. F. Web-based Graphic: In the event that a Web server
is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, these screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens. a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the
building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and the device associated with each
temperature-controlled zone (i.e., reheat coils, VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature
sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each
corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen; b. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate
the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic;
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-27 c. If multiple floor plans are necessary
to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans.
Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic
floor plan screens; d. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens. a. Provide graphics for each air handling system. Indicate
OA temperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling
system graphics Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic; b. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled.
Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator
commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate
engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use
of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow,
on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic; c. Provide a graphic for each hydronic
system; d. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up,
maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems.
e. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. f. Link screens to all schedules
and setpoints. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-28 PART 5 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM
OPERATION 5.1 SMOKE DETECTION DEVICES AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Installed Smoke Detection Devices and Smoke Dampers 1. Smoke dampers are installed at each duct/smoke barrier penetration.
2. Every smoke damper has a local duct smoke detector. 3. Every smoke damper has a local remote test station. 4. Every duct smoke detector is addressable and is connected to the building
fire alarm system. 5. The building project area is provided with addressable area smoke detectors. B. Fire Alarm Activation of Smoke Dampers 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: a. Upon activation
of any duct smoke detector, an addressable signal is sent to the building fire alarm system and the smoke damper associated with duct smoke detector is closed. b. Upon receipt of the
addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return fans or the exhaust fan, associated with the duct system that experienced
the detector activation. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct
system on a 30 second delay. C. Non-Fire Alarm System Activation of Smoke Dampers (These activations do not cause for a building fire condition to be annunciated) 1. Safety Device Activation
a. Upon activation of either the low-limit switch (freeze-stat) or the supply duct high static pressure switch, both the supply and return fans are deenergized via hardwiring of the
low limit switch in the fan starter circuits. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive of the supply and return
fans then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-29 c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm
system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 2. BMS (Building Management System) Component Fault a. Upon activation of any of the following
BMS component faults, the supply and return fans, or exhaust fan are de-energized via BMS. 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current
sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable
module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the
building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire
alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 3. EMCS Operator Activation: a. When the EMCS system operator overrides the operational
status of the air handling system and shuts down the supply, return, or exhaust fans. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming.
If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building
fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then
sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-30 d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down,
the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 4. Maintenance Operator Activation: a. When a building maintenance
staff member manually shuts off the supply, return or exhaust fan at the starter disconnect switch, the supply, return or exhaust fans are shutdown. b. The shutdown of the supply, return
or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the
supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current
sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that
duct system on a 30 second delay. D. Smoke Damper Testing - M/E Engineering offers the following suggestions for a smoke damper testing protocol. The actual final protocol needs to
be authored and approved by all Cornell parties and agencies of interest. 1. Duct Smoke Detector (Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification
to the Building Manager and Cornell Fire and Safety, apply smoke to any duct smoke detector in the ductwork of any air handling systems which serve the project area. b. Upon receipt
of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return, or exhaust fans associated with the duct system that experienced
the detector activation. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply
and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-31 d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan
system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at
the local smoke damper access door. 2. Safety Device Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition) a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually
trip the low limit switch (freeze-stat) associated with any air handling system in the project area. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at
the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system
indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm
system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 3. BMS Component Interlock
or Fault: a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually cause for a fault condition to occur in any of the following BMS components:
1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault
7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor,
of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-32 c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return
or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper
closure at the local smoke damper access door 4. EMCS Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager,
manually override the operational status of any air handling system via laptop, PC or remote access to EMCS Webcontrol and shutdown the associated air handing system. b. The shutdown
of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If return
fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor
starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system
has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers
associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 5. Maintenance Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition):
a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually shut off any air handling system within the project area. b. The shutdown of the supply,
return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown,
the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current
sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-33 d. Upon receipt of the associated supply,
return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 6. Confirm
damper closure at the local smoke damper access door PART 6 - COMMISSIONING, TRAINING AND WARRANTY 6.1 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing,
documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS Trade’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review
prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3.
Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the contractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior
to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system
are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any
final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS Trade shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software
functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated
during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from PDC. The checkout shall consist of verifying the
ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM GUIDELINES 230923-34 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated
to the Owner’s representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and
sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 6.2 TRAINING A.
Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility
for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The contractor shall provide 40 hours of training. B. The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular,
scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and
management courses. C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility
for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous
project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 6.3 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and
guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that
effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The Contractor shall provide all recommended preventative maintenance of the materials, equipment,
and workmanship as necessary and as described in the operating and maintenance manuals during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor shall provide two (2) semi-annual service
visits (i.e., one visit during the peak cooling season and one visit during the peak heating season) to test and evaluate the performance of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide
a written report of the test and evaluation results. The service visits shall include but not be limited to: 1. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the calibration of the sensors,
transducers, and transmitters for air flow, liquid flow, pressure, temperature, and humidity; 2. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation of the dampers and damper actuators;
3. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation (i.e., monitoring and command) of the system points. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-1 SECTION 230931 CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials,
equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. B. Provide a complete Laboratory Airflow Control
System, including control components required to perform the functions, intent and performance described later in this Section. C. Provide wiring, conduit, required to connect devices
furnished as part of our adjunctive to this Laboratory Airflow control system regardless of the source of supply. Control circuits, 120 volt maximum. Install wiring in accordance
with requirements of "Electric Wiring in HVAC Work" Section, Electric Contract Specifications and National Electrical Code. D. Provide all necessary devices for a fume hood control
systems including make-up/supply air controllers; supply exhaust, constant volume and general purpose airflow control valves, plus all interconnecting wiring and pneumatic tubing to
result in a completely operational system. E. Furnish fume hood controllers, sash sensors and display monitors as required. F. All control components shall be strictly electronic in
nature. G. All laboratory airflow control system components shall be the products of a single manufacturer for single point responsibility. H. All devices specified in this section
shall be provided by the BACS vendor. 1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The complete system is designed and based on that manufactured by Accutrol, LLC or compatible product as manufactured
by: 1. Phoenix Controls 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping for wiring control diagrams and systems descriptions for each system.
2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for local control panels and DDC panels. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY
AIRFLOW 230931-2 3. Valve schedule showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for laboratory airflow control system components.
1.4 GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new laboratory airflow control system free from defects in material and workmanship, except for damages from other causes, for a period of one year after
final acceptance or Owner occupancy, whichever is earlier. B. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperature within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Maintain room pressurization control
within 10% differential setpoint. C. Provide one year maintenance service of system components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include
24 hour emergency and seasonal (twice per year minimum) inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient or defective during this
period. 1.5 INSTRUCTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. When the work has been completed, completely adjust the laboratory airflow control system B. Tag equipment with designation from the submitted
diagram. 1. Provide factory trained technicians to instruct the Owner's operating personnel and turn over three copies of maintenance manuals; total of three working days. 2. Submit
in triplicate, letter of acknowledgment of such instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials,
equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time
noted in special or extended warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Airflow control valves shall be of a low pressure drop design for energy efficiency. Valves shall not require
greater pressure drop than listed at Max CFM (Max L/s or CMH) on project valve schedule or 0.3” wc (75Pa), whichever is less. The provision of a larger airflow control valve that is
scheduled to accommodate the lower scheduled pressure drop will not be acceptable. Airflow control valves that require higher pressures to operate will not be acceptable. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-3 B. Demand Based Static Pressure Reset Control (DBSPRC) – Valve
must be capable of being utilized with a demand based static pressure reset control scheme as described in ASHRAE Standard 90.1-6.5.3.2.3. C. Should a venturi valve be offered as
a substitute for a low pressure drop closed loop control valve the contractor offering the valve must provide each venturi valve with a static pressure reset kit which requires duct
straight runs of 3x Duct Diameter (upstream of venturi valve) and 3.5x Duct Diameter (downstream of venturi valve) ensuring that the pressure pickups are located such that they will
not be susceptible to clogging or condensation within the tubes. The contractor substituting the venturi valve shall also be responsible for associated design change and field duct
changes to accompany the requirement of straight duct run upstream and downstream of the venturi valve (see above). 2.2 CONTROLLERS (TYPICAL FOR ALL VALVES) A. All valve controllers
shall be capable of providing the full airflow range of the valve specified and not limited to the airflow range scheduled. Do not provide mechanical stops on the valve. 2.3 FUME HOOD
CONTROLLER A. A linear fume hood control system shall be provided to directly measure the area of the fume hood sash opening. The measured sash area shall proportionally control the
hood's exhaust airflow to maintain the face velocity constant to a + 10% tolerance over no less than a 5 to 1 change in the sash open area (change in sash position). B. A vertical sash
sensor shall be provided to measure the height of each vertically moving fume hood sash. The vertical sash sensor shall consist of a precision 10 turn potentiometer mechanically coupled
to a constant tension spring reel. A stainless steel, vinyl coated cable shall be attached to the spring reel. Expected lifetime base on manufacturer's component data and tests shall
be over 200,000 full height sash movements. C. A horizontal sash sensor shall be provided for each pair of horizontal or overlapping sashes that are located on horizontal, combination
or walk-in sash fume hoods. The horizontal sash sensor shall consist of two long, flat bars for each pair of overlapping sashes. The first bar shall contain a element to send magnetic
flux to the second bar. The second bar shall contain a multitude of magnetic sensors spaced over .75 in. or less. The bars shall be mounted at the top of each sash, one per sash.
As the two sashes slide past each other, the bars shall overlap to determine the total amount of sash opening. D. A fume hood monitor shall be provided to receive the sash opening
signals from the vertical and or horizontal sash sensors. The monitor shall compute the total open sash and then output an exhaust airflow control signal to the appropriate volume
control device. E. The face velocity and minimum exhaust flow level of the fume hood shall be set at the fume hood monitor via trimpot adjustments. Accurate adjustment of the face
velocity shall be provided at two different sash positions. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-4
F. An emergency exhaust capability shall be provided to override the sash sensor and command maximum exhaust air flow. A push to start, push to stop, push button switch shall initiate
this mode. G. A "night energy waste alert" circuit employing a light level sensor shall be included in the monitor to sense the combination of a darkened lab room and a fume hood that
has its sash left up. H. Fume hood monitor shall include an energy use meter to indicate a relative measure of hood air flow, visual indication for normal operation, visual and audible
alarm for an unsafe flow condition, visual and audible alarm for night energy waste alert and visual and audible alarm to indicate emergency exhaust operation. I. A push button switch
shall be provided to mute the audible alarm. The mute mode is automatically reset when the alarm condition ceases. 2.4 EXHAUST, MAKE-UP AIR AND MULTI-POSITION CONTROL VALVES A. Supply
Air Valves 1. Consists of airflow control valve with vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces). 2. Consists of airflow control
valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces). B. General
Exhaust Air Valves 1. Consists of airflow control valve with vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces). 2. Consists of airflow
control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces).
C. Fume Hood Exhaust Air Valves (VAV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric
actuator. D. Fume Hood Exhaust Air Valves (CV / Multi-position CV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop feedback controller, vortex airflow
sensor and high speed electric actuator. E. Specialty Exhaust Air Valves (CV / Multi-position CV) 1. Consists of airflow control valve with integrated high performance closed loop
feedback controller, vortex airflow sensor and high speed electric actuator. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY
AIRFLOW 230931-5 F. The Airflow Control Valve shall consist of a compression section, two airflow control surfaces, factory-mounted digital vortex airflow measuring device factory-mounted
high speed electric actuator, integral access panel and integrated high performance closed-loop feedback controller with native BACnet. G. The compression section shall divide the
airstream into at least two separate airstreams. Each airstream shall be approximately equal in size and the total open area shall be approximately 50% of the duct open area. The divided
sections shall cause compression therefore creating a more laminar flow for better airflow measurement and turndown. The compression section shall be of an aerodynamic shape with a
static regain section to insure minimal pressure drop. The valve shall not require any duct straight runs either upstream or downstream of the airflow valve to achieve required specified
performance. H. Airflow control valves shall be a linear type and shall operate with a minimum turndown ratio of 8 to 1. Accuracy of the airflow valve shall be 5% of reading in the
8 to 1 range of the damper. I. The airflow control valve speed of response shall be <1 second (<2 seconds for standard speed actuation). J. The airflow control valve shall be capable
of being mounted in any position (360º mounting plane) in ductwork without the need for recalibration. It shall not be required to specify mounting plane when ordering valve. K. Valve
body material for Fume Hood or other corrosive service shall be 304SS; 20gauge for body and 16gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 316SS. L. Valve body material for non-lab
(non-corrosive) service such as for Supply and Return or Exhaust shall be 18 gauge aluminum for body and 16 gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 416SS. Valve body material
for lab spaces (non-corrosive) service such as for Supply and Return or Exhaust shall be 16 gauge (aluminum) for body and 16 gauge for blades. Valve shaft material shall be 316SS.
M. Airflow control valves shall operate without linkages, springs, levers, or bearings, in the airstream due to the effect of exhaust air on those materials, and shall exhibit no deadband
or hysteresis. Airflow control valves shall be provided as “fail last position”. Airflow valves provided for Fume Hood Exhaust application shall be provided as “fail safe position”.
N. All critical components of the airflow control valve shall be easily accessible from one side of the valve. All linkages shall be out of the airstream to avoid possible corrosion
and loss of accuracy. O. The airflow valve shall be complete with a digital vortex type airflow sensing device providing true airflow feedback for the system. P. Airflow measuring
devices shall be of the Vortex Shedding type, capable of continuously monitoring the airflow volume of the duct served and electronically transmitting a signal linear to the airflow
volume. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-6 Q. Individual airflow sensors shall be of
rugged construction, and shall not require special handling during installation. Sensors shall be mounted on support bars. Standard materials shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant
plastic. R. Individual velocity sensors shall not be affected by dust, temperature, pressure, or humidity. The sensors shall be passive in nature, with no active parts within the
air stream. The output from individual sensors shall be linear with respect to airflow velocity and shall be capable of sensing airflow in one direction only. The velocity sensors shall
not require calibration. S. Airflow control valves shall have factory installed high speed electric actuator (standard speed actuator for non-lab spaces) specifically adapted to the
stroke of the valve which shall operate on 24VAC. Power requirement for each airflow valve actuator shall not exceed 24VA. T. Airflow control valves shall have an integral closed-loop
feedback controller. Airflow measurement through the vortex airflow sensor shall send the digital signal to the controller which modulates the electric actuator to maintain desired
airflow setpoint. The airflow setpoint shall have the capability of being provided through analog input, digital input, communications over BACnet MS/TP or AVC internal program memory.
Analog output signal shall be provided for airflow and alarm outputs must be provided to indicate abnormal airflow conditions. 1. Airflow Control Valve integral controller shall provide
an EIA-485 port supporting BACnet MS/TP as a Full Master Node state machine. Field programming shall be accomplished through an intuitive PC based UI (User Interface) tool. Connection
between the integral controller and the computer shall be provided through a USB port located on the AVC control module. 2. Power requirement for each airflow valve with integral controller
shall not exceed 28VA for all round, 12"x18" and 12"x24" valves and 55VA for 12"x36" and 12"x48" valves. 2.5 EXHAUST, MAKE-UP AIR AND TWO-POSITION CONTROL VALVES (VENTURI STYLE) A.
Airflow control valve shall be of venturi control type utilizing a venturi section into which a cone shaped element slides to create a smoothly varying, ring shaped orifice. Valve
shall have an equal percentage flow characteristic to provide stable control at low flow values. B. Valve shall be pressure independent and use closed loop control to regulate air volume
linearly proportional to a 0 to 10 volt electronic control signal. Valve shall also generate a 0 to 10 volt feedback signal linearly proportional to valve airflow for internal volume
control, monitoring, or airflow tracking control. Signal shall be factory calibrated to a stated CFM per volt scale factor using NBS traceable instrumentation. Accuracy shall be +
5% of reading regardless of inlet or exit duct configuration over a range of no less than 8 to 1. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-7 C. An electric actuator shall be factory mounted to the valve body to vary the position of the valve cone from its minimum to maximum
flows. Loss of power shall cause exhaust valves to fail open and supply valves to fail closed. D. Any electronic (hot wire, thermistor, etc.) airflow sensor exposed to exhaust airflow
shall be UL listed under the UL913 class 1, division 1 standard for intrinsically safe equipment used in hazardous locations. E. Valve shall be constructed of one of the following types.
Refer to the valve schedule for the specific type: 1. Type #1 (Supply/General Exhaust): Valve shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum or galvanized steel. All critical bearing
surfaces related to the control of airflow shall be made of Teflon or Teflon infused aluminum. 2. Type #2 (Fume Hood Exhaust): Valve body and cone shall be of corrosive resistant design
using baked-on phenolic coating material. The valve's shaft and other exposed metal parts shall be PFA coated 316 stainless steel. F. A reduction of airflow of approximately 25% below
the setpoint shall be sensed and alarmed by a static pressure switch premounted to a hood exhaust valve. The switch shall operate by measuring the pressure drop across the valve's
variable orifice venturi. G. Provide flanged duct connection on all multiple valve arrangements. H. Provide drawband clamp connections on all single valve arrangements. For fume hood
exhaust valves, provide PTFE adhesive tape to protect the drawband clamp gasket. I. Provide factory sound neutralizer for all general exhaust valves. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Provide fan static reset kit. Pressure pickups shall be located per manufacturer's installation instruction. There shall be no obstructions for a minimum of 3 equivalent duct diameters
upstream, and 3.5 equivalent duct diameters downstream of the valve. 2.6 MAKE-UP AIR CONTROL UNIT A. A Make-up Air Control Unit shall be supplied to control the airflow balance of
the laboratory room. The Make-up air control unit shall be panel or valve mounted. B. The control unit shall be of electronic design with analog signal inputs and outputs. The inputs
shall accept 0 to 10 volt signals proportional to fume hood, canopy, or snorkel exhaust, and supply flows. The output signals shall control supply valves and general exhaust valves,
with 0 to 10 volt signals linearly proportional to the desired supply or exhaust volumes. C. Integral field adjustable trim points shall be provided for all required calibration and
scaling adjustments. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-8 D. The control unit shall maintain
a constant adjustment offset between the sum of the room's total exhaust and the make-up/supply air volumes. This offset shall be independent of the exhaust volume magnitude and represent
the volume of air that will enter the room from the corridor or other room. E. The control unit shall generate 0 to 10 volt analog signals linearly proportional to the airflow to each
exhaust air source as indicated by the calibrated input signals. Similar output signals shall also be provided for the supply, general exhaust (if appropriate), and total exhaust airflow
volume signals. These signals shall be provided for calibration, local monitoring, and direct connection to the central DDC system. F. An integral power supply for the panel mounted
unit, or a valve mounted power supply for the valve mount unit, shall be included to power the complete laboratory air flow control system from on 120 VAC line connection. G. A liquid
crystal digital display reading out directly in CFM shall be provided for panel mounted control units to indicate the magnitude of all exhaust and supply airflow signals specified above.
H. Provide factory sound neutralizer for all general exhaust valves. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be furnished
and installed by the Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) Trade as recommended by the Laboratory Airflow Controls Manufacturer. B. The ATC Trade shall install the sash sensor and the
monitor on the fume hood. Vertical sash sensor and its stainless steel cable shall be hidden from view. Horizontal sash sensor bars shall be affixed to the top of the individual sash
panels. C. Linearized airflow control valves shall be installed in ductwork by the Mechanical Trade. Valves shall be mounted in the position specified to insure calibrated performance.
D. The ATC Trade shall install the Make-up/Air Supply Control in an accessible location within the indicated laboratory room. Single phase 110 VAC power shall be wired to the Control
Panels and the valve mounted power supplies be the Electronic Trade. E. The ATC Trade shall extend eight wire cables from the fume hood monitors to the fume hood exhaust valves; from
the fume exhaust valves, two position exhaust valves and lab office supply valves to the make-up/supply air control units; and from the makeup/supply control units to the make-up/supply
air control valves and general exhaust/return valves. Two wire cables attached to the sash sensors shall be routed into their associated fume hood monitor. The ATC Tradeshall terminate
and connect cables as required. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid CONTROL SYSTEM - LABORATORY AIRFLOW 230931-9 3.2 START-UP AND CALIBRATION
A. System start-up, calibration shall be provided by a factory authorized representative of the Laboratory Airflow Controls Manufacturer. Start-up shall include setting of the fume
hood face velocity, supply/make-up and/or general exhaust flow and complete air balance with report as outlined in Section 15990. PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.1 LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL A. Refer to drawings for sequence of operation. B. The control unit shall increase the flow at the general exhaust valve under conditions where additional exhaust is required
to maintain the room's airflow balance to maintain temperature setpoint. The general exhaust valve command shall equal the algebraic difference between the supply volume and the hood's
make-up air volume. C. If any lab office supply valves are used (for offices that are part of the lab area), then the supply volume of these valves must be subtracted from the make-up
air command for the lab make-up/supply valve. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-1 SECTION 232010 PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete
installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of pipe materials, fittings, and connections. B. All refrigerant piping submittals shall be forwarded to Cornell
University facilities engineering for comment by an engineer and by a designated representative of the facilities management air conditioning and refrigeration trade shop. C. Copies
of EPA certification cards shall be submitted for those who will be working on the site prior to commencement of any refrigeration work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings
shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, or extra strong (Schedule
80) weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or roll grooved for grooved mechanical; connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as
adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use
of "Weldolets", "Thredolets", or "Sockolets" are acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job-fabricated reductions are not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket
weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for. Street type 45° and 90°
elbows are not acceptable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-2 C. Flanges, Unions and Couplings: 1. Threaded
connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings:
Malleable iron, 150 or 300 lb. wwp, based on system pressure. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on
type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments
to piping system shall be IPS brass. E. Base Elbows: 1. Cast iron or steel type, flange connections; Crane 500 or equivalent. Made from welding elbows, with welded pipe support and
steel base. Reducing elbows where necessary. ELBOW SIZE SUPPORT SIZE BASE PLATE 2 in. to 3 in. 1-1/4 in. 6 in. x 6 in. x 1/4 in. 4 in. to 6 in. 2-1/2 in. 8 in. x 8 in. x 1/4 in. 8
in. and larger 6 in. 14 in. x 14 in. x 5/16 in. 2. Anchor bolt holes in each corner of base for securely bolting to floor or concrete base; minimum 3/4 in. bolts. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND
FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type L hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22
or cast bronze; ANSI B16.8 solder end connections. C. Unions And Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use
flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-3 E. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Willard
Industries "Solder Safe (silver bearing), Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. 2.4 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. B.
Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel.
D. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.5 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Refrigeration piping material shall
be ASTM B280, type ACR, nitrogenized, clean, dry and capped. B. 90° fittings shall be the long radius type. Close Ruff or Street elbows are not permitted on any installation. Quick
connect couplings on refrigeration systems are not allowed. Service port caps shall be hex. Thumb caps are unacceptable. C. Factory made suction traps, Melco Type PT. D. Piping
and system shall meet the requirements of Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and ASME/ANSI B31.5. E. Make: Mueller, Howell Metal, Cerro, Cambridge-Lee, Universal
Tube. 2.6 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Dielectric unions are not allowed. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures
with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Make: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.7 HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line,
Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-4 B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable,
wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hotdipped galvanized finish for exterior
locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for 4 in, and larger, and where insulation
passes through hanger. 4. Hangers sized to permit passage of insulation through the hanger for chilled water and steam (over 50 psi) piping. 5. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated
zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 6. All refrigerant lines must be supported by strut channel hangers and supports. All liquid and suction
lines must be clamped securely to the strut channel. All discharge piping to and from remote air cooled condensers shall also be clamped per Manufacturer's recommendations to minimize
vibrations. Clamp assemblies shall be refrigeration cushion clamps (for example, Hydra-Zorb). A piping support shall be installed within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and equipment
connection. C. Hanger Rods 1. Process Areas - Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends only, not threaded between ends. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire,
chain, or perforated straps are allowed. D. Hanger Shields: 1. Pre-insulated type: a. Insulated pipes shall be protected at point of support by a 360° insert of high density, 100 psi
waterproof calcium silicate, encased in a 360° sheet metal shield. Insulation insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and extend 1 in. beyond sheet metal shield. 2.
Field-insulated type: a. #18 USSG, galvanized steel shields, minimum 120° arc. Provide temporary blocking between pipe and hanger to maintain proper spacing for insulation. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-5 3. Shield Sizing: PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" 18
4" 12" 16 5" and 6" 12" 14 8" to 14" 24" 12 16" to 24" 24" 10 4. Hanger shield gauges listed are for use with band type hangers only. For point loading (roller support), increase shield
thickness by one gauge, and length by 50%. E. Spacing Schedule: PIPE SIZE STEEL COPPER PVC PLASTIC ROD SIZE 3/4 to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 1-1/4 to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft.
3/8 in. 2-1/2 to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 1/2 in. 5 and 6 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 3/4 in. F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized
finish, maximum loading 1,300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. G. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp, locknut,
electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center load style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL
listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. H. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural
steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor
of safety of four. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-6 2. For weights under 1000 lbs.: Insert, "U" shaped
channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill
through floor slabs and provide flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 4. For metal decks: Drill hole
through for hanger rods and embed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 5. Make: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head",
or approved equal. I. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For use on 1-1/2" and smaller piping only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured
type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch,
use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut, or approved equal. 2.8 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass polished chrome, split hinge type with
setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Escutcheons plates for process spaces shall be stainless steel. B. Pipe Guides: Cylindrical steel guide sleeve, proper length
for travel, integral bottom base anchor, top half removable. Split steel spider to bolt to pipe, copper plated spider for copper pipe. Insulated style where pipe is required to be
insulated. Make: Tri-Sate Industries, or equal. C. Anchors: 1. Pipe support; same material as pipe; as manufactured by Pipe Shields Model C1000 or C2000, Keflex, Metraflex, Flexonics
or Advanced Thermal Systems. 2. Pipe Anchors: a. Anchors shall be designed and located as to prevent stress to piping or building structural components from exceeding those permitted
by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stressing to connected equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS
232010-7 3. All field or shop fabricated anchor and equipment and piping supports shall include detail fabrication drawings submittals accompanied by comprehensive structural engineering
design and analysis by a qualified, profession engineer licensed to practice in the State of New York, using the performance and design criteria specific to the project and system in
question. D. Pipe Roll Stand: Cast iron roll stand. Make: Advanced Thermal Systems, Carpenter and Patterson, ITT Grinnell, Pipe Shields. 2.9 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule
40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Full circle water stop collar for
sleeves located in below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference.
2. Schedule 40, PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces and existing construction. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18-gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing.
B. Pre-Insulated Type: 1. Adjustable or fixed length metal cans, 24-gauge minimum sized for 1 in. spacing between insulation and can. Insulation shall consist of a 360° waterproofed
calcium silicate insert sized to extend 1 in. beyond wall or floor penetration. Calcium silicate insert shall be the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Spacing between shield
and can packed at each end with double neoprene rope positively fastened. 2.10 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with
zinc plated bolts. 1. Make: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. B. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade, above floor: Synthetic rubber material
with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS
232010-8 2.11 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory
for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system shall be provided
at locations where piping passes through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the
Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation.
2.12 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (HVAC) piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Equipment
and systems in accordance with laws, codes, and provisions of each applicable section of these specifications. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves.
Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary
offsets, union, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with
other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing
shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting
and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for
insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, union and flanges in inaccessible locations. Provide trap seal of adequate depth
on drain pans. B. Provide reducers at all control valves, where control valve is smaller than pipeline size. Reducers for steam control valves shall be eccentric type. Provide unions
at each side of every control valve and reducers directly adjacent to the unions. C. Provide reducers at all balance valves, where balance valve is smaller than pipeline size. 3.2 PIPING
OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment (within 18" horizontally), including, but not limited to panels, transformers,
disconnects, starters and fused switches. In the event it cannot be avoided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and provide a sheetmetal drip shield under the pipe
which extends 3'0" beyond the electrical equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-9 3.3 WATER AND GLYCOL
SYSTEMS A. Top connection for upfeed, bottom or side connection for downfeed. Grade off level; up in direction of flow and down toward drain. 3.4 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping
shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, not by vertical expansion bolts. Support each pipe with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports,
or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location. Trapeze hangers are acceptable for racking of multiple pipes of 1-1/2" or less in size.
Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size as called for, using four nuts per rod. Provide additional rustproofed
structural steel members, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists,
shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2", "C" types are permitted for piping 2-1/2" and
smaller. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. 3.5 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Threaded Connections:
Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specific for each application. C. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric
couplings or flanges at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric couplings or flanges in all open type piping systems (condensing water,
domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. Dielectric couplings or flanges are not required in typical closed systems such as heating water, chilled water, heat
pump loop, etc. except for the equipment connections. D. Refrigeration Piping Connections: A nitrogen purge shall be used at all times during brazing or soldering to prevent oxidation
on the inside of tubing. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-10 3.6 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in
compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded pipe fabricated by certified welder. Contractor shall submit proof
of current certification of each welder if requested by Owner. Use full-length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least
full thickness of pipe inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on
position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slipon flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to
concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. Welding is prohibited in existing building, except in following areas: mechanical rooms, crawl spaces. When welding galvanized pipe,
apply cold galvanizing on joint after welding. 3.7 HANGER SHIELDS A. Provide at hangers for chilled water and steam (over 50 psi) piping. Pre-insulated type or field-insulated type
at Contractor's option. 3.8 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. B. Pre-insulated type: Required for chilled water and steam (over 50 psi) piping.
C. Standard type: Provide for piping, except as called for. D. Extend 1/8 in. above finished areas. In above grade mechanical and other areas with floor drains; use steel pipe sleeves
2 in. above floor. Use pipe sleeves in bearing walls, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent
with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings.
3.9 ANCHORS A. Provide piping system anchors where shown on the plans, and as recommended by the expansion joint/loop manufacturer. Where an anchor is shown at a change in piping direction,
it shall fully control movement in both directions. In lieu of a single anchor fabricated for two directional control, two (2) individual anchors may be provided. Provide detailed
fabrication drawings for all field-fabricated anchors. B. Design anchors and equipment and piping supports including comprehensive structural engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, licensed to practice in the State of New York using the performance and design criteria specific to this project. 3.10 ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Provide alignment guides to guide
expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-11 B. Install two
(2) or more guide(s) on each side of flexible expansion loop. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four (4) pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides
to pipe and secure guides to building structure. 3.11 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior
walls and below grade cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's
instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed walls and floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device, or compound. 3.12 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon
plates for exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.13 CLEANING HOT WATER AND CHILLED WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Cornell
University’s continual approach of protecting its community and the environment must be adhered to in the application of chemicals pertinent to process water loops. In addition, University
policy dictates that “under no circumstances should chemicals be disposed of by pouring into sinks or other drains leading to sanitary or storm sewers”. B. All chemicals and formulations
prescribed for the cleaning and treatment of process water systems at the University must meet the following specified criteria: 1. They must be ecologically compatible so that any
discharge will not create an environmental impact. 2. They must be industrial and toxicologically safe so as to minimize personnel and equipment exposure to hazardous conditions. 3.
Every effort must be made to maintain a sense of uniformity in chemical formulation to insure a line of continuity. Deviation from existing formulations that are applied across the
University are to kept to a minimum. This relieves the University of any burden that arises from trying to maintain adequate protection using numerous treatments. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-12 4. All material proposed for application must have the prior approval of Environmental Health
and Safety, Facilities Engineering and Facilities Management Pipe Shop. In order to thoroughly evaluate the products performance, it is recommended that the following be submitted
at the time of proposal. a. Material Safety Data Sheets for all products that are to be applied. All sheets are required to contain complete formulations. Further documentation of
qualitative composition must be included if Material Safety Data Sheets do not supply all product(s) components. b. Product Data Sheets specifying overall product description and application
guidelines. c. Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Proposals should specify qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels. They should
also include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter. d. Expected performance levels of products; this should
include expected corrosion rates, expressed in mils per yea. If the product is a biostatic nature, what levels of biological growth should be expected if the product is applied at
recommended dosages. e. Provisions should be submitted for the removal for any unused chemicals. In addition, provisions must be provided for the disposal of all empty containers.
5. The above mentioned criteria will serve as a guide for the information required for submittal of approval concerning any chemical treatment applied at Cornell University. No water
treatment should be purchased, delivered or applied without consideration to the previously mentioned guidelines. C. Cleaning 1. Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems shall
be as follows: a. Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process. b. Step 2: Fill system and add a general
dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by the chemical manufacturer. Pay particular attention to the type of material being cleaned
(steel, copper, aluminum, etc.) Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system until system water pH and iron levels are consistent with the
feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab; Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-13 c. Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before proceeding
to chemical treatment. 2. For extensions to existing building systems, follow the procedures for newly installed systems. Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated
from the existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing building system. D. Treatment Chemicals 1. Treatment chemicals
for non-glycol, non-potable systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall
include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows: 1) Molybdate: 150 ppm 2) pH: 8.3-9 3)
Tolytriazole: 5 ppm b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab prior to final acceptance. 2. Treatment chemicals for glycol
heating systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill with a glycol formulation as follows: 1) Propylene Glycol: 400,000 ppm (40%) 2) Nitrate:
1500 ppm 3) Tolytriazole: 20 ppm 4) Water: Balance (water to be added to glycol solution shall meet manufacturers standard for quality) 5) Color: Olive Green 6) Preferred Manf/Material:
PG #36 b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before prior to final acceptance. 3. Chilled Water Systems: a. Chemicals
shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop. Fill system with potable water. Notify the Central Energy Plant for permission to begin
circulating water into the campus chilled water loop. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-14 E. Identification
1. Provide a three ring binder for each hydronic system treated with chemicals that includes the following information: a. SDS b. Product data sheets c. Chemical type d. Test points
e. Control limits f. System volume g. Direction to drain system to sanitary. h. System volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location. 3.14 TESTS A.
Test piping and accessories before insulation, connection to existing piping, or concealment. Repeat as many times as necessary to prove tight system. Notify Owner's Representative
at least seven days in advance of each test. Isolate valves and equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Remove and replace
defective fittings, pipe or connections. Furnish necessary pumps, gauges, equipment, piping, valving, power and labor for testing. Certify that tests have been successfully completed.
B. Schedule of Test Requirements: 1. Hot, chilled, glycol water: Hydrostatic, 100 psig at high point of system; two hours duration. 2. Hot, chilled, glycol water: Hydrostatic, 100
psig at high point of system; two hours duration. 3.15 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe sizing changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative.
Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PIPING SYSTEMS 232010-15 EXHIBIT
"A" - PIPING MATERIALS (HVAC) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Chilled water 3 in. and larger ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME
B16.9 Butt weld Chilled water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Hot water
3 in. and larger; ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Hot water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type
L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Glycol Hot water 3 in. and larger ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9
Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Glycol Hot water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5
Ag solder Vent, overflow, drain ASTM B88 Type M hard temper copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Drain (optional) ASTM B3026 Type
DWV copper ASME B16.3026 Wrought copper DWV fittings ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-1 SECTION 232110 WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK
INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on water
system specialties. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and accessories shall be rated for a minimum of 125 psi wwp, and 250°F temperatures. B. All equipment shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and schematics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH EFFICIENCY IN LINE AIR SEPARATOR A. All fittings shall be fabricated steel,
rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for less than 1 foot of water pressure drop and velocity not to exceed 4 feet per second through the unit at specified GPM. Performance
curves from the unit manufacturer shall be furnished as part of the submittal for each unit. Units to include internal copper coalescing medium to facilitate maximum air elimination
and suppress turbulence. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. Alternates must include cast iron float actuated air vent rated at 150 psig
which shall be threaded to the top of the fitting. Unit shall have bottom blow down connection with ball valve. B. Air separators shall be capable of removing 100% of free air, 100%
of entrained air and up to 99.6% of dissolved air in the system fluid. System efficiency and performance shall be third party tested and certified. C. Design Equipment: Spirovent.
2.2 PRESSURIZED EXPANSION TANKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Steel tanks, 125 psi wwp, ASME construction, with reinforced opening of size and location as required. Red oxide coating outside
and final exterior coat of paint; factory applied. Heavy duty butyl rubber removable bladder. Full acceptance vessel. Maximum operating temperature of 240°F. Provide ring stand.
B. Design Equipment: The John Wood Company Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-2 C. Manufacturers:
Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, The John Wood Company 2.3 AIR ELIMINATING SUPPLY FITTING A. Designed to eliminate air from supply water; located in supply header from heat generating devices;
flanged or screwed. B. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett "Airtrol". C. Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Spirotherm. 2.4 MAKE-UP VALVES A. Brass and built-in strainer and anti-siphon
check valve. Equal to Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Watts 2.5 RELIEF VALVES A. To relieve full heating capacity. B. Provide an ASME labeled safety relief valve as called for on the plans/details.
C. Manufacturer: ITT, Bell & Gossett, Watts, Kunkle, Spence, Keckley. 2.6 FLOW BALANCERS A. High Performance, Bronze Body, Y-Pattern with brass readout valves with integral selfsealing
EPT readout valves. B. Valve shall be multi-turn globe style with calibrated digital hand wheel capable of at least four turns with graduations at 1/10th turn. Hand wheel shall be
equipped with a positive, tamper-resistant memory stop that effectively prevents opening valve past the stop. C. Valve shall not be integral to flow balancer. Combination services
are not acceptable. D. Valve shall be provided with an integral, positive, tamper-resistant memory stop feature which is not subject to accidental readjustment when the valves is operated
as a shut-off for service purposes. Memory stop shall require a tool for adjustment. E. Valve shall have provisions for a seal to prevent re-setting. F. Valve shall exhibit an accuracy
of +/- 5% within its normal operation flow range. G. Valves shall be rated for a maximum temperature of 230°F and a maximum pressure of 250 psig. H. Valves shall be manufactured from
Bronze or Dezincifcation resistant brass in sizes through 2” nominal, and bronze or cast iron in sizes above 2” nominal. I. For chilled water applications, valve shall be provided with
preformed insulation to permit access for balance and readout. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-3
J. Mechanical Contractor shall supply Testing and Balancing Contractor with flow calculator (circular slide rule, etc.), if requested. K. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm
range rather than pipe size. 1. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 2. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. L. 5 in. and Larger: Nickel-plated flow meter with provisions for
connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Shall be individually calibrated. Provide with a butterfly valve with memory stop at each location. 1. Flow meter size shall be
based upon manufacturer's recommended gpm range rather than pipe size. 2. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 3. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. 2.7 SUCTION DIFFUSER A.
Provide as shown on plans, an angle pattern flow straightening fitting equipped with a combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder, flow straightening vanes, start-up strainer and
adjustable support foot. The combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to the system pump shutoff head (maximum 175
PSIG) and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section area of the pump suction opening. The length of the flow straightening vanes shall be no less than 2-1/2 times
the diameter of the system pump suction connection. B. The Flow Straightening Fitting shall have NPT, flanged or (grooved) mechanical system connections as applicable. The fitting
shall have a stainless steel combination diffuserstrainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter perforations to protect the system pump, and full length flow straightening vanes shall
provide nonturbulent flow to the suction side of the system pump. The start-up strainer shall be of 16 mesh bronze, and the support foot shall eliminate pipe strain at the flow fitting/pump
connection. All internal components shall be replaceable. C. Construction Materials: 1. Body and Cover: NPT and Flanged Models Cast Iron Grooved Models Ductile Iron 2. Straightening
Vanes: X Models Steel Z and Grooved Models Stainless Steel 3. Orifice Cylinder: Z and Grooved Models Stainless Steel 4. Start-Up Strainer: X, Z and Grooved Models 16 Mesh Bronze
5. O-Ring Seal: All models EPDM Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-4 6. Type X Models (for closed
systems). 7. Type Z for (open systems). D. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett. E. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Grundfos. 2.8 STRAINERS A. Cast semi-steel body
or cast iron construction for steel piping and bronze body construction for copper piping; equipped with removable, monel or stainless steel water screen; maximum pressure drop 2 psi
with free area at least four times area of pipe. Provided with blow-off outlet. B. Sizes 5 in. and Smaller, Y-Pattern Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2
in. and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 in. and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. C. Sizes 6 in. and Larger, Basket Strainer:
125 psig working pressure; flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. D. Design Equipment: Mueller. E. Manufacturers: Elliott,
Keckley, Mueller, Webster, Watts, Spirax-Sarco. 2.9 AIR VENTS A. Manual air vents shall be a 3/4 in. ball valve with bronze body, nickel plated bronze ball, hose end, cap and chain,
Watts B6000CC. B. Automatic air vents shall be float type, 35 psig rated, Armstrong No. 502CV OR float type, 150 psig rated, Armstrong No. 75 or Spirotop. Provide unit with an appropriate
rating, as necessary for location. C. High Capacity Automatic Air Vent: 1. Cast iron body. 150 psig rated. Stainless steel float. 2.10 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED
STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The
corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration
TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to
850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-5 C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure.
D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer.
E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. 2.11 GLYCOL MAKE-UP TANK A. Provide the following apparatus including all external piping
and wiring: 1. One (1) fifty gallon polyethylene solution tank, with cover, mounted in a welding steel frame. Frame shall be furnished with an epoxy coating to resist chemical attack.
2.12 GLYCOL SOLUTION A. The closed loop system shall contain a preblended solution of industrially inhibited propylene glycol and deionized water. The solution percent concentration
shall be 40% by volume resulting in freeze (slush) protection to -3°F or lower, and burst protection to 35°F or lower. B. The water used for the dilution of the glycol must meet the
following water quality criteria: <25 ppm Sulfate; <25 ppm Chloride; <1 ppm Calcium; <1 ppm magnesium; <25 ppm Silica. Electrical conductivity umho/cm @ 25 C. 1.0 max. Total water
hardness must be less than 60 ppm and meet the Type II Reagent Water Specification as per ASTM D-1193. C. The selected coolant must meet or exceed the ASTM D-1384 corrosion test for
coolants in glassware @ 190°F for 336 hours. The supplier prior to delivery must provide a Certificate of Assurance. D. The solution shall contain a fluorescent dye to facilitate easy
leak detection. E. Approved Coolant Manufacturers are: 1. Interstate Chemical Company INTERCOOL NFP - Propylene Glycol. 2. Dow Chemical Company Dowfrost HD - Propylene Glycol. 3. Interstate
Chemical Company INTERCOOL NFP 50 AA and NFP-40 AA (For boilers and other equipment with aluminum alloy heat exchangers). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 232110-6 2.13 CHEMICAL POT FEEDER A. 2 gallon carbon steel body, domed bottom, powder coated finish, rated for 320 psi at 250°F. B.
Funnel kit with sealed safety bar closure cap rated for design pressure. Furnish with pedestal mounted legs. Provide site glass with damage guard and associated isolation valves.
Provide air vent with air release valve. C. Design make: Griswold. D. Makes: Griswold, Neptune, Wessels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain detailed instructions
from each manufacturer for proper method of installation. 3.2 SYSTEM FILLING A. After cleaning, fill each system from low point. B. With pumps off, vent mains, risers, run-outs, and
units, working consecutively from low to high point of building. Obtain approximately 2 psi at highest point. Obtain proper air cushion in compression/expansion tanks. 3.3 AIR VENTING
A. Provide where specifically called for in piping details and at all points in piping systems where air may collect due to changes in piping elevation. 1. Manual air vent assembly
consisting of 1-1/4 in. x 4 in. air collection chamber with 3/4 in. hose end ball valve with cap and chain. 2. Automatic air vent with a ball valve for the purpose of isolation and
service or replacement. Do not use automatic vents on chilled water and glycol service; use manual vents only. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, automatic air vents shall only be installed
in Mechanical Rooms. Pipe high capacity air vent discharge down to floor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES
232110-7 B. Equipment Vents: 1. When equipment is above mains: Connect run-outs or risers to upper quadrant or top of mains. Install vent assembly concealed within enclosure, consisting
of 1 in. diameter by 4 in. to 6 in. long air collection chamber with 1/4 in. soft copper tube to manual valve. Mount securely near bottom of enclosure, but not fastened to enclosure.
For individual units, radiators, fan convectors and units with return grilled: Provide screwdriver operated manual valve, operated from discharge grille or access door. Drill enclosure
and position valve for operating without removing enclosure. 2. When equipment is below mains: Connect piping run-outs or risers to bottom or lower quadrant of mains. Vent assembly
not required in unit. Provide means of purging and draining each unit if required. Use tees instead of ells at low point of run-outs. 3.4 AIR SEPARATOR A. Provide supports and provide
blow-down with hose end drain valve. Hang unit from structure at an elevation low enough to allow for upward pitch of piping to compression tank. 3.5 MAKE-UP WATER VALVES A. Provide
for each system, with 3/4 in. globe valve bypass connection, and check valve downstream of bypass connection. Set valves to provide 2 psi at high point of system. Provide pressure
gauge assembly. 3.6 RELIEF VALVES A. Hot Water System: Pipe discharge to floor drain and place hanger at elbow. Install piping so as not to introduce stress of PRV body. 3.7 STRAINERS
A. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 in. nipple and ball valve
in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 in. and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 in. 3.8 FLOW BALANCERS A. Where flow balancers
are smaller than pipe line size, provide reducers directly adjacent to flow balancers. B. Provide on each hydronic unit and where called for. Meter connection points shall not point
downward. 3.9 SUCTION DIFFUSERS A. Provide at inlet to base mounted pump. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES
232110-8 B. Pipe suction diffuser blow-off connection (full size with ball valve) to nearest floor drain. 3.10 GLYCOL MAKE-UP TANK A. Set unit on a 6 in. concrete pad. B. Pipe all
relief valves to solution tank. 3.11 GLYCOL SOLUTION A. The Coolant Manufacturer shall analyze the fluid two (2) times during the warranty period to ensure the glycol water solution
continues to provide corrosion protection within industry standards and at no cost to the Owner. B. No chemical additions shall be made to the glycol water solution until the Coolant
Manufacturer has completed an analysis. Should such a chemical addition be required, it will be done in accordance with the recommendations on the analyticals as supplied by the manufacturer.
C. The Mechanical Contractor shall meter the initial water fill for the purpose of hydrostatic pressure testing and/or system flushing. After completion of this requirement, the water
shall be metered out. This will provide the contractor with a precise measure of coolant required to fill the system as well as the amount of water trapped in the system. This process
will allow for any adjustments required prior to delivery of the premixed glycol solution and ensure that the solution strength is in compliance with the specification. D. Should the
concentration still require adjustment after the system has been filled and as a result of trapped water, then drain the required amount of fluid from the system and replace it with
the same manufacturer's coolant in its concentrated form. Repeat this process until compliance with this specification is achieved. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 232123-1 SECTION 232123 PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required,
for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and performance curves, on pumps and pump accessories clearly indicate which equipment
is being submitted. B. Provide catalog information on motors as specified in section 230513. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pumps shall be non-overloading over their
entire performance range with motors capable of running continuously without undue noise, heating, or sparking. Impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Provide mechanical
seals for closed systems, constructed of carbon rings with ceramic mating seat up to 220°F. Provide packing type seals for open systems only. Provide materials suitable for water
pressures, temperature and conditions for each application. Provide tapped discharges and suction connections for gauges, vent and drain. Provide factory trimmed impeller if required,
to meet initial delivery requirements. B. Provide the services of a factory service engineer or machinist to check each pump alignment before pump is started, using laser equipment.
2.2 SELECTION CRITERIA A. Pumps shall be non-overloading over their entire performance ranges, with trimmed impeller as required to meet initial delivery requirements. Pump selection
shall not take into account, or infringe on the service factor of the motor. B. Select pumps at appoint within the maximum efficiency for a given impeller casing combustion. Deviations
within 3 percent of maximum efficiency are permissible, provided that the lesser efficiency is not less than the scheduled efficiency. C. Pumps may not be selected such that the impeller
diameter is larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter for the casing using smaller equipment than the scheduled equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 232123-2 2.3 WET ROTOR CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. The wet rotor circulator pump shall be certified and listed by UL (1Z28 Water circulating
pump) and/or CSA (Water Circulating Pump) and/or ETL Water Circulating Pump) for conformance to U.S. and Canadian Standards to operate at maximum 230 deg F and minimum 35 deg F water.
1. The pumps shall be of the quiet wet rotor in-line design with the sound pressure level of the pump lower than 38dB(A) 2. The pumps shall be capable of operating continuously at
200 deg F. 3. The pump housing shall be of the in-line type, constructed of cast iron and have a stainless steel neck ring to minimize recirculation and increase pump efficiency.
4. The impellers shall be of the radial type with curved blades and constructed of composite PES 30% GF. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by a split cone and nut. 5. The
suction and discharge flanges shall be tapped and drilled to allow gauge installation on the pump. 6. The pump rotor can, rotor cladding, shaft, and bearing plate shall be constructed
of stainless steel. 7. The terminal box shall be made of black composite material. Enclosure class shall be IP44. Aluminum terminal boxes shall not be acceptable. The terminal box shall
be able to connect directly to the mains without the need of an external contactor and shall be suitable to accept add-on modules. 8. CIM module with BACnet field bus standard for connection
to BMS. B. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett, Ecocirc XL C. Acceptable Make: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Grundfos. D. Integrated Variable Frequency Drive Motors: 1. The circulator shall
be supplied with an integrated VFD and shall not be used with any external VFDs. 2. Each motor shall be 4-pole, synchronous, permanent-magnet (PM motor) and tested with the pump as
one unit by the same manufacturer. Conventional asynchronous squirrel-cage motors shall not be acceptable. 3. Each motor shall be of the Integrated Variable Frequency Drive design
consisting of a motor and a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) built and tested as one unit by the same manufacturer. The integrated VFD control shall utilize an energy optimization algorithm
to minimize energy consumption by reducing the factoryset setpoint and adjust to actual system characteristics. This shall be accomplished without the need of any external sensors
or input. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 232123-3 4. The stator housing shall be made of pressure die cast aluminum. The
stator housing shall have 3 drain holes to enable condensed water to escape and shall have nickel plated brass inspection screw. 5. The motor shall be cooled by the pumped fluid and
shall be self-ventilating. 6. Minimum insulation class for the motors shall be Class F. E. Pump Control Modes: 1. During operation, the pump shall be capable of automatically reducing
the factory-set setpoint and adjusting it to the actual system characteristic. Manual setting of the setpoint shall not be possible. 2. Pump shall be capable of: Proportional Pressure
– The head delivered shall be reduced from a manual setpoint linearly in accordance with decrease in flow demand in the system 3. Pump shall be capable of: Constant Pressure – A manual
set constant head shall be maintained, irrespective of flow. 4. Pump shall be capable of: Constant Curve – The pump shall run as an uncontrolled pump according to a pump curve set.
The pump shall have between 5 and 10 curves in addition to maximum and minimum capable of being selected from the control panel. Additionally, the pump shall have between 41 and 91
curves in addition to maximum and minimum capable of being selected from a wireless remote control. 5. Pump shall be capable of: Automatic Night-Time duty – The pump shall change automatically
between normal duty and night-time duty. Changeover between normal and night-time duty shall take place as a result of flow-pipe temperature measured by an internal integrated temperature
sensor. The changeover shall take place when the temperature sensor registers a flow-pipe drop of more than 50-60 Degrees F within approximately 2 hours. The required temperature
drop shall be a minimum of 32 degrees F per minute. 6. Temperature Influence – The pump shall be capable of temperature influence set to a maximum temperature of either 120 degrees
F or 180 degrees F. A drop in flow-pipe temperature will cause a linear reduction of setpoint. 2.4 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Designed for continuous operation between 40° and 225°F.
In-line, close-coupled, single stage, bronze fitted construction. All pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Replaceable shaft sleeves
at the seal or packing. Enclosed type impeller, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew. Factory guaranteed operating performance. Pumps used in a variable speed pumping
system shall contain couplings suitable for very low and intermittent torque loads. B. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett, Series e-90. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 232123-4 C. Make: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Grundfos CBS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic
maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings and accessories. B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps
is not supported by piping. C. Provide 6 in. concrete pad for each base mounted pump. Level base so that pump and pump casing are not strained. Align pumps as directed by manufacturer.
After pumps have been aligned, install dowels to prevent shifting. Fill base with non-shrink grout through grouting holes provided in baseplate. Contractor responsible for accurate
size of base and exact location of mounting bolts. Contractor responsible for trouble resulting from poor pump alignment. D. Base mounted end suction pumps shall be provided with inlet
suction diffusers where shown on drawings. Pipe suction diffuser blow-off (full line size with ball valve) to nearest floor drain. Provide start-up strainers for first 48 hours of
operation. Replace after completion of start-up period. E. In-line pumps shall be installed using continuous-thread, hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support
weight of in-line pumps. 3.2 ALIGNMENT A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment services for all pumps that use a coupler attached to the device train,
whether base mounted or inline mounted. Alignment shall be accomplished with a laser shaft alignment system. B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment
of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers'
written instructions. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks
and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. E. Provide an alignment report indicating alignment setup data, tolerances and final results.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PUMPS 232123-5 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction
piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling
hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in
the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-1 SECTION 233100
SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed
in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with latest edition of the following standards. 1. SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork. 2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. 3. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 4. 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New
York State. 5. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards. 6. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated
and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of work. C. All ductwork and fittings shall have a computer generated label affixed to the exterior surface of each
section, detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gauge, reinforcement type/class and connection type by systems manufacturer. Galvanizing thickness shall
be clearly stenciled on each duct section. D. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness
for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork Shop Drawings. B. Duct Access Doors. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-2 C. Flexible Duct. D. Submit a complete shop standard manual including miscellaneous materials,
and construction details for all shop fabricated materials including, but not limited to, volume dampers, turning vanes, duct sealant, equipment flexible connections, access doors,
flexible duct, acoustical duct lining, etc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for ductwork in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 1.5 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION A. Duct systems are
to be classified and constructed per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure classification system as follows: 1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 2 in. w.g. (unless
stated otherwise) for the following systems, as applicable: a. Supply duct downstream of terminal units. b. Typical low pressure supply ductwork. c. Typical return ductwork. d. Typical
low pressure exhaust ductwork. 2. Supply duct upstream of terminal units shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 3 in. w.g. unless otherwise stated or required as per below.
3. Pressure classes above 3 in. w.g. shall be provided as follows, based upon the external static pressure as scheduled for each specific fan. Scheduled External Static Pressure Pressure
Class Over 3 in. up to 4 in. w.g. 4 in. w.g. Over 4 in. up to 6 in. w.g. 6 in. w.g. Over 6 in. up to 10 in. w.g. 10 in. w.g. 1.6 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare minimum 1/4 in. scale
drawings: 1. Detailed ductwork shop drawings shall include size, layouts and pressure classifications. Any ductwork installed without benefit of review by the Engineer of Record may
be subject to replacement at the expense of the Contractor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION 233100-3 2. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a complete job. 3. Incorporate dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on
the project. 4. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom of ductwork elevations from the finished floor. 5. Indicating all volume dampers, fire
dampers, smoke dampers, damper access doors and other accessories required for a completed project. B. Call to the attention of the Engineers immediately, any major deviations from
the Contract Drawings, which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing. C. Indicate roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings.
D. Submit prints to each Contractor of the other trades for review for interference's and coordination with their work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise
called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of this section. 2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Materials: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM
A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. 2. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed
surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I". 3. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for
concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. 4. Gauges per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. B. Transverse and
longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification for duct construction. 1. Transverse joints shall be
sealed with duct joint sealant. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-4 2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or shop fabricated
rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant. C. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. D. Throat
radius on all elbows shall not be less than the dimension of the duct plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow
with turning vanes. E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used. F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork
cross-sectional area. Maximum angle in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation from square to round or flat to oval seams welded or brazed.
2.3 ROUND DUCTWORK A. Standard Round Ductwork: 1. Materials: a. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. b. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with
ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I".
c. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed
to view. d. Gauges per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Spiral lock-seam or longitudinal fusion-welded. 2. All spiral ducts shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate leakage
under pressure for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seams duct shall have fusion-welded butt seams. 3. No stovepipe will be allowed. 4. Round Ductwork Fittings: a.
All fittings fabricated per SMACNA Standards for round and flat-oval ductwork, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. b. Fittings shall have continuous, welded seams. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-5 c. 90° tees shall be conical type. 90° tees
and 45° laterals up to and including 12 in. diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of any restrictions.
d. Round taps off the bottom of rectangular ducts down to diffusers shall be made with a 45° square to round shoe-tap. 5. Elbows: a. Diameters 3 in. through 8 in.: Two-section stamped
and continuously welded elbows, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. b. Over 8 in.: Gored construction with standing seam construction and internally sealed or continuously
welded. Less than 35° - two gores, 36° to 71° - three gores, over 71° - five gores. c. Fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter. d. Adjustable elbows
are not allowed. 6. Joints: a. For duct construction pressure 3 in. w.g. or greater: 1) Round Joints: a) Unexposed Duct 3 in. - 30 in. Diameter: Connect round duct with a one piece
interior slip coupling, at least two gauges heavier than duct wall, beaded at center and fastener to duct with screws. Seal joint with an approved sealant applied continuously around
both end of coupler prior to assembling and after fastening. b) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 in. - 72 in. Diameter: Install using a three piece, gasket flangedjoint consisting
of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure band, which compress the gasket between the internal flanges. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate
Industries "Spiralmate" system or approved equal. c) Above 72 in. Diameter: Install using companion angle flanged joints as defined in Figure 3-1 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" Third Edition. Refer to manual for proper sizing and construction details. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-6 d) Dust collection systems and exposed duct 3 in. - 14 in. use a one piece, polyethylene lined gasket
connector with integrated bolt for the closure system. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Quicksleeve" or approved equal. b. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters up to 60
in. shall be by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads. c. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by slip-fit of projecting collar of the fitting
into the pipe. d. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar shall be 2 in. up to 36 in. diameter and 4 in. above 36 in. diameter. e. Pipe-to-pipe and pipe-to-fitting connections
in ductwork above 60 in. in diameter shall be made by angle ring flanges. The flange on the pipe shall be a 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. angle attached to the pipe with a continuous weld.
The fittings shall have a loose ring "Van Stone" flange. A 5/8 in. flange shall be provided to act as a gasketing surface for sealing with the angle ring being a rolled, welded ring
2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. Bolt hole spacing for angle rings shall be 6 in. centers. f. If longitudinal seam duct greater than 60 in. in diameter is supplied in lengths greater than
4 ft., one angle ring must be welded to the duct on 4 ft. centers for support. 2.4 DUCTWORK SEALING A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification shall be used for duct systems using the following
criteria: 1. Ductwork and all plenums with pressure class ratings shall be constructed to seal Class A, as required to meet the requirements of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and
with standard industry practice, including transverse joints, longitudinal seams, fitting connections, and all penetrations of the duct wall. 2. Openings for rotating shafts shall be
sealed with bushings or other devices that seal off air leakage. Pressure sensitive tape or sealing compounds shall not be used. Sealing compounds used to seal openings for rotating
shafts shall not be used. 3. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other branch connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections
to equipment. 4. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. 5. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-7 B. Duct sealant for indoor applications shall be non-fibrated, water based, Hardcast IronGrip IG-601, Ductmate
PRO Seal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP146. C. Duct sealant for outdoor applications shall be fibrated, water based, Hardcast Versa-Grip VG-102, Ductmate Fiberseal, Foster 32-17 or Childers
CP148. D. Sealants and tapes shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL181B and marked according to type. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Provide in mitered elbows as shown on
contract drawings. Vanes 36 in. or longer shall be double wall air foil type. All turning vanes shall be installed as per the latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vane size and spacing
shall be as per SMACNA. Turning vane spacing greater than SMACNA Standards is not acceptable. B. Turning vanes shall be Harper or equivalent double wall turning vanes fabricated from
the same material as the duct. C. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of
withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. D. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed
to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". Rail systems
with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted. E. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction
insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PRO-Rail Turning Vane or approved equal. 2.6 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK A. Blade Type Volume
Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide Ventlock 639 elevated dial regulator
for 2 in. insulated ductwork or equal. Provide Ventlock 635 dial regulator for non-insulated ductwork or equal. B. Multiple Blade Type Volume Dampers: Provide multiple blade volume
dampers in ductwork above 12 in. in height. 1. Heavy duty, manual balancing dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 1,500 ft. per minute, open position and
max. pressure of 3 in. w.g. close position. Ruskin MD 35 or equivalent. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-8 2. Fabrication: a. Frame: 5 in. x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hatshaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent
to 13 gauge U-channel. 3. Blades: a. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves. b. Action: Opposed. c. Orientation: Horizontal d. Material: Minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness,
galvanized steel. e. Width: Nominal 6 in. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 5. Linkage: Concealed in frame. 6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 in. diameter,
plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. 7. Control Shaft: 3/8 in. square plated steel. 8. Finish: Mill galvanized. a. Actuator: Hand quadrant for 3/8 in. square
extended shaft. b. Hand Quadrant Standoff Bracket: 2 in. standoff for insulated ductwork. c. Oillite bearings. d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, minimum 12 in. length.
C. Fire and Smoke Dampers: See "Fire and Smoke Dampers" Section. D. Automatic Air Dampers: Furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section 230923, and installed by this
Contractor. 2.7 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS A. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be constructed in compliance with NFPA Bulletin 90A, 90B and UL Standard 181 and shall be
listed and labeled as Class I Air Duct. B. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be tri-laminate: 1. Consisting of corrosion resistant galvanized steel helix encapsulated by a double
lamination of polyethylene or spun bond nylon. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
233100-9 2. Factory applied (R 6.0 or R 8.0) fiberglass exterior insulation, sheathed in a seamless, tri-directionally reinforced, metalized polyester, exterior vapor barrier. 3. R-value
shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, and certified by the Air Diffusion Council, in accordance with ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standard (1991), using
ASTM C-518, at installed wall thickness, on flat insulation only. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 4. Recommended operating pressure for flexible ductwork shall be three times maximum
system press but not less than 6 in. w.g. positive pressure for 4 in. - 20 in. dia., 5 in. wg. negative pressure through 16 in. dia., 1 in. negative pressure for 18 in. and 20 in.
dia. Maximum velocity of 5500 fpm. 5. Operating temperature range - 20°F to 250°F, intermittent @1/2 in. pos. w.g. max., -20°F to 140°F, continuous at maximum pressure. 6. Flame Spread:
25 max. smoke developed rating: 50 max. 7. Porous inner core flexible duct shall not be used. C. Static pressure and thermal performance shall be tested and certified in accordance
with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Test Code FD-72-R1 under conditions of 140°F for 164 hours and 180°F for 4 hours. D. Acoustical performance shall be certified in accordance with ASTM
E 477 and/or Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. 1. Minimum Acoustic Performance: a. The insertion loss (dB) of a 6 foot length of duct when tested in accordance with ASTM E477
at a velocity of 1000 feet per minute shall be at least: 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8 inch dia. 26 27 27 31 32 27 12 inch dia 22 26 24 31 31 20 E. Friction loss
and leakage for flexible duct only shall be certified in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. Leakage for connections shall be accordance with UL 181 requirements.
F. Basis-of-Design: Flexmaster 6B (R-6.0) or 8B (R-8.0). G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dundas-Jafine Type SPC R6.0/ Type SPC R8.0. 2. Hart & Cooley Type F216 (R-6.0)/ Type F218
(R-8.0) Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-10 3. Flexible Technologies, Inc.
Thermaflex Type M-KE (R-6.0)/ Type M-KE (R8.0) 4. Atco Rubber Products, Inc. Type 036 (R-6.0)/Type 031 (R-8.0). 5. Superior Air Ducts Type SF 082 (R-8.0) 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT ELBOW
SUPPORT A. Provide flexible duct elbow support for flexible duct connected directly to a diffuser collar. B. Elbow support shall be a radius forming brace designed to form flexible
duct into a 90° elbow not less than one duct diameter in centerline radius. C. Elbow support shall be manufactured from 100% recycled copolymer polypropylene with a universal fit of
4 in. thru 16 in. and be UL listed. D. Basis-of-Design: Titus Flexright. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basis-of-Design: Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Ductmate Industries, Inc., Duro Dyne Inc., Elgen Manufacturing, Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, water
and mildew resistant UL Standard 214. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 in. wide attached
to two (2) strips of 2-3/4-in. wide, 0.028-in. thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 in. thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Indoor System, Flexible
Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/in. in the warp and 360 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service
Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200°F. G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/in. in the warp and 440 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-11 H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors:
Glass fabric with chemicalresistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/in. in the warp and 340 lbf/in. in the filling. I. Thrust Limits: Combination
coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame:
Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor
Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-in. movement at start and stop. 2.10 ACCESS
DOORS A. General: 1. Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to prevent
condensation where applicable. 2. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal. 3. Systems 3 in. w.g. or less shall utilize
a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square framed access door. 4. Systems 4 in. w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3
of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Third Edition. 5. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Sandwich" style door or approved equal.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-12 6. All access doors shall be continuous
piano hinged type, unless noted otherwise. 7. Non-hinged only allowed where clearance to ceiling does not allow a full 90° swing. 8. Double panel insulated type when used in insulated
duct. 9. Single panel uninsulated type allowed in un-insulated duct. 10. Pressure rated according to system in which being installed. Door-to-frame and frame-to-duct gasketing. 11.
Provide specified Seal Class A or B ductwork sealing around frame, and hand adjust the latch tension for proper seal, on all access doors other than sandwich panel (Ductmate) style.
12. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. or less in depth is 12 in. x 8 in. 13. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. to 18 in. in depth is 18 in. x 14 in. 14. MINIMUM access
door size for ducts more than 18 in. in depth is 24 in. x 18 in. 15. In ducts which require multiple section fire dampers due to duct size, provide one access door for each fire damper
section. 16. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with 1/2 in. high lettering reading "SMOKE DAMPER" or "FIRE DAMPER". B. Door Types: 1. Low Pressure
Systems (2 in. w.g. pressure class): National Controlled Air ADH1, Ruskin ADH22, Vent Products 9701, Air Balance FSA-100, Safe Air SAH, Nailor. 2. Medium and High Pressure Systems
(3 in. w.g. pressure class and higher): a. Rectangular Duct: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" Style Door, or equal. b. Round Duct: Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type, or equal.
8 in. x 4 in. for ducts 14 in. and less in diameter. Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type 16 in. x 12 in. for ducts more than 14 in. in diameter. c. Furnish and install factory
supplied protector molding on cut medal edge for all Ductmate access doors. 2.11 CABLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Ductwork not required to be exterior insulated in exposed installations may
be installed using a cable suspension system. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
233100-13 B. Ductwork shall be installed using load rated, stainless steel cable suspension systems. Cables shall be pre-cut lengths, type 316 stainless steel with fused ends, and
pre-made end attachments. C. Cable grips shall be of 316 stainless steel and have an internal tamperproof cable release mechanism. D. Stress distribution saddles shall be prescribed
in addition for the support of rectangular duct on corners as necessary. E. Hangers shall have a manufacturer's published safe working load and have a 5 to 1 safety factor. F. Hang
and support ductwork as defined in the latest edition of SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible". G. Adjustable steel cable hanging system consisting of
spring loaded, serrated clamping mechanism shall be tested and certified in compliance with all applicable SMACNA standards for upper and lower attachment methods. 1. All approved systems
must be installed using matching components including steel cable, clamping mechanism and hardware approved by the manufacturer for its corresponding load rating. No Substitution of
manufacturer's components is permitted. 2. Approved systems must be installed per the manufacturer's specific instructions and must not exceed the stated working load rating at any
point throughout the system. H. Supports, bar/angle reinforcements, and other products that are not part of the duct that are manufactured of uncoated mild steel shall either be painted
with two (2) coats of primer or shall be manufactured of a galvanized equivalent material. I. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Clutcher" Cable Hanging System or Gripple
Inc. 2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube
and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Ventlock 699 or 699-2 based upon insulation thickness. C. Install duct test holes where required for
duct traverse testing and balancing purposes. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-14
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. Bracing and hanging of
ductwork shall be per SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard. B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate
only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interferences. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation
due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions. D. Keep openings continuously closed
and sealed with protective plastic wrapping during construction to prevent entrance of dirt and debris. E. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation
make systems airtight. F. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork. G. Provide necessary openings, hanger inserts, framing, chases, and recesses,
not provided by other trades. H. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream
with 45° shoe-tap extension collars. I. Provide 14 gauge sleeves for ducts passing through Mechanical Room floors. Set sleeves 4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal
watertight to floor. J. Where a return or exhaust duct is shown to be left open ended, provide hardware mesh screen at opening. K. Do not utilize flexible ductwork or connection in
any way to connect variable or constant volume boxes to ductwork. L. For duct penetrations of non-rated walls, provide sheet metal angle framing or sheet metal closure panels around
the entire perimeter of each duct wall penetration on both sides of the wall, where the gap exceeds 1/4 inch. Where the gap is less than 1/4 inch, the gap may be caulked on both sides
of the wall. Non-rated wall penetrations SHALL NOT be fire caulked under any circumstances. M. For duct penetrations of rated walls, see Specification Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical
and Electrical Requirements. N. Ductwork that is called for to be welded shall be fully welded, continuous around the entire perimeter at all joints/seams, and shall be fully airtight
and watertight. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-15 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide flexible connections for the intake and discharge connections of duct connected to fans and air handling equipment. B. Round connections are to be made with adhesive and
metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted. C. Rectangular connections shall be made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges. Attach with adhesive and mechanical
fasteners on 6 in. centers. D. Connections shall be made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so
as not to interfere with airflow through connection. E. Mechanically fastened and sealed, with specified duct sealant, at duct and equipment connections. 3.3 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND
CONNECTORS A. "Air duct" applies to conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from heating, cooling, air conditioning or ventilating equipment but not including the plenum as defined
in NFPA 90A. "Air connector" applies to conduit for transferring air between an air duct or plenum and an air terminal device or an air inlet or an air outlet as defined by the NFPA
90A. B. For round to oval connections, provide round-oval flexible adapter. C. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be provided in fully extended condition, free from kinks. D. Flexible
air ducts and connectors shall not be used in systems with entering air temperatures in excess of 250°F. E. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use only the minimum length required
to make the connection and shall be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Flexible elbows are not acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum length of 48 in., fully extended.
F. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use minimum 1/2 in. wide positive locking, steel worm drive clamp, or nylon plenum rated straps for joints and connections. One clamp or
strap for the inside core liner and one clamp or strap for the outer jacketing. When non-metallic (nylon) straps are used, they should be listed and labeled to standard UL 181B. Fastener
package should be marked UL 181 B-C. G. Collars to which flexible duct is attached shall be beaded and a minimum of 2 in. in length. Wrap twice with UL 181 tape and secure with clamp
or strap. Sleeves used for joining two sections of flexible duct shall be beaded and a minimum of 4 in. in length. The draw band shall be positioned behind the bead on the metal collar.
H. Outer vapor barrier and insulation shall be slid over inner core and collar, wrapped twice with UL 151 tape and secured with a clamp or strap. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-16 I. Connections shall be per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible", Air Diffusion Council "Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards" and NAIMA Installation Standards. J. Flexible duct shall be supported at manufacturer's
recommended intervals, but no greater distance than 2'-6" on center and prior to all 90 degree bends. Maximum permissible sag shall be 1/2 in. per foot of support spacing. Provide
a minimum of one hanger on each run of flexible duct. K. A connection to rigid duct or equipment shall be considered a support joint. Long horizontal duct runs with sharp bends shall
have additional supports before and after the bend approximately one duct diameter from the centerline of the bend. L. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall
be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case
shall the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1-1/2 in. wide. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging
method when the manufacturer's recommended procedures are followed. M. The hanger shall be strapped around the flexible duct and secured to the structure above. Hangers shall not be
attached to other mechanical or electrical objects. Hangers may be attached to an approved trapeze. Ceiling grid shall not be used to fabricate a trapeze. Support hangers shall be
installed horizontal. Screws shall not be used to penetrate the flexible duct to attach to the hanger. N. Provide flexible duct connections and splices in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions. O. Seal flexible duct connections with sealing materials listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181B. Mechanically secure connections with
approved clamping materials. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Install only in square elbows of equal dimensions. B. Install as per latest SMACNA Standards. C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot
welding, riveting or sheet metal screws. D. When installing in ductwork with internal insulation. 1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct
sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. w.g. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-17 3.5 DUCT CLEANLINESS AND CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Duct Cleanliness: 1. All ductwork on the
project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork.
2. Prior to shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered with a heavy duty, dual-ply, clear polyethylene protective film. Open ends are to be kept covered during
transport, storage, and installation. As ductwork is installed at the job site, open ends are to be covered to maintain cleanliness. 3. The film must be securely affixed to protect
against dirt and debris, and must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing the film. The film is have a elongation rating of 600% and a break strength
of 13.1 lbs./in. The film shall contain no VOC's, and shall leave no residue on duct after removal. 4. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries ProGuard (heavy duty grade clear). B. Cleaning
After Installation: 1. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass
during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA. 2. Clean external
surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted. 3. Clean debris from system before fans are turned on. 4.
Keep openings continuously closed during the construction period. 5. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces. 6. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels,
dampers, or other system parts damaged as a result of debris. 7. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt free. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROUND DUCTWORK A. Use
factory-fabricated couplings for joints. B. After the joint is slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2 in. from the joint bead for mechanical strength. C. Sealer is applied
to the outside of the joint and covering the screw heads. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
233100-18 D. Flanged joints shall be made with neoprene rubber gaskets. 3.7 TEST OF DUCTWORK A. Systems designed to operate at 3-inches w.c. and below: 25% percent of the duct system
shall be leak tested. The Consultant/Owner shall randomly choose the sections of ductwork to be tested during the Construction Phase. If any of the original sections fail the leakage
test, another 25% of the duct shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25% fails, the entire system shall be leakage tested. B. Systems designed to operate in excess
of 3-inches w.c.: The entire system shall be leak tested. C. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. D. Leakage testing shall be witnessed
by representatives from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of Record. E. Acceptance Criteria: Generally, maximum system leakage shall be specified by the Consultant per the
following recommendations: 1. Interior supply, return and general exhaust systems: 5% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 2. Interior Laboratory
exhaust systems: 2% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 3. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the 2012 ASHRAE HVAC Systems
and Equipment Handbook 3.8 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide volume dampers at all air outlets, diffusers, grilles and as noted on plans. Provide volume dampers at all low
pressure supply, return and exhaust, branch ducts and as noted on the plans. B. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements
for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings. C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork,
install with insulated "buildouts" per SMACNA. D. Install fire and smoke dampers in accordance with "Fire and Smoke Dampers" Section and applicable codes. E. Install all dampers furnished
as part of "Building Management System" Section. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
233100-19 3.9 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide for access to upstream side of duct mounted reheat coils, dampers, damper motors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, control devices,
fan bearings, and equipment requiring periodic inspection or service. Provide labels for fire and smoke dampers as called for in Part 2 - Products. B. For ducts that are too small
to install an access door of the minimum specified size, provide a 12" long section of removable ductwork for maintenance and inspection access. Removable ductwork shall be fastened
between device requiring access and next duct section with duct flanges or Donaldson Torit clamp with PVC foam seal. For ducts that are required to be insulated, provisions shall be
made to allow insulation to be easily removed and re-installed. 3.10 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom
2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct spaced per building structural system but not greater that 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required. 3.11
AIR AND WATERTIGHT DUCTWORK A. Where water and snow may accumulate on ductwork or where odors or corrosive gasses may collect, ductwork and plenums shall be made watertight by soldering,
brazing or welding of joints. Grade ducts down toward waste points and/or toward louvers. Provide valve and drain piping from low point to waste point. 1. Intake and exhaust plenums.
B. Test for Watertightness: Before concealment, apply water by hose to check for leaks, witnessed by Owner's Representative. 3.12 SMOKE DETECTION A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished
by Division 28 "Fire Alarm System". This Contractor shall install detectors located in ductwork. Clearly indicate locations of smoke detectors on the sheet metal shop drawings. B.
Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct size required with Division
28 "Fire Alarm System". 3.13 DUCT SEALING A. Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease and loose of foreign matter that could impair adhesion, using soap and water or solvent.
2. Allow surfaces to dry completely before proceeding. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
233100-20 B. Installation of Sealant System: 1. Apply sealant system to duct joints, fasteners, and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply sealant by brush,
putty knife or caulk gun, to full coverage. Remove excess adhesive immediately. 3. Completely seal duct joint, fasteners and seams without voids, to a minimum 20 mil thick wet film.
4. Apply and store at ambient temperature of 40°F to 100°F; and protect from freezing until dry. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Allow duct sealant system to cure a minimum of 72 hours
before operating the system. 2. Do not apply external duct insulation or coatings until the joints have been inspected by the Owner's Representative. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 233100-21 EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Supply, return, vent, relief, outside, general exhaust and laboratory exhaust excluding fumehood exhaust Lock forming quality, galvanized steel ASTM A653 and A924 Joints and features
as called for Accessories, dampers and air turns Same material and gauge as parent duct --------------- Field constructed apparatus casings Galvanized steel ASTM 525 Sealed airtight
END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 233313-1
SECTION 233313 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract
Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data, types, schedule of sizes, locations, and installation arrangements of all dampers. B. Submit manufacturer's UL listed installation
details for each mounting arrangement. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide work in accordance with the latest requirements of the Mechanical Code of New York State UL 555, UL 555S and UL555C.
Fire dampers shall be Underwriter's Laboratories classified and labeled. Smoke dampers and operator assemblies shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) classified and labeled as an
assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DAMPERS A. Curtain type damper of galvanized steel (304 stainless steel for ductwork containing shower room exhaust, wet location exhaust, and corrosive
fume exhaust) construction with fusible link, 20 gauge frame and 24 gauge blades. UL listed and labeled and FM Specification tested. 1. Square, rectangular, round or oval duct connection
as required by duct connections. 2. 100% free area with welded head, curtain type fire damper with blades out of the airstream. 3. 1-1/2 hour rated dampers for walls or floors rated
less than three hours. Threehour rated dampers for three and four hour walls or floors. 4. With factory fabricated UL approved sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. Sleeve seams shall
be continuously welded or sealed and the transverse joint shall be a sealed UL approved flanged duct sleeve connection. 5. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. B. Design Equipment:
Ruskin Model IBD2 Style B. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 233313-2 C. Make: Ruskin, Greenheck. 2.2 COMBINATION
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Airfoil multiblade type damper of galvanized steel construction suitable for installation in high velocity duct systems up to 3000 fpm and 4 in. s.p. with 16 gauge
hat channel frame with corner reinforcement and blades equivalent to 14 gauge, silicone rubber blade edge seals, stainless steel bearings and flexible stainless steel jamb seals. UL
listed and labeled and FM Specification tested. 1. UL listed 120 volt electric motor operator. Operator to be mounted outside of the air stream. 2. Square, rectangle, or round as
required. Duct transitions for dampers in oval ducts. 3. With factory fabricated UL approved sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. Sleeve seams shall be continuously welded or sealed
and the transverse joint shall be a sealed UL approved flanged duct sleeve connection. 4. Jackshaft penetrations shall be provided with a factory shaft seal. 5. Class I leak rating
of 4.0 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. w.g. (8.0 cfm/ft2 at 4 in. w.g.) 6. 1-1/2 hour fire rated. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. 7. Provide damper test switch and remote annunciation
indicator. 8. Provide with damper position indicator switch package, with the capability of connecting to the building automation and control system. B. Design Equipment: Ruskin
FSD60. C. Make: Ruskin, Greenheck. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS A. Provide fire dampers in all one, two and three hour rated wall and floor penetrations, as called for. B. Provide
smoke dampers as called for in penetrations of smoke barriers. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide sleeve, angles, and access doors for installation in accordance with the latest requirements
of SMACNA, NFPA, UL and damper manufacturer. B. Provide sheet metal access doors with labels, as called for in Specification Section 233100 in ductwork for dampers and accessories.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 233313-3 C. Provide ceiling or wall access doors for dampers and accessories.
D. Install dampers square and free from racking. E. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening. F. Provide bracing for multiple section assemblies to support
assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Attach multiple damper section assemblies together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install support mullions as
reinforcement between assemblies as required. G. Division 28 "Electric safety and security" will provide signal wiring and power wiring for smoke dampers. Refer to "Building Management
System" Section for additional requirements. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division "Electric" 28 "Electronic Safety and Security". Install detectors located in ductwork
within 5'-0" of the damper. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct
size and length for smoke detectors required with "Electric" 28 "Electronic Safety and Security". H. Provide insulation end seal fittings for double wall ductwork where same connects
to damper assembly. I. Provide thermal blanket in accordance to NFPA requirements at diffusers, register and grille penetrations of fire rated ceilings where fire dampers are required.
3.3 CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall certify that dampers are accessible for servicing, are installed properly, and are operational. Submit three (3) copies of signed certification
to the Owner's Representative for review. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide damper tags and charts. 1. Fasten tag to ductwork adjacent to the dampers. 2. Number each damper and make chart
listing. a. Number. b. Location. c. Air system in which they are installed. B. Submit three (3) copies of chart to the Owner's Representative for review. END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS 233600-1 SECTION 233600
VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract
Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for terminal units including room number, maximum and minimum CFM, accessories, pressure drops, discharge and sound power data by octave
band. Clearly indicate box sizes being proposed. Submit separately the controller and control interface devices being utilized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMINAL UNITS A. General Unit
Construction: 1. Unit casing shall be constructed of 22 gauge welded galvanized steel. Each unit shall be internally lined with 1/2 in. minimum 1-1/2 lb./ft.3 fiberglass insulation
which meets NFPA 90A and UL 181. Factory label each unit with size, location, minimum and maximum CFM, and calibration chart. Air terminal units shall be capable of operating at 10
in. w.g., pressure maximum without damage. Maximum casing leakage at 3 in. W.G. shall be 11 cfm. 2. Units to be certified under ARI Standard 880-94 Certification Program and carry
ARI seal. 3. Units shall be provided with factory access door option. 4. Units shall be provided with integral sound attenuators. B. Control and Volume Regulating Devices: 1. Internal
unit damper shall be constructed of galvanized steel with blade-end seals for tight shut-off with a maximum damper leakage of 7 CFM against a maximum of 3 in. w.g. Damper shall be
mounted on a galvanized steel shaft extending through the unit on torque free bearings. Terminal shall have normally open dampers. Minimum and maximum air quantities shall be factory
set, but may be field adjustable. Neither the radiated or discharge sound power levels shall exceed the ratings of design equipment as scheduled on the Contract Drawings. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS 233600-2 C. Terminal Volume Controller (Microprocessor Based): 1. Provide unit
with airflow velocity and total pressure sensor suitable for up to 3000 fpm inlet velocity. Sensor shall be averaging type with multiple sampling points on cross grids. Pressure independent
microprocessor based electronic controller shall modulate airflow to maintain space temperature. 2. Provide a 24 volt electric damper actuator. The actuator shall be reversible with
a switch and have a visual position indicator. The stroke time shall be 75 - 150 seconds at 0.53 in. lbs. Torque. The unit shall have a 3 foot long plenum rated cable. The housing
shall be NEMA type 2 with a flammability rating conforming to UL94. The actuator shall be maintenance free and have a minimum life span of 60,000 cycles. Actuator shall be Bellimo
NM24-1US, or equal. 3. Provide factory mounted transformers for controller and actuator suitable for 120 volt, 1 phase-input power. Multiple boxes (approximately 6 to 8) shall be powered
off of one terminal unit transformer through a low voltage power loop. Coordinate with the Control Contractor which terminal units require transformers. 4. Wall mounted thermistor
type electric space sensor provided by Control subcontractor. Controller shall interface with Building Management System to provide analog outputs for space temperature and airflow
and accept analog inputs position the actuator for warm-up or pull-down and change space temperature set-point for night set-back, set-up or occupancy sensor status. Controller shall
sequence reheat coil to maintain space. 5. The VAV box manufacturer shall provide the box and the airflow sensor, microprocessor based controller and damper actuator. The temperature
control subcontractor shall ship the microprocessor based controller and damper motor to the VAV box manufacturer's factory for mounting and calibration. D. Design Equipment: Titus
DESV. E. Acceptable Makes: Anemostat, Krueger, Titus. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Suspended terminal units from the building structural system independent of the
ceiling system. If this cannot be accomplished, provide additional intermediate angle iron from which the units shall be suspended. Level each unit. Access to the terminal unit controls
shall be accomplished by remove of ceiling panels or through an access door. Coordinate locations of access doors. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 233713-1 SECTION 233713 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and
services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: Submit product data including room schedule listing size,
CFM, throw, direction of throw, accessories, finish, material type, color chart, pressure drop and noise criteria. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each manufacturer shall check noise level
ratings for registers and diffusers to insure that the sizes selected will not produce noise to exceed N.C. - 24, measured at occupant level; notify Owner's Representative of problems
prior to submittal. B. Pressure drop, airflow and noise criteria selection is based on design equipment. Manufacturers not submitting design makes must provide written certification
in front of submittal that equipment submitted has been checked against and performs equal to the design make. C. Borders and frames shall be coordinated with materials and ceiling
systems to integrate with architectural ceiling details and finishes scheduled. D. Locations of ceiling mounted air terminal devices shall be coordinated with locations shown on architectural
reflected ceiling plans. E. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been
indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw and pressure drop. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR REGISTERS A. General:
1. A register is defined as a grille plus a volume damper. 2. Registers shall be installed "sight-proof" where possible, i.e.: High wall register with horizontal blades inclined up,
or along a wall with blades facing the wall. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 233713-2 3. Borders and frames
shall be of the same material as register face unless specified otherwise. B. Mounting Frames: 1. Provide with screw holes in register face punched and countersunk at factory, and mounting
frame drilled and tapped to suit. Sponge rubber gasket between frame and wall or ceiling for all surface mounted frames. 2. Frame shall be overlap type and shall be suitable for type
of ceiling where register is to be installed. C. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart) as scheduled. D. Design Equipment: Titus
unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR DIFFUSERS A. General: 1. Provide four way blow unless
otherwise noted. 2. Where manufacturer's size recommendations require duct sizes or connections differing from design, Contractor shall provide at no change in contract price. 3. Suitable
for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide square to round neck transitions as required. 5. Provide sponge rubber gasket for all surface mounted frames. B. Finishes:
1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart) as scheduled. C. Frame style shall be suitable for ceiling type in which diffuser is to be installed.
D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 233713-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLY TYPES A. Type 1- (Square Face Type): 1. Steel 22 gauge construction with round
neck. 2. Directional flow pattern as indicated. 3. Frame suitable for ceiling type. 4. 1-3/4 in. deep inlet collar for duct connection. 5. Panel Size: 24 in. x 24 in. 6. Model: Titus
TMS. B. Type 2 - (Supply Air Grille): 1. Steel 20 gauge frame construction with double deflection capability and the front blades shall be parallel to the long dimension. Solid extruded
aluminum air foil blades mounted in friction pivots for individual blade adjustment, spaced on 3/4 in. centers. 2. 1-1/4 in. wide flange with sponge rubber gasket. 3. Model: Titus
272-RL. 2.2 RETURN/EXHAUST TYPES A. Type A - (Exhaust and Return Grilles): 1. Steel construction with 22 gauge frame and blades, with horizontal bars on a 3/4 in. spacing set at 35°
fixed deflection. 2. 1-1/4 in. wide flange. 3. The blades shall be parallel to long dimension. 4. Model: Titus 355-RL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rough in or install per reflected ceiling plan or in location instructed by Owner's Representative. B. Provide approved air extractors
behind all duct mounted supply registers in exposed ductwork. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 233713-4
C. When the final connection to an exhaust or return grille is made, a 12 in. minimum height plenum box must be supplied to all grilles. Plenum dimensions shall match grille size.
Paint inside of plenum box flat black. D. Seal all supply and return registers, grilles and diffusers during construction operations to limit dust entering HVAC systems and ductwork.
Seals may be removed just prior to testing and balancing, but not without the approval of the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PENTHOUSES 233723.16-1 SECTION 233723.16 PENTHOUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the
complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A. Louvers including all blade types, finishes, and arrangements. B. Penthouses including
materials, finishes and accessories. C. Provide original color charts for selection of finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PENTHOUSES LOUVERED TYPE A. Housings shall be heavy gauge extruded
aluminum blades of the stormproof style with corners mitered and welded. B. Roof and curb caps shall be formed of heavy gauge aluminum with the entire assembly braced by interior upright
angles at the corners and along the sides. C. Provide unit with mill finish. D. Provide a curb as per Specification Section 230530. E. Provide aluminum bird screen. F. Design Equipment:
Greenheck WIH. G. Makes: Penn Ventilator, Carnes, Greenheck, Cook, Nailor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install penthouses as per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 LOUVERS
A. Size called for is approximate wall/or masonry opening size. Adjust slightly to suit construction or coursing (review architectural drawings or field conditions for rough opening
sizes.) Slope ductwork, and plenum to louver weephole or provide drain. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid PENTHOUSES 233723.16-2 B. Structural
supports shall be designed and furnished by the louver manufacturer to carry a wind load in accordance with the 2020 Building Code of New York State. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR FILTERS 234100-1 SECTION 234100 AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment
and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on the
Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Filter product data including certification date, pressure drops at the scheduled airflow, schedule of filter sizes for each system. All filter
accessories, including framing systems, fastening clips, manometers, and differential pressure gauges. B. Provide product test reports for each listed efficiency including all details
as prescribed in ASHRAE Standards 52.1 and 52.2 including testing per Appendix J. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 52-76, and UL
Standard 586-Class II requirements. Filters shall also comply with requirements of applicable State and federal agencies. Filters shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 25 and
smoke development rating of 50. 1.4 CERTIFICATION A. Submit with submittal, a test report prepared by an independent testing laboratory certifying compliance with above standards. PART
2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MAKES A. Freudeberg Filter Division/Viledon, Tri-Dim, Filtration Group, Camfil-Farr 2.2 MEDIUM EFFICIENCY AIR FILTERS (MERV 8 PLEATED TYPE) A. The filter
shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 8 and a minimum arrestance of 95% when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007. The media shall maintain
or increase in efficiency over the life of the filter. The filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 2. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR FILTERS 234100-2 B. Filter media shall be a cotton and synthetic blend, lofted to a uniform depth of 0.18 in., and formed into a uniform radial
pleats. There shall be at least 15 pleats per linear foot for the 2 in. deep filter. A welded wire grid, spot-welded on one-inch centers, treated for corrosion resistance, shall be
bonded to the downstream side of the media to maintain the radial pleat and prevent media oscillation. An enclosing frame, of no less than 28 point high wet-strength beverage board
shall provide a rigid and durable enclosure. The frame shall be bonded to the media to prevent air bypass, and include integral diagonal support members on the air entering and air
existing side to maintain uniform pleat spacing in varying airflows. C. For the 2 in. filter, initial resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.28 in. w.g. at an airflow of 500 fpm D.
Filter Thickness: As indicated in schedule. E. Design Equipment: Camfil-Farr 30/30. 2.3 MEDIUM EFFICIENCY AIR FILTERS (MERV 9 PLEATED TYPE) A. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value of MERV 9 when evaluated under ASHRAE Standard 52.2. It shall have a MERV-A of 9 when tested per Appendix J of the same standard. The media shall maintain or increase
in efficiency over the life of the filter. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 900. B. Filter media shall be two layers of polyester, lofted to a uniform
depth of 0.11 in., and formed into a uniform radial pleat. A welded wire grid, 0.020 in. in diameter, spotwelded on one-inch centers and treated for corrosion resistance, shall be
bonded to the downstream side of the media to maintain radial pleats and prevent media oscillation. An enclosing frame of no less than 28-point high wet-strength beverage board shall
provide a rigid and durable enclosure. The frame shall be bonded to the media on all frame sides to prevent air bypass. Integral diagonal support members on the air entering and air
exiting side shall be bonded to the apex of each pleat to maintain uniform pleat configuration in varying airflows. C. Initial resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.18 in. w.g. for
4 in. configurations at 500 fpm. D. Manufacturer shall guarantee the efficiency level will always be at or exceed MERV 9 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2, throughout the entire
service life of the filter. E. Manufacturer shall guarantee the filter will last 12 calendar months in applications operating at or less than 100 hours per week, before reaching 1.0
in. w.g. of static pressure across the filter OR the manufacturer shall guarantee the filter will last 9 calendar months in applications operating above 100 hours per week, before reaching
1.0 in. w.g. of static pressure across the filter. Both guarantees are to be valid at or below the rated air velocity of 500 fpm. F. Filter Thickness: As indicated in schedule. G.
Design Make: Tri-Dim Tri-Pleat Ultra. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR FILTERS 234100-3 2.4 HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS A. The
filter media shall be 100% synthetic and manufactured from three distinct layers. The prefilter layer shall be a spun bond polyester. The middle layer shall be constructed from electrostatically
spun polycarbonate microfibers. The downstream layer shall be a spunbond. Filters containing either urea-extended phenol formaldehyde binders, wet-laid microfiberglass, or polypropylene
microfibers are not acceptable. B. The filter media shall be resistant to mechanical damage caused by handling. C. The filter media packs shall be sealed to plastic end caps with hot
glue to ensure leakproof seal. D. The filter shall not contain metal parts. E. The filter media shall be hydrophobic and the filter shall operate unaffected at relative humidity up
to 100%. F. The filter shall be UL classified as to flammability, Class 2. G. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: 1. Viledon MV85: MERV 12 (80-90%); initial
resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.23" w.g at an airflow of 500 fpm. H. Design Equipment: Viledon 2.5 HOLDING FRAMES FOR BUILT-UP SYSTEMS A. Corrosion resistant 16 gauge stainless
steel holding frames. Size to accommodate filters as scheduled and called for. Equip with permanent bulb gasket and retainer clips to maintain a positive pressure seal between the
frames and the filter. B. Design Make: Clarkair B-Tite Easy Frame. 2.6 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSING A. Filter housing shall be single-stage filter system consisting of 16 gauge galvanized
steel enclosure, aluminum filter mounting track, dual-access doors, filter gaskets and seals. Inline housing depth shall not exceed 12 in. B. The housing shall be constructed of 16
gauge 304 stainless steel with pre-drilled standing flanges to facilitate attachment to other system components. Corner posts of Z-channel construction shall ensure dimensional adherence.
The housing shall be suitable for indoor installation C. The housing shall incorporate the capability of four-inch deep filtration without modification to the housing. A filter track,
of aluminum construction shall be an integral component of housing construction. The track shall accommodate a 4 in. deep pre-filter. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR FILTERS 234100-4 D. Dual access doors, swing-open type, shall include high-memory sponge neoprene gasket to facilitate a door-to-filter seal.
Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable positive sealing stainless steel corrosion resistant latches and hinges. E. The housing shall include a pneumatic fitting
to allow the installation of a static pressure gauge to evaluate pressure drop across a single filter or any combination of installed filters. F. Leakage at rated airflow, upstream
to downstream of filter, holding frame, and slide mechanism shall be less than 1% at 3.0" w.g. leakage in to or out of the housing shall be less than one half of 1% at 3.0 in. w.g.
G. Accuracy of pneumatic pressure fitting, when to evaluate a single-stage, or multiple filter stages, shall be accurate within ± 3% at 0.6 in. w.g. H. Design Make: Clark Air Systems
Side-Lock Filter Housing. 2.7 MAGNEHELIC GAUGE A. 3-7/8 in. diameter white dial diaphragm actuated air filter gauge. Guaranteed accurate to + 2% of full scale. Pointer zero adjustment.
Provide all accessories including adapters, mounting panel, pressure tips, fittings, tubing, and vent valves. B. Range: 1. Pre-filters; 0-1" wc, Dwyer Model 2001 2. Final filters;
0-2" wc, Dwyer Model 2002 C. Design Equipment: Dwyer Magnehelic Series 2000 with air filter gage accessory package. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide one set of spare filters
of each type for each system requiring a filter. Install first set of filters when units are initially installed (as opposed to started). Change filters as required during construction
period to maintain systems in a clean manner throughout the construction period. Remove dirty set and install one clean set prior to Owner occupancy. If original filters do not required
replacement, as determined by Owner's Representative, then deliver final set to Owner and obtain receipt. B. Provide proper safing around filter bank and caulk airtight. C. Install
filter frames as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide vertical stiffening bars sized and spaced per the manufacturer. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR FILTERS 234100-5 3.2 MAGNEHELIC GAUGES A. Provide for each filter set. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall
CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-1 SECTION 235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes
plate and frame heat exchangers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance
Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. C. Warranty Periods:
From Date of Substantial Completion. 1. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers: a. Plate-and-Frame Type: One (1) year. Rhodes Hall CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design Product; Subject to compliance
with these requirements to provide. Bell & Gossett heat exchanger(s) or compatible product as manufactured by: a. Sondex b. Graham c. Alfa-Laval d. Tranter e. Armstrong f. GEA g. THS,
Inc.; Technical Heat Transfer Services, Inc. B. Provide plate and frame heat exchanger with individually removable 0.5 mm, 316 stainless steel plates with epoxy coated steel frame aluminum
OSHA shroud, nitrile "presstite" glueless gaskets, nylon roller assembly. 1. General: a. Unit shall be single pass unless otherwise specified. b. Configuration: Freestanding assembly
consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one piece gaskets. c. Construction:
Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels", Division 01. d. For single pass units, all connections shall be
located on the fixed head, frame plate allowing the movable head, pressure late, to slide back and plates added, removed, or replaced from the plate pack without disturbing. e. The
design shall allow for the removal of interior plates without the removal of the preceding plates. f. Unit(s) within the scope of AHRI Standard 400 shall be certified and list the manufacturer's
AHRI part number for liquid to liquid heat exchanger. Unit(s) outside the scope of AHRI Standard 400 shall be designed according to the standard and list the manufacturer's AHRI part
number, surface area, and corresponding heat transfer coefficient. Rhodes Hall CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-3 2.
Frame: a. The frame plate and pressure plate shall be carbon steel SA 516 Grade 70. b. The frame and pressure plate shall be of sufficient thickness to meet the ASME design pressure.
Stiffeners to support brackets are not acceptable. c. Carbon steel frame components shall be painted with epoxy paint. d. Units with 3 in. or greater connections shall be unlined or
alloy lined studded ports to mate with raised face or flat faced ANSI flanges. Rubber liners are not acceptable. e. Units with 2 in. or 2-1/2 in. connections shall have carbon steel
female tapped NPT or male NPT connections if an alloy material is required. f. Units with 1 in. ports shall have carbon steel or 316 stainless steel female tapped NPT or male NPT connections
if an alloy material is required. g. Units with connections greater than 2 in. require that the thermal plates be supported by the carry bar, top bar. The guide bar, bottom bar, shall
only help properly align the plates. h. The carry and guide bar plate contact surfaces shall be stainless steel. i. Units with 2 in. connections or smaller shall allow the plates to
be supported by the guide bar, bottom bar and the carry bar, top bar, to properly align the plates. Carry and guide bars shall be steel with a zinc chromate coating. j. Provide a protective
shroud to cover the exposed top and sides of the plate pack. The shroud shall include handles to provide quicker and safer removal during maintenance. The shroud shall be aluminum
or stainless steel as required. 3. Tightening Bolts: a. Tightening bolts shall be zinc plated carbon steel SA193 B7. b. The tightening bolt assemblies shall include captive working
nuts at the pressure plate, rear head, such that the unit can be opened and closed with one wrench from the front of the unit. c. Thrust bushings (ball bearing box washers) shall be
located at all critical closing bolts on plate heat exchangers with 10 in. connections or greater. The thrust bushings shall allow for easy opening and closing of the plate heat exchanger
without damaging the epoxy coating of the follower (fixed pressure plate). Rhodes Hall CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-4
4. Plates: a. Plates shall be pressed in a one step stamping process. b. Plates shall use an integral rolled edge handing system to provide a rigid hanger device between the plate and
carry bar and guide bar. Welded on hanging brackets or stiffeners are not acceptable. c. The plate pack shall use a positive plate to plate alignment system to ensure proper plate
to gasket seals throughout the plate pack. The positive alignment system shall either be a gasket lug which fits within a plate recess on the proceeding plate (tongue in groove) to
align successive plates or an extended rolled edge hanger which nests successive plates through direct contact around the entire plate hanger. Plate designs, which only offer alignment
through contact with the carry and guide bar, are unacceptable. d. Plates shall be permanently marked to indicate plate materials and thickness. 5. Gaskets: a. All gaskets except the
gasket on the first plate shall be identical. b. The gaskets shall be a one-piece construction with a double gasket barrier at the port region. The area isolated by the double gasket
shall be vented to the atmosphere, so that a gasket failure is detected by leakage to the exterior prior to any possible cross contamination. Gaskets shall include color coded tabs
that protrude past the perimeter of the heat transfer plate in order to allow positive identification of the gasket material without opening the heat exchanger. c. When available, glue
free gaskets are preferred to glued-on gaskets. Gasket attachment methods, which break during gasket removal or plate maintenance, thus destroying the gasket is not acceptable. C.
Unit shall be ASME 'U' rated to 150 psi at 284°F. D. Unit shall be UL listed. E. Heat transfer performance as listed in schedule. F. Heat exchanger shall be constructed as required
by ASME and shall permanently display and ASME 'U' stamp. Rhodes Hall CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-5 2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hangers and Supports: 1. Custom, steel supports for mounting on floor. 2. Factor fabricated steel supports to ensure both horizontal and vertical support of heat exchanger. 3. Integral
mounting bracket. B. Heat Exchanger Insulated Shroud: 1. Provide OSHA compliant modular insulation package consisting of inner and outer panel covering all sides, top and bottom including
frame and pressure plate. 2. Shroud shall be constructed of an inner aluminum liner, 2 in. thick polyisocyanurate foam board insulation and an outer embossed aluminum panel. 3. Insulation
panels shall site in a 24 gauge galvanized steel drip tray with valved drain line. 4. Modular design shall incorporate stainless steel spring tension loop above latches that provide
a tight seal for rubber type compressed between the latches. 5. Insulation shroud shall be removable and reversible. 6. Service temperatures shall be -100°F to 250°F. 7. Panel insulation
shall meet flammability ratings under ASTM E84, E119 and UL 723, 1040 and 1715. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers. B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify
actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT-EXCHANGER
INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). 1. Constructed bases to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force
required by code. Rhodes Hall CIS 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid HEAT EXCHANGERS 235700-6 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to
concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 in. centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy coated anchor
bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service and maintenance.
B. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers. 3.4 CLEANING A. After
completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 1 SECTION 237513 AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, miscellaneous materials, and services to perform all operations required for the complete unit assembly as shown on the Contract Documents. B.
Installation by Mechanical Contractor: Provide all labor, miscellaneous materials, and services to perform all operations required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract
Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 234100 - Air Filters and Accessories 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Mechanical Contractor will be actively involved in the submittal approval
process in order to coordinate units with project requirements. Submittal shall be provided by Unit Manufacturer. B. Equipment performance data sheets and schedules. C. Submit shop
drawings on air handling units showing dimensions, weights, configurations, major component locations, access door locations, duct connection sizes and locations, and shipping split
locations. D. Materials of construction for housing and major components. E. Fan manufacturer and performance curves with operating points clearly indicated. Motor sizes and types.
F. Coil sections with sizes, rows, fin spacing, face velocity, air & fluid temperatures, flow rates, air& fluid pressure drops, and connection sizes. G. Filters indicating size, efficiency,
and pressure drop. H. Electrical data, wiring diagrams, and accessories. I. Octave band sound power levels for intake, supply and return connections, and octave band sound power levels
for radiated noise from the unit enclosure. J. Factory testing procedures. K. Operation and maintenance manuals. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 2 1.4 MANUFACTURER’S (EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S) AND GENERAL BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. It is the intent of these specifications and referenced
specification sections to provide the minimum design and performance parameters without being proprietary toward a specific equipment supplier. It is the responsibility of the listed
acceptable equipment suppliers to meet the basic intent of the specifications and drawings. The overall “box” size of Air Handling Units and Return Air Units shall not be deviated
from. It is not the option of the equipment supplier to increase or decrease the physical size of the equipment. In addition, the configuration or layout of the individual components
within the equipment cannot be modified or changed. B. Pressure drop across each filter bank shall be minimum 1.5 in. w.g. and shall be included into the internal static pressure
losses of the equipment. C. Design Equipment: Buffalo Air Handling. D. Acceptable Makes: Air Enterprises, Buffalo Air Handling Units, Environmental Air Systems. 1.5 PERFORMANCE
TESTING A. The Contractor shall retain Air Systems Balancing and Testing Service, Inc. to test and document selected performance parameters, including leakage of each air handling unit.
The unit design cfm and static pressure shall be delivered as a brake horsepower within 5% of design conditions. Multiple point temperature readings shall be taken down stream of
the mixing section to certify that temperatures do not vary by more than 10°F across the face of the preheat coil. B. Air handling unit on site Leakage Test: 1. The casing leakage test
shall verify the unit casing leakage is less than .5%of design airflow when tested at 1-1/2 times the design static pressure. The unit shall be sealed, and subject to both positive
and negative pressure. The leakage shall be measured using a calibrated orifice plate. Leakage shall not exceed 0.5% of design airflow when tested at 150% of design static pressure.
2. In the event that the actual performance of the air handling unit does not fall within the acceptable window, the unit manufacturer shall make all necessary corrections without additional
cost to the Owner, and also reimburse the Owner for the cost of any additional testing needed to document performance. 3. In the event the manufacturer cannot achieve the submitted
performance parameters and leakage, the Owner reserves the right to seek an adjustment from the manufacturer commensurate with the Owner's anticipated increased operating costs. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 3 4. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit the documented
test results directly to the Engineer. The report format and the parameters to be tested shall be as per the requirements of Specification Section 230593 – Adjusting and Balancing.
This requirement for performance testing is in addition to the adjusting and balancing requirements associated with the HVAC Contract. 1.6 FACTORY AUTHORIZED START-UP AND FACTORY JOINING
SERVICE A. The AHU Manufacturer shall provide 16 hours of factory start-up and joining service. 1.7 TRAINING A. The AHU Manufacturer shall provide 2 hours of training. 1.8 WARRANTY
A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the
date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS A. Provide air handling units to fit intended use and in locations called for. Capacity, size arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories
as called for and as necessary to obtain required results and allow for proper maintenance. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions
listed. Guaranteed sound power level ratings not exceeding those of design equipment, or as scheduled. B. All equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced to acceptable tolerances
with weights permanently fastened to fan blades, and components including the motor, installed on unit. C. Classification as designated by Unit Manufacturer or minimum requirement list
below: Total S.P. Class Up to 3 3/4 in. WG-STD I Up to 6-3/4 in. WG-STD II Up to 12-3/4 in. WG-STD III D. Vibration levels shall be factory tested and field verified. Special balancing
and structural components shall be provided to minimize harmonic vibrations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM)
237513 - 4 E. More than one manufacturer is listed as Make. Contractor must be certain that equipment submitted fits properly into indicated space conditions the same as the Design
Equipment. F. Motors: Furnished by equipment manufacturer. See Specification Section 230513 - Motors. Horsepower and type as called for from acceptable manufacturers listed. When
VAV drives are used, the motors provided shall be matched to the variable speed drive selected for use. Motor to be suitable for use as direct drive application and be matched to fan
to meet performance requirements. G. Vibration Isolation: 1. Provide vibration isolation equipment for each fan supplied inside the air handling unit enclosure. 2. Fan and Motor mounted
on a vibration isolated steel frame which is itself then fastened to the unit base. H. Fans: 1. Fans shall be AMCA 210 certified for performance and rated in accordance with AMCA 300
for sound. I. Unit to be completely pre-wired and pre-piped per drawing and specifications. J. Each AHU shipping section to incorporate an exterior 4x4 junction box with sealed conduit
into airstream section to allow control subcontractor into air handling unit without any field drilling through panel system in the field to compromise panel leakage integrity. K. All
equipment materials and workmanship shall be warranted for (12) months from date of acceptance. During the warranty period, the manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no additional
cost to the owner, any equipment, material, or workmanship in which defects mat develop. Unit casing and structural base shall be warranted against corrosion or failure under normal
operating conditions. 2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. General: 1. Provide fan sections, filter sections, mixing box, plenums, coil sections and other sections as called for and shown on the
Contract Drawings. 2. Gauges of metal and construction to be heavy enough to prevent vibration, undue noise or breathing. 3. Each coil shall be independently supported so that any one
coil can be removed without removing another coil. Coil racks to be stainless steel or aluminum. 4. Weight limitation of unit is 50 lbs./sq. ft. including all equipment shown to be
supplied by Division 15 and 16. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 5 B. Fan Sections: 1. The
equipment supplier shall provide a means to fully remove all fans for maintenance. Provide hoist and trolley assembly to allow full removal of the fans from the unit enclosure. The
mounting of the fan within the air handling unit shall be designed to allow ease of decoupling of the fan for removal. 2. All fans shall be constructed to AMCA Standards and capacity
shall be AMCA Standards 210-74 rated. 3. Arrangement 4, direct drive, aluminum wheel, airfoil centrifugal unhoused type, plenum fan, SWSI fans as called for, complete with motors, and
fan guards. Fan shaft shall be solid 1040 or 1045 hot rolled steel that is turned, ground and polished. 4. Provide flexible discharge connection between fan inlet and intake wall.
5. Provide full screen cage on unhoused fans. 6. Provide mean to facilitate (lift points, etc.) fan motor removal/replacement which do not interfere with airflow. 7. Fan Inlet Airflow
System: Provide airflow measuring devices factory mounted in fan inlets complete with flow transducer. The fan supplier shall provide an airflow measuring system on the face to the
inlet cone of the fan. a. Design Equipment: Accutrol Vortek. 8. Fan Inlet Airflow Transducer: 1) The transducer shall be a combination differential pressure transmitter, square root
extractor, scaling multiplier, and output filter with process indication, complete in a single package. 2) The measured air volume shall be locally indicated on a external mounted magnehelic
display meter scaled in CFM. 3) The transducer package shall be a factory calibrated for the flow measuring element being served. 4) A transducer with magnehelic display meter shall
be provided for each individual airflow station. 5) Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5%. 6) An output signal of 01-10 VDC or 4-20 mA shall be generated for monitoring the DDC system.
7) Design Equipment: Accutrol. 8) Make: Accutrol Vortek. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 -
6 9. Fans shall be selected to meet the overall acoustical performance (octave band sound power levels at unit connections) as scheduled in the construction documents. 10. Manufacturers:
Twin City, Greenheck or Cook. C. Hot Water / Glycol Heating Coil Sections: 1. Hot water heating coils, serpentine type, number rows and arrangement as scheduled or as required to meet
performance specifications, non-ferrous headers, same end connections with vent chamber on return end and completely drainable. Coils shall be designed for 125 psi working pressure,
and shall be designed to relieve expansion and contractions strains. 2. Coils shall be selected with a maximum face velocity of 550 FPM. 3. Vent and drain connections shall be provided
at the top of bottom of each header and shall be no less than 1/2 inch NPT. 4. 5/8 in. O.D. copper tubes not less than .035 in. wall thickness with .035 in. thick "U" bends and .0075
in. thick aluminum fins. Fin spacing shall not exceed 10 FPI. All tubes shall be seamless construction with 304 stainless steel casings; grooved connections NOT acceptable. 5. Head
pressure loss through coil shall not exceed that scheduled in the documents. 6. Coils to be individually supported by an aluminum or stainless rack system. The rack shall allow any
one (1) coil to be removed through the unit casing without disturbing any other coil. 7. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil
removal side. 8. Manufacturers: Heatcraft or Aerofin D. Chilled Water Cooling Coil Section: 1. Chilled water coils, serpentine type, number rows and arrangement as scheduled or as
required to meet performance specifications, same end connections with vent chamber on return end and completely drainable. 2. Coils shall be selected with a maximum face velocity of
450 fpm. Unit manufacturer shall assure no moisture carryover from coils at design conditions. 3. Head pressure loss through coil shall not exceed that schedule in the documents. 4.
5/8 in. O.D. copper tubes not less than .035 in. wall thickness with .035 in. thick "U" bends and .0075 in. thick aluminum fins. Fin Spacing shall not exceed 10 FPI. All tubes shall
be seamless construction with 304 stainless steel coil casing; grooved connections NOT acceptable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 7 5. Coils to be individually supported by an aluminum or stainless steel rack system. The rack shall allow any one (1) coil to be removed through
the unit casing without disturbing any other coil. 6. Units to be provided with removable panel to allow for coil removal. These panels shall be gasketed, effectively sealed without
other sealants or caulks, and shall be secured with stainless steel machine screws or other reusable fasters. Self-tapping screws are not acceptable. 7. Positively pitched type 304
stainless steel drip pan(s), minimum of 18 gauge, shall extend continuously under each coil with a minimum 3 in. overhang upstream and 12 in. of overhang downstream. Each pan shall
have its condensate piped to common exterior connection. Each coil shall be caulked and flashed in place to prevent carryover of condensate. 8. Cooling coils to be "desaturation" type
with integral row of reheat to provide separation of DB & WB temperature at all temperatures. Reheat shall not use any additional energy and be circuited integral to the coil casing.
9. Active cooling coil condensate drain connections to be a minimum 12 inches above the bottom of the air handling unit base for trapping. 10. Removable panels shall be located on
both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil removal side. 11. Manufacturers: Heatcraft or Aerofin. E. Air Handling Unit Casing: 1. Double walled, insulated, air pressure
tight, casing assemblies fabricated from insulated aluminum panels with aluminum framing members. Wall panels shall be continuously sealed (gasketed) between interior and exterior
skin with 1/2" epoxy bride. No through metal shall be allowed. Where dissimilar metals are used, they shall be dielectrically isolated from one another to prevent galvanic action.
Adhesive tapes or gaskets are not acceptable as an acceptable thermal brake or for dielectric isolation. 2. Panels shall be constructed with unpainted aluminum skins and injected foam.
Panel thickness shall be no less than 3 inches, but shall also be sufficient to: a. Limit maximum deflection to 1/200th of the panel span at the full rated unit static pressure. b.
Fully withstand positive and negative pressure of 150% of rated pressure for testing, without any failure or deterioration of performance. c. Prevent any condensation on the outside
of the unit at 75°F wet bulb temperature. 3. Aluminum panel skin thickness shall be a minimum of 0.050 in. thick for exterior sheet and 0.040 in thick for the interior sheet. Interior
sheet shall be solid. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 8 4. Interior space packed with blown
foam. Panel U-value shall not exceed .0588 BTU/HR-SQ.FT. deg. F for 3 inch panels. Insulation shall meet or exceed 3.0 pounds per cubic foot (PCF) density rating and meet erosion
requirements of UL 181 facing the airstream. The panel system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B and a certificate stating such shall be submitted to the Engineer. 5.
All sections shall have a solid liner. 6. All casing walls shall be of panel construction, including but not limited to discharge walls, mixing section walls. 7. Access doors for
serviced access between each section and as shown on Contract Drawings. 8. Unit floor in air handling sections shall be 3/16” aluminum or type 304 stainless steel safety tread plate
fully welded watertight, and designed for a min. of 100 lb. per square foot throughout the unit. Provide a floor drain in each section. Provide a 1-1/2 in. condensate drain from outside
air plenum, mixing section upstream of filters and from cooling coil. Provide a 1-1/4 in. capped drain from all other sections for cleaning. . Base of unit shall be lined with .040"
aluminum skin which shall be recessed to allow for rigging the sections in place without damage to the insulation projection. The insulation shall be a minimum 4 in. base insulation.
9. The unit shall be constructed on an all-aluminum minimum 6 in. channel base structure member sized to support all major components and the housing during rigging, handling and operation
of the unit. The base shall be designed to distribute loads properly to a suitable mounting surface and be braced to support internal components without sagging, pulsing or oil canning.
10. The unit base shall be provided with sumps in outside air sections or as indicated in the documents. Sumps shall be welded and guaranteed watertight to serve as a drain pan to
prevent water damage from the unit. 11. All equipment within the air handling unit shall be provided with a minimum 2” high base rail to raise the equipment off the unit floor for housekeeping.
Equipment mounted directly to the floor with fastener or drilled holes penetrating the water seal of the base is unacceptable. 12. Door panels constructed of same material and gauges
as panels; door sized as called for, 3 in. thick of the overlapping seal type. Doors shall be supplied with continuous non-pitching gaskets. Doors to be supplied with piano hinges
full height of door. Minimum of two latches with an inside release handle. Doors shall be assembled with hinge hardware attached and adjusted in the field. The door gaskets shall
incorporate two continuous separate gasket seals around the periphery of the door. Gasket materials shall be UV resistant, closed cell neoprene: gaskets shall be attached by adhesive
and not mechanically held in place. Door latches wedge lever type with handles inside and outside. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for
Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 9 Hinges designed for door size and weight. Doors installed to open against the air pressure. Interior doors shall have 10 in. (min.) square
thermal pane windows at 5 ft.-0 in. center line height. Doors to be minimum of 24”wide to all internal components. Provide 1” diameter test ports with screwed caps on casing upstream
and downstream of filters and coils for pressure and temperature measurement. 13. Air and watertight sleeves, caulked and insulated where pipes and conduits penetrate unit casings.
14. Provide framed openings with curved bell mouthed fittings for duct connections with exit velocities exceeding 2000fpm. Bellmouth fittings shall have a minimum smooth radius equal
to 20% of the diameter (round or oval) or shortest side (rectangular) to provide optimum performance. Bellmouths to be mounted flush with the interior edge to minimize exit loss. Where
openings are in floor, provide a removable safety grating fastened to opening framing. Supply opening safety grating to be aluminum. All floor openings shall have a 3 in. high frame
welded to the pan to prevent water from entering the building. 15. The structure shall be fully self-supporting. Where roof spans and wall loadings require additional structural strength,
it shall be furnished either by heavier roof and wall joiners, or, additional structural members capable of withstanding a differential pressure of 10 in. w.g. Unit built on unpainted
aluminum base channel. The unit base shall be insulated with 2 in. of 3 lb./cu. in. density insulation with an aluminum liner for additional sound attenuation. 16. Provide plug panels
for removal of coils. 17. Interior aluminum surfaces are not required to be painted. 18. Any equipment flashing, internal partitions or other attachments to the casing shall be made
in such a way as to ensure a permanent leak tight connection. Attachments that are bolted, screwed, or welded to or through the casing creating air bypass, air leakage or rust propagation
areas are not acceptable. 19. Multiple section units shall be bolted together in the field using stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. F. Filter Sections: 1. Refer to Specification
Section 234100 for further requirements. 2. Provide one extra full set of all final filters and pre filters. 3. Provide access doors for replacing filters and access to dampers. 4.
Provide a filter magnehelic gauge for each filterbank. Gauge to be 3-7/8 in. diameter white dial diaphragm actuated. Guaranteed accurate to + 2% of full scale. Pointer zero adjustment.
Provide all accessories including adapters, mounting panel, pressure tips, fittings, tubing, vent valves. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 10 5. Filter racks to include internal vertical stiffeners. G. Dampers: 1. Return, Exhaust and Outside Air Dampers: a. Dampers shall
be opposed blade, unless otherwise noted on drawings, aluminum, airfoil, and low leakage type design. b. Blade and frame seals shall be of extruded silicone. Seals are to be secured
in an integral slot with the aluminum extrusions. c. Bearings shall be composed of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to an aluminum hexagon blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer
bearing inserted in the frame, resulting in no metal-to-metal or metal-toplastic contact. d. Linkage hardware shall be installed in the frame side and constructed of aluminum and corrosion-resistant
, zinc-plated steel, complete with cuppoint trunnion screws for a slip-proof grip. e. Dampers are to be designed for operation in temperatures ranging between -40°F and 212°F. f. All
dampers shall be arranged within the air-handling unit to allow the actuators to be installed within the enclosure of the units and not mounted at the unit exterior unless otherwise
noted on drawings. g. Design Equipment: Tamco 1500 series, except dampers exposed to unmixed outside air shall be Tamco Series 9000. h. Make: Tamco. 2. Outside Air Flow Station: a.
Material: Element 6063-T5 anodized aluminum and casing 16 gauge G90 galvanized steel. b. Accuracy: Within ± 0.5% of actual flow through the velocity range of 200 to 1,000 fpm when
installed in accordance with published recommendation and within ±5% at a velocity of 100 fpm. Operating velocity range 200 to 1,000 fpm. c. Temperature: Provide temperature compensation
sensor to adjust for air density. d. Temperature: -40 deg F to 120 deg F. e. Humidity: 0 to 100%. f. Design Equipment: Accutrol Vortex IAQ. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM) 237513 - 11 g. Make: Paragon, Ruskin, Accutrol Vortex. 3. Air Volume/Velocity Transducers for Minimum Outside
Air and Fan Inlet Airflow Stations with NEMA 4 enclosure: a. The transducer shall be a combination differential pressure transmitter, square rood extractor, scaling multiplier, and
output filter with process indication, complete in a single package. b. The measured air volume shall be locally indicated on a door mounted LED display meter scaled in CFM. c. The
transducer package shall be a factory calibrated for the flowmeasuring element being served. d. A transducer shall be provided for each individual airflow station. e. Accuracy shall
be plus or minus 0.25%. f. An output signal of 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA shall be generated for monitoring by the DDC system. g. Design Equipment: Paragon Controls Microtrans. h. Make:
Paragon, Cambridge, Air Monitor. H. Accessories: As called for. 1. Provide outside air plenum and discharge plenum section with outlets as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide
floor drains in outside air plenum, access ahead of filter section and coil sections. 3. Unit shall be prewired for lighting. Pre-wiring shall include but not limited to: a. Single
point connections - lighting. Each connection point shall have conduit through the side of the unit for extension by others. Lighting connection shall be suitable for 120V single
phase, 20A. Unit power requirements shall not exceed the scheduled and as indicated herein. b. Lighting connection shall be for the interior lighting. This lighting shall be vapor
tight receptacle for compact fluorescent or LED type lights and provide a minimum of 40 foot candles throughout. All the lighting within the unit shall be controlled by a single centrally
located electronic timer switch equal to Woods Model #59013. 1) Receptacles: Provide a minimum of two 120 volt duplex receptacles on the exterior. All receptacles shall be ground
fault interrupting type and have a weatherproof cast aluminum cover. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid AIR HANDLING UNITS (CUSTOM)
237513 - 12 c. All electrical work and entire installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and Division 26 of these specifications. Provide thermal and moisture barrier in all
conduits penetrating to air handling areas. 4. All fans shall be wired to a junction box mounted to enclosure exterior. Installation of wiring and conduit shall be in conformance
with NEC. Variable frequency drives will be provided and installed by others. 5. All access doors at unhoused (plug) fan sections shall be provided with OSHA approved "kill" switches.
The switches shall be capable of interrupting the fan motor control circuit whenever a door is open. 6. Motor removal rails for all fan sections. 7. Service corridor to have integral
structural members to hang piping from ceiling of corridor with no sagging or deflection of ceiling. 8. Provide LED exterior light with switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All tubing for filter gauges, airflow station, etc. shall be hard copper type with soldered joints. Provide maximum of 1’-0” of polyethylene tubing at connections to fans which
are supported by vibration isolators. B. Provide proper weatherization for protection of multi-section units during any periods of outdoor storage/staging, and during unit transport.
C. Pipe coil drip pans, humidifier and outside air sections independently to nearest floor drain, minimum pipe size shall be 1-1/2 in. Provide deep seal "P" trap and unions on both
side of trap. The trap depth shall be greater than the static pressure of the section being drained. All other drain connection shall be piped with 1 in. piping manifolded together
to the nearest floor drain. Provide each drain connection with ball valve and union. D. The Contractor is responsible for cleaning of unit and repainting of any floor pans, interior
walls, exterior walls, etc. that are damaged during rigging, assembly and final piping connections. E. Air handlers shall be properly protected during shipment. Units shipped on unprotected
flat-bed trailers shall be made all-weather-tight. F. If air handlers need to be stored on site before installation within an enclosed building, all-weather-tight protection shall
be maintained until the units are within an enclosed space. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid COILS 238216.11-1
SECTION 238216.11 COILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing on coils 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide coils of proper size and rows to fit intended use and capacity as scheduled and specified. Location
as shown on Plans. Designed for 125 psi. Same end or opposite end connections as required to fit installation shown on Plans. Vertical mounted coils shall have bottom drain headers.
Duct mounted coils shall be equipped with flanges. Tag each coil at factory giving number and location. Coils completely drainable with auxiliary drain headers, if necessary. Minimum
1/2 in. drain and vent connections. Aluminum fins shall be a minimum of .0075 in. thick unless otherwise noted. Coils shall have brazed return "U" bends; bent tubes are not acceptable.
Performance certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REHEAT COILS A. Tubing shall be .025 in. thick copper and shall have a minimum outside diameter of
5/8 in. Fins shall be of aluminum and wound on tubing individually. Steel headers and galvanized steel casings. Coils shall be tested by subjecting each coil to a minimum air pressure
of 250 psig with the coil submerged in water. B. Design Equipment: Aerofin. C. Make: Aerofin, Carrier, Daikin Applied, Trane, Heatcraft, Marlo 2.2 HEAT RECOVERY HEATING COIL (SUPPLY)
A. Max face velocity 700 fpm; air-water counter flow piping arrangement; ½” minimum connections for ball valve air vents and drains at the top and bottom of each header; 5/8" OD, 0.035"
thick copper tubes and return bends; fin spacing 10 fpi max; ARI 410; 304 stainless steel casings; grooved connections NOT acceptable; non-ferrous headers. Provide with Turbulators.
B. Design Equipment: Aerofin. C. Make: Aerofin, Heatcraft, Marlo Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid COILS 238216.11-2 2.3 HEAT RECOVERY
HEATING COIL (EXHAUST) A. Max face velocity 700 fpm; air-water counter flow piping arrangement; ½” minimum connections for ball valve air vents and drains at the top and bottom of each
header; 5/8" OD, 0.035" thick copper tubes and return bends; fin spacing 10 fpi max; ARI 410; 304 stainless steel casings; grooved connections NOT acceptable; non-ferrous headers. Provide
with Turbulators. Provide with heresite coating. B. Design Equipment: Aerofin. C. Make: Aerofin, Heatcraft, Marlo PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and so as to be compatible with intent of the respective system performance requirements. Provide supporting ironwork and sheet metal safing
to assure proper installation without any bypass air around coil. B. Provide ample space during installation to allow for the removal of the coil. Provide all necessary unions, isolation
valves, flexible connectors and accessories to allow for the removal and service of the coil. C. Provide an access door upstream of all coils for inspection. Access door shall be minimum
16 x 16. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GRAVITY HEATING EQUIPMENT (HYDRONIC) 238235 - 1 SECTION 238235 GRAVITY HEATING
EQUIPMENT (HYDRONIC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on gravity heating equipment with color selection chart. Clearly indicate which equipment is being submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All equipment shall be free from expansion, noises and strains. Exposed parts to be cleaned and parkerized or phosphate coated before prime coating or baked enameling. Finish colors
as selected from manufacturer's standard colors during the submittal process. Factory-boxed and tagged by room numbers. Access doors shall be provided in cabinet at locations of valves,
flow balancers and air vents. Verify at site, the space available for each piece of equipment. Top of heating unit enclosures shall be at least 1 in. below top of windowsill. Bottom
of heating unit enclosures, unless otherwise called for, approximately 6 in. above floor and above the base molding. Refer to Owner's Representative at once, any correction, discrepancy
or suggested change in size or location. This Contractor responsible for proper location and size of recesses. Coordinate dimensions from floor to bottom of recess with other trades.
Provide framing in recess and shims, if required. B. Ratings of elements shall be in accordance with approved I=B=R test methods. C. Access doors shall be provided for adjustment of
self-contained control valves, where applicable. 2.2 FIN RADIATION A. General Requirements: 1. Complete enclosure, continuous supporting channel backplate, heating element, hangers
and accessories, as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Enclosures to run from wall-to-wall unless otherwise called. Provide necessary corner pieces, end caps, column
enclosures, butt trims, wall sleeves, with access doors. Do not leave any enclosure installed without an end trim piece. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid GRAVITY HEATING EQUIPMENT (HYDRONIC) 238235 - 2 B. Enclosures: 1. Enclosure fronts, 16 gauge furniture steel. a. Extruded aluminum anodized grille. b. Edges
and corners rounded. Individual sections not over 6 ft. No exposed areas shall have sharp edges. c. Mechanically fastened to wall bracket. d. Continuous interlocking slip joint fit
between adjoining covers. Finish shall match enclosure fronts along entire male and female sides. e. Enclosure accessories shall fit tight to wall at sides, in back plate at top and
extend back and mechanically screw to wall at bottom. 2. Support channel full backplate and supports: a. 20 gauge securely fasten to wall. b. Enclosure front braced by internal channel
braces. Minimum on either side of joint seam. c. No sheet metal screws or other fastening devices shall be visible. d. Provide wall brackets or stiffening supports adjacent to each
joint and at least every 16 in., maximum 24 in. O.C. 3. Top of cover rest on backplate only and not between wall and backplate. 4. Accessories: a. Pedestal brackets or bottom panel
when required for style. b. With worm gear driven damper control and knurled aluminum knob, where automatic control is not specified. C. Design Equipment: Sterling. D. Make: Rosemex,
Sterling, Rittling, Vulcan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Arrange piping accessories and valving fully accessible for servicing. Enclosures fastened to structure with screws
or bolts, no nailing allowed. Fasten at 6 in. O.C. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500-1 SECTION 260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic
only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in
elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered.
Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an
important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing
and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances
at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings.
Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate
all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers,
air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished
by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without
final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment.
For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in
new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement
in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS 260500-2 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25
or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable
water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. Electrical equipment
and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building.
If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install
only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets
will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and
Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct
and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final
location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened
during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop
all unused sleeves. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-3 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings
are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller
than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain
the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit.
Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar
to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed
or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated
ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate
fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly
shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal
or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit
the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit
materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details
for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-4
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide
an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or
failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling
finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural
plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish,
and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor
bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is
responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment
to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-5 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure
reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements
of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling,
venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final
connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment.
Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide
continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent
to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents
for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping
accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory
equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment.
Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished
and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specification
s for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-1 SECTION 260501 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits,
and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the
drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate
the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C.
Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit,
and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more
than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements.
In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment,
piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample
maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts
between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment
shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents,
shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections
of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature
dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be
tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories:
1. Cable Tray 2. Conductors 3. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 4. Telephone/Data Communication Outlets 5. Extension Cord Reels 6. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel; UL listed "electrical metallic
tubing." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 3. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous
length of electrogalvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit"
or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit
Company Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-3 4. Surface Metal Raceway shall be .040 in. steel UL
listed "Surface Metal Raceway". Use manufacturer's standard fittings designed to be used with the specific raceway. a. One-Piece Raceway: 1) Buff or ivory finish. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Wiremold "700" Series (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal b. Two-Piece Prewired Raceways: 1) Buff, gray, ivory or stainless steel finish. 2) Wiring Harness: a) Single
circuit NEMA 5-15R, 15 ampere, 125 volt, grounded receptacles spaced 12" on centers if required. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold 2200 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved
equal c. Two-Piece Raceways: 1) Gray finish. 2) Duplex or special receptacles as specified in wiring devices. 3) Corners, turns, tees and elbows shall have suitable turning radius for
the intended cable. 4) Provide divider in raceways utilized for power and communications. Utilize wire clips 18 in. on center to hold in the conductors/cables. 5) Utilize rounded head
screws for mounting. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold 4000 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-4 B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective
raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger.
Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall
not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel
City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction.
Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal C. Cable Trays: 1. Solid Bottom Cable Trays shall be aluminum construction, including accessories. One-piece
construction bottom and side, sheet aluminum 080 ±5%. Aluminum alloy side rails and bottom channel with flanges in standard lengths 12 ft. - 0 in. long. Wrap around type bolted connector
to connect tray sections. Cover required where indicated on Contract Documents and in all areas used as return air plenums. Use three-piece construction, consisting of a solid corrugated
bottom welded to the side rails. Provide divider strip where noted on Contract Documents. Minimum inside radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows
where required for field conditions. Horizontal and vertical bends for solid bottom trays shall have solid bottoms. Loading data: Tray Width Load Depth Usable NEMA Depth Standard
Span Lbs. Per Feet Deflection 12 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.15 in. 18 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.015 in. 18 in. 6 in. 3 in. 12C 10 ft. 144 0.15 in. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-5 2. Provide a safety-loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported
as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) P-W 2) B-Line Systems 3) Chalfant 4) Globe D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support
Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Channel shall be steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior
dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior
channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish. a.
Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard
AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors
used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size
shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked
with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2
for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2. Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters
Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application.
a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC
MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-6 Three Phase 120/208V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V Ground Green Green Green Neutral White Gray White A or L1 Black Brown Black B or
L2 Red Orange Red C or L3 Blue Yellow --- b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite F. Cable Termination Kits: 1. The shielded power cable
termination shall be capable of continuous operation at the rated voltage of the cable it is to be used on, up to 35 kV. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90°C, with an
emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The termination shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, for a Class 1 Termination. It shall be a one-piece design, where high-dielectric
constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber, munsell gray in color. The termination shall not require heat or flame for installation.
The termination kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make three terminations (except for the lugs). In addition to normal locations, the termination must be
designed for contaminated indoor and outdoor locations. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal G. Separable Splices/Apparatus Connections:
1. The shielded power cable separable insulated connector splice or 600 Amp apparatus connection shall be capable of continuous operation at 35 kV, 600 amps and 90°C, with an emergency
overload temperature rating of 130°C. The system and components shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE dead-break interfaces. The elbow (tee-module) and all other rubber components
shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber, and the connecting components shall be insulated with molded epoxy. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-7 The system shall be available as specific kits for splicing, tapping (adding-on), dead-ending and apparatus connecting. Provide
with test point for apparatus connection. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Brand w/Grounding Kit 2) Elastimold w/Grounding Kit 3) Raychem 4) Approved equal H. Permanent Splices: 1.
The shielded power cable splice must meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE and meeting the cable voltage rating. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90ºC, with an emergency overload
rating of 130ºC. The splice shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber. The splice kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make one inline splice (except for
the connector), including a solderless mechanical ground jumper. The splice shall be designed for splicing tape shielded, wire shielded, and UniShield cables without the requirement
of additional adapters. It shall be rated for indoor, outdoor and direct burial applications. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal I.
Terminal Lugs and Connectors: 1. The copper lug shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of the cable it is used on. The lug shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using
industry standard crimping tools and dies. Terminal lugs shall be solderless, pressure type with UL label for "CU/AL" conductor terminations. The lug shall be a closedend compression
(crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper. The lug shall be made with a chamfered inside end, for ease of conductor insertion. Both one and two hole lugs shall be NEMA
sized for standard stud sizes and spacing. The lug shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Scotchlok 30,000 and 31,000 Series 2) Burndy
3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-8 2. The copper conductor
connection shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of the cables it is used on. The connection shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using industry standard crimping
tools and ides. The connector shall be an inline compression (crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper. The connector shall be constructed with chamfered inside-ends
and with center cable stops. The connector shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Scotchlok 10,000 and 11,000 Series 2) Burndy 3) O.Z./Gedney
4) Thomas and Betts 3. "Split-bolt" Connectors shall be solderless type. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Kearney 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 5) Anderson 4. "TWIST ON"
Connectors shall be spiral steel spring type and insulated with vinyl cap and skirt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3-M Company "Scotch-Lok" 2) Ideal "Wing-Nuts" 3) Approved equal
J. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated
fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened (screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be
cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed.
Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-9 2. Telephone/Data Communications Outlet Boxes: a. 4 in. x 4 in. x 2-1/8 in.
minimum outlet box with single gang plaster ring with cover plate suitable for indicated communications outlet and conduit routed to cable tray. Cover plate shall match the receptacle
cover type. 3. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be
installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall
boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal K. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets: 1. Terminal and equipment cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with
removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and grey baked enamel finish.
Boxes and front shall be UL listed and shall be minimum 35 in. H x 24 in. W x 6 in. D. Provide removable insulated plywood terminal board mounted on inside back wall of cabinet. a.
Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Square D "Mono-Flat" 2) Approved equal L. Wiring Devices: 1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors, etc.)
shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle face shall be as directed by the Architect. Provide device cover plates of rounded nylon colored to match the
device in finished areas and rounded raised (Steel City 450/460 series) only for surface mounted locations in unfinished areas. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pass and Seymour 2)
Hubbell 3) Leviton Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-10 2. Toggle/Snap Switches: a. Units shall
be quiet operation, quick make/quick break, rated for 20A/120-277V/1hp at 120/277V, side/back wired, with nylon/polycarbonate toggle, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple),
ground terminal and silver alloy contacts. Units shall meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. Single pole units shall be Hubbell HBL1221, P&S 20AC1 or
Leviton 1221-2. Provide two pole, three way, four way, illuminated handle, keyed, etc. type of the same quality and model. b. Momentary Contact: Units shall be as indicated above
(20A, 277V, nylon handle, side/back wired), three position, two circuit/three wire with spring return to center position, provide where indicated and as needed for proper system operation.
Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1250, Leviton 1256 or approved equal. Provide keyed operation or pilot light where indicated. 3. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the
drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex,
20A, 125V, side/back wired, #14 to 10AWG screw terminals with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple),
ground terminal Meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall have brass mounting strap and be: Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362AX or Leviton 5362.
Industrial grade c. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 5mA interrupting ground fault level, test/reset front
buttons, full through feed capability, power off on reverse wired sensing, 10kA short circuit current rating, be tamper/weather resistant and in compliance with UL 943. Unit shall
self-test function to periodically test the components automatically and indicate a failure condition utilizing an LED. Shall be Hubbell GFR5362, P&S 2096TR or d. Special Receptacles:
provide other type receptacles as indicated herein or on the drawings. Such receptacles shall be Hubbell, P&S or Leviton highest grade available. 4. Lighting Dimmers: a. Provide lighting
dimmer where indicated suitable for the type of luminaire for even continuous control. Unit shall be rated for the indicated connected load plus 25% minimum (even when ganged). Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-11 Review luminaire schedule for type and loading. Provide for three-way
control as indicated. b. Dimmers to be Lutron "Nova" NT-(1000W minimum) with debuzzing coil for incandescent. c. Low voltage dimming shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer
for magnetic or solid state. d. LED dimmers shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer and be listed for use with the associated driver. e. Device color shall match the toggle
switch. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Lutron 2) Approved equal 5. Extension Cord Reels: a. Ceiling mounted. Positive stop action at any length, ratchet lock, and automatic rewind
spring. Provide heavy duty type with 25 ft. of #12/3 SJEO minimum cord terminating in molded high impact outlet box with wire mesh cord grip and P&S #5362A or HBL 5362 receptacle (brown),
and spring close cover plate. Provide rigid mounting support to building structure or Unistrut structures hanging from ceiling. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell HBL45123R20
(Design Make) 2) Woodhead 3) Appleton RL5000 Series 6. Occupancy/Vacancy (Automatic/Manual) Sensors: a. Sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum: 1) Zero crossing switching
operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load
to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating. 2) Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation. 3) Motion
sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 20 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-12 4) Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz. 5) UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer
full replacement warranty. 6) Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity. 7) Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at
occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation. 8) Operation shall have adjustable time delay. Occupancy sensors shall have automatic on and vacancy
sensors shall have manual on. 9) Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit. 10) Unit color shall match the project
devices except for the ceiling mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect. 11) Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air
movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment). 12) Provide components as needed for the indicated control. 13) A factory authorized
representative shall coordinate and instruct the start up services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and start up supervision and adjustment. b.
Wall Mounted - Passive Infrared (PIR): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR technology motion sensing. Selectable manual
or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm
Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS
AND METHODS 260501-13 4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact
resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Pass & Seymour Model OS300S (Design Make) b) Hubbell c) Watt Stopper d) Sensor Switch c. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and
Ultrasonic): 1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are
needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. 2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing
shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light
level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable
Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model AD2000 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch d. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching: 1) Unit shall fit into a standard
single gang electrical box, have two on/off buttons and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed
to keep it closed. To have two contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled. Selectable manual or automatic on mode. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation
December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-14 2) Minimum switching capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W. 3) The sensing shall be 180°
and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft. 4) Ambient light level sensing
(adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level. 5) High impact resistant sensor lens. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model AD2000X2 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch e. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Ultrasonic: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box,
have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize ultrasonic sensing. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be programmable
to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed
the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk):
40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing
shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-15 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor
Switch f. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C,
0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Auxiliary contact
shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit
then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50
ft. x 30 ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without
reduction in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box.
7) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch g. Ceiling Mounted - Vacancy Sensor - Dual Technology: 1) Unit shall
mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-16 Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but
only one is needed to keep it closed. Operation shall require manual operation of momentary wall switch for lighting to be switched on and automatic off. Auxiliary contact shall indicate
movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not. 2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the
ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications. 3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of: a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30
ft. b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft. c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft. 4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction
in spacing and false operation. 5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum. 6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box. 7) Provide
momentary switch(es) and any other needed equipment for indicated operation. 8) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor
Switch h. Switch Pack: 1) Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the
quantity of circuits). 2) Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic box. 3) Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) occupancy sensors.
Multiple sensors shall be able to control a single switch pack. 4) Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277VAC. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-17 i. Testing: 1) Each occupancy sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after
installation. 2) Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, etc. 3) Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner. M. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping:
1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory
for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system
seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide
firestop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system.
The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables
without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction
of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and
Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from
outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS
AND METHODS 260501-18 Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring Above 600 Volts in Indoor Dry Locations or Outdoors, Above Grade Locations: Rigid metal conduit or aluminum
conduit. 2. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 3. All Wiring Installed in Hazardous Locations: Galvanized rigid metal conduit. 4. Flexible metal
conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed
lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting
fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. 5. Surface metal raceway may be used for surface runs in
finished area where concealed conduit cannot be run or where specifically indicated on drawings. B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated,
raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be
minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems
and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free
of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature
of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 6. Concealed throughout
except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-19 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be
made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in. 9. Installed
with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be
attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication,
"Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is
placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades.
14. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location
and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 15. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place
sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 16. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor
exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. 17. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other
approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box,
junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 18. Furnish and install such supports at no additional
cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed
10 10 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-20 Conduit
Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 19. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in
order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. 20. At each flush mounted panelboard, terminal cabinet, control cabinet,
etc., provide four (4) spare 3/4 in. raceways from panelboard, etc., to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90° turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation
of raceway, and cap. 21. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to
conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings
for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. 22. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers,
environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows: a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit within space wall/separation. b. Seal
raceway penetration through the wall/separation. c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation. d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide
a complete air barrier after conductors are installed. e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer. 23. Raceway installed
in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway. C. Cable Trays: 1. Tray supports shall be hung using
threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member section; and without visible deflection.
Install cable tray level and straight. 2. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum 4 in. movements, greater if expansion movement conditions
warrant. 3. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-21 4. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors, clamps,
rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job, coordinate with the manufacturer. 5. Provide conduit to tray fitting at each conduit entrance to tray. 6.
Install divider in trays as called for. 7. Install fire stop wall frames around cable tray at penetrations through fire rated walls, and where called for. Seal these openings with
pliable fire resistant sealant. D. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed.
Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors
No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized
throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide
insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices
and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger,
use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Provide minimum
6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination. 10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. 11. Cover uninsulated
splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable
for crimp type splices. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-22 12. On termination at branch circuit
outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. 13. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without
splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through
junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible. 14. Branch circuit
conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "TyRaps" or equal. 15. Provide conduit seals
and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. 16. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical
equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings;
where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. 17. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes. 18. Provide
cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC. 19. The following should be permitted to be installed in cable tray systems only under the conditions described in their
respective National Electrical Code articles: a. Power and control tray cable. b. Other factory-assembled, Multiconductor control, signal, or power cables that and specifically approved
for installation in cable trays. c. Optical fiber cables. E. Outlet Boxes: 1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping,
mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets,
equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation.
Comply with the NEC relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS
AND METHODS 260501-23 2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of 5 ft. in any direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's
Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The above modifications
shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show
symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line. 4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from
door frame. 5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate
the wiring, splices and device(s) to be installed in accordance with the NEC. 7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled hollow cavity walls shall be installed
flush with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. Boxes shall be mechanically fastened and supported by two (2) adjacent structural members (studs) with cross brackets (Garvin
Industries Model BMB or approved equal). 8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed flush and have extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall
be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. 9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep,
galvanized sheet metal. 10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes. 11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as
required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with
appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type
with the flooring and device type. 12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of
surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices. F. Receptacles: 1. Provide hospital grade receptacle for all hospital
construction. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-24 G. Toggle Switches: 1. Switches shall be installed
in accessible locations near room/space entryway(s). 2. Provide lighted handle switches in mechanical rooms, elevator pits, electric rooms, etc. H. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install
junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes
required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. I. Equipment Mounting Heights: 1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights
measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in. b. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest
from floor) 18 in. c. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters d. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets
above electric baseboard heaters 30 in. e. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also for refrigerators 48 in. f. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, abovegrade 24 in. g. Telephone
outlets 18 in. h. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in. i. T.V. outlet 18 in. j. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in. k. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual
device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated) 80 in. to bottom of the notification device l. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max) Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-25 m. Distribution panelboards, to top of backbox 72 in. n. Terminal cabinets, control
cabinets, to top of backbox 72 in. o. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in. 2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting
heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. J. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials
necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc.
2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure
and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment
shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. K. Identification: 1. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on switchboards, main service
disconnects, transfer switches, motor control centers and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source
to panel or equipment. 2. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to
each device. 3. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment
connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, adjustable speed drives, circuit breakers,
etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 4. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc.,
for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 5. Nameplates shall be engraved black, with white core,
with Helvetica medium 3/16 in. lettering. 1/8 in. lettering is acceptable where space of 3/16 in. is not available. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260501-26 6. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone,
public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. 7. Provide signage at each electrical service room indicating "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". Utilize adhesive
backed, yellow background, block lettering signage at door. 8. Using adhesive backed printed tape label all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation
and circuit number. Tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates. L. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches,
fuses, etc. 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform
the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt
motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained.
Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-1 SECTION 260526 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system equal to or
exceeding the requirements of NEC and as indicated in the contract documents. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, busway, wire ways, cable
trays, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground
fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system. B. Provide solid grounding of building structures
and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Types of grounding systems
include the following: 1. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar 2. Electrical Equipment Grounding 3. Telecommunications Grounding 4. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control
and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment
specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where
"or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified
elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the NEC by Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding conductors,
bonding conductors, jumpers, grounded conductors, etc. shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. B. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1.
Ground connectors. 2. Ground bars. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Exposed grounding components such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc.,
shall be bare copper unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grounding conductors in raceway with 600V circuiting shall be insulated to match the circuit conductors with green color. 3. Grounding
conductor size shall be as indicated or as required by the NEC whichever is larger, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise indicated. Sizing shall take into
account circuit voltage drop. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Same make as for 600 volt conductors. B. Connectors, Clamps and Terminals: 1. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be
made of copper alloy or silicon bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. Bolts and washers (Belleville) shall be of comparable material
or stainless steel. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Hubbell Anderson Corp. 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Approved equal 2. Exothermic Welds: a. Provide exothermic welds designed for
size and type of intended cable, rods, structure, etc. Solder prohibited for connections, except for medium and high voltage cable metallic tape shields (utilize mechanical and solder).
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Erico "Cadweld" Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-3 2) Burndy "ThermOweld" 3) Approved
equal 3. Pipe Clamp: a. Pipe clamp for bonding to pipe type electrode (water pipe, etc.) shall be a suitably sized copper alloy clamp. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy GAR-BU
2) O-Z Gedney Type CG 3) Burndy "Durium" 4) AFL Global "Everdur" 5) Approved equal 4. Flexible Strap: a. Flexible grounding straps shall be of braided high conductivity copper with
two hole connector. Strap shall have equal to or greater than ampacity of the system it is bonding to. Strap shall provide flexibility in all directions when installed properly. b.
Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) OZ Gedney 3) Approved equal C. Ground Bars 1. Provide ground bars where indicated. Ground bars shall be: a. 98% conductive copper, minimum. b.
4 in. x 1/4 in. thick minimum with length as indicated with minimum 36 in. for electric room/MDF and all other minimum of 24 in. c. Standard NEMA bolt hole patterns with maximum quantity
of lug locations. Spacing of 1-1/8 in. apart. 2. Bar shall be mounted to an accessible wall location with galvanized steel hardware and 2000V rated insulators. Mounting shall be suitable
for full complement of cabling. 3. Unit shall conform to EIA/TIA standards. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-4 b. Newton Instrument c. Burndy d. Harger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: 1. Provide grounding conductor(s) with all
power circuits. Conductor shall be sized as indicated or as required by the NEC as a minimum and shall be terminated on the equipment, device, enclosure, etc. grounding terminal.
Conductor size shall be for the entire length unless approved by the Engineer where oversized for voltage drop. 2. Conductors above grade to ground electrodes (water piping, structural
column, etc.) and to equipment (service entrance, ground bars, ground halos, etc.) shall be installed in metallic conduit with ends bonded to the conduit. 3. Grounding conductors shall
be installed to have a minimum radius of 3 in. 4. Grounding conductors in a raceway system shall be terminated/bonded to each box, cabinet, enclosure, etc. through which it passes
or terminates. 5. Grounding conductors routed with underground circuits shall be bonded to each ground electrode and metallic cable support system within the raceway system including
pull and access locations. 6. Stranded conductors penetrating vapor barriers, foundations, slab on grade and water stop membranes shall have the interstitial spaces between strands
filled with solder 4 in. beyond the membrane each side. The conductor shall be sealed to the membrane with a manufacturer approved method. B. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports,
cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and
in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system. 2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and
enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type. Utilize grounding bushings as specified elsewhere in these
specifications. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-5 3. Conduit which runs to or from boxes, cabinets, or enclosures
having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding
jumpers connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. 4. Conduit expansion joints
and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC. C. Connectors Clamps and Terminals: 1. Connectors utilized above
grade in dry accessible locations shall be mechanical or exothermic type. 2. Connectors in damp locations, below grade or if not indicated shall be exothermic type. 3. Clean the area
near the connecting surfaces prior to any connection to ensure effective contact. Cleaning shall be to the bare metal. Wire brush area if needed to remove rust scale paint, dirt,
etc. to expose bare metal. 4. Exothermic connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested with heavy blow of a five pound sledge. D. Flexible
Strap: 1. Flexible straps shall be used when bonding vibrating/moveable equipment, with expansion fittings and where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Sufficient slack shall be provided
to compensate for the anticipated vibration, movement and expansion. E. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. The neutral (grounded) conductor of each low voltage, single and/or polyphase
system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected to ground at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear
to the system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by the NEC. Ground connection shall be to the building grounding system, building
steel, building water service, building concrete reinforcement and as indicated. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary
side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to the enclosure and secondary neutral bushing, to all electrical utilization and distribution equipment; insulation shall
be same type as phase conductors. Transformer enclosures shall be bonded to the primary and secondary circuit grounding conductor. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020
M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-6 3. Equipment grounding conductors shall extend from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the source panelboard, switchboard,
transformer, or switchgear. F. Communications Rooms: 1. For each building communications room or closet provide one (1) wall mounted ground bar bonded to the main building ground bar
or electrical service ground with insulated #2/0 AWG conductor. 2. Local cable trays, equipment racks, etc. shall be bonded to the ground bar with insulated #6AWG minimum. G. Grounding
and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit from building's main service equipment or grounding bus to main metal
water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange
using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each
aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 3.2 GROUND TERMINAL BUS INSTALLATION A. Install ground terminal bar in rooms where shown on the drawings.
Mount bar 18 in. above finished floor by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 in. long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two (2) supports 18 in. on center. Connect
all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar. B. Label grounding conductors terminated to bus for
equipment, location, electrode, etc served. 3.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete telecommunications grounding electrode system with room
grounding buses, grounding electrodes and interconnecting cables per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607A. B. Bond metallic telecommunications pathways (e.g. conduit, sleeves, cable trays, fire-rated
assemblies, etc.) to ground. Use structural steel where available. When a bonding conductor is installed in metallic conduit, the bonding conductor must be bonded to the conduit at
both ends. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid GROUNDING 260526-7 C. All exterior/underground terminals shall be made with exothermic
welds or compression connectors. D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data and other communication equipment, provide #4 AWG minimum insulated grounding
conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location. 1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding
conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.4 TESTS A. Test the building ground system before backfilling to ensure continuity and determine system resistance value. B. Testing procedure
shall be a fall of potential type with a moving auxiliary electrode in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 and reviewed/approved by the Engineer. Sufficient test points shall be taken
for accurate resistance value. C. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, no earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Provide tabulated test results indicating distance between
rods and resistance readings on a plotted graph. D. Test each ground electrode system separately prior to connection to the system or main building ground bar. Test each system ground
electrode system a second time after backfilling has occurred and all final connections (building steel, water service, etc.) have been made. E. Soil type, date, time, meter manufacturer/model
number, person performing the test, test witnesses and most recent rainfall shall be noted in test submittal. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 262000-1 SECTION 262000 ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a complete distribution system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship,
that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall
be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment
types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that
of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will
be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of
authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and
IEEE Standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following product data/information: 1. Manufacturer and equipment type. 2. Standard catalog information sheet. 3. Detailed shop drawings
indicating plan, elevation, end and isometric views. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly shown and dimensioned on the drawings. 4. Complete Bill of Materials. 5. All relevant
ratings including, but not limited to, voltage, current, interrupting and withstand. 6. Overcurrent Device Information. Model number, available settings, setting ranges, capabilities,
etc. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 262000-2 7. Submit available and final settings, programming and adjustments.
B. Submit product data and information for the following equipment, materials, products, etc.: 1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 2. Enclosed circuit breakers. 3. Disconnect
switches. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 and a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS A. Branch Circuit Panelboards (480Y/277 volt, 208Y/120 volt, 240/120 volts): 1. Provide branch circuit panelboard as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located
on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled. 2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper.
Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such
ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. 3. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition of connectors
or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboard. Bus connections shall be bolt-on. 4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit
current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule or on the plans. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. Reducing
breaker ratings on the basis of series rating is not acceptable. 5. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be specified
in UL Standard 50 cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, stainless steel, cylinder
type lock with catch and spring-loaded door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame
and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust inhibiting iron phosphate sealer and
baked enamel finish. Minimum box width shall be 20 in. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 262000-3 Provide
door-in-door construction. Panelboard to be keyed to match the Owner's existing system. 6. Panelboards with main circuit breaker shall have inherent and listed coordination of the
main and branch circuit breakers. 7. Ratings shall be as indicted on the Panelboard Schedule. 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable: a. 480Y/277 Volt: 1) Square D "NF" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL2" 3) General Electric by ABB "AE" b. 208Y/120 Volt and 240/120 Volt: 1) Square D "NQ"
- Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL1" 3) General Electric by ABB "AQ" B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers below 400 amp frame shall be molded case with inverse time and
instantaneous tripping functions, unless indicated otherwise in contract documents. 2. Listed combination of coordinated circuit breakers shall be verified by the equipment manufacturer
utilizing published data sheets. Confirm listings shall be submitted. 3. Lugs shall be mechanical, rated for 60/75° AL/Cu. 4. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break,
thermal-magnetic and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V
ac or 277 V ac and carry the SWD marking. 5. Ratings shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following
manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D Micrologic trip unit - Design Make. b. Eaton Corporation Optim 550 trip units for circuit breakers 400 - 1600 amp frame or RMS 610 trip units
for 2000 amp frame to 6000 amp frame c. General Electric Spectra RMS or MicroVersa trip unit Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC
DISTRIBUTION 262000-4 7. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic type, ratings as noted, with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism, quick
make/quick break action and positive handle indication. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual
thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pose. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C
and shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Breakers shall have removable lugs, UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be installed in
NEMA 1 general purpose, surface enclosures, unless otherwise noted. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1)
Square D 2) Cutler Hammer 3) General Electric by ABB C. Disconnect Switches: 1. Shall be heavy-duty type three-pole, with "Quick Make/Quick Break" operating handle mechanically interlocked
with the cover, horsepower and voltage rated to match equipment served. Where indicated switches shall be provided with dualelement, time delay, rejection type fuses. Switches shall
be installed in NEMA 1 for indoor use, NEMA 3R for outdoor use. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Provide neutral bar in single phase or three phase, four wire
circuits, and ground bar in all switches. Provide auxiliary contacts where called for. 2. All disconnects connected downstream of ASD's shall have a normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts which shall be wired to the ASD to indicate disconnect is open. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are
acceptable: a. Square-D - Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer c. General Electric PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be grounded per the NEC. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor
Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 262000-5 B. Electrical distribution equipment shall have lugs/terminations suitable for the indicated
conductor size. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop and where approved by the Engineer it shall be allowed to reduce the conductor size using hydraulically crimpled
splice in a box next to the distribution equipment to allow for standard lug termination. C. Install dry-type transformers with adequate clearances for proper ventilation. Bolt floor
mounted transformer to pad. D. Distribution switchboards, motor control centers and floor mounted dry-type transformers shall be mounted on 4 in. high concrete pads which shall extend
3 in. on all sides. Securely bolt the unit to the pads for proper horizontal and vertical alignment. E. Coordinate transformer pad dimensions with transformer manufacturer's requirements.
Coordinate transformer pad locations, dimensions and details with General Contractor. F. Provide pad lockable branch circuit breaker device to hold circuit breaker in the closed position,
but not prevent overcurrent protection, for all branch circuits serving fire alarm controls panels, emergency lighting and life safety branch circuits. G. Identification: 1. Identify
all items of equipment as described in Section 260501-3.1, Identification. Identification shall be provided for switchboards, panelboards, transformers, ASD's, motor starters, disconnect
switches, enclosed circuit breakers, switchboard main/distribution breakers, MCC's automatic transfer switches, UPS's, generators, surge suppression devices, control panels, switchgear,
etc. 2. Switchboards, panelboards, MCC's, switchgear, etc. shall have a label indicating name/tag ID, feeder source, conductor color convention and for service entrance locations
the available short circuit current. 3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD TEST A. Conduct a load test prior to request for final payment and comply with the following: 1. Energize maximum normal light
and power load for a period of two hours when scheduled. 2. Record voltage at service and at each panel. 3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders. 4. Adjust transformer taps
as directed by engineer after review of report. 5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment. 6. Owner's Representative or Site Representative shall witness the test. Rhodes
Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 262000-6 7. Before final acceptance specified test shall be completed to the satisfaction
of the Owner's Representative who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of such additional tests as deemed necessary in order to
determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Additional tests required by the Owner's Representative shall be provided at no additional cost. Protective
equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrated their workability and operation. 3.3 CLEANING A. At the completion of the project, while equipment is de-energized,
it shall be thoroughly cleaned to a shipped condition using methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize vacuum for cleaning and not compressed gas. 3.4
SPARE PARTS A. Deliver loose equipment to the Owner and obtain receipt for fuses, keys to panelboards, etc. 3.5 DISCONNECT DEVICES A. All disconnect devices downstream of ASD's: Provide
wiring, conduit and connections between ASD and disconnect auxiliary switch to ASD. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
LIGHTING 265000-1 SECTION 265000 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide interior and exterior lighting systems, including luminaires, hangers, supports, fittings,
lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents for complete and operational systems. The lighting layouts on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Refer
to architectural "Reflected Ceiling Plans" for exact location of interior luminaires. Luminaires, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling in which they
are to be installed. Verify the ceiling construction details and provide luminaires suitable for the respective ceiling types and room finish schedule. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following
standards, criteria, codes, etc. shall be followed in the manufacture and installation of the lighting systems. 1. NFPA 2. NEC 3. IESNA 4. NEMA 5. ANSI 6. UL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaires shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule". Luminaire types, appearance, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the specified manufacturer
and associated series or catalog number listed in the "Luminaire Schedule". Products of other listed acceptable manufacturers shall be equivalent in every way to that of the luminaire
specified. The Engineer reserves the right to disapprove any luminaire type submitted which they feel is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the luminaire specified.
B. Manufacturer's luminaire series or catalog numbers listed in the "Luminaire Schedule" indicate quality, type, and style, but may not cover required special design details. Provide
luminaires having such special details as noted in the "Luminaire Schedule", as indicated by the specified luminaire model number and as required for proper installation. C. All luminaires
shall be new and bear a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) label for the service intended. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid LIGHTING 265000-2 D. Luminaires shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the type of luminaires specified and shall be the manufacturer's
latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. E. Verify the availability of all luminaires proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting
same for approval. The discontinuance of production of any luminaire after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved luminaire of
comparable quality and design at no additional cost. F. Photometric and operational data shall be provided only by qualified and certified organizations. Certification documentation
shall be submitted with the luminaire information. G. Should there be any difference between drawings and schedules, secure from Architect/Engineer such information as necessary prior
to providing proposal. When finishes are not definitely specified, they shall be as selected by the Architect and not be limited to standard finishes. H. Locations indicated for luminaires
are approximate. Field coordinate exact locations as near as possible to the location indicated. Coordinate with the Engineer for any major location changes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product
Data: For each luminaire type, include in a single submittal, in order of luminaire designation, the catalog "cut" sheet with complete manufacturer and model number. Product data should
include the following: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number. 2. Features, accessories, materials and finishes. 3. Physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Life, power input,
output (lumens, distribution, CCT, and CRI) and energyefficiency data. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient
of utilization complete values, IES distribution hard and electronic copy, candlepower distribution by angle and luminaire efficiency). Format shall be in accordance with IES TM-27.
6. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams between luminaires and controllers. 7. Lens/Louver Type. 8. Driver/ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating,
overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING
265000-3 9. Certification of IES LM-79, IES LM-80 and TM-21 testing for LED luminaires. Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IES LM and TM standards. 10. Warranty. B.
Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings in accordance with Section 260500. Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the
ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structure members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical
tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including other luminaires, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, ceiling mounted projectors,
etc. C. Color Chips: Provide color chips of available finishes for luminaires upon request of Architect/Engineer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Luminaires and equipment shall
be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed from the site immediately and be replaced
with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected
from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE
REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division hazard by a NRTL. C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and UL 8750.
D. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2.2 LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminaries
specified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGBW systems as indicated on the luminaire schedule. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING 265000-4 B. Luminaires shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, drivers, connectors, terminators and accessories required
for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulse width modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection. C. Provide dimming down to 10% as a minimum,
or to percentage indicated or called for on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the dimming control shall be a 0-10VDC signal D. LED luminaires shall be high brightness and
binned for forward voltage, luminous flux and wavelength. E. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input, luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt),
color temperature and color rendering index), IESNA LM-80 (L70, output luminous maintenance, 10,000 hour minimum test, calculation method is not acceptable) and IESNA TM-21/28. Luminaire
output shall be a minimum of 100 lumens/watt. Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 70% output. Testing shall be performed by a US Department of Energy (DOE) accredited
laboratory. F. Drivers shall be solid state Class 1 power supply/driver with universal input (120-277V). The system shall have a minimum 90% power factor, 3.5 maximum crest factor,
minimum efficiency of 90%, a maximum of 20% THD and overload protection. Adequate heat sink capability shall be provided to ensure the rated life. Unit shall meet FCC rules and regulations.
G. Where indicated luminaires shall have color tuning capability and control. System to have separate dimming (5-100%) and color (3000K to 5000K, or as indicated on drawings) adjustability.
Control shall be Dali or DMX512 for controllability as indicated. The system shall utilize the most recent settings when energized. H. The luminaire (to include LED sources and
drivers) shall have a full five (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor. 1. Acceptable LED Node Manufacturers: a. Philips b. Osram c. Cree d. Nichea e. Lumiled 2.3 EXIT
LUMINAIRES: A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Electrical characteristics: a. LED type for 120/277 volt supply. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid LIGHTING 265000-5 b. Use two LED strips for indirect illumination of the face. Meet or exceed illumination requirements of NFPA 101, and all of the requirements of UL924.
c. Maximum input power of 5 watts per illuminated face. 2. Construction: a. Red letters. b. Provide Universal mount unit. c. Provide single or double face and arrows as indicated on
Contract Documents. 3. Design Equipment: a. Simkar SLEDARW or approved equal. 2.4 LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal
components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light
leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Lenses: 1. Shall be listed materials tested in accordance with ASTM D-635, "Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position" and burns less than 2/5 inches per minute. 2. The products shall have a smoke density of less than 75 when tested in accordance
with ASTM D-2843, standard test method for "Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics". 3. The flame spread rating shall not exceed 0-25 and smoke developed rating
shall not exceed 450 in accordance with ASTM E-84, standard test method for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 4. Self-ignition shall not occur below 600°F, in
accordance with ASTM D-1929, standard test method for "Ignition Properties of Plastics". Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING
265000-6 5. Materials shall remain in place 15 minutes at 175°F and fall from frame at 200° below ignition temperature in accordance with ASTM D-648, "Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load". 2.5 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE A. Luminaire schedule is found on the contract drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire
and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with
NECA 1. B. All luminaires shall be installed as per manufacturer furnished installation instructions. C. Provide for every luminaire as shown on the plans, or as scheduled on the drawings.
D. Location of all ceiling and wall mounted luminaires shall be as indicated on the Architectural and Electrical drawings. The contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and
material prior to ordering. E. Provide luminaires with an IC rating for luminaires installed in direct contact with insulation. F. Provide plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flanged
frames for drywall ceilings. G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. H. Luminaires shall be suitable and as recommended by
the manufacturer for the actual intended mounting method and materials. I. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning
and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING
265000-7 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
J. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush
with finished surface. K. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls, to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members, or using through
bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. L. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Pendant and Rods: a. Pendant mount luminaires from
1/4 in. threaded rods of required length. b. Brace pendants and rods longer than 48 inches to limit swinging. 2. Aircraft Cable: a. Cables shall be 1/16 in. aircraft cable with end
safety fittings. Cable shall be provided with 2 in. diameter mini-canopy and threaded coupler for attachment to a 1/4 in.-20 threaded stud extending 3/4 in. below ceiling. b. Cable
assembly shall include a spring-loaded adjustment device mounted in the fixture. c. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required supports for cable attachment. d. For
cord feed to the luminaire provide continuous cord clip of matching color to attach the cord to the cable. e. Support per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Support stem mounted, single
unit luminaires with approved outlet box and accessories that hold tem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved
devices. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING 265000-8 4. Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point of continuous rows of
luminaires and tubing, rod, or wire support for suspension for each unit of length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. M. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to
any required outlet box. 2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
Utilize #10 steel wire; similar to that used to support the ceiling grid. 3. Provide UL listed seismic hold-down clips and fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near
each luminaire corner. 4. Install luminaires of sizes less than ceiling grid as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel and support luminaire independently
with at least two metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. N. Provide all necessary accessories for "end-to-end" mounting where continuous rows of luminaires are indicated.
All luminaire assemblies shall be grounded. O. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if luminaires are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in
luminaire raceway. P. New luminaires may be provided to replace existing luminaires indicated to remain or be reused, subject to shop drawing approval. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground all non-current
carrying parts of all lighting luminaires. B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for this purpose. 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately
prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material,
finger marks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After
installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LIGHTING 265000-9 2. Test of Emergency Lighting: Under supervision of Engineer, interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test
and inspection reports. D. Replace luminaires damaged during shipment, construction, or installation. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section
260936 "Lighting Controls." 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Provide adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Adjustment may be required during hours of darkness.
B. Final distribution shall be acceptable to the Owner and may take several attempts. 3.8 REMOVAL OF BALLASTS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. Assume ballasts contain PCB material unless
labeled otherwise or test samples show materials are not PCB; submit a test report. Remove all ballasts from existing luminaires indicated on contract documents. Dispose of all ballasts
which do not have non PCB labels in PCB containers and pay all costs to have containers taken to EPA approved incinerators and disposed of all EPA regulations. Follow all EPA regulations
for transporting material. If ballast has leaked in existing luminaires, remove material deposited in luminaire and dispose of those materials as indicated above. Provide documentation
verifying disposal of PCB contaminated ballasts. 3.9 REMOVAL OF LAMPS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES A. The Contractor shall employ the service of a certified disposal/recycling service company
to dispose of all removed fluorescent and/or HID lamps. All disposal procedures shall be performed in accordance with EPA Requirements and Subtitle C for the disposal of mercury contaminated
lamps. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
272100-1 SECTION 272100 LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area Network
(LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents. B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the
Data Network System. C. Basic Intent: 1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and
connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources. 2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings.
3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a fiber optic cable backbone.
From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected. 4. Rack mounted enclosure shall be used as termination points for all
fiber optic cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber. 5. Patch panels shall be
used as termination points for all data cables and rack mounted enclosures for the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized
for fiber. D. Description of System: 1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents: a. Data network shall be compatible
with existing network configuration and characteristics. b. Campus service to the building(s). c. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution. d. Intermediate
Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling distribution. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-2
e. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to the IDFs. f. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution as noted on Construction
Drawings. g. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment. h. Power for the telecommunication rooms. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat
and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control
and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. C. Installation shall be accordance
with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured,
assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards. E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed. F. The
system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation
can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products,
for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day; 365 days per
year and staff must be adequate to respond within two (2) hours of an emergency call. 4. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 5. Employ
service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-3 6. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance
of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. 7.
Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use. a. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary
use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional
cost. b. System shall be reprogrammed three months after occupancy/system turn over to incorporate all Owner desired modifications. 8. Any system being extended or connected to an
existing system shall be tested for full functionality prior to beginning work and at the completion. G. Contractor Qualifications: 1. This Contractor shall be a certified installer
for the proposed equipment/system manufacturer(s) and be Panduit and Corning certified ITS Installer 2, Copper and Optical Fiber and shall be certified to terminate indicated fiber
connectors. 2. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3) similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius.
H. Installer Qualifications: 1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by Panduit and Corning on staff. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized
submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in: 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components. 2. Detailed description
of system operation. 3. Itemized list of all features and functions. 4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms. 5. Wiring diagrams showing
typical connections for equipment. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-4 6. Contractor certification
and qualifications. 7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types. 8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have
been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year. 9. Warranty information. 10. System test reports. 11. Provide scaled
elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface
equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications. B. The complete
system shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment cabinets and racks. 2. Patch panels and patch cables. 3. Wire management. 4. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 5.
Horizontal cabling. 6. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 7. Terminations and testing. 8. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 9. Firestopping. 10. Router. 11.
Core switch. 12. Edge switches. 13. Fringe switches. 14. UPS units. 15. Wireless Network System. 16. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 17. Training and system programming. C. Owner shall
provide the network electronics. 1.5 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-5 B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of
one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the
customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. E. Contractor to submit cable records to Panduit for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE A.
Category 6 UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed.
3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2
and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed 0.365 in. 7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8.
Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA
T568 polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing at 250 MHz. The
following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length. a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance. b. Return loss > 20.0 dB. Rhodes Hall 5th
Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-6 c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4
dB). e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB. f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB). g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2
dB (21.8 dB). h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF.
j. Delay < 490 ns. k. Delay skew < 44 ns. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer. 12. Acceptable
Manufacturers: a. Panduit Genspeed 6000 b. Berk-Tek Lanmark 1000 c. Comm Scope - Systimax 1071E B. Augmented Category 6A UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification
tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall
be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall
meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed .215
in. x .290 in. 7. Pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
272100-7 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.2 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision
of the TIA/EIA T568A polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 tested
at 500 MHz. Testing parameters as follows: a. Less than 21.0 ohm per 100 m DC resistance. b. Return loss > 10.0 dB/100m at 500 MHz. c. Insertion loss < 43.8 dB/100m at 500 MHz. d.
Near end cross talk (NEXT) > 26.7 dB at 500 MHz. e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT) > 23.8 dB at 500 MHz. f. Attenuation to cross talk ration far end (ACRF) > 10.2 dB at 500
MHz. g. Power sum - attenuation to cross talk ratio (PS-ACRF) > 7.2 dB at 500 MZz. h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The
capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 65.6 pF per 100 meters. j. Delay < 490 ns at 100MHz. k. Delay skew < 44 ns at 100MHz. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2
augmented Category 6 (Cat 6A) compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacture to 500 MHz. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Berk-Tek Lanmark -XTP b. Comm Scope-systimax
1091B C. Fiber Optic Singlemode Indoor Cable: 1. Cable: 8.3 micron core of graded index glass. Cladding to have 125 micron diameter. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-8 2. Maximum attenuation /3300 ft. for each strand of fiber in the cable at temperatures ranging from -40°C
to 70°. a. 850 nM: 3.5 dB b. 1300 nM: 1.5 dB 3. Minimum Bandwidth/3300 ft. a. 850 nM: 160 MHz b. 1300 nM: 500 Mhz 4. Meet or exceed requirements for FDDI, and TIA/EIA 568B. 5. Six
(6) strand fiber cable consisting of: a. The fiber. b. Tight buffer. c. Thermoplastic jacket. d. Aramid strength member. e. Outer jacket. f. Minimum Bend Radius: 1) Installation 15
x O.D. 2) Long term 10 x O.D. g. Maximum Loading: 1) Installation 660 pounds. 2) Long term 330 pounds. 6. The cables shall be tight buffer design with all dielectric construction. 7.
All horizontal fiber shall be installed in plenum rated inner duct on J hooks or EMT. a. Raceway shall be labeled on 10 ft. centers as "Fiber Optic Cable". 8. All fibers shall be terminated
with compatible connectors in patch panel as specified. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning Cable Systems MIC clearCurve. 2.2 PATCH PANELS A. UTP Cable Patch Panels: 1. All panels
should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157
Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-9 2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance
and Category to match the cabling. 3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets. a. Contractor shall provide Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit
CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the
front. No substitutions allowed. b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future installation.
4. Jacks shall be Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations, T568A only. No substitutions allowed. 5. Panels shall have factory labels for
each port. 6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568A standards and dressed in a neat workmanship way. Match the Owner's standard configuration. 7. Modular jacks shall be
mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss. 8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack.
9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Provide fiber optic rack mounted enclosure in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated. 2. Provide SC or LC connector to match existing style panel
base. Provide quantity of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports. 3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge
steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access. 4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-10 5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning b. Panduit 2.3
OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS A. UTP Outlets/Connectors: 1. Physical Specifications: a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics. b. Shall be modular and snap-in
to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard. c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight
22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection. d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g.
e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors. g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA
polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification. h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified. i. Minimum durability
shall be 1000 connecting cycles. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors 1. Physical Characteristics: a. Shall be SC type. b. Shall terminate
up to 125 micron fiber. c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-11 d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable. 2. Transmission Characteristics:
a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CS type. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket
color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling. B. Copper Cable: 1. Data Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 2. Voice Communication: a. Category
6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 3. Wireless Network - Green 4. Paging - White 5. Security/Access - Indigo C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Backbone Cabling: a. Single Mode - Yellow 2. Horizontal
Cabling: a. Single Mode - X 2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a
minimum, include the following: 1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue
for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-12 B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack.
C. All racks shall have 2RU space horizontal full width cable management, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. D. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal
panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. E. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire
management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation. F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2.6 INNERDUCT A. Innerduct
shall be corrugated HDPE material, plenum rated, flexible, continuous, UV rated with flame/smoke spread in accordance with code and length markings on the outer surface. B. When in
conduit minimum size shall be 3/4", otherwise 1 1/2" minimum. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Maxcell 3. Opti-Com 2.7 LABELING A. General: 1. Labeling system and structure
shall match the Owners existing. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide
hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process. 2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number
and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested. 3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon
completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints. 4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1" high
lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF
200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-13 B. Patch Panel 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number.
C. Outlets 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location. 2. Contractor
shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other locations that do not have a label location. D. Cable 1. Fiber Optic: a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each
termination point indicating building, destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color. b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination
number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc. c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully
visible. 2. Copper a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the building, destination room, rack number, panel number and port number. 2.8 UTP CABLE TESTER
A. Provide one (1) Fluke DSX 5000 tester or approved equal. Provide adapters for specified cables. Turn over to owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cable: 1. Provide a
minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum
quantity of UTP cables (typical). 2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (6 strands) of single-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room
as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 6 strand cables (typical). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL
AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-14 3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits. 4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed
in cable tray. 5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 12 inches throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. elsewhere. 6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are
not acceptable. 7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with
the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring requirements and conduit sizes. 8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards. 9.
The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance
with latest revision of TIA/EIA-569. 11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and these specifications. 12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated
in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet. 13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Terminate backbone
fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends. 2. Terminate horizontal fiber cables in patch panels at the distribution frame and at the telecommunications outlet or other.
3. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations. C. Terminations: 1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative. 2. Use termination kits for
fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-15
3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable. D. Equipment and Devices:
1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and
coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes. 2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in.
of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack. 3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans. E. Raceways:
1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in. 2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be twogang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed. 3. Provide no
greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway. F. Data Network Ground System: 1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called
for in Specification Section 260526. G. Telecommunications Rooms: 1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications
rooms. 2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks. 3.2 TESTING A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end
each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 and 500 MHz for Cat 6A 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing
not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing
shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures.
Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-16 C. Replace any
cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable. D. Test equipment
shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level
III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152. E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall
test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms
of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors
that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained. F. Test Reporting: 1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion
in O&M Manuals and for Owner future use. 2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory
at telecommunications room location. 3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and electronic copy provided to the Owner. 4. The report documentation
for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Project name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date. c. Date and time of the test.
d. Patch panel identification. e. Cable identification. f. Cable type. g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent)
for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters. h. Test pass criteria. i. Cable length. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December
15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM 272100-17 j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth. k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values.
Any failed parameters shall be noted or highlighted. 3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide brief overview of system of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set up configuration
and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions
shall be answered. B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be
issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the
training. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided. D. Provide updated cable schedule and redline/as-built during training
and instruction period 2-3 weeks prior to occupancy. 3.4 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end
system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after
system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 1 SECTION 281500
INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes access control door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors
to the extent indicated. B. Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following for the integrated access control security and site management system: 1. Electrified
and Integrated Access Control Card Key Door Hardware C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames." 3. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 5. Division 26 Section "Electrical" for connections to
electrical power system and for lowvoltage wiring work. 6. Division 27 Section "Communications" for connections to the LAN. 7. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connections
to building fire alarm system. D. References: 1. ANSI A117.1 (1998) - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. IBC - International Building Code 3. NFPA 70 (2002) - National
Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 (1999) - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 (2006) - Life Safety Code. 6. UL 294 - Access Control Systems. 7. UL 1076 - Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units
and Systems. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 2 E. Products installed, but not provided under
this Section include the following. Coordination to remain a requirement of this Section. 1. Security or High Security keyed cylinders, including provisions for temporary construction
keying, for mechanical override at access control locking hardware to be furnished under Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data
sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. System Operational Descriptions:
Complete system operational narratives for the integrated access controlled openings defining the owner's prescribed requirements for the opening functionality. Narratives include,
but are not limited to, the following situations: normal secured/unsecured state of door; authorized access; authorized egress; unauthorized access; unauthorized egress; fire alarm
and loss of power conditions, and interfaces with other building control systems. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified integrated locking hardware and access control firmware, indicating
the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication and control of the access
control system electrified hardware and firmware. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique
access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point)
access control system block wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled
and operated hardware openings. D. Proof of Certification: Upon request provide a copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status
as a qualified and authorized provider of the primary access control components. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each
item comprising the complete access control and site management installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and
telephone number of the supplier/integrator providing the installation and the nearest service representatives for each item of equipment included in the system. The final copies delivered
after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. 1. As-Built Drawings: During system installation, the
Contractor to maintain a separate hard copy set of drawings, elevation diagrams, and wiring diagrams of the access control Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue
for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 3 system to be used for record drawings. This set to be kept up to date by the Contractor with all changes and additions
to the access control system accurately recorded. F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers
Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum of five (5) years of documented experience in providing access control and security systems equipment and software similar
to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. 1. Software and access control systems components to have been previously and
thoroughly tested together with proven installations similar in size and functionality to the design requirements indicated for this Project. B. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier/Dealers,
verifiably authorized and in good standing with the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum of three (3) years of experience supplying integrated access control systems similar
in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a proven record of successful inservice performance. 1. ASSA ABLOY
access control products are required to be supplied only through designated “Authorized Channel Partners.” a. List Qualified ACP Companies C. System Integrator Qualifications: Systems
Integrators, verifiably factory trained and certified by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience installing complete integrated access
control systems similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a proven record of successful in-service performance.
Qualifications include, but are not necessarily limited, to the following: 1. References: Provide a list of references for similar projects including contact name, phone number, name
and type of project. 2. Professional Staffing: Firms to have a dedicated access control systems integration department with full time, experienced professionals on staff experienced
in providing on site consulting services for both electrified door hardware and integrated access control systems installations. 3. Factory Training: Installation and service technicians
are to be competent factory trained and certified personnel capable of maintaining the system. 4. Service Center: Firms to have a service center capable of providing training, in-stock
parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with 24-hour/7-days a week maximum response time. D. Installer Qualifications: Certified technicians, verifiably authorized
with the primary product manufacturers for installation of IP-Enabled, Wireless, and Power-over-Ethernet Access Control products in accordance with documented instructions and NFPA
80. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 4 1. ASSA ABLOY access control products are required to
be installed only through designated "Preferred Installers" with Intertek Qualified Hardware Installer certification. 2. Installation technicians are authorized by Intertek to apply
supplemental serialized labels to Warnock-Hersey fire-rated openings modified after access control hardware has been installed. E. Source Limitations: Obtain the access control door
hardware, system firmware and application software specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier/integrator unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications
or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide integrated access control door hardware from the same
manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines
as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and
accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply
with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1. 3. Comply with NFPA
101 "Life Safety Code" for doors in a means of egress. 4. Comply with NFPA 80 "Fire Doors and Windows" for fire labeled opening assemblies. 5. The installed access control system shall
conform to all local jurisdiction requirements. G. Keying Conference: Reference Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier/Dealer, Systems Integrator, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures
for receiving, handling, and installing the access control system hardware. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedules. 1. Inspect and discuss Division 26 electrical roughing-in and similar preparatory work performed by other trades.
2. Review and verify sequence of operation descriptions for each unique access controlled opening. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software
or related accessories at Project site without prior authorization. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES
281500 - 5 1. Access control firmware and software: Where approved and directed, inventory upon receipt and store electronic access control equipment in a secure, temperature and humidity
controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Access Control Door Schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver permanent keys, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via
registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner established at the “Pre-Submittal Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate quantity and arrangement
of assemblies with ceiling space configuration and with components occupying ceiling space, including structural members, pipes, air-distribution components, raceways, cable trays,
recessed lighting fixtures, and other items. B. Access Control System Electrical Coordination: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware, and related
access control equipment, with required connections to source power junction boxes, power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware and fire alarm system. 1. Door Hardware Interface:
The card key access control system to interface and be connected to electronic door control hardware (electromechanical locks, electric strikes, magnetic locks, door position switches,
other monitoring contacts, and related auxiliary control devices) as described under Division 8 "Door Hardware". Coordinate the installation and configuration of specified door hardware
being monitored or controlled with the controls, software and access control hardware specified in this Section. C. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates
for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing electrified door hardware and access control system components. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing access control system hardware to comply with indicated requirements. D. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division
08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified,
monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special
warranties specified in this Article will not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to, and run concurrent
with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of the installed access control system hardware and software that fails in materials Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 6 or workmanship, including all related parts and labor, within specified warranty period after final testing and acceptance by the Owner. Failures
include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of
metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year
from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods (Electrified Access Control Door Hardware): 1. Two years for Electrified, Wiegand Output,
and IP-Enabled Access Control Door Hardware. E. Maintenance Support and Extended Service Agreement: Submit for Owner’s consideration an optional extended Service Agreement for the installed
access control system, including support for software related issues. The extended Service Agreement is considered elective and is without manufacturer's requirement stipulating mandatory
coverage for owner and/or vendor system support. 1. A published copy of this agreement to be included with the submittal package 2. Support for the installed access control system components
is provided through the vendor under a 24 hour technical assistance program. 3. Access control and management system components are to be available on a one-day turn around time frame
from the manufacturer. 4. Primary systems manufacturer to offer and provide remote modem or internet access for direct factory support to the vendor. The factory level support to include
diagnostics and troubleshooting support on systems related issues at no additional cost to the owner. F. Access Control Software Upgrades: Version upgrades and "fix" releases to the
access control system software are available at no extra charge as long as the version of software provided under this specification remains the current manufacturer’s version or for
up to (2) years after a new version release. 1. Major access control software revisions that provide new functionality to the product provided free of charge for up to one (1) year
from the date of substantial completion. 2. Access control system software is to be upgradable as may be required or as necessary, to expand and manage the owner’s site or sites. Upgrades
are to be offered at a published flat fee for the primary system software, with single license modules included in the primary fee structure. System upgrades offered at a costing structure
based upon the original number of licensed modules issued, or on those to be purchased at a future date, are not allowed. 3. As part of the submittal package, provide a list of available
software upgrades and/or expansions modules. List to identify related costs for upgrades, or expansions to the original system, up to the next qualifying operational level. Rhodes Hall
5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 7 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish
a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of the installed access control
system hardware and components. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months
full maintenance by skilled employees of the Systems Integrator. Include repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 1.9 SCOPE OF WORK A. On-Line Electronic Access Control System:
Furnish and install at the indicated locations the specified electrified and integrated door hardware and access control firmware and software for a completely operational access control
and security site management system. System includes, but is not necessarily limited, to the following: 1. Electrified integrated card reader locks and exit hardware, permanent and
temporary override cylinders, network control processors, reader controller panels, I/O monitor/control interfaces, door position switches, remote card readers, keypads, and display
terminals, access cards and credentials, system application software, special tools, operating manuals, and required cabling and accessories as detailed below and listed in the Access
Control Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. a. Provide the appropriate number of reader controller panels and I/O monitoring/control expansion interfaces as needed to handle the number
of card readers, locking devices, door status devices, and identified alarm inputs specified in this section, and as shown on the security drawings. b. Provide manufacturer approved
integrated card reader locks, exit hardware, and remote mounted card readers, keypads, and display terminals that are functionally compatible with the specified access control equipment
interfaces. 2. Access control system equipment to be installed in an enclosure box compatible with the specified components. This enclosure to include, but is not necessarily limited
to, the network control processor, I/O monitor/control interface panels, power supplies, terminal strips, wire ducts, keyed lock cylinder, integrated outlet for A/C power, and standoffs.
a. Enclosure box to be located in the designated IT/Telecom room(s) with connection to local area network for communication back to the central server host. 3. Owner to provide the
following: a. Central server host computer, client workstations, and hardware peripherals to be from an approved, major line computer manufacturer. Specific information detailing compliance
with system requirements to be included in the project submittal package as specified. b. Owner will be responsible for ensuring that each computer hardware component includes the required
interfaces, expansion boards, and peripherals that will be Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 -
8 necessary to allow the system to operate as described within this specification and as indicated on the drawings. c. Power Sourcing and Network Switches: Quantity as required to
accommodate installed access control (and video surveillance) devices. d. Network Control Processor Connections: 1) LAN/Ethernet communication ports (jacks) and network interface cards
as needed, CAT5e cabling from network router/switch to network control processor, outlet and cover plates and/or patch cables required for network connection within each designated
IT/Telecom room. 2) Required static IP addresses. 4. Power Supplies, including battery back up and separately fused surge protection, required for the electrified door hardware and
access control equipment. 5. Installation, final configuration and commissioning of electrified door and access control system hardware, communication firmware, power supplies and related
accessories. 6. System application software including installation, programming, and end user training of the access control system demonstrating operating, repair, and maintenance
procedures. Include no fewer than 8 hours of on-site central server training for designated personnel (facilities maintenance, security, IT, administration) by a factory certified representative.
7. Provide manufacturer required power controllers, interface boards, and programming that may be required for approved electric latch retraction exit devices supplied under Division
08 Section "Door Hardware." 8. Electrical contractor, Division 26, to provide the following: a. Source power wiring (120VAC) as required for the electrified locking and access control
hardware, equipment, accessories and power supplies. This includes quad outlets as required on a dedicated circuit in the designated IT/Telecom room(s) and the related conduit, stub-in,
junction boxes and connectors required for the source power delivery and connections. b. Provide required conduit, stub-in, junction and back boxes for both the electrified locking
hardware and access control equipment at each of the access controlled or monitored openings per plan drawings and specs. Supply and install conduit between each of the aforementioned
devices and between the electrical junction boxes, power supplies and access control equipment located on or above the door opening. 1) At wall mounted remote readers, provide conduit
on the secured side of the door, 36" from the finish floor and 6" from the edge of the frame, to the related power supplies and access control equipment. 2) At electrical hardware power
transfers provide conduit on the secured side of the opening from the power transfer, thru-wire hinge, or serviceable panel location on the frame jamb to the related power supplies
and access control equipment. c. Electrical Contractor to provide all 120VAC cabling connections and terminations from the electrical junction boxes to these electrical devices. 9.
Access Control System Integrator to provide the following: Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 -
9 a. Low voltage wiring (12/24VDC) and communication cabling (RS-232/RS-485) from network control processors to reader controllers, I/O monitor/control interface panels, electrified
and integrated locking hardware, remote card readers, keypads, or display terminals, monitoring and signaling switches, and power supplies. Work includes related connectors, final terminations,
and hook-ups required for a complete and functional access controlled opening in accordance with applicable codes and specified system operational narratives. 10. Elevator Contractor
to provide the following: a. Interface or landing of interface cable onto the elevator call button will be performed by a certified elevator contractor. b. Coordinate with access control
systems integrator provisions for a card reader with output allowing the elevator call button to be activated. A validated card read will be required for activation. 11. Full and seamless
integration of the site intrusion alarm service if applicable, with the installed site access control system software. 12. Final connections to fire alarm system, if required, by electrical
and fire alarm system contractors. 13. Provide permits, submittals and approvals required by the authority having jurisdiction, prior to commencing with work. 14. Provide manufacturer
required power controllers, interface boards, and programming that may be required for approved electric latch retraction exit devices supplied under Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
15. Electrical contractor (Division 26) to provide the following: a. Provide required conduit, stub-in, junction and back boxes for both the electrified locking hardware and access
control equipment at each of the access controlled or monitored openings per plan drawings and specs. Supply and install conduit between each of the aforementioned devices and between
the electrical junction boxes, power supplies and access control equipment located on or above the door opening. 1) At off-line remote readers, provide conduit on the secured side
of the door, 36" from the finish floor and 6" from the edge of the frame, to the related power supplies and access control equipment. 2) At electrified hardware power transfers provide
conduit on the secured side of the opening from the power transfer, thru-wire hinge, or serviceable panel location on the frame jamb to the related power supplies and access control
equipment. b. Electrical Contractor to provide all 120VAC cabling connections and terminations from the electrical junction boxes to these electrical devices. 16. Access Control System
Supplier to provide the following: a. Low voltage wiring (12/24VDC) for the electrified locking hardware, remote card readers, monitoring and signaling switches, and power supplies.
Work includes related connectors, final terminations and hook-ups required for a complete and functional access controlled opening in accordance with applicable codes and specified
system operational narratives. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 10 17. Typical System Requirements
(Owner Provided): Central server host computer, client workstations, and hardware peripherals to be from an approved, major line computer manufacturer. Specific information detailing
compliance with system requirements to be included in the project submittal package as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTEGRATED WIEGAND ACCESS CONTROL, MULTI-CLASS READERS A. Integrated
Wiegand Output Multi-Class Exit Hardware: Wiegand output ANSI 156.3 Grade 1 rim, mortise, and vertical rod exit device hardware with integrated proximity card reader, latchbolt and
touchbar monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling, in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle exit trim with 3/4" throw latch bolt.
U.L listed and labeled for either panic or "fire exit hardware" for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open
architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Inside push bar (request-toexit) signaling
and door position (open/closed status) monitoring (via separately connected DPS). 2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID,
Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader. 24VDC required
for solenoid operated exit trim. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Installation requires only one cable run from the exit hardware to the access control panel without requirements
for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 5. Competitor Alternates Allowed Option: Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board
or module where required for Wiegand output protocol. 6. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin (RU) – ED5000 SE-LP10 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 80 Series. 2.2 CABLES AND
WIRING A. Comply with Division 27 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." B. Data Line Supervision: System to include alarm initiation capability in response
to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines. C. Install appropriate number of conductor pairs, in the wire gage (AWG) recommended by manufacturer, corresponding
to the electronic locking functions specified, amperage drawn and distances covered between the power supplies, power transfer devices, electrified hardware and access control equipment.
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 11 2.3 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE FINISHES A. Standard: Comply
with BHMA A156.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary protective coverings before shipping. C. Where specified, finishes on integrated
card key locksets or exit hardware to incorporate an FDA recognized antimicrobial coating (i.e., MicroShield™) listed for use on equipment as a suppressant to the growth and spread
of a broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish as specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine
scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other
conditions affecting performance of the installed access control system. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified
and integrated access control door hardware installation. C. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected
devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation. D. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the specifications, drawings and
scheduled access controlled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Doors and frames at scheduled access controlled
openings to be properly prepared to receive specified electrified and access control hardware and connections without additional in-field modifications. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install
each item of electronic integrated door hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. B. Mounting Heights:
Mount electronic integrated door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 12 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended
Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where
indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." C. Boxed Power Supplies: Verify locations. 1. Configuration:
Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with access control hardware and equipment. D. Final connect the system control switches (integrated card
key locking hardware, remote readers, keypads, display terminals, biometrics), and monitoring, and signaling equipment to the related Controller devices at each opening to properly
operate the electrified door and access control hardware according to system operational narratives. E. Retrofitting: Install each door hardware and access control item to comply with
manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished
in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. F. System Application Software: Install, and test application(s) software and databases for the complete and proper
operation of systems involved. Assign software license(s) to Owner. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check each operating item of integrated access control door hardware, and each door opening
to ensure proper secured operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces
soiled by access control system installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure access
control door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage an authorized systems manufacturer representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain electronic integrated door hardware and the access control system. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 Issue for Bid INTEGRATED
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - 13 3.7 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE SETS A. The access control system hardware sets listed below represent the design intent and direction of the
owner, architect, and security consultant (as applicable). They are intended as a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed opening schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting,
and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled
with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct
option for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. C. Refer
to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware sets. END OF SECTION Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
- EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-1 SECTION 283103 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services
to perform operations required for the expansion of the existing fire alarm system and related Work required in these Contract Documents. B. Provide system as approved by local Fire
Marshal and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). System materials and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All
methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's
Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon
the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested
at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 72, (National
Fire Alarm Code), AHS Installer shall be certified in the State of New York for fire alarm installation. state codes, local codes, and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, NFPA, UL and IEEE Standards. D. Contractor
shall be a licensed fire alarm installer in the State of New York. E. Items specified for the fire alarm are to match the existing system and to maintain one fire alarm system in the
facility. No other makes will be specified. 1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The existing FCI72C with 108 existing Class A Zones fire alarm panel shall have its capabilities extended to
provide coverage for renovation of the 5th floor. The zones of the existing panel are to be determined during a pre-test to confirm capacities. B. The following work is proposed: 1.
Pre-test of the system to confirm there is adequate capacities on the circuits in the area of work, prior to installing new devices. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-2 2. Provide smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual stations, magnetic door holders in the
building. Provide the additional modules required to the existing fire alarm control panel. 3. Provide audio-visual and visual only devices in the existing building utilizing existing
strobe circuits to support additional devices. 4. Provide control modules for magnetic door holders. 5. Refer to Appendix A for operation/sequence of matrix. C. Before any work is
accomplished on the existing system, a thorough testing shall be done on the system to conform to NFPA 72. A test report shall be completed and submitted to the engineers for review.
Once the preliminary testing is found to be acceptable, work can proceed on the existing system. An additional test will be performed after the work is complete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.
Provide a complete system submittal prior to ordering of equipment and installation including but not limited to: 1. Complete equipment list, including quantities. 2. Catalog descriptive
literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram
showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes. 4. Floor plan indicating equipment
and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting, control circuiting and any system applicable building
characteristics (ceiling heights, structural members impeding detection, etc). Contact the Engineer for an electronic copy of the project floor plans. Engineer logo shall be included
in final drawing. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7. Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations
indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device, backup period and recommended battery capacity (AH). Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-3 b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour
rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. 8. Complete console enclosure
and equipment configuration. 9. Contractor shall submit copies of the installation firms license for approval and post a copy of license on the premises where the work is being performed.
a. Work involving installation of Fire Alarm system components shall be performed by firms currently licensed by the NYS department of State Division of Licensing Services. The supervising
personnel shall be NICET level 2 certified. 10. Test reports as called for. 11. Copies of the firm alarm installation firm's current license. The contractor shall also post a copy
of the license on the premises where work is being performed. B. If required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) provide a submission of all requested information for review
and comment by the AHJ. All AHJ comments shall be incorporated and resubmitted until approved. C. Test reports at the completion of the project. Testing shall be of all system devices,
equipment, circuits, features and functions. D. Provide submittal to Dan Philips at Cornell EH&S, Mark Scholeno at Cornell Facilities Engineering and Ithaca Fire Department for review
and comment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The existing system does not have capabilities for expansion, must utilize existing zones
throughout the floor. 2.2 MANUAL STATIONS A. Semi-flush non-coded type. Break glass, "pull-down" type, double action. Indoor construction. Bright red finish. Key lock for test
and reset. B. Unless directly connected to a central station alarm service, municipal alarm system or local manned fire alarm dispatch station, a clearly legible sign shall be posted
above each manual station stating: "LOCAL ALARM ONLY - NOT CONNECTED TO FIRE DEPARTMENT - CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT BY TELEPHONE." Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E
REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-4 2.3 AUTOMATIC THERMAL DETECTORS A. Low profile, white colored, surface mounted on flush box. Equip
with mounting plate. Replaceable fixed temperature elements; visual indicator for tripped mode. Provide combination rate-of-rise (15°F per minute) fixed temperature 135°F, fixed temperature
135°F, or fixed temperature 200°F as shown on the Drawings. 2.4 PHOTO-OBSCURATION SMOKE DETECTORS A. Detectors shall operate on the photoelectronic principle. Provide detectors with
an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135°F. Upon activation, the detector shall operate its associated alarm circuit and illuminate the integral alarm indicator light.
The alarm indicator light shall not extinguish until the Fire Alarm Control Panel has been reset. The detector shall contain a solid state LED and a high speed light sensing photodiode
within the smoke sensing chamber. The photodiode shall accelerate the LED light burst rate when smoke enters the chamber. An alarm shall be activated when several consecutive pulses
verify the existence of smoke. Reset shall be accomplished at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Provide lock-in feature. Provide a calibrated test feature capable of simulating a maximum
acceptable amount of smoke for alarm. Detectors shall operate from a nominal 10 to 30 volt DC power supply. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly.
Provide backbox suitable for surface mounting where required. Detector shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. 2.5 LIGHT UNIT A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts
maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall
be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization and this
includes new and existing devices being synchronized. Protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Rated life shall be a minimum
500 hours of continuous operation. Indoor construction. Flush single gang box, wall or ceiling mounted as noted on the drawings. Shall be white in color. 2.6 COMBINATION SPEAKER-LIGHT
UNITS A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela
in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units
within building shall flash in synchronization and this includes new and existing devices being synchronized.. Single unit combination speaker and light, with protruding pyramid shaped
lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Horn shall be rated 100 dB at 10 ft. Surface or flush box as noted on the drawings. Indoor construction. Shall
be white in color. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of Work. Fire alarm
installation shall be directed by a person who possesses a state license for installation of fire alarm systems. All equipment and components shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. B. System junction boxes and surface mounted device boxes shall be painted red. C. Provide all wiring to sprinkler flow switches, pressure switches,
and alarm check valves, installed by others. Maintain supervisory circuitry to the switches. Use liquidtight conduit for the last 2 ft. - 0 in. of raceway at the switch. D. Provide
all wiring to post indicator valves, OS&Y valves and dry pipe sprinkler system maintenance air pressure switches, provided by others. Wire into the supervisory alarm portion of the
fire alarm system. E. Provide all wiring to the smoke dampers installed by others. Provide an addressable control module for each. Wire to the damper junction box with flexible conduit
and wire; provide box or boxes as required. Install according to NEC. Smoke dampers shall close when its associated smoke duct detector is in alarm, upon direction from the FACP or
if the associated fan unit is not operating, including manual shutoff of power. F. Provide all power supplies and wiring to smoke relief hatches and fire barriers provided by others.
Smoke relief hatch or fire barrier shall operate only when its associated smoke detector is in alarm. G. Provide all wiring to duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be
mounted on the ventilating ductwork by others. All mounting arrangements, holes cut into ductwork, sealing of openings along with ceiling and access doors for the duct type detectors
shall be provided by others. Provide duct detectors along with sampling tubes with end caps. Sequence smoke damper operation thirty seconds after its associated fan has been shut
down. Duct detector shall report as supervisory alarm at FACP. H. Provide all wiring required for fan shutdown. Wire from the addressable control module for each fan to be shut down
and provide wiring from the module to the fan control unit (starter, adjustable speed drive, etc). Dry contact shall be wired ahead of all control functions for starters. Provide
intermediate relay for control circuits beyond the rating of the control module. I. Provide all wiring for remote test station and status annunciation for a smoke damper. J. Install
all door holders in accordance with installation detail on the drawings and coordinate with the General Construction trade. Connect door holders to nearest 120 volt corridor receptacle
circuit. K. Provide all elevator capture control wiring. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-6 L. Elevator machine room and shaft heat detectors shall be mounted within two feet of the
sprinkler head where applicable. M. Detection and initiating equipment shall be listed by NRTL and approved by FM. N. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special box
furnished by fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth contour and have no protrusions. O. Where detectors are installed on wood or masonry surfaces,
attach brackets directly to the surface with tamperproof fasteners. Where detectors are installed on suspended ceilings, provide additional supports in the ceiling, such as channel
support system, angle iron or additional runner bars. Fasten the additional supports rigidly to the ceiling runner bar system. Attach bracket to the supports with tamperproof fasteners.
Install metal spacers between the bracket and supports so that the ceiling tiles will not be a part of the support system. P. Install wall mounted audio/visual signal devices at 80
in. AFF to bottom. Where ceiling types are called for, verify ceiling type and mounting height in the field. Provide pendant-mounted devices as required for specified mounting height.
Q. An auxiliary fire alarm relay used to control an emergency control device that provides control functions described in this specification shall be located within 3 ft. of the emergency
control device and all wiring shall be supervised. R. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed
by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. S. Provide all wiring at the EP switch. Wire to the EP switch with flexible conduit and wire; provide
box or boxes if required. Install according to NEC. Smoke dampers shall operate only when its associated duct smoke duct detector is in alarm. T. Provide all power supplies and wiring
to smoke relief hatched and fire barriers. Smoke relief hatch or fire barrier shall operate only when its associated smoke detector is in alarm. U. All wiring shall conform to N.E.C.
Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National Fire Alarm Code". V. Label all fire alarm devices and system components (major equipment, conduit, junction boxes and cabling) according
to the Cornell Standard 16710 and 283100. 3.2 SYSTEM CIRCUITING A. All wiring shall conform to the NEC, and to NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code. B. Install all wiring in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations taking into account loading, intended location, circuit length, spare capacity and voltage drop. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-7 C. All wiring shall be copper and installed in a dedicated/segregated red EMT conduit system.
D. Power circuits: 1. Provide the required quantity of 20 ampere, 120 volt circuits to the system with a minimum of one for the FACP. E. Provide minimum #18 AWG twisted shielded pair
for addressable signal line circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be#14AWG minimum. F. Addressable signal line circuits shall be NFPA 72 2010 Class A (redundant, single open
operation). G. Notification appliance circuits shall be NFPA 72 - 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation). H. Provide a 24VDC power circuit, #16 twisted pair minimum, with each
initiation addressable circuit for the entire length. I. Notification circuits shall be segregated as indicated on the drawings and by individual floors as a minimum. Circuits shall
also be dedicated to audible or visual appliances but not both. 3.3 PROGRAMMING A. Include in bid the cost to cover all system programming, including items particular to this project
(such as custom zone descriptions, time delay settings, sensitivity settings, etc.) such that entire system is 100% complete and operating to the Owner's satisfaction. Coordinate all
system programming with the Owner. Also, provide programming of the system a minimum of once during the warranty period to provide changes requested by the Owner. 3.4 SPARE EQUIPMENT
A. Provide the following spare equipment to the Owner. Deliver the equipment to the Owner designated location on the project site in original packaging. B. Equipment to include:
1. Smoke detectors: 5% of each type used with a minimum of five. 2. Heat detectors: 5% of each type used with a minimum of five. 3. Addressable control modules: 2% of each type
used with a minimum of two. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-8 3.5 TESTING
AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire alarm system shall be fully tested after the installation is complete. Testing shall include all devices, FACP, annunciator panel, other panels,
features and functions. Testing shall be witnessed by the owners representative and be in accordance with the NFPA and herein. Provide a testing report to the authority having jurisdiction
and the Engineer as a submittal. B. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation
of the system. Provide up to three programming modifications. C. Provide three sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Owner's Representative. D. Provide a copy
of the system programming to the Owner on a CD/DVD disk or flash drive. E. Provide to the Owner system Operation Manuals as specified, that shall include as a minimum. 1. Bill of
Material. 2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other
components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes.
4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting and control circuiting.
Contact the Engineer for a copy of the project floor plans. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7.
Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device and recommended battery capacity (AH). b. Voltage
drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated
voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED
SYSTEM 283103-9 8. Instruction report starting when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by Owner's Representative. 9. A written test report from an authorized representative
of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested and approved. 10. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72. 11. A two year
warranty in accordance with the Basic Requirements of these Specifications shall be provided for this system. 12. All devices shall be pre-tested by the contractor and distributor
prior to scheduling final acceptance test with AHJ and EH&S. 13. Final test to be done with AHJ and EH&S present. 3.6 FIRE / SMOKE DAMPER OPERATION A. Installed Smoke Detection Devices
and Smoke Dampers 1. Smoke dampers are installed at each duct/smoke barrier penetration. 2. Every smoke damper has a local duct smoke detector. 3. Every smoke damper has a local remote
test station and status annunciation. 4. Every duct smoke detector is addressable and is connected to the building fire alarm system. 5. The building project area is provided with addressable
area smoke detectors. B. Fire Alarm Activation of Smoke Dampers 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: a. Upon activation of any duct smoke detector, an addressable signal is sent to the building
fire alarm system and the smoke damper associated with duct smoke detector is closed. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts
down both the supply and return fans or the exhaust fan, associated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives
being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-10 C. Non-Fire Alarm System Activation of Smoke Dampers (These activations do not cause for
a building fire condition to be annunciated) 1. Safety Device Activation a. Upon activation of either the low-limit switch (freeze-stat) or the supply duct high static pressure switch,
both the supply and return fans are deenergized via hardwiring of the low limit switch in the fan starter circuits. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that
is installed at the variable frequency drive of the supply and return fans then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system
has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system
on a 30 second delay. 2. BMS (Building Management System) Component Fault a. Upon activation of any of the following BMS component faults, the supply and return fans, or exhaust fan
are de-energized via BMS. 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return
air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor
starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system
has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct
system on a 30 second delay. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-11 3. EMCS Operator
Activation: a. When the EMCS system operator overrides the operational status of the air handling system and shuts down the supply, return, or exhaust fans. b. The shutdown of the supply,
return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown,
the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current
sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that
duct system on a 30 second delay. 4. Maintenance Operator Activation: a. When a building maintenance staff member manually shuts off the supply, return or exhaust fan at the starter
disconnect switch, the supply, return or exhaust fans are shutdown. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply
fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system
point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable
signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter
being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15,
2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-12 D. Smoke Damper Testing - M/E Engineering offers the following suggestions for a smoke damper
testing protocol. The actual final protocol needs to be authored and approved by all Cornell parties and agencies of interest. 1. Duct Smoke Detector (Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under
controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager and Cornell Fire and Safety, apply smoke to any duct smoke detector in the ductwork of any air handling systems
which serve the project area. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return, or exhaust fans associated
with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor
starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system
has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers
associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 2. Safety Device Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition) a. Under
controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually trip the low limit switch (freeze-stat) associated with any air handling system in the project area.
b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or
exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply,
return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm
damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
283103-13 3. BMS Component Interlock or Fault: a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually cause for a fault condition to occur in
any of the following BMS components: 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault
6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive,
or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling
system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke
dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door 4. EMCS Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition):
a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually override the operational status of any air handling system via laptop, PC or remote access
to EMCS Webcontrol and shutdown the associated air handing system. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply
fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system
point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable
signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. Rhodes Hall 5th Floor Renovation December 15, 2020 M/E REF 200157 Issue for Bid
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-14 d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm
system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 5. Maintenance Operator
Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually shut off any air handling system within the project
area. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically.
If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency
drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air
handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close
all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. APPENDIX A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION/SEQUENCE
MATRIX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM 283103-15 WARNING - THIS IS NOT SET UP FOR SMOKE EVAC SYSTEMS; HIGH RISES NOT APPLICABLE ON ALL PROJECTS.
System Outputs THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK